JP7439328B1 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to smoothly play a game. A gaming machine includes a predetermined board and a plurality of components mounted on the surface of the predetermined board, and the plurality of components include LEDLs1, LEDLs2, and resistor Rs1. LEDLs2 and resistor Rs1 have component bodies and lead wires, and among LEDLs1, LEDLs2, and resistor Rs1, the main bodies of LEDLs1 and LEDLs2 are mounted in a state floating from the surface of the board by the lead wires, and LEDLs1 is tilted and the resistor When contacting Rs1, the lead wire of LEDLs1 does not contact the lead wire of resistor Rs1, but the main body of LEDLs1 contacts the main body of resistor Rs1. [Selection diagram] Figure 30

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines include pachinko gaming machines, slot machines (spinning drum gaming machines), arranged ball gaming machines, and jumping ball gaming machines. There is a pachinko machine like this.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-179137

In conventional gaming machines, various efforts have been made to reduce malfunctions of devices installed on the gaming machine frame or the gaming board so that players can play games smoothly. There is room for improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows players to play games smoothly.

Reels with multiple symbols on them,
Equipped with a back lamp unit,
The reel includes a reel frame and a band-shaped reel tape attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel frame,
The reel tape has a plurality of rectangular symbol display areas divided in the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the reel frame, and one symbol is drawn in each symbol display area,
The back lamp unit includes a back lamp house and a light source mounting board,
In the light source mounting board, a light source that irradiates light onto a pattern is mounted on a component mounting surface of the light source mounting board, and the component mounting surface faces the inner peripheral surface of the reel tape and is mounted on the back side of the back lamp house. It is installed in
The back lamp house is
an opening facing the inner peripheral surface of the reel tape that exposes the predetermined light source mounted on the component mounting surface of the light source mounting board; and at least a portion of the component mounting surface by an area other than the opening. a predetermined light source exposed surface portion provided with a concealing portion ;
at least a predetermined shade portion that collects light emitted from the light source onto the pattern display area ;
A predetermined partition portion is formed by the predetermined shade portion and a specific shade portion different from the predetermined shade portion,
At least one of the plurality of patterns is provided with a light-transmitting pattern in which a predetermined light-transmitting area that easily transmits the light from the light source is provided. A pattern in which a predetermined light transmission area is provided that easily transmits light is called a light transmission pattern) ,
It is possible to recognize that the color of the predetermined light source exposed surface portion visually recognized through the predetermined light transmitting area of the light transmitting pattern is different from the color of the predetermined light source exposed surface portion,
It is possible to recognize that the color of the predetermined light source exposed surface portion visually recognized through the predetermined light-transmitting area of the light-transmitting pattern is different from the color of the area where no pattern is drawn on the reel tape. can be,
A gaming machine characterized in that the thickness of the predetermined partition portion is narrower than the narrowest symbol interval among the symbol intervals of the plurality of symbols drawn on the reel tape.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible for a player to smoothly play a game.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the above-mentioned slot machine. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the internal structure of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a view of the front door of the slot machine seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a state in which the main control device is attached inside the casing of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main control device of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main control device of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the main control device of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the case body of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a front view of the board case attachment mechanism in the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a board case attachment mechanism in the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a front view of the main control board in the slot machine. It is a front view showing a modification of the main control board in the slot machine. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a plurality of types of electric elements mounted in a predetermined area on the surface of another main control board in the slot machine, viewed from the board surface side. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing lead wires of a plurality of types of electric elements mounted in the predetermined area of the another main control board as viewed from the back side of the board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a plurality of types of electric elements mounted in another predetermined area on the surface of the another main control board, as seen from the front surface of the board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing lead wires of a plurality of types of electric elements mounted in the other predetermined area of the back surface of the another main control board, viewed from the back surface side of the board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the distance between conductive layers of the above-mentioned another main control board and the thickness of game medals. It is a figure which shows the state where the game medal is in contact with the edge part of said another main control board. It is a figure which shows the state where the pachinko ball is in contact with the edge part of said another main control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the protruding heights of lead wires of a plurality of types of electronic components mounted on the above-mentioned another main control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing how the other predetermined area of the another main control board looks when viewed from the front. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing how the other predetermined area of the another main control board looks when viewed with the head tilted to the side. It is a figure which shows the example of the aspect of the component name printed on the surface part of said another main control board. It is a figure which shows the aspect example of the component frame line printed on the surface part of said another main control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the heights of an information display lamp and an LED element mounted on the surface portion of the above-mentioned another main control board. FIG. 3 is a front view of the sub-control board in the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a front view of the power supply board in the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a plurality of types of electric elements mounted on a sub-control board and a power supply board in the slot machine, viewed from the front surface side and the side surface of the board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a plurality of types of electric elements mounted on a sub-control board and a power supply board in the slot machine, viewed from the front surface side and the side surface of the board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a plurality of types of electric elements mounted on a sub-control board and a power supply board in the slot machine, viewed from the front surface side and the side surface of the board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a plurality of types of electric elements mounted on a sub-control board and a power supply board in the slot machine, viewed from the front surface side and the side surface of the board. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a reel unit in the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a reel module in the slot machine. It is a side view of the reel module in the said slot machine. It is a perspective view and a front view of the back lamp unit in the said reel module. It is a perspective view and a front view which show the modification of the back lamp unit in the said reel module. It is an exploded perspective view of the reel in the above-mentioned slot machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram regarding symbols displayed on reel tapes constituting reels in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a side view showing the slot machine installed in an island facility. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram regarding the paths of signals exchanged between the main control board and various devices in the slot machine. It is a front view of the Pachinko game machine of 2nd embodiment. It is a back view of the above-mentioned Pachinko game machine. It is a control block diagram of the above-mentioned Pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of a main control board and an effect control board of the above-mentioned Pachinko game machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol validity lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. It is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 1 of special symbols. It is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 2 of special symbols. It is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 3 of special symbols. It is a schematic diagram which shows the pattern attribute of a decorative pattern. It is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the jackpot type, the jackpot symbol combination of decorative symbols, and the jackpot performance pattern. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of super longevity jackpot performance. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of Kotobuki jackpot A performance. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of Kotobuki jackpot B performance. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the Ki Jackpot A performance. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the joy jackpot B performance. It is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen during a round game. FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of a winning-related performance. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an over winning presentation. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a production of a big winning opening count-up production. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a bonus winning performance. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a production of a general prize winning hole count-up production. It is a time chart for explaining the priority of the big winning opening count-up effect. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating an emphasis effect. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating error types of gaming machines. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not an over winning effect is executed at the end of the jackpot. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not a bonus winning effect is executed at the end of the jackpot. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over winning effect and the general winning effect. It is a time chart showing the relationship between a gaming state in which a game start preparation performance is executed and a gaming state in which an over winning performance and a bonus winning performance are executed. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a volume adjustment screen. It is a time chart for explaining the overlapping execution of the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance. This is a time chart when over winnings and bonus winnings each occur multiple times within a predetermined period. It is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the general winning hole. It is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the big prize opening. 3 is a flowchart showing main control side main processing. 78 is a flowchart showing control processing following FIG. 77 of the main control side main processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing winning monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows starting port monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start monitoring processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol control processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol control general-purpose processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop symbol display processing. It is a flowchart which shows special electric accessory control processing. 89 is a flowchart showing a control process following FIG. 89 of the special electric accessory control process. 3 is a flowchart showing reset start processing. It is a flowchart showing main processing on the production control side. 3 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content determination process of a prize-winning performance. It is a flowchart which shows production control command reception interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing image control command transmission interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows typically the special symbol validity lottery table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol jackpot symbol table of the third embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state and production mode of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table of a third embodiment. It is a comparison table of the variation time of special symbols of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram provided for explanation of the normal symbol lottery of the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram for explaining simultaneous fluctuation processing (fluctuation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the third embodiment; It is a front view of the Pachinko game machine concerning the modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view which shows the main control display apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a presentation of the emphasis presentation of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the emphasis effect pattern table of 4th embodiment. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of emphasis production, special effect display, and output of specific sound effect during execution of the jackpot game of the fourth embodiment. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the emphasis performance and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration of the fourth embodiment. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the emphasis effect, the light emission effect, and the accessory effect of the fourth embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the changing accessory effect of the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the jackpot accessory effect of the fourth embodiment. (A) is a time chart when the execution of the emphasis effect of the fourth embodiment is limited, and (B) is a time chart when the execution of the over winning effect is limited according to the fourth embodiment. It is a time chart when a power failure occurs during execution of jackpot type display of the fourth embodiment. 12 is a time chart when a power failure occurs during execution of round display according to the fourth embodiment. It is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of a gaming machine of a fifth embodiment. It is a functional block diagram of a main control board and an effect control board of a 5th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram showing a power-on transition mode control means and a performance information management means according to the fifth embodiment. It is a front view showing the main control board unit of a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the performance display monitor of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing basic game specifications of a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol lottery table of 5th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table of the fifth embodiment, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between operations at power-on and transition mode in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an example of displaying setting values on the performance display monitor of the fifth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the content of notification during the setting change mode of the fifth embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing the content of notification during the setting confirmation mode of the fifth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the storage area of the RAM of the main control board of the fifth embodiment, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the performance information storage area of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing an example of displaying base values of each section according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display content displayed on the identification segment and the ratio segment of 5th Embodiment for every management area (measurement area). It is a time chart when the first hit occurs in the first section A when the power is turned on in the fifth embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the gaming state at the time of power-off recovery in the fifth embodiment is the special gaming state, and (B) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the gaming state at the time of power-off recovery in the fifth embodiment is normal. It is a time chart showing an initial display period when in a gaming state. It is a time chart when a prize ball error occurs during execution of a jackpot game. It is a front view of the game board of 6th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the sub-control display device of a 6th embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a production button and a cross key of a 6th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of button presentation according to the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the types of button effects of 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the execution timing of the button vibe production of 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production|presentation of the 1st button vibe production (alpha) of 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production|presentation of 1st button vibe production (beta) of 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a 2nd button vibe effect of 6th Embodiment. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the second button vibe effect (continuation of FIG. 141) of the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production|presentation of the 3rd button vibe production of 6th Embodiment. 143 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the third button vibe effect (continuation of FIG. 143) of the sixth embodiment. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the execution pattern table of button vibe production of 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart of initialization operation processing of a movable object of a 6th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the display screen displayed on the effect display device after powering on the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button vibe production in the sixth embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the first button effect according to the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a special effect production (effect group production) of 6th Embodiment. It is a time chart showing a modification of the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the first button effect of the sixth embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the second button effect according to the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display of the left-handed hitting notification image of 6th Embodiment. It is a time chart provided for explanation of the execution timing of the left-handed hitting notification effect of the sixth embodiment. It is a time chart when a power failure occurs during execution of the left-handed hitting notification effect of the sixth embodiment. It is a time chart provided for explanation of a look-ahead effect after transitioning from a high base state to a low base state in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram for explaining a pending image display area and a changing image display area according to the sixth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram for explaining the held image and the changing image of the sixth embodiment, and (B) is an example of an operation display (animation display) of the held image and the changing image of the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for explanation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a performance of the reservation change suggestion performance and the reservation change performance of 6th Embodiment. It is a time chart when variable display A, B is performed as a variable display of the 1st special symbol of a 6th embodiment. It is a time chart when the display of the audio adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body are repeatedly executed after the game machine of the sixth embodiment returns from the power cut. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable accessory and the display content of the effect display device after the power-off recovery of the game machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the performance operation (accessory performance) of the 1st movable accessory of 6th Embodiment, and the display content of a performance display device. It shows the first effect of the operation promotion effect of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing an image before the button is operated, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the image after the button is operated. It shows a second effect of the operation promotion effect of a modification of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing an image before freezing, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an image after freezing. This is a schematic diagram showing a second effect of the operation promotion effect of a modified example of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is an image after the freeze is released, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the image after the button is operated. Various periods and various states during the second performance of the operation promotion performance of the modified example of the sixth embodiment are shown in comparison with the first performance, where (a) is a timing chart of the first performance, and (b) is a timing chart of the first performance. This is a timing chart for two performances. This shows a second performance of the operation promotion performance of a modified example of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing an image before the button is operated during reach, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an image after the button is operated. This is a schematic diagram showing a second effect of the operation promotion effect of a modified example of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is an image after freezing when the reach is reached, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an image of the inciting effect when the reach is developed. . This is a schematic diagram showing a second effect of the operation promotion effect of a modified example of the sixth embodiment, in which (a) is an image after the freeze is released, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the image after the button is operated. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation promotion performance pattern table of the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the decorative pattern of 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram used for explanation of mode production (stage production) of a 7th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen of BGM selection effect of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining a variable standby period according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a standby action effect and a fluctuating standby effect according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 176 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a standby action effect and a fluctuating standby effect (continuation of FIG. 176) of the seventh embodiment. It is a time chart when a game ball enters the starting hole during execution of the standby demonstration performance in the low base state of the seventh embodiment. It is a time chart when the game ball enters the starting hole during execution of the fluctuating motion performance in the low base state of the seventh embodiment. It is a time chart when a game ball enters the starting hole during execution of the standby demonstration performance in the high base state of the seventh embodiment. It is a time chart when a game ball enters the starting hole during execution of the fluctuating motion performance in the high base state of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining image transformation effect according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram conceptually showing the layer structure of a frame image in a variation effect (while image motion effect is not being performed) according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram conceptually showing the layer structure of a frame image in a variation effect (during execution of an image transformation effect) according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining an overview of button effects according to the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the notification mode of the production button of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a button performance including a weak operation trigger performance (line preview performance) according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a button performance including a strong operation trigger performance (cut-in notice performance) according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a button effect including a specific type of operation trigger effect according to the seventh embodiment. 189 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of button performance (continuation of FIG. 189) including a specific type of operation trigger performance according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a button performance including the weak operation opportunity performance (decision failure performance) of 7th Embodiment. 192 is a schematic diagram showing an example of button performance (continuation of FIG. 191) including a weak operation trigger performance (decision failure performance) according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the content of various effect buttons of 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the button image of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a button appearance preview effect according to the seventh embodiment. It is a time chart when a button effect is executed at the time of a winning/losing branch of a variable display of a jackpot according to the seventh embodiment. It is a functional block diagram of a main control board and an effect control board of an 8th embodiment. It is a diagram showing basic game specifications of the eighth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table of the eighth embodiment, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table of the eighth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the storage area of the RAM of the main control board of the eighth embodiment, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the suppression function information storage area of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the number of additions and the number of subtractions of the MY counter in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a method of updating the MY counter according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a method of initializing MY counters according to the eighth embodiment. It is a time chart of the inhibitory function pre-activation signal and the inhibitory function activation signal of an 8th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a performance of advance notification performance of 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production|presentation of the suppression notification production|presentation of 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of performance when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specified value while the jackpot game is not being executed in the eighth embodiment. 207 is a schematic diagram showing an example of performance (continuation of FIG. 207) when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value while the jackpot game is not being executed in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a performance in the case where a advance notification performance is canceled after the count value of MY counter reaches a predetermined value in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a performance when the count value of MY counter reaches a predetermined value during execution of the jackpot game in 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during execution of the prize ball count-up effect in the eighth embodiment. It is a time chart when the prior notification condition is satisfied during execution of the prize ball count-up effect in the eighth embodiment. It is a time chart when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the emphasis effect in the eighth embodiment. It is a time chart when a prior notification condition is satisfied during execution of the emphasis production in 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect and the execution time of the emphasis effect in the eighth embodiment. It is a time chart when a plurality of game balls consecutively enter the big winning hole in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a performance when the music selection performance and the emphasis performance in 8th Embodiment are performed redundantly. It is a time chart when music is changed in the music selection performance in 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart when a power failure occurs immediately before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied in the eighth embodiment. It is a time chart when a power failure occurs immediately before the pre-notification condition is satisfied in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a time chart when power is cut off after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is a time chart when a power cut occurs after the prior notification condition is satisfied in the eighth embodiment. It is a front view of a managed gaming machine of a ninth embodiment. It is a rear view of the managed gaming machine of the ninth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the system configuration of a managed gaming machine of a ninth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the communication procedure from power-on between the main control board and frame control board in the managed gaming machine of 9th Embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the above drawings. [First Embodiment] First, a slot machine according to a first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description of the basic configuration of a slot machine with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3, the directions of the arrows shown in FIG. 2 will be referred to as the up-down direction, the front-back direction, and the left-right direction, respectively.

<External Configuration of Slot Machine> As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a box-shaped casing 5 (main body member) with an open front (front), and a box-shaped casing 5 (main body member) of the casing 5. It includes a front door 2 attached to the front opening so that it can be opened and closed. When viewed from the front, the front door 2 is attached to the front opening of the housing 5 so that it can be opened and closed laterally using hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c provided at the front of the left side plate 5a of the housing 5. .

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front surface of the front door 2, an upper panel assembly 10, a middle panel assembly 20, a lower panel assembly 30, and a tray assembly 40 are attached in order from the top. In the central part of the upper panel assembly 10, a display screen 11a of a liquid crystal display device 11 arranged on the back side is arranged so as to face the front, and around the center part, a first display lamp 12 and a second display lamp 12 are arranged. Effect lamps 13a and 13b are arranged. Furthermore, a pair of upper speakers 15a, 15b are arranged on the lower front left and right sides of the display screen 11a, and a decorative member 16 with a predetermined decoration is arranged at the lower front center of the display screen 11a.

A reel window W is provided at the center of the middle panel assembly 20, through which the surfaces of the left reel 3a, middle reel 3b, and right reel 3c arranged side by side in the housing 5 are exposed. On the upper side of the operation panel 21 provided below the reel window W, there are a medal slot 22 for inserting game medals (game media), and a BET switch unit for betting game medals within the credited range. 23, and a production switch unit 24 for performing operations related to production. On the front side of the operation panel 21, there are a start lever (start switch) 25 that is operated when starting the rotation of all the reels 3a to 3c, and three levers that are used to individually stop the rotation of each reel 3a, 3b, and 3c. Stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c, and a reject switch 27 for returning game medals that have been inserted through the medal slot 22 and accumulated are installed.

The inside of the medal slot 22 includes a receiving passage (which leads to a hopper 51, which will be described later), through which the inserted game medals pass when the game medals are effectively accepted, and a reception passage (which leads to the hopper 51, which will be described later), and a passageway through which the inserted game medals pass when the game medals are not accepted. It branches into a return path (which leads to a game medal payout port 41, which will be described later) through which game medals pass, and a blocker is provided at the branch. This blocker guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 22 to the receiving passage during a period when the inserted game medals can be effectively accepted, and during other periods, the blocker guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 22 into the receiving passage. The receiving passage and the return passage are configured so that one can be selectively opened and the other closed so as to guide the medals to the return passage.

Furthermore, inside the medal slot 22, there are two medal insertion sensors for detecting game medals inserted into the medal slot 22 and effectively accepted, and two medal insertion sensors for monitoring game medals inserted into the medal slot 22. A medal path sensor is provided for this purpose. The first medal input sensor is a transmission type optical sensor capable of detecting game medals, and is disposed at a position downstream of the position where the blocker is installed (closer to the hopper 51, which will be described later). The second medal insertion sensor is also a transmission type optical sensor capable of detecting game medals, and is arranged in line on the downstream side of the first medal insertion sensor. The medal passage sensor is a contact sensor capable of detecting game medals, and is located at a position closest to the medal slot 22 on the downstream side of the position where the blocker is installed (a position upstream of the two medal insertion sensors). It is located in

If the first and second medal insertion sensors detect the passing of game medals in this order, it means that the game medals have been inserted into the medal insertion slot 22 and that the inserted game medals have been effectively accepted. means. On the other hand, if the first and second medal input sensors detect passage of game medals in the reverse order (second, first order), an abnormality such as backflow of game medals may occur. It means that a passage has occurred. In addition, if the medal path sensor (or at least one of the two medal input sensors) continuously detects game medals for a predetermined period of time, it is possible that the game medals are staying in the receiving path, or the medals are This means that an abnormality has occurred, such as a foreign object (such as a jig for committing fraudulent acts) being inserted into the receiving passage from the input port 22.

The reel window W is designed so that when the left reel 3a, middle reel 3b, and right reel 3c all stop, three consecutive symbols for each reel, a total of nine symbols, are displayed for the player to see. It is configured. Here, among the three symbols of each reel displayed on the reel window W, the uppermost symbol display position is called the upper row, the lowermost symbol display position is called the lower row, and the symbols between the upper row and the lower row The display position is called the middle row. The winning line 29 that horizontally (horizontally straight line) connects the middle symbol display areas of the reels 3a to 3c is a winning line that is activated when a specified number of game medals are bet, and is an activated winning line. The system is configured such that whether or not a gaming combination is established is determined based on the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on the screen 29.

Further, the slot machine 1 is provided with various display lamps including LED lamps and the like. In this embodiment, the display lamps include a MAX-BET switch display lamp (not shown) - BET number display lamp 46b, ready-to-insert display (INSERT) lamp 46c, game start display (START) lamp 46d, and replay display ( REPLAY) lamp 46e, status display (GAME OVER) lamp 46f, stored number display (CREDIT) lamp 46h, and payout number display (PAYOUT) lamp 46j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by a main control board 110, which will be described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp (not shown) is lit in a situation where game medals can be bet. When the MAX-BET switch is lit, the MAX-BET switch is partially or completely illuminated. Other indicator lamps are arranged on the side or under the reel window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

The BET number display lamp 46b displays the number of game medals that have been bet, and the 1-BET display lamp 46bC is lit when the number of betted game medals is 1, and the 1-BET display lamp 46b is lit when the number of betted game medals is 2. A 2-BET display lamp 46bB that is lit when there are three bets, and a 3-BET display lamp 46bA that is lit when there are three bets. The input ready indicator lamp 46c is lit under a situation where game medals can be inserted, and the game start indicator lamp 46d is lit under a situation where a game can be started by operating the start lever 25. It is something that will be done. The replay indicator lamp 46e is lit when a replay combination is established in any game and game medals are automatically bet by automatic bet processing.

The status display lamp 46f is turned on when the betted game medals and/or the stored game medals are settled. The stored number display lamp 46h displays the number of game medals stored (credited) in 7 segments, and the payout number display lamp 46j is configured so that a predetermined number of game medals are paid out when a small winning combination is established. The number of game medals to be paid out when a winning combination is established is displayed in seven segments.

The payout number display lamp 46j is also configured to display letters (alphabet) and numbers indicating the type of error when some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. Further, the payout number display lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a navigation number (symbol or number) indicating the order of operation (order of pressing) of the stop switches 26a to 26c.

A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the center of the lower panel assembly 30, and a pair of lower speakers 32a and 32b are arranged on the left and right sides of the transparent lower panel cover 31. Note that a translucent lower panel base with a predetermined pattern and a lower panel illumination light (both not shown) are attached to the back side of the lower panel cover 31, and this lower panel illumination light is turned on. By doing so, the pattern on the lower panel base is illuminated from the rear side.

The tray assembly 40 has a game medal payout port 41 for paying out game medals, and a game medal storage tray 42 for storing game medals facing the game medal payout port 41. . An ashtray 43 is provided on the left side of the game medal storage tray 42.

<Internal configuration of slot machine> As shown in FIG. 3, the lower part of the housing 5 (above the bottom plate 5d) is provided with game medals that are paid out when a predetermined winning pattern is achieved as a result of the game. A medal payout device 50 is provided. The medal dispensing device 50 includes a hopper 51 that physically accommodates (stores) game medals that are inputted from the medal input port 22 and is effectively accepted, and ejects the game medals stored in the hopper 51 one by one. It has an injection port 52. An auxiliary storage 53 for storing game medals overflowing from the hopper 51 is provided near the medal dispensing device 50, and this auxiliary storage 53 is in a full state (game medals may overflow from the auxiliary storage 53). A fullness detection section (not shown) is provided for detecting whether or not the fuel cell is in a state where there is a negative effect. Furthermore, a power supply device 55 that supplies power to various devices installed in the slot machine 1 is provided at the left side of the medal payout device 50.

A middle plate 5f is provided at the center of the housing 5 so as to span the left and right side plates 5a and 5b, and a reel unit 60 is provided on the middle plate 5f. The reel unit 60 includes the above-mentioned three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, and three stepping motors (described later) that rotate these reels 3a to 3c, respectively. The left reel 3a, the middle reel 3b, and the right reel 3c are each made of a translucent member, and a translucent reel tape on which multiple types of symbols are displayed is pasted on the outer circumferential surface of the left reel 3a, middle reel 3b, and right reel 3c. It is attached. Furthermore, back lamps (described later) are provided on the inner surfaces of the reels 3a to 3c, respectively. At the top of the right side panel 5b, an external centralized terminal board 80 is installed which outputs information regarding games to an external hall computer or the like. The information regarding the game to be output includes, for example, the number of inserted medals, the number of medals paid out, and the number of times a so-called bonus game or AT game has been started.

A main control device 100 is provided in the upper part of the housing 5 (the inner surface of the upper part of the back plate 5e), which performs the main control related to the progress of the game. For example, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game medals are inserted and the start lever 25 is operated, the main controller 100 draws a winning combination and starts rotating the reels 3a to 3c, and the stop switch 26a, When the stop operations 26b and 26c are performed, the reels are controlled to stop based on the result of the lottery. In addition, when all the reels stop and the winning line 29 has a combination of symbols for a small winning combination (a small winning combination has been won), the medal payout device 50 is controlled to produce the number of medals corresponding to the winning small winning combination. pay out.

<Rear side configuration of front door> FIG. 4 shows a front view of the front door 2 when viewed from the rear. Here, since FIG. 4 shows the front door 2 seen from the rear, the left and right directions among the directions of the arrows shown in FIG. 4 are interchanged with those in FIG. 2. On the rear side (back side) of the front door 2, a sub-control device 500 is provided above the reel window W. The sub-control device 500 controls various presentation devices (such as the first presentation lamp 12, second presentation lamps 13a, 13b, liquid crystal display device 11, and upper speakers 15a, 15b) based on various commands sent from the main control device 100. By controlling the , various effects are executed to improve the interest of the game depending on the gaming situation.These functions are implemented on a sub-control board (described later) housed in the sub-board case 501. The sub-control device 500 and the main control device 100 are electrically communicably connected using a cable harness, and information transmission between these devices is carried out from the main control device 100 to the sub-control device. It is possible to perform this in only one direction toward 500.

A medal selector 650 is provided below and to the right of the reel window W to select whether or not the game medals inserted from the medal slot 22 can be effectively accepted. If the game medals inserted from the medal slot 22 are validly accepted, the medal selector 650 allows them to pass through the receiving passage 71 leading to the hopper 51, and if the game medals are not validly accepted, the game medals are disbursed. It flows down into the return passage 72 leading to the outlet 41. Further, a medal passing port 73 is formed in the return passage portion 72 so as to be aligned with the game medal ejection port 52 provided in the medal payout device 50.

<Configuration of Main Control Device> Next, the configuration of the main control device 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 13. As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the main control device 100 includes a main control board 110 and a main board case 210 that accommodates the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 110 includes a control chip 121, an information display lamp 156, a plurality of electrical connectors such as a main board side connector 161, and a printed circuit board 111 on which these various components are mounted. It is configured as follows. Further, various components mounted on the printed circuit board 111 are mounted on the front surface portion (also referred to as "first surface section") FS of the printed circuit board 111. Therefore, when the main controller 100 is installed on the back plate 5e of the housing 5 (see FIG. 3), the surface portion FS faces forward and extends along the vertical direction. Note that details of the main control board 110 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the main board case 210 has a case body 211 and a case lid 221. It is configured so that it can be stored. As shown in FIG. 8, the case body 211 is formed of a transparent resin material into a substantially rectangular box shape with an opening at the front, and a plurality of coupling grooves 212 are formed in the upper and lower walls, respectively. The coupling groove 212 is an L-shaped groove that includes an insertion groove that opens forward and a locking groove that extends to the right from the rear of the insertion groove. The case lid 221 is formed of a transparent resin material into a substantially rectangular box shape with an opening at the rear, and has a plurality of engaging protrusions (not shown) on the inner surfaces of the upper and lower walls at positions corresponding to the coupling grooves 212, respectively. ) is formed. Insert this engagement protrusion into the insertion groove of the coupling groove 212 of the case body 211 from the front, slide the case lid 221 to the right with respect to the case body 211, and insert the engagement protrusion into the locking groove of the coupling groove 212. By inserting the case cover 221, the movement of the case cover 221 in the front and back, up and down, and rightward directions with respect to the case body 211 is restricted, and the case body 211 and the case cover 221 are coupled together.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 10, on the right side of the case body 211, a body-side coupling portion 213 and a first body-side sealing portion 214 to which a sealing cover 241 is attached are formed. A lid crimping member (not shown) having a locking claw is mounted inside the main body side coupling portion 213. Two case attachment protrusions 219 protruding to the right are formed on the right side surface of the first body-side sealing portion 214. A main body side temporary engagement part 215 is formed on the left side of the case body 211, which can be engaged with a used main body caulking member 340 (see FIG. 11) when the main board case 210 is recovered. ing. A second body-side sealing portion 216 is formed at the bottom of the case body 211. A board support protrusion 217 is formed on the front left side of the case body 211 to support the main control board 110 so as not to curve it.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the right side of the case lid 221 is connected to the main body side connecting portion 213 of the case body 211 when the case main body 211 and the case lid 221 are combined as described above. A lid-side connecting portion 223 and a first lid-side sealing portion 224 that is combined with the first body-side sealing portion 214 of the case body 211 are formed. When the main body side coupling part 213 and the lid side coupling part 223 are coupled, the locking claw of the lid caulking member (not shown) installed in the main body side coupling part 213 engages with the locking groove in the lid side coupling part 223. This restricts the sliding movement of the case lid 221 to the left (in the direction in which the case lid 221 is removed) relative to the case body 211, and fixes the case lid 221 so that it cannot be removed from the case body 211. It becomes. Further, a seal 242 is attached across the first body side seal part 214 and the first lid side seal part 224, and the first body side seal part 214 and the first lid side seal part 224 are attached so as to cover the seal 242. The sealing cover 241 is slid from the right and attached. After the seal cover 241 is attached to the first main body side seal part 214 and the first lid side seal part 224, the cutter member 243 is attached, and the cutting part of the cutter member 243 is arranged inside the seal cover 241. It looks like this. Therefore, when the sealing cover 241 is slid leftward and removed, the sealing seal 242 is cut by the cutting portion of the cutter member 243.

A cover part 225 is formed on the left side of the case lid 221 to house and cover the main body side temporary engagement part 215 of the case main body 211 when the case main body 211 and the case lid 221 are combined as described above. has been done. An upper case fixing part 225a is formed in the upper part of the cover part 225, and is capable of engaging with a body crimping member 340 (see FIG. 11), which will be described later, and which can also face a crimping member 345 (see FIG. 11), which will be described later. ing. A lower case fixing part 225b is formed in the lower part of the cover part 225, which can face the caulking member 345 and engage with the main body caulking member 340. A lid-side temporary engagement portion 225c is formed in the middle portion of the cover portion 225, overlapping with the body-side temporary engagement portion 215 of the case body 211, and capable of engaging a used body caulking member 340. has been done.

A Nylatch-type upper temporary fixing tool 238a that can be inserted into an upper temporary fixing hole 348a (see FIG. 11) of a bracket member 330, which will be described later, is formed at the upper left end of the case lid 221. A Nylatch-type lower temporary fixing tool 238b that can be inserted into the lower temporary fixing hole 348b (see FIG. 11) of the bracket member 330 is formed at the lower left end of the case lid 221. A second lid-side sealing portion 226 that is coupled to the second body-side sealing portion 216 of the case body 211 is formed at a lower portion of the case lid 221 . In the state where the second body side seal part 216 and the second lid side seal part 226 are combined, a laser device or the like is used to print across the second body side seal part 216 and the second lid side seal part 226, and the main board case is printed. 210 is now sealed.

A left side connector exposure portion 227 is formed on the left side of the front surface of the case lid 221 and penetrates from front to back to expose the main board side connector 161 of the main control board 110 housed inside the case to the front. A cable connector 192 provided at one end of a front door cable harness 191 can be fitted and connected to the main board side connector 161 exposed through the left side connector exposed portion 227 (see FIG. 5). reference).

A connector cover 246 that covers the left side connector exposed portion 227 from the front is attached to the case lid 221. A groove-shaped first cover crimping attachment part 229 is formed on the front surface of the case lid 221, and a first cover crimping member 228 having a locking claw is slid onto the first cover crimping attachment part 229 from above to be attached. It is now possible to do so. When the connector cover 246 is attached to the case lid 221, the first cover caulking member 228 attached to the first cover caulking attachment part 229 is placed inside the connector cover 246, and the locking claw of the first cover caulking member 228 is engaged. It is designed to be inserted into a locking groove in the connector cover 246. Therefore, the connector cover 246 is fixed so that it cannot be removed from the case lid 221 unless the connector cover 246 is destroyed and the locked state with the first cover caulking member 228 is released.

On the lower front side of the case lid 221, a reel connector 162, a sub-board connector 163, a setting change device connector 164, and a matching machine connector 165 of the main control board 110 housed inside the case are exposed to the front. First to fourth lower connector exposed portions 231 to 234 are formed through the front and back of the connector. A connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a reel control board (not shown) is fitted and connected to the reel connector 162 exposed through the first lower connector exposed portion 231. It is now possible to do so. A connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the sub-control device 500 can be fitted and connected to the sub-board connector 163 exposed through the second lower connector exposed portion 232. It looks like this. A connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the setting change device 350 can be connected to the setting change device connector 164 exposed through the third lower connector exposed portion 233. It has become. A connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a matching machine (not shown) is fitted and connected to the matching machine connector 165 exposed through the fourth lower connector exposed portion 234. It is now possible to do so.

At the center of the front surface of the case lid 221, a sticker pasting section 235 is formed to which a caulking usage recording sticker 248 is pasted. The seal pasting portion 235 is formed in a rectangular depression shape that matches the outer circumferential shape of the caulking use recording sticker 248. The caulking usage record sticker 248 is formed in the form of a transparent sheet on which characters or figures are printed for recording the date when the main board case 210 was sealed (hereinafter referred to as a caulking usage record).

A recessed portion 237 is formed inside the case lid 221 at a portion of the case lid 221 that overlaps with the information display lamp 156 of the main control board 110 . As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the recess 237 includes a bottom 237e that is lower in height than the ceiling of the case lid 221, an upper wall 237a, a lower wall 237b, and It has a left wall portion 237c and a right wall portion 237d. The bottom portion 237e is formed into a flat plate shape that overlaps the information display lamp 156 and extends substantially parallel to the information display lamp 156 near the front thereof. The upper wall portion 237a, the lower wall portion 237b, and the left wall portion 237c are formed in a wall shape extending in the front-rear direction. Among the upper, lower, left, and right walls 237a to 237d, the right wall 237d located on the side far from the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c has a wall shape that slopes to the right (the side far from the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c) as it goes forward. It is formed.

The main board case 210, which houses the main control board 110 inside the case, is attached to the upper part of the housing 5 (the upper inner surface of the back plate 5e) via the board case attachment mechanism 300, as shown in FIG. It will be done. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the board case attachment mechanism 300 includes a left base member 310 attached to the upper left side of the back plate 5e, a right base member 320 attached to the upper right side of the back plate 5e, and a left base member. 310 and a bracket member 330 that is attached to the bracket member 310 so as to be swingable in the front-rear direction. The main board case 210 is mounted inside the bracket member 330 facing forward. The left end portion of the bracket member 330 is connected to the left side base member 310 so as to be swingable in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the right end portion of the bracket member 330 is configured to be fixed to the right side base member 320 using a lock member 360. Thereby, the main board case 210 is swingably attached to the upper part of the housing 5 via the board case attachment mechanism 300.

The left base member 310 is formed in a block shape extending in the vertical direction, and is attached to the upper left side of the back plate 5e of the housing 5 (near the lower part of the top plate 5c) using attachment screws (not shown). The left side base member 310 is formed with three base side engaging parts 311, 312, 313 arranged in the vertical direction and having hinge holes that can be engaged with the bracket side engaging parts 331, 332, 333 of the bracket member 330. ing. The right base member 320 is formed in a block shape extending in the vertical direction, and is attached to the upper right side of the back plate 5e (near the lower part of the top plate 5c) in the housing 5 using attachment screws (not shown). Further, the right base member 320 is configured such that a locking protrusion (not shown) provided on the right side of the rear surface of the bracket member 330 can be locked.

The bracket member 330 is formed of a transparent resin material into a substantially rectangular box shape with a front opening, and is configured to support the main board case 210 by attaching the main board case 210 to its interior space. On the outer surface side of the left side wall of the bracket member 330, there are three bracket side engaging parts 331, 332, which have hinge shafts that can be rotatably engaged with the base side engaging parts 311, 312, 313 of the left side base member 310. 333 are formed side by side in the vertical direction. As a result, the left end portion of the bracket member 330 is moved forward and backward relative to the left side base member 310 with the base side engaging portions 311, 312, 313 and the bracket side engaging portions 331, 332, 333 engaged. are swingably connected.

Upper and lower case crimping mounting parts 334 and 335, to which a main body crimping member 340 and a crimping mold member 345 are mounted, are formed in the bracket member 330 at a position adjacent to the left side wall. A main body crimping member 340 (or a crimping type member 345) having a locking pawl is inserted into the upper case crimping mounting portion 334 from an opening formed on the right side. A caulking type member 345 (or main body caulking member 340) that does not have a locking pawl is inserted into the lower case caulking attachment part 335 through an opening formed on the right side. .

An upper temporary fixing hole 348a into which the upper temporary fixing tool 238a of the main board case 210 (case lid 221) can be inserted is formed at the upper left end of the bracket member 330. A lower temporary fixing hole 348b into which the lower temporary fixing tool 238b of the main board case 210 (case lid 221) can be inserted is formed at the lower left end of the bracket member 330. Furthermore, a cable clamp 336 is formed at the lower left portion of the bracket member 330, which can securely hold the aforementioned front door cable harness 191.

A lock member 360 for fixing the bracket member 330 to the right base member 320 is attached to the upper right portion of the bracket member 330. Further, case mounting holes 339, 339, which open to the left, are formed in the upper right part of the bracket member 330, and are arranged vertically. Case attachment protrusions 219, 219 of the main board case 210 (case body 211) can be inserted into the case attachment holes 339, 339 from the left side.

To attach the main board case 210 housing the main control board 110 inside the case to the bracket member 330, insert the case mounting protrusions 219, 219 of the main board case 210 into the case mounting holes 339, 339 of the bracket member 330, Then, the upper and lower temporary fixing tools 238a and 238b of the main board case 210 are inserted into the upper and lower temporary fixing holes 348a and 348b of the bracket member 330, and the main board case 210 is inserted into the bracket member 330. When the main board case 210 is inserted into the bracket member 330, the main body crimping member 340 attached to the upper case crimping mounting part 334 is placed inside the upper case fixing part 225a of the main board case 210, and the main body crimping member 340 is engaged. The retaining pawl is inserted into a retaining groove within the upper case fixing portion 225a. At the same time, the caulking type member 345 attached to the lower case caulking attachment part 335 is placed facing inside the lower case fixing part 225b of the main board case 210. Thereby, the main board case 210 is fixed so that it cannot be removed from the bracket member 330 unless the upper case fixing part 225a of the main board case 210 is broken to release the locked state with the main body caulking member 340.

In this manner, the main board case 210 is attached to the bracket member 330 by engaging the right side portion of the main board case 210 with the bracket member 330 and then engaging the left side portion thereof. Note that a caulking type member 345 is attached to the upper case caulking attachment part 334 and disposed facing inside the upper case fixing part 225a, and a main body caulking member 340 is attached to the lower case caulking attachment part 335 to form the lower case fixing part. 225b, and the locking claw of the main body crimping member 340 can be inserted into a locking groove in the lower case fixing portion 225b. Thereby, the main board case 210 can be attached to the bracket member 330 twice by switching the vertical positions of the main body crimping member 340 and the crimping type member 345.

For example, first, when attaching the main board case 210 to the bracket member 330, the main body caulking member 340 is attached to the upper case caulking attachment part 334, and the caulking type member 345 is attached to the lower case caulking attachment part 335. The locking claw of the main body crimping member 340 is inserted into the locking groove in the upper case fixing portion 225a of the main board case 210. In this state, when removing the main board case 210 from the bracket member 330, the upper case fixing portion 225a of the main board case 210 is destroyed to release the locked state with the main body caulking member 340. Next, when attaching the removed main board case 210 to the bracket member 330 again, the caulking type member 345 is attached to the upper case caulking attachment part 334, and the main body caulking member 340 is attached to the lower case caulking attachment part 335. Then, the locking claw of the main body crimping member 340 is inserted into the locking groove in the lower case fixing portion 225b of the main board case 210. Then, when removing the main board case 210 from the bracket member 330, the lower case fixing portion 225b of the main board case 210 is destroyed to release the locked state with the main body caulking member 340. In addition, when a manufacturer or the like collects the main board case 210 that has been removed from the bracket member 330, the used main body crimping member 340 that has been removed from the lower case crimping attachment part 335 (or the upper case crimping attachment part 334) is The main board case 210 is engaged with the main body side temporary engagement part 215 and the lid side temporary engagement part 225c. This restricts the sliding movement of the case lid 221 to the left (in the direction of removing the case lid 221) relative to the case body 211 of the main board case 210, and fixes the case lid 221 so that it cannot be removed from the case body 211. Is possible.

Furthermore, in addition to the main board case 210 being attached to the bracket member 330, a setting change device 350 is also attached thereto. Specifically, the setting change device 350 is attached to the lower right inside of the bracket member 330. To the left of the setting change device 350 at the lower right side of the bracket member 330 is a cable harness (see FIG. A cable cover 355 covering the cable (not shown) can be attached. A groove-shaped second cover crimping attachment part 338 is formed in the lower right part of the bracket member 330, and a second cover crimping member 337 having a locking claw is inserted into the second cover crimping attachment part 338 from the right side. It can be installed by sliding it. When the cable cover 355 is attached to the bracket member 330, the second cover caulking member 337 attached to the second cover caulking attachment part 338 is placed inside the cable cover 355, and the locking claw of the second cover caulking member 337 is engaged. It is designed to be inserted into a locking groove in the cable cover 355. Therefore, the cable cover 355 is fixed so that it cannot be removed from the bracket member 330 unless the cable cover 355 is broken and the second cover crimping member 337 is released from the locking state.

The setting change device 350 is a device that is operated when changing the setting values of the slot machine 1 (such as the probability of winning a game combination) that determine the degree of advantage for the player. When a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a setting change key cylinder (not shown) provided in the setting change device 350 and rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise, the housing 5 When the power switch of the power supply device 55 provided at the bottom of the screen is turned on, a setting change mode (a mode in which setting values can be changed) is started. The setting change device 350 switches the above set values in six stages 1 to 6 every time a setting change switch (not shown) is pressed, and changes the set values to a setting display lamp 151 provided on the main control board 110. (See Figure 13). Then, when the start lever 25 provided on the front side of the front door 2 is operated, the set value is determined, and when the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting change mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. Furthermore, when the main control board 110 is in the normal mode and the setting change key inserted into the above-mentioned setting change key cylinder is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise, the main control board 110 starts the setting confirmation mode. , the current setting value is displayed on the setting display lamp 151 on the main control board 110. Then, when the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting confirmation mode is ended and the mode shifts to the normal mode.

<Configuration of Main Control Board> Next, the detailed configuration of the main control board 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 13. As shown in FIG. 13, the main control board 110 includes a control chip 121, a plurality of ICs (also referred to as "IC components" or "IC drivers"), a monitor lamp 141 also referred to as a monitor LED, and a setting display monitor. A setting display lamp 151, also called a role ratio monitor, an information display lamp 156, also called a role ratio monitor (corresponding to a performance display monitor in a pachinko game machine), and a plurality of electrical connectors such as a main board side connector 161, It is configured to include a printed circuit board 111 to be mounted. The main control board 110 is configured to control the progress of games in the slot machine 1 by operating each drive circuit etc. according to a control program stored in the ROM of the control chip 121. Although detailed illustrations are omitted (some of them are illustrated and numbered), the main control board 110 includes a film capacitor 171, a ceramic capacitor 172, an electrolytic capacitor 173, and a general capacitor 174. A plurality of capacitors including a plurality of transistors 175, a plurality of diodes 176, a plurality of resistor arrays 177, and a plurality of resistors 178 are mounted on the printed circuit board 111. The capacitor of the main control board 110 is used, for example, to stabilize the power supply of each IC. The transistors of the main control board 110 are used, for example, to drive each output circuit. The diode on the main control board 110 is used, for example, as a countermeasure against static electricity in each IC.

The main control board 110 is attached to the main board case 210 for each element mounted on the printed circuit board 111, such as a control chip 121, a plurality of ICs, a monitor lamp 141, a setting display lamp 151, an information display lamp 156, etc., excluding electrical connectors. In the housed state, it is covered by the case lid 221 of the main board case 210. As described above, the main board case 210 is formed using a transparent resin material, and the control chip 121, a plurality of ICs, the monitor lamp 141, the setting display lamp 151, and the information display lamp are arranged from the outside of the case lid 221. 156 etc. is configured so that it can be visually recognized.

Note that a rectangular seal pasting area AS is set above the central portion of the main control board 110 (printed circuit board 111). The sticker pasting area AS is an area that may overlap with the caulking use recording sticker 248 pasted on the seal pasting portion 235 of the case lid 221 when viewed from the outside of the case lid 221. A rectangular solvent inflow region BS extending vertically is set at the right end of the main control board 110. The solvent inflow region BS is an area where, when an attempt is made to peel the seal 242 of the main board case 210, the solvent used to peel the seal 242 may flow into the main control board 110 inside the case. To the left and below the sticker pasting area AS on the main control board 110, a placement restriction area CS extending in a substantially L-shape is set. The placement restriction area CS is close to the left side wall 221a and the bottom wall 221b (see FIG. 8) of the case lid 221, and visibility may be hindered, so the placement of the setting display lamp 151 and the information display lamp 156 is limited. This is a restricted area.

Further, in the upper right part of the printed circuit board 111, in order to prove that the main control board 110 is not an unauthorized board, there is provided a drawing section 112 on which the board manufacturer's name is printed using a laser device or the like. This drawing section 112 is also covered by the case lid 221 of the main board case 210 when the main control board 110 is housed in the main board case 210, so that the drawing section 112 can be visually recognized from the outside of the case lid 221. configured to be possible. The drawing section 112 on which the board manufacturer's name is drawn is arranged at a position that is not in the sticker pasting area AS so that the board manufacturer's name can be easily confirmed. Note that the board manufacturer's name is not limited to consisting only of letters, but may also be a combination of letters and a corporate mark, or may include at least one of letters and figures. good.

The information display lamp 156 (and setting display lamp 151) has a thicker shape than other electric elements, and when the drawing section 112 is placed near the information display lamp 156 (and setting display lamp 151), It may be hidden in the shadow of the information display lamp 156 (and setting display lamp 151) and visibility may be reduced. Therefore, the drawing section 112 is located at a distance that does not impede the visibility of the drawing section 112 when viewed from the outside of the case lid 221 with respect to the information display lamp 156 (and setting display lamp 151). Placed. The board manufacturer's name is printed after all the electrical elements are mounted on the printed circuit board 111. The soldered portion of the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) has a relatively heat-resistant and fragile structure. Therefore, when printing the board manufacturer's name using a laser device, the drawing unit 112 prints the information display lamp 156 (and setting display lamp 151) in order to prevent the heat of the laser from affecting the information display lamp 156 (and setting display lamp 151). It is preferable that the setting display lamp 151) be placed away from the setting display lamp 151).

The control chip 121 includes a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing related to games, a ROM that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs, etc., and a RAM that is a storage device that can write and read information. It is configured. The control chip 121 is mounted on the right side of the center of the printed circuit board 111, that is, on the side of the printed circuit board 111 that is far from the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c. In order to make it easier to confirm whether or not tampering has been performed on the control chip 121, the control chip 121 is placed at a position that is not in the sticker pasting area AS. Note that, in order to prevent the adverse effects of the solvent, the control chip 121 is preferably placed at a position that does not become the solvent inflow region BS. Furthermore, the control chip 121 is placed at a distance from the setting display lamp 151 and the information display lamp 156 by a distance that allows the first to third display control ICs 132A to 132C to be placed.

The plurality of ICs include first to second oscillator ICs 131A to 131B, first to third display control ICs 132A to 132C, and first to eleventh main board ICs 133A to 133K. The first and second oscillator ICs 131A and 131B are electrically connected to the control chip 121 and configured to generate clocks used by the control chip 121. The first and second oscillator ICs 131A and 131B are mounted to the right of the center of the printed circuit board 111. The first and second oscillator ICs 131A and 131B are arranged near the bottom of the control chip 121 at a position that is not in the seal pasting area AS. It should be noted that the first and second oscillator ICs 131A and 131B may be placed in a position that corresponds to the seal pasting area AS as long as it is near the control chip 121. This is because, unlike the control chip 121, there is little need to make it easy to confirm whether or not fraud is being committed.

The first to third display control ICs 132A to 132C are ICs for performing dynamic lighting control of the storage number display lamp 46h, the payout number display lamp 46j, the setting display lamp 151, and the information display lamp 156, which are 7-segment LEDs. It is. The first display control IC 132A is electrically connected to the control chip 121, and also electrically connected to the main board side connector 161, the setting display lamp 151, and the information display lamp 156. The first display control IC 132A controls the numbers, etc. ( It functions as a segment driver that sets (decodes) numbers, alphabets, various symbols, etc.).

The second display control IC 132B is electrically connected to the control chip 121, and also electrically connected to the main board side connector 161 and the setting display lamp 151. The second display control IC 132B sets each digit of the storage number display lamp 46h, the payout number display lamp 46j, and the setting display lamp 151 according to the control signal transmitted from the control chip 121. It functions as a digit driver that switches whether or not to display numbers (set by the first display control IC 132A, which is a segment driver). The third display control IC 132C is electrically connected to the control chip 121 and also to the information display lamp 156. The third display control IC 132C selects one of each digit (each digit) of the information display lamp 156 according to the control signal transmitted from the control chip 121 (the first display control IC 132A, which is a segment driver) Functions as a digit driver that switches whether or not to display set numbers, etc.

The first to third display control ICs 132A to 132C are mounted to the left of the center of the printed circuit board 111, that is, on the side of the printed circuit board 111 closer to the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c. The first display control IC 132A is arranged on the left side of the eleventh main board IC 133K at a position that is the seal pasting area AS. The second display control IC 132B is arranged below the first display control IC 132A at a position that is not in the sticker pasting area AS. The third display control IC 132C is disposed above the first display control IC 132A at a position that corresponds to the seal pasting area AS. Note that all of the first to third display control ICs 132A to 132C may be arranged at a position that becomes the sticker pasting area AS. This is because, similarly to the first and second oscillator ICs 131A and 131B, there is little need to make it easy to confirm whether or not fraud is being committed.

Other ICs, first to eleventh main board ICs 133A to 133K, are mounted on each part of the printed circuit board 111. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the main board ICs mounted on the right side of the printed circuit board 111 are a first main board IC 133A, a second main board IC 133B, and a third main board IC 133C. Further, for example, the main board ICs mounted on the upper center part of the printed circuit board 111 are divided into a fourth main board IC 133D, a fifth main board IC 133E, a sixth main board IC 133F, and a seventh main board IC 133F. An IC133G, an eighth main board IC133H, a ninth main board IC133I, a tenth main board IC133J, and an eleventh main board IC133K.

The first main board IC 133A is arranged on the upper right side of the control chip 121. The second main board IC 133B is arranged above the control chip 121 and to the left of the first main board IC 133A. The third main board IC 133C is arranged near the bottom of the control chip 121 and near the left of the first and second oscillator ICs 131A and 131B. Furthermore, the first to third main board ICs 133A to 133C are arranged at positions that are not in the seal pasting area AS.

The fourth main board IC 133D is arranged above and to the left of the second main board IC 133B. The fifth main board IC 133E is arranged to the left of the fourth main board IC 133D. The sixth main board IC 133F is arranged below the fifth main board IC 133E. The seventh main board IC 133G is arranged below the sixth main board IC 133F. The eighth main board IC 133H is arranged below the seventh main board IC 133G. The ninth main board IC 133I is arranged to the left of the fifth main board IC 133E. The tenth main board IC 133J is arranged below the ninth main board IC 133I and to the left of the sixth main board IC 133F. The eleventh main board IC 133K is arranged below the tenth main board IC 133J and to the left of the seventh main board IC 133G. Further, the fourth to eleventh main board ICs 133D to 133K are arranged at positions that become the seal pasting area AS.

The monitor lamp 141 is composed of 20 LED elements 142 arranged in two rows, 10 on the left and right, and 2 rows above and below, and emits light according to the operating state of each part of the slot machine 1. The monitor lamp 141 is for checking whether there is any malfunction or the like. For example, some of the 20 LED elements 142 constituting the monitor lamp 141 are activated when the reels 3a to 3c of the reel unit 60 are not located at (or are located at) a predetermined rotation reference position. It is designed to emit light. For example, another part of the 20 LED elements 142 is configured to emit light when the start lever 25 is in a non-operated state (or in an operated state). The monitor lamp 141 is mounted below the center of the printed circuit board 111 (below the fourth to eleventh main board ICs 133D to 133K). The monitor lamp 141 is arranged at a position that is not in the sticker pasting area AS so that the light emitting state (on or off) of each LED element 142 can be easily checked. Note that the monitor lamp 141 is preferably disposed at a position that does not become the solvent inflow region BS so that the solvent does not have an adverse effect. Moreover, since the monitor lamp 141 is electrically connected to the main board side connector 161, it is preferable to arrange it near the main board side connector 161.

The plurality of electrical connectors include a main board side connector 161, a reel connector 162, a sub board connector 163, a setting change device connector 164, and a collation machine connector 165. The main board side connector 161 is located at the left end of the printed circuit board 111, that is, closer to the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c than the first to third display control ICs 132A to 132C, the setting display lamp 151, and the information display lamp 156 on the printed circuit board 111. Implemented on the near side. As described above, the cable connector 192 provided at one end of the front door cable harness 191 can be fitted and connected to the main board side connector 161 (see FIG. 5).

The front door cable harness 191 is also electrically connected to a central display board 196 (see FIG. 5) disposed at the center of the rear side (back side) of the front door 2. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the front door cable harness 191 includes the cable clamp 336 of the bracket member 330 and the inner surface of the left side plate 5a of the housing 5 (located on the side where the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c are provided). The cables are wired from the housing 5 toward the front door 2 using a plurality of cable clamps 194 arranged on the side. At this time, the front door cable harness 191 is attached to the main board side connector so as not to cover the front of the information display lamp 156 (and setting display lamp 151) arranged near the main board side connector 161 and obstruct visibility. 161 and downward toward the cable clamp 336 of the bracket member 330. However, the front door cable harness 191 may cover the cover portion 225 of the case lid 221 disposed to the left of the main board side connector 161 and obstruct the visibility of the first and second case caulking members 340, 345, etc. There is sex. Therefore, as described above, the upper case fixing part 225a that can be engaged with the main body caulking member 340 is disposed above the cover part 225 (relative to the lower case fixing part 225b and the lid-side temporary engagement part 225c). is preferred. In this embodiment, the front door cable harness 191 is shown with a chain double-dashed line in FIGS. 5 and 6 to facilitate explanation of the positional relationship with other components.

The central display board 196 is electrically connected to a left relay board 197, a right relay board 198, etc. provided on the left and right rear sides of the reel window W. The left relay board 197 and the right relay board 198 have various display lamps arranged in the reel window W described above (a BET number display lamp 46b, a possible input display lamp 46c, a game start display lamp 46d, a replay display lamp 46e). , a status display lamp 46f, a storage number display lamp 46h, a payout number display lamp 46j, etc.) are mounted or electrically connected. As a result, control signals for controlling the operation of various indicator lamps are directed from the main control board 110 to the left relay board 197 and the right relay board 198 via the front door cable harness 191 and the central display board 196. The main control board 110 controls the operation of various display lamps.

As described above, the control signals for controlling the operation of the storage number display lamp 46h and the payout number display lamp 46j are transmitted from the control chip 121 of the main control board 110, the first display control IC 132A, and the second display. Via the control IC 132B, the operation of the BET number display lamp 46b, the input possible display lamp 46c, the game start display lamp 46d, the replay display lamp 46e, etc., which are configured to be output from the main board side connector 161, is controlled. The control signal for the main control board 110 is also configured to be output from the main board side connector 161 via the control chip 121 of the main control board 110, the first display control IC 132A, and the second display control IC 132B. There is.

The reel connector 162 is mounted on the left side of the lower end of the printed circuit board 111. As described above, the reel connector 162 can be fitted and connected to a connector of a cable harness (not shown) that is electrically connected to a reel control board (not shown). The sub-board connector 163 is mounted at the center of the lower end of the printed circuit board 111. As described above, the sub-board connector 163 is capable of fitting and connecting a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a sub-control board (not shown). . The setting change device connector 164 is mounted on the left side of the lower end of the printed circuit board 111. As described above, the setting change device connector 164 is capable of fitting and connecting a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the setting change device 350. The collating machine connector 165 is mounted on the left side of the lower end of the printed circuit board 111 along with the setting change device connector 164. As described above, the collation machine connector 165 is capable of fitting and connecting a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the collation machine (not shown).

As described above, the setting display lamp 151 displays the setting values of the slot machine 1, which determine the degree of advantage for the player, in seven segments. The setting display lamp 151 is configured using a 7-segment LED capable of displaying a one-digit number. The setting display lamp 151 is mounted on the left side of the center of the printed circuit board 111, that is, on the side of the printed circuit board 111 closer to the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c than the control chip 121. In order to easily check the setting values displayed on the setting display lamp 151, the setting display lamp 151 is provided between the first display control IC 132A and the main board side connector 161 in the sticker pasting area AS and the placement restriction area. It is placed in a position that does not become a CS.

The information display lamp 156 displays seven segments of information regarding the proportion of the accessory. The information display lamp 156 is configured using a 7-segment LED capable of displaying 4-digit numbers and the like. Information regarding the accessory ratio includes, for example, a two-digit identifier symbol indicating the type of accessory ratio (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, advantageous period ratio, etc.), and a two-digit ratio corresponding to the identifier symbol. It is possible to display a four-digit number, etc., which is a combination of , on the information display lamp 156. The information display lamp 156 is mounted on the left side of the center of the printed circuit board 111, that is, on the side of the printed circuit board 111 closer to the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c than the control chip 121. The information display lamp 156 has a sticker pasting area between the first display control IC 132A and the third display control IC 132C so that the information regarding the accessory ratio displayed on the information display lamp 156 can be easily confirmed. It is placed in a position that is not in the AS or placement restriction area CS. Note that since the information display lamp 156 may be blocked by the usage recording sticker 248 when viewed diagonally from the front, it is not preferable to arrange it in a position adjacent to the sticker pasting area AS. Therefore, the information display lamp 156 is spaced to the left with respect to the sticker pasting area AS by a distance that allows the information display lamp 156 to be visible even from the front right diagonally without being obstructed by the caulking usage record sticker 248. It is preferable that

Furthermore, unlike the control chip 121, the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) is a reusable component. Therefore, if an attempt is made to peel off the seal 242 of the main board case 210 and the solvent used to peel off the seal 242 flows into the main control board 110 inside the case, the information display lamp 156 (and setting display lamp 151) It is preferable that the solvent does not adhere to the surface. Therefore, the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) is arranged at a position that does not become the solvent inflow region BS.

In order to efficiently form a conductor pattern on the printed circuit board 111 (without complicating it), information must be formed on the path of the conductor pattern between the first and third display control ICs 132A, 132C and the main board side connector 161. Preferably, an indicator lamp 156 is implemented. Therefore, the information display lamp 156 is arranged near the first and third display control ICs 132A and 132C and near the main board side connector 161. Note that the information display lamp 156 is electrically connected to the first and third display control ICs 132A and 132C, and is connected to the main control board 110 with respect to the first and third display control ICs 132A and 132C. The spacing is close enough to prevent other electric elements (IC, etc.) from being provided. Furthermore, the information display lamp 156 is spaced close to the main board side connector 161 to the extent that other electrical elements (such as ICs) on the main control board 110 are not provided. If other electrical elements (IC, etc.) are provided between the information display lamp 156 and the first and third display control ICs 132A, 132C or the main board side connector 161, it is necessary to bypass them. This is because it becomes difficult to efficiently form a conductor pattern.

As described above, the first display control IC 132A is used as the segment driver for the setting display lamp 151 and the segment driver for the information display lamp 156. In order to efficiently form a conductor pattern on the printed circuit board 111, it is preferable to mount an information display lamp 156 near the setting display lamp 151. Therefore, the information display lamp 156 is arranged above and near the setting display lamp 151. Note that the information display lamp 156 is spaced close to the setting display lamp 151 to the extent that other electric elements (such as ICs) on the main control board 110 are not provided. However, in order to prevent the numbers displayed on the setting display lamp 151 and the information display lamp 156 from being mistaken as a series of (5-digit) numbers, etc., the setting display lamp 151 and the information display lamp 156 should be placed horizontally. It is preferable that they are arranged so that they are not lined up.

The light emitted by each LED element 142 of the monitor lamp 141 has relatively high brightness. Therefore, when the information display lamp 156 is placed near the monitor lamp 141, the light emitted from each LED element 142 reaches the information display lamp 156, and the information regarding the proportion of the accessory displayed on the information display lamp 156 can be visually recognized. performance may decrease. Therefore, the information display lamp 156 is placed at a distance from the monitor lamp 141 such that the light from each LED element 142 does not reach the information display lamp 156. When other electric elements are arranged to block the light from each LED element 142, the distance between the information display lamp 156 and the monitor lamp 141 is such that the light from each LED element 142 reaches the information display lamp 156. It may be a distance that can be reached. Note that the information display lamp 156 can be placed near the monitor lamp 141, but in this case, the information regarding the proportion of the accessory displayed by the information display lamp 156 and the light emitting state of each LED element 142 can be displayed. Since they can be visually recognized at the same time, it is possible to reduce the effort required for confirmation work.

When the main board side connector 161 is placed above the information display lamp 156, the front door cable harness 191 electrically connected to the main board side connector 161 hangs down to cover the front of the information display lamp 156 and make it visible. It may interfere with sex. Therefore, the main board side connector 161 is arranged near the left side of the information display lamp 156 except above the information display lamp 156. Other electrical connectors such as the reel connector 162, the sub-board connector 163, the setting change device connector 164, and the collation machine connector 165 are also placed at positions other than above the information display lamp 156 for the same reason. be done. In addition, even if the electrical connector such as the main board side connector 161 is located at a position other than above the information display lamp 156, if the cable harness may cover the front of the information display lamp 156 and obstruct visibility, It is preferable to arrange it while avoiding this position.

The left side portion of the main board case 210 where the main board side connector 161 is exposed is fixed to the bracket member 330 by the first and second case caulking members 340 and 945. When attempting to break the upper case fixing portion 225a of the main board case 210 to release the locked state from the main body caulking member 340 (for example, when burning it out with a hot cutter), the information display lamp 156 inside the case may be It is preferable that it not be destroyed. Therefore, the information display lamp 156 is located on the right side of the upper case fixing portion 225a of the main board case 210 at a distance that is sufficient to provide other electrical elements (main board side connector 161, etc.) on the main control board 110. will be placed in

Further, as described above, the connector cover 246 is attached to the case lid 221 of the main board case 210 by the first cover caulking member 228. When attempting to destroy the connector cover 246 to release the locked state from the first cover caulking member 228 (for example, when burning it off with a hot cutter), it is better to avoid accidentally destroying the information display lamp 156 inside the case. preferable. Therefore, when viewed from the outside of the case lid 221, the information display lamp 156 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the first cover crimping attachment part 229 of the case lid 221 (a position away from the first cover crimping member 228). .

If the distance between the case lid 221 of the main board case 210 and the information display lamp 156 is too large, the visibility of the information display lamp 156 may decrease depending on the viewing angle due to the influence of light reflection on the case lid 221. There is. Therefore, as described above, a recess 237 is formed in the case lid 221 of the main board case 210 in a portion that overlaps with the information display lamp 156. This recess 237 makes it possible to reduce the distance between the case lid 221 (recess 237) of the main board case 210 and the information display lamp 156, thereby suppressing the influence of light reflection on the case lid 221 and reducing the distance between the information display lamp 156 and the case lid 221 (recess 237) of the main board case 210. 156 can be improved. Further, as described above, the right wall portion 237d of the recess 237 is formed in the shape of a wall that slopes to the right (the side farther from the hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c) as it goes forward. Due to this right wall portion 237d, even if the main board case 210 inside the housing 5 is viewed diagonally from the right front in the direction in which the front door 2 opens, the concave portion of the case lid 221 can be seen without interfering with the ceiling of the case lid 221. 237 (bottom portion 237e), the information display lamp 156 can be visually recognized.

Note that the distance between the bottom 237e of the recess 237 and the information display lamp 156 is preferably about 0.5 mm. In this way, by securing a gap between the case lid 221 (recess 237) of the main board case 210 and the information display lamp 156, the case lid 221 can be pushed in from the outside while ensuring the visibility of the information display lamp 156. It is possible to prevent acts such as attempts to destroy the information display lamp 156 by causing static electricity, or acts such as attempts to destroy the information display lamp 156 by generating static electricity. Further, when the distance between the bottom 237e of the recess 237 and the information display lamp 156 is approximately 0.5 mm, the length and width of the bottom 237e are set to be smaller than the information display lamp 156 in order to ensure visibility of the information display lamp 156. It is also preferable that one side is about 1 mm larger.

In the main control device 100 configured as described above, in order to check each part of the main control board 110 housed in the main board case 210, open the front door 2 and open the case from the front or diagonally from the right front. The main board case 210 installed in the main board case 5 is visually recognized. At this time, since the information display lamp 156 is placed in a position that is not in the sticker pasting area AS on the main control board 110 (printed circuit board 111), the information display lamp 156 is not obstructed by the caulking use recording sticker 248 and can be placed in the recessed part of the case lid 221. 237 (bottom portion 237e), information regarding the ratio of the accessory displayed on the information display lamp 156 can be confirmed. Similarly, since the setting display lamp 151 is arranged in a position that is not in the sticker pasting area AS on the main control board 110, the setting display lamp 151 can be seen through the case lid 221 without being obstructed by the caulking usage record sticker 248. You can check the setting values displayed in . Since the monitor lamp 141 is also arranged in a position that is not in the sticker pasting area AS on the main control board 110, each LED constituting the monitor lamp 141 can be viewed through the case lid 221 without being obstructed by the caulking usage recording sticker 248. The light emitting state of the element 142 can be confirmed. Since the control chip 121 is also placed in a position that is not in the sticker pasting area AS on the main control board 110, unauthorized access to the control chip 121 through the case lid 221 is not obstructed by the caulking usage record sticker 248. You can check whether it has been done or not.

<Modified example> In this embodiment, when a common main control board is used by multiple board manufacturers, a plurality of drawing units corresponding to the number of board manufacturers are provided on the main control board, and the main control board is actually It may be configured such that the drawing part on which the name of the board manufacturer who manufactured the board is printed is left, and the other drawing parts can be removed from the main control board. For example, as shown in FIG. 14, when a common main control board 110A is used by two board manufacturers, the names of the two board manufacturers are printed on the upper right corner of the printed circuit board 111 using a laser device or the like. Two drawing units 112A and 112B may be provided.

The first and second drawing units 112A and 112B are arranged side by side along the outer periphery of the main control board 110A (printed circuit board 111). The first and second drawing parts 112A and 112B are connected to the printed circuit board 111 via a perforated joint, and are configured to be individually cut out from the printed circuit board 111. As a result, among the first and second drawing sections 112A and 112B, the drawing section on which the name of the board manufacturer who actually manufactured the main control board 110A is printed is left, and the other drawing section is used as the main control board. It can be cut out from the substrate 110A. Therefore, even if a common main control board 110 is used by multiple (two) board manufacturers, the drawing section on which the name of the board manufacturer that manufactured the main control board 110A is printed on the main control board 110A. It is possible to provide

The first and second drawing sections 112A and 112B are arranged at positions that are not in the sticker pasting area AS so that the name of the board manufacturer can be easily confirmed, similarly to the above-described embodiment. The first and second drawing sections 112A and 112B are similar to the above-described embodiments, when viewed from the outside of the case lid 221 with respect to the information display lamp 156 (and setting display lamp 151). They are placed at a distance that does not obstruct visibility. Further, when removing one of the first and second drawing sections 112A and 112B from the main control board 110 while leaving the other, the force that acts during the removal is applied to the information display lamp 156 (and setting display lamp 151). It is preferable that the first and second drawing units 112A and 112B be placed apart from the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151) in order to prevent this from affecting the information display lamp 156 (and the setting display lamp 151).

Other characteristic configurations applicable to the main control boards 110 and 110A described above will be described below with additional reference to FIGS. 15 to 27. Below, a main control board 410 different from the main control boards 110 and 110A will be used to explain its characteristic configuration. This main control board 410 can be used in the slot machine 1 in place of the main control boards 110 and 110A. The characteristic configuration of the main control board 410 described below is similarly applicable to the main control boards 110 and 110A. Further, it is also possible to apply the above-described configuration of the main control boards 110 and 110A to the main control board 410.

Further, the characteristic configuration described below is not limited to the slot machine of this embodiment, and can be combined with a Pachinko gaming machine or other embodiments. In the following description, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIGS. 15 to 18 will be described as the up-down direction and the left-right direction, respectively. These directions are consistent with the up-down direction and left-right direction shown by arrows in FIG.

<Aspects of lead wires of electrical elements mounted on the board> The main control board 410 includes a printed circuit board 411 and a plurality of electrical elements ( It consists mainly of electronic components). As shown in FIG. 15, a plurality of types of electric elements are mounted in a predetermined area (area within a rectangular frame line FB10 indicated by a solid line) on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411. Specifically, as multiple types of electric elements, one IC driver 420A is placed horizontally (the longitudinal direction of the component is parallel to the left-right direction), and one IC driver 420A is placed vertically (the longitudinal direction of the component is parallel to the vertical direction). 4 resistors 430A arranged side by side in the horizontal direction), 2 resistors 430B arranged side by side in the vertical direction when placed horizontally, and 1 resistor 430B arranged horizontally An IC socket 440A with a control chip 450A attached thereto, and four ceramic capacitors 460A arranged in a vertically aligned manner in the left and right direction are respectively mounted.

In FIG. 15, five rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15 are illustrated using two-dot chain lines. These rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15 are illustrated for convenience to explain the area where electric elements are mounted on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411, and are used for actual printing, etc. on the surface portion FS. It is not formed by A rectangular frame line FB11 indicates an area where the IC driver 420A is mounted, and a rectangular frame line FB12 indicates an area where the four resistors 430A are mounted. Similarly, a rectangular frame line FB13 indicates an area where the two resistors 430B are mounted, a rectangular frame line FB14 indicates an area where the control chip 450A is mounted via the IC socket 440A, and a rectangular frame line FB15 indicates an area where the control chip 450A is mounted via the IC socket 440A. indicates an area where four ceramic capacitors 460A are mounted.

The IC driver 420A includes a rectangular parallelepiped package part (also referred to as a "main body part") 421, and a plurality of parts extending from the package part 421 (in this example, 18 parts in total from both sides of the package part 421 along the longitudinal direction). 36 lead wires (also referred to as "legs" or "terminals") 422. Each lead wire 422 is formed to be thinner at its tip than its root (closer to the package part 421), and is inserted into a plurality of predetermined through holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 411. It is soldered. The resistors 430A and 430B include a cylindrical package portion 431 and two lead wires 432 extending from both ends of the package portion 431 in the longitudinal direction, and each lead wire 432 is formed on a printed circuit board 411. Each of them is inserted into a plurality of predetermined through holes and soldered.

The control chip 450A includes a rectangular parallelepiped package portion 451, a plurality of lead wires 452 extending from the package portion 451 (in this example, a total of 72 lead wires, 36 from both sides along the longitudinal direction of the package portion 451). It is equipped with The IC socket 440A includes a receiving frame part 441 that receives the package part 451 of the control chip 450A, and a plurality of lead wires 442 (72 leads, the same number as the lead wires 452 of the control chip 450A) extending from the receiving frame part 441. (see FIG. 16). Each lead wire 442 of the IC socket 440A is electrically connected to each lead wire 452 of the control chip 450A, and is inserted into a plurality of predetermined through holes formed in the printed circuit board 411 and soldered. . The ceramic capacitor 460A includes an elliptical plate-shaped package portion 461 and two lead wires 462 extending from the package portion 461, and each lead wire 462 is inserted into a plurality of predetermined through holes formed in the printed circuit board 411. Each is inserted and soldered.

FIG. 16 shows a front view of the main control board 410 from the rear surface RS (also referred to as "second surface") side of the printed circuit board 411. The rectangular frame line FB20 shown as a solid line in FIG. 16 corresponds to the rectangular frame line FB10 shown in FIG. 15 (indicates the same position and the same size range on the front side FS and back side RS of the printed circuit board 411). The five rectangular frame lines FB21 to FB25 shown by two-dot chain lines in FIG. 16 correspond to the five rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15 shown in FIG. 15, respectively. The rectangular frame lines FB21 to FB25, like the rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15, are illustrated for convenience to explain the area where the electric elements are mounted, and are actually formed by printing etc. on the back surface portion RS. It is not what is being done.

As shown in FIG. 16, a large number of lead wires are soldered to the printed circuit board 411 in an area within the rectangular frame line FB20 on the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 411. As shown in FIG. Specifically, a total of 32 lead wires 422 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB21, and a total of 8 lead wires 432 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB22. . Furthermore, a total of four lead wires 432 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB23, a total of 72 lead wires 442 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB24, and a total of 72 lead wires 442 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB25. A total of eight lead wires 462 are soldered to the area.

The 32 lead wires 422 in the region within the rectangular frame line FB21 and the 8 lead wires 432 in the region within the rectangular frame line FB22 are located at positions relatively close to each other in the left-right direction on the back surface portion RS of the printed circuit board 411. It is located. Further, the 32 lead wires 422 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 are divided into two rows, upper and lower, and the lead wires 422 in each column are arranged side by side in the left and right direction, and the 8 leads in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 The wires 432 are also divided into two rows, upper and lower, and the lead wires 432 of each row are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and in this respect, the two are similar. However, the arrangement pitch (distance between adjacent lead wires 422) of the lead wires 422 arranged in the left-right direction in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 is It is different from the array pitch (the former array pitch is shorter than the latter array pitch). Also, the distance between the lead line 422 located at the upper right in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 and the lead line 432 located at the upper left at the uppermost position in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 ("inside the rectangular frame line FB21"). The shortest distance between the lead wire 422 in the area and the lead wire 432 in the area inside the rectangular frame line FB22 (also referred to as "the shortest distance between the lead wire 422 in the area of the rectangular frame line FB22") is the same as the arrangement pitch in the left and right direction of each lead wire 422 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21. It is also different from the arrangement pitch in the left and right direction of each lead wire 432 in the inner region (the former distance is longer than the latter two arrangement pitches).

Furthermore, the vertical position of each lead wire 422 aligned in the left-right direction in the upper row in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21, and the vertical direction of each lead line 432 aligned in the left-right direction in the upper row in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22. (the former is located higher than the latter). Similarly, the vertical position of each lead wire 422 aligned in the left-right direction in the lower row in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 is also the vertical position of each lead line 432 aligned in the left-right direction in the upper row in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22. (the former is located lower than the latter). In this way, the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 422 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21, the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 432 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22, and the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 422 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21, Based on the difference between the shortest distance to the lead wire 432 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22, and the vertical position of each lead line 422 aligned in the left-right direction in each column in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21, Based on the difference in the vertical position of each lead wire 432 arranged in the left-right direction in each column in the region within the frame line FB22, the type of electric element having each lead wire 422 in the region within the rectangular frame line FB21 and the shape of the rectangle are determined. It can be inferred that the types of electric elements having each lead wire 432 in the area within the frame line FB22 are different. By paying attention to the same point, it can be seen that the type of the electric element having each lead wire 432 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB23 is different from the type of the electric element having each lead wire 422 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21. The type of electric element having each lead wire 442 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB24 is different from the type of the electric element having each lead wire 442 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB25. It can be inferred that the type of electrical element having the lead wire 462 is different.

As described above, the 32 lead wires 422 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 are divided into two rows, upper and lower, and each row has 16 lead wires 422 arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 422 arranged in the left-right direction is significantly shorter than the distance between the two upper and lower rows. In addition, each lead wire 422 (the tip end thereof) linearly protrudes from the solder portion (portion formed of hardened solder material) SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface portion RS in an attitude perpendicular to the back surface portion RS. ing. Such aspects of each lead wire 422 (number of lead wires, arrangement pitch of lead wires, arrangement of lead wires, distance between rows of lead wires, shape (posture) of lead wires, protrusion length of lead wires, etc.) ), each lead wire 422 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 is the one of the IC driver (IC driver 420A in this example) placed horizontally among the multiple types of electric elements. It is possible to infer whether this is the case by looking at the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411.

Further, as described above, the eight lead wires 432 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 are also divided into two rows, upper and lower, and the four lead wires 432 in each row are arranged so as to be lined up in the left and right direction. There is. Although the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 432 arranged in the left-right direction is shorter than the distance between the two upper and lower rows, it is smaller than the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 422 arranged in the left-right direction in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21. It's getting longer. Therefore, in the eight lead wires 432 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22, each lead wire 432 in the upper row and each lead wire 432 in the lower row form a pair (set). It is possible to infer that the pair of upper and lower lead wires 432 are from one electric element. Based on this assumption, and focusing on the pair of upper and lower lead wires, the upper lead wire 432 extends a predetermined length from the back surface part RS in a posture bent diagonally downward to the left from the solder part SLR. The lower lead wire 432 extends by a predetermined length from the back surface portion RS in a posture bent diagonally upward to the left from the solder portion SLR. In other words, when the rear surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 is viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 16, the root portion of the upper lead wire 432 (the original portion extending from the solder portion SLR) and the lower lead wire The upper lead wire 432 is inclined to the left by an angle of about 10° with respect to the virtual line segment (not shown) connecting the base of the lead wire 432, and the lower lead wire 432 is also inclined to the left by an angle of about 10°. It is tilted to the left by an angle.

The aspects of each lead wire 432 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the distance between the rows of lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the way the lead wires are bent, etc.) ), in the eight lead wires 432 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22, each lead wire 432 in the upper row and each lead wire 432 in the lower row form a pair (set). , the back side RS of the printed circuit board 411 determines whether each pair of lead wires 432 is connected to a resistor (resistor 430A in this example) arranged vertically among multiple types of electric elements. It is possible to make inferences by looking at it from the side.

Further, the four lead wires 432 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB23 are divided into two rows on the left and right, and two lead wires 432 in each row are arranged vertically. Although the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 432 arranged in the vertical direction is shorter than the distance between the two rows on the left and right, it is smaller than the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 422 arranged in the left and right direction in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21. It's getting longer. From this, it can be seen that the four lead wires 432 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB23 are paired with each lead wire 432 in the left column and each lead wire 432 in the right column. , it is possible to infer that the pair of left and right lead wires 432 are from one electric element. Taking that assumption and focusing on the pair of left and right lead wires, the left lead wire 432 extends diagonally downward to the right from the solder part SLR, and the two leads in the right row The line 432 extends diagonally downward to the left from the solder portion SLR in a bent position. In other words, when the rear surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 is viewed from the front, the left side is The lead wire 432 on the right side is inclined downward by an angle of about 10 degrees, and the lead wire 432 on the right side is also inclined downward by an angle of about 10 degrees.

Due to the characteristics of each lead wire 432 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the way the lead wires are bent, etc.), it is possible to Of the four lead wires 432 soldered in the area, each lead wire 432 in the left row and each lead wire 432 in the right row form a pair (set), and each pair of lead wires 432 is It is possible to infer from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411 that it is a resistor placed horizontally (resistor 430B in this example) among multiple types of electric elements. It becomes.

Furthermore, the 72 lead wires 442 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB24 are divided into four upper and lower columns, and each row has 18 lead wires 442 arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The distance between the first and second rows from the top and the distance between the third and fourth rows from the top are greater than the distance between the second and third rows from the top. It has become significantly shorter. Further, each lead wire 442 in the first row from the top and each lead wire 442 in the second row from the top are arranged alternately in the left-right direction, and each lead wire 442 in the third row from the top and each lead wire 442 in the fourth row from the top The lead wires 442 are also arranged alternately in the left-right direction. Further, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 442 arranged in the left-right direction in each row is significantly narrower than the inter-row distance between the second and third rows from the top. Further, each lead wire 442 (the tip thereof) linearly protrudes from the solder portion SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface portion RS in an attitude perpendicular to the back surface portion RS. Such aspects of each lead wire 422 (number of lead wires, arrangement pitch of lead wires, arrangement of lead wires, distance between rows of lead wires, shape (posture) of lead wires, protrusion length of lead wires, etc.) )
Because of the characteristics, each lead wire 442 soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB24 is for an IC socket (IC socket 440A in this example) among the multiple types of electric elements, and the IC socket is connected to the IC socket. It is possible to infer whether a chip (control chip 450A in this example) is attached by looking at the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411.

Further, the eight lead wires 462 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB25 are divided into two rows, upper and lower, and the four lead wires 462 in each row are arranged so as to be lined up in the left-right direction. Although the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 462 arranged in the left-right direction is narrower than the distance between the two upper and lower rows, it is smaller than the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 422 arranged in the left-right direction in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21. It's getting wider. Therefore, in the eight lead wires 462 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB25, each lead wire 462 in the upper row and each lead wire 462 in the lower row form a pair (set), respectively. It is possible to infer that the pair of upper and lower lead wires 462 are from one electric element. Based on that assumption, and paying attention to the pair of upper and lower lead wires, the upper lead wire 462 extends diagonally upward to the right from the solder part SLR, and the lower lead wire 462 extends from the solder part SLR so as to be bent. It extends diagonally downward to the left from the SLR in a bent manner. In other words, when viewing the rear surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 from the front, with respect to a virtual line segment (not shown) connecting the root portion of the upper lead wire 462 and the root portion of the lower lead wire 462, The upper lead wire 462 is tilted to the right by an angle of approximately 160°, and the lower lead wire 462 is tilted to the left by an angle of approximately 160°.

The aspects of each lead wire 462 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the distance between the rows of lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the way the lead wires are bent, etc.) ), in the eight lead wires 462 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB25, each lead wire 462 in the upper row and each lead wire 462 in the lower row form a pair (set). , the rear surface RS of the printed circuit board 411 determines whether each pair of lead wires 462 is connected to a ceramic capacitor (ceramic capacitor 460A in this example) arranged vertically among multiple types of electric elements. It is possible to make inferences by looking at it from the side.

As shown in FIG. 17, a plurality of types of electric elements are also mounted in another predetermined area (area within the rectangular frame line FB30 indicated by a solid line) on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411. Specifically, the multiple types of electric elements include one information display lamp 470A placed horizontally, one resistor array 480A placed horizontally, and one independently placed information display lamp 470A. LED elements 490A are each mounted.

In FIG. 17, three rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33 are illustrated using two-dot chain lines. These rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33 are illustrated for convenience to explain the area where electric elements are mounted on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411, and are used for actual printing, etc. on the surface portion FS. It is not formed by Rectangular frame line FB31 indicates the area where information display lamp 470A is mounted, rectangular frame line FB32 indicates the area where resistor array 480A is mounted, and rectangular frame line FB33 indicates the area where LED element 490A is mounted. It shows.

The information display lamp 470A includes a rectangular parallelepiped-shaped package part 471 (having a 7-segment LED on its front surface that can display information such as a 4-digit number regarding the ratio of accessories), and a plurality of lamps extending from the package part 471. (12 in this example, see FIG. 18) lead wires 472. Each lead wire 472 is inserted into a plurality of predetermined through holes (not shown) formed in the main control board 410 and soldered. The resistor array 480A includes a rounded rectangular parallelepiped package part 481 and a plurality of lead wires 482 (nine in this example, see FIG. 18) extending from the package part 481. are respectively inserted into a plurality of predetermined through holes formed in the printed circuit board 411 and soldered. The LED element 490A includes a cannonball-shaped light-transmitting package portion 491 and two lead wires 482 (see FIG. 18) extending from the package portion 491, and each lead wire 492 is connected to the printed circuit board 411. They are inserted into two predetermined through holes formed and soldered.

FIG. 18 shows a front view of the main control board 410 from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411. The rectangular frame line FB40 shown as a solid line in FIG. 18 corresponds to the rectangular frame line FB30 shown in FIG. 17 (indicates the same position and the same size range on the front side FS and back side RS of the printed circuit board 411). The three rectangular frame lines FB41 to FB43 shown by two-dot chain lines in FIG. 18 correspond to the three rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33 shown in FIG. 17, respectively. The rectangular frame lines FB41 to FB43, like the rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33, are illustrated for convenience in order to explain the area where electric elements are mounted, and are actually formed by printing etc. on the back surface portion RS. It is not what is being done.

As shown in FIG. 18, a plurality of lead wires are soldered to the printed circuit board 411 in an area within the rectangular frame line FB40 on the back surface portion RS of the printed circuit board 411. As shown in FIG. Specifically, a total of 12 lead wires 472 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB41, a total of 9 lead wires 482 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB42, and a total of 12 lead wires 472 are soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB42. A total of two lead wires 432 are soldered to the area within the FB 43.

The 12 lead wires 472 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB41 are divided into two rows, upper and lower, and six lead wires 472 in each row are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 472 arranged in the left-right direction is a little narrower than the distance between the two upper and lower rows. Further, each lead wire 472 (the tip thereof) linearly protrudes from the solder portion SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface portion RS in an attitude perpendicular to the back surface portion RS. Such aspects of each lead wire 472 (number of lead wires, arrangement pitch of lead wires, arrangement of lead wires, distance between rows of lead wires, shape (posture) of lead wires, protrusion length of lead wires, etc. ), each lead wire 472 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB41 is connected to an information display lamp (information display lamp 470A in this example) placed horizontally among multiple types of electric elements. It is possible to infer whether this is the case by looking at the back surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411.

The nine lead wires 482 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB42 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of each lead wire 482 is approximately the same as the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 472 arranged in the left-right direction in the area within the rectangular frame line FB41. Also, among the nine lead wires 482, three lead wires 482 at the left end and three lead wires 482 at the right end are connected from the solder portion SLR to the back surface portion RS in a predetermined orientation perpendicular to the back surface portion RS. It protrudes in a straight line by the length of . On the other hand, among the nine lead wires 482, the three lead wires 482 at the center extend from the solder portion SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface portion RS in an upward or downward bending posture. There is. Specifically, among the three lead wires 482 in the center, the two lead wires 482 on the right side extend from the back surface part RS in a posture bent downward from the solder part SLR, and the two lead wires 482 on the left side One lead wire 482 extends from the back surface portion RS in a manner such that it is bent upward from the solder portion SLR. Due to the characteristics of each lead wire 482 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the way the lead wires are bent, etc.), it is possible to A printout indicates that the nine lead wires 482 soldered in the area are from a resistor array (resistance array 480A in this example) placed horizontally among multiple types of electrical elements. It is possible to estimate this by viewing from the rear surface RS side of the substrate 411.

Further, the two lead wires 492 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB43 are arranged in a line in the vertical direction. The arrangement pitch of each lead wire 492 is approximately the same as the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 472 arranged in the left-right direction in the area within the rectangular frame line FB41. Further, the two lead wires 492 extend from the solder portion SLR by a predetermined length in a bent position toward the right or downward. Specifically, of the two lead wires 492, the upper lead wire 492 extends from the back surface part RS in a bent position toward the right from the solder part SLR, and the lower lead wire 492 It extends from the back surface part RS in a bent position downward from the solder part SLR. Due to the characteristics of each lead wire 492 (the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the way the lead wires are bent, etc.), it is possible to The two lead wires 492 soldered in the area are connected to an LED element (LED element 490A in this example) among multiple types of electric elements. It is possible to infer from this.

In this way, in the main control board 410, when viewed from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411, it is possible to determine which type of electric element is located at which position based on the form of each lead wire soldered to the printed circuit board 411. It is now possible to estimate the orientation in which the objects are placed. Therefore, the arrangement of various electrical elements mounted on the front side can be confirmed simply by viewing the main control board 410 from the back side and visually checking the configuration of each lead wire. Also, when inspecting the main control board 410 (inspection performed before putting the main control board 410 into the main board case or taking it out from the main board case), the main control board 410 is viewed from the back side, and the back side of the printed circuit board 411 is If a defect such as a crack in the solder part is found in a predetermined area (position) of part RS, it is possible to identify the cause of the defect by visually checking the condition of each lead wire in that area. Since it is possible to quickly guess what type of electric element it is, work to correct the discovered defect (for example, replacing the electric element) can be carried out smoothly. In addition, the aspects of the lead wires include the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the distance between the rows of lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the way the lead wires are bent, and the lead wires. Although the protrusion length is shown as an example, it is not limited to this. The aspects of the lead wire may include aspects related to the strength of the lead wire, such as the thickness and cross-sectional shape of the lead wire (shape when the lead wire is viewed from the axial direction).

Note that three or more electric elements of the same type (same type and same type) may be mounted in a row on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411. In that case, even if the electronic elements are of the same type, the lead wires of those electronic elements on the back surface portion RS of the printed circuit board 411 may have different shapes. For example, when three or more IC drivers of the same type are lined up, each lead wire of the IC drivers placed at both ends of the line is perpendicular to the back side RS, and the lead wires are straight for a predetermined length from the back side RS. In contrast, there are examples in which each lead wire of an IC driver arranged in the center is arranged to protrude from the back surface part RS in an inclined attitude with respect to the back surface part RS. By paying attention to these points, it is possible to determine what type of electrical element is connected based on the form of each lead wire soldered to the printed circuit board 411 when viewed from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 411. It becomes easier to guess in what position and in what direction it is placed.

<Relationship between the distance between conductive layers of the board and the thickness of the game medal> FIG. 19 schematically shows the layer structure of the printed circuit board 411 (cross-sectional structure in the thickness direction of the board). As shown in the figure, the printed circuit board 411 is a double-sided board (
(also referred to as a "two-layer board"), which includes a board main body 412 made of an insulating plate material, and a second board made of a conductive thin film material such as copper foil on the surface 412a of the board main body 412. The second conductive layer 414 is formed on the back surface 412b of the substrate body 412 using a conductive thin film material such as copper foil. The first conductive layer 413 forms, on the surface 412a of the substrate main body part 412, a conductor pattern for a wiring circuit part, a land part for soldering, etc. formed around a through hole. Similarly, the second conductive layer 414 forms a conductor pattern for a wiring circuit section, a land section for soldering, etc. on the back surface 412b of the substrate main body section 412.

Note that in FIGS. 19 to 21, the thicknesses of the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 are illustrated to be considerably larger than their actual proportions in order to make them easier to see. Furthermore, in reality, a solder resist layer, a silk printing layer, etc. are also formed on the front surface 412a and the back surface 412b of the substrate main body portion 412, but illustration thereof is omitted. In this embodiment, the surface 412a of the board main body part 412, the first conductive layer 413, the solder resist layer, the silk printing layer, etc. are collectively referred to as the surface part (first surface part) FS of the printed circuit board 411 (or main control board 410). to be called. Similarly, the back surface 412b of the board body section 412, the second conductive layer 414, the solder resist layer, the silk printing layer, etc. are collectively referred to as the back surface section (second surface section) RS of the printed circuit board 411 (or main control board 410).

As shown in FIG. 19, the printed circuit board 411 has an interlayer distance DS1 between the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 (the shortest distance between two layers) that is larger than the thickness TH1 of one game medal ML (DS1 >TH1). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20, even if the side edge of the game medal ML comes into contact with the edge of the printed circuit board 411 during inspection of the main control board 410, the first conductive layer 413 The second conductive layer 414 is not electrically connected to the second conductive layer 414 via the game medal ML. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 from being electrically short-circuited via the game medal ML and causing a malfunction in the electric element or the like. Note that the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 are rarely formed to a position that reaches the edge of the printed circuit board 411. However, if the printed circuit board 411 is damaged and a part is missing, or if a part of the printed circuit board 411 is cut out (for example, when the above-mentioned drawing part is cut out, an unexpected crack occurs on the board). In such a case, the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 may be exposed at the edge of the printed circuit board 411.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the interlayer distance DS1 between the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 in the printed circuit board 411 is only half or less of the radius of curvature CR1 of the pachinko ball PCB. Therefore, even if the surface (outer surface) of the pachinko ball PCB comes into contact with the edge of the printed circuit board 411 during inspection of the main control board 410, the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer The layer 414 is not electrically connected through the pachinko ball PCB. Therefore, it is also possible to prevent the first conductive layer 413 and the second conductive layer 414 from being electrically short-circuited via the pachinko ball PCB and causing a malfunction in the electric element or the like. Note that the same relationship may hold true for medal members such as currencies other than the game medals ML used in games, and spherical members other than the pachinko ball PCB, and similar effects can be obtained even in such cases.

<Posture and protrusion height of lead wires of electrical elements mounted on the board on the back side of the board> FIG. 22 illustrates a plurality of types of electrical elements mounted on the front surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411 of the main control board 410. It also shows the posture and protrusion height of the lead wires of each electric element on the back side of the substrate. The illustrated electrical elements are an IC driver 420B, a resistor 430C, an IC socket 440B with a control chip 450B attached thereto, and a ceramic capacitor 460B. In FIG. 22, these electric elements are illustrated in a simplified manner. Further, a double-arrowed line DL1 shown in FIG. 22 indicates a direction perpendicular to the back surface portion RS (front surface portion FS) of the printed circuit board 411.

In the IC driver 420B, each lead wire 422 (only two shown) extending from the package part 421 passes through each predetermined through hole (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 411, and is connected from the back surface part RS of the printed circuit board 411. It protrudes in a posture that is approximately perpendicular to the back surface portion RS (perpendicular (90°) or within several degrees (for example, 5°) of error angle from the perpendicular). That is, the lead wire 422 (the axis thereof) of the portion protruding from the back surface portion RS of the printed circuit board 411 is substantially perpendicular to the back surface portion RS, and substantially parallel to the direction perpendicular to the back surface portion RS.

In the resistor 430C, two lead wires 432 extending from both ends of the package part 431 are bent and passed through predetermined through holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 411, and are connected to the back surface of the printed circuit board 411. It protrudes from the portion RS in an attitude inclined at a predetermined inclination angle TA1 (for example, an angle within a range of 20° or more and 85° or less) with respect to a direction perpendicular to the back surface portion RS. That is, the portion of the lead wire 432 protruding from the back surface portion RS of the printed circuit board 411 is largely inclined with respect to the direction perpendicular to the back surface portion RS.

In the IC socket 440B to which the control chip 450B is attached, each lead wire 442 (only four wires are shown) extending from the receiving frame portion 441 passes through each predetermined through hole (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 411. It protrudes from the back surface portion RS of the printed circuit board 411 in an attitude substantially perpendicular to the back surface portion RS. That is, the lead wire 442 (the axis thereof) of the portion protruding from the back surface portion RS of the printed circuit board 411 is substantially perpendicular to the back surface portion RS, and substantially parallel to the direction perpendicular to the back surface portion RS.

In the ceramic capacitor 460B, two lead wires 462 respectively extending from the package part 461 are bent and passed through predetermined through holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 411, and are connected from the back surface part RS of the printed circuit board 411. , protrudes in an inclined posture by a predetermined inclination angle TA2 (for example, an angle within a range of 20° or more and 85° or less) with respect to the direction perpendicular to the back surface portion RS. That is, the portion of the lead wire 462 protruding from the back surface portion RS of the printed circuit board 411 is largely inclined with respect to the direction perpendicular to the back surface portion RS.

The lead wire 422 of the IC driver 420B is thicker than the lead wire 432 of the resistor 430C, the lead wire 442 of the IC socket 440B, and the lead wire 462 of the ceramic capacitor 460B, and/or is made of a high-strength material. It has high strength. In addition, the protrusion height of the lead wire 422 of the IC driver 420B from the back surface part RS of the printed circuit board 411 (the shortest distance from the back surface part RS to the tip of the lead wire 422) OH1 is the protrusion height of the lead wire 432 of the resistor 430C. It is larger than the height OH2, the protrusion height OH3 of the IC socket 440B lead wire 442, and the protrusion height OH4 of the lead wire 462 of the ceramic capacitor 460B (in this example, OH1>OH2>OH3>OH4). , OH2, OH3, and OH4 are not limited to this).

Therefore, when testing the main control board 410, if the main control board 410 is placed on a test table, etc., the lead wires 422 of the IC driver 420B are placed on the test table before the lead wires of other electric elements. This can prevent the lead wires of other electrical elements from coming into contact with the inspection table. Moreover, since the lead wire 422 of the IC driver 420B comes into contact with the inspection table, the IC driver 420B supports the main control board 410, making it possible to make the main control board 410 independent. On the other hand, the strength of the lead wire 432 of the resistor 430C and the lead wire 462 of the ceramic capacitor 460B is relatively weak, and the parts protruding from the back surface part RS of the printed circuit board 411 are If the structure is such that the lead wires that are highly slanted come into contact first, there is a risk that those lead wires (lead wire 432 and lead wire 462) will be deformed and problems will occur when they come into contact. be.

Furthermore, if the main control board 410 is accidentally dropped during an inspection of the main control board 410, the lead wires 422 of the IC driver 420B may be placed on the test stand before the lead wires of other electrical elements. There is a high possibility that the product will come into contact with the floor surface. Therefore, while an impact is applied to the lead wire 422 of the IC driver 420B, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an impact is applied to the lead wires of other electric elements. Since the lead wires 422 of the IC driver 420B have high strength, cracks may occur in the part where the lead wires 422 are soldered when an impact is applied, and this has the advantage that it is easy to visually confirm that a problem has occurred. There is. On the other hand, even if an impact is applied to a lead wire with low strength, the lead wire will only be deformed and there is a low possibility that cracks will occur in the solder portion or the like. Therefore, there is a risk that the occurrence of a problem may be overlooked.

Note that in this embodiment, the lead wires of the IC driver are configured so that they tend to come into contact with the examination table, floor, etc. earlier than the lead wires of other electric elements, but if the lead wires of other electric elements It may be configured so that it is easy to come into contact with the lead wires of other electric elements before they come into contact with them. In that case, it is preferable that the lead wire of the other electric element has higher strength than the lead wire of the other electric element.

<Component names printed on the surface of the board> As shown in FIG. 23, a plurality of types of electric elements are mounted in a predetermined area (area within the rectangular frame line FB50 shown by a solid line) on the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 411. has been done. The rectangular frame line FB50 indicates the same area as the rectangular frame line FB30 in FIG. 17, but in FIG. 23, the plurality of types of electric elements mounted within the area are illustrated in greater numbers than in FIG. 17. . That is, in the area within the rectangular frame line FB50 in FIG. 23, in addition to the information display lamp 470A, the resistor array 480A, and the LED element 490A illustrated in the area within the rectangular frame line FB30 in FIG. A resistor 430D arranged horizontally, a resistor 430E arranged vertically, ceramic capacitors 460D and 460E arranged vertically, and a transistor 495A are mounted, respectively.

On the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411, component names are silk-printed in white near each of the mounted electrical elements so that each electrical element can be identified. Specifically, component names "R15", "SEG2", "RA3", and "IC11" are printed near each of the resistor 430D, information display lamp 470A, resistor array 480A, and IIC driver 420C. There is. Also, near each of the ceramic capacitor 460D, ceramic capacitor 460E, transistor 495A, resistor 430E, and LED element 490A, there are component names "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1", respectively. It is printed. The alphabetic characters in each part name indicate the type of electric element or the type of component of the electric element. For example, "R" is a resistor, "SEG" is a segment lamp, "RA" is a resistor array, "IC" is an integrated circuit, "C" is a ceramic capacitor, "Q" is a transistor, and "LED" is an LED element. show. When multiple part names are printed near a certain electrical element, the part name printed in the position closest to the certain electric element among the plural part names is basically A component name that includes English characters that match the type can be determined to be the component name of a certain electric element. Silk printing forming component names and component borders to be described later is applied only to the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 411, and not to the rear surface RS. Additionally, the names of each part are silk-printed so that they do not overlap each other.

Note that FIG. 23 corresponds to a front view of the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411 (main control board 410). That is, FIG. 23 shows a slot machine 1 with the front door 2 (see FIG. 6) open and an operator such as a clerk at a gaming parlor installed inside the housing 5 without tilting his head to the left or right. This corresponds to how the main control board 410 looks when viewed from the front. Therefore, in FIG. 23, the up, down, left and right directions from the operator's viewpoint (the up, down, left and right directions indicated in parentheses for each arrow shown in FIG. 23) are the up, down, left and right directions in space (the directions shown in FIG. (up, down, left and right directions). Here, the up, down, left, and right directions from the worker's perspective refer to the direction in which the worker's eyes are lined up left and right (the left eye side is on the left), and the direction perpendicular to the left and right direction is up and down (the top of the worker's head is upward). That is.

As shown in FIG. 23, when the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411 is viewed from the front, the component names “R15”, “SEG2”, “RA3”, and “IC11” printed on the surface portion FS are The characters constituting the part name are arranged in order from left to right. That is, these component names are arranged on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411 in a horizontal writing manner (left-horizontal writing) in which the characters are lined up from left to right when the surface portion FS is viewed from the front. On the other hand, for the part names "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1", which are also printed on the front surface FS, each character constituting the part name is They are arranged in order from the side to the top. In other words, these component names are written in the form of horizontal writing (characters (character strings) written horizontally from left to right) on the surface part FS of the printed circuit board 411 when viewed from the front. (rotated 90 degrees to the left (counterclockwise)). In this way, when the front surface section FS is viewed from the front, any part name printed on the front surface section FS is determined by whether the characters constituting the part name are arranged in the order from the left side to the right side. , are arranged in an order that continues from the bottom to the top, or are arranged in an order that continues from the bottom to the top.

Therefore, when the front door 2 of the slot machine 1 is open and the operator views the main control board 410 from the front without tilting his head to the left or right, "R15" and "SEG2" are displayed as shown in FIG. ”, “RA3”, and “IC11” are arranged in a natural order in which the letters that make up the part names are read from left to right when viewed from the operator (from the operator's perspective). It becomes. Therefore, these component names are easy to read and visually recognized by the operator. On the other hand, for the part names "C27," "C29," "Q7," "R22," and "LED1," the characters that make up the part names differ from the operator's perspective (from the operator's perspective). ), the order appears to be such that you have to read from the bottom to the top.

On the other hand, in FIG. 24, with the front door 2 of the slot machine 1 open, the operator places his or her body on the open end side of the front door 2 or the front side of the main control board 410 (the front side of the housing 5). This corresponds to the case where the main control board 410 is viewed while tilting the head of the holder (90°) to the left (toward the hinge end of the front door 2) from the operator's viewpoint. Therefore, in FIG. 24, the up, down, left and right directions from the operator's viewpoint (the up, down, left and right directions indicated in parentheses by each arrow shown in FIG. 24) are different from the up, down, left and right directions in space (the directions shown in FIG. (up, down, left and right directions) are not the same (deviated by 90 degrees).

With the front door 2 of the slot machine 1 open, the operator places his/her body on the open end side of the front door 2 or the front side of the main control board 410 and tilts his or her head to the left from the operator's perspective. When looking at the main control board 410, as shown in FIG. As seen from the operator's perspective (from the operator's perspective), each character appears to be in a natural order that can be read from left to right. Therefore, these component names become easier to read and visually recognize from the operator's point of view.

The same applies when the main control board 410 is installed on the back side of the front door 2 so as to face the housing 5 side. That is, when the front door 2 is open and the worker looks at the main control board 410 installed on the back side of the front door 2 without tilting his head to the left or right, "R15" and "SEG2" are displayed. , "RA3", and "IC11" appear to be arranged in a natural order in which the characters constituting the part names are read from left to right from the operator's perspective. In addition, with the front door 2 open, the worker places his or her body on the front side of the main control board 410 (the front side of the back of the front door 2) and turns his or her head to the left (front) from the worker's perspective. If you look at the main control board 410 installed on the back side of the front door 2 while tilting it toward the open end side of the door 2, you will see "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1". The parts names appear to be arranged in a natural order in which the characters constituting the part names are read from the left to the right from the operator's perspective.

When the main control board 410 is installed on the back side of the front door 2 so as to face the housing 5 side, an operator can place his or her body on the open end side of the front door 2 with the front door 2 open. The operator may look at the main control board 410 while tilting his or her head to the right (toward the hinge end of the front door 2) from the operator's perspective. In that case, the characters constituting the part names "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1" are arranged upside down from right to left from the operator's perspective. It looks like that.

Therefore, when the main control board 410 is installed on the back side of the front door 2, when the operator wants to check the component names, the operator can view it as described above (tilting his head toward the hinge end of the front door 2). You can avoid this kind of situation from happening by not looking at things the way you see things. The sub-control board in the slot machine 1 is installed on the back side of the front door 2 so as to face the housing 5, and the arrangement of the letters constituting each part name is the same as that of the main control board 410. be. Therefore, a situation similar to the case where the main control board 410 is installed on the back side of the front door 2 may occur. However, by taking advantage of this situation, the worker tilts his head toward the hinge end of the front door 2 and sees that the board he is looking at is the main control board 410 installed inside the housing 5. There is an advantage in that it is possible to identify whether it is a sub-control board installed on the back side of the front door 2 by looking at how the letters constituting the part name are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 23, characters indicating the manufacturer's name, board name (number), etc. (in this example, "NAMAE BANGOU33-X") are written in the area within the rectangular frame line FB50 on the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 411. has been done. Unlike the component names, these characters (also referred to as "board name characters") are not silk-printed but are formed of copper foil or the like that constitutes the conductive layer. Therefore, it is less noticeable than component names that are silk-printed in white. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to scrape off characters such as the board name, the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411 will be easily scratched and become noticeable. Therefore, it has the effect of deterring fraudulent acts such as scratching off characters such as the board name.

Each component name is printed at a position other than the lands around the through-holes formed on the printed circuit board 411 and the solder parts formed on the through-holes and lands by soldering so as not to overlap these parts. Ru. For example, as shown in FIG. 25A, when printing the component name "LED" near a through hole (not shown), it is printed so as not to overlap the land portion LND and the solder portion SLR. This makes it possible to clearly visually recognize the component names. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25(B), if the part name "LED" is printed so as to partially overlap the land portion LND and the solder portion SLR, part of the text will be missing. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to determine that the printed characters are "LED". That is, in the example shown in FIG. 25(B), there is a risk that "L" constituting the component name "LED" may be mistakenly recognized as "I", and "E" may be mistakenly recognized as "F". There is. Even when the component name is printed so as to partially overlap the land portion LND or the solder portion SLR, it is preferable to keep the overlap to such an extent that such erroneous recognition will not occur. Although the component name "LED" has been described here as an example, the same applies to other arbitrary component names.

<Component frame line printed on the board surface> As shown in FIG. 23, in the area within the rectangular frame line FB50 on the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 411, a component frame corresponding to the outline shape of the electrical element to be mounted is placed. The lines are silk-screened in white. Specifically, the component frame line PB1 for the resistor 430D, the component frame line PB2 for the resistor 430E, the component frame line PB3 for the ceramic capacitor 460D, the component frame line PB4 for the ceramic capacitor 460E, and the component frame line PB4 for the transistor 495A. A frame line PB5, a component frame line PB6 for the resistor array 480A, and a component frame line PB7 for the LED element 490A are printed, respectively. A component frame line for the information display lamp 470A and a component frame line for the IIC driver 420C are also printed, but are not shown.

Each component frame line is printed at a position excluding the lands around the through-holes formed on the printed circuit board 411 and the solder parts formed on the through-holes and lands by soldering so as not to overlap these parts. be done. For example, as shown in FIG. 26, in the case where a land portion LND and a solder portion SLR to which a lead wire (not shown) of the transistor 495A is soldered are located near the location where the transistor 495A is mounted, The component frame line PB5 for the transistor 495A is printed so as not to overlap the land portion LND and the solder portion SLR. Although the description has been given here by exemplifying the component frame line PB5 for the transistor 495A, the same applies to any other component frame line. Note that each component frame line is preferably printed a little apart from the land portion LND so as not to contact the land portion LND, like the component frame line PB5 shown in FIG. 26. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the silk printing paint from adhering to the land portion LND or the through hole portion.

<Ensuring Visibility of Information Display Lamp> As shown in FIG. 23, the LED element 490A is mounted relatively close to the information display lamp 470A. Further, as shown in FIG. 27, when the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411 is used as a height reference, the height HT1 of the information display lamp 470A is higher than the height HT2 of the LED element 490A (HT1 >HT2). Furthermore, the light emitted by the LED element 490A has relatively high brightness. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED element 490A reaches the information display lamp 470A and is reflected on the side surface of the package portion 471 of the information display lamp 470A, which may reduce the visibility of the information displayed on the information display lamp 470A. . Therefore, in the information display lamp 470A, matte printing (for example, white color) is applied to the side surface of the package portion 471 to make it difficult to reflect light. Specifically, the light reflectance at the side surface of the package portion 471 is configured to be lower than the light reflectance at the lead wire 472 of the information display lamp 470A. Thereby, even if the LED element 490A emits light, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the information displayed on the information display lamp 1070. When mounting a setting display lamp on the front surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 411, it is preferable to perform similar treatment on the side surface of the package portion of the setting display lamp.

<Configuration of sub-control device and power supply device> Next, the structure of the sub-control device 500 and power supply device 55 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

(Structure of sub-control device) The sub-control device 500 is attached above the reel window W on the rear side of the front door 2, as shown in FIG. The sub-control device 500, like the main control device 100, is configured by accommodating a sub-control board 502 on which various components are mounted in a sub-board case 502 consisting of a case body and a case lid.

FIG. 28 shows a front view of the slot machine 1 viewed from the rear to the front with the sub-control device 500 installed on the front door 2 and the case cover of the sub-board case 502 removed. Here, the up, down, left and right directions indicated by arrows in FIG. 28 correspond to the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 2 and 4. As shown in FIG. 28, the sub-control board 502 is composed of a sub-main board 510 and a sub-sub board 520, and when the sub-control device 500 is installed on the front door 2, the sub-main board 510 and the sub-sub board 520 The component mounting surface faces backward, and the component mounting surface is along the vertical direction. Also, the component occupancy rate (the total area of all components mounted on the board area (the total area of each component when the component mounting surface of the board is viewed from above) of the sub-control board 502) ) is approximately 50%.

The shape of the sub-main board 510 is rectangular, and its component mounting surface includes integrated circuits such as a sub-CPU 511, sub-ROM 512, sub-RAM 513, and three-terminal regulator 514, active elements such as transistors and LEDs, resistors, and ceramic capacitors. Various electronic components (electronic elements) are mounted thereon, including passive elements such as electrolytic capacitors and toroidal coils. Further, a connecting connector 515 electrically connected to a connecting connector 528 of the sub-sub board 520 is provided at the center of the left edge of the sub-main board 510. Furthermore, a plurality of electrical connectors 516, 516, . . . are arranged on the upper edge, right edge, and lower edge of the sub-main board 510, respectively.

The shape of the sub-sub board 520 is rectangular, and its component mounting surface includes an image processing CPU 521, an image ROM 522, a VIDEO RAM 523, an audio processing board 524 on which an audio ROM storing audio data and a sound source IC are mounted, and a logic IC 525. Various electronic components (electronic elements) including integrated circuits such as, active elements such as transistors and LEDs, passive elements such as resistors, ceramic capacitors, electrolytic capacitors, and toroidal coils, connection connectors 526, slide switches 527, etc. Electrical components are mounted. A connection connector 528 electrically connected to the connection connector 515 of the sub-main board 510 is provided at the center of the right edge of the sub-sub board 520. By connecting the connector 515 of the sub-main board 510 and the connector 528 of the sub-sub board 520, the sub-main board 510 and the sub-sub board 520 are electrically connected.

(Configuration of Power Supply Device) The power supply device 55 converts AC power input from the outside into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage value (for example, +5V, +12V, etc.), and outputs it to various devices installed inside the housing 5. . The power supply device 55 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and as shown in FIG. installed in condition. The front surface of the power supply device 55 is a resin front panel provided with a power switch for turning on the power to the slot machine 1, and the top surface, bottom surface, back surface, left side surface, and right side surface are formed of metal plates. ing. Further, the metal plates on the top surface, bottom surface, back surface, and left side surface are integrally molded as a single member, and the above-mentioned front panel is attached to the front surface of this member. Further, the metal plate on the right side is configured to be removable, and by removing the metal plate on the right side, a power supply board 550, which will be described later, can be housed inside the power supply device 55.

FIG. 29 is a front view of the slot machine 1 when viewed from the right to the left with the power supply device 55 installed on the bottom plate 5d inside the housing 5 and with the metal plate on the right side of the power supply device 55 removed. Shown below. Here, the up-down and front-back directions shown by arrows in FIG. 29 correspond to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, a power supply board 550 is provided inside the power supply device 55, and when the power supply device 55 is installed in the housing 5, the component mounting surface of the power supply board 550 faces toward the right. direction, and the component mounting surface is in a state along the vertical direction. Furthermore, the component occupancy rate on the power supply board 550 is approximately 50%.

The power supply board 550 has a rectangular shape, and its component mounting surface includes integrated circuits such as a logic IC 551 and three-terminal regulators 552a, 552b, and 552c, active elements such as transistors and LEDs, and resistors, ceramic capacitors, and electrolytic capacitors. , various electronic components (electronic elements) including passive elements such as toroidal coils and varistors are mounted. Here, the electrolytic capacitors mounted on the various boards (main control board 111, sub-control board 502, power supply board 550) of this embodiment have a rated voltage of 50 V and a capacitance of up to 270 μF (external dimensions are 8 mm in diameter, Small electrolytic capacitors with a rated voltage of 50 V and a capacitance of over 270 μF and up to 1000 μF (external dimensions up to 12 mm in diameter and 25 mm in height), and medium-sized electrolytic capacitors with a rated voltage of 50 V and a capacitance of over 1000 μF and up to 4700 μF. There are three types of large electrolytic capacitors (external dimensions up to 18 mm in diameter and 40 mm in height). Further, on the upper edge of the power supply board 550, there is a power input connector 553 to which AC power from the outside is input, and a power supply of various voltages generated in the power supply board 550 is output to various devices installed inside the housing 5. Power output connectors 554a, 554b, and 554c are provided. Furthermore, a panel connector 555 is provided on the front edge of the power supply board 550 for electrical connection to a power switch (not shown) attached to the front panel 55a.

An opening is provided in the upper surface 55b of the power supply device 55 so that various power cable connectors can be fitted into the power input connector 553 and the power output connectors 554a, 554b, and 554c. Further, the bottom surface 55c of the power supply device 55 is provided with a large number of round heat radiation holes (not shown) for discharging the heat inside the power supply device 55 to the outside. Further, in order to release the heat released from these heat radiation holes to the outside, a gap TH2 is provided between the bottom plate 5d of the housing 5 and the bottom surface 55c by a spacer SP attached to the bottom surface 55c.

The size of this gap TH2 (the distance between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c) is larger than the thickness of one game medal and smaller than the thickness of two game medals. In this way, by providing the gap TH2 between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c, the heat generated inside the power supply device 55 is released into the casing 5 through the bottom surface 55c. The rise in temperature is less likely to adversely affect various components mounted on the power supply board 550. In addition, since the size of the gap TH2 is made larger than the thickness of one game medal, a gap is secured between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c, but there is no possibility that the game medal will get caught in this gap. I can do it. For example, if the size of the gap TH2 is set to be approximately the same as the thickness of one game medal, game medals spilled from the hopper 51 of the medal payout device 50 will be caught between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c. , it may become difficult to take out the trapped game medals.

Further, by making the size of the gap TH2 larger than the thickness of one game medal, even if a game medal falls between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c, it can be easily taken out. In addition, by making the size of the gap TH2 smaller than the thickness of two game medals, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that two overlapping game medals will be caught between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c. In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility that foreign objects other than game medals will enter between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c. For example, when transporting the slot machine 1, even if a strong impact is applied in the vertical direction when lowering the slot machine 1 from the loading platform of a transportation truck to the ground, a gap is provided between the bottom plate 5d and the bottom surface 55c. Therefore, there is room for the bottom surface 55c of the power supply device 55 to flex, and it can be expected that the impact transmitted to the power supply board 550 will be alleviated by the flexure of the bottom surface 55c.

(Arrangement of components mounted on sub-control board and power supply board) Next, the arrangement of various parts mounted on sub-control board 502 and power supply board 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. Figure 30 shows a component that has lead wires extending from the component body, and is soldered to the board with the component body floating above the surface of the board (that is, with a gap between the component body and the board surface). This indicates that the attached part is tilted due to some reason. Here, the causes of parts tilting include, for example, a shock being applied when the slot machine 1 is lowered to the ground, being pushed by a wire inserted through a gap in the board case etc. due to fraudulent activity, or being pushed by a wire inserted through a gap in the board case, etc. A possible cause is that the worker accidentally touched a component on the board when installing the board.

30(a-1) to (a-3) show a state in which the components attached to the area BS1 of the sub-sub board 520 shown in FIG. 28 are tilted. Here, FIG. 30(a-1) shows the state of the region BS1 when viewed from the right to the left, and FIG. 30(a-2) shows the state of the region BS1 from the bottom to the top. (The direction of arrow A in FIG. 30(a-1)), and FIG. 30(a-3) shows the state when viewed from the rear to the front of area BS1 (FIG. The figure shows the state when viewed in the direction of arrow B). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 30(a-1) to (a-3) are similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG.

In the area BS1, the main bodies of LEDLs1 and Ls2 are mounted side by side in the left-right direction while floating from the surface of the sub-sub board 520, and the resistor Rs1 is mounted below them. (a-3) shows a state in which the LEDLs1 is tilted downward. At this time, since the main body (light emitting part) of LEDLs1 comes into contact with the main body part of resistor Rs1, the lead wire extending from the main body of LEDLs1 does not come into contact with the lead wire of resistor Rs1.

30(b-1) to (b-3) show a state in which the components attached to the area BP1 of the power supply board 550 shown in FIG. 29 are tilted. Here, FIG. 30(b-1) shows the state of the region BP1 when viewed from the front to the rear, and FIG. 30(b-2) shows the state of the region BP1 when viewed from the bottom to the top (Fig. 30(b-1)), and FIG. 30(b-3) shows the state when viewed from the direction of arrow A in FIG. 30(b-1). This shows the state when viewed in the direction of arrow B). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 30(b-1) to (b-3) are also similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG.

In the area BP1, the main body of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 is mounted in a state floating from the surface of the power supply board 550, and the resistor Rp1 is mounted below it, as shown in FIGS. 30(b-1) to (b-3). shows a state in which the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 is tilted downward. At this time, since the main body of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 contacts the main body of the resistor Rp1, the lead wire extending from the main body of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 does not come into contact with the lead wire of the resistor Rp1. Here, for example, if the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 and the resistor Rp1 are mounted near the lower periphery of the power supply board 550, when the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cp1 tilts downward and contacts the main body of the resistor Rp1, the medium-sized electrolytic The capacitor Cp1 may be mounted so that its top does not protrude from the lower periphery of the substrate.

30(c-1) to (c-3) show a state in which the components attached to the area BP2 of the power supply board 550 shown in FIG. 29 are tilted. Here, FIG. 30(c-1) shows the state of the region BP2 when viewed from the front to the rear, and FIG. 30(c-2) shows the state of the region BP2 when viewed from the top to the bottom (Fig. 30(c-1)), and FIG. 30(c-3) shows the state when viewed from the direction of arrow A in FIG. 30(c-1). The figure shows the state when viewed in the direction of arrow B). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 30(c-1) to (c-3) are also similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG.

In the region BP2, the main body of the fuse Fp1 is mounted in a state floating from the surface of the power supply board 550, and the ceramic capacitor Cp2 is mounted above it, and FIGS. 30(c-1) to (c-3) show the fuse Fp1. This shows a state in which Fp1 is tilted upward. At this time, the main body of fuse Fp1 comes into contact with the main body of ceramic capacitor Cp2, so the lead wire extending from the main body of fuse Fp1 does not come into contact with the lead wire of ceramic capacitor Cp2.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 30 (c-2), the lead wire of the ceramic capacitor Cp2 has a substantially S-shaped bent portion bd (the portion surrounded by a broken line in the figure) at a position close to the component body. . As a result, even if a vertical force is applied to the ceramic capacitor Cp2, the force will be absorbed by the bent portion bd, and it can be expected that the force applied to the lead wire near the substrate surface will be reduced. This makes it difficult for the lead wire to break, making it difficult for parts to malfunction.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if a component mounted while floating from the board is tilted for some reason, the body of the tilted component will come into contact with the body of another component or the surface of the board, preventing further damage. Since tilting is prevented, the leads of each component will not come into contact with each other. Therefore, even if a component mounted while floating on the board is tilted, the lead wire of that component will not come into contact with the lead wire of a nearby component and cause a short circuit. It is possible to make it difficult to cause defects in parts that have been removed. That is, by making it difficult for parts to malfunction, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the gaming machine will stop operating, and the player can smoothly play the game.

Here, it is only necessary to leave a space between the parts so that even if a certain part tilts, it will not come into contact with other surrounding parts, but since the space in which the device can be installed inside the housing 5 is limited. , it is difficult to increase the size of the substrate. Additionally, if a connector is placed on the board, placing parts near it may cause damage to the parts when attaching or removing the harness to the connector, so avoid placing parts around the connector. desirable. Furthermore, regarding LEDs and fuses, space is also required to ensure visibility of the light emitting parts and fuses. Under these circumstances, it is difficult to secure enough space for each component to be placed so that even if the component is tilted, it will not come into contact with other components around it. Therefore, in such a case, when a part is tilted, the main body of the part should be placed in contact with the main body or lead wire of other surrounding parts, so that the lead wires of the other parts come into contact with each other. I try not to.

Next, FIG. 31 shows a component having lead wires extending from the component body, with the component body floating above the surface of the board (that is, a state where there is a gap between the component body and the board surface). This indicates a state in which a component soldered to a board and mounted near the periphery of the board is tilted for some reason.

31(a-1) to (a-3) show a state in which the components attached to the area BS2 of the sub-sub board 520 shown in FIG. 28 are tilted. Here, FIG. 31(a-1) shows the state of the area BS2 when viewed from the right to the left, and FIG. 31(a-2) shows the area BS2 from the bottom to the top. (The direction of arrow A in FIG. 31(a-1)), and FIG. 31(a-3) shows the state when viewed from the rear to the front of area BS2 (FIG. The figure shows the state when viewed in the direction of arrow B). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 31(a-1) to (a-3) are similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG.

In the area BS2, the main body of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cs1 is mounted in a state floating from the surface of the sub-sub board 520, and FIGS. 31(a-1) to (a-3) show that the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cs1 is tilted downward. Indicates the condition. Here, the tilt of the medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cs1 stops when the peripheral edge of the bottom of the main body comes into contact with the surface of the board (see the part surrounded by the broken line in the figure). In more detail, a medium-sized electrolytic capacitor Cs1 is mounted at a position such that the head (of the main body) does not protrude from the periphery of the substrate (see the dashed-dotted line in the figure).

31(b-1) to (b-3) show a state where the components attached to the area BP2 of the power supply board 550 shown in FIG. 29 are tilted. Here, FIG. 31(b-1) shows the state of the region BP2 when viewed from the front to the rear, and FIG. 31(b-2) shows the state of the region BP2 from the bottom to the top (FIG. 31(b-1) Figure 31 (b-3) shows the state when looking at area BP2 from the right to the left (the direction of arrow B in Figure 31 (b-1)). It shows the current state. Further, the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 31(b-1) to (b-3) are also similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG.

As described above, in the region BP2, the main body of the fuse Fp1 is placed floating above the surface of the power supply board 550, and the ceramic capacitor Cp2 is placed above it. FIGS. 31(b-1) to (b-3) show a state in which the fuse Fp1 is tilted downward. At this time, the body of the fuse Fp1 stops tilting when the side surface of the body comes into contact with the surface of the board (see the part surrounded by the broken line in the figure). The fuse Fp1 is mounted in such a position that the head (head) of the fuse Fp1 does not protrude from the periphery of the board (see the dashed line in the figure). In this way, as described above, when the fuse Fp1 is tilted upward, the lead wire of the fuse Fp1 does not come into contact with the lead wire of the ceramic capacitor Cp1, and when the fuse Fp1 is tilted downward, the main body portion is not in contact with the periphery of the board. It is mounted in a position that does not protrude from the outside.

31(c-1) to (c-3) show a state in which the components attached to the area BP3 of the power supply board 550 shown in FIG. 29 are tilted. Here, FIG. 31(c-1) shows the state of the area BP3 when viewed from the front to the rear, and FIG. 31(c-2) shows the area BP3 in the direction from the bottom to the top (see the figure). 31(c-1)), and FIG. 31(c-3) shows the state as seen from the direction of arrow A in FIG. 31(c-1). The figure shows the state when viewed in the direction of arrow B). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 31(c-1) to (c-3) are also similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG.

In the area BP3, the main bodies of LEDLp1 and Lp2 are mounted side by side in the left-right direction while floating from the surface of the power supply board 550, and a resistor Rp2 is mounted above LEDLp1. c-3) shows a state in which the LED Lp1 is tilted downward. At this time, the tilt of the main body (light emitting part) of LEDLs1 stops when the bottom peripheral edge of the main body comes into contact with the surface of the board (see the part surrounded by a broken line in the figure). In more detail, the LED Lp1 is mounted at a position such that the head portion of the main body does not protrude from the periphery of the substrate (see the dashed line in the figure).

In this way, in this embodiment, even if a component mounted while floating from the board is tilted for some reason, the main body of the tilted component will come into contact with the surface of the board, and a part of the component will be attached to the periphery of the board. It does not protrude outside. Therefore, even if a component mounted while floating from the board is tilted, there is no risk that the component will be damaged by hitting the board case housing the board or the wall of the device main body. Therefore, by making it difficult for the parts mounted on the board to malfunction, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the gaming machine will stop operating, and the player can smoothly play the game.

Here, it is only necessary to leave a space between the mounted components to the extent that even if a certain component is tilted, it will not come into contact with other surrounding components, but due to the circumstances mentioned above, even if a mounted component is tilted, it will not come into contact with surrounding mounted components. It becomes difficult to secure a space for each mounted component to such an extent that it does not interfere with the mounting, and especially when the component occupation rate on the board becomes high, it may be necessary to arrange the mounted components near the periphery of the board. Therefore, even in such a case, the arrangement is such that when a certain component is tilted, a part of the main body of the component does not protrude from the periphery of the board.

Next, the directions of the plurality of lead wires extending from the components mounted on the board will be explained with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. First, FIGS. 32(a-1) and (a-2) show the mounting state of components attached to area BP4 of power supply board 550 shown in FIG. 29. Here, FIG. 32(a-1) shows the state of the region BP4 when viewed from the front to the rear, and FIG. 32(a-2) shows the state of the region BP4 from the right to the left. This shows the state when viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 31(a-1). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 32(a-1) and (a-2) are similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG. 2.

A large electrolytic capacitor Cp2 is mounted in the region BP4. As shown in FIG. 29, two large electrolytic capacitors are mounted behind the large electrolytic capacitor (Cp2) mounted in area BP4, and these large electrolytic capacitors are also It has the same size as the large electrolytic capacitor Cp2 shown in (a-2). As shown in FIGS. 32(a-1) and (a-2), two lead wires LN1 and LN2 extend from the bottom of the large electrolytic capacitor Cp2. The LN2s are mounted on the board so that they are aligned in the vertical direction (in other words, the direction of the line connecting the lead wires LN1 and LN2 is in the vertical direction).

32(b-1) and (b-2) show the mounting state of the components attached to the area BP5 of the power supply board 550 shown in FIG. 29. Here, FIG. 32(b-1) shows the state of the area BP5 when viewed from the front to the rear, and FIG. 32(b-2) shows the area BP5 in the direction from the right to the left. This shows the state when viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 31(b-1). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 32(b-1) and (b-2) are similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG. The LED Lp3 is mounted in the area BP5, and as shown in FIGS. 32(b-1) and (b-2), two lead wires LN3 and LN4 extend from the bottom surface of the LED Lp3. The LED Lp3 is mounted on the board so that the lead wires LN3 and LN4 are aligned in the vertical direction (in other words, the direction of the line connecting the lead wires LN3 and LN4 is in the vertical direction).

32(c-1) and (c-2) show the mounting state of the components attached to the area BS3 of the sub-main board 510 shown in FIG. 28. Here, FIG. 32(c-1) shows the state of the area BS3 when viewed from the right to the left, and FIG. 32(c-2) shows the area BS3 in the direction from the rear to the front. This shows the state when viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 31(c-1). Note that the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 32(c-1) and (c-2) are similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG.

A fuse Fs1 held by fuse clips Fh1 and Fh2 is mounted in the region BS3. Terminals LN5a and LN5b, which are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, are formed in a protruding manner on the bottom of the fuse clip Fh1, and terminals LN6a and LN6b, which are arranged in a left-right direction, are formed in a protruding manner on the bottom of the fuse clip Fh2. has been done. Terminals LN5a, LN5b, LN6a, and LN6b of the fuse clips Fh1 and Fh2 are soldered to the power supply board 550 along the vertical direction and at intervals that can hold the fuse Fs1.

In addition, in FIGS. 32(c-1) and (c-2), fuse Fs1 is held by fuse clips Fh1 and Fh2, but fuse Fp1 shown in FIGS. 30(c-1) to (c-3) is held by fuse clips Fh1 and Fh2. For fuses with lead wires extending from both ends of the fuse body, the lead wires should be aligned vertically (in other words, the direction of the line connecting the two lead wires should be in the vertical direction). It may also be mounted on the board.

Here, for example, if a large impact is applied in the vertical direction when the slot machine 1 is lowered to the ground during the transportation process, the main body of the component mounted on the board may be caused to move in the vertical direction due to the impact. There is a risk of it tipping over. In particular, large electrolytic capacitors are large in size and weight, so if two lead wires are mounted on a board side by side, if a large impact is applied in the vertical direction, the lead wires will easily break. There is a risk that the lead wire will bend and the component body will tilt in the vertical direction, causing a large load to be applied to the lead wire and causing it to break. Therefore, as shown in each figure in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, the component is mounted on the board so that a plurality of lead wires extending from the component are lined up in the vertical direction. Even if a large force in the vertical direction is applied to the component body due to a large impact, the tilting of the component body in the vertical direction is suppressed, so that the lead wires of components mounted on the board etc. This can make it difficult to cause problems such as breakage. In this way, by making it difficult for parts to malfunction, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the gaming machine will stop operating, and the player can smoothly play the game. Note that the lead wires of small electrolytic capacitors and medium-sized electrolytic capacitors, which are less susceptible to impacts than large electrolytic capacitors, may be mounted on the board so as to be lined up in the left-right direction.

Note that the direction of the lead wires of components mounted on the board is not limited to the large electrolytic capacitor, LED, and fuse shown in FIG. 32, but can be applied to other components as well. For example, the lead wires of the fuse Fp1 in the area BP2 shown in FIGS. 30(c-1) to (c-1) and FIGS. 31(b-1) to (b-3) are mounted on the board so as to be vertically aligned. You can do it like this. In this case, as described above, when the fuse Fp1 is tilted upward, the lead wire of the fuse Fp1 will not come into contact with the lead wire of the ceramic capacitor Cp1, and when the fuse Fp1 is tilted downward, the main body portion will not come into contact with the lead wire of the ceramic capacitor Cp1. Not only can it be prevented from protruding from the periphery of the slot machine 1, but also it is possible to prevent the lead wire from breaking due to the impact applied to the slot machine 1.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 33(a-1) to (a-3), the lead wires of the components shown in FIG. Orientation can be applied. Here, FIG. 33(a-1) shows the state of the area BP6 when viewed from the front to the rear, and FIG. 33(a-2) shows the area BP6 in the direction from the right to the left. FIG. 33(a-3) shows the state when looking at area BP6 from below to above. Note that the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 33(a-1) to (a-3) are similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG.

In the toroidal coil TLp1, one end LN7 and the other end LN8 of the winding wound around the toroidal core tc, which is an annular body having a rectangular cross section, serve as lead wires. As shown in FIG. 33(a-1), when the toroidal coil TLp1 is viewed from the front to the rear, one end LN7 of the winding extends from above the toroidal core tc, and the other end LN8 extends from the bottom of the toroidal core tc. It is extending. Furthermore, when the toroidal coil TLp1 is viewed from the right to the left as shown in FIG. 33(a-1), one end of the winding LN7 and LN8 extends from the center position of the toroidal core tc in the front-rear direction. become. Therefore, the toroidal coil TLp1 is mounted on the board so that one ends LN7 and LN8 of the windings are aligned in the vertical direction (in other words, the direction of the line connecting the lead wires LN7 and LN8 is in the vertical direction).

Further, the power supply device 55 of the present embodiment houses the power supply board 550 in a housing made of a front panel made of resin and a box made of metal. It may be housed in a transparent resin board case. In this case, the power switch installed on the resin front panel is mounted on the power supply board 550, and an opening for the power switch is provided in the lid of the board case so that it can be turned on and off from the outside. good. Even in such a configuration, the orientation of the lead wires of the components mounted on the board shown in FIG. 32 can be applied.

As an example, FIGS. 33(b-1) and 33(b-2) show a state in which a power switch is mounted on a power supply board 550'. Figure 33 (b-1) shows the power supply board 550' when viewed from the front to the rear, and Figure 33 (b-2) shows the power supply board 550' viewed from the right to the left. Shows the state when viewed in the direction. Note that the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 33(b-1) and (b-2) are similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG. 2.

The power switch SW1 shown in FIGS. 33(b-1) and (b-2) is provided with four terminals: terminals LN9a and LN9b and terminals LN10a and LN10b, which are spaced apart in the vertical direction. . Further, as shown in FIG. 33(b-2), terminals LN9a and LN9b and terminals LN10a and LN10b are provided in the power switch SW1 in parallel in the front-rear direction, respectively. In this case, the power switch SW1 is mounted on the power supply board 550' so that the terminals LN9a and LN9b and the terminals LN10a and LN10b are located in the vertical direction.

Note that the arrangement of components on the boards shown in FIGS. 30 to 33 has been explained using the components mounted on the sub-control board 502 and the power supply board 550 as examples, but the parts mounted on the main control board 111 It is also applicable to Further, the arrangement of components on the board shown in FIGS. 30 to 33 is not limited to a board provided in a slot machine, but can also be applied to a board provided in a Pachinko gaming machine.

<Configuration of Reel Unit> Next, the structure of the reel unit 60 shown in FIG. 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40. As shown in FIG. 34, the reel unit 60 includes first to third reel modules 600a to 600c, a reel module mounting member 61, a relay board 65, and a board cover 66. The reel module mounting member 61 is formed of a resin material into a box shape with openings on the front and right sides, and accommodates the first to third reel modules 600a to 600c side by side in the left and right direction (see the arrows in FIG. 2). configured as possible. That is, the reel module mounting member 61 has three storage positions, left, middle, and right, with the first reel module 600a in the left storage position and the second reel module 600b in the center storage position. , the third reel module 600c is accommodated in the right accommodation position, respectively.

An upper flange portion 62 is formed above the opening of the reel module mounting member 61, and the upper flange portion 62 is connected to an upper bracket formed at the upper portion of the reel bracket 601 in each of the first to third reel modules 600a to 600c. The portions 602 are coupled by a bracket coupling member 641. A lower flange portion 62 is formed on the lower side of the opening of the reel module mounting member 61, and the lower flange portion 62 has a lower portion formed at the lower part of the reel bracket 601 in each of the first to third reel modules 600a to 600c. The side bracket coupling portion 608 is coupled by a bracket coupling member 641.

A board mounting portion 64 is formed on the top of the reel module mounting member 61. A relay board 65 and a board cover 66 are attached to the board attachment part 64 . The relay board 65 is attached and fixed to the board attachment part 64 by fixing means (not shown) such as screws. The relay board 65 is electrically connected to the main control device 100, and controls the operation of the first to third reel modules 600a to 600c in accordance with a reel control signal transmitted from the main control device 100. Further, the relay board 65 relays various commands transmitted from the main control device 100 to the sub-control device 500, and relays signals exchanged between the main control device 100 and the medal payout device 50. The board cover 66 is made of a transparent resin material and is formed into a box shape that can cover the relay board 65 from above, and is attached to the board mounting portion 64 by being connected to the board mounting part 64 by a cover joining member (not shown). It has become.

(Configuration of Reel Module) Next, the first to third reel modules 600a to 600c will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. The second reel module 600b has the same configuration as the first reel module 600a, except that it uses a second reel 3b with a different symbol from the left reel 3a, and detailed illustration and explanation will be omitted. The third reel module 600c has the same configuration as the first reel module 600a, except that it includes a right reel 3c with a different symbol from the left reel 3a (and middle reel 3b), and detailed illustration and explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the first reel module 600a includes a left reel 3a, a reel bracket 601, a reel sensor 621, a back lamp unit 650, a stepping motor 680, and a reel connecting member 690. It is composed of The reel bracket 601 is formed into a plate shape using a resin material, and a reel mo 680, a back lamp unit 650, and a reel sensor 621 (see FIG. 36) are attached to the left side of the reel bracket 601. .

A plate-shaped upper bracket coupling portion 602 is formed at the upper front portion of the reel bracket 601 . The upper bracket coupling portion 602 is coupled to the left side of the middle portion of the upper flange portion 502 (see FIG. 34) of the reel module mounting member 501 using a bracket coupling member 641. A plate-shaped lower bracket coupling portion 608 is formed on the front lower side of the reel bracket 601 . The lower bracket coupling portion 608 is coupled to the left side of the middle portion of the lower flange portion 508 (see FIG. 34) of the reel module mounting member 501 using a bracket coupling member 641. Note that the bracket coupling member 641 is constructed using a nylatch or the like.

An upper connector mounting portion 603 is formed on the left side of the upper bracket coupling portion 602 . A first motor cable connector 606 (see FIG. 34) to which a bifurcated motor cable (not shown) connected to the stepping motor 680 and the reel sensor 621 is connected is attached to the upper connector attachment portion 603. This first motor cable connector 606 is connected to the reel relay board 65 (see FIG. 34) by a cable. Guide pin engagement holes 604 are formed on both sides of the upper connector attachment portion 603 to engage guide pins 607 (see FIG. 34) of the first motor cable connector 606. The first motor cable connector 606 attached to the upper connector attachment part 603 is a reel relay connector disposed on the front part of the reel relay board 65 when the first reel module 600a is accommodated in the reel module attachment member 61. (not shown) to be electrically connected.

Note that one end of the bifurcated motor cable described above is electrically connected to the motor connector 675 of the stepping motor 680, and the other end is electrically connected to the sensor connector (not shown) of the reel sensor 621. . Further, a cable insertion portion 605 is formed in the lower right portion of the upper bracket coupling portion 602 with a cutout through which a motor cable extending toward the stepping motor 680 and the reel sensor 621 is inserted.

A rear connector mounting portion 613 is formed at the upper rear portion of the reel bracket 601. The rear connector mounting portion 613 has a first lamp provided at one end of a lamp cable (not shown) that is electrically connected to a back lamp board 653 (see FIG. 38) on which a plurality of high-intensity LEDs are mounted. A cable connector 616 is attached. Guide pin engagement holes 614, into which guide pins 617 of the first lamp cable connector 616 engage, are formed on both sides of the rear connector attachment portion 613. The first lamp cable connector 616 attached to the rear connector attachment part 613 connects to the lamp relay connector (not shown) disposed on the lamp relay board when the first reel module 600a is housed in the reel module attachment member 61. By fitting with the back lamp board 653, it is electrically connected to the back lamp board 653.

Note that when the first reel module 600a is housed in the reel module mounting member 61, the first motor cable connector 606 (see FIG. 34) is connected to the reel relay connector (not shown) disposed on the reel relay board 65. The first lamp cable connector 616 is configured to fit and be electrically connected to a lamp relay connector (not shown) disposed on the lamp relay board. be done. As a result, simply by accommodating and attaching the first reel module 600a to the reel module mounting member 61, the stepping motor 680, the reel sensor 621, and the reel relay board 65 are electrically connected, and the back lamp board 653 is electrically connected to the reel relay board 65. and a lamp relay board (not shown) can be electrically connected. Therefore, as in the past, separately prepared cables are used to electrically connect the stepping motor 680 and the reel relay board 65, the reel sensor 621 and the reel relay board 65, and the back lamp board 653. There is no need to separately perform electrical connection with a lamp relay board (not shown), and the reel unit 200 can be assembled efficiently.

The stepping motor 680 rotates the left reel 3a, and is fixedly attached to the motor mounting portion 631 of the reel bracket 601. Further, a through hole provided at the rotation center of the left reel 3a is inserted into the output shaft of the stepping motor 680, and the left reel 3a is fixed to the output shaft of the stepping motor 680 by the reel connecting member 690.

(Configuration of Back Lamp Unit) Next, the configuration of the back lamp unit 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. Here, FIG. 37(a) is a perspective view of the back lamp unit 650, and FIG. 37(b) is a front view of the back lamp unit 650. The back lamp unit 650 includes a back lamp house 651 attached to the reel bracket 601, and a back lamp board 653 (see FIG. 38) attached to the back side of the back lamp house 651.

The back lamp board 653 is mounted with a plurality of LED elements for illuminating the three symbols displayed on the upper, middle, and lower tiers of the reel window W from inside the reels. In this embodiment, six LED elements (18 in total) are mounted corresponding to each of the three symbols displayed on the reel window W. Specifically, six LED elements 654a illuminate the symbols in the upper row of the reel window W, six LED elements 654b illuminate the symbols in the middle row of the reel window W, and six LED elements 654b illuminate the symbols in the lower row of the reel window W. One LED element 654c is mounted on one back lamp board 653. Further, six LED elements corresponding to the upper, middle, and lower positions are arranged in a matrix of 2 rows and 3 columns with a predetermined interval from each other.

The back lamp house 651 is made of a resin material, and a mounting arm 652 for attaching the back lamp house 651 to the reel bracket 601 is formed on the right side of the back lamp house 651. Further, the back lamp house 651 is formed with three pattern illumination areas 661a, 661b, and 661c for illuminating the upper, middle, and lower patterns. Here, the symbol illumination area 661a is an area for illuminating the upper tier symbols, the symbol illuminating area 661b is an area for illuminating the middle tier symbols, and the symbol illuminating area 661c is an area for illuminating the lower tier symbols. It is an area.

The symbol illumination area 661a is formed by an LED exposed surface 663a and a shade portion 664a. The LED exposed surface 663a is a rectangular surface facing the inner circumferential surface of the reel, and the LED exposed surface 663a has openings 662a for exposing the light emitting surfaces of the LED elements 654a, one for each of the six LED elements 654a. There are one each (six in total) corresponding to the following. The shade portion 664a has a cylindrical shape extending from the upper, lower, left, and right peripheral edges of the LED exposed surface 663a toward the inner peripheral surface of the reel. Further, the inner surface of the shade portion 664a is inclined so that the opening of the symbol illumination area 661a gradually widens from the LED exposed surface 663a toward the inner circumferential surface of the reel. The symbol illumination region 661b is also formed by an LED exposed surface 663b and a shade portion 664b similar to the LED exposed surface 663a and shade portion 664a of the symbol illumination region 661a. Further, the pattern illumination area 661c is also formed by an LED exposed surface 663c and a shade portion 664c similar to the LED exposed surface 663a and shade portion 664a of the pattern illumination area 661a. Here, the colors of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, 663c and the shade parts 664a, 664b, 664c are white, which allows more light from the six LED elements 654a to be reflected. Further, for reference, the LED exposed surface 663a is shown by a diagonally lined portion upward to the right in FIG. 37(b).

The symbol illumination area 661a and the symbol illumination area 661b are separated by a partition plate 665a having a thickness of TH3. Moreover, the pattern illumination area 661b and the pattern illumination area 661c are partitioned by a partition plate 665b having a thickness of TH3. Here, the top plate part 650a and the bottom plate part 650b of the back lamp house 651 protrude more forward (in the direction of the reel 3a) than the partition plates 665a and 665b. Further, the thickness TH4 of the top plate portion 650a and the bottom plate portion 650b of the back lamp house 651 is thicker than the thickness TH3 of the partition plates 665a and 665b. Further, the width of the symbol illumination area 661b in the rotation direction of the reel 3a is narrower than the width of the symbol illumination areas 661a and 661c. By configuring the back lamp house 651 in this way, the light from the LED elements 654a, 654b, and 654c is difficult to leak from the back lamp house 651.

The six openings formed in the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, and 663c are provided to match the mounting positions of the six LED elements 654a when the back lamp board 653 is attached to the back side of the back lamp unit 650. It is being Further, the upper, lower, left, and right surfaces forming each shade portion 664a, 664b, and 664c are inclined so that the opening gradually widens from the corresponding LED exposed surface 663a, 663b, and 663c toward the inner circumferential surface of the reel. There is.

Note that the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, and 663c of the back lamp house 651 shown in FIG. 37 were provided with six openings 662a, 662b, and 662c corresponding to six LED elements, respectively. The shape is not limited to this. Here, a modification of the opening provided on the LED exposed surface will be described with reference to FIG. 38. Note that in FIG. 38, the same components as those in FIG. 37 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The openings 662a', 662b', 662c' provided in the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, 663c of the back lamp house 651' shown in FIG. 38 are not provided corresponding to each of the six LED elements; This is one opening that encompasses all the light emitting surfaces of the six LED elements. Here, the colors of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, 663c and the shade parts 664a, 664b, 664c of the back lamp house 651' shown in FIG. 38 are white like the back lamp house 651 of FIG. In the exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, 663c, the surface of the back lamp board 653 exposed from the openings 662a', 662b', 662c' is also colored white.

In this way, by forming one large opening for six LED elements, when installing the back lamp board 653 on the back side of the back lamp house 651, the positions of the six LED elements and one opening can be adjusted. The alignment becomes easy, and the burden of assembling the back lamp unit 650 can be reduced. Further, the height of the left and right side walls of the back lamp house 651 extends to the front end positions of the partition plates 664a and 664b. Thereby, the light leaking to the outside from the side wall of the back lamp house 651 can be reduced, and the pattern can be illuminated more brightly.

(Structure of Reels) Next, the structures of the reels 3a to 3c will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Here, since the reels 3a to 3c have similar structures, the structure will be explained below using the left reel 3a as an example. As shown in FIG. 39, the left reel 3a includes a reel tape 711, a reel wheel 721, and a reel frame 731. As shown in FIG. 39, the reel tape 711 has a plurality of patterns (20 patterns in this embodiment) on the outer peripheral surface by joining the ends of a film material formed in an elongated strip shape with a reel width RW to each other. It is formed into a ring shape with a drawn on it. The right peripheral edge of the reel tape 711 is wound around the outer peripheral surface 732 of the reel frame 731, and the left peripheral edge is wound around the outer peripheral surface 722 of the reel wheel 721. This results in a cylindrical shape with the wheel 721 and reel frame 731 as the bottom surface and the reel tape 711 as the side surface.

As shown in FIG. 40, the reel tape 711 has 20 symbol display areas divided into 20 equal lengths DL (indicated by broken lines in FIG. 40) in the longitudinal direction (that is, the circumferential direction of the reel 3a). One symbol is displayed in each symbol display area. In FIG. 40, among the 20 symbols displayed on the left reel 3a, there are seven symbols as an example (from top to bottom in the diagram, "Watermelon" symbol, "Bell" symbol, "Replay" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, " ``Seven'' pattern, ``Bar'' pattern, ``Bell'' pattern, and ``Replay'' pattern).

The area of each symbol display area is the same for all 20 symbols (= reel width RW x length of one section DL), but the size of the symbol displayed in each symbol display area varies depending on the type of symbol. There is. Therefore, the intervals between the symbols displayed on the reel tape 711 are not uniform. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the interval DGmin between the "seven" symbol and the "bar" symbol is the narrowest interval (hereinafter, the "interval DGmin" will be referred to as "minimum symbol interval DGmin"). Among these symbols, the "seven" symbol has a transmission region LT that allows light from the back lamp to pass through without being diffused (that is, the other side can be seen through the reel tape 711). Further, in the "seven" symbol, the colored areas other than the transparent area LT are red, and the transparent area LT is also colored red.

Note that the length of the minimum symbol interval DGmin is longer than the movement distance Ad of the symbol when the stepping motor 680 shown in FIG. 36 rotates by one step. Thereby, even if the stop positions of the symbols vary when the rotation of the reels 3a is stopped, illumination of the symbols by the back lamp is unlikely to be adversely affected.

Returning to FIG. 39, the reel wheel 721 is formed into a substantially disk shape using a resin material, and includes an outer ring portion 722 formed in an annular shape, a hub portion 723 connected to the output shaft of the stepping motor 680, and an outer circumferential ring portion 722. It has four spoke parts 724 that connect the ring part 722 and the hub part 723. The outer peripheral ring part 722 is formed with an outer peripheral surface part 725 to which the left peripheral edge of the reel tape 711 is attached and wound. A wheel rim portion 726 having a width Wr that extends radially inward of the outer ring portion 224 (in other words, toward the rotation center of the left reel 3a) is formed at the right end of the outer peripheral surface portion 725. .

As shown in FIG. 39, the reel frame 731 is formed in an annular shape using a resin material. An outer peripheral surface portion 732 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the reel frame 731, on which the right peripheral edge portion of the reel tape 711 is attached and wound. Further, a frame rim portion 733 having a width Wr that extends toward the radial inner side of the reel frame 731 (in other words, toward the rotation center of the left reel 3a) is formed at the left end of the outer peripheral surface portion 732. There is.

<Relationship between back lamp house and reel> Characteristic relationships between the above-mentioned back lamp house 651 and reels 3a, 3b, and 3c will be described below. (Relationship between back lamp house and reel symbols) In this embodiment, the sizes of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, and 663c shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 are the same as the size of the symbol display area shown in FIG. It's smaller than it is. More specifically, the range of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, and 663c is sized to fit within the range of the pattern display area. More preferably, the range of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, and 663c is configured to fit within the outline of the largest pattern among the patterns displayed on the reel tape 711.

As described above, for example, the shade part 664a has an opening of the symbol illumination area 661a that is inclined so as to gradually widen from the LED exposed surface 663a toward the inner peripheral surface of the reel (the same applies to the shade parts 664b and 664c). Here, if the shape of the LED exposed surface 663a becomes too large, the slope of the shade portion 664a described above becomes gentle, and the light illuminating the symbols on the reels tends to become uneven. Therefore, by configuring the sizes of the LED exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, and 663c to have the above-mentioned relationship, unevenness in the light illuminating the symbols on the reels is less likely to occur, making it possible to illuminate the symbols clearly. . This improves the visibility of the symbols and allows the player to play the game smoothly.

In addition, in this embodiment, the color in the area other than the pattern displayed on the reel tape 711 (hereinafter also referred to as "background color of the reel tape") and the LED visible through the transparent area LT shown in FIG. The exposed surfaces 663a, 663b, 663c and the side surfaces of the shade portions 664a, 664b, 664c are configured to have a different color. In addition, the background color of the reel tape and the color of the end surfaces of the partition plates 665a, 665b and the shade portions 664a, 664b, 664c (the surfaces indicated by diagonal lines downward to the right in FIG. 37(b)) are are arranged in different colors. Here, "different colors" include, for example, when one color is achromatic and the other is chromatic, or when the other color is a color other than the similar hue of the one color ( More preferably, the other color is a color corresponding to the opposite hue of the one color.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the transparent region LT of the visually recognized pattern from blending into the background color of the reel tape and reducing visibility. In addition, even if the LED elements mounted on the back lamp board 653 become malfunctioning and the pattern cannot be illuminated, the visibility of the light transmission area LT is less likely to deteriorate, making it easier to press the markings. A player can smoothly play a game.

Further, in this embodiment, the thickness TH3 of the partition plates 665a and 665b shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is smaller than the minimum symbol interval DGmin shown in FIG. 40. With this configuration, the partition plates 665a and 665b can prevent the illumination lights for the symbols in the upper, middle, and lower tiers of the reel window W from interfering with each other, and the light that illuminates the symbols can be Since the entire symbol can be illuminated without being obstructed by the lights 665a and 665b, the visibility of the symbol is improved and the player can play the game smoothly.

(Relationship between the back lamp house and the structure of the reel) In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The back lamp module 650 is fixed to the output shaft of the stepping motor 680 with the back lamp module 650 sandwiched between the rim portion 733 (see FIG. 39). At this time, the wheel rim portion 726 and the frame rim portion 733 extend closer to the rotation center of the reel 3a than the opening of the back lamp house 651. Therefore, the opening of the back lamp house 651 is surrounded by the wheel rim portion 726 of the reel wheel 721, the reel tape 711, and the frame rim portion 733 of the reel frame 731.

Thereby, even if the reel connecting member 690 comes off, either the wheel rim portion 726 or the frame rim portion 733 will be caught on the back lamp house 651 and the reel 3a will be prevented from falling off from the reel module 600a. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the reel 3a will be damaged.

Further, for example, if the wheel rim portion 726 and the frame rim portion 733 are made of a material that does not transmit light, or even if they are made of a material that transmits light, they are painted in a color that does not transmit light (for example, black). The wheel rim portion 726 and the frame rim portion 733 can block light leaking from the side wall of the back lamp house 651. This allows more light to be irradiated onto the symbols, improving the visibility of the symbols and allowing the player to play the game smoothly.

<Countermeasures against fraudulent activities> Next, the relationship between the color of the material of the casing 5 and the paint color will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41(a) is a right side view of the slot machine 1 installed in the gaming machine rack MC of the hall, and FIG. 41(b) is a sectional view of a screw hole provided in the right side plate 5b. Note that the directions of the arrows shown in FIGS. 41(a) and (b) are similar to the directions of the arrows shown in FIG. 2.

In this embodiment, light brown particle board is used as the material for the housing 5 shown in FIGS. The surface is painted black, and the surfaces of the bottom plate 5d and back plate 5e are not painted. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a medal dispensing device 50 is installed on the bottom plate 5d inside the housing 5, and due to the size of the medal dispensing device 50, the length of the bottom plate 5d in the front-rear direction is It is longer than the length of the top plate 5c. Therefore, the shapes of the left side plate 5a and the right side plate 5b are approximately right-angled trapezoids with the back plate 5e side being at a right angle. When installing the housing 5 having such a shape in a gaming machine rack MC in a hall, a part of the right side plate 5b (and left side plate 5a) (in FIG. 41(a) The shaded area) has no choice but to be exposed to the outside.

For example, if a fraudulent act is committed by drilling a hole in the exposed portion of the right side panel 5b, the side surface of the hole will be light brown, which is the color of the particle board material. Therefore, on the surface of the right side plate 5b, a light brown area appears on the black paint color, so it is easy to notice that the housing 5 has been damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41(a), screw holes SRH for attaching various devices and members inside the housing 5 are provided in the exposed portion of the right side plate 5b. As shown in Figure 41(b), this screw hole SRH is a counterbore hole to prevent the head of the screw SCR from protruding from the surface of the casing, and the counterbore surface CHF is also a black hole. Painted. As a result, if the counterbore surface CHF is damaged due to, for example, a fraudulent act, it will be easy to notice that the counterbore surface CHF has been damaged because a light brown area will appear on the black background of the paint color. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the paths of signals exchanged between various devices installed inside the housing 5 will be described. FIG. 42 shows signal paths exchanged between the main control device 100, the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c, the medal payout device 50, and the external centralized terminal board 80. As shown in FIG. 42, the main control device 100 and the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26 are electrically connected by a signal line sg1, and the main control device 100 and the reel relay board 65 are connected by a signal line sg2 and a signal line sg1. It is electrically connected by sg3. Further, the reel relay board 65 and the medal payout device 50 are electrically connected by a signal line sg4, and the reel relay board 65 and the external centralized terminal board 80 are electrically connected by a signal line sg5.

With such a signal path, stop operation signals outputted to the main controller 100 by the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, for example, are directly input to the main controller 100 via the signal line sg1. As a result, the main controller 100 controls the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c to stop. Further, when the main control device 100 performs stop control on all the reels and a small winning combination is won, a medal payout signal is output to the medal payout device 50 in order to pay out a predetermined number of medals. This medal payout signal is once output to the reel relay board 65 via the signal line sg2, and then outputted from the reel relay board 65 to the medal payout device 50 via the signal line sg4. Thereby, the medal payout device 50 outputs a payout completion signal to the main control device 100 every time one medal is paid out.

This payout completion signal is once output to the reel relay board 65 via the signal line sg4, and then output from the reel relay board 65 to the main controller 100 via the signal line sg2. Then, the main control device 100 counts the number of times the payout completion signal is input, and stops outputting the medal payout signal when the number of medals corresponding to the winning small winning combination is paid out. Further, when the main controller 100 outputs a game information signal indicating the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid, etc. to the external centralized terminal board 80, the signal is first transmitted to the reel relay board 65 via the signal line sg3, and then It is transmitted from the reel relay board 65 to the external centralized terminal board 80 via the signal line sg5. Then, the external centralized terminal board 80 outputs the input game information signal to an external hall computer or the like.

Here, for example, when the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c transmit a stop operation signal to the main controller 100 via the reel relay board 65, it is assumed that an unauthorized board having the following functions is attached to the reel relay board 65. There is a risk that a fraudulent act of putting it away may be carried out. First, when a stop operation signal is output from the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c to the reel relay board 65, the illegal board uses the stop operation signal as a trigger and completes the payout from the medal payout device 50 for a predetermined period of time. Even if the signal is output, the payout completion signal is prevented from being output to the main controller 100. Also, during this period, even if a game information signal is output from the main control device 100, the game information signal is not output to the external centralized terminal board 80.

As a result, when a medal payout signal is output from the main control device 100 to the medal payout device 50 via the reel relay board 65 during the above-described predetermined time, the medal payout device 50 starts paying out medals in response. However, the output of the payout completion signal to the main controller 100 is blocked by the unauthorized board until the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the main controller 100 cannot count the number of medals that have been paid out, so the main controller 100 continues to output the medal payout signal, which prevents medals from being unfairly paid out. become. Furthermore, during this time, since the game information signal is not output to the external centralized terminal board 80, it is impossible to recognize that an unnatural payout is being made at the hall computer.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the signal path shown in FIG. 42 is adopted, and by outputting the stop operation signal that triggers the above-mentioned fraudulent act directly to the main control device 100 without going through the reel relay board 65, The fraudulent acts described above can be nullified.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) that uses game medals as gaming value has been illustrated as an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pachinko game machine that uses game balls as a game value, a reel-type game machine that uses game balls as a game value, and information recorded on an electronic recording medium that uses the game value as a game value. The present invention can be similarly applied to reel-type gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, mahjong ball gaming machines, arranged ball machines, etc., and similar effects can be obtained. Further, the present invention can be similarly applied to slot machines having four or more reels, and similar effects can be obtained.

Next, a preferred embodiment of a Pachinko gaming machine (including a managed gaming machine) will be described with reference to the drawings. The configuration of the board installed in the slot machine of the first embodiment described above is the main control board P100, production control board, and performance control board installed in the pachinko gaming machines of the following embodiments (second to ninth embodiments). It can be applied to the board P200, the image control board P530, the payout control board P400, the power supply board P500, the frame control board P800, etc., and the same effects as in the first embodiment can be achieved.

[Second Embodiment] FIGS. 43 and 44 show a front view and a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to a second embodiment. First, with reference to these figures, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be explained. An overview will be given below. The pachinko game machine PM according to this embodiment is a model that has two functions equivalent to the conventional first type pachinko game machine, the first game (first special symbol game) and the second A game (second special symbol game) can be developed.

<Basic Structure of Pachinko Gaming Machine> First, the basic structure of the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine PM will be explained with reference to FIG. 43. As shown in FIG. 43, the Pachinko gaming machine PM (also simply referred to as the "gaming machine PM") has an outer frame P1, which is a vertically oriented fixed holding frame configured with an outer rectangular frame size, on the front side of the opening. The front frame P2, which is configured to have a rectangular frame size and forms an opening/closing mounting frame, is attached to the front right edge so that it can be opened and closed horizontally and can be attached and detached by means of upper and lower hinge mechanisms P3 arranged on the front left edge of each other. It is always maintained in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected to the outer frame P1 by using a locking device P4 called a double lock provided.

A rectangular glass frame P5 that matches the upper front area of the front frame P2 is attached to the front frame P2 so that it can be opened and closed horizontally using an upper and lower hinge mechanism P3, and can be attached and detached using a locking device P4. It is always kept in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame P2. A game board P20 is removably set and held in the front frame P2, and the game area PA in front of the game board P20 is visible through the double-glazed glass of the glass frame P5, which is normally kept closed. There is.

On the front side of the glass frame P5, there are provided a frame lamp (LED lamp) P10 that emits light according to the development situation of the game, and a speaker P11 that generates sound effects according to the development situation of the game. At the bottom of the glass frame P5, there are upper and lower ball trays (upper and lower ball trays P8 and lower ball trays P9) for storing game balls, and in the center of the front of the upper ball tray P8 there is a display that is pressed and operated by the player. A button (production switch) P15 is provided, and a firing handle P12 for firing game balls is provided on the front right side of the lower ball tray P9. Hereinafter, for convenience, the production operation input means will be referred to as the "production button P15", but the production button P15 in this example is a button-type switch with an on/off operation, and an output corresponding to the direction of the operation input. A cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button), a lever-type switch with a tilting operation, a dial switch with a rotary operation, a proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches it, a touch sensor This concept includes all kinds of operation input means, such as , touch panels, etc.

The game board P20 is constructed based on a board formed into a rectangular flat plate using a synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board P20, an outer rail P41 and an inner rail P42 are fixedly arranged in an arc shape to define a substantially circular game area PA in which a game ball can roll. In addition, a guide path (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA is formed by the outer rail P41 and the inner rail P42, and a position near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide path (inner rail P42 A ball return prevention valve P43 is disposed at the tip) to prevent the game ball released from the exit opening into the game area PA from returning to the guide path again. In addition to the windmill and a large number of game nails, this gaming area PA includes various types of openings such as a first starting port P51, a second starting port P52, an operating gate P53, a big winning opening P54, and general winning openings P61, P62, P63, and P64. In addition to the winning opening, there are a first special symbol display device P71, a second special symbol display device P72, a first special symbol holding lamp P73, a second special symbol holding lamp P74, a normal symbol display device P75, a normal symbol holding lamp P76, etc. Various display devices are provided. A center decoration P21 is arranged approximately in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device P70 is provided so as to be visible through the central opening of the center decoration P21.

The gaming area PA includes a left area PA1, which is an area to the left of the center decoration P21 (a board area corresponding to left-handed players), and an area to the right of the center decoration P21 (corresponding to right-handed players), with the center decoration P21 located approximately in the center as a reference. It is divided into a right side area PA2 and a right side area PA2. A top plate part P22 that faces the outer rail P41 in the vertical direction is integrally formed on the upper part of the center decoration P21. A communication path P44 is formed through which the game ball can pass to the right area PA2. In this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 can enter either the first starting hole P51 or the general winning holes P61 to P63 located below the center decoration P21. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter any of the operating gate P53, general prize opening P64, second starting opening P52, and big prize opening P54 located on the right side of the center decoration P21. It is. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port P29 is provided for discharging game balls that have rolled and flowed down without entering each winning hole to the back side of the game board P20. Each component provided on the game board P20 will be explained in order below.

The first starting opening P51 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting opening switch P511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. This first starting opening P51 is a winning opening that is always open and opens upward, and allows entry of game balls (game balls hit to the left) that mainly flow down the left side area PA1. The entry of the game ball into the first starting hole P51 triggers the first special symbol lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol displayed variably or statically on the first special symbol display device P71 is referred to as a "first special symbol".

The second starting opening P52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch P521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. This second starting port P52 is arranged in the right side area PA2 which is a board area corresponding to right-handed hitting, and allows entry of game balls (game balls hit right) that mainly flow down the right side area PA2. The entry of the game ball into the second starting hole P52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol displayed variably or statically on the second special symbol display device P72 is referred to as a "second special symbol". This second starting port P52 includes a normal electric accessory P522, generally called an electric chew, and a normal electric accessory solenoid P523 for driving the ordinary electric accessory P522 to open and close. The normal electric accessory P522 is variable between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter into the second starting port P52. In other words, the normal electric accessory P522 has a structure that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port P52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and at a predetermined opportunity (an opportunity to win the normal symbol lottery) described later. When it is in the open state, it becomes easier to enter the game ball. This normal electric accessory P522 includes a front-back sliding movable member P524 for opening and closing the second starting port P52. The movable member P524 has a closed position (protruding position) in which it closes the second starting port P52 and makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and a closed position (protruding position) in which it closes the second starting port P52 and makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter. It is possible to slide in the front-back direction (direction perpendicular to the board surface) between the open position (retracted position) and the easy-to-use open position (retracted position). The upper surface of this movable member P524 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed to slope downward from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front. Therefore, when the movable member P524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port P52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member P524 as a guide path, from the right to the left on the guide path. It flows down towards the direction and falls from the left end of the normal electric accessory P522.

The operating gate P53 is provided as a starting prize opening corresponding to the normal symbol game, and includes an operating gate switch P531 for detecting passage of a game ball. Note that the passage of the game ball to the operating gate P53 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting port P52.

The big winning hole P54 is formed as a horizontally rectangular winning hole that opens when the first special symbol or the second special symbol results in a jackpot or a small win. The big winning opening P54 includes a big winning opening switch P541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory P542 generally called an attacker, and a big winning opening for driving the special electric accessory P542 to open and close. It is equipped with a mouth solenoid P543. The special electric accessory P542 is variable between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the grand prize opening P54. In this example, the big prize opening P54 is provided in the right side area PA2 in the gaming area PA. Therefore, in special games (big win games, small win games), when shooting the game ball, by aiming at the right area PA2, so-called right-handed hitting, the ball can easily enter the big winning hole P54. It has become.

The general winning holes P61 to P63 are arranged in the left side area PA1, which is a board area corresponding to left-handed hitting, and game balls flowing down the left side area PA1 can enter the game balls. The general winning ports P61 to P63 are equipped with a left general winning port switch P611 for detecting the entry of a game ball. This left general winning hole switch P611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning holes P61 to P63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction, etc., and is designed to control the game ball to any of the general winning holes P61 to P63. Incoming balls can also be detected.

The general winning hole P64 is arranged in the right side area PA2 which is a board area corresponding to right-handed hitting, and a game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter. The general winning hole P64 includes a right general winning hole switch P641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. In addition, the entry of game balls into each of the general winning holes P61 to P64 does not trigger the lottery of special symbols or normal symbols, but it is an opportunity to win prize balls in the same way as other winning holes (excluding operating gate P53). becomes.

The first special symbol display device P71 performs variable display and fixed display of the first special symbol, triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port P51. This first special symbol display device P71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the flashing pattern of the lamp, and the flashing of the lamp stops and switches to a lit display. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The second special symbol display device P72 performs variable display and fixed display of the second special symbol, triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port P52. This second special symbol display device P72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the flashing pattern of the lamp, and the flashing of the lamp stops and switches to a lit display. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The first special symbol holding lamp P73 and the second special symbol holding lamp P74 are each composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and the number of activated holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the lighting/flashing display of the lamps. (up to 4 each). The number of pending balls for activation of the first special symbol is a number related to the random value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole P51 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing or during the execution of the jackpot game. This indicates the number at which the acquired random number value is to be suspended, that is, the validity determination is temporarily suspended until the validity determination permission condition (variation start condition) for the acquired random value is satisfied. Similarly, the number of pending balls for activation of the second special symbol is determined by a random value obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port P52 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing or during the execution of a jackpot game. This is a number that indicates that the acquired random value is to be suspended, that is, the validity determination is temporarily suspended until the validity determination permission condition (variation start condition) for the acquired random value is satisfied. There is.

The normal symbol display device P75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and fixed display of the normal symbol. The normal symbol holding lamp P76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lit lamps corresponds to the number of normal symbol fluctuations held (the number of normal symbol fluctuations that have not been executed yet). In addition, on the left side of the normal symbol display device P75, a round display P77 is provided that displays the number of round games (unit games) in the jackpot game (number of rounds: the number of times the special electric accessory P542 is activated in succession). ing.

The performance display device P70 mainly displays a fluctuating display of decorative symbols that fluctuates and stops displaying in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a preview performance that suggests or informs the expectation level of a jackpot in advance. In addition to displaying the image, a suspension display corresponding to the operation suspension balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device P70, there is a decorative pattern display area P700 in which a variable display of decorative patterns, a preview effect display, etc. are performed, a first special pattern holding lamp P73, and a second special pattern holding lamp P74. A pending image display area P710 where the pending images of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in synchronization with the above, and a fluctuating image display area P720 where the fluctuating image corresponding to the fluctuating display is displayed are provided. There is. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the effect display device P70. The decorative symbol display area P700 includes three rows of display areas (left symbol display area Z1, middle symbol display area Z2, right symbol display area Z3) which are variable display areas for decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (not shown). ) are provided, the left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the left symbol display area Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the middle symbol display area Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the right symbol display area Z3. Each symbol is stopped and displayed. In the pending image display area P710, a pending image (pending icon) corresponding to the action pending ball of the first special symbol and a pending image (pending icon) corresponding to the action pending ball of the second special symbol are displayed. The pending images are displayed in order according to the order in which the special symbols are activated and the pending balls are generated (order of entry), and a maximum of 4 pending images for the first special symbol and a maximum of 4 pending images for the second special symbol are displayed. Display is possible. Further, in the changing image display area P720, a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the currently executing changing display is displayed.

The center decoration P21 is installed around the performance display device P70, and has functions such as a passage for the game balls, protection of the performance screen, decoration, and the like. This center decoration P21 is provided with a movable accessory P24 that performs a performance operation according to the development situation of the game. The movable accessory P24 is configured to include a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a driving source. Further, the game board P20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) P25 that emits light depending on the progress of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp P10 and the panel lamp P25 will also be collectively referred to as the "effect lamp LP."

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the basic structure of the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine PM will be explained. On the back side of the front frame P2, there is a back set board P30, which is based on a base frame body formed in the shape of a rectangular frame that is somewhat smaller than the front frame P2 and has a window in the center that communicates with the front and back. It is connected to the rear of the front frame P2 via a hinge mechanism P3 so that it can be laterally opened and closed and can be attached and detached. A back set cover P30C in the shape of a rectangular box with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board P30, and is normally disposed to cover the back side of the game board P20 attached to the front frame P2. (Thereby, the main control board P100, the production control board P200, and the image control board P300, which will be described later, are covered by the back set cover P30C).

Each part of the back set board P30 includes a storage tank P31 that stores a large number of game balls, a tank rail P32 that extends from the storage tank P31 to the right with a gentle downward slope, and a tank rail P32 that connects to the right end of the tank rail P32 and extends downward. A ball supply passage P33 extending to the ball supply passage P33, a prize ball payout unit P34 for paying out the game balls guided by the ball supply passage P33, and a prize for guiding the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P34 to the upper ball tray P6. A ball passage portion P35 and the like are provided.

On the back side of the game board P20, there is a main control board P100 that centrally controls the operation of the pachinko game machine PM, a performance control board P200 that controls the overall performance, image display according to game development, and control of sound effects. An image control board P300 that performs the following is attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board P30, there is a payout control board P400 that controls the firing and payout of game balls, and a payout control board P400 that receives power from the gaming facility and supplies power to various control boards and electric/electronic parts. An external information terminal board P600 (see FIG. 45) that outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM is attached. In addition, to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are assembled and housed in a transparent resin board case with a caulking structure and a sealing structure, and are installed at predetermined positions on the back of the game board P20 or the back of the back set board P30, respectively. will be placed. These control boards and the electric/electronic parts of each part of the Pachinko game machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable), so that the Pachinko game machine PM is configured to be operable.

<Control Configuration of Pachinko Gaming Machine> Next, each control board mounted on the Pachinko gaming machine PM according to this embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a control block diagram showing the control configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine PM.

The main control board P100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various calculation processes related to games, a ROMP 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAMP 103 that functions as a work area and buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and peripheral boards and other components. It is equipped with a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) P110 configured with an I/O port circuit P104 that inputs and outputs signals to and from the device, and the main CPU 101 plays games according to the control program stored in the ROMP 102. It is configured to carry out the main control related to the progress. Although not shown, the main control board P100 also includes a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and a clock circuit that resets the main CPU 101 when it malfunctions or goes out of control. A WDT circuit that restores the normal state, a CTC circuit that enables real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and a separate system from the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 to generate a predetermined random number (built-in random number). It is equipped with a random number generation circuit, etc., and these are interconnected via an internal bus.

The main CPU 101 reads various control programs stored in the ROMP 102 and performs arithmetic processing based on detection information from each switch, thereby executing various processes related to main control of the game. The RAMP 103 is a backup RAM as a nonvolatile storage means backed up by a backup power source generated in the power supply board P500. The backup area of the RAMP 103 is an area for storing data such as the stack pointer and each register held at the time of power outage in the event of a power outage. ), the state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area.

In addition, the main control board P100 is electrically connected to the first starting port switch P511, the second starting port switch P521, the operation gate switch P531, the big winning port switch P541, the left general winning port switch P611, the right general winning port switch P641, etc. , and inputs detection signals from various switches to the main CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit P104. In addition, the main control board P100 includes a first special symbol display device P71, a second special symbol display device P72, a first special symbol holding lamp P73, a second special symbol holding lamp P74, a normal symbol display device P75, and a normal symbol holding lamp. In addition to being electrically connected to P76, it is also electrically connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid P523 and a special electric accessory solenoid P543, and receives various control signals from the main CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit P104. Sends to display means and various solenoids. Moreover, the main control board P100 is electrically connected to the external information terminal board P600, and transmits the game information signal from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board P600 via the I/O port circuit P104. This external information terminal board P600 sends various external information signals to external devices (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine PM based on the gaming information signal transmitted from the main control board P100. Send. Note that the game information signal transmitted from the main control board P100 may be input to the external information terminal board P600 via, for example, the payout control board P400.

The main control board P100 and the production control board P200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communication only occurs in one direction from the main control board P100 to the production control board P200. Various production control commands are transmitted from the main control board P100 to the production control board P200. It is not possible to send data from the production control board P200 to the main control board P100, and it is not possible to request the main control board P100 to send data.

The production control board P200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various calculation processes related to game production based on production control commands from the main control board P100, a ROMP 202 that stores production control programs and various data, and a work area that serves as a temporary storage area. It is equipped with a performance control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) P210, which is configured with RAMP203, which functions as a buffer memory, and an I/O port circuit P204, which inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and each device. The sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control related to game performance according to a control program stored in the ROMP 202. In addition, although not shown, the production control board P200 includes a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and a clock circuit that resets the sub-main CPU 201 when it malfunctions or goes out of control. A WDT circuit that returns to a normal state based on the system clock, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, and a controller that inputs and outputs serial data. It is equipped with a serial communication circuit, etc., and these are interconnected via an internal bus.

The production control board P200 performs production control processing based on production control commands from the main control board P100, and sends image control commands to instruct the image control board P300 to control images and sounds, and lamp control signals to control the lamp connection board P91. (lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver P92, etc. The production control board P200 is connected to the image control board P300 for bidirectional communication, and while image control commands regarding images and sounds are transmitted from the production control board P200 to the image control board P300, this A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been successfully received is transmitted from the image control board P300 to the production control board P200.

In addition, the production control board P200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board P91 equipped with a plurality of LED drivers, and transmits a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board P91 via a serial communication circuit. Send. In addition, in this example, clock synchronized serial communication is adopted between the production control board P200 and the lamp connection board P91, and data is transmitted on a signal line (clock line) that is different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board P91 is
It has a built-in LED driver that functions in response to a lamp control signal for driving LEDs sent from the production control board P200, and by switching the switch in the circuit on/off based on this lamp control signal, the production lamp LP is activated. Control is performed to turn on or turn off the production lamp LP by supplying or cutting off the drive current.

Furthermore, the production control board P200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers P92, and sends a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver P92 to the motor driver P92 via an I/O port circuit P204. Send. The motor driver P92 supplies drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory P24 by switching on/off a switch in the circuit based on the drive control signal for driving the accessory transmitted from the production control board P200. Or it is shut off and control is performed to operate each movable accessory P24. Note that a parallel communication method is adopted for data transmission to the motor driver P92.

The image control board P300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various calculation processes related to image production based on image control commands from the production control board P200, a ROMP 302 that stores image control programs and various data, and a work area that serves as a temporary storage area. It is equipped with an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) P310, which is configured with RAMP303, which functions as a buffer memory, and an I/O port circuit P304, which inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and each device. , a sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute main control related to image production according to a control program stored in a ROMP 302. In addition, although not shown, the image control board P300 includes a VDP that generates image data in accordance with the presentation content based on the control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPU 301, and a VDP that generates image data in accordance with the presentation content based on the control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPU 301. It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, reads image data stored in the image ROM in response to instructions from the sub-sub CPU 301, performs image processing on the image data, generates a video signal (image data), and transmits the generated video signal (image data) to the effect display device. A high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing image data read from the image ROM is connected to this VDP. The sound source IC reads the audio data stored in the audio ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, synthesizes the audio data, and outputs the generated audio data to the speaker P11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

The payout control board P400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU 401, a ROMP 402, and a RAMP 403. The payout control board P400 is connected to the main control board P100 in a two-way communication manner, and controls the payout unit P34 to drive the prize ball payout unit P34 based on the payout control command from the main control board P100 to pay out prize balls. At the same time, the ball feeding mechanism P13 and the firing mechanism P14 are driven synchronously based on the operation amount of the firing handle P12 to control the firing of game balls.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the power supply board P500 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used by each control board based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island, and a backup power supply. It is equipped with a backup power supply circuit to generate power, and a power failure monitoring circuit to monitor power failure due to voltage drop. supply. A power switch for starting the power circuit is connected to the power supply board P500, and assuming that primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, when the power switch is turned on, the power supply board Predetermined power is supplied from the normal power supply circuit of the P500 to each control board and the like. The power supply board P500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island is cut off, and when a power cut is detected, it sends a power cutoff signal (NMI signal) to notify that fact to the main control board P100. , the production control board P200, and the payout control board P400. Note that the backup power supply circuit is configured to be charged when power is being supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PM from the power supply device on the gaming island. Furthermore, a RAM clear switch (not shown) is connected to the power supply board P500 for temporarily erasing the temporary memory contents of the RAMP103 of the main control board P100 and setting the initial value when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. Note that the RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board P100 instead of the power supply board P500.

The external information terminal board P600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the gaming information signal from the main control board P100. External information signals that the external information terminal board P600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine include, for example, a jackpot signal, a continuous winning signal, a symbol confirmation signal, a prize ball signal (also referred to as a prize ball information signal), and a door signal. These include a frame opening signal, a security signal (also referred to as a security information signal), a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (ball entrance/passage time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. Furthermore, external devices installed outside the gaming machine PM include a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device that is installed on the top of the gaming machine PM and displays data (gaming information) regarding the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display serves as useful judgment material for the player when selecting a game machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating status of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on external information signals output from each gaming machine installed in the hall in the gaming parlor, and This is a device that manages the operating status of the machine. This hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM through the data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without the data display.

<Basic operations of the Pachinko gaming machine> The Pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above is in a state where the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the gaming island of the gaming facility, and the front frame P2, glass frame P5, etc. are closed and locked. The game is started by storing game balls in the upper ball tray P8 and rotating the firing handle P12. When the firing handle P12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray P8 are sent out one by one to the firing mechanism P14 by the ball feeding mechanism P13 arranged on the back side of the glass frame P5. It is launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism P14. At this time, when the firing handle P12 is operated by less than a predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right side area PA2 and flows down the left side area PA1. In this left side area PA1, a left side flow path is formed for causing the game balls to flow down toward the first starting port P51 and the general winning ports P61 to P63. On the other hand, when the firing handle P12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right area PA2 and flows down the right area PA2. In this right side area PA2, a right flow path is formed for causing the game balls to flow down toward the operating gate P53, the general winning opening P64, the second starting opening P52, and the big winning opening P54. The game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 or the right side area PA2 in this way is moved to the first starting port P51, the second starting port P52, and the operating gate P53 according to the route distributed in the left side area PA1 or right side area PA1. , the big winning hole P54, and the general winning hole P61 to P64, while if the ball does not enter any of the winning holes, the ball flows down to the out hole P29.

When a game ball flowing down the gaming area PA enters any of the first starting hole P51, second starting hole P52, big winning hole P54, or general winning hole P61 to P63, a prize is awarded according to the type of winning hole. The ball is paid out to the upper ball tray P8 or the lower ball tray P9 by the prize ball payout unit P34. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball enters each winning hole (referred to as "unit prize ball number") is "4" for the first starting hole P51, and "4 balls" for the second starting hole P51. The starting opening P52 is set to "1", the general winning openings P61 to P64 are set to "3", and the big winning opening P54 is set to "15". In addition, the unit prize ball number of each winning hole is not limited to the number illustrated in this embodiment, and other unit prize ball numbers may be applied. For example, as the unit prize number of pitches, the first starting port P51 may be set to "1" instead of "4". Further, the number of the second starting ports P52 may be "three" instead of "one". Further, the general winning holes P61 to P64 may be set to ``5'' instead of ``3''. Further, the number of big winning openings may be set to ``10'' instead of ``15''.

When the game ball enters the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52, a special symbol lottery random number value is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as a special symbol activation reserved ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, when a predetermined starting condition (special symbol fluctuation start condition described later) is satisfied, special symbol validity determination, symbol determination, and fluctuation pattern determination are performed on the lottery random number value related to the earliest activated pending ball. In a manner according to this determination result, the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device P71 or the second special symbol display device P72, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the effect display device P70. The variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is stopped and displayed synchronously after a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern has elapsed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is definitively displayed in a stop mode indicating a jackpot, the game shifts to a special game (jackpot game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of this jackpot game, an opening/closing operation is performed to change the jackpot P54 to the open state only once or multiple times. When a prescribed count of game balls enters the big winning hole P54, or when the opening time of the big winning hole P54 reaches the opening limit time, the round game being executed ends. Here, the stopping mode of the decorative symbols indicating a jackpot is, for example, a mode in which the types of three symbols match. In this embodiment, when the special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in a fixed manner in a stop mode indicating a jackpot, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as a jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined jackpot is won, the probability variation function of the special symbol may be activated from the end of the jackpot game until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined final number. When the special symbol probability fluctuation function is activated, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery will shift from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new jackpot (jackpot game) will occur relatively early. Become. Note that the special symbol probability variation function may continue until the next jackpot occurs. Further, the predetermined final number of times may be set to "10,000 times", which corresponds to the number of variable display times until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, a special symbol variation time shortening function may operate in conjunction with or independently of the special symbol probability variation function. When the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol drawings per unit time increases (the number of jackpots per unit time increases). (can increase ease of acquisition).

Further, after the jackpot game ends, an electric chew support function (also simply referred to as "electric support") may be activated in conjunction with or independently of the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function. The electric chew support function increases the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port P52 by activating the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time shortening function, and the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory P522. state (also referred to as "electrical support state" or "easy entry state"). In addition, when the normal symbol probability variation function is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than the normal state. When the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shortened. When the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory P522 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory P522 becomes longer than the normal state. In this state where it is easy to enter the ball, there is a high possibility that the number of changes in the normal symbol per certain period of time will increase more than usual, and the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port P52 also increases, so the ball enters the second starting port P52. The possibility of increasing the number of balls entered also increases. Therefore, by operating the electric chew support function, during that period, the chances of getting a prize ball by entering the second starting port P52 increase, and as a result, it is possible to continue playing the game without reducing the number of balls you have. Become. In other words, the "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls fired, becomes higher. Hereinafter, the state in which the electric chew support function is activated is also referred to as a "high base state," and the state in which the electric chew support function is not activated is also referred to as a "low base state."

<Main Functional Configuration of Pachinko Gaming Machine> Next, various functions of the Pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board P100/performance control board P200) according to this embodiment will be explained with additional reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine PM (mainly main control board P100/performance control board P200).

As shown in FIG. 46, the main control board P100 includes ball entry determination means P110, game lottery random number generation means P120, reservation control means P130, preliminary determination means P135, special symbol lottery processing means P140, normal symbol lottery processing means P145, It includes special game control means P150, symbol display control means P155, electric accessory control means P160, game state control means P165, error monitoring control means P170, main information storage means P180, and command transmission/reception means P190. Note that each of the above-mentioned means on the main control board P100 is constituted by hardware such as the main CPU 101, ROMP 102, RAMP 103, and electronic circuits provided on the main control board P100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROMP 102, etc. It is a functional expression of something.

Ball entrance determination means P110 detects each winning opening based on detection signals from the first starting opening switch P511, second starting opening switch P521, operating gate switch P531, big winning opening switch P541, general winning opening switch P611, 641, etc. Determine whether the game ball enters the ball. When the first starting port switch P511 detects the entering of a game ball, the ball entry determining means P110 generates a production control command (referred to as a "first starting port winning command") indicating this, and When the entry of a game ball is detected with the second starting gate switch P521, a performance control command indicating this (referred to as a "second starting gate winning command") is generated, and the activation gate switch P531 is used to control the entry of the game ball. If passing is detected, a performance control command (referred to as "operation gate winning command") is generated to indicate this, and if entering of a game ball is detected with the big winning opening switch P541, it is indicated to that effect. When a production control command (referred to as a "big prize opening prize winning command") is generated and the entry of a game ball is detected with the left general prize opening switch P611, a production control command (referred to as "left general prize opening prize winning opening command") indicating that effect is generated. When the right general winning port switch P611 detects the entry of a game ball, it generates a production control command (referred to as the "right general winning port winning command") indicating that. Then, this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180.

The game lottery random number generation means P120 uses software to take in the built-in random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer P110, and adds to this a soft random number per special symbol, which will be described later, to be used for the lottery for winning or rejecting special symbols. Generate random numbers for each special symbol. Further, the game lottery random number generation means P120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers through program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play the role of random number generation means that generates random numbers using software. This software random number includes a soft random number per special symbol that is added to the above-mentioned built-in random number to generate a winning random number, and an initial value for a new update after one cycle of updating of the soft random number per special symbol is completed. Soft initial value random number per special symbol to determine, special symbol stop symbol random number used to determine the winning symbol (combination of symbols that activates the conditional device) as the special symbol stop symbol, special symbol stop symbol random number A special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining the initial value for a new update after one cycle of updating is completed, a special symbol fluctuation pattern random number for use in selecting a special symbol fluctuation pattern, A random number per normal symbol for use in the lottery of success or failure of normal symbols, an initial value random number per normal symbol for determining the initial value for a new update after one cycle of updating of the random number per normal symbol is completed, It includes a normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number used for selecting a normal symbol fluctuation pattern. These software random numbers are updated once every time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of a prime number, etc.), and the initial value random numbers are updated while the timer interrupt process is not executed ( (during loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

The reservation control means P130 includes a special symbol reservation control means P131 and a normal symbol reservation control means P132.

The special symbol retention control means P131 triggers the input of a game ball into the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52 to generate a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, and a random number per special symbol, which are lottery random values related to the special symbol game. A symbol random number value and a special symbol variation pattern random number value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation pending ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol reservation control means P131 stores the activation reservation ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces), respectively, in the main information storage means in a form combined with the entry order of the reservation balls. It is temporarily stored in the first special symbol retention storage area or the second special symbol retention storage area of P180.

In the first special symbol retention storage area and the second special symbol retention storage area, the retention 1 storage area (first retention storage area), the retention 2 storage area (the 2nd A reservation 3 storage area (third reservation storage area), a reservation 4 storage area (fourth reservation storage area) are provided, respectively. Each reservation storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random symbol per special symbol, and a special symbol fluctuation pattern random number as a set as operation reservation ball information. The operation hold ball information is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area. They are consumed in order of area (first in, first out principle). In addition, when the reserved ball information in the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area are shifted to the storage areas with lower numbers, respectively, and Clear the contents of the pending 4 storage area to zero.

In addition, the special symbol retention control means P131 includes a first special symbol retention ball number counter for counting the number of active reservation balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol reservation ball number counter for counting the number of operation reservation balls of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol reserved ball number counter. The special symbol retention control means P131 increments the corresponding counter by 1 each time a special symbol is acquired as an update process for the number of reserved balls for operation, and one reserved ball for operation is used up. Each time, the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

In addition, when the special symbol retention control means P131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of active reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol retention control means P131 sends a performance control command ("design memory 1) and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180. This one command includes information on both the number of pending balls for the first special symbol and the number of pending balls for the second special symbol. In addition, in principle, the activated balls of each special symbol will be consumed in the order in which they entered, but in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the first special symbol. , in order to adopt the so-called priority extinguishment, while there is an operation pending ball related to the second special symbol game, regardless of the existence of an operation pending ball related to the first special symbol game, the operation pending related to the second special symbol game will be suspended. It is configured to preferentially digest spheres. In addition, under this priority extinguishment, if there is an action pending ball of the second special symbol, even if there is an action pending ball of the first special symbol, the action pending ball of the first special symbol will not be extinguished. It will be put on hold.

The normal symbol retention control means P132 uses the entry of a game ball into the activation gate P53 as a trigger to generate a random number per normal symbol, a random symbol per normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern, which are lottery random values related to the normal symbol game. A random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as normal symbol operation pending ball information. The normal symbol retention control means P132 stores the activation reserved ball information of the ordinary symbols up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol retention storage area of the main information storage means P180 in a form combined with the entry order of the reserved balls. Memorize temporarily. Further, the normal symbol holding control means P132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of active holding balls of normal symbols. The normal symbol retention control means P132 increments the corresponding counter by 1 each time it acquires one active reserved ball of the normal symbol as an update process for the number of reserved balls of the activated normal symbol, and one activated reserved ball is consumed. Each time, the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

When the predetermination means P135 acquires an action pending ball with a special symbol at a predetermined predetermined timing, the predetermination means P135 executes a predetermination for a pre-read notice targeting the action pending ball. As an example of the above-mentioned preliminary judgment timing, (1) when the first special symbol is acquired while waiting for a hit and the electric chew support function is not activated, (2) when waiting for a hit, and (3) If you obtain a pending ball with the second special symbol while the electric chew support function is active, or (3) If you obtain a pending ball with the second special symbol during a jackpot or small hit. This is when the conditions are satisfied. The above pre-judgment timing is just an example, and the pre-judgment timing can be changed according to the game machine specifications (for example, if there is a starting port related to the second special symbol that does not normally have an electric accessory, and 8 pieces are reserved during normal use) For models that can accumulate, (1) above applies not only to the first special symbol but also to the second special symbol, etc.), or even if a specification is adopted in which advance determination is performed at any time without setting a preliminary determination timing. good. In addition, in each game state, only the activated pending ball of the special symbol of the person who is the main player of the game may be subject to preliminary determination. For example, in the normal gaming state, only the activated suspended ball of the first special symbol is subject to preliminary determination. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the potential variable probability game state, and the probability variable game state, it is preferable that only the operation pending ball of the second special symbol is subject to preliminary determination. Specifically, the advance judgment means P135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the activated hold ball acquired this time from the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means P180, and determines whether it is correct or not. A preliminary determination (validity preliminary determination), a symbol preliminary determination (symbol preliminary determination), and a fluctuation pattern preliminary determination (variation pattern preliminary determination) are sequentially executed. Although the preliminary determination tables used in each preliminary determination are not shown, each of the correctness preliminary determination table, symbol preliminary determination table, and variation pattern preliminary determination table divides the area corresponding to the total number of random numbers into multiple areas. A lottery ID (number indicating the result of preliminary determination (also referred to as "pre-determination number")) is assigned to each area (determination number). Therefore, the result of this preliminary determination is similar to the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means P140 (described later) (result of validity determination, result of symbol determination, result of fluctuation pattern determination). Note that the table for preliminary determination of success or failure, the table for preliminary determination of symbols, etc. may be the same as the success/failure lottery table, symbol lottery table, etc. used for lottery when actually starting variation. Here, the table for pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern is based on the possibility that the gaming situation at the start of the fluctuation (presence of probability change, presence of time reduction, whether or not it is during the limited frequency period for referring to the special table, number of reserved balls, etc.) For this reason, it is desirable to determine which of a plurality of areas the object is included in, as described above. In addition, as a modified example, it is configured to pre-determine the random value of a register or the like on the main CPU 101 that is temporarily stored before storing it in the first special symbol retention storage area or the second special symbol retention storage area. You may. Then, the advance judgment means P135 sequentially generates production control commands (referred to as "pre-judgment commands") including information on the result of the advance judgment (pre-judgment number), and stores them in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180. Store in.

The special symbol lottery processing means P140 includes a special symbol propriety determining means P141, a special symbol stopping symbol determining means P142, and a special symbol variation pattern determining means P143. The special symbol lottery processing means P140 stores data in the first storage area (reservation 1 storage area) of the special symbol reservation storage area in the main information storage means P180 when the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. The stored random numbers per special symbol, random numbers per special symbol, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers are read out and stored in the special symbol validity determination area, special symbol design determination area, and special symbol variation pattern of the main information storage means P180. Store each in the judgment area. Here, "the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied" means that (A1) the jackpot is not in progress, (A2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, (A3 ) When all the conditions of the existence of the operation pending ball of the first special symbol are satisfied. In addition, "the condition for starting fluctuation of the second special symbol is satisfied" means that (B1) the jackpot is not in progress, (B2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting to fluctuate, (B3) This is when all the conditions of the presence of the operation pending ball of the second special symbol are satisfied. In addition, when the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is processed with priority based on the above-mentioned priority digestion. do.

The special symbol validity determination means P141 reads the special symbol per random number value from the special symbol validity determination area of the main information storage means P180 and executes the validity determination, and the determination result corresponds to whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss. Decide what to do. The result of this judgment is temporarily stored in the special symbol judgment flag of the main information storage means P180 (for example, jackpot data "55H", small win data "33H", loss data "00H"), and is used in subsequent processing. After that, it will be cleared when the special symbol stops changing. The special symbol validity determination means P141 holds a special symbol validity lottery table that is referred to during this validity determination.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol validity lottery table. 47(A) is referred to in a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is not operating (low probability state), and FIG. 47(B) is referred to in a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is operating (high probability state). state). In the special symbol success/failure lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol is associated with the result of the determination of the success/failure of the special symbol (big hit, miss). As shown in FIG. 47, when determining whether a special symbol is correct or not, in a gaming state where the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated (low probability state), the random number value per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204". In a gaming state (high probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated, a jackpot occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 1506". In other words, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot changes from a low probability of "1/319.69" to a high probability of "1/43.49." In this way, the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the gaming state, but the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be equal between the judgment of the first special symbol and the judgment of the second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, although a "small hit" is not set as a result of the determination of the validity of the special symbol, a "small hit" may be set as a result of the determination of the validity of the special symbol. The probability of winning a small win is set to the same probability of winning regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state).

The special symbol stopping symbol determining means P142 determines the stopping symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the result of the winning/failure lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 48, the special symbol stop symbol determining means P142 uses the first special symbol jackpot symbol table and the second special symbol table that are referred to when determining the jackpot symbols (jacket type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this embodiment, a "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability variation function of a special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and a "normal jackpot" means a special symbol after the jackpot game ends. It means a jackpot (non-certain variable jackpot) that does not trigger the probability fluctuation function of .

In this embodiment, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a variable probability gaming state are set as the plurality of gaming states. As for the types of gaming states, (1) the gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability variable state" or "probability variable gaming state", 2) A gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function does not operate and the special symbol variation time shortening function and electric chew support function operate is referred to as a "time saving state" or "time saving gaming state", and (3) all A state in which the function is not activated is called a "normal state" or "normal gaming state." Here, it can be said that the "variable probability gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state" are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the "normal gaming state". Therefore, hereinafter, the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will also be referred to as "advantageous gaming states" as gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In addition, each game state is (1 ) The variable probability gaming state can also be expressed as a "high probability high base state", (2) the time saving gaming state can be expressed as a "low probability high base state", and (3) the normal gaming state can also be expressed as a "low probability low base state". In addition, the operating state of the probability fluctuation function is a high probability state, while the operating state of the electric chew support function is a gaming state that is a low base state (a gaming state that is advantageous to the player compared to the "normal gaming state"). 1), such a gaming state may be referred to as a potential gaming state, and this potential gaming state may be expressed as a "high probability low base state". This probability gaming state (“high probability low base state”) is a suitable gaming state for playing a game mainly based on small winnings, and the details will be described later. Regarding these states (combined states of low probability/high probability and low base/high base), unless otherwise specified, the gaming state in a state where a jackpot or small win is not in progress (a win/fail judgment and a fluctuation display are possible) During a jackpot, the game is in a low-probability, low-base state, and during a small win, the game state is the same as the game state at the time of winning the small win. At this time, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is such that the fluctuation time of the special symbol which is the main player of the game in at least the first special symbol and the second special symbol is shortened. It means that. That is, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated, at least the first special symbol variation time ( In a gaming state where the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game (probable variable gaming state, probable gaming state, time saving gaming state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is shortened, and at least the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (average fluctuation time) is reduced.

In this embodiment, when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is determined by (1) the jackpot type (type of symbol group) and (2) the game at the time of winning the jackpot. Determined depending on the state. In addition, the number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) is determined by the number of times the special symbol's probability fluctuation function is activated (referred to as the "probability fluctuation number of times") and the special symbol's fluctuation time shortening function is activated. It is set according to the number of times the electric chew support function operates (referred to as the "number of times of electric support support"). In this embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric support support function start operating at the same time and end their operation at the same time, so the "variation time reduction number" and the "electronic support number" are the same number of times. (Therefore, in FIG. 48, the "number of times the fluctuation time is shortened" and the "number of times the electric support is activated" are written in the same column).

FIG. 48(A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. This first special symbol jackpot symbol table includes the symbol group, jackpot type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electronic support frequency), prescribed round number of jackpot games, and each round for the symbol random number per special symbol. The opening times (maximum opening times) of the big winning openings P54 are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbols is omitted for convenience). Two types of jackpot types are set in the first special symbol jackpot table corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the two jackpot types (symbol groups) are divided into 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

(4R specific jackpot: symbol group A) If you win the 1st special symbol “4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)”, the number of probability fluctuations is “10,000 times”, the number of fluctuation time reductions is “10,000 times”, the number of electric support is “ 10,000 times" is set, and a variable probability gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability game state has a huge number of times (10,000 times) set as the number of continuations (number of probability changes, number of variable time reductions, number of electric support), and you will not win the jackpot until you reach the number of continuations. Since this is impossible in terms of probability (approximately 1/44 chance of winning), the winning will continue until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, if you win the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: symbol group B) If you win the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)", the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100", the number of electric support is " 100 times" is set, and the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable reaches 100 times, or until the next jackpot occurs within this 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches 100, a transition is made to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. In addition, if you win the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

FIG. 48(B) is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. This second special symbol jackpot symbol table includes the symbol group, jackpot type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electronic support frequency), prescribed round number of jackpot games, and each round for the special symbol random number value. The opening times (maximum opening times) of the big winning openings P54 are associated with each other (in this example, for convenience, the description of the stop symbols is omitted). Three types of jackpot types are set in the second special symbol jackpot table corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the three jackpot types (symbol groups) are divided into 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), 4R specific jackpot (symbol group D), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group E).

(16R specific jackpot: symbol group C) If you win the 2nd special symbol “16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)”, the number of probability fluctuations is “10,000 times”, the number of fluctuation time reductions is “10,000 times”, the number of electric support is “ 10,000 times" is set, and a variable probability gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. As mentioned above, this variable probability gaming state is set to continue a huge number of times, ie, 10,000 times, and continues until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, if you win the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds". In addition, this 16R specific jackpot may be designed to be won even with the first special symbol, in which case it is more difficult to win than the second special symbol (for example, 5% of all jackpot symbols, For 1 special symbol, it is preferable that the specifications are as follows: 16R specific jackpot is 5%, 4R specific jackpot is 60%, and 4R normal jackpot is 35%.

(4R specific jackpot: symbol group D) If you win the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)", the number of probability fluctuations is "10,000 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10,000 times", the number of electric support is " 10,000 times" is set, and a variable probability gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. As mentioned above, this variable probability gaming state is set to continue a huge number of times, ie, 10,000 times, and continues until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, if you win the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: symbol group E) If you win the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)", the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100", the number of electric support is " 100 times" is set, and the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable reaches 100 times, or until the next jackpot occurs within this 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches 100, a transition is made to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. In addition, if you win the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

Here, in this embodiment, three types of jackpots are provided: 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), 4R specific jackpot (symbol groups A, D), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol groups B, E). It is being The expected value of winning a prize ball in the special game (referred to as the "expected value of winning a prize ball") is 16R specific jackpot > 4R specific jackpot = 4R normal jackpot. Here, the actual number of rounds of the special game when winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is "4 rounds", whereas the actual number of rounds of the special game when winning the jackpot with the second special symbol is " 16 rounds, so when a jackpot occurs with the second special symbol, there is a higher possibility of moving to a special game with a larger number of rounds than when a jackpot occurs with the first special symbol. This is advantageous for the player in that he or she can get the ball. The actual number of rounds of this special game corresponds to the number of times the "long open round game" set for the special game is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of each round of the jackpot game is set to a fixed time of 29 seconds (all rounds are referred to as a "long opening round game"), but a predetermined round during the same jackpot game Alternatively, by providing a "short opening round game" in which the maximum opening time of the jackpot hole P54 is shortened to 2 seconds in every round, even if the number of rounds in the jackpot game is the same, the number of balls that are actually paid out can be reduced. A configuration having jackpots with different numbers of rounds that can be obtained (jackpots with different actual numbers of rounds) may be adopted. In addition, in the long open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the grand prize opening P54 is set to allow or easily enter the specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls into the grand prize opening P54. It is a round game. A short open round game is a round in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the grand prize opening P54 is set such that it is impossible or difficult to enter the prescribed count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls into the grand winning opening P54. It's a game.

The special symbol variation pattern determination means P143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determining means P143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determining means P143 selects one of the variation pattern tables from among the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. A plurality of types of variation patterns are defined in each variation pattern table. In each figure, "selection rate" is shown for convenience of explanation, but in reality, the judgment value (range of random values) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which determination value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to. Various types of variation patterns are associated with a variation time as a condition for ending the variation display of special symbols, and it is assumed that the variation display of decorative symbols is also executed at the variation time.

Here, the variation pattern selection state will be explained. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, "normal selection state", "time saving selection state", and "probability variation selection state" are set as the plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. The normal selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set corresponding to a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which none of the special symbol probability variation function, variation time shortening function, and electric chew support function are operating. The time saving selection state is a variation set corresponding to a gaming state (time saving gaming state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not activated, but the special symbol variation time reduction function and electric chew support function are activated. The pattern is selected. The probability variation selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set corresponding to a gaming state (probability variation gaming state) in which all of the special symbol probability variation function, variation time shortening function, and electric chew support function are operating.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, in the special symbol variation pattern table, the columns to be referred to are different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the same special symbol variation pattern random value is obtained. Even so, different variation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of activated reservation balls ("0 reservations", "1~2 reservations", "3 reservations") listed in each figure is, if the first special symbol is a variable pattern lottery, It means the number of active pending balls of the first special symbol (the number of active pending balls after the pending expiration), and if it is a fluctuating pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of activated pending balls of the second special symbol (the number of active pending balls after the pending expiration). (number of activated balls). The number of suspended balls is the number of suspended balls that exist at the time of drawing the fluctuation pattern (at the start of the relevant fluctuation display/after the suspension is extinguished) (does not include the suspended balls that have been extinguished by the relevant fluctuation display). . In addition, as a modification thereof, the total value of the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

The variation performance of the decorative pattern performed in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. For reference, FIGS. 49 to 51 also show the contents of the variation effect set corresponding to each variation pattern (variation time). In the figure, "super shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation" are effects in which the decorative symbols in three rows fluctuate and the result is a so-called "miss" without going through the reach state even once. It is. Hereinafter, the ultra-shortened variation, shortened variation, and normal variation are also collectively referred to as "non-reach deviation." These non-reach out-of-reach types have different variation modes in that the variation display stops in a shorter time for the shortening variation than for the normal variation, and for the super shortening variation than for the shortening variation.

"N Reach (Normal Reach)" is a state (reach state) in which the same decorative symbols are stopped in two of the three rows of decorative symbols (generally the left column and right column), and the remaining one column (generally If a different decorative pattern stops in the middle row), it is a "miss", and if the same decorative pattern stops in the remaining row (generally the middle row), it is a "jackpot".

"SP Reach (Super Reach)" is a reach performance that has a higher expectation of jackpot than the above-mentioned N Reach, and is developed from N Reach after the establishment of Reach. This is a performance that displays things like this. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to C are prepared as types of SP reach. SP reach A is a reach effect that is executed when the gaming state currently being executed is the normal state. SP reach B is a reach effect that is executed when the gaming state currently being executed is the time saving gaming state. SP reach C is a reach effect that is executed when the gaming state currently being executed is the probability variable gaming state. In the variation pattern types of this embodiment, the jackpot expectation level is set to increase in the order of "non-reach" < "N reach" < "SP reach". As a modification, the content of SP reach is the same in the normal state and the time-saving game state (SP reach A), and in the case of the variable probability game state, it may be a different SP reach (SP reach C). Further, as another modification, a variation pattern including a pseudo-connection may be prepared. Pseudo-run refers to a pattern in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stopped, temporarily stopped) and then displayed again during one variable display, so that it appears as if the decorative pattern is displayed multiple times in a pseudo manner. (pseudo-continuous performance, pseudo-variation performance, pseudo-continuous fluctuation performance, re-variation performance). In other words, the pseudo series is an effect in which a pseudo variation is executed multiple times in which all of the decorative symbols in three rows start variation or re-variation and then temporarily stop or definitively stop. The greater the number of pseudo-continuations (the number of pseudo-variations), the higher the possibility of developing into an SP reach with a high expectation of a jackpot.

(Variation Pattern Table 1) FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. Variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the normal selection state. The contents of the variable pattern table 1 vary depending on the result of the judgment of the special symbol (big hit, miss).

Variation patterns PH1-1 (shortened variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), and PH1-4 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for losing. Here, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is "miss", the variation patterns PH1-1 (shortened variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 (SP reach A) is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is "miss", the reference destination is determined according to the number of activated balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the first special symbol. The contents of the table are set to be different, so that even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers are the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of pending balls in the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of pending balls in the first special symbol increases. The smaller the number, the easier it is for a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long to be selected. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is "miss", it does not depend on the number of pending balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time is relative. A variation pattern PH1-1 (shortened variation) or PH1-2 (normal variation) which is set to be shorter is selected. As a modification, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is "miss", only the main variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortening variation is selected, regardless of the number of pending operations of the second special symbol. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortening variation is most easily selected (it is preferable that the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of balls on hold for the second special symbol).

In the fluctuation pattern table 1 for jackpot, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (N reach) and PA1-2 (SP reach A) are set. Here, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the variable pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the jackpot type. Similarly, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a jackpot, regardless of the jackpot type,
Variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected.

(Variation Pattern Table 2) FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the time saving selection state. The contents of the variable pattern table 2 vary depending on the result of the judgment of the special symbol (big hit, miss).

Variation patterns PH2-1 (ultra shortening variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach B) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for misses. . Here, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation pattern PH2- 2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach A) is selected. In other words, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a failure, the variation pattern PH2-1 (super shortened variation) is selected, regardless of how many balls on hold for the first special symbol exist. Never. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is "miss", the variation patterns PH2-1 (ultra shortening variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 (SP reach B) is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is "miss", the reference destination is determined according to the number of balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol. The contents of the table are set to be different, so that even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers are the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, if there is no operation pending ball of the second special symbol, variation pattern PH2-1 (super shortening variation) is not selected, and there is no operation pending ball of the second special symbol. In this case, the larger the number of pending balls in the second special symbol, the more likely the variation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortened variation) will be selected.

In the fluctuation pattern table 2 for jackpot, fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (N reach) and PA2-2 (SP reach B) are set. Here, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the variable pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected regardless of the jackpot type. Similarly, when the result of the determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the variable pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected regardless of the jackpot type.

(Variation Pattern Table 3) FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the probability variation selection state. The contents of the variable pattern table 3 vary depending on the result of the judgment of the special symbol (big hit, miss).

Variation patterns PH3-1 (ultra shortening variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) are set in the variation pattern table 3 for misses. Here, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is "miss", the fluctuation pattern PH3- 2 (normal fluctuation) or PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. In other words, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the variation pattern PH3-1 (super shortened variation) is selected, regardless of how many balls of the first special symbol are on hold. Never. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is wrong, one of the variation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. be done. At this time, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is wrong, refer to the number of pending balls of the second special symbol (more specifically, depending on the presence or absence of pending balls of the second special symbol). The contents of the table are set to be different, so that even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers are the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, if there is no operation pending ball of the second special symbol, variation pattern PH3-1 (super shortening variation) will not be selected, and if there is an operation pending ball of the second special symbol. Since the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation) can be selected only when the second special symbol has an action pending ball, the effect of In this case, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time tends to be selected more easily.

In the fluctuation pattern table 3 for jackpot, a fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is set. Here, if the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the variable pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected regardless of the jackpot type (4R specific jackpot, 4R normal jackpot). Similarly, when the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected.

As mentioned above, in the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 3, the special symbol fluctuation time is specified for each fluctuation pattern, but no matter which fluctuation pattern is selected, the special symbol fixed stop time (determined Display time) is set to "0.5 seconds". The fixed stop time (determined display time) of the special symbol is the time during which the special symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time and fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set corresponding to the variable time and fixed stop time of the special symbol. Further, in the variation pattern tables 1 to 3, the performance content and variation time can be the same when a jackpot is won as when the game is a loss, but it is preferable that the final performance content is different between a jackpot and a loss. In other words, even with the same N reach, if you hit the jackpot, the decorative symbol will be a double (e.g. "7, 7, 7"), but if you miss, the decorative symbol will be a number that is off the reach (e.g. "7, 8").・7"), or even if the SP reaches A to C are the same, if you hit the jackpot, the final performance will be the one that indicates success, and the decorative pattern will be a double (for example, an ally character wins over an enemy character. , then "7, 7, 7" will be displayed), but if it is a miss, the final performance will be one that indicates failure, and the decorative symbol will be a roll that is out of reach (for example, if an ally character is an enemy character) It is preferable that the player loses the game, and then "7, 8, 7" is displayed. In addition, even if the performance content is the same (in the case of developing to the same SP reach) when a jackpot is achieved, it is preferable that the fluctuation time (performance time) is longer than when it is a loss. It is preferable that the SP reaches A to C at the time of a jackpot have a fluctuation time (performance time) that is 10 seconds longer than the SP reaches A to C at the time of a loss.

After selecting the special symbol variation pattern, the special symbol variation pattern determining means P143 instructs the production control board P200 to start varying the decorative symbols, so it determines whether communication with the production control board P200 is being performed normally. A production control command (communication check command) to confirm whether or not it is correct, a production control command (variation additional information designation command) including a special symbol variation addition pattern (information for adding/subtracting variation time), a special symbol variation pattern A production control command (fluctuation pattern specification command) containing information, a production control command (symbol specification command) containing information on character production number (symbol group and gaming state), etc. are generated (hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as " "Variation start command") is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180.

The normal symbol lottery processing means P145 includes a normal symbol validity determining means P146, a normal symbol stop symbol determining means P147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determining means P148. When the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing means P145 reads out the random value per normal symbol and the random value of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern stored in the earliest storage area in the normal symbol retention storage area, The information is stored in the normal symbol validity determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means P180. Here, the "normal symbol fluctuation start conditions" are (1) that the normal symbol is on standby for fluctuation, and (2) that a normal symbol operation pending ball exists. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a state where fluctuation can start (a state in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

The normal symbol validity determination means P146 reads out the random number value per normal symbol from the normal symbol validity determination area of the main information storage means P180, executes the validity determination of the normal symbol, and determines whether the determination result is a "hit" or a "miss". Determine whether this applies. The result of the normal symbol determination is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means P180, used in subsequent processing, and then cleared when the normal symbol fluctuation stops. The normal symbol validity determination means P146 holds a normal symbol validity lottery table (not shown) that is referred to when determining the validity of this normal symbol. The winning probability for normal symbols is set to 1/3001 if the electric chew support function (probability variation function for normal symbols) is not activated, and the probability of winning for normal symbols is set to 1/3001. If so, it is set to "2999/3001".

The normal symbol stopping symbol determining means P147 refers to a normal symbol stopping symbol table (not shown), and when the result of the determination of the normal symbol is a win, a predetermined winning symbol (the trigger for the activation of the normal electric accessory P522) is used. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the normal symbol is a loss, a predetermined loss symbol (a stop symbol that does not trigger the normal electric accessory P522 to operate) is selected. In this embodiment, symbols A and B are assigned as winning symbols of normal symbols, while symbol C is assigned as a losing symbol of normal symbols.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination means P148 reads the normal symbol variation pattern random value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means P180, and also refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table (not shown) to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. (variation time). The fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to "0.6 seconds" if the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is set to "0.6 seconds". is activated, it is set to "0.2 seconds". No matter which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (determined display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 second". The fixed stop time (determined display time) of the normal symbol is the time during which the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In addition, in the control of normal symbols, in order to reduce the processing load on the main control board P100, if the electric chew support function is not operating, the probability of winning for normal symbol determination is set to "0", and the normal symbol is It is also conceivable to adopt a specification in which the variation time is a single value.

Further, the normal symbol lottery processing means P145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory P522, depending on the result of the determination of the validity of the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol lottery processing means P145 holds a normal electric accessory opening pattern table that is referred to when determining the opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory P522. The opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric accessories P522 is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not activated, and when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not activated. If it is operating, "5.8 seconds" is set. In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory P522 may be different depending on the type of winning pattern of the normal pattern. For example, when the electric chew support function (release extension function) is activated as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P522, if the winning symbol of the ordinary symbol is symbol A, "3 seconds open x 1 time → 2. 8 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds)", and if the winning symbol of the normal symbol is pattern B, "2.8 seconds open x 1 time → 3 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5 .8 seconds).

When the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, the special game control means P150 determines the execution time (demonstration time) of the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration according to the determined jackpot type (symbol group); The execution time (round time) of the round game is determined. Then, the special game control means P150 issues a production control command (referred to as a "jackpot start demo command") to the production control board P200 side to instruct execution of a jackpot start demonstration production and an instruction to execute a jackpot end demonstration production. A production control command (referred to as a "jackpot end demonstration command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180. The jackpot start demonstration command is also an opportunity for the performance control board P200 to decide the contents of a series of jackpot performances (jackpot start demonstration performance, round performance, jackpot end demonstration performance) that are developed during the jackpot game. Become. In addition, the special game control means P150 generates a performance control command (referred to as a "round performance specification command") for instructing the start of a round performance corresponding to each round game in each round game during the jackpot game. , this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180. This round performance designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on opening and closing of the grand prize opening P54, and the like. In addition, as described later in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is set to 5 seconds, and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to 20 seconds. Regarding the execution time (demo time) of the end demo, it depends not only on the jackpot type (symbol group) but also on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, even if it is the same jackpot type (symbol group), the jackpot start demo or jackpot The execution time (demonstration time) of the end demo may be different. For example, assuming that the 16R specific jackpot is won with the first special symbol, and for the 4R normal jackpot, if you hit the jackpot in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo will be 5 seconds (as the jackpot start demo production) , Execute the performance A-1 that displays "Normal jackpot start"), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 15 seconds (As the jackpot end demo performance, perform B-1 that displays "Enter time saving mode" and prepaid A high-probability high-base state or a low-probability If you hit a jackpot in a high base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (execution A-1 is executed as the jackpot start demo production), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 10 seconds (as the jackpot end demo production, For the 16R specific jackpot and 4R specific jackpot, if the jackpot is hit in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (the jackpot start demo The execution time is 20 seconds (as the performance, the execution time is 20 seconds), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 20 seconds. On the other hand, if you hit the jackpot in the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (run the performance A-2 as the jackpot start demo performance). Then, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration may be set to 10 seconds (as the jackpot end demonstration performance, performance B-3 that is displayed as "Continue in probability variable mode" is executed, and performance C is not executed). In addition, assuming that the 16R specific jackpot is won even with the 1st special symbol, if the 1st special symbol is the jackpot, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (16R specific jackpot) regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot. , 4R specific jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot are both 5 seconds, and the jackpot start demonstration performance is performance A-1 or performance A-2), and the jackpot end demonstration execution time is 30 seconds (16R special jackpot and For 4R specific jackpots, performance B-2 and C will be executed in 30 seconds as a jackpot end demonstration performance, however, for 4R normal jackpots, performance B-1 and C will be performed as a jackpot end demonstration performance in 15 seconds. On the other hand, if there is a jackpot with the second special symbol, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (for any of the 16R specific jackpot, 4R specific jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot). The execution time is 5 seconds, and the execution time is 20 seconds for the jackpot start demonstration (performance A-1 or A-2 is executed as the jackpot start demo production), and the execution time for the jackpot end demo is 20 seconds for the 16R specific jackpot and 4R specific jackpot. As a performance, performance B-3 is executed and performance C is not performed.However, for 4R normal jackpot, the time is 10 seconds, and as a jackpot end demonstration performance, performance B-1 is executed and performance C is not performed). . This relationship between time values is just an example, and as long as the magnitude relationship of each demonstration time in each situation is the same as above, it is not limited to this time value. In addition, in any of the above specifications, performance C will not occur if there is a jackpot in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, but performance C will not occur due to fluctuations related to the jackpot or during a jackpot game (during a special game). If a power outage occurs and the power outage is restored during its fluctuation or during a jackpot game, performance C may be generated as an exception.

The symbol display control means P155 includes a special symbol display control means P156 and a normal symbol display control means P157. The special symbol display control means P156 causes the first special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device P71 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and after the variable display, the first special symbol is determined to be displayed. let Further, the special symbol display control means P156 causes the second special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device P72 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variable display. Confirm and display. The special symbol display control means P156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device P71 and the second special symbol display device P72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means P180. The special symbol display control means P156 requests the production control board P200 to confirm the display of the decorative symbol when the variation of the special symbol stops (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes "0"). A production control command (referred to as a "variation stop command") is generated for this purpose. The normal symbol display control means P157 causes the normal symbol to be displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display device P75 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and after the variable display, the normal symbol is permanently displayed. The normal symbol display control means P157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbols. The operating state of the normal symbol display device P75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means P180.

In addition, the special symbol display control means P156 issues a performance control command (referred to as a "standby demo command") that triggers the execution of a standby demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) when the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined period of time or more. This is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180. "The suspended state of the game continues for a predetermined period of time or longer" means that a period in which there is no special symbol operation pending ball and a special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner continues for a predetermined period or longer. In addition, if the period in which no game balls are fired continues for more than a predetermined time, or if the period in which game balls do not enter all winning slots continues for more than a predetermined time, the game will be suspended for more than a predetermined time. It may be a continuing specification.

When the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, the electric accessory control means P160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid P543 as a jackpot game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the special electric accessory solenoid P543 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid P543. The object P542 is controlled to open and close according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the jackpot game, one opening/closing operation of the special electric accessory P542 is treated as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed for a specified number of rounds. The electric accessory control means P160 holds a big winning opening opening counter for storing the number of times the special electric accessory P542 is operated (ie, the number of rounds being executed). Here, the activation termination condition of the special electric accessory P542 in the jackpot game (unit game termination condition) is that a specified count number ("10" in this embodiment) of game balls enters the jackpot P54. Or, the opening time of the big prize opening P54 has reached the maximum opening time (“29 seconds” in this embodiment).

In addition, when the result of the determination of the validity of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the electric accessory control means P160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid P523, and outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid P522 (the solenoid P522) for a predetermined opening time. 2) to open and close the starting port P52). Here, as described above, the electric accessory control means P160 opens the normal electric accessory P522 for only 0.2 seconds in the low base state where the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not activated. Then, in the high base state where the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is activated, the normal electric accessory P522 is opened for 5.8 seconds. Here, the condition for terminating the operation of the normal electric accessory P522 is that a predetermined number of game balls ("10" in this embodiment) have entered the second starting port P52, or that the second starting port P52 has entered the game ball. This means that the opening time has reached the maximum opening time (in this embodiment, "0.2 seconds" or "5.8 seconds").

When the result of the judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot, the gaming state control means P165 controls the jackpot game based on the jackpot type (symbol group type) and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The game state after the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game is switched. In this embodiment, as described above, the multiple types of gaming states include a normal gaming state (low probability low base state), a time saving gaming state (low probability low base state), and a variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state). One of the plurality of game states is set as an alternative. It should be noted that each gaming state has already been described in detail, so repeated explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, when a jackpot game is executed, the game state control means P165 determines the fluctuation pattern selection state after the jackpot game ends based on the jackpot type (type of symbol group), and also determines the fluctuation pattern selection state after the jackpot game ends. Toggle the variation pattern selection state. In this embodiment, a normal selection state, a time-saving selection state, and a variable probability selection state are set as multiple types of fluctuation pattern selection states, and the selection states are set according to the determined gaming state, the type of jackpot, the number of times the special symbol is displayed, etc. Then, one of the plurality of variation pattern selection states is alternatively set. Note that each variation pattern selection state has already been described in detail, so redundant explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, the gaming state control means P165 generates a production control command (referred to as a "gaming state specifying command") including current gaming state information and variable pattern selection state information, and stores this command in the main information storage means P180. Store in area.

The error monitoring control means P170 monitors the input information of the I/O port circuit P104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, disconnection/short circuit power abnormality signal, radio wave detection signal from the radio sensor, door/frame open signal, etc. , determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If there is an error state, a production control command ("error production designation command") including the error information is requested in order to instruct the production control board P200 to perform an error state production. Although not shown in FIG. 46 etc., the door open switch is a means for detecting whether the glass frame P5 is open, and the frame open switch is a means for detecting whether the front frame P2 is open. The back set release switch is means for detecting whether or not the back set board P30 is opened. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for discovering so-called fraudulent gaming activities.

The main information storage means P180 stores random value information acquired in special symbol games and normal symbol games, operation pending ball information of special symbols and normal symbols, game states (probability variation function, variation time) regarding special symbol games and normal symbol games. Information on the shortening function, electric chew support function), information on the fluctuating pattern selection status, information on the result of judgment of special symbols and normal symbols (jackpot, miss), stop symbols related to special symbols and normal symbols (including symbol groups) information, information on the variation patterns of special symbols and normal symbols (including variation additional patterns), information on jackpot games (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of openings per round game), etc.), special symbol display device P71, It is configured to temporarily store status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory P542, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory P542, information on production control command data, etc., and a predetermined memory for storing each information. It has an area.

The command transmitting/receiving means P190 is configured to transmit various performance control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180 to the performance control board P200 using a parallel transmission method when there is a command transmission request. has been done. In addition, each production control command has a 2-byte structure including 1 byte of MODE data and 1 byte of EVENT data, and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of the MODE data is "1", Bit 7 of the EVENT data is set to "0". When transmitting this information as valid information, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the production control commands generated in each process are transmitted one command per interrupt period according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means P180.

As shown in FIG. 46, the performance control board P200 includes a performance lottery random number generation means P210, a performance generalization means P220, a lamp control means P230, an accessory control means P240, an error performance control means P250, a sub-main information storage means P260, and a command. It includes a transmitting/receiving means P270. In addition, each of the above-mentioned means in the production control board P200 is configured by sub-main CPU201, ROMP202, RAMP203, hardware such as electronic circuits, and software such as a control program stored in the ROMP202, arranged on the production control board P200. It is a functional expression of something.

The effect lottery random number generation means P210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) through the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters play the role of random number generation means that generates random numbers using software. This software random number includes a look-ahead lottery random number used for a look-ahead performance lottery, a decorative pattern random number used for a decorative pattern stop symbol lottery, a variable performance pattern random number used for a decorative pattern fluctuation performance pattern lottery, and a preview performance random number. It includes a preview lottery random number used for the lottery, a jackpot performance pattern random number used for the jackpot performance pattern lottery, a stage lottery random number used for the performance stage transition lottery, etc. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the production control side main processing (described later) (when no production control command is received from the main control board P100). do.

The performance generalization means P220 includes a performance mode control means P221, a pending information display control means P222, a pre-read notice control means P223, a variable performance control means P224, a decorative symbol control means P225, a preview performance control means P226, and a special game performance control means P227. include.

The production mode control means P221 controls the production mode (" (also referred to as "game production mode"). In this embodiment, "normal performance mode", "time-saving performance mode", and "probable variable performance mode" are set as multiple types of performance modes, and the game state (or variable pattern) managed on the main control board P100 side. One of a plurality of performance modes is alternatively set depending on the selected state) and the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a variable performance according to the set performance mode is executed. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the "normal production mode" is set, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the "time-saving production mode" is set, and when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, the "time-saving production mode" is set. In some cases, the "probable variation production mode" is set. When any production mode is set, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a background image that is displayed behind the decorative pattern ) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the production mode is output from the speaker P11. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each production mode, so it is possible for the player to recognize which production mode the player is currently in based on the type of background image or BGM. ing.

The hold information display control means P222 includes a first hold ball number counter for counting the number of active hold balls of the first special symbol and a second hold ball number counter for counting the number of active hold balls of the second special symbol. have. When the hold information display control means P222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board P100, it updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of active hold balls included in this command. On the other hand, when the hold information display control means P222 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board P100, that is, when the operation hold balls are consumed, it updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter. Further, the hold information display control means P222 displays the activated hold ball count of the first special symbol on the hold image display section 710 of the effect display device P70 based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter. Control is performed to display a number of pending images corresponding to , and a number of pending images corresponding to the number of activated pending balls of the second special symbol. In addition, the pending information display control means P222 displays the operation pending ball (the earliest active pending ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the fluctuating image display area P720 of the effect display device P70. , performs control to display a fluctuating image that is switched to a pending image corresponding to this activated pending ball. In this embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the suspended image of the first special symbol and the suspended image of the second special symbol are simply referred to as "suspended image" without distinguishing between them, and the suspended image of the first special symbol and the fluctuating image of the first special symbol. It may be simply referred to as a "fluctuation image" without distinguishing it from the fluctuating image of the second special symbol.

The pre-reading notice control means P223 executes a pre-reading determination (referred to as "pre-reading lottery") with respect to the operation pending ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice performance. A look-ahead notice performance is a so-called continuous notice performance that foretells the possibility of a jackpot win or a highly anticipated performance (for example, a reach performance) occurring over one or more fluctuating displays before the pending ball to be read ahead is used up. It is generated as one aspect of. At this time, the pre-read lottery is performed based on the information of the preliminary determination result included in the preliminary determination command from the main control board P100. Here, upon receiving the preliminary determination command from the main control board P100, the pre-read notice control means P223 distinguishes between the information of the preliminary determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the preliminary determination result of the second special symbol, respectively. Up to a predetermined upper limit number (4), the balls are temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage means P260 in combination with the entry order of the action-reserved balls. This pre-read information storage area has the same configuration as the reservation storage area of the main control board P100, and in the order of entry into each starting port 51, 52, reservation 1 storage area (first reservation storage area), A pending 2 storage area (second pending storage area), a pending 3 storage area (third pending storage area), and a pending 4 storage area (fourth held storage area) are provided, respectively. Each pending storage area is capable of storing information on the preliminary judgment result of validity, information on the preliminary judgment result of symbols, and information on the result of variation pattern preliminary judgment as one set. The information on the preliminary determination result is stored in the order of Pending 1 storage area, Pending 2 storage area, Pending 3 storage area, and Pending 4 storage area, while Pending 1 storage area, Pending 2 storage area, Pending 3 storage area, and Pending 4 storage area. They are consumed in the order of storage space (first-in, first-out principle). In addition, when the information on the preliminary determination result in the Pending 1 storage area is digested, the information on the preliminary determination result stored in the Pending 2 storage area, Pending 3 storage area, and Pending 4 storage area is transferred to the lower numbered storage area. At the same time, the contents of the pending 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

The fluctuation performance control means P224 controls the fluctuation process (performance process) from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols based on the information (fluctuation pattern information, fluctuation additional information, etc.) included in the fluctuation start command from the main control board P100. ) is determined by lottery. The variation performance control means P224 holds a plurality of types of variation performance pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation performance pattern of decorative symbols, and selects a variation pattern of the special symbol from among these multiple types of variation performance pattern tables. A variable performance pattern table corresponding to (variable time) is selected. Here, on the main control board P100 side, the main variation pattern of the special symbol (for example, "SP reach A" or "SP reach B", etc.) is determined, whereas on the production control board P200 side, the main variation pattern is determined based on the main variation pattern. A sub-variation pattern of decorative symbols (for example, "SP reach A1, A2...", "SP reach A2, A3...", etc.) that specifies the scenario of the effect display process in detail is determined. The variation display pattern of the decorative pattern defines the variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, the scenario of a series of production display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the end of the variation, and a notice is given at each stage of the display process. The timing at which the effects occur is also specified as a time schedule. In addition, regarding the variation production pattern of this decorative symbol, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even if the variation start command of the same information is received), if the production mode during the stay is different, the variation pattern of the special symbol can be mutually produced. Variable performance patterns with different contents can be selected. That is, a variable performance pattern table is prepared for each performance mode during the stay.

In addition, upon receiving the standby demo command from the main control board P100, the fluctuating performance control means P224 operates from the time when the standby demo command is received until the fluctuating display of the special symbol starts (the next fluctuating start). During the customer waiting period (until a command is received), for example, a waiting demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) in which a moving image for demonstration is played is executed.

The decorative symbol control means P225 creates decorations based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the fluctuation start command from the main control board P100 and the above-mentioned variable performance pattern determined by the variable performance control means P224. The final combination of stopped symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) is determined by lottery. In this example, three pattern rows including a plurality of types of decorative patterns are configured, and the decorative patterns are formed by identification elements consisting of, for example, numbers. In addition, the decorative pattern control means P225 holds a plurality of types of stop pattern pattern tables that are referred to when determining a combination of stop symbols of decorative patterns (also referred to as "stop pattern pattern") by lottery. These multiple types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for jackpot, a stop symbol pattern table for out of reach, a stop symbol pattern table for out of reach, and the like. The stop pattern of the decorative pattern is formed as a combination of three patterns, and includes a ``stop pattern indicating a jackpot (jackpot pattern)'' and a ``stop pattern indicating a loss (missing pattern)''. The jackpot symbol indicating a specific jackpot (probable variable jackpot) is a combination of three symbols of the same odd number in a stopping pattern (for example, "7, 7, 7"). The jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is a combination of three identical even-numbered symbols in a stopping pattern (for example, "2, 2, 2"). The missing symbols are a combination of stopping patterns in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol with a different number from the other numbers (for example, "1, 3, 8"). Here, the out-of-reach symbols among the out-of-reach symbols are combinations of stop patterns in which only the middle symbol is shifted several frames forward or backward while the left and right symbols match (for example, "3, 1, 3"). Become. In addition, in the case of a small winning symbol or a 2R jackpot symbol even if it is a jackpot symbol, it may be a combination of predetermined stopping patterns such as "3, 5, 7", for example. In addition, if the lottery result is out of reach, a specific number called a "chance number" (for example, "1, 2, 3" or "5, 6, 7" as the order number), "2, 2, 3", "5, 5, 6", etc.) may be selected as the deviation. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous performance, when performing a temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display before the final stop symbol is displayed, a special symbol ( Pseudo-continuous pattern) is selected. When displaying a temporary stop symbol that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-run, at least one stop symbol (typically the middle symbol) of the three rows of decorative symbols should be displayed with characters such as "NEXT". There are cases where a special symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol) is replaced and displayed (for example, "2, NEXT, 3", etc.). The stopping order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variable performance pattern described below, and in this embodiment, as a general rule, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, if the variation performance pattern is a shortened variation where the variation time is set to an extremely short time, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol will be stopped at almost the same time, and if it is a special variation production pattern, the right symbol → It is also possible to stop in the order of middle symbol → left symbol, and in this case, the expectation of jackpot tends to be relatively high. In addition, no matter which order of stopping, it is desirable that the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol begin to fluctuate at the same time when the fluctuation starts. However, here too, as a special variation performance pattern, variation may be started in the order of left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol.

Here, FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern attributes of the decorative pattern in this embodiment. The decorative pattern is formed by a combination of an identification element made of numbers and a color (display color) attached to the identification element. In this embodiment, a total of nine types of numbers from "1" to "9" are set as identification elements (that is, there are a total of nine types of decorative patterns). Each decorative pattern is arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the pattern rows, and on the effect display device P70, the order of "1" to "9" (or the order of "9" to "1") It is cycled or scrolled in each display area Z1, Z2, and Z3, and after "9" it returns to "1" (or after "1" it returns to "9" again). . This specification also applies to other embodiments. The design attribute of each decorative pattern is determined by the type of color applied to the identification element. In other words, even if a plurality of decorative patterns are composed of mutually different identification elements, they will be grouped into the same pattern attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three types of colors are set for the decorative pattern: "blue," "red," and "gold." In addition, on the drawing, the display modes of the three types of decorative patterns, ``blue,'' ``red,'' and ``gold,'' are expressed as ``white,'' ``diagonal lines,'' and ``filled.'' Specifically, decorative patterns “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are classified as blue pattern attributes (blue attribute), and decorative patterns “1”, “3”, “5”, and “9” are classified as blue pattern attributes (blue attribute). " is classified as a red pattern attribute (red attribute), and the decorative pattern "7" is classified as a gold pattern attribute (gold attribute). In this embodiment, as a symbol attribute of a decorative symbol, the expectation level of getting a ball and the expectation level of probability change increase one step at a time in the order of "blue" < "red" < "gold". Hereinafter, for convenience, a decorative pattern with a blue attribute is also referred to as a "blue pattern", a decorative pattern with a red attribute is also referred to as a "red pattern", and a decorative pattern with a golden attribute is also referred to as a "gold pattern".

The preview performance control means P226 draws a lottery for a preview performance pattern that defines the content of the preview performance to be executed at each stage of the process of changing the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the fluctuation performance pattern determined by the fluctuation performance control means P224. Determined by. The preview performance pattern includes a performance pattern in which an image of a specific character, an animation, etc. is displayed temporarily or in stages, a performance pattern in which a specific sound is output, a performance pattern in which a movable accessory is operated, and the like. The preview performance is executed in parallel with the display of fluctuations in the decorative symbols, and is intended to predictably suggest that the reliability of the jackpot is high in that the symbol fluctuations stop in a jackpot manner. The preview performance includes a preview performance that is executed before a ready-to-win state occurs (including when a ready-to-win state occurs) in the process of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols, and a notice performance that is executed after the ready-to-win state occurs. Each preview effect has a different level of jackpot reliability, and basically, the expectation level of a jackpot is relatively higher for a preview effect that is displayed after a reach occurs than for a preview effect that is displayed before a reach occurs. It's getting expensive. The preview performance control means P226 maintains a preview lottery table for each type of preview performance that is referred to when selecting a preview performance pattern, and selects a preview according to the type of preview performance that occurs according to the scenario of the variable performance pattern. You can select the lottery table. Specific types of preview performances include, for example, comment preview performances, background preview performances, SU (step-up) preview performances, logo preview performances, mini-character preview performances, group preview performances, character trailer performances, etc. ing. This preview performance is basically performed by combining the display of one or more preview performances with the fluctuating display of decorative symbols on the performance display device P70. Therefore, even if the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the same variable effect pattern, it is possible to generate a variety of effect modes by combining with one or more advance notice effects.

The special game performance control means P227 determines the content of the jackpot performance (jackpot performance pattern) that informs that the jackpot game is in progress. The performance during the jackpot includes a jackpot start demonstration performance to notify the start of the jackpot game, a round performance to notify that the round game is in progress, and a jackpot end demonstration performance to notify the end of the jackpot game. When the special game performance control means P227 receives the jackpot start demonstration command from the main control board P100, the special game performance control means P227 creates a jackpot performance pattern (jackpot start demonstration performance pattern) based on the information on the jackpot type stored in the sub-main information storage means P260. , round performance pattern, and jackpot end demonstration performance pattern). In this jackpot performance pattern, a jackpot start demonstration performance time, a round performance time (performance time according to the opening pattern of the big prize opening P54), and a jackpot end demonstration performance time are set, and along the time axis. A series of performance contents are set. In addition, the special game performance control means P227 executes the jackpot start demonstration performance according to the jackpot performance pattern, triggered by receiving the jackpot start demo command from the main control board P100, and triggered by receiving the round performance designation command. Each round performance is executed, and the jackpot end demonstration performance is executed in response to receiving a jackpot end demonstration command. In the jackpot start demonstration performance, for example, the words "Jackpot Start" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the jackpot game. Further, in the round performance, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of prize balls acquired are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) to enliven the jackpot game are displayed. In the jackpot end demonstration performance, for example, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed on the screen to announce the end of the jackpot game, and a performance indicating the game state (mode) to which the game will be transferred is displayed.

As described above, the performance control means P220 generates image control commands regarding images and sounds based on the determined performance contents (pre-read performance pattern, variable performance pattern, preview performance pattern, stop symbol pattern, jackpot performance pattern, etc.), This is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means P260.

The lamp control means P230 controls the lighting, emitted light color, etc. of the performance lamp according to the performance content set by the performance control unit P220. The lamp control means P230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the production lamps LP (frame lamp P10, panel lamp P25), and stores lamp data corresponding to the determined production pattern. is read out and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board P91.

Accessory object control means P240 controls the driving of each movable accessory object P24 according to the performance content set by performance control means P220. The accessory control means P240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable accessory P24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) according to the determined performance pattern to the motor driver P92. .

The error effect control means P250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when receiving an error effect designation command from the main control board P100, and to notify that an error state has occurred in the gaming machine according to the error effect pattern. There is.

The sub-main information storage means P260 is configured to temporarily store decorative pattern information, variable effect pattern information, preview effect pattern information, control command information, etc. It has a storage area. For example, the command storage area includes an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board P100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board P300, and an image control command buffer for storing the image control commands to the image control board P300. Contains an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of production control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmitting/receiving means P270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P100 and store this effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means P260. The command transmitting/receiving means P270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board P100, executes a production control command reception interrupt process (details will be described later), and sends various production control commands in this interrupt process. It is supposed to be obtained. In addition, when the command transmitting/receiving means P270 receives a strobe signal, it performs reception interrupt processing of this production control command with priority over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing with a priority level lower than 7, which will be described later). ing.

In addition, the command transmitting/receiving means P270 stores information in the sub-main information storage means P260 in order to instruct execution of the performance contents (variable performance pattern information, advance notice performance pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the performance generalization means P220. The image control command is sent to the image control board P300 using a serial communication method. In principle, the image control commands are transmitted at predetermined intervals (500 μs in this example) in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means P260. As a result, the image control board P300 analyzes various image control commands sent from the performance control board P200, and causes the performance display device P70 to variably display performance images including decorative patterns in accordance with the scenario of the variable performance pattern. , A preview performance is displayed in a form superimposed on the design variation performance at each stage of the fluctuation display process. Furthermore, the command transmitting/receiving means P270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board P300, and stores this ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage means P260.

[Various Productions] As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PM having such a configuration is configured such that various game productions are controlled and executed by the production control board P200 and the image control board P300, depending on the progress of the game, etc. It is configured. Below, among the various game performances, the contents of the jackpot performance will be explained. In addition, in the following, "limiting execution" or "regulating execution" means, for example, not executing all, not executing a part, giving relatively low priority of display or output, etc. Used as a concept that includes In addition, in the following, "Execute redundantly (execute redundantly)"
means that the execution period (or execution timing) of one side overlaps with the execution period (or execution timing) of the other. (or execution timings) partially overlap.

[Jackpot Performance] As described above, the jackpot performance includes a jackpot start demonstration performance, a round performance, and a jackpot end demonstration performance. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between jackpot types (types of symbol groups), jackpot symbol combinations (combinations of decorative symbols when a jackpot occurs), and jackpot performance patterns. (A) in the diagram is referred to when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, and (B) in the diagram is referred to when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state. . As shown in FIG. 53, the type of jackpot symbol combination and the type of jackpot performance pattern are determined according to the jackpot type (symbol group) selected in the special symbol lottery process. In this embodiment, even when the jackpot type is the same, the type of jackpot symbol combination and the type of performance pattern during the jackpot can be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

The jackpot symbol combination is composed of a combination of stop patterns "*, *, *" in which three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are aligned (*: decorative symbol of any number). The jackpot symbol combinations include "specific jackpots" such as "1.1.1", "3.3.3", "5.5.5", "7.7.7", and "9.9.9". Odd symbol combinations (red symbol combinations, gold symbol combinations) and "specific jackpots" such as "2, 2, 2", "4, 4, 4", "6, 6, 6", "8, 8, 8" ” or an even number symbol combination (blue symbol combination) that indicates a “normal jackpot”. In other words, odd number symbol combinations (gold symbol combinations, red symbol combinations) are jackpot symbol combinations that are sure to win a "specific jackpot", while even number symbol combinations (blue symbol combinations) are "specific jackpot" and "specific jackpot" combinations. This is a jackpot symbol combination in which it is uncertain which jackpot type of "normal jackpot" has been won.

The gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that informs you that the actual number of rounds is ``16 rounds'' and that you have won a ``specific jackpot'' that triggers a transition to a variable probability gaming state. That is, the gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that definitely informs the player that he has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot) among the plurality of jackpot types. Although it is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds for the red symbol combination is either "16 rounds" or "4 rounds," it is a "specific jackpot" win that triggers the transition to a variable gaming state. This is a jackpot symbol combination that announces. It is certain that the actual number of rounds for the blue symbol combination is "4 rounds", but it is unclear whether the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the fixed variable gaming state has been won or whether it will change to the "time-saving gaming state". This is a jackpot symbol combination that informs you that it is uncertain whether you have won the "regular jackpot" that triggers the transition. Here, even if it is a blue symbol combination, the actual number of rounds may be "16 rounds" (in other words, even if the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds" for a variable jackpot, the blue symbol combination However, it is preferable that the red symbol combination has a higher possibility that the actual number of rounds will be "16 rounds". In this case, as one of the "joy jackpot effects" to be described later, a "joy jackpot C effect" which is a probability change promotion and a round promotion may be provided.

In this embodiment, as multiple types of jackpot performance patterns, "super longevity jackpot performance", "longevity jackpot A performance", "longevity jackpot B performance", "happy jackpot A performance", and "happy jackpot B performance" are set. has been done. The super longevity jackpot performance is a jackpot performance pattern type that is set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being a "gold symbol combination." The longevity jackpot A performance and the longevity jackpot B performance are jackpot performance pattern types that are set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being the "red symbol combination." The joy jackpot performance A and the joy jackpot B performance are jackpot performance pattern types that are set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being the "blue symbol combination." That is, the jackpot performance pattern type is set according to the symbol attributes (gold symbol, red symbol, blue symbol) of the jackpot symbol combination.

Here, with reference to FIG. 53(A), a description will be given of the jackpot symbol combination and jackpot performance pattern that are selected when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state. First, if the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as a jackpot symbol combination, a red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and a blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, if the "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "Shouto Jackpot A production" is selected as the corresponding jackpot production pattern, and the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In this case, "Kijo Jackpot B performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. Further, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and the "happy jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. Further, when the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, "gold symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "super longevity jackpot performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. Furthermore, when the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, the "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and the "longevity jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. Further, when the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and the "happy jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53(B), the jackpot symbol combination and jackpot performance pattern that are selected when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state will be explained. When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, the "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and the "longevity jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. Further, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and "joy jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. Furthermore, if the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, "gold symbol combination" or "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as jackpot symbol combinations, a gold symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and a red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, if "gold symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "super longevity jackpot production" is selected as the corresponding jackpot production pattern, and "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In this case, the “Kototo Kotobuki Jackpot B Performance” is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. If the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as a jackpot symbol combination, a red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and a blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, if the "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "Shouto Jackpot A production" is selected as the corresponding jackpot production pattern, and the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In this case, "Kijo Jackpot B performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. Further, when the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and the "happy jackpot A performance" is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern.

The super longevity jackpot performance is a jackpot performance pattern that definitely informs the player that he has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot) among a plurality of jackpot types.

In the Kotobuki Jackpot A performance and the Kotobuki Jackpot B performance, it is confirmed that the winning is in the “specific jackpot” type that triggers the transition to the fixed-variable gaming state, but until the predetermined number of rounds (4th round) is reached. is a jackpot performance pattern in which the performance progresses while it is unclear whether the actual number of rounds is either "16 rounds" or "4 rounds". Here, in the Kotobuki Jackpot A performance, even if the predetermined number of rounds (4th round) is reached, the promotion performance (round promotion performance) is not performed, and the specified number of rounds of the current jackpot game is "4 rounds". One thing is certain. On the other hand, in Kotobuki Jackpot B performance, when the predetermined number of rounds (4th round) is reached, a promotion performance (round promotion performance) occurs, and the specified number of rounds for this jackpot game is "16 rounds". (The specified number of rounds has been promoted to "16 rounds") is confirmed.

It is certain that the actual number of rounds for the joy jackpot A performance and the joy jackpot B performance is "4 rounds", but until the jackpot end demonstration is reached, there will be a "specific jackpot" that will trigger the transition to a certain variable gaming state. This is a performance pattern during a jackpot in which the performance progresses while it is unclear whether the player has won the ``normal jackpot'' that triggers the transition to the time-saving gaming state. Here, in the joy jackpot A performance, even if the jackpot end demo is reached, the promotion performance (probable change promotion performance) is not performed, and the current jackpot type is "normal jackpot" (time reduction after the current jackpot game ends). (transition to gaming state) is confirmed. On the other hand, in the joy jackpot B performance, when the jackpot end demo is reached, a promotion performance (progressive promotion performance) occurs, and the current jackpot type is "specific jackpot" (after the end of the current jackpot game, the probability change game state ) has been confirmed. In addition, in FIG. 53, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the jackpot performance pattern is changed depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, but regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the correspondence as shown in FIG. 53(B) It may also be a correspondence relationship. Further, a 16R specific jackpot may also be provided for the first special symbol, and in that case, even when the first special symbol is a jackpot, a super longevity jackpot performance or a long life jackpot B performance may be performed. Note that the detailed contents of the promotion performance (round promotion performance, fixed-variable promotion performance) will be described later.

Next, the contents of each jackpot production pattern will be explained. 54 to 58 are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the jackpot performance pattern. In the figure, for each jackpot performance pattern, the correspondence between the type of individual performance that occurs during the jackpot game and the timing of occurrence is determined. In addition, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, the opening mode of the big prize opening P54 is added in the figure. However, in this embodiment, as the opening mode of the big winning hole P54, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning hole P54 is set to an open time in which a specified count number (full count) of game balls can be entered or it is easy to enter the ball. Although only the set "long opening" is available, it is not limited to this configuration, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the grand prize opening P54 is when a game ball enters the specified count number (full count). You may also prepare a "short release" set at a time when it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball.

First, while the jackpot start demo is being executed, a screen indicating the type of jackpot performance (choju jackpot performance, long life jackpot performance, joy jackpot performance) is displayed, and the player is informed of which jackpot performance will start. It is suggested whether In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is set to "5 seconds" in common for all jackpots.

During execution of each round game, a round performance screen corresponding to the type of performance during the jackpot (super longevity jackpot performance, long life jackpot performance, joy jackpot performance) is displayed. That is, if the performance pattern during the jackpot is a super longevity jackpot performance, the super longevity jackpot round screen, if the performance pattern is a longevity jackpot A performance or a longevity jackpot B performance, the longevity jackpot round screen, the joy jackpot A performance or the joy jackpot B. If it is a performance, a joy jackpot round screen is displayed. However, if a round promotion effect described below occurs in a predetermined round game, the type of this jackpot effect will be promoted and the round effect screen of the lower rank type will be switched to the round effect screen of the higher rank type. It has become.

In addition, after the end of each round game, there is an interval which is the pause time (closing time of the big winning opening P54) from when the end of each round game is set until the setting of the next round game or jackpot end demo starts. A period has been set. Therefore, the special game is "Jackpot start demo" → "Round game" → "Interval period" → "Round game" → "Interval period" → ... → "Round game" → "Interval period" → "Jackpot end demo" It will be developed like this. In this embodiment, the interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" in common for all jackpots. Details of this interval time will be described later.

While the jackpot end demo is being executed, the content of the production mode (game state) to which the jackpot game currently being executed will be transferred after the end of the jackpot game is suggested, and it is suggested to the player which production mode the player will enter or continue into. be done. Also, during this jackpot end demonstration period, a definite change promotion performance or a pending series suggestion performance, which will be described later, may be performed. In addition, the reserved combination suggestion performance that is performed during this jackpot end demonstration period includes the reservation combination suggestion performance that is triggered by the occurrence of an over winning or bonus winning performance in the modified example described below (combined with an over winning performance or a bonus winning performance). (double performance) is not included. In other words, the hold-up suggestion performance according to the modified example described below is not a performance performed during the jackpot end demonstration period, but a performance performed during the interval period. Note that the details of the probability-variable promotion performance and the suspended combination suggestion performance of this embodiment will be described later. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpots. For the jackpot start demo and jackpot end demo, as mentioned above, it is either a jackpot game at the first hit (that is, a jackpot from a low probability low base state) or a jackpot game during a series of games (that is, a high probability jackpot game) Each demo time may be configured to be different depending on whether it is a jackpot (from a high base state or a low probability high base state). Specifically, in the case of a jackpot game during a series of games, the processing of the games before and after the jackpot can proceed more quickly than when the game is a jackpot game during the first hit. (in order to proceed), each demonstration time may be set to a relatively short time. In addition, as mentioned above, when performing a performance to alert people to forgetting to take out their prepaid cards during the first jackpot game, it is preferable to do so during the jackpot end demo period, which is set for a relatively long time. Yes, if you want to perform a performance to alert people to forgetting to take out a prepaid card during a jackpot game during a series of games, it can be done during the execution period of the round game instead of during the jackpot end demo period, which is set for a relatively short time. suitable. In addition, regarding the reservation series suggestion performance, in a jackpot game at the first hit (that is, a jackpot from a low probability low base state), it is preferable not to execute it or to lower the execution probability even if there is a jackpot reservation in the reservation. Yes, in a jackpot game during a series of games (that is, a jackpot from a high-probability high base state or a low-probability high base state), it is preferable not to execute it or to increase the probability of execution even if there is a jackpot pending in the hold. . Furthermore, it is preferable that the pending combination suggestion performance is performed during execution of a special game corresponding to the 16R specific jackpot, and is executed when the pending jackpot in the pending is the jackpot pending corresponding to the 16R specific jackpot. It is preferable to (It is preferable to avoid this.)

Here, FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram showing the basic screen (round effect screen) during a round game. Although not shown, various images (animation images, etc.) corresponding to the type of jackpot performance pattern are displayed in the central area of the screen in order to enliven the jackpot game.

In the round display area P730 of the screen, the number of rounds (in the illustrated example, the third round) indicating the number of the round game currently being executed is displayed. For example, if the round game currently being executed is the first round game (first round), "ROUND1" is displayed in the round display area, and the round game currently being executed is the second round game (second round). If it is the third round), "ROUND2" is displayed in the round display area, and thereafter, each time a round game is played, "ROUND3", "ROUND4", etc. are displayed in the round display area P730. .

In the right-hitting display area P731 of the screen, a right-hitting image (also referred to as a firing instruction effect) that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area PA2 (right-handed hitting) is displayed. In addition, if the game ball flows down the left area PA1 and enters the general winning holes P61 to P63 despite the situation where it should be hit to the right (during a jackpot), When the ball enters the mouth P51, that is, when the game ball is launched toward the left area PA1, a performance (warning notification performance) is executed to alert the player not to hit the ball to the left. You may also do so. In the warning effect, a message instructing you to hit the game ball to the right is displayed on the screen, or the effect lamp LP lights up in a special light emitting manner (for example, flashes at high brightness at high speed or momentarily), thereby alerting you to the game ball. The player is informed that the ball should be fired toward the right area PA2 (right shot). Note that, as a warning production, for example, a voice saying "Please hit the ball to the right" (a sound for instructing the player to hit the ball to the right) may be outputted from the speaker P11. It is desirable that this warning effect be placed in a conspicuous position (for example, in the central display area) and in a size (for example, occupying most of the display area of the effect display device P70) so that the player can clearly see it. , even if the right-handed hit image, the display content in the prize ball acquisition display area P732 (described later), the display content in the cumulative award ball count display area P733, the emphasis effect, and the display content in the round display area P730 are displayed. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be displayed. However, since the right-handed hit image is also information that should be clearly conveyed to the player (information regarding the appropriate firing position), the right-handed hit image and the warning alert effect may be displayed in different display areas to avoid overlapping display. Appropriate. On the other hand, in order not to obstruct the visibility of the caution notification effect, the display content in the prize ball acquisition display area P732, the display content in the cumulative award ball count display area P733, the emphasis effect, and the display content in the round display area P730, which will be described later. It is desirable that the display priority is high (in other words, while the display can be displayed in an overlapping manner, in that case, the warning effect is displayed in front). Regarding this firing instruction performance, the display condition is when the ball enters the general winning holes P61 to P63 during the jackpot, or when the ball enters the first starting hole P51, but the display time is set to 10 seconds. has been done. However, if the display condition is satisfied again before this display time of 10 seconds has elapsed, then 10 seconds is set as the display time again (that is, the display time is extended). In addition, it is preferable to display right-handed images and warning notification effects not only during jackpots, but also in high base states such as high-probability high-base states and low-probability high-base states. It will continue to be displayed during the high base state, and if the warning notification is displayed when there is less than 10 seconds until the end of the jackpot (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot end demo), the warning will change from the middle of the jackpot to the high base state. It is desirable to configure the display so that it is displayed continuously.

In the prize ball acquisition display area P732 of the screen, when a predetermined winning (over winning or bonus winning described below) occurs, the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning is displayed in order to notify that the winning has occurred. (Number of pitches awarded per unit) is displayed. This prize ball acquisition display area P732 displays the number of prize balls to be won by the over-winning when an over-winning occurs (the unit prize ball number to be acquired when one game ball enters the grand prize opening P54). The first prize ball acquisition display area P732A, and the number of prize balls to be won by the bonus winning when a bonus winning occurs (the unit prize ball number to be acquired when one game ball wins in the general winning hole P64). and a displayed second prize ball acquisition display area P732B. For example, if an over-win occurs, "+15pt" corresponding to the unit prize ball number (15) of the grand prize opening P54 is displayed, and if a bonus prize occurs, the unit prize of the general prize opening P64 is displayed. “+3pt” corresponding to the number of pitches (3) is displayed. Further, as a modification, the first prize ball acquisition display area P732A and the second prize ball acquisition display area P732B may be positioned apart.

In the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 on the screen, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired up to the present time based on the game balls entering the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64 in the jackpot game during the consecutive games is displayed ( (referred to as the "cumulative number of awarded pitches") is displayed. "Successive games" is a state in which the specific gaming state continues without returning to the non-specific gaming state after the occurrence of the first win that triggers the transition from the non-specific gaming state to the specific gaming state. This is a state in which jackpots occur continuously in a specific gaming state. In addition, the "specific gaming state" is a gaming state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), and the probability fluctuation function of special symbols and the fluctuation time of special symbols. This is a state in which at least one of the shortening function and the electric chew support function is activated (at least one of a high probability high base state, a low probability high base state, and a high probability low base state). In this embodiment, the gaming state (high base state) in which at least the electric chew support function is operating corresponds to the "specific gaming state". Note that this cumulative number of prize balls also includes the number of prize balls won by entering the game ball into the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64 in the special game when the first hit occurs. Note that this cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls awarded due to over-winning, which will be described later, or may not include the number of prize balls awarded due to over-winning. In addition, this cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls awarded by winning a bonus, which will be described later, or may not include the number of prize balls awarded by winning the bonus. . The over winning effect described below is executed only when the jackpot is in progress (it can be executed because the big winning hole P54 can be opened and the ball can be entered), but the general winning hole P64 is executed only when the jackpot is in progress. You can enter the ball regardless of whether it is present or not. However, the bonus winning performance described later is also configured to be executed only during the jackpot. Regarding bonus winnings, if the jackpot is in progress, the bonus winning presentation will be executed, but if the probability is low and the base condition is low, a special presentation that is different from the bonus winning (for example, the line "Don't enter here now!" A special effect that displays and sounds (however, it may occur when three balls enter within a predetermined time (for example, within 5 seconds) instead of one ball entering), and is performed with a high probability. If it is in the base state or low probability high base state, no bonus winning effect or special effect will be executed (in that case, there is no need to execute anything, but as another effect, a red flame will be displayed around the frame of the effect display device P70). ).

In addition to this cumulative number of prize balls, or instead of the cumulative number of prize balls, it is based on the fact that a game ball enters the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64 in one jackpot game currently being executed. The cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired up to this point (referred to as "number of prize balls during jackpot") may be displayed. The number of prize balls during a jackpot is the number of prize balls that a player can actually acquire during one jackpot game, so basically, the number of prize balls that can be obtained ( Although it may be less than the theoretical expected number of award pitches, it will not exceed the achievable number of award pitches. However, in the event of over-winning, which will be described later, the number of prize balls during a jackpot may exceed the obtainable number of prize balls (theoretical expected number of prize balls) set according to the type of jackpot.

In addition, although not shown, during a consecutive game, the number of successive jackpots in a specific gaming state, or the number of consecutive games including the first hit (the number of consecutive hits) is displayed. Good too. For example, if the jackpot is won three times in a specific gaming state after the first win, a display such as "3rd consecutive win" or "4th consecutive win" may be displayed during the jackpot. Furthermore, in each round of the special game, pseudo decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo decorative symbols") may be displayed in a variable manner and in a stopped manner (temporary stopped display, fixed stopped display). It is preferable that this pseudo decorative pattern has a different pattern form (a pattern exclusively used during a jackpot) from the normal decorative pattern that is variably displayed during a non-special game. Specifically, if the decorative symbols that are displayed in a fluctuating manner during non-special games are composed of pictures (characters) and numbers, during the special games, the decorative symbols only consist of numbers, and their size is reduced. Alternatively, if the decorative symbols that are variably displayed during the non-special game are composed of only numbers, during the special game, the decorative symbols are the same but have only numbers, but their size is reduced. Furthermore, if you hit a jackpot and all the numbers are ``7, 7, 7,'' etc., you only need to be able to recognize which decorative pattern you hit the jackpot with, so ``7, 7, 7'' is displayed during the special game. Rather, only "7" (not a decorative pattern combination of three decorative patterns, but only one decorative pattern) needs to be displayed. Furthermore, while the jackpot game (round game) is being executed, a "winning related performance" which is a characteristic performance of this embodiment is performed.

[Winning-related performance] Next, the winning-related performance of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related presentation of this embodiment. The winning-related performance is a performance executed based on the game ball entering a specific winning hole (big winning hole P54 or general winning hole P64) during execution of the jackpot game. This prize-winning-related production includes (A) a large prize-winning presentation and (B) a general prize-winning presentation.

<A. Big winning opening prize performance> The winning opening performance is a performance that is executed when a game ball enters the big winning opening P54 during execution of a special game. The grand prize opening presentation includes a grand prize opening regular prize presentation, a grand prize opening over winning presentation, and a grand prize opening count-up presentation. In addition, in the following, except for special cases, (a) the game ball enters the grand prize opening P54, (b) the game ball enters the grand prize opening P54, and (c) the game ball enters the grand prize opening P54. Being detected by the big winning opening switch P541 and (d) receiving the big winning opening winning command from the main control board P100 are used synonymously.

≪A-1. Big winning hole normal winning performance≫ The big winning hole normal winning performance is a performance that notifies that the game ball has entered the big winning hole P54, targeting the winning of game balls within the specified count number to the big winning hole P54. be. In other words, the big winning hole normal winning performance is performed every time a game ball enters the big winning hole P54 until the number of winning game balls entering the big winning hole P54 in one round game reaches the specified count number. It will be a performance. In this embodiment, although a specific example of the big winning opening normal winning performance is not specified, at least one of a plurality of performance means such as the performance display device P70, the speaker P11, the performance lamp LP, and the movable accessory P24 is used. A regular winning performance will be held for the big winning opening. As an example, (1) display an object corresponding to the specified count number in one unit game (for example, display a treasure chest for the specified count number in one unit game), and play the game to the big prize opening P54. Each time a ball enters, the object is deleted on the effect display device P70, and (2) a speaker outputs a sound of "challen" each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening P54. (3) A performance with a performance lamp LP in which the lamp flashes twice each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening P54. In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, without providing the big winning hole normal winning effect, only the later described big winning hole count up effect is used for the winning of game balls in the big winning hole P54 up to the specified count number. It may be configured so that it is performed.

≪A-2. Big winning hole over winning performance≫ Big winning opening over winning performance (also referred to as "over winning performance") This is an effect that suggests or informs that the ball has entered the grand prize opening P54. "Over winning" means that a game ball that exceeds the specified count number (in this embodiment, the 11th game ball or later) is detected by the big winning opening switch P541 during the execution of one round game. say. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the valid detection period of the big prize opening switch P541 is a detection grace period after each round game ends (in this embodiment, it is the same period as the interval period, but the detection period is the same as the interval period). The grace period may be a different period; for example, it is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demonstration, and is the waiting time set from the start of the closing operation of the big winning opening P54 to the closing time. If the round game waiting time (unit game waiting time), which is the period in which the This is the period set between the game and the jackpot end demonstration, and it is possible to detect the entry of game balls after the big winning opening P54 starts the closing operation (such as the entry of game balls exceeding the specified count number). The detection grace period, which is the period during which the detection grace period is set, may be set to 1 second after the grand prize opening P54 starts the closing operation, or may be set to 3 seconds, while at least a part thereof overlaps with the interval period. This is set for a period of time until the period (which may be allowed) has elapsed, and an over-win may occur within this interval period (within the detection grace period). As an example of over winning, when the game ball at the 10th count enters the big winning hole P54 and is detected by the big winning hole switch P541, and the closing operation of the big winning hole P54 is started. If the following game ball (game ball after the 11th count) enters the big winning hole P54 before the winning hole P54 is closed, this subsequent game ball (game ball after the 11th count) An over-win occurs when the ball) is detected by the big winning opening switch P541 within the interval period (within the detection grace period).

Types of over-winning effects include over-winning image display effects and over-winning sound output effects. FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the over winning performance of this embodiment. Note that it is preferable that the presentation mode of the over winning presentation is different from the presentation mode of the above-mentioned large winning opening normal winning presentation. In addition, as a modified example, only an over-winning image may be installed (no over-winning sound is installed), or only an over-winning sound may be installed (over-winning image is not installed) as a production related to over-winning.

The over-winning image display performance is a performance that displays an image that suggests that an over-winning has occurred (referred to as an "over-winning image"). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, an over-winning image with the characters "+15 pt" is displayed as an over-winning image in the prize ball acquisition display area P732 of the screen, and based on the occurrence of over-winning, "15" is displayed. It is suggested that he won the prize ball. This allows the player to intuitively understand that an over-win has occurred.

The over-winning sound output performance is a performance in which a sound indicating that an over-winning has occurred ("over-winning sound") is output from the speaker P11. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, the speaker P11 outputs a sound effect (voice of the character) saying "You did it", indicating that an over-win has occurred.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, a plurality of performance patterns for over winning performance may be provided. In other words, it is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of over-winning images or multiple types of over-winning sounds, and to select one of the over-winning images and over-winning sounds by a production lottery when an over-winning occurs. good. In this case, depending on the type of the over-winning image or over-winning sound, a pending series suggestion, a probability variation suggestion, a round number suggestion, etc. may be made. For example, while there is only one type of over-winning image, ``+15pt'', there are other over-winning sounds such as ``good job'', ``that's good'', and ``congratulations'' in addition to ``you did it''. In particular, when the over-winning sound "Congratulations" occurs, (1) the production also serves as a suggestion that the winning bet is on hold; (2) it also serves as a suggestion that the currently executed jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot. , (3) It may also function to indicate that the currently executed jackpot is a 16R jackpot rather than a 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modified example of this embodiment, multiple types of over winning sounds are set, and in addition to over winnings occurring, consecutive games within the hold are generated depending on the type of over winning sounds. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that suggests the possibility that the winning combination is over (in other words, it is used as both an over winning performance and a performance suggesting that the winning combination is on hold). Here, "results within the hold" means that when the result of the judgment of the validity of the special symbol made by the extinguishment of a certain preceding action-holding ball is a jackpot, the number of winnings related to this preceding action-holding ball A jackpot is expected to occur in one or more subsequent operation pending balls that exist at a predetermined timing from the time the special symbol judgment is permitted until the end of the special game executed with the jackpot as a trigger. This means that the ball contains active pending balls (also referred to as "jackpot pending"). In this modification, as the plurality of types of over winning sounds, over winning sound A (sound saying "You did it") and over winning sound B (sound saying "Congratulations") are prepared. If there is no jackpot pending when an over winning occurs (if no consecutive wins within the hold are established), the selection rate of over winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B is "0%". ”. On the other hand, if there is a jackpot pending when an over winning occurs (if a consecutive winning within the pending is established), the selection rate of over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B is "100%". ”. In other words, the over winning sound A is a normal sound that indicates that an over winning has occurred and that the consecutive winnings within the hold have not been established. The over-winning sound B is a special type of sound that indicates that an over-winning has occurred and a consecutive win within the hold has been established. In addition, the selection rate of over winning sounds A and B may be set as appropriate. For example, if there is a jackpot pending when an over winning occurs (when a series of wins within the hold is established), the selection rate of over winning sound A and B may be set as appropriate. The selection rate of ``80%'' may be set to ``80%,'' and the selection rate of over winning sound B may be set to ``20%.'' In addition, in the above modification example, the explanation has been given by exemplifying the case where the suspended combination suggestion performance is applied to the over winning sound output performance, but the suspended combination suggestion performance may also be applied to the over winning image display performance (for example, the over winning winning sound output performance may be applied). If "+15 pt" is displayed in black letters as an image display effect, it is unlikely that a pending intra-relationship has been established or has been established, but if it is displayed in gold letters, a pending intra-relationship is not established. (This may be a specification that has a high probability of being established or is likely to be established.) In addition, in the above modification, we have explained the over winning sound B as a suggestion of a pending series, but the over winning sound B may also have the role of a probability variation suggestion or a round number suggestion, and in that case, the current execution Depending on whether the jackpot being played is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probable variable jackpot), the selection rate of over-winning sounds A and B is set to 100%. '', the selection rate of over winning sound B is ``0%'', while in the case of a specific jackpot (probable variable jackpot), the selection rate of over winning sound A is ``0%'', and the selection rate of over winning sound B is ``100''. %”, or the selection rate for over winning sound A may be “80%” and the selection rate for over winning sound B may be “20%”, depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot. Accordingly, in the case of a 4R jackpot, the selection rate of over winning sounds A and B is ``100%'', and the selection rate of over winning sound B is ``0%'', while in the case of a 16R jackpot. In this case, the selection rate for over-winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate for over-winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate for over-winning sound A is "80%" and the selection rate for over-winning sound B is selected. The rate may be "20%".

In addition, in this embodiment, a "special pattern 2 priority extinguishing method" is adopted in which the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is consumed preferentially than the activation reservation ball of the first special symbol, and the number of consecutive games in the reservation is As the operation reservation ball to be targeted, only the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol may be targeted. In addition, if the gaming state at the time of the occurrence of the jackpot that triggers the execution of the special game is a specific gaming state (high base state), and the gaming state after the end of the special game is also a specific gaming state (high base state), , the reservation series suggestion performance may be executed in response to an over-win that occurs during the execution of the special game. Also, assuming that the preceding action holding ball becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), if the subsequent action holding ball contains a specific holding that becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) as the first specific holding. Further, the holding series suggestion performance may be executed using an over-win that occurs during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In other words, even if there is a jackpot pending in the subsequent operation pending, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot pending (or the first jackpot pending if there are multiple jackpot pending) is a low profit jackpot, the pending It may be configured so that the sho-suggestive performance is not performed. In other words, if a holding series suggestion performance occurs during execution of a special game, it is certain that the holding series will be played with a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, an over winning presentation may suggest that in addition to the occurrence of an over winning, there is a possibility of winning a probability variable jackpot. In other words, the over winning effect and the probability change suggestion effect may be used together. A probability-variable suggesting performance is a production that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the currently running special game is a specific jackpot (probability-variable jackpot), that is, a transition to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game. It is. In this modification, for example, if multiple types of over winning sounds A to C are set and the jackpot type won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of over winning sound A is "70%", and the over winning sound The selection rate for B is ``30%,'' and the selection rate for over-winning sound C is ``0%.'' In addition, if the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of over winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of over winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of over winning sound C is "10%". It becomes "60%". That is, in the order of "over winning sound A" < "over winning sound B" < "over winning sound C", the degree of probability change expectation (the degree of expectation of transition to the probability variable gaming state) increases by one step. In addition, as a further modification, the over winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of electric supports given after the end of the special game instead of the probability change expectation level.

≪A-3. Big winning hole count up performance≫ The big winning hole count up performance is displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 when a game ball enters the big winning hole P54 during the execution of a special game during a series of games. This is an effect that adds and displays the value of the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) paid out based on the entry of game balls into the grand prize opening to the value of the cumulative prize ball number. In this embodiment, the specification is that "15" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the big winning hole P54 (the unit prize ball number of the big winning hole P54 is 15), so the game When a ball enters the big winning hole P54, the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is updated in units of "15". In addition, the special game production control means P227 is equipped with a cumulative prize ball counter for counting the cumulative prize ball number, and each time a game ball enters the big prize opening P54 (from the main control board P100 Each time a grand prize opening winning command is received), "15", which is the unit prize ball number of the grand prize opening P54, is added to the count value of the cumulative prize ball number counter, and the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is accordingly added. A grand winning hole count-up effect is performed in which "15" is added and displayed to the displayed cumulative number of prize balls. This big winning hole count-up effect is performed regardless of whether the game ball entering the big winning hole P54 is within the specified count number or exceeds the specified count number. It is.

FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a series of big winning opening count-up performances. As shown in FIG. 62, the grand winning hole count-up effect is such that when a game ball enters the grand winning hole P54, this number is added to the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733. This is an effect in which the number of prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls into the big winning hole P54 is sequentially added and displayed in a count-up format of "1". In the illustrated example, the cumulative number of prize balls is counted up one by one as "7000" → "7001" → ... → "7014" → "7015". In addition, FIG. 62 shows the flow of the big winning opening count-up effect when an over-winning occurs, and after the over-winning effect is performed in (A) in the figure, (B) to ( in the figure A grand prize count-up performance is being held at E). Fig. 62 shows the big winning hole count-up effect when an over-winning effect is performed, but the big winning hole count-up effect not only occurs when an over-winning effect occurs, but also when a game ball enters within the specified count number. will be done. In addition, while the big winning hole count-up effect corresponding to the entry of game balls within the specified count number (especially the large winning hole count-up effect corresponding to the 10th count, which is the specified count number), Yes, if an over-win occurs when the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed, all the count-ups for the grand prize opening count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed will be completed. It is desirable to be configured such that a big winning hole count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is started after the count of 15 balls has been performed. Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (detection grace period), the big winning opening count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning will start in the next round (after the interval period has passed). Although this overlaps with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), the big winning hole count-up performance corresponding to the over winning will be performed during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has passed). Even if a ball enters the big winning hole P54 during execution, the timing of the ball entering is while the big winning hole count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is being performed, and the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed. If not, after the count-up of the big winning hole count-up effect for which the count-up of 15 balls has not been completed is completed (after the count-up of 15 balls has been done), the big prize in the next round will be decided. It is desirable to be configured so that a big winning hole count-up effect corresponding to the winning of the winning hole P54 is started.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, when an over-winning occurs during execution of a special game, while executing an over-winning effect, the number of prize balls awarded based on the over-winning is added to the cumulative number of prize balls. It may be configured so that the addition is not displayed. In other words, the cumulative number of prize balls is the number of prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls within the specified count number into the big winning hole P54, and the specified count number into the big winning hole P54 is added to the cumulative number of prize balls. It may be configured such that the number of prize balls awarded based on the excessive number of game balls entered is not subject to addition display.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, during the execution of a special game that is performed when the first hit occurs (the result of determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot in the normal game state), the specified count number is exceeded. Even if an over-winning effect occurs, the over-winning effect may be configured not to be executed. In addition, the types of special games include high profit special games (for example, 16R special game) and low profit special games (for example, 4R special game). The over winning performance may be executed when a winning occurs, and the over winning performance may not be executed even if an over winning exceeding a prescribed count number occurs during execution of a low profit special game. In addition, as a type of round game, a long open round game in which the maximum open time of the big prize opening P54 is set to an open time (for example, 29 seconds) that allows a specified count number (full count) of game balls to enter or allows easy ball entry. and a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the big prize opening P54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) that allows a specified count number (full count) of game balls to enter or that allows easy entry of the ball. During the open round game, an over winning effect that exceeds the specified count number will cause an over winning effect to be executed, and even if an over winning effect that exceeds the specified count number occurs during the short open round game. It may be configured so that the over-winning effect is not executed. In addition, during the execution of a special game that is performed when a specific jackpot (probable variable jackpot) is won, an over-winning effect will be executed if an over-win exceeds the specified count number, and a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) will be executed. During the execution of a special game that is performed when a player wins, the over-win performance may not be executed even if an over-win exceeding a specified count number occurs.

<B. General winning hole winning presentation> The general winning hole winning presentation is a presentation that is executed when a game ball enters the general winning hole P64. The general prize winning presentation includes a general prize winning hole regular prize presentation and a general prize winning hole count-up presentation.

≪B-1. General winning hole normal winning presentation>> The general winning hole normal winning presentation (also referred to as "bonus winning presentation") is a presentation that suggests or informs that the game ball has entered the general winning hole P64. In addition, in the following, when a game ball enters the general winning hole P64 while a special game is being executed, it is also referred to as a "bonus prize", but if a game ball enters a general prize while a special game is not being executed (non-special game state) Even if you win P64, you may also call it a "bonus prize."

Types of bonus winning performances include bonus winning image display performances and bonus winning sound output performances. FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the bonus winning presentation of this embodiment. Further, as a modified example, only a bonus winning image is installed (no bonus winning sound is installed), or only a bonus winning sound is installed (no bonus winning image is installed) as a performance related to the bonus winning. In addition, this bonus winning performance is configured to be executed even when the round game is in progress, or even when the jackpot P54 is closed (during the interval period) during the jackpot. If the big winning opening P54 is closed (during the interval period), it is configured so that it can be executed simultaneously with the over winning presentation.

The bonus winning image display performance is a performance that displays an image that suggests that a bonus winning has occurred (referred to as a "bonus winning image"). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, a bonus winning image with the characters "+3pt" is displayed as a bonus winning image in the prize ball acquisition display area P732 of the screen, and "3" is displayed based on the occurrence of the bonus winning. It is suggested that he won the prize ball. Thereby, the player can intuitively understand that a bonus prize has occurred.

The bonus winning sound output performance is a performance in which a sound indicating that a bonus winning has occurred ("bonus winning sound") is output from the speaker P11. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, the sound effect "Picon" is output from the speaker P11, suggesting that a bonus prize has occurred.

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of performance patterns for the bonus winning performance may be provided. In other words, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of bonus winning images or multiple types of bonus winning sounds, and to select one of the bonus winning images and bonus winning sounds by a production lottery when a bonus winning occurs. good. In that case, depending on the type of bonus winning image or bonus winning sound, a pending series suggestion, a probability change suggestion, a round number suggestion, etc. may be made. For example, while there is only one type of bonus winning image, "+3pt", there are other bonus winning sounds other than "Picon" such as "Gachan", "Chin", and "Dokan", among which "Dokan"'' when a bonus prize winning sound occurs, (1) the production also serves as a suggestion that the winning bet is pending, (2) it serves as a suggestion that the currently executed jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot, (3) ) It may also function to indicate that the currently executed jackpot is not a 4R jackpot but a 16R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modification of the present embodiment, multiple types of bonus winning sounds are set, and in addition to the occurrence of a bonus winning, a series of reservations is generated depending on the type of bonus winning sound. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that suggests the possibility that the winning combination is a bonus (that is, a combination of a bonus prize-winning performance and a performance suggesting a pending series). In this modification, a bonus winning sound A (a sound effect called "Picon") and a bonus winning sound B (a sound effect saying "boom") are prepared as a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds. If there is no jackpot pending when a bonus win occurs (if no consecutive games within the reservation are established), the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "0%". ”. On the other hand, if there is a jackpot pending when a bonus win occurs (if a consecutive game within the reservation is established), the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "100%". ”. In other words, the bonus winning sound A is a normal sound that indicates that a bonus winning has occurred and that the consecutive games on hold have not been established. Bonus winning sound B is a special type of sound that suggests that a bonus winning has occurred and that a consecutive game on hold has been established. In addition, if there is a jackpot pending when a bonus win occurs (if a consecutive game within the reservation is established), the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "80%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "20%". ”. In addition, although the modified example has been described by exemplifying the case where the suspended series suggestion performance is applied to the bonus winning sound output performance, the suspended series suggestion performance may also be applied to the bonus winning image display performance (for example, when the bonus winning image If "+3pt" is displayed in black letters as a display effect, it is unlikely that a pending consecutive house has been established or has been established, but if it is displayed in gold letters, it is a pending consecutive house. (This may be a specification that holds true or is likely to hold true.) In addition, in the above modification, the bonus winning sound B has been explained as a suggestion of a pending series, but the bonus winning sound B may also be designed to have the role of a probability change suggestion or a round number suggestion, and in that case, the currently executed Depending on whether the jackpot being played is a regular jackpot or a specific jackpot (probably variable jackpot), the selection rate of bonus winning sounds A and B is set to 100%. '', the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is ``0%'', while in the case of a specific jackpot (probable variable jackpot), the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is ``0%'', and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is ``100''. %'', or the selection rate for bonus winning sound A may be ``80%'' and the selection rate for bonus winning sound B may be ``20%'', depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot. Accordingly, in the case of a 4R jackpot, the selection rate of bonus winning sounds A and B is ``100%'', and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is ``0%'', while in the case of a 16R jackpot. In this case, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "80%", and the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is selected. The rate may be "20%".

In addition, in this embodiment, a "special pattern 2 priority extinguishing method" is adopted in which the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is extinguished preferentially than the activation reservation ball of the first special symbol. As the operation reservation ball to be targeted, only the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol may be targeted. In addition, if the gaming state at the time of the occurrence of the jackpot that triggers the execution of the special game is a specific gaming state (high base state), and the gaming state after the end of the special game is also a specific gaming state (high base state), , it is also possible to execute the pending series suggestion performance using the bonus winning that occurs during the execution of the special game as an opportunity. Also, assuming that the preceding active holding ball becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), if the specific holding that becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) in the subsequent active holding ball is included as the first specific holding. Furthermore, the holding series suggestion performance may be executed using a bonus win that occurs during the execution of the special game. In other words, even if there is a jackpot pending in the subsequent operation pending, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot pending (or the first jackpot pending if there are multiple jackpot pending) is a low profit jackpot, the pending It may be configured such that the sho-suggestive performance is not performed. In other words, when a holding series suggestion performance occurs during execution of a special game, it is certain that the holding series will be played with a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, the bonus prize presentation may suggest the possibility of winning a probability-variable jackpot in addition to the fact that a bonus prize has occurred. In other words, the bonus winning presentation and the probability change suggestion presentation may be used together. A probability-variable suggesting performance is a production that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the currently running special game is a specific jackpot (probability-variable jackpot), that is, a transition to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game. It is. In this modification, for example, if multiple types of bonus winning sounds A to C are set and the jackpot type won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "70%", and the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "70%", The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of bonus winning sound C is "0%". In addition, if the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of bonus winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of bonus winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of bonus winning sound C is "10%". It becomes "60%". That is, in the order of "bonus winning sound A" < "bonus winning sound B" < "bonus winning sound C", the degree of probability variation expectation (the degree of expectation of transition to the probability variation gaming state) increases by one step. In addition, as a further modification, the bonus winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of electric support points to be given after the end of the special game, instead of the probability change expectation level.

≪General winning hole count up performance≫ The general winning hole count up performance is displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 when a game ball enters the general winning hole P64 during the execution of a special game during a series of games. This is an effect that adds and displays the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) to be paid out based on the entry of game balls into the general winning hole P64 to the accumulated prize ball number. In this embodiment, the specification is that "3" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole P64 (the unit prize ball number of the general winning hole P64 is 3), so the game When a ball enters the general winning hole P64, the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is updated in units of "3". In addition, the special game performance control means P227 is equipped with a cumulative prize ball counter for counting the cumulative prize ball number, and each time a game ball enters the general prize opening P64 (main Each time a general winning hole winning command is received from the control board P100), "3" corresponding to the unit prize ball number of the general winning hole P64 is added to the count value of the cumulative prize ball number counter, and the cumulative prize balls are added accordingly. A general winning hole count-up effect is performed in which "3" is added and displayed to the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the number display area P733.

Here, FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a series of general winning hole count-up effects. As shown in FIG. 64, the general winning hole count-up effect is the current value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 when a game ball enters the general winning hole 54. This is an effect in which the value of the unit prize ball number awarded based on the entry of game balls into the general prize winning hole P64 is displayed in a count-up manner by adding "1" in sequence. In the illustrated example, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls is counted up one by one as "8000" → "8001" → "8002" → "8003".

In addition, the general winning hole winning presentation (bonus winning presentation, general winning hole count-up presentation) is performed during the execution of the special game by using the general winning hole P64 provided in the right area PA2 among the plurality of general winning holes P61 to P64. This is done when a game ball enters the ball. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole P61 to P63 provided in the left area PA1 among the plurality of general winning holes P61 to P64 during the execution of the special game, the general winning hole winning effect will not be executed. It won't happen. However, if a game ball enters any of the general winning holes P61 to P64 during the execution of a special game, regardless of the type of general winning holes P61 to P64 (regardless of whether or not the general winning hole winning effect is executed) ), prize balls (3 balls) are paid out based on the winning of game balls into the general winning holes P61 to P64.

In addition, in this embodiment, each time a bonus prize is won, the number of prize balls awarded by the bonus prize (unit prize ball number) is added to the cumulative number of prize balls, but this configuration Without limitation, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls x number of bonus prizes during one round game) based on all bonus wins that occur during the execution of one round game is It may be configured so that it is added to the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the special game, or the number of prize balls based on all bonus wins that occur during the execution of one special game (unit number of prize balls x one game). The number of bonus prizes won during the special game) may be added to the cumulative number of prize balls and displayed together at the end of the final round game or at the end of the special game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a board configuration is adopted in which the general winning opening P64 is arranged upstream of the second starting opening 51, but it is not limited to this configuration, and the general winning opening P64 is placed in the second starting opening 51. A panel configuration may be adopted in which the starting port 51 is disposed on the downstream side. In that case, the general winning hole P64 may be placed upstream of the big winning hole P54, or the general winning hole P64 may be placed downstream of the big winning hole P54.

Further, as a modification of this embodiment, the general winning hole P64 may also be used as an operating port (operating gate P53) that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery. In other words, when a game ball enters the general winning hole P64, a normal symbol lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the second starting hole P52, and a predetermined number of balls (for example, 1 or 2) are drawn. It may be configured such that the prize ball is paid out.

In addition, in the general winning slot winning performance (bonus winning performance, general winning slot count-up performance), as described above, a game ball enters the general winning slot P64 when the currently running gaming state is the special gaming state. Since this is a performance that is triggered by There will be no winning slot count-up performance). In other words, even if the currently running gaming state is a gaming state in which the main part of the game is the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (non-electronic support state), the currently running gaming state is the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Even if the game is in the main game state (electrical support state), the general prize winning presentation (bonus prize winning presentation, general prize winning hole count-up presentation) will not be performed when the game ball enters the general prize winning hole P64. It won't happen. In addition, if the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game (electric support state), the screen In the cumulative prize ball number display area P733, the cumulative prize ball number obtained in the special game during the series (the cumulative prize ball number at the end of the most recent special game) is displayed. However, in this electric support state, only the cumulative number of prize balls won in the special games during the consecutive games is displayed, and even if a game ball enters the general prize opening P64, the number of prize balls will not be displayed as the cumulative prize. It is not added to the number of balls and displayed (the general winning hole count-up effect is not performed), and the value of the cumulative number of prize balls does not change (the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the most recent special game is maintained).

In addition, during the execution of a special game that is performed when the first hit occurs (the result of determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot in the normal game state), even if the game ball enters the general winning hole P64, , it may be configured so that the bonus winning effect is not executed. In addition, the types of special games include high profit special games (for example, 16R special game) and low profit special games (for example, 4R special game). It may be configured such that a bonus winning presentation is executed when a ball enters the ball, and the bonus winning presentation is not executed even if a game ball enters the general winning hole P64 during execution of a low profit special game. In addition, as a type of round game, a long open round game in which the maximum open time of the big prize opening P54 is set to an open time (for example, 29 seconds) that allows a specified count number (full count) of game balls to enter or allows easy ball entry. and a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the big prize opening P54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) that allows a specified count number (full count) of game balls to enter or that allows easy entry of the ball. During the execution of the open round game, if the game ball enters the general winning hole P64, a bonus winning effect will be executed, and even if the game ball enters the general winning hole P64 during the execution of the short open round game. It may be configured such that the bonus prize-winning effect is not executed. In addition, during the execution of a special game that is performed when a specific jackpot (probable variable jackpot) is won, a bonus winning effect is executed when a game ball enters the general winning hole P64, and a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is executed. During the execution of the special game to be played when the game is won, the bonus winning effect may not be executed even if a game ball enters the general winning hole P64.

<Other Features of Prize-Winning-Related Performances> Next, other features of the grand prize-winning performance and the general prize-winning performance of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, since the big winning hole count up performance and the general winning hole count up performance are effects for the same display object (the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733), below, the big winning hole count The up effect and the general winning slot count up effect may be collectively referred to simply as the "count up effect."

<Count-up performance time> In this embodiment, the count-up time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds". . That is, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is counted up in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the big winning hole count-up effect is the time value required to count up one prize ball, plus the number of prize balls (unit: The execution time of the big winning hole count-up effect is "15 (unit prize ball number) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". becomes. Similarly, in the general winning hole count-up performance, the number of prize balls awarded when one game ball enters the general winning hole P64 (unit prize ball number) is added to the time value required to count up one prize ball. The execution time of the general winning hole count-up effect is "3 (unit prize ball number) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.09 seconds". . Below, for convenience, the execution time of the big winning hole count up performance (the time value from the start of one big winning hole count up performance to the end) is referred to as "count up performance time A", and the general winning hole count up The execution time of the performance (the time value from the start to the end of one general prize winning hole count-up performance) is abbreviated as "count-up performance time B". Here, the big winning opening normal winning performance, over winning performance, and bonus winning performance are configured not to be executed during the execution of the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo even if the special game is being executed. Therefore, the jackpot count-up performance and the general winning slot count-up performance are configured not to be executed during the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo even if the special game is in progress. ing.

(Relationship 1 of count-up performance time A) The count-up performance time A is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as "interval period") set after the end of each round game. The interval time is the waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demonstration, and is the period during which the big winning hole P54 is kept closed from the start of the closing operation. This is the game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or the end demo waiting time. In this embodiment, the interval time is set to "2 seconds" in common to all round games. In this embodiment, by configuring the count-up performance time A (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), the game ball enters the big winning hole P54 just before the end of a certain round game. Even if the big winning hole count-up performance is performed based on the ball entering, the big winning hole count-up performance will be completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the big winning opening count-up performance will be carried out beyond the interval period until the next round game or jackpot end demo (if you win too much, it may end up exceeding the interval period). ), the break between each round game or the break between the final round game and the jackpot end demonstration can be made clear.

(Relationship 2 of count-up performance time A) The count-up performance time A is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. As mentioned above, the count-up performance time A is set to "0.45 seconds", and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds", which is common to all jackpot types (mid-jackpot performance). ing. The execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is the waiting time from the time when the interval time after the end of the final round game in the special game has elapsed until the end of the special game. That is, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration does not include the interval time set after the end of the final round game. That is, during the interval time after the end of the final round game, the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole P54 is effectively detected (that is, it is detected as a target for winning ball payout, and it is determined that the ball entered illegally). Although it is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the round game in which there is a possibility that the game ball will not be detected (not detected), the execution time of the jackpot end demo is the period when the game ball enters the jackpot hole P54 within that time. This is set as the preparation time for the game (performance mode) after the end of the special game separated from the round game, which has no possibility of being effectively detected. In this embodiment, by configuring the count-up performance time A (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration, the game ball is displayed just before the end of the final round game. Even if the big winning hole count-up effect is performed based on the ball entering the big winning hole P54, and moreover, even if an over-win occurs in the final round game, the final round Even after the big winning hole P54 is closed after the game (even during the jackpot end demo period), if the big winning hole count-up effect is performed, the big winning hole count will be performed during the jackpot end demo period. The close-up performance will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect will not be performed beyond the jackpot end demo period and up to the fluctuating display after the end of the special game, and the difference between the end of the special game and the start of the fluctuating display for the first rotation The boundaries can be made clear. As a modification, entry of the game ball into the big winning a prize opening P54 may be effectively detected for at least a part of the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration.

(Relationship 3 of count-up performance time A) In this embodiment, when a prescribed count number of game balls enters the big winning hole P54 in one round game, the prescribed count number in this one round game is The total time of count-up performance time A (big winning hole count-up performance for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one round game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. Specifically, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds." On the other hand, as described above, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common to all jackpot types (jackpot medium performance). In this embodiment, by configuring the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, it is possible to Even if multiple game balls are consecutively entered into the big winning hole P54 just before the end of the round game, multiple big winning hole count-up performances are performed consecutively. Even after the big winning hole P54 is closed after the round game (even during the jackpot end demo period), if the big winning hole count-up effect is performed, the big winning hole will be closed during the jackpot end demo period. The count-up performance will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up performance will not be performed beyond the jackpot end demo period and up to the fluctuating display after the end of the special game, and the difference between the end of the special game and the start of the fluctuating display for the first rotation will be eliminated. The boundaries can be made clear.

In addition, even if a game ball enters the big winning hole P54 in one round game in excess of the prescribed count number (in the case where over-winning occurs), the total count number in this one round game ( It is preferable that the total time of the count-up performance time A (specified count number + over winning number) is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. In other words, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up performance time A for the number of over winnings is the time after the end of the round game. By setting the execution time shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, even after the jackpot opening P54 is closed after the final round game (even during the jackpot end demo period), the jackpot opening count-up effect is produced. If the specifications are such that even if an over-win occurs, the big winning opening count-up effect will end within the execution time of the jackpot end demo, and the end of the special game and the start of the variable display will be separated. It is preferable to clarify. In addition, the number of over winnings is uncertain because it depends on the progress of the game (the firing status of the game ball and the falling status of the game ball), but even if it is assumed that there are 10 balls, which is the same number as the specified count, It is desirable to satisfy the above relationship (in that case, add the total time of count-up performance time A for the specified count number in one round game and the total time of count-up performance time A for the number of over winnings) The running time is 9 seconds (4.5 seconds + 4.5 seconds), which is shorter than the 20 seconds that is the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration).

(Relationship 4 of count-up performance time A) As a modification of this embodiment, when a prescribed count number of game balls enters the big winning hole P54 in one round game, the prescribed count in this one round game The total time of the count-up performance time A of several minutes may be configured to be shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. In this modification, the total time of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds." On the other hand, the interval time after the end of each round game is longer than the interval time (2 seconds) of the above embodiment, and is set to "6 seconds" in common to all round games. In this modified example, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up performance time A for the specified count number is shorter than the interval time (6 seconds), so that the end of a certain round game Even if multiple game balls enter the big winning hole 54 in succession at the last minute, and multiple big winning hole count-up performances are performed in succession, within the interval time after the end of the round game. The grand prize opening count-up performance will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up performance will not be performed beyond the interval period until the next round game or the jackpot end demo, and will not be performed at the break between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demo. The separation between the two can be clearly defined.

In addition, even if only one game ball exceeds the specified count and enters the big winning hole P54 in one round game (in the case where only one over-win occurs), this one round game It is preferable that the total time of the count-up performance time A for the cumulative count number (regular count number + 1 over winning number) is set shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. In other words, the sum of the count-up performance time A for the specified number of counts in one round game and the count-up performance time A for one over-win (4.5 seconds + 0.45 seconds = 4 .95 seconds) is set shorter than the interval time (6 seconds) after the end of the round game, so even if an over-win occurs, the big winning opening count-up effect will end within the interval period. , it is preferable to make the boundaries between round games clear.

(Relationship 5 of count-up performance time A) As a modification of this embodiment, when a prescribed count number (full count) of game balls enters the big winning hole P54 in all round games of one special game, this The total time of the count-up effect time A of the full count number (prescribed number of rounds x specified number of counts) occurring during the execution of the special game may be configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. In this modification, when the specified number of rounds for one special game is the maximum number of rounds (16 rounds), the game ball enters the big winning hole by the specified number of balls (10 balls) in all round games. In this case, a total of 160 big winning slot count-up effects are executed. Therefore, the total time of count-up performance time A for all counts is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) x 16 rounds (specified number of rounds) = 72 seconds" be. On the other hand, in this modification, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "120 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (jackpot performance). In this modified example, the total time (72 seconds) of the count-up performance time A for the total number of counts in one special game is configured to be shorter than the execution time (120 seconds) of the jackpot end demo. , even after the grand prize opening P54 is closed after the final round game (even during the jackpot end demo period), if the specification is such that the grand prize opening count-up effect is performed, the grand prize opening P54 is closed. Even if there is a traffic jam in the execution of the big winning hole count-up performance during the round game or during the interval period due to consecutive winnings of game balls, all the big winning hole count-up effects must be completed at least by the end of the jackpot end demo. Since this is guaranteed, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the performance during the jackpot.

<<Priority of subsequent big winning opening count-up performance>> FIG. 65 is a time chart for explaining the priority of the big winning opening count-up performance. As shown in FIG. 65, when a plurality of game balls (two game balls in the illustrated example) consecutively enter the big winning hole P54 during the execution of a certain round game, two game balls based on the consecutive winnings are awarded. The big winning opening count-up performance will be executed. Specifically, when the first game ball enters the big winning hole P54 and the execution condition of the big winning hole count up effect is satisfied, the previous big winning hole count up effect is executed. Similarly, when the second game ball enters the big winning hole P54 and the condition for executing the big winning hole count up performance is satisfied, the subsequent big winning hole count up performance will be executed. The execution condition of the big winning hole count up performance is a condition for starting the execution of the big winning hole count up performance, and it is a condition that the game ball enters the big winning hole P54 during the execution of the special game (big winning hole count up performance). This is established when the entry of a game ball is detected by the mouth switch P541. At this time, if the conditions for executing the subsequent big winning opening count up performance are met during the execution of the previous big winning opening count up performance, the execution of the previous big winning opening count up performance will be interrupted. After the execution of the previous big winning hole count up effect is completed, the execution of the later big winning hole count up effect is started without being terminated. In other words, in this embodiment, of the next two big winning opening count up performances, the priority of the previous big winning opening count up performance is set higher than the priority of the later big winning opening count up performance. Therefore, before the execution of the previous big winning opening count up performance ends, the execution of the subsequent big winning opening count up performance will not start, and the execution of the previous big winning opening count up performance will end. After that, the execution of the later big prize winning slot count-up effect is started. In addition, if you start the execution of the later big winning opening count up performance after the execution of the previous big winning opening count up performance is finished, the previous big winning opening count up performance and the later big winning opening count up It is preferable to seamlessly connect with the performance and count up the two big winning openings continuously. However, as a modified example, after a predetermined period of time (minor time) has elapsed after the execution of the previous big winning hole count up effect has ended, the execution of the later big winning hole count up effect is started, and the previous big winning hole count up effect is started. A clear break may be provided between the big winning hole count-up performance and the later big winning hole count-up performance. Although we have explained the big winning opening count-up performance here, the general winning opening count-up performance may also have the same specifications, and while the previous general winning opening count-up performance is being executed, the execution conditions for the subsequent general winning opening count-up performance are If the situation arises, the execution of the previous general winning slot count up performance will not be terminated in the middle, and after the execution of the previous general winning slot count up performance has finished, the subsequent general winning slot count up will be started. Preferably, the configuration is such that execution of the performance is started. In addition, if the execution conditions for the later general winning opening count-up performance are met during the execution of the previous big winning opening count-up performance, the execution of the previous big winning opening count-up performance will be stopped midway. It is preferable to configure so that the execution of the subsequent general winning hole count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous big winning hole count-up effect is completed without being terminated. In addition, if the execution conditions for the later big winning opening count up performance are met during the execution of the previous general winning opening count up performance, the execution of the previous general winning opening count up performance will be stopped midway. It is preferable to configure the system so that the execution of the subsequent big winning hole count-up effect is started after the previous general winning hole count-up effect has been completed without being terminated.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, if the execution conditions for the later big winning opening count up performance are satisfied during the execution of the previous big winning opening count up performance, the execution of the previous big winning opening count up performance can be executed. It may be configured to interrupt and start execution of the next big winning slot count-up performance. In other words, the priority of the subsequent big winning hole count up performance is set higher than the priority of the previous big winning hole count up performance. In that case, when the execution of the previous big winning opening count up performance is interrupted, the count value is forcibly changed to the final value of the previous big winning opening count up performance or the initial value of the subsequent big winning opening count up performance. It is preferable to switch to , and start the later big prize winning slot count-up effect from that point. In this modified example, we have explained the big winning hole count-up performance, but the general winning hole count-up performance may also have the same specifications. When the execution conditions are satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning hole count-up effect may be interrupted and the execution of the next general winning hole count-up effect may be started. In addition, if the execution conditions for the later general winning opening count-up performance are met while the previous big winning opening count-up performance is being executed, the execution of the previous big winning opening count-up performance will be interrupted and the next general winning opening performance will be executed. It may be configured to start executing the mouth count up performance. In addition, if the execution conditions for the subsequent big winning slot count up performance are met while the previous general winning slot count up performance is being executed, the execution of the previous general winning slot count up performance will be interrupted, and the next big winning slot count up performance will be interrupted. It may be configured to start executing the mouth count up performance.

(Emphasizing Production of Cumulative Prize Ball Count) FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram for explaining the emphasizing production of this embodiment. (A) in the figure shows a case where an over winning effect is executed while an emphasis effect is being executed, and (B) in the figure shows a case where a bonus winning effect is executed while an emphasis effect is being executed. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64 during the execution of a special game, the value of the cumulative number of winning balls during a series of games reaches a predetermined specific value. When it reaches the specified value, an emphasizing effect is executed to notify that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific value. Note that the specific value is a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (10,000). That is, each time the current value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple value (10,000, 20,000, 30,000, etc.) of the predetermined number of prize balls, an emphasis effect is performed. Therefore, the emphasized effect may be referred to as a specific value reaching effect, and the highlighted display may be referred to as a specific value corresponding display. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a certain value due to over winning or bonus winning, the emphasis effect is executed, and in that case, the emphasis effect and over winning are executed. The performance or the bonus winning performance is executed overlappingly.

As shown in FIG. 66, the types of emphasis effects include an emphasis display effect that enlarges and displays a specific value ("20,000 pt" in the illustrated example) at which the cumulative number of prize balls has reached in the highlight display area P735 at the center of the screen, and a speaker effect. There is an emphasized sound output effect that outputs a special sound (in the illustrated example, a sound saying "in great condition") from P11.

The specific value is highlighted continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), and during that time, the cumulative prize ball number display is updated (additional display ), the highlighted display will not be updated (additionally displayed). At this time, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of "cumulative award pitch count display" < "highlight display" < "round display". "Layer" means each layer of a hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image that makes up the entire image. For each layer, the higher the display priority, the higher the layer (front as seen from the player), and the lower the display priority, the lower the layer (back as seen from the player). be done. In FIG. 66, the highlighted display and cumulative prize pitch count display are shown in a form that is not superimposed, but in order to further emphasize the highlighted display, the display area may be enlarged and the display may be superimposed.In that case, the above-mentioned priority According to the above, a highlighted display may be displayed in front of the cumulative prize pitch count display (the highlighted display may be displayed covering part or all of the cumulative prize pitch count display).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, the prize ball acquisition display area P732 and the highlighted display area P735 are provided as separate and independent display areas, and if an over-win or bonus win occurs during the execution of the highlighted display, , the emphasized image and the over winning image or the bonus winning image are displayed simultaneously. In addition, when displaying the emphasized image and the over-winning image or the bonus-winning image at the same time, even if the display priority of the emphasized image is higher than the over-winning image or the bonus-winning image, the over-winning image will be displayed more than the emphasized image. Alternatively, the display priority of the bonus winning image may be increased. In FIG. 66, the highlighted display and the over winning image/bonus winning image are not displayed in an overlapping manner, but in order to further emphasize the highlighted display, the display area may be enlarged and displayed in an overlapping manner.In that case, the above Depending on the priority, the highlighted display may be displayed in front of the over winning image/bonus winning image (the highlighting may be displayed covering part or all of the over winning image/bonus winning image).

Further, when an over winning sound occurs while the special sound is being output, the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound is outputted overlappingly while the special sound is being output. In addition, if the special sound and the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound overlap, the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound may be set to be lower than the volume of the special sound with higher priority, and vice versa. In this case, the volume of the special sound may be set to be lower than the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound having a high priority. In this case, the volume with the lower priority (lower volume) may be set to substantially "0".

≪Over winning effect/bonus winning effect when an error occurs≫ In this embodiment, when various errors occur in the gaming machine, whether or not to execute the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect is controlled according to the error type. It is configured. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram for explaining error types of gaming machines. In this embodiment, the types of errors that occur in the gaming machine are "door/frame opening error", "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection/short circuit power supply error", "excessive winning error", and "payout error". ” etc. are set. Note that the above error types are merely examples, and various error types may be provided depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

A door/frame opening error occurs when the glass frame P5, front frame P2, or back set panel P30 is open with respect to the outer frame 1, the door open switch detects the opening of the glass frame P5, and the door opening switch detects the opening of the front frame P2. This error occurs when there is a disconnection or failure in the frame release switch that detects the opening of the back set board P30, or the back set release switch that detects the opening of the back set board P30. This door/frame opening error is canceled when it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the gaming machine and the glass frame P5, front frame P2, and back set board P30 are closed.

Magnetic sensor errors and radio wave sensor errors are errors that occur when a magnetic sensor detects magnetism, when a radio sensor detects radio waves, or when a disconnection, short circuit, or failure of the magnetic sensor or radio sensor occurs. Magnetic sensor errors and radio wave sensor errors are cleared when the gaming machine is checked for any abnormalities and the power is turned on again.

The disconnection/short circuit power supply error is an error that occurs when a disconnection, short circuit, or failure occurs in the radio wave sensor and various switches provided on the game board surface. The disconnection/short circuit power supply error can be cleared by checking that there is no abnormality in the gaming machine and turning the power back on.

The excessive winning error is an error that occurs when excessive game balls enter various winning holes. The excessive prize winning error can be cleared by checking whether there is any abnormality in the gaming machine and turning the power back on. Here, excessive winning errors include excessive winning errors in the big winning opening P54 (also referred to as "big winning opening excessive winning error") and excessive winning errors in general winning openings P61 to P64 ("general winning opening excessive winning error"). ”), etc. For example, the large winning hole excessive winning error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) enter the large winning hole P54 during execution of one round game. A general winning hole excessive winning error occurs when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) enter the general winning hole P61 to P63 per unit time (for example, 30 seconds) or This is an error that occurs when a specific number of game balls (for example, 60 balls) enter the general winning hole P64. Since the general winning hole P64 is arranged so that it is easier for game balls to enter than the general winning hole P61 to P63, the general winning hole P64 has an error judgment value based on the number of balls entering per unit time (error and The value of the number of game balls to be determined) is a comfortable value. In this embodiment, when a big winning hole excessive winning error occurs, or when a ball enters the big winning hole P54 while the big winning hole P54 is not open (during a non-special game), that is, When an abnormal winning regarding the big winning opening P54 is detected (when it is determined to be an abnormal winning), an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred is outputted from the external information terminal board P600. On the other hand, when a general winning hole excessive winning error occurs, that is, when an abnormal winning regarding the general winning holes P61 to P64 is detected (determined as an abnormal winning), an error is sent from the external information terminal board P600. Does not output an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an occurrence has occurred. Note that the external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal board P600 will be described later.

A payout error is an error that occurs when a problem occurs in the payout of prize balls. This payout error includes a full error in which the lower ball tray P9 is full of game balls (the full tank switch is turned on), a ball jamming/ball jamming error in the prize ball payout unit P34, and a game ball replenishment from the game island. This includes errors such as no-ball errors where the player is unable to do so and runs out of balls. When a full tank error occurs, the notification level is divided into two levels. The notification level 1 is the level at which the on state continues for 30 seconds after the full tank switch is turned on. At notification level 1, only the voice notification "Please remove the ball" is executed. At this notification level 1, even if a ball enters the big winning hole P54 or the general winning holes P61 to P64, the prize ball payout is not restricted (the prize ball payout does not stop). When the on state exceeds 30 seconds, the system shifts to notification level 2, and not only does the voice notification "Please remove the ball", but also displays an "image urging the user to remove the ball from the lower ball tray" on the performance display device P70. Further, even if a ball enters the big winning hole P54 or the general winning holes P61 to P64, the payout of the prize ball is restricted (the payout of the prize ball is stopped). As a modified example, only image notification may be performed at notification level 1, and both image notification and audio notification may be performed at notification level 2. Regarding the ball jamming/ball jamming error of the prize ball payout unit P34, the ball missing error where game balls cannot be replenished from the game island, even if the ball enters the grand prize opening P54 or the general prize openings P61 to P64, Prize ball payout is restricted (prize ball payout is stopped).

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, various errors are classified into "first error", "second error", and "third error" according to the priority (importance) of the error. The first error is an error type whose priority (importance) is set to a medium level, making it prohibited or difficult to continue the game. The first error includes a "door/frame opening error". The second error is an error type set at a high level of priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game. The second errors include "magnetic sensor error," "radio wave sensor error," "disconnection/short circuit power supply error," and "excessive winning error." The third error is an error type whose priority (importance) is set to a low level so that it is prohibited or difficult to continue playing the game. The third error includes a "payout error".

Here, if the above-mentioned error occurs in the gaming machine, image effects, audio effects, etc. are performed as various error notifications, and specifically, the details of the error are displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70. Then, an error notification sound is output from the speaker P11 at the error volume. In addition, as a modification of the error notification, the production lamp LP may be configured to blink at an error brightness.

In this embodiment, if the gaming machine has the first error (door/frame opening error), even if an over-win or bonus win occurs, part of the over-win effect or part of the bonus win effect will not be executed. It is configured so that it will not be damaged. In other words, when the first error occurs in the gaming machine, of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect, the over winning image display effect and the bonus winning image display effect are allowed to be executed, but the over winning sound output effect and the extra winning image display effect are allowed. Execution of bonus winning sound output effects is restricted. Even if an over-win or bonus win occurs during the first error, do not overlook that the gaming machine is in the first error state because some of the over-win effects and bonus win effects are not performed. It has become. In this case, execution of the count-up effect (big winning hole count-up effect and general winning hole count-up effect) is permitted. Specifically, when the first error occurs, an error image indicating the first error is displayed to notify that the first error has occurred, but it is not displayed on the entire screen. , display using only a part of the display area. Although the display priority is higher for error images than for over winning images and bonus winning images, they can all be displayed at the same time, and a count-up effect can also be displayed at the same time. However, while the error notification sound notifying the first error is being output, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound are not output (or the volume is low). In addition, when the gaming machine is in the first error state and an over winning or bonus winning occurs, prize balls are paid out based on the over winning or bonus winning.

In addition, if the gaming machine has a second error (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, disconnection/short circuit power supply error, excessive winning error), even if over winning or bonus winning occurs, over winning performance or bonus winning performance It is configured so that all of the above are not performed. That is, when the second error occurs in the gaming machine, execution of both the over winning image display performance and the over winning sound output performance are restricted as the over winning performance, and the execution of the bonus winning image display performance and the over winning sound output performance are restricted as the bonus winning performance. Execution of both bonus winning sound output effects is restricted. Even if an over-win or the like occurs during the second error, the over-win performance and the like are not performed at all, so that the fact that the gaming machine is in the second error state is not overlooked. In this case, the execution of count-up effects (big winning hole count-up effect and general winning hole count-up effect) is also restricted. Specifically, when a second error occurs, an error image indicating that it is a second error is displayed on the entire screen to notify that the second error has occurred, so over-winning images and bonus images are displayed. Winning images and count-up effects are not displayed. Further, while the error notification sound notifying the second error is being output, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound are not output. In addition, when the gaming machine is in the second error state and an over winning or bonus winning occurs, prize balls are paid out based on the over winning or bonus winning.

In addition, even if the gaming machine is unable to pay out prize balls due to the third error (payout error), if an over winning or bonus winning occurs, the over winning presentation or bonus winning will occur. It is configured so that a prize-winning performance is executed. In other words, if a payout error occurs in the gaming machine, there is no risk of any particular problem in continuing the game, and there is no risk that the player will be disadvantaged, so the error notification will be used to notify you of the over-win performance or the bonus win. This is because if the performance is limited, it may actually reduce the interest of the game. In this case, the count-up effect (big winning hole count-up effect and general winning hole count-up effect) is also executed. However, when the gaming machine is in the third error state and an over winning or bonus winning occurs, the payout of prize balls based on this over winning or bonus winning will not be performed.

In this embodiment, if an over-win or bonus win occurs when the gaming machine has a "specific error", part or all of the over-win effect will be changed depending on the type of error that occurred. In addition, part or all of the bonus prize-winning performance is restricted. In other words, if the first error occurs among the specific errors, the execution of one or some element effects (over-win sound output effect) of the over-winning effect is restricted, and the second error occurs. If this occurs, the execution of multiple or all element performances (over-win sound output performance, over-win image display performance, etc.) of the over-win performance is restricted. This is because, in this embodiment, among the specific errors, the second error has a relatively higher priority (importance) than the first error. Note that a specific error may be an error type that prohibits progression of the game. Alternatively, a specific error may be an error type that occurs when an abnormality that is suspected of being fraudulent (rogue behavior) is detected. Further, a specific error may be an error type that can be resolved by turning off/on the power again.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, by setting the priority of the error notification effect higher than the over winning effect, for example, the error notification sound is output preferentially than the over winning effect (for example, the over winning effect is The audio level for the error notification sound may be set higher than that for the error notification sound), and the error notification image may be displayed with priority over the over-winning image (for example, the error notification image may have layer priority over the over-winning image). (You can set the degree higher).

<<Over winning effect at the end of the jackpot>> FIG. 68 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the over winning effect is executed at the end of the jackpot. Each round game is set with a detection valid period (big winning hole valid period) for validating the detection of game balls by the big winning hole switch P541. This detection validity period is set in consideration of the time required for the game ball that entered just before the big winning hole P54 to close to reach the big winning hole switch P541. In this embodiment, the round period from the start to the end of each round game (from when the big winning hole P54 opens until it closes) and after the round game ends (when the big winning hole P54 closes). The detection validity period of the big winning a prize opening switch P541 is set to span the entire period from the interval period until a predetermined time period (from the start) passes. By setting this detection validity period from the round period to the interval period, even if a game ball is detected by the big winning hole switch P541 during the interval period after the round period ends, the big winning hole P54 The winning of the game ball is treated as valid (the prize ball is subject to payout). In other words, the "round game execution period (big winning opening opening period)" and the aforementioned "detection grace period (interval period)" are set as a continuous detection valid period. Further, as described above, the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods.

In the present embodiment, the interval period is set as an over winning effect permissible period in which execution of the over winning effect is permitted when the execution timing of the over winning effect has arrived. On the other hand, the period outside the interval period is set as an over winning performance prohibition period in which execution of the over winning performance is prohibited even if the execution timing of the over winning performance has arrived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(A), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, the big winning opening switch P541 releases game balls exceeding the specified count (11 in the illustrated example). When the game ball (eye game ball) is detected, when the timing to execute the over winning performance comes within this interval period, the execution of the over winning performance within this interval period is permitted. However, if the performance time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the over winning performance is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the over winning performance to the end timing of the interval period, the entire over winning performance will be executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the over-winning presentation based on the end of the interval period. However, if the over-winning presentation includes an over-winning image and over-winning sound, the over-winning image may be interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the over-winning sound may be output without interruption. good. In addition, similar to the over-winning performance, the big winning opening count-up performance may be executed using an over-winning performance within the interval period as a trigger, and in that case, from the execution start timing of the big winning opening count-up performance to the end of the interval period. If the time is longer than the timing, it will not be possible to execute all of the big winning opening count up effects by the end of the interval period, so based on the end of the interval period, the big winning opening count up effects will be executed at the end of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly interrupt the process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68(B), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, the game ball that exceeds the specified count number (in the illustrated example, the 11th game ball) is activated by the big winning opening switch P541. Even if a ball) is detected, if the timing to execute the over winning effect comes during the jackpot end demo period after this interval period has elapsed, the over winning effect will be executed within this jackpot end demo period. is prohibited. However, during the jackpot end demonstration period, execution of the over-winning effect is only prohibited, but prize balls are paid out based on this over-winning. Furthermore, in the above case, similar to the over winning effect, the execution of the big winning hole count up effect may also be prohibited.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, the jackpot end demonstration period is set as the over-winning performance permissible period in which execution of the over-winning performance is permitted, and the over-winning performance is configured to be executed during the execution of the jackpot end demonstration. It's okay. In this case, it is desirable to set only a predetermined time at the beginning of the jackpot end demonstration period as the over winning effect permissible period. As an example, of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demonstration period, only the first 5 seconds may be set as an over-winning performance permissible period, and the following 15 seconds may be set as an over-winning performance prohibited period. As a further modification, an over-winning performance permissible period and an over-winning performance prohibition period may be set within the interval period after the final round. For example, the first 1.5 seconds of the 2 seconds of the interval period Seconds may be set as the over-winning presentation permissible period, and 0.5 seconds thereafter may be set as the over-winning presentation prohibition period, and the subsequent jackpot end demonstration period may also be set as the over-winning presentation prohibition period. In addition, as a further modification, considering that the timing when the game balls exceeding the specified count number are detected by the big winning opening switch P541 is synchronized with the execution timing of the over winning effect, it is possible to During the interval period after the end of the round game, if a game ball that exceeds the specified count is detected by the big winning opening switch P541, it is configured to always execute an over winning effect (at the end timing of the interval period). (excluding ball entering), as mentioned above, if the time from the execution start timing of the over winning performance to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the production time of the over winning performance, the interval period ends. Based on the termination, the over winning presentation is forcibly interrupted at the end of the interval period (However, if the over winning presentation includes an over winning image and an over winning sound, the over winning image will be interrupted. (Hide or delete from the middle), over winning sound may be output completely without interruption), If a game ball is detected in the big winning hole P54 during the jackpot end demo period ( If a game ball exceeding the specified count is detected by the big winning opening switch P541), the over winning effect may not be executed. If a game ball that exceeds the specified count is detected by the big prize opening switch P541 during the interval period after the end of the round game, this is always executed (excluding balls entering at the end of the interval period) When executing, as mentioned above, if the time from the execution start timing of the big winning hole count up effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the performance time of the big winning hole count up effect, the time between the execution start timing of the big winning hole count up effect and the end timing of the interval period Based on this, the big winning hole count-up performance is forcibly interrupted at the end of the interval period, and if a game ball is detected in the big winning hole P54 during the jackpot end demo period (big winning hole If a game ball exceeding a predetermined count number is detected by switch P541) may be configured not to be executed.

<<Bonus winning effect at the end of the jackpot>> FIG. 69 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the bonus winning effect is executed at the end of the jackpot. In this embodiment, the period of the round period and the period of the interval period are set as a bonus winning performance permissible period in which execution of the bonus winning performance is permitted when the execution timing of the bonus winning performance arrives. On the other hand, the period of the jackpot end demonstration period is set as a bonus winning presentation prohibition period in which execution of the bonus winning presentation is prohibited even if the execution timing of the bonus winning presentation has arrived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(A), if a game ball is detected by the right general prize opening switch P641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, within this interval period When the timing to execute the bonus prize-winning performance arrives, the execution of the bonus prize-winning performance is allowed within this interval period. However, if the performance time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the bonus winning performance is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the bonus winning performance to the end timing of the interval period, the entire bonus winning performance will be executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the bonus prize-winning performance at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, if the bonus winning performance includes a bonus winning image and a bonus winning sound, the bonus winning image may be interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the bonus winning sound may be output without interruption. good. In addition, similar to the bonus winning performance, the big winning opening count-up performance may also be executed using the bonus prize win within the interval period as a trigger, and in that case, the execution start timing of the big winning opening count-up performance starts from the end of the interval period. If the time is longer than the timing, it will not be possible to execute all of the big winning opening count up effects by the end of the interval period, so based on the end of the interval period, the big winning opening count up effects will be executed at the end of the interval period. It is desirable to forcefully interrupt the process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69(B), even if a game ball is detected by the right general prize opening switch P641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, this interval period When the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning performance comes within the jackpot end demonstration period after the elapsed time, the execution of the bonus prize-winning performance within this jackpot end demonstration period is prohibited. However, during the jackpot end demonstration period, the execution of the bonus winning performance is only prohibited, but the payout of prize balls based on this bonus winning is still performed. Further, in the above case, similar to the bonus prize winning performance, the execution of the grand prize winning hole count up performance may also be prohibited.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, the jackpot end demonstration period is set as a bonus winning presentation permissible period in which execution of the bonus winning presentation is permitted, and the bonus winning presentation is configured to be executed during the execution of the jackpot ending demonstration. It's okay. In this case, it is desirable to set only a predetermined time at the beginning of the jackpot end demonstration period as the permissible bonus winning performance period. As an example, only the first 5 seconds of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demonstration period may be set as a bonus winning performance permissible period, and the following 15 seconds may be set as a bonus winning performance prohibited period. In addition, as a further modification, a bonus winning performance permissible period and a bonus winning performance prohibition period may be set within the interval period after the final round, for example, the first 1.5 seconds of the 2 seconds of the interval period. Seconds may be set as the bonus winning performance permissible period, and 0.5 seconds thereafter may be set as the bonus winning performance prohibited period, and the subsequent jackpot end demonstration period may also be set as the bonus winning performance prohibited period. In addition, as a further modification, considering that the timing at which the game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch P641 and the timing at which the bonus winning effect is executed are synchronized, it is possible to If a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch P641 during the interval period, the system is configured to always execute the bonus winning effect (excluding the ball entering at the end of the interval period), and when executing it, As mentioned above, if the time from the execution start timing of the bonus winning performance to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the production time of the bonus winning performance, the bonus winning performance will be moved to the interval period based on the end of the interval period. (However, if the bonus winning performance includes a bonus winning image and bonus winning sound, the bonus winning image will be interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), The winning sound may be output completely without interruption), and if a game ball is detected in the right general winning hole P64 during the jackpot end demo period (the winning sound can be output with the right general winning hole switch P641) If a ball is detected), the bonus prize-winning performance may be configured so that it is not executed.In that case, the general prize winning hole count-up performance will also be performed within the interval period after the end of the final round game. When a game ball is detected by the opening switch P641, it is always executed (excluding balls entering at the end of the interval period), and as mentioned above, the execution is performed from the production time of the general prize opening count-up production. Also, if the time from the execution start timing of the general winning hole count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer, the general winning hole count-up effect will be forcibly performed at the end of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. It is configured to be interrupted, and is configured not to be executed if a game ball is detected in the right general prize opening P64 during the jackpot end demonstration period (if a game ball is detected in the right general prize opening switch P641). You may.

On the other hand, during the jackpot start demo period, theoretically, the game ball will not enter the big winning hole P54 (over winning will not occur), so during the jackpot start demo period, the big winning A win-win performance (over-win performance) is never executed. It is possible to enter the general winning hole P64 even during the jackpot start demo period, but even if the ball enters the general winning hole P64, the general winning hole winning presentation ( Bonus prize-winning effects) will not be executed, and if the ball is entered during the jackpot start demo period, no matter when the ball is entered (especially even if the ball is entered at the end of the jackpot start demo period), the ball will not be played. The general prize winning performance (bonus winning performance) corresponding to the ball will not be performed in the first round game after the end of the jackpot start demo, and furthermore, the prize ball (number of prize balls) corresponding to the entered ball will be It is not subject to cumulative award pitch count display.

(Fire Handle Detection) A game with the game machine PM is executed on the premise that the player rotates the fire handle P12 to fire a game ball toward the game area PA. This firing handle P12 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) that detects that the player is touching the firing handle P12. This touch sensor is composed of a proximity switch or the like that detects a change in capacitance caused by the player touching the firing handle P12. When the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the firing handle P12, it outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 300 to permit energization of the firing solenoid. Further, the main control board P100 monitors the touch state of the firing handle based on the detection signal from the touch sensor, and periodically transmits a performance control command (handle state performance command) to the performance control board P200. Thereby, the performance control board P200 specifies whether or not the player is touching the firing handle P12 (whether or not the firing handle P12 is being operated).

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over winning effect and the general winning effect. Even if the touch sensor does not detect that the player is touching the firing handle P12 (when the firing of the game balls is stopped), the production control means P220 allows the previously fired game balls to win the big prize. When a game ball that exceeds the specified count (the 11th game ball in the illustrated example) is detected by entering the ball into the mouth P54 (when an over-win occurs), an over-win effect is executed. It looks like this. Similarly, the performance control means P220 determines that even if it is not detected that the player is touching the firing handle P12 (when the firing of the game balls is stopped), the game balls fired before that time will win the general prize. When a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch P641 by entering the ball into the opening P64 (when a bonus winning occurs), a bonus winning effect is executed. That is, the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance are executed regardless of the detection results of the touch sensor at the timing of over winning and the timing of bonus winning. Therefore, even if the player stops firing game balls by closing the big winning opening P54 (ending the round game), over winning or bonus winning will occur within the interval period. In this case, an over-winning effect or a bonus winning effect occurs, and there is a feeling of dissatisfaction that no winning effect is performed even though the game ball actually enters the grand winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64. It is possible to prevent players from feeling distrustful.

(Game start preparation performance) In this embodiment, when the currently running game state is the normal game state (non-special game state), when the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or more, the standby demonstration performance is performed. (customer waiting demonstration performance) is executed. "The suspended state of the game continues for a predetermined time or more" means, for example, that the period in which there is no special symbol activation ball continues for a predetermined time or more, or the period in which the special symbol is not displayed fluctuating for a predetermined time It means that the period in which the game ball does not enter or pass through a specific winning hole continues for a predetermined time or more, the period in which the game ball is not fired continues for a predetermined time or more, etc. The condition for ending this standby demonstration performance is when the suspended state of the game is canceled (when the game is started or restarted), for example, when the player touches the firing handle P12 (when the player operates the firing handle P12). This applies when the game ball is detected by the touch sensor or when the ball enters the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52, which is a specific winning port, and the game ball passes through the activation gate P53. This does not apply to balls entering the general winning holes P61 to P64 (even if the game ball passes through the operating gate P53 or enters the general winning holes P61 to P64, the standby demonstration performance does not end). In addition, during the standby demonstration performance, the volume is zero, that is, the sound is muted, or the volume is lower than the state where the standby demonstration performance is not performed (the state in which the game is being played). A volume adjustment screen, which will be described later, can be displayed, and the standby demonstration performance does not end even if the volume is adjusted. In other words, in a situation where the game is interrupted, there is no need to perform more effects than necessary, so the sound is muted or the volume is reduced. The volume of the performance after the end of the standby demonstration performance (while the game is in progress, that is, while the symbols are changing) can be visualized and adjusted even during the standby demonstration performance.

FIG. 71 is a time chart showing the relationship between the gaming state in which the game start preparation performance is executed and the gaming state in which the over winning presentation and the bonus winning presentation are executed. During the execution of the standby demonstration performance, the performance control unit P220 executes the standby demonstration performance when the touch sensor detects the player's contact (triggered by receiving the handle state performance command from the main control board P100). The execution of the performance is ended, and the execution of the game start preparation performance (launch detection performance) is started. The game start preparation performance is, for example, a performance that gives the feeling of starting or resuming the game by displaying the words "Welcome" on the screen or outputting a voice saying "Welcome" from the speaker P11 (a performance that welcomes the game). ). This game start preparation performance is a performance performed immediately after the standby demonstration performance ends, and similarly to this standby demonstration performance, it is performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (non-special gaming state).

In this embodiment, in a game state (non-special game state) in which a game start preparation performance can be performed, an over winning performance or a bonus winning performance is not performed, and a game in which an over winning performance or a bonus winning performance can be performed. In the state (special game state), no game start preparation performance is performed. In other words, the game start preparation performance and the over winning performance or bonus winning performance are never performed in the same gaming state, and of course are never performed overlappingly at the same timing.

(Sound notification when power is restored from power outage) In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs during the execution of a special game, when the power is restored from the power outage, a power return notification effect is executed to notify that the power has returned from the power outage. do. This power-off recovery notification effect is, for example, an effect that displays an image indicating that the power has been restored (power recovery notification image) and outputs a sound (power recovery notification audio) that indicates that the power has been restored from the speaker P11. It is. The image indicating that the power has been restored is referred to as a power return notification image, power failure recovery image, or power failure recovery screen, and the sound from the speaker P11 indicating that the power has been restored is referred to as a power recovery notification voice or power failure recovery screen. This is called a disconnection recovery sound. In this embodiment, the execution time of the power return performance (the output time of the power return notification sound) is "30 seconds" which is longer than "29 seconds" which is the maximum time of one round game (long open round game). seconds” is set. For example, if a power outage occurs in the middle of a predetermined round game, and the power is restored from the power outage in the middle of the predetermined round game (resuming from the middle of the predetermined round game), at least the remaining time of the round game Since the power-off recovery sound is output, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the round game has resumed. Here, if the power failure recovery sound and the jackpot production sound conflict, the power supply recovery sound is given priority over the jackpot production sound (for example, the power supply recovery sound is output at a higher audio level than the jackpot production sound). (or stop the output of the effect sound during the jackpot). In addition, when the power-off recovery sound is output, even if an over-win occurs in the round game after restarting, the power-off recovery sound is given priority over the over-win sound (for example, the power-off return sound is prioritized over the over-win sound. The return sound may be output at a high audio level, or the output of the over winning sound may be stopped. In addition, so that you can recognize that you are hitting the jackpot, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power return notification image) is longer than the output time of the audio indicating that the power has been restored (power return notification audio). It is desirable to have a short configuration; for example, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power return notification image) is 15 seconds, and the output time of the audio indicating that the power has been restored (power return notification audio) is 30 seconds. It is preferable to set it to seconds. In addition, in situations where an image indicating that the power has been restored (power return notification image) is displayed, the jackpot effect will not be displayed, so the cumulative prize ball count display, highlighted display, over-winning image, and bonus winning image will not be displayed. It will never be displayed. In addition, when the power is restored from a power outage, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held before the power was turned off will be erased, so an image indicating that the power has been restored at the time of the power outage ( When the display of the notification image) ends and the jackpot effect is displayed, the cumulative prize ball count display will restart from zero (“0”), and the display conditions for the highlighted display (when a specific value is reached Since the conditions until the power is turned off will be reset, the cumulative number of prize balls displayed before the power cut will reach a specific value (for example, 10,000 balls) after one more ball enters the big winning hole P54. 9999 balls before the power outage), during a jackpot after a power outage occurs and the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display is zero, so in this situation, go to the jackpot P54. Even if there is one incoming ball, it will not be highlighted. In addition, when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored at the time of power failure recovery (power return notification image) is finished and the jackpot effect is displayed, the image indicating that the power has been restored (power return notification image) While this is displayed, if a ball enters the grand prize opening P54 or the general prize opening P64, the prize ball corresponding to the entered ball will be paid out, but an image indicating that the power has been restored ( While the power return notification image) is displayed, over-winning images, bonus winning images, cumulative prize ball count display, count-up effects (major winning hole count-up effect, general winning hole count-up effect), etc. will not be performed. At that time, (1) Even if the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) ends and the jackpot production returns, the cumulative prize ball count display may start from zero. (2) If the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power return notification image) has finished displaying and the jackpot production has returned, the cumulative prize ball count display will be changed to the image indicating that the power has been restored (power return notification image). The cumulative number of prize balls may be displayed by adding the numerical value of the prize ball payout corresponding to the ball entering the big winning hole P54 or the ball entering the general winning hole P64 while the return notification image) is being displayed. In addition, the count-up performance (major winning slot count-up performance, general winning slot count-up performance) was in progress before the power was cut off, and the count-up performance was not yet completed, and the prize ball was compatible with the count-up performance. If the power is cut off while the payout is in progress and has not yet been completed (for example, in the middle of the count-up effect and payout for 300 prize balls), after the power is restored, the power will be turned off. Although the rest of the count-up performance that was being executed before the failure occurs, the prize balls that have not yet been paid out are configured to be paid out. Note that the above-mentioned recovery from a power outage (power return) is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), and is a recovery from a power outage that involves clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch). In some cases, the game shifts to the normal game state (low probability low base state) and returns with the decorative symbols in combination "331" being stopped and displayed.

(Right hit notification image) During the execution of the special game, as shown in FIG. A right-handed notification image will be displayed to remind you of this. Further, in the first prize ball acquisition display area P732A of the screen, an over winning image is displayed when an over winning occurs. The right-handed hit display area P731 and the first prize ball acquisition display area P732A are provided as different display areas, respectively, and the right-handed hit notification image and the over winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Further, while the special game is being executed, a bonus winning image is displayed in the second prize ball acquisition display area P732B of the screen, triggered by the occurrence of a bonus winning. The right-handed hitting display area P731 and the second prize ball acquisition display area P732B are provided as different display areas, respectively, and the right-handed hitting notification image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, if an over-win or bonus win occurs during the execution of a special game, the over-win or bonus win image will not overlap with the right-handed notification image, and the information on one will not hide the information on the other. There is.

(Volume Adjustment Screen) FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing the volume adjustment screen of this embodiment. In this embodiment, when a player simultaneously operates the left and right keys of the cross key while a special game is being executed, volume adjustment images showing multiple levels of volume levels are displayed side by side in the volume adjustment image display area P736 on the screen. be done. The volume adjustment image shows the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the volume level is adjusted to the third level corresponding to the current volume level. Then, by operating the left key or the right key by the player, it becomes possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of sounds such as BGM and sound effects output from the speaker P11. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is displayed, operating the right key will increase the volume level, and operating the left key will decrease the volume level.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether a special game is being executed, more specifically, whether an over winning effect is being executed (a situation where an over winning sound is being output) or a bonus winning effect is being executed (a situation where an over winning sound is being output). The player is configured to be able to adjust the volume of the speaker P11 by operating the left and right keys, regardless of whether the winning sound is being output. Therefore, if the volume is adjusted by the player while the over winning effect is being executed (in a situation where the over winning sound is being output) or while the bonus winning effect is being being executed (in a situation where the bonus winning sound is being output). In this case, the adjusted volume level changes in real time as the volume level of the over winning sound or bonus winning sound currently being output. In other words, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation, the volume of the over winning sound or bonus winning sound is changed midway through, and the volume of the over winning sound or bonus winning sound is different before and after the volume adjustment operation. It becomes possible to Note that the audio image display area P736 and the first prize ball acquisition display area P732A are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the over winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Similarly, the audio image display area P736 and the second prize ball acquisition display area P732B are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, if an overwin or bonus win occurs during the execution of a special game, the overwin or bonus win image will not overlap the volume adjustment image, and the information on one will not hide the information on the other. . The highlighted display and the volume adjustment screen are displayed in a superimposed manner when they are executed at the same time, but the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority, and when they are superimposed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the highlighted display. (Part or all of the highlighted display is hidden on the volume adjustment screen).

<<Excessive winning error occurrence condition of general winning opening>> "Error occurrence condition" is a condition for determining that an error has occurred in the gaming machine. In this embodiment, when the main control board P100 determines that a predetermined error occurrence condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect control command (error effect designation command) is transmitted from the main control board P100 to the effect control board P200, and the effect is An error notification effect is performed by the control board P200.

Below, as one of the multiple types of error occurrence conditions, the excessive winning error occurrence condition for the general winning holes P61 to P64 will be explained. In this embodiment, among the plurality of general winning holes P61 to P64, the excessive winning error occurrence conditions for the general winning holes P61 to P63 and the excessive winning error generating condition for the general winning hole P64 are set to different conditions.

The excessive winning error occurrence condition for the general winning holes P61 to P63 is the number of game balls entering the general winning holes P61 to P63 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the left general winning hole switch P611) This is a condition that is satisfied when the number reaches the first specified number. The first specified number is set to "30", for example. In other words, when 30 game balls enter the general winning holes P61 to P63 in 30 seconds, the excessive winning error generation condition for the general winning holes P61 to P63 is satisfied.

The excessive winning error occurrence condition for the general winning hole P64 is that the number of winning game balls in the general winning hole P64 (the number of game balls detected by the right general winning hole switch P641) within a unit time (30 seconds) is the second specified number. This is a condition that is satisfied when . The second specified number is set to "60", for example. In other words, when 60 game balls enter the general winning hole P64 in 30 seconds, the excessive winning error generation condition of the general winning hole P64 is satisfied.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, the excessive winning error occurrence conditions for the general winning holes P61 to P64 may be set depending on the type of gaming state currently being executed. For example, in a game state where the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game (normal game state), the frequency of ball entry per unit time is relatively higher in general winning holes P61 to P63 than in general winning hole P64. Therefore, the threshold value for the condition satisfaction is set to be higher for the excessive winning error occurrence condition for the general winning openings P61 to P63 than for the excessive winning error generating condition for the general winning opening P64. In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning hole P61 to P63 under the predetermined conditions (predetermined ball entry frequency), the excessive winning error condition does not hold, but the game ball enters the general winning hole P64. If a prize is won under a predetermined condition (a predetermined ball entry frequency), an excessive winning error will occur. On the other hand, in a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main feature (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the ball entry frequency per unit time is higher in the general winning hole P64 than in the general winning holes P61 to P63. should be relatively high, so the threshold for the excessive winning error occurrence condition for the general winning opening P64 is set to be higher than the excessive winning error generating condition for the general winning openings P61 to P63. ing. In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning hole P64 under specific conditions (specific ball entering frequency), an excessive winning error does not occur, but the game ball is specified to the general winning hole P61 to P64. If a ball enters under the conditions (specific ball entry frequency), an excessive winning error will occur.

In addition, even if the excessive winning error occurrence conditions for general winning openings P61 to P63 and the excessive winning error occurrence conditions for general winning opening P64 are set to different conditions, the excessive winning error error for general winning openings P61 to P63 will be canceled. It is preferable to set the condition and the excessive winning error cancellation condition of the right general winning hole P64 to be the same condition. Error cancellation conditions include, for example, conditions for the error notification performance to end (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed since the error notification screen was displayed/the error notification sound started), and the on-output of the outer end signal related to the excessive winning error. Conditions for stopping the output (conditions for turning off output, for example, 300 seconds have elapsed since the start of output), turning off the power once and then returning the power are applicable.

<<Overlapping execution of over winning performance and bonus winning performance>> FIG. 73 is a time chart for explaining overlapping execution of over winning performance and bonus winning performance. In this embodiment, when the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect occur at substantially the same timing, the over winning effect and the extra winning effect can be executed in duplicate. The overlapping execution of the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance means that the execution period (or execution timing) of the over winning performance and the execution period (or execution timing) of the bonus winning performance overlap, and the execution period of both performances overlaps. This includes a case where all of the two effects overlap, and a case where a part of the execution period of both effects overlaps. The illustrated example shows a case where the execution period of the over winning effect and the execution period of the bonus winning effect partially overlap. In addition, when the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance are executed in duplicate, the first prize ball acquisition display area P732A where the over winning image is displayed and the second prize ball acquisition display area P732B where the bonus winning image is displayed. are provided as display areas that are separate and independent from each other, so that the over winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed in a superimposed manner one behind the other. On the other hand, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound may be output in duplicate, or only one of them may be output. If the specification is such that only one of them is output, the first prize may be prioritized (in other words, the first prize is the prize won in the grand prize opening P54, and the second prize is the prize won in the general prize opening P64). (If the first winning is a winning in the general winning hole P64 and the later winning is a winning in the big winning hole P54, priority is given to the bonus winning sound.) Priority may be given to the winning sound (in other words, if the first winning is to the grand prize opening P54 and the later winning is to the general winning opening P64, priority will be given to the bonus winning sound, and the first winning will be given priority) is a winning to the general winning opening P64, and if the subsequent winning is a winning to the big winning opening P54, priority is given to the over winning sound). When giving priority to the earlier winning, for example, if a later winning occurs while the winning sound for the earlier winning is being output, the winning sound for the later winning may be output after the winning sound for the earlier winning is output. The output may be started, or the winning sounds related to subsequent winnings may not be outputted at all. When giving priority to the later winnings, for example, if a later winning occurs while the winning sound related to the earlier winning is being output, the winning sound related to the earlier winning is interrupted at the time of the later winning, and then It is also possible to start outputting a winning sound related to a winning.

As a modification of this embodiment, if an over-win and a bonus win occur at substantially the same timing, the over-win image and the bonus win image may be configured not to be displayed overlappingly. In other words, if over-winning and bonus-winning images occur at approximately the same timing, even if the display period (or display timing) of over-winning images and the display period (or display timing) of bonus-winning images do not overlap, good. In this case, there are cases in which the display periods of both images do not entirely overlap, and cases where a part of the display periods of both images do not overlap.

In addition, if the over winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed overlappingly, the one of the bonus winning image and the over winning image that won the prize earlier in time (the one whose entry of the game ball was detected first) The winning image may be displayed preferentially. In addition, as a configuration opposite to that, if the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed overlappingly, the one of the bonus winning image and the over-winning image that wins later in time (when the game ball enters later) The winning image of the one detected) may be displayed preferentially.

(Multiple Over Winnings) FIG. 74 is a time chart when over winnings and bonus winnings each occur multiple times within a predetermined period. In this embodiment, if over-winning occurs multiple times within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), over-winning will be performed for the first over-winning (winning of the 11th game ball). However, for the second and subsequent over winnings (winning of the 12th and subsequent game balls), the over winning performance is configured not to be performed. In other words, if multiple over-winning effects occur within a predetermined period, only the first over-winning effect is allowed, and the execution of the second and subsequent over-winning effects is restricted (restricted). ). However, the payout of prize balls due to over-winning is performed twice, and the big winning hole count-up performance due to over-winning is also performed twice (this is performed twice without interrupting the first big winning hole count-up performance). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if multiple bonus wins occur within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), a bonus win presentation is performed for each bonus win, and the prize is awarded by the bonus win. The ball payout is also performed twice, and the general winning hole count-up performance due to bonus winnings is also performed twice (the general winning hole count-up performance is performed twice without interrupting the first general winning hole count-up performance). In other words, in the case where a plurality of bonus winnings occur within a predetermined period, all the bonus winning presentations are allowed to be executed multiple times. As a modified example, if over-winning occurs multiple times within a predetermined period, an over-winning effect will be performed for the first over-winning (winning of the 11th game ball), and While the configuration is configured so that an over winning effect is performed even when the over winning effect occurs (the winning of the 12th game ball or later), if there is a second over winning effect during the execution of the first over winning effect, ( 1) Start execution of the second over winning performance after the first over winning performance has finished (completed), or (2) Even if the first over winning performance is in the middle. It may be configured such that the execution of the second over winning effect is interrupted and then the execution of the second over winning effect is started. In that case, regardless of (1) or (2), the payout of prize balls due to over winning will be performed twice, and the big winning hole count-up effect due to over winning will also be performed twice (the first big winning hole count It is preferable that the close-up effect be performed twice without interrupting the close-up effect. Furthermore, if multiple bonus wins occur within a predetermined period, a bonus winning presentation will be performed for the first bonus winning, and a bonus winning presentation will also be performed for the second and subsequent bonus winnings. On the other hand, if there is a second or later bonus prize while the first bonus winning performance is being executed, (3) after the first bonus winning performance has finished (after it has been completed), the second bonus winning performance must be executed. (4) Even if the first bonus winning performance is in progress, it is interrupted when the second bonus winning performance occurs, and then the execution of the second bonus winning performance is started. It may be configured as follows. In that case, regardless of (3) or (4), the payout of prize balls due to bonus winnings will be performed twice, and the general winning hole count-up effect due to bonus winnings will also be performed twice (the first general winning hole count It is preferable that the close-up effect be performed twice without interrupting the close-up effect.

<<External information signal>> In the present embodiment, the external information signal (outer end signal) that the external information terminal board P600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine includes, for example, a prize ball signal, a jackpot signal, a winning streak signal, etc. This includes signals, symbol confirmation signals, door frame open signals, security signals, disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality signals, abnormal sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signals, etc.

Here, the external devices installed outside the gaming machine PM include a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device that is installed on the top of the gaming machine PM and displays data (gaming information) regarding the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display serves as useful judgment material for the player when selecting a game machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating status of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on external information signals output from each gaming machine installed in the hall in the gaming parlor, and This is a device that manages the operating status of the machine. This hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM through the data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without the data display.

(Prize Ball Signal) The prize ball signal is an external information signal that is output for a predetermined time every time a predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out from the gaming machine. That is, in this embodiment, the prize ball signal is continuously output for a predetermined period of time (for example, 100 ms) every time 10 prize balls are paid out. This embodiment is equipped with a prize ball number counter that counts the number of game balls put out from the prize ball payout unit P34, and when the payout detection switch provided in the prize ball payout unit P34 is activated, one game ball is detected. Each time a ball is detected, "1" is added to the prize ball counter. Then, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", a prize ball signal is output from the external information terminal board P600. Note that when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the count value returns to the initial value "0" (that is, it is counted from the initial value "0").

FIG. 75 is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the general winning hole P64. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded based on one game ball entering the general winning hole P64 is "3". Therefore, when the entry of a game ball is detected by the right general winning port switch P641, three game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit P34, and "3" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. Ru. At this time, as shown in (A) in the figure, if the value of the prize ball counter before addition is in the range of "0" to "6" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), The value of the prize ball number counter after addition will never reach the predetermined number, and no prize ball signal will be output. On the other hand, as shown in (B) in the figure, if the value of the prize ball counter before addition is in the range of "7" to "9" (corresponding to "7" in the illustrated example), after addition When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number once, the prize ball signal is outputted once. Therefore, in this embodiment, the prize ball signal is output at least once when one game ball enters the general winning hole P64 (triggered when the general winning hole normal winning effect is executed once). There are cases in which the winning ball signal is not output, and cases in which the winning ball signal is output once. In addition, in the above description, among the plurality of general winning holes P61 to P64, the general winning hole P64 was explained as an example, but the same can be said about the general winning holes P61 to P63.

FIG. 76 is a time chart of the prize ball signal when a game ball enters the big winning hole P54. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded based on one game ball entering the big winning hole P54 is "15". Therefore, when the entrance of a game ball is detected by the big prize opening switch P541, 15 game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit P34, and "15" is added to the value of the prize ball counter. . At this time, if the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "0" to "4" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is the predetermined value. By reaching the number once, the prize ball signal will be output once. On the other hand, if the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "5" to "9" (corresponding to "5" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is a predetermined number. By reaching , twice, the prize ball signal will be output twice. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a prize is awarded when one game ball enters the big winning hole P54 (triggered when the big winning hole normal winning effect or the big winning hole over winning effect is executed once). There are cases where the ball signal is output once and cases where the prize ball signal is output twice.

<Relationship with other performances during jackpots> Next, the relationship between the winning-related performances (big winning opening performance, general winning opening performance) and other performances during jackpots will be explained. Below, as other jackpot performances, (C) a pending series suggestion performance, (D) a promotion performance, and (E) a special performance will be exemplified.

≪C. Pending series suggesting performance≫ Pending series suggesting performance is a performance that suggests that a series within a pending game is established (that a jackpot is pending) during execution of the special game. As mentioned above, "on-hold consecutive hits" means, when a certain preceding activated pending ball is used up and the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, the special symbol related to the activated held ball concerned becomes a jackpot. A jackpot is expected to occur in one or more subsequent operation pending balls that exist at a predetermined timing from when the symbol validity determination is permitted until the end of the special game that is executed with the jackpot as a trigger. This means that a ball with active hold (also referred to as a ``jacket hold'') is included. In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state at the time of occurrence of the jackpot that triggers the execution of the currently running special game is a specific gaming state (high base state), and the gaming state after the end of the special game is also a specific gaming state. When the game is in the state (high base state), that is, when the consecutive winnings are continuing, if there is a jackpot pending in the pending, a pending consecutive winning suggestion performance is executed in the special game currently being executed. In other words, if the gaming state at the time of the jackpot that triggers the execution of the currently running special game is the normal gaming state (low base state), even if there is a jackpot pending in the pending state, the current A pending series suggestion performance is not executed in a special game that is currently being executed. Further, it is preferable that the special game currently being executed is based on the result of the judgment of validity regarding the second special symbol, and furthermore, it is preferable that the jackpot reservation in the reservation is also a reservation regarding the second special symbol. .

In this embodiment, the execution timing of the pending combination suggestion effect is set to the jackpot end demonstration period, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 56. Whether or not to execute the suspended combination suggestion performance is determined at the time of starting the special game execution, and is determined by lottery when the suspension combination suggestion performance execution condition is satisfied at the start of the special game execution. As a modified example, if you win in an execution lottery that is triggered by the condition for executing a suspended combination suggestion performance being met just before or at the start of the jackpot end demonstration, even if you execute the suspension combination suggestion performance. good.

The conditions for executing the holding combination suggestion performance are based on the premise that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the currently running special game is a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot), and one or more special symbols are activated within the holding ball. This is a condition that is satisfied when a jackpot reservation that results in a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) is included. In other words, even if there is a jackpot pending in the action pending ball of the special symbol, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot pending is not a high profit jackpot (if it is a 4R specific jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot), the jackpot will be suspended. The continuous suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, in a situation where there are multiple jackpot holds in the special symbol activation hold ball, if the jackpot type related to the previous jackpot hold is a low profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the subsequent jackpot hold is a high profit jackpot. In this case, the pending combination suggestion performance is not executed in the special game currently being executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if a pending series suggestion performance is executed during the execution of a special game, a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) will be achieved in a fluctuating display within a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) after the end of the special game. Not only is it certain that the game will occur, but it is also certain that the special game next to the special game in which the holding combination suggestion performance is executed will not be a low profit jackpot (4R specific jackpot or 4R normal jackpot). In addition, in this embodiment, a "special pattern 2 priority extinguishing method" is adopted in which the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is consumed preferentially than the activation reservation ball of the first special symbol, and the number of consecutive games in the reservation is The target operation-holding ball is limited to the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol.

The pending series suggestion performance is a performance that is executed during the jackpot end demonstration period and displays a special image that does not appear in any other scene. Examples of this special image include a performance image consisting of a still image, a performance image consisting of a moving image, and a performance image consisting of both a still image and a moving image.

In this embodiment, the pending combination suggestion performance can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game). That is, the pending series suggestion performance can be executed only in the super longevity jackpot performance as a performance pattern during the jackpot. On the other hand, the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game) or a low profit special game (4R special game). That is, the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance can be executed in any of the super longevity jackpot performance, longevity jackpot A performance, long life jackpot B performance, joy jackpot A performance, and joy jackpot B performance as the jackpot medium performance pattern.

In the present embodiment, while the suspended combination suggestion performance is being executed, the over winning performance or the bonus winning performance is not executed. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the pending combination suggestion performance and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning performance or bonus winning performance do not overlap. In other words, the pending series suggestion performance is executed during the jackpot end demo period, whereas the over winning performance and bonus winning performance are not performed during the jackpot end demo period, but are performed during the interval period. It is from. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the suspended combination suggestion performance and the over winning performance will not be executed overlappingly, and the suspended combination suggestion performance and the bonus winning performance will not be executed overlappingly. The performance and over-winning performance or bonus winning performance are executed independently. As a modified example, it may be configured such that the holding combination suggestion performance is executed during a round game, and in that case, the holding combination suggestion performance and the over winning performance may be executed overlappingly, or the holding combination suggestion performance and the over winning combination performance may be executed. The bonus winning effect and the bonus winning effect may be executed overlappingly, and in such a configuration, the display priority of the suspended combination suggestion effect is higher (displaying the over winning image or the bonus winning image on the background, or In addition, if a special sound effect is generated during the holding sequence suggestion performance, this special sound effect will be output with priority (reducing the volume of the over winning sound or bonus winning sound, or It may be configured so that it does not output.

Further, in this embodiment, the execution time of the pending combination suggestion performance is set to be longer than the execution time of the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance. Since consecutive winnings on hold are highly profitable rewards for players compared to over winnings and bonus winnings, we set the execution time of the holding consecutive winnings performance to be relatively long to ensure that players do not miss out. I try not to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the on-hold series play performance is executed only as a "true performance" that definitively notifies the establishment of the on-hold series game, but as a variation thereof, in reality, the on-hold series game is executed. It is also possible to include "fake performances" that have not been established. In addition, in this example, one of the execution conditions of the holding consecutive game performance is that the preceding activated holding ball is a jackpot holding of a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), but the conditions are not limited to this. Instead, the preceding operation holding ball may be a jackpot hold other than a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), that is, a jackpot hold corresponding to a low profit jackpot (4R jackpot).

Further, by changing the display mode of the cumulative prize pitch count display from a normal display mode (for example, white display) to a special display mode (gold display), it may be suggested that a consecutive game on hold has been established. In addition, the suspended series suggestion effect may be performed at the execution timing of an emphasis effect (emphasis display) that is performed when the value of the cumulative prize ball count reaches a specific value. In that case, it is preferable to suggest that a series of games on hold is established by the display mode of the emphasis effect.

≪D. Promotion performance ≫ Promotion performance is when a jackpot occurs in the changing display of special symbols, the profit pattern (for convenience, referred to as "provisional profit pattern") related to the jackpot is suggested before or at the start of the special game. Or, after being notified, it is an effect that suggests whether or not the actual profit form related to the jackpot is higher in profit degree than the tentative profit form during the execution of the special game. In other words, it suggests whether the profit pattern of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (correct profit pattern) or false (high profit pattern), and through a series of processes, the jackpot profit pattern is This is a performance that shows whether the profit pattern of the company will be promoted (changed) or not.

The types of promotion performances are broadly divided into round promotion performances and fixed-variable promotion performances. The round promotion performance is performed after the provisional number of rounds in a state where it is uncertain whether the specified number of rounds (tentative specified number of rounds) of the special game suggested or announced at the time of the occurrence of a jackpot is the true number of rounds or a false number of rounds. This is a performance that suggests the possibility that round games will continue. This round promotion effect includes one that simply suggests that the round has been promoted, and one that suggests not only the promotion of the round but also the true specified number of rounds or the number of long open rounds. A fixed promotion performance is a state in which it is uncertain whether the jackpot type suggested or announced at the time of a jackpot occurrence (temporary jackpot type) is a true jackpot type or a false jackpot type (a state in which it is uncertain whether it is a specific jackpot or not). ), this is an effect that suggests the possibility of shifting to a variable probability gaming state after the special game ends. In this embodiment, when a promotion performance (round promotion performance, variable promotion performance) occurs during execution of a special game, it is certain that the promotion will be successful.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 58, the variable probability promotion performance is performed when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won in the normal gaming state, or when the "4R special jackpot" of the second special symbol is won in the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state. This is executed when the "4R specific jackpot" is won and the "happy jackpot B performance" is selected as the performance pattern during the jackpot. The execution timing of this variable promotion performance is set during the jackpot end demo period. This fixed promotion effect involves moving the movable accessory P24 down so that it overlaps with the screen, and then moving the movable accessory P24 upward again to display the title "Shouju Jackpot" on the exposed screen. By doing so, the content of the performance is to make it appear as if the "joy jackpot performance" has been promoted to the "longevity jackpot performance" (the jackpot type has been promoted from 4R normal jackpot to 4R special jackpot).

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, the round promotion performance is when the second special symbol "16 special jackpot" is won in the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, and the "longevity jackpot B performance" is used as the performance pattern during the jackpot. ” is selected. The execution timing of this round promotion effect is set from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round. This round promotion effect is performed by temporarily displaying the words "Final Round" (fake display) on the screen to make it appear as if the round game currently being executed is the final round game, and then By displaying a cut-in image of the message ``It can't be like that!'' uttered by the main character, and then displaying the title ``Super Long Jacket'', the change from ``Long Life Jackpot Performance'' to ``Super Long Jackpot Performance'' is displayed. This is a production content that makes it appear as if the jackpot type has been promoted from 4R specific jackpot to 16R specific jackpot.

In this embodiment, the round promotion effect can only be executed when the special game currently being executed is "16R special game (high profit special game)," but the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are currently being executed. The special game is configured so that it can be executed as either "16R special game (high profit special game)" or "4R special game (low profit special game)".

Further, in this embodiment, the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed while the variable promotion effect is being executed. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the variable promotion performance and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning performance or the bonus winning performance do not overlap. In other words, the fixed promotion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, whereas the over winning effect and bonus winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. It is. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the fixed-variable promotion performance and the over winning performance will not be executed overlappingly, and the fixed-variable promotion performance and the bonus winning performance will not be executed overlappingly, and the fixed-variable promotion performance and the over-winning The prize-winning performance or bonus prize-winning performance is designed to be executed independently. As a modified example, a variable promotion performance may be executed during a round game, and in that case, a variable promotion performance and an over winning performance may be executed at the same time, or a fixed promotion performance and a bonus winning performance may be performed. may be executed overlappingly, and in such a configuration, the variable promotion effect has a higher display priority (over-winning images and bonus winning images are displayed in the background or hidden) , In addition, if a special sound effect is generated during the special promotion performance, the special sound effect is configured to be output with priority (reducing the volume of the over winning sound and bonus winning sound, or not outputting it). It's fine.

Furthermore, the present embodiment is configured such that the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect can be executed overlappingly while the round promotion effect is being executed. In other words, the round promotion effect is executed from the 4th round to the interval period of the 4th round, so if an over-win or bonus win occurs during the interval period, the execution period of the round promotion effect ( (execution timing) and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning performance or bonus winning performance may overlap. In addition, the round promotion effect has a higher display priority (over-winning images and bonus winning images are displayed on the background or hidden), and special sound effects are generated during the round promotion effect. In this case, the dedicated sound effect may be configured to be output with priority (the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound may be reduced or not output).

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to "31 seconds" from the start of the fourth round to the end of the interval period, and the execution time of the variable promotion effect is set to ``31 seconds'' from the start of the fourth round to the start of the jackpot end demo. It is set to "20 seconds" from the time to the end time. On the other hand, the execution time of the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance are each set to "0.5 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the round promotion performance is set to be longer than the execution time of the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance. Further, the execution time of the variable promotion performance is set to be longer than the execution time of the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance.

≪E. Special Performance>> A special performance is a highly rare performance that is executed when a predetermined consecutive winning condition is met. "Predetermined successive winning conditions" means that the number of consecutive jackpots has reached a specified number (20 in this embodiment), and the type of jackpot for at least the specified number of wins (20th in this embodiment) is the highest. This is a condition that is met when a profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) occurs. This special performance appears during execution of a special game (16R special game) triggered by the occurrence of a prescribed number of jackpots (the 20th time). However, this special performance ends with the final round (16th round) and does not include the end demo period after that (however, even if it includes the interval period of the final round, it does not include the interval period of the final round). ). Furthermore, this special performance consists of a performance content (special movie) in which the highly rare premium characters of this model are sequentially displayed one cut at a time.

In addition to the specified number of successive wins, the predetermined consecutive winning conditions include, for example, that the cumulative number of 16R specific jackpots in the consecutive winning state reaches a predetermined number of times (the 16R specific jackpot of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times). It is also possible to add conditions such as the total number of rounds won in consecutive games or the cumulative number of awarded balls reaching a predetermined number. Here, "consecutive games (consecutive games state)" means, as mentioned above, as a gaming state during a non-special gaming state, after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from a non-specific gaming state to a specific gaming state, This refers to a state in which a specific gaming state continues without returning to a non-specific gaming state (a state in which jackpots in the specific gaming state occur continuously after the first win is the starting point). "Specific gaming state" is a gaming state where the probability of transition to a special game is higher than the normal gaming state, and in a broad sense, it includes a special symbol probability variation function, a special symbol variation time shortening function, and electric chew support. This is a gaming state in which one of the functions is operating. In the present embodiment, the specific gaming state means a gaming state in which at least the electric chew support function is operating, that is, a gaming state in which the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game.

In this embodiment, the special performance can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game). On the other hand, the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game) or a low profit special game (4R special game).

In this embodiment, even if an over-winning effect or a bonus winning effect occurs during execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the extra winning effect is not executed. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the special performance and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning performance or the bonus winning performance do not overlap. The reason for this is that if there is a conflict between a special performance and an over-the-top winning performance or a bonus winning performance, it is better to give priority to the execution of the rare special performance (displaying premium characters that can only be seen in the special performance). This is because the result is satisfying for the player.

As a modification of the present embodiment, if an over winning performance or a bonus winning performance occurs during the execution of the special performance, the over winning performance or the bonus winning performance may be executed redundantly. When a special performance and an over winning performance or a bonus winning performance are executed at the same time, the display priority (layer priority) of the special performance is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the over winning performance or bonus winning performance. It is preferable that the priority level (priority level) is set higher. However, special effects are displayed in a large size over the entire screen, whereas over-winning effects and bonus winning effects are displayed in a small size towards the edge of the screen, so the display priority of special effects may vary. (layer priority), the display priority (layer priority) of the over winning effect or bonus winning effect may be set higher.

In this embodiment, the execution time of the special performance is set to "499 seconds" from the start of the jackpot start demonstration to the end of the final (16th round) round game. On the other hand, the execution time of the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance are each set to "0.5 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the special performance is set to be longer than the execution time of the over winning performance and the bonus winning performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during the execution of a special game (for example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off due to a power outage, etc.), if an over winning or bonus winning occurs after the power outage is restored. , After the power is restored from the power outage, an over winning effect or a bonus winning effect is executed. This can be done because the decision to execute the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is triggered by an over winning effect or a bonus winning effect, that is, by an event after the power is turned off. On the other hand, the performance control command for power-off recovery transmitted from the main control board P100 after the power-off recovery does not include data for restoring the suspended group suggestion performance, promotion performance, and special performance, and Since the RAMP 203 of the production control board P200 is not backed up with power, if a power outage occurs during the execution of a special game, even if the execution conditions for each production are met or the opportunity for execution has arrived at the time of the power outage, the special game will not be activated. Regarding the suspended combination suggestion performance, promotion performance, and special performance that determine whether or not they can be executed at the start of the game, there will be no data regarding whether or not these performances can be executed after the power is restored. is not executed. Note that the above-mentioned recovery from a power outage (power return) is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), and is a recovery from a power outage that involves clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch). In some cases, the game shifts to the normal game state (low probability low base state) and returns with the decorative symbols in combination "331" being stopped and displayed.

<Processing on the main control board side> Next, the procedure of operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 77 to 90. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

<<Main Processing on the Main Control Side>> FIGS. 77 and 78 are flowcharts showing the main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In this main control side main processing, after a security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by a reset upon power-on, the program is started and the processing from S1 onward is started.

First, as initial settings required at power-on, a start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S1), and access to the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Next, a vector table is set in which the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

Next, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). If the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read and it is determined whether information indicating normal power-off is stored (S6).

Here, if the information indicating that the power is turned off normally is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). Note that the checksum calculated here at power-on includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described later, so if the backup is normal, the checksum at power-on Sam becomes "0". In this way, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power was turned off has been correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process moves to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, etc., a production control command ("performance initial command") is requested to the production control board 200 (S11).

Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, the power-on normal information setting, various error initial settings, and communication initial settings with the payout control board 400 are sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, the power-on normal information settings include storing the power-on normal data in the power-off information flag in order to save that the power-on was performed correctly, and initializing the power-off occurrence information. Turn off the power-off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, data transfer destination address, and number of transfer bytes are set, and data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power cut is read, and the power cut recovery process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Subsequently, a request is made to send a performance control command (“power-off recovery command”) when the main control board 100 and the performance control board 200 are restored from power-off (S15). This power-off recovery command includes information regarding the inspection of the communication line, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of time reductions, the number of times the ball is easily entered, the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the error state. Note that unsent command requests before the power is turned off are cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, information on the number of balls on hold for the first special symbol and second special symbol at the time of power outage is read, and a production control command including the information on the number of balls on hold for action is requested ( S16).

Subsequently, a return setting is performed to return the normal electric accessory 522 to the state before the power was cut off (for example, the second starting port 52 was opened) (S17). Furthermore, a return setting is performed to return the special electric accessory 542 to the state before the power was cut off (for example, the big prize opening 54 was opened) (S18). Next, the value of the probability variation flag is read and the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function when the power is turned off is set (S19). In addition, the probability variation flag is a flag (a flag indicating that the special symbol probability variation function is in operation) for setting the operating probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to start a timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as an initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer, clear word 1 ("55H") is set (S22).

Next, in order to determine whether a power outage has occurred, the value of the power outage confirmation flag is read and it is determined whether or not a power outage has occurred (S23). If a power outage has not occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

Next, interrupt permission is set to permit generation of timer interrupt processing (S25), and the process returns to the above-mentioned process for disabling interrupts (S21), and the loop processing from S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is executed periodically at predetermined intervals, and the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt processing until the occurrence of the next interrupt processing is used to perform steps S21 to S25. Repeat the process up to. If an interrupt request is received in the interrupt disabled state, timer interrupt processing is started when interrupts are enabled in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, if a power-off has occurred, the process moves to S26, and the following power-off processing is executed.

Next, as power-off processing (S26 to S32), clear word 2 ("AAH") is first set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether the contents of the power-off information flag are normal power-on data (S27). If the information is normal power-on information (S27: Yes), normal power-off data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if the power-on information is not normal (S27: No), power-off abnormality data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process moves to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement of the checksum data is calculated, and the resulting value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Next, access to the RAM 103 is set to be prohibited (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

<<Main Control Side Timer Interrupt Process>> Next, the main control side timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110 at fixed time intervals (for example, 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the main control side main process described above.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved to the stack area of the RAM 103, and then interrupt operating conditions are set (S51).

Next, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by sequentially writing clear word 1 and clear word 2 to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset timeout period. That is, when the main CPU 101 is normally executing the program, clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before it times out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operating gate switch 531, the big winning port switch 541, the general winning port switch 611, 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, and the magnetic sensor. , radio wave sensor, etc., determines their status, and stores the detected information. Note that signals are read from the input port five times for each interrupt process (reading is performed at 5 μs intervals). If the values read five times match, the matched value (1 or 0) is stored in RAM as the level data for the current interrupt processing, and if they do not match, the level data of the previous interrupt processing is used for the current interrupt processing. It is retained as it is as level data. Furthermore, by taking the exclusive OR of the current level data and the previous level data, and by taking the AND of the result of the exclusive OR and the current level data, the rising data (for example, the game ball is A winning signal indicating that a ball entering the ball has been detected is created. Alternatively, the input port may be checked by interrupt processing in units of 4 ms, and rising data may be created when there is an input change due to multiple interrupt processing (if consecutive data from multiple interrupt processing match). If so, that state is considered a normal port state). For example, the level data in the previous interrupt processing is "0", and in each of the subsequent two interrupt processings, the signal is read from the input port five times for each interrupt processing, and these five times. If the read value is the matched value "1", start-up data (for example, a winning signal indicating that the entry of a game ball has been detected at the first starting port 51) may be created.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In this various random number update processing, normal symbol variation pattern random numbers, special symbol variation pattern random numbers, and special symbol variation additional pattern random numbers are updated. Regarding the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation additional pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. Note that if the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

Next, initial value update type random number update processing is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random numbers per normal symbol, the soft random numbers per special symbol, and the random numbers per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". Further, when the value on the counter goes through one round, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, an initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used to control the gaming operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted by the interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to variable display and stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, and the like. A specified variable time is set in the special symbol game timer at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and is subtracted as the time elapses. Furthermore, if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, if a small winning game is executed for the other special symbol, one of the special symbols will be The timing of the changing display of special symbols is interrupted.

Next, a second starting port effective period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting port valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 51 are determined, and as a result of this determination, valid period data or invalid period data of the second starting port 51 is set.

Next, winning monitoring processing is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, the detection information of the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the activation gate switch 531, the big winning opening switch 541, and the general winning opening switch 611, 641 in the input process (S53) is used. Based on this, the game ball is inspected for passing through the switches, and if it is determined that the game ball has passed through each switch, information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch is stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, it requests the transmission of a production control command containing information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch. The details of this winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later using FIG. 67.

Next, prize ball control processing is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, based on the detection result in the winning monitoring process described above, a payout control command is sent to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning, and the payout control board 400 The communication test with the payout control board 400 is performed by monitoring the received data from the payout control board 400.

Next, normal symbol activation gate monitoring processing is executed (S61). In this normal symbol activation gate monitoring process, passage of the game ball to the activation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the activation gate 53, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as activation pending ball information. , updates the number of pending balls to a maximum of 4, and stores random numbers related to the normal symbol lottery.

Next, normal symbol control processing is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, in order to perform a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522, depending on the value of the normal symbol game status, a normal symbol fluctuation process, a normal symbol stop symbol display process, , processing during normal electric accessory operation, normal electric accessory operation end demonstration processing, etc. In addition, in the process during normal symbol variation, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol in a variable manner or in a fixed manner.

Next, normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring processing is executed (S63). In this normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process, the operating state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the number of normal symbol operation pending balls is used up by one, and the normal symbol is Judgment of validity, pattern judgment, variation pattern judgment, variation time setting, etc. are performed in this order.

Next, a starting port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this starting port monitoring control process, the winning of game balls to the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 is monitored, and when a winning game ball is received, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is performed. Random number storage, pre-read preview performance judgment, command request for number of symbols stored, etc. are performed in order.

Next, special symbol control processing is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72 include a special symbol variation start process (S420), a special symbol variation process (S430), which will be described in detail later, according to the value of the special symbol game status. ), special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440), and the like are executed.

Next, special electric accessory control processing is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the operation processing related to the special electric accessory 542 includes setting the start and end of the operation of the special electric accessory 542, and The opening time and number of openings of the prize opening 54 are updated, the probability fluctuation function is set to start operating, the fluctuation time shortening function is set to start operating, and the fluctuation pattern selection state is set, etc., in this order.

Next, a big winning opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In this big winning hole valid period setting process, the winning valid period and winning invalid period of the big winning hole 54 are determined, and the valid period data or invalid period data of the big winning hole 54 is set as the result of this determination.

Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process, if there is a pending ball for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the number of pending balls is consumed by one, a command request is made for the number of symbols stored, and the validity of the special symbol is determined. , determining the special symbol, determining the probability variation function, determining the time reduction function, setting the operation pattern of the special electric accessory, setting the demonstration performance time, etc. in this order.

Next, abnormality detection processing is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, disconnection/short circuit power abnormality signal, radio wave detection signal from the radio sensor, door/frame open signal, etc. are sequentially inspected. , determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If there is an error state, a production control command ("error production designation command") containing the error information is generated to request the production control board 200 to display an error.

Next, a ball entrance passage time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball entering and passing time abnormality detection processing, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, an abnormality in ball entering and passing time is set, and a performance control command ("error") containing the error information is set. In addition to making a request for a production designation command), it also requests the output of a security signal to be output to an external terminal.

Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 542 operates continuously (regular number of rounds), the number of balls pending activation of normal symbols and special symbols, etc. is created. Furthermore, display data for displaying information on the error state detected in the abnormality detection process on the status indicator light of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, LED output processing is executed (S72). In this LED output processing, the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S65) is performed in order to display special symbols and normal symbols, display the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, display errors, etc. The display data created in the abnormality detection process (S69), the game state display process (S71), etc. is displayed on each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 75, each special symbol holding lamp 73, 74, and normal pattern holding lamp. It outputs to the lamp 76, the status indicator light of the main control board 100, etc., and initializes the display on these various display devices.

Next, firing control signal output processing is executed (S73). In this firing control signal output processing, if a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a firing permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to permit the firing of game balls. do. On the other hand, if a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a firing prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the firing of game balls.

Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, in order to operate each electric accessory 542, the information acquired in the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) is Based on the control data, an excitation signal is output to each electric accessory solenoid 623, 643.

Next, production control command transmission processing is executed (S75). In this performance control command transmission process, the performance control command specified by the pointer is read out from among the performance control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and the performance control command specified by the pointer is read out. A control command is transmitted to the production control board 200.

Next, external information output processing is executed (S76). In this external information output process, game information related to the gaming machine PM is outputted as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal board 600. The external information signals include, for example, a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormal sensor detection signal (abnormal ball entry time, etc.), a jackpot signal, a consecutive shot signal, There is a pattern confirmation signal, etc.

Next, the saved register contents are restored and the main CPU 101 is set to an interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt processing is ended and the main control side main processing is executed, and the main control side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

Note that when the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a drop in supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during main control side main processing or interrupt processing, it generates a non-maskable interrupt and turns on the power outage confirmation flag. do. Then, after returning to the original process, the aforementioned power-off process (S26 to S32) is executed.

<<Winning Monitoring Process>> Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be explained. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, a first starting port switch input process is executed (S101). In the first starting port switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 is input, the first starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a first starting opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 511, the process directly proceeds to the next step.

Subsequently, a second starting port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second starting port switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 has been input. When the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input, the second starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a second starting opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal is input from the second starting port switch 521, the process directly proceeds to the next step.

Next, an activation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the activation gate switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the activation gate switch 531 has been input. When the detection signal from the activation gate switch 531 is input, activation gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the activation gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the activation gate winning data is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. A command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if no detection signal is input from the actuation gate switch 531, the process directly proceeds to the next step.

Subsequently, a big winning opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the big winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the big winning opening switch 541 has been input. When the detection signal from the big winning hole switch 541 is input, the big winning hole winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , generates a big winning opening winning command and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the big prize opening switch 541, the process directly moves to the next step.

Subsequently, left general winning opening switch processing is executed (S105). In the left general winning a prize opening switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the left general winning a prize opening switch 611 has been input. When the detection signal from the left general winning hole switch 611 is input, the left general winning hole winning data indicating that the game ball has entered any of the general winning holes 61 to 63 is stored as winning data in the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a left general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the left general winning a prize opening switch 611, the current winning a prize monitoring process is ended.

Subsequently, right general winning a prize opening switch processing is executed (S106). In the right general winning a prize opening switch input process, it is determined whether the detection signal from the right general winning a prize opening switch 641 has been input. When the detection signal from the right general winning hole switch 641 is input, the right general winning hole winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning hole 64 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a right general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the right general winning a prize opening switch 641, the current winning a prize monitoring process is ended.

<<Special symbol game processing>> Next, a series of processing related to the special symbol game within the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-mentioned starting opening monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric accessory control processing (S66), special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing (S68), etc. is applicable.

(Starting Port Monitoring Control Process) First, the starting port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing details of the starting port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not a win in the game to the first starting opening 51 has been detected (S201). If winning into the first start opening 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S202).

If the number of balls on hold for the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, the special symbol as the lottery random number for the first special symbol game. The fluctuating pattern random numbers are acquired and each random number is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area (holding n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of ball entry (S203). Then, as an update of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting opening 51 is ended.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a win in the game to the second start opening 52 has been detected (S205). If winning into the second starting port 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S206). If the number of pending balls for the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), the lottery random values for the second special symbol game are the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the special symbol. The fluctuating pattern random numbers are acquired and each random number is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area (holding n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of ball entry (S207). Then, as an update of the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 52 is ended.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. (S209). If the number of pending balls has been updated (S209: YES), a symbol storage number command including information on the number of pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is stored in the main information storage means. 180 (S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is checked, and it is determined whether or not it is the preliminary determination timing (S211). If it is the advance judgment timing (S211: YES), in order to generate pre-read judgment information based on various random numbers obtained at the time of winning the starting opening, the special symbol winning random number is extracted from the winning random number buffer (reservation n storage area or register, etc.). The numerical value is read out and a preliminary judgment of validity is performed (S212). Then, a propriety preliminary judgment command including information on this preliminary judgment result (probability preliminary judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

Further, a symbol random number value per special symbol is read from the winning symbol random number buffer to perform symbol preliminary determination (S214). Then, a symbol preliminary determination command including information on this preliminary determination result (symbol preliminary determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is read out from the fluctuation pattern random number buffer, and a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern preliminary determination command including information on this preliminary determination result (variation pattern preliminary determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process) Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be explained. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68).

In this special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S68), the later-described special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process is performed for the special symbol side that satisfies the fluctuation start condition among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (S310) is executed. In addition, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, as described above, the processing on the second special symbol side is executed preferentially.

First, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit (S301). Next, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are on standby for variation, that is, whether the first special symbol gaming status and the second special symbol gaming status are both “00H (waiting for variation)”. It is determined whether or not (S302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of activated pending balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of pending balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special symbol is activated. It is assumed that the symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and the address of the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) is set (S304). , the process moves to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when there is an operation-retaining ball of the second special symbol, the operation-retaining ball of the second special symbol is given priority regardless of whether or not there is an operation-retaining ball of the first special symbol. It is meant to be digested. Details of this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described later using FIG. 110.

On the other hand, if the number of pending balls in the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether the number of pending balls in the first special symbol is "0" (S305). . Here, if the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is assumed that the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (the following After setting the addresses of various tables used in the process and the address of the RAM storage area (S306), the process moves to the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process on the first special symbol side (S310).

In addition, if both the fluctuation start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES),
The special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310) is skipped.

(Special symbol variation start monitoring process) Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be explained. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309).

In this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309), the current variation start is determined by referring to the first special symbol variation start monitoring table or the second special symbol variation start monitoring table set in S304 or S308 described above. The processing on the target special symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except in special cases, the processing on the first special symbol side will be executed. The processing will be explained collectively without distinguishing between the processing and the processing on the second special symbol side.

First, the number of pending balls on the special symbol side that is subject to the current fluctuation start is subtracted by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of active pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Next, access the special symbol reservation storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of this fluctuation start, and read the random value per special symbol stored in the earliest reservation storage area (reservation 1 storage area), and the special symbol per special symbol storage area. In order to sequentially read the symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value, and use these random numbers in the special symbol validity determination process (S320), symbol determination process (S330), and variation pattern selection process (S423), which will be described later, It is transferred to the special symbol validity determination area, special symbol design determination area, special symbol variation pattern determination area, and special symbol variation additional pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as an update of the reservation storage area, the reservation ball information stored in the reservation 2 storage area to reservation 4 storage area is shifted to the lower reservation storage area, and the reservation 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, a special symbol validity determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol validity determination process (S320), first, a special symbol validity lottery table is obtained. At this time, when the game state is a special symbol probability variable state, a high probability winning/losing lottery table is obtained, and when the gaming state is a normal state, a low probability winning/losing lottery table is obtained. Next, the random number value per special symbol is read from the special symbol validity determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol validity lottery table, a determination of the validity of the special symbol is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. Further, the values corresponding to the result of the judgment (big hit data "55H", small win data "33H", loss data "00H") are stored in the special symbol judgment flag of the main information storage means 180.

Subsequently, a symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol of the special symbol and the character performance number (variable additional symbol information) are determined according to the result of the validity determination. Then, the stop symbols (symbol group) of the special symbols determined this time and the character presentation number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. In addition, the character performance number is based on the type of determined stop symbol (symbol group) and the operating state of the probability variation function of special symbols and normal symbols (special symbol probability variation on/special symbol probability variation off/normal symbol probability variation on) /4 patterns of probability variation off of normal symbols) are determined based on the combination. Note that if the result of the judgment is negative, character performance number "0" is determined.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination of the validity of the special symbol corresponds to a jackpot (S342). If the result of the special symbol validity determination is negative (S342: NO), the process moves to S351.

If the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot (S342: YES), based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 above and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, The probability variation number is determined as the number of times the special symbol probability variation function operates (S345). Also, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 above and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of times the variation time reduction function of the special symbol operates after the end of the jackpot game is calculated as the number of variation time reduction times. is determined (S346). Furthermore, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in the above S330 and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of times the electric chew support function is activated after the end of the jackpot game is determined. S347). The results of this determination (the number of probability fluctuations, the number of times of fluctuation time reduction, and the number of electric support) are stored in the time saving frequency storage area and the electric support frequency storage area of the main information storage means 180. Subsequently, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542 during the jackpot game (round game) is set based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in each round, etc. are set.

Next, a variable pattern selection state after the jackpot game or after the small win game is set based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 and the current gaming state (S349). Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330, the demonstration performance time (win start demonstration time and win end demonstration time) of the special game (big hit game or small win game) is set (S350). Next, the special symbol validity determination area and the special symbol design determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol validity determination process (S320) and symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status of the special symbol to be changed this time is changed from "00H (standby)" to "01H (variation start)" (S352).

(Special symbol control process) Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be explained. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether the special electric accessory 542 is inactive, that is, whether the special electric accessory game status is "00H (waiting state for winning)" (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 542 is inactive (S401: YES), it is determined whether the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402).

If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402: YES), in order to execute the process related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent process) Addresses of various tables and addresses of RAM storage area) are set (S403), and the process moves to special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402: NO), in order to execute the process related to the first special symbol, the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent process Addresses of various tables to be used and addresses of RAM storage area) are set (S404), and the process moves to special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

In addition, in the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-mentioned S403 or S404 is used to select the special symbol that is subject to the current variation. The processing on the symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, unless there is a special case, it will be the processing on the first special symbol side. , the processing on the second special symbol side will be explained together without making a distinction. Details of this special symbol control general purpose processing (S410) will be described later using FIG. 85.

(Special symbol control general purpose processing) Subsequently, special symbol control general purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407), branch processing (S411 to S414) is executed to proceed to processing according to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H"). do. First, it is determined whether the special symbol game status on the special symbol side that is subject to the current change is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process moves to special symbol variation start processing (S420). The details of this special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described later using FIG. 86. On the other hand, in the case of NO in S412, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "02H (changing)" (S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process moves to special symbol variation processing (S430). Details of this special symbol variation process (S430) will be described later using FIG. 87. If NO in S413, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "03H (displaying stopped symbols)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process moves to special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440). The details of this special symbol stop symbol display process (S440) will be described later using FIG. 88.

(Special symbol variation start process) Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be explained. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is obtained based on the result of the lottery and the variation pattern selection state (S421). Subsequently, the special symbol variation pattern random value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S422). Then, with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of the plurality of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

Next, a fluctuation time corresponding to the currently selected fluctuation pattern is set (S424). Then, as a setting for starting the variation of the special symbols, a variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and a variation start command to the performance control board 200 is generated (S426). As the fluctuation start command, a communication inspection command, a fluctuation additional symbol information designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a symbol designation command are sequentially generated in order to start the symbol fluctuation performance in the performance display device 70, and these commands are stored in the main information storage means. 180 command storage area.

Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (fluctuation start)" to "02H (fluctuation in progress)" (S428).

(Special symbol fluctuation processing) Next, the special symbol fluctuation processing (S430) will be explained. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation process (S430).

First, in order to display the special symbols in a variable manner, special symbol display pattern number switching processing is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of special symbols is generated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the special symbol in a variable or fixed manner.

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether the special symbol variation time has ended (S432). When the special symbol variation time has ended (S432: YES), a stop symbol of the special symbol to be definitely displayed is set on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 (S433). Subsequently, a fluctuation stop command is generated to instruct the performance control board 200 to display the decorative pattern in a fixed manner, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S434).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored in the special symbol game timer as the final display time (S435). It should be noted that the "determined display time" is the time during which the stopped symbols are definitively stopped and displayed when the special symbols stop changing. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (currently fluctuating)" to "03H (displaying stopped symbols)" (S436).

(Special symbol stop symbol display process) Next, the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440) will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

First, it is determined whether the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the fixed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). Here, when the fixed display time of the special symbol has ended (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is transitioned from "03H (displaying stopped symbols)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the validity determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the jackpot data "55H" (S443). If the judgment data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S444), the special symbol variation time shortening function is stopped (S445), and the electric chew support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set to "00H (off)", and the probability variation counter, the variation time reduction counter, and the ball entry easy state counter are set to "00H" and cleared to zero.

Next, as a special game start demonstration setting process, a start demonstration display time is set, and a performance control command (big hit start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demonstration performance is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the variable pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Further, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "00H (waiting state for winning)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, in order to clear the content of the validity determination flag, "00H" is set (S450).

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination data is not jackpot data (S443: NO), it is determined whether the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451). If the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451: YES), the probability variation counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the number of variations of the current special symbol (step S452). . Subsequently, it is determined whether the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (step S453). When the probability variation number counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S454). If the probability fluctuation number counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process moves to S455.

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol variation time shortening function is in operation (S455). If the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455: YES), the time reduction counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the number of variations of the current special symbol has been used (step S456). . Subsequently, it is determined whether the variable time reduction number counter is zero (step S457). When the variation time reduction number counter is zero (S457: YES), it is assumed that the number of times the special symbol time reduction state ends is reached, and the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function is stopped (S458). If the variable time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether the electric chew support function is in operation (S459). When the electric chew support function is in operation (S459: YES), the electric support number counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the number of changes of the current special symbol (step S460). Subsequently, it is determined whether the electric support counter is zero (step S461). When the electric support number counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped as the number of times the easy ball entry state ends is reached (S462). If the electric support counter after the subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process moves to S463.

Next, the variation pattern selection state count counter in the main information storage means 180 is subtracted by 1 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, by referring to the variation pattern selection state number counter in the main information storage means 180, it is determined whether the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset number of completion times, and the number of completion times is determined. If the state has been reached, the state is switched to the next specified variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the end count has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, a production control command (gaming state designation command) including the current gaming state information and variable pattern selection state information updated in S451 to S464 described above is generated, and this command is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. (S465). In addition, on the production control board 200 side, the production mode is set and updated based on the information of this gaming state designation command.

(Special electric accessory control process) Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be explained. FIGS. 89 to 90 are flowcharts showing details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether the special electric accessory game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric accessory game status is "01H" (S501: YES), a special game process is executed in the subsequent process. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S502). When the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether it is time to start operating the special electric accessory 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 is the timing at which the special electric accessory 542 starts operating in each round game.

If it is the activation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S503: YES), a production control command (round production designation command) is generated to start a round production, and this command is stored in the main information storage means 180. The information is stored in the area (S504). In addition, on the performance control board 200 side, based on the information of this round performance designation command (information such as the current number of rounds), a round performance corresponding to each round game during the special game is executed. Then, the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S505), and the processes of S506 to S510 are executed while the special electric accessory 542 is in operation.

As a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 542, it is determined whether or not a prescribed count (maximum number of prizes) of game balls have entered the grand prize opening 54 (S506), and the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 is determined. It is determined whether the (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game ball enters the special count number (maximum number of prizes) in the big prize opening 54 (S506: YES) or if the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 has elapsed (S507: YES), a special The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether the number of consecutive operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached a predetermined number of rounds (S509). If the number of consecutive operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of consecutive operations of the special electric accessory 542 is incremented by 1 (S510).

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process moves to S511, and the end demo display time is set as the winning end demo setting process of the special game. At the same time, a performance control command (jackpot end demonstration command) for instructing the start of the end demonstration performance is generated (S511).

Subsequently, the variation time reduction number information set in the above S346 is stored in the variation time reduction number counter (S512). Further, the information on the number of times of electric support support set in the above S347 is stored in the electric support number counter (S513).

Next, with reference to the contents of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the conditional device is based on a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S514). If the condition device is activated by a specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability fluctuation frequency (operation data) set in the above S345 is stored in the probability fluctuation frequency counter of the main information storage means 180, and the special symbol is activated. The probability fluctuation function starts operating (S515). On the other hand, if the conditional device is not activated by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-activated data "00H" is stored in the probability fluctuation counter, and S515 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the variable time reduction number information stored in the time reduction number counter is variable time reduction function activation data (data other than "00H") (S516). If it is the fluctuation time shortening function activation data (S516: YES), the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is started to operate (S517). On the other hand, if the data is not variable time reduction function activation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

Next, it is determined whether the electric support number information stored in the electric support number counter is electric support function activation data (data other than "00H") (S518). If it is the electric chew support function activation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the operation start of the probability variation function of the normal symbol (S519), the operation start of the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol (S520), and the start operation of the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522 (S521) are executed in this order. On the other hand, if the data is not electric chew support function activation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

Next, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 above (S522). Next, a production control command (gaming state designation command) including the post-special game gaming state information and variable pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated, and this command is stored in the main information storage means 180. It is stored in the command storage area (S523). In addition, on the performance control board 200 side, the performance mode after the special game is set based on the information of this game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state for winning)" (S524).

<Processing on the Effect Control Board Side> Next, the procedure of operation processing in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 91 to 97. Processing on the production control board 200 side includes a reset start process (including production control side main processing) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset after the power is turned on, and a production control side timer interrupt that is started at regular intervals. processing, a reception interrupt process for a production control command that is activated due to a strobe signal from the main control board 100, and a lamp that is activated upon the arrival of a predetermined generation time stipulated in the time schedule of the variable performance pattern. It is configured to include a production interruption process and an image control command transmission interruption process that is activated at regular intervals.

A priority level is set for each interrupt process (exception process), which indicates the priority level when multiple interrupt processes occur. In this example, "Reset start processing due to power reset: Top priority", "Reset start processing due to various abnormalities: Top priority" → "Reception control command reception interrupt processing: Level 7" → "WDT (when runaway detection) The priority levels are ranked in the following order: "Reset start processing: Level 3"->"Image control command transmission interrupt processing: Level 2"->"Production control side timer interrupt processing: Level 1". Note that "reset start processing due to various abnormalities" is, for example, when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, when the sub-main CPU 201 attempts to access an illegal area or by an illegal method, or when the DMA (Direct Memory Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. Although the present embodiment exemplifies the plurality of types of interrupt processing described above, other interrupt processing actually exists.

In the production control side main processing, the process is basically set to either a state in which all interruptions are prohibited or interruptions other than production control command reception interruptions are prohibited before proceeding. Then, when the main process on the production control side enters an interrupt permission state, each interrupt process is activated in such a way as to interrupt the main process. For each interrupt process, if there is a request for another interrupt process (multiple interrupts occur) while the corresponding interrupt process is being executed, as long as the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process currently being executed, On the other hand, if the interrupt process has a lower priority level or the same priority level as the interrupt process being executed, the interrupt request is prohibited. That is, each interrupt process is performed with other interrupts having the same or lower priority level prohibited. Then, from each interrupt process, the process returns to the production control side main process with all interrupts permitted. The priority order (priority level) of such interrupt factors is defined by register settings of the production control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<<Reset Start Process>> First, the reset start process of the production control board 200 will be explained. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the reset start process of the production control board 200. In this reset start process, it is started by any of the following: a reset at power-on, a reset caused by various abnormalities, or a reset caused by WDT (runaway detection), and after a security check of the sub-main CPU 201 is performed. , the program starts, and the processing from S601 onward begins.

First, as an initial setting necessary when power is turned on, a start address is set in the stack pointer as an initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Next, as basic hardware settings, an initial value is set in the built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I/O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Furthermore, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the production control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are initialized by clearing to 0. Further, the sub-main CPU 201 loads the control program stored in the ROM 202 into the RAM 203 as appropriate.

Subsequently, interrupts other than the production control command reception interrupt processing are prohibited (S605). Next, a process is performed to set the type of error that should be valid for the model among the various errors set in advance for each model (S606). Further, a request to turn off the production lamps LP (frame lamp 10, panel lamp 80) is made to turn them off completely (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is activated to monitor runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Subsequently, the performance control side main process is executed as the main process of the game performance (S609). The details of this production control side main processing (S609) will be described later using FIG. 81. Note that once the main process on the production control side is entered in step S609, it is normally impossible to return to the reset start process from the main process, but in the unlikely event that the process returns to this process due to a bug in the program, etc. , the device transitions to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is lower than during normal operation.

<<Production Control Side Main Process>> Next, the production control side main process (S609) of the production control board 200 will be explained. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the production control side main processing (S609).

First, in the production control side main processing, an address (starting address where the program is expanded) for starting checking whether the control program is correctly expanded in the RAM 203 is acquired (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

Next, a device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power is turned on (at the start of reset) of the pachinko gaming machine PM, and is used to control the operation of the movable accessory 24 by devices such as motors and solenoids. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the location information required for. Note that, at the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared in order to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is normally executing the program, a predetermined clear word is written to the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within the preset timeout period, and the watchdog timer is activated. Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Subsequently, input port check processing is executed (S615). In this input port check processing, reading of the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) in port input/output processing S912 in the timer interrupt processing described later is monitored every time an interrupt occurs, and monitoring is performed multiple times (for example, four times). If the input port status is all "1", the signal level is set to "1 (H level)", if all the input port states are "0", the signal level is set to "0 (L level)", otherwise the signal level is set to "1 (H level)". Do not change (this establishes the input signal).

Subsequently, error performance management processing is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effects are started by various devices based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Furthermore, in the error performance management process, an initial value (error performance time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error performance. This error management timer is decremented and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the production control side timer interrupt process. If the error management timer times out, the error effect is ended.

Subsequently, a production button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In this performance button monitoring control process, when a button preview performance is incorporated during fluctuations in symbols, the input state of the performance button 15 within a predetermined operation effective time is monitored, and information regarding the input state of the performance button 15 is monitored. hold.

Subsequently, advance notice lottery management processing is executed (S618). In this advance notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern is created that defines the contents of the advance notice effect that occurs at each stage of the decorative pattern variation process, in accordance with the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). It will be decided by lottery. The preview performance pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the preview performance pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Further, an image control command for specifying this preview effect pattern number to the image control board 300 side is generated, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. At this time, if the accessory preview performance pattern is selected as the preview performance pattern, an accessory request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable accessory 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). . In addition, in this example, all of the multiple types of preview performances (notice performance patterns) that occur within one change of the decorative pattern are not selected by lottery within one main loop process, but the efficiency of the main loop processing is improved. In order to do this, the drawing is divided into different timings of the preview performance (for example, fluctuation start stage, ready-to-reach stage, and fluctuation stop stage) and is drawn across multiple main loop processes. At that time, the preview effect that occurs at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern needs to be synchronized with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (send the image control command as soon as possible), so the drawing is performed within the main loop processing of the starter. It is supposed to be done.

Next, device management processing is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is a request for operation of various devices (lamp request, accessory request) in the command analysis process (S620) described later, multiple types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern ), the pattern data corresponding to the performance number (lamp performance number, accessory preview performance number) is specified and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the production lamp LP, lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for one frame drawing process when drawing at about 60 frames per second (=about 60 fps) in the effect display device 70. Similarly, drive pattern data for the movable accessory 24 includes drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is outputted to the target device at regular intervals in the production control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, in the performance control side timer interrupt process described later, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completed, the performance lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. , terminate control of the target device.

Subsequently, command analysis processing (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not a production control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if a production control command is stored, this command is read out, and the read production control command Execute the production control process corresponding to the type. Details of this command analysis process (S620) will be described later using FIG. 93.

Then, during the current loop process, it is determined whether command analysis (analysis of production control commands) has been executed (S621). If the command has just been analyzed (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and moves to the next loop process. On the other hand, if the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), that is, if the command buffer is empty, the effect lottery random number update process is executed until a predetermined time elapses (S622). In this embodiment, the predetermined time is set to 16 ms, which is half the minimum unit (32 ms) of switching control of the lamp LP. In this performance lottery random number update process, various performance lottery random numbers such as a pre-read preview lottery random number, a decorative pattern random number, a variable performance pattern random number, and a preview performance pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command Analysis Process) Next, the command analysis process (S622) will be explained. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the production control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the production corresponding to the type of the stored production control command is performed. Execute control processing.

First, it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). If the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process moves to production state transition processing (S632). In the performance state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the performance mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether a pending related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633
). Here, the reservation related commands include a symbol storage number command and a preliminary determination command. If this hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process moves to hold information management processing (S634). In this pending information management process (S634), a symbol memory number command or a preliminary determination command is read out from the sub-main information storage means 260, a pre-read determination is executed based on the information of the preliminary determination result, and a pending image of the effect display device 70 is executed. Processing is performed to update the display number and display mode (display color, etc.) of pending images displayed on the display unit 710.

Next, it is determined whether a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related commands include a variation start command and a variation stop command. If a symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process moves to a variation effect content determination process (S636). In this variation production content determination process (S636), if the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, a process for starting variation production of decorative symbols is executed, and the received symbol variation related command is a variation stop command. If it is a command, a process is executed to end the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a jackpot performance related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot performance related commands include a jackpot start demonstration performance command, a round performance designation command, and a jackpot end demonstration performance command. If a jackpot performance related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process moves to jackpot performance content determination processing (S638). In this jackpot performance content determination process (S638), processing for executing a start demonstration performance, a round performance, and an end demonstration performance is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a small winning performance related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small win performance related commands include a small win start demonstration performance command and a small win end demonstration performance command. If a small win performance related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process moves to a small win performance content determination process (S640). In this small win performance content determination process (S640), processing for executing a small win start demonstration performance and a small win end demonstration performance is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a winning opening prize-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). Here, the winning opening related commands include the first starting opening winning command, the second starting opening winning command, the operating gate winning command, the big winning opening command, the left general winning opening command, and the right general opening opening command. etc. are included. If this winning opening prize-related command is stored (S641: YES), the process moves to a winning performance content determination process (S642). Details of this winning presentation content determination process (S642) will be described later using FIG. 94.

Subsequently, it is determined whether an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage means 280 (S643). If this error performance designation command is stored (S643: YES), the process moves to error performance content determination processing (S644). In this error performance content determination process (S644), an error performance designation command is read from the sub-information storage means 280, and the error state is notified by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 70, lighting the performance lamp LP, sound from the speaker 11, etc. Determine the error performance pattern for

In addition, if the production control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage means 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO, S643: NO) terminates command analysis processing without doing anything.

(Winning Performance Content Determination Process) Next, the winning performance content determination process (S642) will be explained. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing details of the winning performance content determination process (S642).

First, the first starting opening winning effect control process is executed (S701). In this first starting opening winning effect control process (S701), it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the first starting opening winning command is If it is stored, a first starting port winning performance is executed to notify that the game ball has entered the first starting port 51 on the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, the second starting opening winning effect control process is executed (S702). In this second starting opening winning effect control process (S702), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the second starting opening winning command is If it is stored, a second starting port winning performance is executed to notify that the game ball has entered the second starting port 52 on the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, an activation gate winning effect control process is executed (S703). In this activated gate winning effect control process (S703), it is determined whether or not the activated gate winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the activated gate winning command is stored, On the condition that predetermined performance execution conditions are satisfied, an operating gate winning performance is executed to notify that a game ball has passed through an operating gate 53.

Subsequently, a big winning opening winning presentation control process is executed (S704). In this big winning opening winning performance control process (S704), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and whether or not the big winning opening winning command is stored. If so, a grand prize opening prize presentation is executed to notify that the game ball has entered the prize winning hole 54 on the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, the left general winning opening winning presentation control process is executed (S705). In this left general winning hole winning performance control process (S705), it is determined whether the left general winning hole winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the left general winning hole winning command is If stored, the left general winning hole winning performance is executed to notify that the game ball has entered any of the general winning holes 61 to 63, provided that predetermined performance execution conditions are satisfied. .

Subsequently, right general winning opening winning effect control processing is executed (S706). In this right general winning opening winning effect control process (S706), it is determined whether or not the right general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the right general winning opening winning command is If it is stored, a right general winning hole winning performance is executed to notify that the game ball has entered the general winning hole 64 on the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied.

<Reception Interrupt Process of Production Control Command> Next, the reception interrupt process of production control command will be explained. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the production control command reception interrupt processing. As described above, this production control command reception interrupt process is started when an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various production control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It looks like this. The production control command includes 1 byte of MODE data and 1 byte of EVENT data, and the MODE data and the EVENT data are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the production control board 200 in this order. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the MODE data will also be referred to as a "first command" and the EVENT data will also be referred to as a "second command."

First, when an interrupt occurs based on a strobe signal from the main control board 100, it is determined whether the input value of the production control command has been determined (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice in a row. This is because reading the production control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not confirmed until the same value is read twice in a row.

Next, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the performance lottery random number is obtained from the performance lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the performance lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). In addition, the production lottery random number is acquired at the time of reception of the production control command because the production control command is transmitted at physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning or when the special symbols start changing. Therefore, this is to prevent periodicity in the acquisition timing by using this as an opportunity. By making the acquisition timing of the performance lottery random numbers irregular in this way, inconveniences such as the same performance being unnaturally repeatedly selected in various performance lottery games are less likely to occur.

On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the production control commands are received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether there is any contradiction in the combination of production control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of production control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The saved command data is read out in the above-mentioned command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and a production control process corresponding to the type of production control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Furthermore, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the production control command reception interrupt process is ended and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

<Production Control Side Timer Interrupt Process> Next, the production control side timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the production control side timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular intervals, and is executed by interrupting the above-mentioned production control side main process.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved to the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes from S911 onward are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt processing, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as production control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

Subsequently, port input/output processing is executed (S912). In this port input/output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I/O port circuit 204 are performed. In input processing, various signals input to the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port).

Subsequently, device control data output processing is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined period of time is read out from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. Once the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched at every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, a performance timer update process is executed (S914). In this performance timer update process, the values of various performance timers used for performance operation control are subtracted and updated at each interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The performance timer includes a timer for managing the variation time of decorative symbols, a timer for managing the timing of occurrence of the preview performance, and the like. The performance timer manages the time schedule in the variable performance pattern, and on the time axis, the driving timing of the movable accessory 24, the lighting timing of the performance lamp LP, etc. are managed. Note that the performance timer is also used in device control data output processing (S913), lamp data update processing (S917), etc. within this performance control timer interrupt process.

Subsequently, button control timer update processing is executed (S915). The value of a valid time management timer for managing the valid operation time of the production button 15 is updated by subtracting the value at each interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). Note that the operation valid time is the time during which the operation input of the production button 15 is valid.

Subsequently, task control counter update processing is executed (S916). In this task control counter update process, the value of the task counter ("0" to "15") is updated every timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter is "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a cycle period of 16ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned corresponding to the value of the task counter updated this time, and depending on the value of the task counter, the lamp control task (lamp data update processing in S917), runaway monitoring Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S9189) and an error management task (error management timer update process in S919) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values (0 to 15) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values separated by 8 ms) are used for runaway monitoring. one value is assigned to the error management task (descriptions of other tasks will be omitted). As mentioned above, the reason why the cycle period of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of switching control of the production lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of an image frame, and synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect is realized.

Subsequently, lamp data update processing is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined period of time is read and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) and the like. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the production lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as a serial communication interrupt process, and is realized by sequentially writing lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data in the transmission buffer in 1-byte units and outputs it to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer is empty, so that all lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and this lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

Subsequently, image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, a toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the sub-sub CPU 301 is in the reset state. Note that the toggle signal is a signal with a waveform in which H level/L level are alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, error management timer processing is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error performance timer for managing the error performance time set in the error performance management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after all interrupts are enabled and the saved contents of the register are restored, the performance control side timer interrupt process is ended and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<<Image Control Command Transmission Interrupt Process>> Next, the image control command transmission interrupt process will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing image control command transmission interrupt processing. This image control command transmission interrupt processing occurs at preset regular intervals (500 μs).

In this image control command transmission interrupt process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Next, a read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether the image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not an image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, a read pointer and a write pointer. If the read pointer and write pointer match, it means that no image control command is stored. If the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, image control commands are serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process for the image control command is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

The main effects achieved in the second embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole P54 in excess of the prescribed count number during execution of a special game, an over winning effect is executed, so that an over winning effect is executed. It is possible to clearly notify the player that a problem has occurred, thereby increasing the player's sense of satisfaction and elation from being able to enjoy a special benefit that he or she would not otherwise have been able to obtain. It becomes possible to improve interest.

Further, according to the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole P54 during execution of a special game, a big winning hole winning effect (over winning effect) is performed, and the game ball enters the general winning hole P54. By performing a general prize winning performance (bonus prize winning performance) using the entry of a ball into P64 as an opportunity, the tension is reduced between the large winning prize winning performance and the general prize winning performance performed during the execution of the special game. By adding this, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the performance during the jackpot, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning hole P64 during execution of a special game, a general winning hole winning presentation (bonus winning presentation) is performed, and the big winning hole P54 is This prevents players from becoming only interested in playing the game aiming for the general winning hole P64. It can be expected to increase the chances of entering the game ball into the general winning slot P64, increase the gambling spirit of the player, and make the game even more interesting.As a result, the interest in the game will increase. It becomes possible to improve sexual performance.

Further, according to the second embodiment, by appropriately setting the execution time of the big winning opening count-up performance in relation to the jackpot end demo period and the interval period, the timing at which the big winning opening count-up performance is performed, Regardless of the number of consecutive big winning opening count up performances, etc., this big winning opening count up performance can be completed appropriately without unnecessarily prolonging it, so it is possible to properly complete the big winning opening count up performance without extending it unnecessarily. By clearly setting a break between the variable display after the special game ends, it becomes possible to prevent players from misunderstanding the current gaming situation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible. In particular, by configuring the system so that the total execution time of the big winning opening count-up performance for the specified count number is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, multiple pieces can be played just before the end of the final round game. Even if multiple big winning slot count-up performances are performed consecutively based on the game balls entering the big winning slots in succession, the big winning slot count up performance will not be performed within the jackpot end demo period. It will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect will not be performed beyond the jackpot end demo period and up to the fluctuating display after the end of the special game, and the difference between the end of the special game and the start of the fluctuating display for the first rotation It becomes possible to make the boundaries clear.

Further, according to the second embodiment, when the execution condition for the later big winning hole count up performance is satisfied during the execution of the previous big winning hole count up performance, the previous big winning hole count up performance is executed. By starting the execution of the subsequent big winning opening count-up performance after the completion of the big winning opening count-up performance, it is possible to prevent the processing of the counting performance from becoming complicated, and also to be used as a break between the next two big winning opening count-up performances. By making this clear, the count-up display of the cumulative prize ball count will not be difficult for players to see, and players will be satisfied with the way the cumulative prize ball count increases one after another at a good pace on the screen. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the second embodiment, when an over-winning occurs and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a certain value and an emphasis effect is performed, or when an over-winning occurs in a situation where an emphasis effect is being performed. In this case, by overlappingly executing this emphasis presentation and over winning presentation, the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a certain number at an irregular timing, and the irregular timing when an over winning ball occurs. Since it is possible to clearly inform the player by the appearance of both effects that this is a rare special situation in which the It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the second embodiment, in a situation where a specific error with a relatively high priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing the game occurs, an overwin or a bonus win occurs. In such a case, the execution of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is restricted so that the occurrence of a serious error in the gaming machine is not overlooked. On the other hand, if an over-win or bonus win occurs in a situation where a non-specific error with a relatively low priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing, the over-win performance Even if the bonus winning effect is allowed to be executed, no particular harm will occur; on the contrary, if the error notification effect inhibits the over winning effect, there is a risk that the player's desire to play will be diminished. I am planning to carry out this. In this way, by appropriately notifying the occurrence of the error and the occurrence of over-winning according to the type of error that occurs in the gaming machine, the player's desire to play can be increased without excessively inhibiting the occurrence of over-winning effects. Since the game can be sustained, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the second embodiment, when consecutive games continue, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed not only during the execution of the special game but also in the electric support state after the special game ends. It is expected that players will play the game while expecting to further extend the cumulative number of prize balls during a consecutive game, which will further increase the player's desire to hit the jackpot and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the second embodiment, during execution of the special game, when a game ball enters the general winning hole P64 arranged in the right area PA2, a bonus winning effect is executed, while a bonus winning effect is executed in the left area PA2. By configuring the system so that the bonus winning presentation will not be executed even if a game ball enters the general winning openings P61 to P63 arranged in PA1, the bonus winning presentation will occur randomly, and the bonus winning presentation will instead be performed. It is possible to prevent monotony (falling into a rut), and further enhance the joy of winning a prize in the general prize opening P64, which incidentally occurs as a result of hitting a game ball with the aim of winning a prize in the big prize opening P54. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the second embodiment, when an over winning effect and a bonus winning effect occur at approximately the same time during execution of a special game, the over winning effect and the extra winning effect are executed in duplicate, so that the large winning opening P54 is reached. Since it is possible to clearly inform the player of both over winnings and bonus winnings that occur incidentally as a result of playing the game with the aim of hitting the game ball, it is possible to further enhance the fun of the special game. , it becomes possible to prevent the performance during the jackpot from becoming monotonous, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the second embodiment, while restricting the execution of the over winning performance or the bonus winning performance during the jackpot end demonstration period, the execution of the over winning performance or the bonus winning performance during the interval period immediately after the final round game is restricted. By allowing execution, one of the winning performances (over winning performance or bonus winning performance) will occur in an interruptive manner, even though the special game is notified that it will end during the execution of the jackpot end demonstration. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game performance from lacking a sense of unity as a whole, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the second embodiment, if multiple bonus winnings occur within a predetermined period during the special game, execution of the multiple bonus winning presentations is permitted, while If over-winning occurs multiple times within a predetermined period, only the over-winning effect corresponding to the first over-winning among the multiple over-winnings will be executed, so that the over-winning effect will be guaranteed. It is possible to prevent excessive prize-winning performance from occurring too often and becoming monotonous (getting into a rut), and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the prize ball signal may be output once when one game ball enters the general winning hole P64, but one game ball enters the big winning hole P54. By configuring the system so that the prize ball signal can be output twice when the machine is played, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be displayed on the data display. This information can be notified to the players and used as reference information for the game or as reference information for selecting a game machine, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, the cumulative number of prize balls is notified by numerical information (for example, "1000pt"), but the configuration is not limited to this, and the cumulative number of prize balls is notified by, for example, an icon or a meter. The notification may be configured to be notified using image information.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the count-up effect for the cumulative number of winning balls during a series of games (big winning hole count-up effect, general winning hole count-up effect) was explained as an example, but the present invention is limited to this configuration. The above characteristic structure is applied to the count-up effect (big winning hole count-up effect, general winning hole count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls (number of prize balls during jackpot) during execution of one jackpot game. However, similar effects can be achieved.

[Third Embodiment] Next, a Pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment described above, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. The explanation will be omitted and the different parts will be mainly explained. That is, in the following description, it is possible to apply the same configuration as the second embodiment, except in special cases.

Below, the basic configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be explained in order. The pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment employs a small hit RUSH in which a "small hit" frequently occurs as a result of determining whether a special symbol is correct or not when the gaming state is a latent probability variable gaming state. The gameplay of this small hit RUSH will be described later.

Determination of validity of special symbols according to the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 98 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol validity lottery table of the third embodiment. In the figure, (A) is referred to in a gaming state where the special symbol probability variation function is not operating (low probability state), and (B) is referred to in a gaming state where the special symbol probability variation function is operating (high probability state). ). In this special symbol winning/failure lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning/failure determination (big hit, small hit, miss) are associated. As shown in FIG. 98, when determining the validity of a special symbol, if the probability variation function of the special symbol is in a gaming state (low probability state) in which it is not activated, the random value per special symbol is in the range of "0 to 204". It is a jackpot if the above applies, and if the special symbol probability variation function is activated (high probability state), it is a jackpot if the random number per special symbol falls within the range of 0 to 818. becomes. In other words, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot changes from a low probability of "1/320" to a high probability of "1/80". In this way, the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the gaming state, but the probability of winning the jackpot is designed to be the same depending on whether the first special symbol is correct or not and whether the second special symbol is correct or not. Here, even if the result of the success/failure judgment does not correspond to a jackpot, in the judgment of the second special symbol, a small hit will be won with a relatively high probability of "1/1.1". The probability of winning a small win is designed to be the same regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state). In this third embodiment, a small hit is set only for the judgment of the second special symbol, but for example, a small win may be set for the judgment of the first special symbol, so that the judgment of the first special symbol is more accurate. It may also be configured such that the probability of winning a small hit is higher when determining whether the second special symbol is correct or not.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the result of the judgment of one of the special symbols among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a jackpot, and while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during a variable display of the jackpot), the other one is a jackpot. When the validity determination of the special symbol is executed, it is prohibited to derive a jackpot as a result of the validity determination of the other special symbol, and only a small hit or a miss is derived. If the result of the judgment of the other special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, the result of the judgment of the other special symbol is forcibly replaced with a result of the jackpot. In other words, in the above special symbol winning/failure lottery table, when the special symbol probability variation function is not activated (low probability state), the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204". In this case, if the result of the applicability judgment is forcibly deviated (replaced from jackpot to deviate) and the special symbol probability variation function is activated (high probability state), the special symbol hit randomness occurs. If the numerical value falls within the range of “0 to 818”, the result of the judgment will be forcibly determined to be a failure (replaced from a jackpot to a failure). In addition, as a modified example, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol correctness lottery table, a table for jackpot non-lottery that does not include the jackpot judgment value (random number range) as a result of the special symbol correctness judgment is prepared, and one While the special symbol jackpot variation is being displayed, a small-hit lottery is performed in which the result of the determination is only a small hit or a miss by referring to a table dedicated to non-jackpot lottery processing, instead of the above-mentioned special symbol winning/failure lottery table. method may be adopted. In addition, in this modification, if the specification does not have a small hit set as a result of the success/failure determination, a method of immediately determining the loss may be adopted without performing the success/failure determination.

Next, the jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of the third embodiment will be explained. In this third embodiment, when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is "jackpot", the jackpot type (jackpot symbol, symbol group) is determined with reference to the special symbol jackpot symbol table shown in FIG.

FIG. 99(A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. This first special symbol jackpot symbol table contains the symbol group, jackpot type, prescribed round number of the jackpot game, and opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening P54 for each round for the symbol random number per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stopped symbols is omitted for convenience). Four kinds of jackpot types are set in the first special symbol jackpot table according to each symbol group. Specifically, they are divided into 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D). In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot P54 in one round game is 28 seconds. For 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and the big prize in one round game The opening time (maximum opening time) of the mouth P54 is 28 seconds.

FIG. 99(B) is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, jackpot type, prescribed round number of the jackpot game, and opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening P54 for each round are shown for the random number of symbols per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stopped symbols is omitted for convenience). Five kinds of jackpot types are set in the second special symbol jackpot table according to each symbol group. Specifically, 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), and 2R normal jackpot. (Symbol group I). In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot P54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot P54 in one round game is 28 seconds. For 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening P54 in one round game ) is 28 seconds. In the 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot P54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

Among the various jackpot types, each jackpot except the 2R normal jackpot is an opportunity to execute a long open round game in which the jackpot P54 is opened for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. On the other hand, the 2R normal jackpot refers to a jackpot that triggers a short opening round game in which the jackpot P54 is opened for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the long open round game is a round in which the opening time of the grand prize opening P54 is set to allow or easily enter a specified number of game balls (full count: 15 balls) into the grand prize opening P54. It's a game. The short opening round game is a round game in which the opening time of the big winning hole P54 is set so that it is impossible or difficult to enter a prescribed number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls into the big winning hole P54.

Although not shown, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit, select one small winning symbol (symbol group) from a plurality of types of small winning symbols (symbol group) and select the first small winning symbol (symbol group). 2. At the end of the variable display of special symbols, the selected small winning symbol (symbol group) is to be stopped and displayed. In addition, the opening/closing pattern (opening time, number of openings) of the big winning hole P54 in the small winning game may be configured to differ depending on the type of the small winning symbol.

Next, the gaming state of the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 100 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and production mode in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, a "normal gaming state", a "time-saving gaming state", a "potential gaming state", and a "probability variable gaming state" are set as the plurality of types of gaming states. As for the types of gaming states, (1) the gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability variable state" or "probability variable gaming state", 2) A gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol variation time shortening function are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated is referred to as a "latent probability gaming state (latent probability variable gaming state)" or "latent probability variable state". (3) A gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function does not operate and the special symbol variation time reduction function and electric chew support function operate is referred to as a "time saving state" or "time saving gaming state", (4 ) The state in which all functions are not operating is called the "normal state" or "normal gaming state." Here, it can be said that the "probable variable gaming state", the "potentially certain gaming state", and the "time-saving gaming state" are all gaming states that are more advantageous for the player than the "normal gaming state". In addition, each game state is (1 ) The variable gaming state is the "high probability high base state", (2) the potential gaming state is the "high probability low base state", (3) the time saving gaming state is the "low probability high base state", (4) the normal gaming state. can also be expressed as a "low probability low base state". Here, regarding the function of shortening the variation time of the special symbols, it is only necessary that the variation time of the special symbol which is the main character of the game in at least the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the game state is shortened. In other words, it can be said that the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is activated because the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the gaming state where the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game (normal gaming state). In game states where the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game (time-saving gaming state, potential game state, variable probability game state), it is sufficient that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened.

FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram showing a gaming state setting table in the third embodiment. In the gaming state setting table, a gaming state to which the jackpot game will be transferred after the end of the jackpot game is set for each jackpot type (type of symbol group). In this embodiment, when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is determined by (A) the jackpot type (type of symbol group) and (B) the game at the time of winning the jackpot. It is set according to the state. In addition, the number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) is the number of probability fluctuations (the number of probability fluctuations) that the special symbol's probability fluctuation function activates, and the fluctuation time that the special symbol's fluctuation time shortening function activates. It is set based on the number of reductions (number of time saving operations) and the number of times the electric support function operates (number of times the electric support function operates). Note that "ST" is a period (abbreviation of special time) in which the jackpot probability is set to a high probability up to a specified number of variable display times. In other words, the fixed variable state (probable variable gaming state) is maintained until the specified number of variable displays, but if a jackpot does not occur within the specified number of variable displays, the machine changes to the normal state (normal gaming state). It is called the "ST machine". In this sense, the predetermined number of variable display times is hereinafter also referred to as the "prescribed ST number" or "ST number."

If you win "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" in the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, after the jackpot game ends. A potential gaming state is set as the gaming state. When transitioning to the potential game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations is set to "100 times," the number of times of fluctuation time reduction is "100 times," and the number of electric support is "0 times." This potential gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). If the potential game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

When "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C)" is won in the first special symbol, a variable probability game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. When transitioning to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability variations is set to ``100 times'', the number of variable time reductions is ``100 times'', and the number of electric support is ``100 times''. This variable probability game state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within the specified ST number (100 times). If the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

When the ``4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)'' is won in the first special symbol, a time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. When transitioning to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations is set to "0 times," the number of times of fluctuation time reduction is "70 times," and the number of electric support is "70 times." This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable reaches a specific number (70 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specific number (70 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches a specific number (70 times), a transition is made to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

If you win "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" in the second special symbol, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot The game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the game. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, a fixed variable gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state and the fixed variable gaming state. If the game is in the state or potential gaming state, the potential gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. When transitioning to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability changes is set to ``100 times'', the number of variable time reductions is ``100 times'', and the number of electric support is set to ``100 times''. In the case of transitioning to the state, the number of probability fluctuations is set to "100 times", the number of times of fluctuation time reduction is "100 times", and the number of times of electric support is "0 times". Therefore, the variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). If the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol. Similarly, the potential gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variation reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this prescribed ST number (100 times). If the potential game state ends when the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times), a transition is made to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

When "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H)" is won in the second special symbol, a variable probability game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. When transitioning to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability variations is set to ``100 times'', the number of variable time reductions is ``100 times'', and the number of electric support is ``100 times''. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). If the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

When "2R normal jackpot (symbol group I)" is won in the second special symbol, a time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. When transitioning to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations is set to "0", the number of times of fluctuation time reduction is "70", and the number of electric support is "70". This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches a specific number (70 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specific number (70 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches a specific number (70 times), a transition is made to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

As described above, the occurrence of a jackpot can serve as an opportunity to shift the gaming state, but the occurrence of a small win does not serve as an opportunity to shift the gaming state. In other words, when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a small hit, the final variation display that is the end condition of the game state (for example, the variation display of the 100th rotation in the probability variable game state and the probability game state, the time saving game Except for the 70th rotation of the state (change display), the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit continues as it is, and no transition control of the gaming state is performed using the winning of the small winning as an opportunity. In other words, if the gaming state before the small hit occurs is the normal gaming state, the gaming state during the small winning game and after the small winning game will also be the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the small winning occurs is the time saving gaming state, The gaming state during the small winning game and after the small winning game will also become the time saving gaming state, and if the gaming state before the small winning game is a variable probability gaming state, the gaming state during the small winning game and after the small winning game will also become the variable probability gaming state. If the gaming state before the occurrence of the small winning game is the probable gaming state, the gaming state during the small winning game and after the small winning game will also be the probable gaming state.

Next, the production mode of the third embodiment will be explained. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, a normal mode, a time saving mode, a probability mode, and a probability variable mode are set as multiple types of production modes, and depending on the gaming state (or variable pattern selection state), etc. Then, one of the plurality of performance modes is alternatively set, and a variable performance according to the set performance mode is executed.

Basically, the "normal mode" is set when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the "time saving mode" is set when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, and the "time-saving mode" is set when the gaming state is the potential gaming state. When the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, the "variable probability mode" is set. However, when transitioning to the normal state based on the completion of a non-normal gaming state (time-saving gaming state, potential gaming state, variable probability gaming state), a predetermined number of fluctuation displays will be displayed immediately after the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. In , a special effect mode is set, and when the predetermined number of variable displays are completed, a normal effect mode is set. The predetermined number of times is "four times" as the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This means that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 times". In other words, when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times, it means that the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached "4 times". In addition, as a modification thereof, only the number of variable displays of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number (4 times), or only the number of variable displays of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (4 times). As a trigger, the special mode may be ended (or may be shifted to the normal mode). When one of the production modes is set, a background image (displayed behind the decorative pattern) exclusively for that production mode is displayed on the screen as a production (variable production) that suggests that you are staying in that production mode. background image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the production mode is output from the speaker P11. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each production mode, so it is possible for the player to recognize which production mode the player is currently in based on the type of background image or BGM. ing.

Next, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol of the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 102 is a comparison table of variation times of special symbols in the third embodiment. In addition, in this third embodiment, illustration of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table is omitted, but in reality, similar to the second embodiment, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol is the same as that of the special symbol. It is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table.

(A) in the figure shows the variation time of the special symbols when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" if the result of the judgment is a loss, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" if the result of the judgment is a jackpot. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "1000 seconds" if the result of the judgment is a small hit or a miss, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" if the result of the judgment is a jackpot. ing. That is, regarding the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long variation time (1000 seconds) is set compared to other variation times, except when the result of the judgment is a jackpot.

(B) in the figure shows the variation time of special symbols when the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state, or a potential gaming state. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" if the result of the judgment is a loss, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" if the result of the judgment is a jackpot. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "1 second to 3 seconds" if the result of the judgment is a miss, and is set to "0.5 seconds" if the result of the judgment is a small hit. , if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, it is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds".

Next, the normal symbol lottery in the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram for explaining the normal symbol lottery in the third embodiment. (A) in the figure shows a normal symbol validity lottery table, (B) in the figure shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) in the figure shows a normal electric accessory release pattern table.

As shown in Fig. 103(A), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to "1/1.02" when the electric chew support function (probability variation function of the ordinary symbol) is not activated. When the function (normal symbol probability variation function) is activated, it is set to "1/1.01". Therefore, in the third embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is a low base state or a high base state, a win is derived with an extremely high probability in determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not.

As shown in Figure 103 (B), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is not activated, and the electric chew support When the function (normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is activated, it is set to "0.2 seconds". That is, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is set to be extremely short regardless of whether the gaming state is a low base state or a high base state. In addition, no matter which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (determined display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 second". The fixed stop time (determined display time) of the normal symbol is the time during which the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained).

As shown in Figure 103(C), the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory P522 is as follows: 1 second open → 2 seconds closed → 1 second It is set to "Open → Closed for 2 seconds → Open for 1 second", and when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is activated, it is set to "Open for 5.9 seconds". In other words, as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory P522, in the low base state, the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times, so the total opening time is "3 seconds", and in the high base state, the opening operation is 5.9 seconds. Since the opening operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds".

Next, the simultaneous fluctuation processing (fluctuation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be explained. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous fluctuation processing (fluctuation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) in this embodiment. In this embodiment, by separately and independently executing the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is displayed by the first special symbol display device P71. A specification (a specification called a so-called parallel machine) is adopted in which the variable display of the 2nd special symbol and the variable display of the 2nd special symbol by the 2nd special symbol display device P72 are executed simultaneously in parallel. In other words, by separately and independently digesting the action pending ball of the first special symbol and the action pending ball of the second special symbol, the winning/losing lottery and variable display corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. etc. are performed in parallel. Therefore, even if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a long time, the other special symbol is displayed in parallel with the variable display of the other special symbol. Therefore, while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol will not be delayed. In addition, in the following, regarding the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of the jackpot will be referred to as the "jackpot fluctuation display", the fluctuation display of the small hit will be referred to as the "small hit fluctuation display", and the fluctuation display of the small hit will be referred to as the "small hit fluctuation display". The fluctuating display is referred to as a "missing fluctuating display."

(Variation interruption processing) Here, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one of the special symbols is a jackpot variation display, a small hit variation display, or a loss variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is a small hit fluctuation display, and in a situation where the fluctuation display of one special symbol and the small hit fluctuation display of the other special symbol are being executed in parallel, the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends. If the small hit fluctuation display of the other special symbol ends before, the fluctuation display of one special symbol will continue from the time the small win fluctuation display of the other special symbol ends until the end of that small win game. is interrupted (the measurement of the variation time related to the variation display of one special symbol is interrupted). Note that the term "suspension of the variable display" is used to mean a temporary stop of the variable display (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). Then, when the small winning game of the other special symbol ends, the measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the fluctuation time before restarting and the measurement time of the fluctuation time after restarting. When the total time reaches a preset prescribed variation time (variation time according to the design value), the variation display of one of the special symbols ends.

(Fluctuation forced stop processing) On the other hand, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of one special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is a small hit fluctuation display or a miss fluctuation display. In this case, in a situation where the jackpot fluctuation display of one special symbol and the small hit fluctuation display or loss fluctuation display of the other special symbol are being executed in parallel, the small hit fluctuation display of the other special symbol or If the jackpot fluctuation display of one special symbol ends before the loss fluctuation display ends, the measurement time of the small hit fluctuation display or the loss fluctuation display of the other special symbol is determined by the preset fluctuation time (designed). At the end of the jackpot fluctuation display of one special symbol, the small hit fluctuation display or miss fluctuation display of the other special symbol is forced to be displayed in conjunction with or in synchronization with the end of the jackpot fluctuation display, even before reaching the same price fluctuation time). to be terminated. In addition, when the small hit fluctuation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated, the symbol that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small winning fluctuation display (confirmed display symbol) shall be replaced with a symbol that is removed from the small winning symbol. . That is, the small winning variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the missed variation display (as a result, the small winning game is canceled). Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where the special game (big hit game) in one special symbol competes with the special game (small win game) in the other special symbol. Furthermore, if the fluctuating display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as a jackpot fluctuating display, the fluctuating display of the other special symbol that starts fluctuating later will be other than the jackpot fluctuating display. Change the display to fluctuate (in other words, display the win fluctuate or the small hit fluctuate, and if the win/fail determination process turns out to be a winning random number that corresponds to a jackpot, the win/fail determination result will be forcibly replaced with a win, and the win fluctuate display). is desirable. In addition, if the fluctuating display of one special symbol starts as a jackpot fluctuating display, the fluctuating display of the other special symbol that starts fluctuating later will be a miss fluctuating display (the fluctuating display that corresponds to a jackpot or small hit in the veracity judgment process) If it is a random number, the result of the validity judgment may be forcibly replaced with a failure, and a failure fluctuation display may be performed.

<<Game characteristics of small win RUSH>> Next, the game characteristics of small win RUSH (probability mode) will be explained. In the small hit RUSH (potential mode), when a game ball enters the second starting port P52, small hits occur frequently in determining the validity of the second special symbol, and until the jackpot is won. This is a gameplay that aims to generate winning games continuously and intensively.

When the game state is a potential game state, when the game ball passes through the operating gate P53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1/1.02) in the determination of the correctness of the normal symbol. In this potential game state (low base state), when the normal symbol is determined to be correct or not, the normal electric accessory P522 performs an opening operation for 1 second three times. Therefore, if you hit the right hand aiming at the second starting port P52, it is possible or easy to let the game ball enter the second starting port P52 while the electric accessory P522 is in the open state. be. In addition, in this potential game state, the probability of winning the small hit in the judgment of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (approximately 1/1.1), and the Since the variation time of the 2 special symbols is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a high possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole P52.

At this time, if the game ball enters this second starting hole P52 and wins a small hit while the normal electric accessory P522 performs the opening operation for 1 second three times, the second special symbol The fluctuating display ends in a very short time, and the small winning game starts immediately. Here, the normal electric accessory P522 performs a closing operation for 2 seconds immediately after performing an opening operation for 1 second (excluding the third opening operation). Therefore, after the small winning game has started, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 will be closed while the normal electric accessory P522 is closing for 2 seconds. It is easy to pass through the upper surface of the member P524) and reach the grand prize opening P54. Therefore, during the execution of the small winning game, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member P524 without entering the normal electric accessory P522, and is placed diagonally below the large winning prize. By flowing down toward the opening P54, the ball can enter the big winning opening P54. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability variable gaming state, the game ball is entered into the second starting port P52 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at high frequency until the next jackpot occurs. This provides a gaming experience that allows small winning games to be executed at high frequency. As a result, each time a small winning game is executed, about 2 to 3 game balls enter the big winning hole P54, and by continuously winning about 20 to 30 prize balls each time, the player It becomes possible to advance the game while increasing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, even when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, the probability of winning a small hit is extremely high in determining the validity of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time of the small winning is set to be extremely short. Small winning games are becoming more likely to occur frequently. However, in order to limit the gameplay of small hit RUSH to only the potential game state, and to suppress the increase in the number of balls held due to the small win game for game states other than the potential game state, the following measures have been taken. It is being

Specifically, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, when the gaming ball passes through the activation gate P53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1/1.01) in determining the correctness of the normal symbol. Ru. In this gaming state (high base state), if the normal symbol is determined to be correct or not, the normal electric accessory P522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if you hit the ball to the right while aiming at the second starting port P52, it is extremely easy to let the game ball enter the second starting port P52 while the electric accessory P522 is in the open state. . In addition, even in this time-saving gaming state or variable probability gaming state, the probability of winning a small hit in determining the validity of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (approximately 1/1.1). Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol at the time is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the game ball entering the second starting port P52. expensive.

Here, while the normal electric accessory P522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, if the game ball enters this second starting hole P52 and wins a small hit, the second special symbol The fluctuating display ends in a very short time, and the small winning game starts immediately. At this time, if a small winning game is executed while the normal electric accessory P522 continues to open (while the second starting port P52 is in the open state), it flows down the right area PA2. It is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the opened normal electric accessory P522, and the possibility of reaching the big winning hole P54 is extremely low. On the other hand, if a small winning game is executed after the normal electric accessory P522 is closed (after the second starting port P52 is closed), the subsequent game ball passes through the activation gate P53. The time from when the normal electric accessory P522 opens is set to an extremely short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds), so this ordinary electric accessory P522 that is immediately released It is easier for game balls to enter P522. In other words, during the execution of the small winning game, the normal electric accessory P522 (second starting port P52) is almost left open, and the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 is the ordinary electric accessory in the open state. It is extremely easy for the ball to enter the object P522 (second starting port P52), and it is extremely difficult to enter the big winning port P54 located downstream thereof. Therefore, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state (high base state), even if small hits occur frequently in the judgment of the second special symbol, the game ball will reach the big prize opening P54. The probability is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of balls produced through small winning games.

Also, even when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the probability of winning a small hit is set to an extremely high probability (approximately 1/1.1) in determining the validity of the second special symbol. Since the fluctuation time is set to an extremely long time (more than 10 minutes), even if the player inserts the game ball into the second starting hole P52 and plays a game aiming for a small hit, the second special The efficiency of digesting the symbols is very low, and small winning games cannot be played frequently. In addition, in the predetermined number of fluctuation displays immediately after transitioning to the normal gaming state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set relatively high (second special (The fluctuation time of the symbols will not be extremely long). In other words, the predetermined number of fluctuating displays immediately after transitioning to the normal gaming state (fluctuating displays within 4 rotations) is faster than the fluctuating displays after the predetermined number of fluctuating displays (fluctuating displays after the fifth rotation). The fluctuation time (average value of fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is shortened, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high.

Here, in the third embodiment, while the small hit RUSH (potential mode) is being executed, the cumulative prize ball number is displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 on the screen, and it is possible to inform the player of the cumulative prize ball number. It is composed of If a game ball enters the general winning hole P64 during execution of this small hit RUSH (potential probability mode), the bonus winning effect will not be performed, but the cumulative number of winning balls will be added and displayed (general winning hole count (close-up effect) is configured to be performed. Also, during the execution of this small hit RUSH (potential mode), if the game ball enters the big winning hole P54 in a small winning game where the result of the judgment of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. It is preferable that an additional display of the cumulative number of prize balls (big winning hole count-up effect) be performed. As a modified example, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole P64 during execution of the small winning RUSH (potential probability mode), the bonus winning effect will not be performed and the cumulative number of winning balls will be added and displayed (general winning hole P64). The configuration may also be such that the count-up effect) is not performed.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, by applying the characteristic configuration of the above-described second embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as in the above-described second embodiment, and as a result, the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible to improve the

In addition, as a modification of the third embodiment, the second starting port P52 may be configured as a winning port that is always open. That is, in this modification, the first starting port P51 and the second starting port P52 are configured as non-variable starting ports (always open starting port), and no electric accessory is normally mounted. FIG. 105 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to a modification of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 105, the second starting opening P52 is arranged in the area to the right of the center ornament P21 (right side area PA2), and the big winning opening P54 is arranged diagonally below to the left of the second starting opening P52. The second starting opening P52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch P521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. This second starting opening P52 is a winning opening that is opened upward and is always open, and allows entry of game balls (game balls hit to the right) that mainly flow down the right side area PA2. In other words, the second starting opening P52 also serves as a general winning opening P64 into which game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter at any time, and whether it is in a special gaming state or a non-special gaming state, It is configured so that you can always enter the ball. In this modified example, when a game ball enters the second starting hole P52 (general winning hole P64) during the execution of a special game, a bonus winning effect and an addition display of the cumulative number of winning balls (general winning hole count Close-up effect) will be performed. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting hole P52 (general winning hole P64) during the execution of a special game, only the addition display of the cumulative prize ball number (general winning hole count-up effect) is performed, and the bonus is not displayed. It may be configured such that no prize-winning presentation is performed. In addition, even if a game ball enters the second starting hole P52 (general winning hole P64) during the execution of the small hit RUSH (probability mode), the bonus winning effect will not be performed and the cumulative number of winning balls will be added and displayed. (General winning hole count-up performance) may also be configured so as not to be performed.

[Fourth Embodiment] Next, a Pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment described above, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. The explanation will be omitted and the different parts will be mainly explained. That is, in the following description, it is possible to apply the same configuration as the second embodiment, except in special cases.

[Main Control Display Device] FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram showing the main control display device P27 of the fourth embodiment. The main control display device P27 is an LED display device whose lighting is controlled by the main control board P100, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board P20. As shown in FIG. 106, this main control display device P27 includes a first special symbol display device P71, a second special symbol display device P72, a first special symbol retention lamp P73, a second special symbol retention lamp P74, and a normal symbol. Various display means such as a display device P75, a normal symbol holding lamp P76, a round indicator light P77, a status indicator light P78, a right-handed indicator light P79, and an error indicator light Er are provided.

The first special symbol display device P71 is composed of eight LED segments G to N, and the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED segment, and when the blinking of the LED segment stops, it is displayed as being lit. By switching to , the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed. More specifically, the variable display of the first special symbol is such that only LED segments M and N are blinking, and the other LED segments are off, and the final display of the first special symbol is a state in which only the LED segments M and N are blinking, and the final display of the first special symbol is a state in which the determination of validity is made. If the result is a loss, only the LED segments M and N are lit and the other LED segments are off, and if the result of the judgment is a win, depending on the type of special game to be executed. LED segments The combination of lighting and turning off of LED segments G to N is different (for example, in the case of a 4R jackpot, the LED segments G to N are turned on, turned on, turned on, turned off, turned off, turned on, turned on, turned on, and turned off. - Lights on, lights off, lights on, lights on, lights on, lights on, lights off, and if it is a 16R jackpot, the LED segments G to N will light on, light on, light on, light on, light on, light on, light on, light on, or light on and off. - Lights on, lights off, lights on, lights off, lights on, lights off). Note that each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The second special symbol display device P72 is composed of eight LED segments Q to X, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED segment, and when the blinking of the LED segment stops, it is displayed as being lit. By switching to , the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed. More specifically, the variable display of the second special symbol is such that only the LED segments W and If the result is a loss, only the LED segments W and LED segments The combination of lighting and turning off of LED segments Q to X is different (for example, in the case of a 4R jackpot, the LED segments Q to・Light on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn off, turn off, and if it is a 16R jackpot, the LED segments Q to X will turn off, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn off, or turn on and off.・Lights on, lights off, lights off, lights on, lights off, lights off). Note that each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The first special symbol holding lamp P73 is composed of two LED segments O and P, and displays the number of active balls (maximum 4) of the first special symbol by lighting, blinking, and turning off the LED segments. Similarly, the second special symbol holding lamp P74 is composed of two LED segments Y and Z, and displays the number of balls (maximum 4) of the second special symbol activated by lighting, blinking, and turning off the LED segments. do. More specifically, if one LED segment is off, it shows 0, if it is blinking, it shows 1, and if it is lit, it shows 2, and the combination of 2 in each display shows 0. (For example, if LED segment O is lit and LED segment P is lit, this indicates that the number of pending special symbols is 4, and the LED segment When O is blinking and the LED segment P is off, it indicates that the number of reserved first special symbols is 1). Note that each LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The normal symbol display device P75 is composed of one LED segment C, and performs variable display and fixed display of normal symbols. More specifically, the fluctuating display of a normal symbol is a state in which the LED segment C is blinking, and the confirmed display of a normal symbol is a state in which the LED segment C is turned off if the result of the judgment is wrong. If the result of the determination is a win, the LED segment C is lit. Note that this LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The normal symbol holding lamp P76 is composed of two LED segments A and B, and displays the number of normal symbols operating and pending (up to 4) by lighting and blinking the LED segments. More specifically, if one LED segment is off, it shows 0, if it is blinking, it shows 1, and if it is lit, it shows 2, and the combination of 2 in each display shows 0. (For example, if LED segment A is lit and LED segment B is lit, this indicates that the number of reserved symbols is 4, and LED segment A is lit. When the display is blinking and the LED segment B is off, it indicates that the number of pending symbols is 1.) Note that each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The round indicator light P77 is composed of a left indicator light 67a and a right indicator light 67b, and displays the number of executions of the round game in the special game (regular round number: the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously). The left indicator light 67a is composed of two LED segments, and the right indicator light 67b is composed of seven LED segments, and the specified number of rounds of the special game is displayed by the combination of lighting displays of each LED segment (for example, Of the seven LED segments of the right indicator light 67b, when only the central LED segment is turned off and the other LED segments are turned on, that is, the upper, upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right, and lower If six LED segments are turned on, a combination of "0" will be displayed). For example, when the round indicator light P77 lights up and displays the number "10" (in other words, the left indicator light 77a, which is the indicator light that shows the second digit of the round number, lights up and displays the combination that shows the number "1") and the right indicator light 77b, which is the indicator light indicating the first digit of the number of rounds, is lit in a combination indicating the numerical value of "0"), the specified number of rounds of the special game is 10 (10 rounds). It is shown that something is true. Note that each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The status indicator light P78 is composed of two LED segments D and E, and the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol are indicated by the lighting display of the LED segment. . Note that each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The right-hand hitting instruction light P79 is composed of one LED segment F, and the lighting display of the LED segment indicates the game state in which the game ball should be fired aiming at the right side of the gaming area PA (the game state in which the game ball should be hit right). Displays whether it exists or not. More specifically, in a game state such as a high base state or a special game state in which the game ball should be fired at the right side of the game area PA (a game state in which the game ball should be hit to the right), the LED segment F lights up and displays. , when the game state is a game state in which the game ball should be fired aiming at the left side of the game area PA (a game state in which the game ball should be hit to the left) such as a low base state (non-special game state), the LED segment F is displayed as extinguished. Note that this LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

The error indicator light Er is composed of one LED segment Er, and the lighting display of the LED segment Er notifies the occurrence status of an error in the gaming machine PM (whether or not an error has occurred). More specifically, when an error has occurred, the LED segment Er is turned on, and when no error has occurred, the LED segment Er is turned off. However, if a specific error occurs, the LED segment Er may turn off (for example, if the first or second error mentioned above occurs, the LED segment Er turns on, but If a third error or an error related to the setting function described later (an error that occurs when the setting value is out of range or when the setting change state is terminated without confirming the setting change) occurs, the LED segment (Er goes out, etc.) Note that this LED segment may be called an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

[Winning-related performance] Next, the winning-related performance of the fourth embodiment will be described. The winning-related performance is a performance executed based on the game ball entering the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64 during execution of the jackpot game. This prize-winning-related presentation includes a grand prize-winning presentation and a general prize-winning presentation, similarly to the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 60, etc.).

<Big winning slot winning performance> The big winning opening winning performance is a performance that is executed when a game ball enters the big winning opening P54 during execution of a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 60, the grand prize opening presentation includes a large prize opening normal winning presentation, a large prize opening over winning presentation, and a large winning prize count-up presentation. The contents of this big winning opening performance (big winning opening normal winning performance, big winning opening over winning performance, big winning count up performance) have already been explained in detail in the second embodiment, so the basic explanation is as follows. Omitted. In addition, below, as a condition for executing the big winning opening over winning presentation (over winning presentation), the game ball that exceeds the specified count number during the execution of one round game (in this example, the 11th and subsequent game balls) ) enters the big winning hole P54 and the excess game balls are effectively detected by the big winning hole switch P541 (in other words, an over winning occurs) as an "over winning effect execution condition". Also called. In addition, as mentioned above, the grand prize count-up effect is an effect display in which the number of prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls into the grand prize hole P54 is added up and displayed in order in a count-up format. The winning hole count-up effect is not limited to one in which the number of prize balls is counted up one by one, but may be one in which the number of prize balls is counted up and displayed in increments of 2 or more (for example, 1 to the grand prize hole P54). If the number of prize balls for each ball that enters is 15, you may display a count up of 15 balls at once like 0 balls → 15 balls, or 0 balls → 3 balls → 6 balls → 9 balls. → 12 pieces → 15 pieces may be divided into 15 pieces by a predetermined number (here, "5") and a count-up display may be performed), or a random number (for example, when entering the grand prize opening P54) If the number of prize balls for one entered ball is 15, the order is 0 → 23 → 45 → 11 → 64 → 32 → 15, and the first 0 and the last 15 Otherwise, it may be a display that only indicates that the numbers are changing) and a count-up display (the same applies to the second and third embodiments described above). In addition, in the following, except for special cases, (a) the game ball enters the grand prize opening P54, (b) the game ball enters the grand prize opening P54, and (c) the game ball enters the grand prize opening P54. being detected by the grand prize opening switch P541, (d) the main control board P100 transmitting the grand prize opening winning command, and (e) the production control board P200 receiving the grand winning opening winning command, are used interchangeably.

<General winning hole winning presentation> The general winning hole winning presentation is a presentation that is executed when a game ball enters the general winning hole P64. As shown in FIG. 60, the general winning opening performance includes a general winning opening normal winning performance and a general winning count-up performance. The contents of this general winning opening performance (general winning opening normal winning performance, general winning count-up performance) have already been described in detail in the second embodiment, so a basic explanation will be omitted. In addition, in the following, except for special cases, (a) the game ball enters the general winning hole P64, (b) the game ball enters the general winning hole P64, and (c) the game ball enters the general winning hole P64. It is detected by the right general winning opening switch P641, (d) the main control board P100 transmits the right general winning opening winning command, and (e) the production control board P200 receives the right general winning opening winning command. and are used interchangeably.

<Characteristics of winning-related performances> Next, features of the winning-related performances (big winning opening winning presentation, general winning opening winning presentation) of the fourth embodiment will be described. Note that the components of the winning-related performance of this fourth embodiment and the components of the winning-related performance of the second embodiment described above may be combined as appropriate, and when combining these, any of the components It is also possible to omit, replace, or change part or all of.

<<Emphasis production of cumulative award pitch count>> First, an emphasis production (emphasis display) of cumulative award pitch count of the fourth embodiment will be described. As mentioned above, the emphasis effect is when the game ball enters the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64 during the execution of the jackpot game, and the value of the cumulative prize ball number reaches a predetermined specific value. This is a performance that informs the public.

FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of emphasis effect. As shown in FIG. 107, the emphasis effect (emphasis display) is to display an emphasis display image (in the illustrated example, "2500 pt achieved") in the emphasis display area P735 at the center of the screen, which indicates that the value of the cumulative award ball count has reached a specific value. ). The highlighted display image "2500 pt achieved" in the illustrated example includes the characters "2500 pt" which corresponds to the specific value (2500) achieved by the value of the cumulative award ball count, and a display indicating that this specific value has been reached. This is an image that combines the words "achievement". This highlighted display image can be displayed separately and independently from the cumulative award pitch count display (cumulative award pitch count display image) displayed in the cumulative award pitch count display area P733 of the screen, and this highlighted display image can be displayed independently. During this period, the highlighted display image and the cumulative award pitch count display (cumulative award pitch count display image) coexist. Note that in this embodiment, the details will be described later, but since the execution time of the highlighting effect (the display time of the highlighted image) is set to "3 seconds", when the highlighted image appears on the screen, This highlighted display image and the cumulative award pitch count display (cumulative award pitch count display image) are displayed simultaneously for only 3 seconds.

The emphasis effect is executed when a predetermined execution condition (referred to as "emphasis effect execution condition") is satisfied during execution of the jackpot game. This emphasis performance execution condition is established when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter mentioned above reaches a predetermined specific value. This specific value is a numerical value corresponding to a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (2500). That is, each time the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value (2500, 5000, 7500, 10000...) of the predetermined number of prize balls, the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied, and it is determined that the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied. Emphasis will be given based on this.

FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram showing an emphasis effect pattern table. This emphasis effect pattern table is referred to when selecting an emphasis effect pattern (display pattern of an emphasis display image) to be displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 108, in this emphasis performance pattern table, the value (specific value) of the cumulative award pitch counter, the determined emphasis performance pattern, and its display content are associated. In this embodiment, when the value of the cumulative prize pitch counter reaches "2500", the emphasis effect pattern PK1 is executed in which a highlighted display image showing the words "2500 pt achieved" is displayed on the screen in an enlarged manner, and the cumulative prize pitch count is When the value of the counter reaches "5000", the emphasis effect pattern PK2 is executed, in which a highlighted display image showing the words "5000pt achieved" is enlarged and displayed on the screen, and the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "7500". Then, the emphasis effect pattern PK3 is executed, in which a highlighted image showing the words "7500pt achieved" is enlarged and displayed on the screen, and when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "10000", the screen displays the message "10000pt achieved". When the highlighting effect pattern PK4 in which the highlighted image showing the text is displayed in an enlarged manner is executed and the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "12500", the highlighted display image showing the text "12500 pt achieved" is enlarged and displayed on the screen. When the value of the cumulative award pitch counter reaches ``15,000'', the emphasis effect pattern PK6 is executed, in which a highlighted image showing the words ``Achieved 15,000 pts'' is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Ru. In addition, in FIG. 108, only six types of emphasis effect patterns PK1 to PK6 are shown, but even after the emphasis effect pattern PK6 is executed, the value of the cumulative award ball number counter is a multiple of the predetermined number of award balls ( 17500, 20000, 22500...), the emphasis effect pattern corresponding to the multiple value is executed. In addition, as an emphasis effect pattern, each emphasis effect pattern corresponding to a multiple of 2500 exists until the value of the cumulative award ball number counter reaches a multiple value (97500) of the predetermined number of award balls, but after that, The emphasizing effect pattern may be configured not to be executed even if the value of the cumulative prize ball number counter reaches a multiple value (for example, 100,000, 102,500, etc.) of the predetermined number of prize balls. Furthermore, after the value of the cumulative award pitch counter reaches the multiple value (97500) of the predetermined award pitch number, the value of the cumulative award pitch counter becomes a value different from the multiple value of the predetermined award pitch number (99999). A special emphasis effect pattern such as "achieving 99999 points" is displayed only once, and after that, the value of the cumulative prize ball counter will change to a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 100,000 or 102,500). etc.), the emphasis effect pattern may not be executed. By configuring it in this way, while reducing the number of types of emphasizing effect patterns (in other words, while configuring the structure so that an endless number of types of emphasizing effect patterns are not prepared), it is possible to expect to win prize balls during consecutive games, which will be described later. It is possible to make it possible to always execute the emphasizing effect until the prize ball is obtained which greatly exceeds the value (for example, 10 times).

Here, in this embodiment, among the plurality of types of emphasis performance patterns described above, two consecutive emphasis performance patterns are configured so as not to be executed overlappingly. In other words, among two consecutive emphasis performance patterns, the execution period or execution timing of one emphasis performance pattern (for example, emphasis performance pattern PK1) and the execution period or execution timing of the other emphasis performance pattern (for example, emphasis performance pattern PK2) (including cases where the execution periods of both do not overlap entirely and cases where part of the execution periods of both do not overlap). Here, suppose that among two consecutive emphasis performance patterns, during the execution of one emphasis performance pattern (for example, emphasis performance pattern PK1), the execution condition of the other emphasis performance pattern (for example, emphasis performance pattern PK2) is satisfied ( For example, when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches 5000), the other emphasis effect pattern may not be executed even if the execution condition is satisfied so as not to make the display contents complicated. As a modified example, suppose that, during the execution of one of two consecutive emphasis performance patterns (for example, emphasis performance pattern PK1), the execution condition of the other emphasis performance pattern (for example, emphasis performance pattern PK2) is satisfied. (For example, when the value of the cumulative prize pitch counter reaches 5000), the execution of one emphasizing effect pattern is forcibly terminated and the other emphasizing effect pattern is executed instead so that the display contents do not become complicated. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the display size of the highlighted image (emphasized effect display) on the screen may be changed as appropriate depending on the type of each emphasized effect pattern. That is, the display size of the highlighted display image (emphasized effect display) may be configured to differ depending on the type of each highlighted effect pattern. For example, in order to prevent the highlighted image (enlarged image) from running off the screen as the number of digits of the cumulative number of awarded pitches shown by the highlighted image increases, If the number exceeds a predetermined number, the size of the highlighted image may be reduced. As a modified example, for the emphasis performance pattern when the value of the cumulative award pitch counter reaches a multiple value (10000, 20000, 30000...) of the specific award pitch number (for example, 10000), other emphasis production In order to make the degree of blessing for the player stronger than the pattern (to make the player feel even more blessed), the display size of the highlighted display image (highlighted effect display) may be increased, and the execution time of the highlighted effect may be changed. It may be longer (for example, 5 seconds instead of 3 seconds).

<<Special Effects of Emphasizing Performance>> Next, special effects performed in conjunction with the occurrence of the emphasizing performance will be described. In this embodiment, when an emphasis effect is executed during execution of a jackpot game, a special effect is applied to the highlighted display image (a predetermined effect is added) at the start and end of the emphasis effect. An effect display (also simply referred to as a "special effect" or simply an "additional effect" or an "additional display") is performed, and a specific sound effect is used to aurally notify the start and end of the emphasis effect. Output is done.

Special effect display includes special effect display in which the highlighted image itself is transformed (scaled, reversed, moved, etc.) or changed (color tone change, brightness change, color/black and white switching, etc.) to produce a special effect, and highlighted display. There is a special effect display in which an image different from the image gives a visual effect to the display of the highlighted image. In this embodiment, the special effect display includes a fade-in display in which the highlighted image gradually appears, a fade-out display in which the highlighted image gradually disappears, and a specific effect image (for example, a large number of small There are effect displays that display star images, charged images, etc.). Mainly, effect display and fade-in display are executed when a highlighted image appears, and fade-out display is executed when a highlighted image is erased (effect display is not executed when a highlighted image is erased). Note that as a modification of this embodiment, a special effect display may be performed only at the start or end of the emphasis effect. Further, as a special effect display, a hidden display in which a blurred image or a mosaic image is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the highlighted display image may be performed.

The specific sound effect is a specific sound effect that is output at the start and end of the emphasis performance. These specific sound effects include specific sound effect A (e.g., the sound of "boom") that is output almost simultaneously at the start of the emphasis effect, and specific sound effect B (e.g., "pico") that is output approximately at the same time as the end of the emphasis effect. There is a voice that says. As a modification, a specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) may be output at the start of the emphasis performance, and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) may not be output at the end of the emphasis performance. Conversely, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) may be output at the end of the emphasis performance, and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) may not be output at the start of the emphasis performance. In addition, as another modification, a specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) that is output at the start of the emphasis performance and a specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) that is output at the end of the emphasis performance can be performed using the same sound. may be configured. In addition, if the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) that is output at the start of the emphasis performance and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) that is output at the end of the emphasis performance are to be the same sound, both The output level (audio level) of the audio may be the same, or the output level (audio level) of both audio may be different (for example, the output level of specific sound effect A may be lower than the output level of specific sound effect B). (or the output level of specific sound effect B may be made higher than the output level of specific sound effect A). Note that it is preferable to configure the specific sound effects A and B so that they fade out (gradually lower the volume) toward the end of the output. It can strengthen the impact. In such a configuration, by configuring the specific sound effects A and B to fade in (gradually increase the volume) immediately after the output starts, their impact can be further strengthened. In such a configuration, it is more effective to make the fade-out period (e.g. 1 second) longer than the fade-in period (e.g. 0.3 seconds) (instantly raise the volume to maximum volume and then gradually increase the volume). (This allows the volume to be lowered gradually.)

Next, the execution timing of the emphasis effect, the special effect display, and the output of the specific sound effect during the execution of the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 109 is a time chart showing the execution timing of emphasis production, special effect display, and output of specific sound effects during execution of the jackpot game.

First, after the jackpot game is started, at timing T1, the execution period of the jackpot start demonstration ends, and the display of the cumulative prize ball number is started. Next, at timing T2, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value, execution of the emphasis effect is started. At the start of this emphasis performance, a special effect display (effect display in the illustrated example) that applies a special effect to the appearance of the emphasis display image is performed, and a specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) that notifies the start of the emphasis performance. is output. Next, at timing T3, the execution of the emphasis effect ends. At the end of this emphasis performance, a special effect display (fade-out display in the illustrated example) is performed to apply a special effect to the disappearance of the emphasis display image, and a specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) notifying the end of the emphasis performance is performed. is output. Then, at timing T4, the cumulative prize ball number display ends, and thereafter, the current jackpot game ends. Note that, as shown in FIG. 109, at the start (timing T1) and end (timing T4) of the cumulative prize ball count display, no special effect display is performed to apply special effects to the cumulative prize ball count display. Also, no special sound effects are output to notify the start and end of the cumulative award pitch count display. In addition, in this time chart, the output period of the specific sound effect and the execution period of the special effect display at timings T2 and T3 are shown as approximately the same period, but the output period of the specific sound effect is longer than the execution period of the special effect display. It may be longer than . By configuring it in this way, the visibility of the emphasis effect (visibility of the display regarding the number of prize balls won) is not obstructed more than necessary by the special effect display, while the special effect display does not interfere with the visibility. By continuing to output even after the execution of the effect display ends, the auditory blessing period for the player is extended, and a synergistic effect between visual and auditory blessings can be expected. . In addition, in this time chart, the output period of the specific sound effect at timing T2 is shown as being shorter than the execution period of the emphasis effect, but it is the same as (or approximately the same as) the execution period of the emphasis effect or is shorter than the execution period of the emphasis effect. It may also be a long period of time. In addition, in this time chart, the start timing of the specific sound effect and the start timing of the special effect display at timing T2 are shown as timing earlier than the start timing of the emphasis effect, but they are shown as the same timing (or almost the same timing). Good too. In addition, in this time chart, the end timing of the specific sound effect and the end timing of the special effect display at timing T3 are shown as timing later than the end timing of the emphasis effect, but they are shown as the same timing (or almost the same timing). Good too.

<<Execution time of emphasis effect>> Next, the execution time of the emphasis effect will be explained. FIG. 110 is a time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the emphasis effect and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration.

The execution time of the emphasis effect is the time from when the display of the emphasis display image (enlarged display image) of the cumulative number of prize pitches starts until it ends. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the execution time of the emphasis effect is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. Specifically, similar to the second embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" for all jackpot types (jackpot games), and the execution time of the emphasis performance is set to "20 seconds". It is set to "3 seconds" which is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. In this embodiment, no matter which one of a plurality of types of emphasis performance patterns (emphasis performance patterns PK1 to PK6 in the illustrated example of FIG. 108) is executed, this emphasis performance is The execution time is set to "3 seconds". As a modified example, the execution time of the emphasis effect may be made different depending on the type of the emphasis effect pattern. For example, the larger the value of the cumulative number of prize balls that is the target of this emphasis effect display (enlarged display), the longer the emphasis effect becomes. The execution time may be set to be long (it may be set so that the execution time tends to be long). As mentioned above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from when the interval time (interval period) set after the end of the final round game of the jackpot game has passed until the jackpot game ends. It is. That is, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration does not include the interval time (interval period) provided after the end of the final round game. Note that this interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds", and is not provided only after the end of the final round of the jackpot game, but between each round game (for example, between the first round and It should be noted that the period during the second round and between the fifth and sixth rounds during which the big prize opening P54 is closed is also an interval time (interval period). The interval time after the end of the final round game is the remaining time ( grace period). On the other hand, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is a jackpot that is separated from the final round game in which there is no possibility that the entry of a game ball into the jackpot P54 will be effectively detected within the execution time. This is set as a preparation period for the game after the game ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, by setting the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo (20 seconds), the accumulated prize balls are displayed just before the end of the final round game. Even when the emphasis performance is executed in response to the number reaching a specific value, the emphasis performance is configured to be completed before the jackpot end demonstration ends. As a result, even if the emphasis performance is executed just before the end of the final round game, the emphasis performance will be performed beyond the end of the jackpot game and up to the variable display after the end of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to clearly define the break between the end of the jackpot game and the start of the first rotational fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot game. Further, for example, when the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the big winning hole P54 at the specified count number (here, the 10th count) in the final round game of the jackpot game, In order to satisfy the end condition of the final round game almost at the same time as the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied, the final round game ends and a 2 second interval period starts, and this 2 second interval period During this period, at least a part of the emphasis will be executed, and for this "at least part", it will be possible to confirm the display regarding the number of prize balls, such as "achieving 2500 pt" in the emphasis. Specifically, at the start of the execution of the emphasizing effect, a special effect display is executed and a display related to the number of prize balls such as "2500 pt achieved" is displayed, but when the number of balls is the specified count number in the final round of the jackpot game. When the emphasis effect is executed during the interval period triggered by the entry of the game ball into the winning hole P54, the display regarding the number of prize balls can be visually recognized after the special effect display is performed within the interval period. In other words, the display of the number of prize balls can be visually confirmed before the jackpot end demonstration starts). With this configuration, it is possible to check which pattern the emphasized presentation was (which number of prize balls was achieved) before the start of the jackpot end demo period in which the presentation regarding the end of the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a flow of performance that does not feel strange and follows the progress of the jackpot game.

Note that the execution time of the emphasis performance may be set to be longer than the interval time provided between each round or between the final round game and the jackpot end demonstration. In addition, if the emphasis effect is not completed by the end of the round game, the emphasis effect will be forcibly terminated at the end of the round game, at the start of the interval period after the end of the round game, or at the start of the end demo. It may be configured to do so.

<<Execution timing of emphasizing effect, light emitting effect, and accessory effect>> Next, the execution timing of the emphasizing effect, light emitting effect, and accessory effect will be explained. FIG. 111 is a time chart showing the execution timing of the emphasis effect, the light emission effect, and the accessory effect.

While the emphasis effect is being executed, the frame lamp P10 lights up or blinks in a special light emission mode. Examples of this special light emission mode include a mode in which the light is displayed in a special light emission color such as a rainbow color, or a mode in which the special light emission color is displayed blinking at a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval). . As a modification of this special light emitting mode, a mode may be adopted in which the light is displayed in a predetermined light emitting color such as blue and blinking at a blinking interval shorter than a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval). Further, during execution of the emphasis effect, the board lamp P25 provided on the game board P20 (center decoration P21) may be configured to light up or blink in a special light emission mode. Furthermore, during execution of the emphasis effect, the frame lamp P10 may be displayed lit or blinked in a special light emission mode, and the board lamp P25 may be displayed lit or blinked in a special light emission mode. In other words, during the execution of the emphasis effect, the lighting display or blinking display using the special light emitting mode of the frame lamp P10 and the lighting display or blinking display using the special light emitting mode of the panel lamp P25 are performed almost simultaneously (in parallel). (including a case where the light emitting periods of both lamps P10 and P25 entirely overlap and a case where a part of the light emitting periods of both lamps P10 and P25 overlap). Further, even if the emphasis effect is executed, some of the frame lamps P10 may be configured so that they are not displayed in a special light emission mode, such as lighting or blinking. Specifically, when the frame lamp P10 is configured to include a frame lamp A (for example, a top lamp), a frame lamp B (for example, a side lamp), and a frame lamp C (for example, a spherical dish lamp), these If an emphasis effect is executed in a situation where the frame lamps A to C are lit or blinking in the normal light emission mode, some of the frame lamps A to C will be While the other lamps are lit or blinking in the special light emission mode (the light emission mode switches from the normal light emission mode to the special light emission mode), the other lamps are displayed on or blinking in the normal light emission mode (the light emission mode is switched from the normal light emission mode to the special light emission mode). It may also be configured so that it is maintained in In that case, the lamp mounted on the production button P15 (production button lamp) will also be lit or blinked in the normal lighting mode regardless of whether or not the emphasis production is executed (the lighting mode will be maintained in the normal lighting mode). ) is preferred. Similarly, even if the emphasis effect is executed, some lamps of the panel lamps P25 may be configured not to be displayed in a special light emission mode such that they are not lit or blinked. Specifically, when the panel lamp P25 is configured to include a panel lamp A and a panel lamp B, in a situation where these panel lamps A and B are lit or blinking in a normal light emitting mode, the highlighted When the effect is executed, one of the panel lamps A and B will be lit or blinked in a special light emission mode while this emphasis effect is being executed (the light emission mode changes from the normal light emission mode to the special light emission mode). On the other hand, the other lamp may be configured to be lit or blinked in the normal light emission mode (the light emission mode is maintained in the normal light emission mode).

Further, while the emphasis effect is being executed, a later-described accessory lamp (an LED lamp provided on the movable accessory P24) lights up or blinks in a predetermined light emission mode. Examples of this predetermined light emitting mode include lighting display with a predetermined light emitting color such as blue, or a mode in which the predetermined light emitting color and blinking at a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval) are displayed.

In addition, when an error occurs in the gaming machine, the frame lamp P10 and the later-described accessory lamp are lit or blinked in an error light emission mode. Examples of this error light emission mode include a mode in which a specific light emission color such as red is displayed by lighting or blinking. In addition, when displaying this frame lamp P10 or the accessory lamp described below blinking in a specific luminous color, it may be displayed blinking at a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval), or it may be blinking at a shorter interval than this predetermined interval. It may be displayed blinking at intervals. When an error occurs in the gaming machine in this way, the frame lamp P10 and the accessory lamps described below turn on or blink in an error lighting mode that is different from the predetermined lighting mode and the special lighting mode, so that the gaming machine It is possible to accurately notify that an error is occurring.

Furthermore, while the emphasis effect is being executed, an accessory effect in which a specific movable accessory P24 is driven in a predetermined motion mode is executed. As shown in FIG. 1, the movable accessory P24 is a logo accessory formed into a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape using a translucent resin material. On the front side of the movable accessory P24, a logo-shaped decoration section is provided, which is a stylized version of the title of the game machine, for example. An accessory lamp is mounted inside the movable accessory P24 to illuminate a decorative portion formed on the front side. The accessory lamp is configured to include a plurality of light emitting bodies arranged in a matrix, for example. As the light emitter, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is suitably used. This movable accessory P24 is configured such that the entire decorative portion on the front side is displayed by emitting light when the accessory lamp emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern.

The accessory performance of this embodiment can be performed by combining the performance operation of the movable accessory P24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp. In other words, the accessory performance is configured as a performance in which the performance operation of the movable accessory P24 (accessory movable performance) and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (accessory light emission performance) can be performed in combination.

The movable accessory performance is a performance in which the movable accessory P24 performs a performance action according to a predetermined performance movement pattern. This accessory movable performance is based on the premise that the initialization operation at power-on has been completed, and the movable accessory P24 is operated (in a predetermined position) during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols or during the jackpot game. (including holding or stopping), this is mainly done for the purpose of producing a visual presentation effect. This accessory movable effect includes, for example, a descending motion that lowers the movable accessory P24 from the initial position to a predetermined movable position, and a lowering motion that lowers the movable accessory P24 to a predetermined movable position (for example, the front of the screen which is the position after the descending motion). This is an effect that includes a holding motion in which the movable accessory P24 is stopped and held at the predetermined movable position for a predetermined time, and a rising motion in which the movable accessory P24 is raised from the predetermined movable position to the initial position.

The accessory light emitting performance is a performance in which the accessory lamp of the movable accessory P24 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. In this embodiment, the light emission patterns (light emission modes) of the accessory lamp are light emission pattern 1 (white light emission), light emission pattern 2 (blue light emission), light emission pattern 3 (yellow light emission), and light emission pattern 4 (rainbow light emission, i.e. gradation light emission of multiple colors) is set, and one light emission pattern is selected from the plurality of light emission patterns 1 to 4 (all of these light emission patterns are in a blinking mode). Note that, as described above, when the accessory lamp emits light during execution of the emphasis effect, the light emission pattern 2 is selected. In other words, the predetermined light emission mode of the accessory lamp corresponds to light emission pattern 2 (blue light emission). Here, the light emission pattern of the accessory lamp is related to the high expectation of jackpot, and in the case where the accessory lamp emits light while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the light emission pattern 1 (white light emission) < the light emission pattern 2 ( The jackpot expectation level is set to increase one step at a time in the following order: blue light emission) < light emission pattern 3 (yellow light emission) < light emission pattern 4 (rainbow light emission). Note that the lighting pattern of this accessory lamp is just an example, and one lighting pattern may be configured to emit light in multiple colors, or lighting patterns with different flashing times may be prepared. Alternatively, the number of types of light emitting patterns may be changed. Further, the frame lamp P10 may also be configured to adopt the light emission modes of light emission patterns 1 to 4, similarly to the accessory lamp. Furthermore, similarly to the frame lamp P10, when an error occurs in the gaming machine, the accessory lamp may be lit or blinked in a specific color such as red as an error light emission mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the specific execution timing of the emphasis effect, the light emission effect, and the accessory effect during execution of the jackpot game will be explained.

First, at timing T1, a jackpot game is started. At this time, the movable accessory P24 is waiting at the initial position, which is the starting point of the operation, and the accessory lamp is in a non-emitting state (extinguished state). Note that the accessory lamp may be configured to emit light in light emission pattern 1 (white light emission) instead of in a non-emission state (in that case, "light emission" in this time chart becomes "blue light emission", and " Please note that "non-luminescent" is replaced with "white luminescent").

Next, at timing T2, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific number (for example, 5000 balls), the emphasis effect execution condition is established and the execution of the emphasis effect is started. Moreover, at this timing T2, the performance operation of the movable accessory P24 is started, and the lighting display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) is started. That is, in this embodiment, the display of the emphasis effect, the effect movement of the movable accessory P24, and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are started at approximately the same time (these (The production will start synchronously.)

Next, at timing T3, the execution of the emphasis effect ends. Further, at this timing T3, the performance operation of the movable accessory ends, and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) ends. In other words, in this embodiment, the display of the emphasis effect, the effect movement of the movable accessory P24, and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) end at approximately the same time (these effects ends synchronously).

In this way, in this embodiment, the timing of the start and end of the execution of the emphasis effect, the timing of the start and end of the movement of the movable accessory P24, and the timing of the start and end of the action of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are determined. By making the timing of the start of the change) and the end of the light emission (or the start of the change from blue light emission to white light emission) approximately at the same time, these effects become cohesive (a sense of unity), and each The flow of performance becomes easy to understand for players. In addition, when executing a highlighting effect, instead of ending with only highlighting (enlarged display) on the effect display device P70, it is also possible to operate the movable accessory P24 or make the accessory lamp emit light (or change from white light emission to blue light emission). By changing the player's score (change), it is possible to further improve the player's sense of satisfaction and sense of superiority, and it is also possible to appeal to surrounding players the cumulative number of balls awarded that is highlighted. . The frame lamp P10 also has the same configuration as the accessory lamp (that is, it starts/ends the light emitting display at each timing like the accessory lamp, or it emits white light at each timing like the accessory lamp). It may also be configured such that the change from blue light emission to blue light emission starts/ends.

As a modified example, the emphasizing performance may be started after the performance movement of the movable accessory P24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are started. It's okay. According to this, there is an expectation that the emphasis effect will be executed after the performance movement of the movable accessory P24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) have respectively started. It is possible to make the player feel satisfied and feel excited about the fact that the emphasis performance is actually executed. In addition, at that time, by starting the performance operation of the movable accessory P24 after the accessory lamp starts to emit light (or change from white light to blue light), the accessory lamp can emit light (or change from white to blue). Each performance can be progressed at a good tempo, such as (change from white light emission to blue light emission) → operation of the movable accessory P24 → display of emphasis performance. In addition, on the contrary, the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may be started after the performance operation of the movable accessory P24 is started. Even in that case, each performance can be performed at a good tempo, such as the operation of the movable accessory P24 → the light emission of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) → the display of the emphasis performance. Note that what is executed before the emphasis performance may be either the operation of the movable accessory P24 or the emission of light from the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission). Other than that, it may be executed substantially simultaneously with the emphasis presentation. The frame lamp P10 also has the same configuration as the accessory lamp (that is, it starts/ends the light emitting display at each timing like the accessory lamp, or it emits white light at each timing like the accessory lamp). It may also be configured such that the change from blue light emission to blue light emission starts/ends.

Further, after the execution of the emphasis effect is started, the effect operation of the movable accessory P24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may be started. According to this configuration, the emphasis effect is suddenly started before the performance movement of the movable accessory P24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are performed, so that the player It is possible to give surprise and unexpectedness to the game, and to prevent the player from knowing the occurrence of the emphasized performance in advance. Note that what is executed after the emphasis effect may be either the operation of the movable accessory P24 or the emission of light from the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission); Other operations may be executed substantially simultaneously with the emphasis presentation. The frame lamp P10 also has the same configuration as the accessory lamp (that is, it starts/ends the light emitting display at each timing like the accessory lamp, or it emits white light at each timing like the accessory lamp). It may also be configured such that the change from blue light emission to blue light emission starts/ends.

Similarly, the execution of the highlighting effect may be configured to end after the effect movement of the movable accessory P24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are completed. good. Note that what is terminated before the emphasis performance may be either the movement of the movable accessory P24 or the emission of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission). Other than that, it may be ended almost at the same time as the emphasis performance. According to this configuration, immediately after the highlighting effect ends (without waiting for the end of the movement of the movable accessory P24 and the end of the illumination of the accessory lamp), it is possible to move on to the next performance development, and the game can be continued. This allows you to proceed at a good tempo. Further, after the execution of the highlighting effect is completed, the effect operation of the movable accessory P24 and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) may be configured to end. Note that what ends after the emphasis performance may be either the movement of the movable accessory P24 or the emission of light from the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission); Other than that, it may be ended almost at the same time as the emphasis performance. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the emphasis effect from being extended more than necessary, and by staggering the execution timings (end timings) of each effect, it is possible to provide a sharp effect. The frame lamp P10 also has the same configuration as the accessory lamp (that is, it starts/ends the light emitting display at each timing like the accessory lamp, or it emits white light at each timing like the accessory lamp). It may also be configured such that the change from blue light emission to blue light emission starts/ends.

Further, during the jackpot game, the accessory lamp and the frame lamp P10 have a light emission mode according to the progress of the jackpot game. Specifically, during the jackpot game, a video showing that the jackpot is in progress (a video where a character is introduced or a video where characters fight each other) is played, and a video with lyrics or This is a performance in which a song without lyrics is played. According to the progress of the jackpot performance, the accessory lamp and the frame lamp P10 change the light emission mode in chronological order, for example, in the following order: white lighting → white blinking → yellow lighting → yellow blinking → white lighting →... It is configured to change and loop. In this way, the predetermined lighting mode changes as the jackpot effect progresses, but as a further modification, an emphasis effect is executed, so that the predetermined light emission mode changes. It may be configured such that the light emission is interrupted and the accessory lamp and the frame lamp P10 change to blue light emission. In such a configuration, the blue light emission of the accessory lamp and the frame lamp P10 changes as the emphasis effect ends. may be configured to end and return to emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, if the emphasizing effect is executed while the light emitting mode of the accessory lamp and the frame lamp P10 is yellow) In this case, this yellow lighting is forcibly terminated and the blue light is emitted, and when the emphasis effect ends, the blue light emission ends and the yellow light is returned to, or the blue light is emitted for a predetermined amount of time after the elapsed time. By crossing the switching timing of the light emitting mode, the light will return to flashing yellow instead of lighting yellow). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the timing at which the blue light emission of the accessory lamp and the frame lamp P10 starts may be substantially the same as the execution start timing of the emphasizing effect, or may be after or before the execution timing of the emphasizing effect. The timing may be approximately at the same time as the operation start timing of the object P24, it may be afterward, or it may be before. In addition, in the case of this configuration, the timing at which the blue light emission of the accessory lamp and the frame lamp P10 ends may be substantially the same as, after, or before the execution end timing of the emphasizing effect. It may be done substantially at the same time as, after, or before the end of the operation of the object P24 (it should be noted that the above-mentioned effects applied differ depending on the timing).

Furthermore, many lamps are provided in addition to the accessory lamp and the frame lamp P10. As part of this, for example, the starting port lamp attached to the first starting port P51 (normally lit in white or off), the hold that occurs due to winning at the first starting port P51 increases the expectation of jackpot. When the hold is high, the lamp lights up in one of the following colors in order of jackpot expectation: blue → green → red → rainbow color), and the production button lamp attached to the production button (white when the operation is not valid) For example, a lamp that is turned on or off during the operation period, but lights up in blue when the operation is valid. These starting port lamps and production button lamps also emit white light (light up in white) during jackpot games (during jackpot production), but even when the emphasis production is executed, unlike the accessory lamp and frame lamp P10, It is configured to maintain white light emission (white lighting) so as not to make the player misunderstand that there is a winning in the first starting port P51 or that the operation is valid. In addition, if an error occurs in the gaming machine with any of the accessory lamps, frame lamps P10, starting gate lamps, or production button lamps, no matter which lighting mode was used up to that point (when executing the emphasis production) Even if it is a corresponding light emission mode or a light emission mode corresponding to a jackpot performance), it is configured to always perform a lighting display or blinking display in a specific light emission color such as red as an error light emission mode.

<<Relationship between fluctuating accessory production and jackpot bonus production>> In this embodiment, as various accessory productions, the above-mentioned specific movable accessory (movable accessory P24) performs a predetermined action and emits light. In addition to the object performance (also referred to as the "first character performance"), there is also a character performance ("second character performance") in which predetermined movable characters (movable characters other than movable character P24) perform predetermined movements and emit light. (also referred to as ``yakubutsu production'') is provided. Although detailed illustration of this predetermined movable accessory is omitted, for example, a door accessory (left and right door members) provided at the central opening of the center decoration P21 is exemplified. This door accessory (left and right door members) is configured to be able to reciprocate in the left-right direction between an initial position (open position) and a movable position (closed position) in front of the screen of the effect display device P70. When the door accessories (left and right door members) are in the initial position (open position), the door accessories (left and right door members) are hidden behind the back side of the game board P20, and the screen of the effect display device P70 ( substantially the entire display area) becomes visible. On the other hand, when the door accessories (left and right door members) are in the movable position (closed position), the door accessories (left and right door members) overlap in front of the screen of the production display device P70 (the left and right door members are adjacent to each other). The screen (display area) of the effect display device P70 becomes invisible or only a part of the display area becomes visible (at least the visible display area becomes smaller than the state in the initial position). ). In addition, regarding this door accessory (left and right door members), similarly to the above-mentioned movable accessory (logo accessory) 24, a accessory lamp (light-emitting body) is used to make the door member (left and right door member) emit light. ). In the present embodiment, the second accessory effect can be performed not only during the execution of the jackpot game (during the display of the highlighted display image) but also during the variable display of the symbols. In other words, this second accessory performance is roughly divided into a fluctuating accessory performance that is performed during the execution of the fluctuating display of symbols, and a jackpot accessory performance that is performed while the jackpot game is being executed. In the following explanation, the fluctuating accessory effect means an accessory effect in which a predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) moves in a predetermined manner and emits light during the fluctuating display of symbols, and is a jackpot accessory effect. The performance refers to a performance in which a predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) performs a predetermined action and emits light during execution of a jackpot game. In addition, the illumination of the accessory lamp in the fluctuating accessory display means that the accessory lamp of a predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) emits light while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. The lighting of the accessory lamp in the performance means that the accessory lamp of a predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) emits light during execution of the jackpot game.

For example, during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, the N reach to SP reach is suggested to develop before the SP reach develops (after the reach is established and before the SP reach develops) (for example, during the N reach (It is configured so that it is confirmed that it will develop into SP reach by executing a role-playing effect during fluctuation) or a scene where the final result of SP reach is a jackpot (content where the final result of SP reach indicates a jackpot) (For example, the jackpot is confirmed by performing a fluctuating role play at the end of SP reach, and the jackpot is confirmed at the end of SP reach. This is done in cases where the configuration is such that the possibility of failure is extremely high if the performance is not executed during the fluctuation. On the other hand, the jackpot performance is, for example, when an ally character makes a preemptive attack during the execution of the jackpot game at the time of the first hit and is promoted to a certain promotion by making a preemptive attack in a battle performance with an enemy character (promotion promotion promotion performance), that is. The temporary number of rounds announced when performing a fixed promotion promotion or when a jackpot occurs (when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is a false number of rounds, and the true number of rounds (tentative round number) during the execution of a jackpot game. This is also done when the round is promoted by notifying the number of times greater than

This embodiment is configured so that the number of executions of the fluctuating accessory effect executed during one fluctuating display and the number of executions of the jackpot accessory effect executed during one jackpot game may be different. has been done. Specifically, the fluctuating accessory performance may occur only once or multiple times during execution of the fluctuating display (of course, it may not occur even once). The case where it occurs only once is explained using the above example. Before the SP reach of the fluctuation display develops, the role effect during the first fluctuation suggesting that the fluctuation display will develop to SP reach is performed, and then the fluctuation display An example is a case in which the second fluctuating accessory performance is not executed because the deviation is confirmed in the display. In addition, to explain the case where it occurs multiple times, using the above example, after the first fluctuating accessory effect that suggests that SP reach develops before the SP reach development of the fluctuation display, An example is a case in which a second fluctuating accessory performance is performed to notify a jackpot win in a winning/losing scene after SP reach development. Note that the fluctuating accessory performance may be performed three or more times during execution of the fluctuating display.

On the other hand, the jackpot performance does not occur multiple times during the execution of the jackpot game, but always occurs only once (of course, it may not occur even once). In other words, to explain using the above example, during the execution of a jackpot game, there will be a jackpot performance that is performed at the time of a variable promotion (during the execution of a variable promotion effect), and a role effect that is performed during a round promotion (during the execution of a round promotion effect). Only one of the jackpot and yakuza presentations can be performed. Here, in this embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot game, the emphasis performance and the accessory performance (first accessory performance) performed at the time of occurrence of the emphasis performance are not performed during the execution of the variable promotion performance, and During execution of the round promotion performance, the emphasis performance and the accessory performance (first accessory performance) performed when the emphasis performance occurs are configured not to be executed. On the other hand, during the execution of a jackpot game, after the execution of the variable promotion effect is finished or before the execution of the variable promotion effect is started, the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect are performed during the same jackpot game. It is configured to be able to perform a role play (first role play). Similarly, during the execution of a jackpot game, if the execution of the round promotion effect is finished or before the execution of the round promotion effect is started, the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect may be performed during the same jackpot game. It is configured to be able to execute a role-playing effect (first role-playing effect). In any case, it is preferable that the promotion performance (definite promotion performance or round promotion performance) and the emphasis performance and the role performance (first role performance) that is performed when the emphasis performance occurs ( (Including cases where the execution periods of both performances completely overlap and cases where a part of the execution periods of both performances do not overlap). In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, the promotion effect (probable variable promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the emphasis effect are executed overlappingly; Structured so that the role performance (first role performance) that is performed at the same time will not be executed overlappingly (including cases where the execution periods of both performances overlap, and cases where a part of the execution periods of both performances do not overlap). may be done. In addition, as a further modified example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the role performance (first role performance) that is performed when the emphasis effect occurs, the role performance that is performed when the probability change promotion (second role performance), It may be configured such that only one of the accessory performances (second accessory production) performed at the time of round promotion is performed. In other words, the emphasis performance, the variable promotion performance, and the round promotion performance are configured so that they are not executed simultaneously during one jackpot game. In other words, the emphasis performance may not be performed in a jackpot game in which a probability change promotion performance is performed, and the emphasis performance may not be performed in a jackpot game in which a round promotion performance is performed. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that only either one of the fixed promotion performance and the round promotion performance is installed. In addition, all performances that appear to be low-profit jackpot games, such as fixed-variable promotion performances and round promotion performances, but which ultimately inform that it is actually a high-profit jackpot game, are referred to as "promotion performances." In addition, as a further modified example, during the execution of a jackpot game, during the execution of the above-mentioned pending consecutive consecutive suggestive performance (internal consecutive consecutive consecutive suggestive performance), an emphasizing performance and an accessory performance performed at the time of occurrence of the emphasizing performance (the first role While the system is configured so that the held connection suggestion performance (relationship performance within the hold) is not executed, or after the execution of the pending connection suggestion performance (the connection performance within the hold) is completed, or the execution of the held connection suggestion performance (the connection performance within the hold) is started. The player may be configured to be able to execute the emphasis performance and the accessory performance (first accessory performance) that is performed when the emphasis performance occurs during the same jackpot game. In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, it is preferable that the pending consecutive suggestion performance (in-pending consecutive consecutive performance) and the emphasis performance and the accessory performance performed when the emphasis performance occurs (the first accessory performance) are not executed overlappingly. (Including cases where the execution periods of both performances overlap entirely and cases where part of the execution periods of both performances do not overlap). If configured in this way, the held connection suggestion performance (response performance within the hold) and the emphasis performance will be executed overlappingly, but they will be performed when the held connection suggestion performance (relationship performance within the hold) and the emphasis performance occur. Even if it is configured so that the role performance (the first role play) is not executed overlappingly (including cases where the execution periods of both performances overlap, and cases where a part of the execution periods of both performances do not overlap). good.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, the number of executions of the fluctuating accessory performance (one jackpot fluctuation display) during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation display (jackpot fluctuation display) The number of executions of the jackpot during the execution of the jackpot game (the number of executions of the jackpot during the jackpot game) and the number of executions of the jackpot during the jackpot game during the execution of the jackpot game after the fluctuation display stops (actual performance) may be a different number of times. In this way, while the fluctuating display is being executed, by being configured so that the fluctuating accessory presentation can be executed multiple times, it is possible to give surprise and surprise to the player, and also to provide the player with surprise and surprise. It is possible to increase the player's interest in the occurrence of (fluctuating accessory performance). In addition, if the fluctuating accessory effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation display, and the jackpot accessory effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot game that is performed after the jackpot fluctuation display ends, the fluctuation The light emitted from the accessory lamp in the jackpot performance is more likely to have a specific type of light emission (rainbow light emission) than the light emitted by the accessory lamp in the performance of the middle prize. The type of light emitted by the lamp includes light emission in modes other than the specific mode of light emission (in addition to rainbow color emission, it also includes blue light emission, etc.), while the role lamp in the jackpot performance shows only a specific mode of light emission. (having only iridescent light emission) is preferable. More specifically, the emitting color of the accessory lamp during the jackpot performance is only rainbow color even when either an emphasis performance or a promotion performance is performed, but before the SP reach is developed (after the reach is established ~ Before the development of SP reach), the emitting color of the fluctuating role effect that suggests the development from N reach to SP reach is blue, and the scene of the winning/losing branch after the development of SP reach (the final result of SP reach indicates a jackpot) The emitting color of the fluctuating role-playing effect that announces the winning of the jackpot in the branching scene of the content indicating the content or the content indicating the content is rainbow-colored is configured to be rainbow-colored. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of executions of the fluctuating accessory presentation that is performed while the jackpot fluctuation display is being executed, and the number of times that the jackpot accessory presentation is performed during the execution of the jackpot game after the jackpot fluctuation display is stopped. Although the number of executions is different from that of a certain jackpot game (the number of executions of a certain jackpot game (the said certain The number of executions of the jackpot performance may be different from the number of executions of the jackpot performance during the execution of the jackpot game (which is performed after the stop of the jackpot variation display that is different from the jackpot variation display). In other words, regardless of whether there is a relationship between the jackpot fluctuation display triggered by the same single jackpot and the jackpot game, the number of times the fluctuating accessory effect is executed during the execution of one jackpot fluctuation display. and the number of executions of the jackpot performance during the execution of one jackpot game may be different. In addition, in this embodiment, the light emitting color of the accessory lamp in the fluctuating accessory performance that is performed while the jackpot fluctuation display is being executed, and the jackpot winning combination that is performed during the execution of the jackpot game after the jackpot fluctuation display is stopped. Although it has been illustrated that the emitted light color of the accessory lamp in the object presentation may be different from the emitted light color, it is not limited to this. The emission color of the accessory lamp and the color of the accessory lamp during the jackpot performance during the execution of a certain jackpot game (a jackpot game performed after the stop of a jackpot fluctuation display that is different from the particular jackpot fluctuation display) The light emitting color may be different from the emitted light color. In other words, regardless of whether or not there is a relationship between the jackpot fluctuation display triggered by the same one jackpot and the jackpot game, the role in the fluctuating accessory performance that is performed during the execution of one jackpot fluctuation display The light emitting color of the object lamp may be different from the light emitting color of the accessory lamp during the jackpot performance during the execution of one jackpot game.

Here, the execution time of the fluctuating accessory performance and the jackpot performance will be explained. FIG. 112(A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the accessory effect during fluctuation, and FIG. 112(B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the accessory effect during the jackpot.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the operation time TD1 of the door accessory in the fluctuating accessory performance is different from the operation time TD2 of the door accessory in the jackpot performance. Here, the operating time TD of the door accessory
1, TD2 is basically the time from when the door accessories (left and right door members) start operating with the initial position as the starting point until they return to the initial position and end the operation. In addition, these operating times TD1 and TD2 include not only the movement time when the door accessory is actually moving, but also the holding time when the door accessory is stopped and held at a predetermined movable position (after movement). (position holding time) is also included. In this example, this holding time (post-movement holding time) refers to the state in which the left and right door members are placed adjacent to each other in movable positions, so that the door accessories are integrated (the door accessories are This is the time to maintain the completed state. In this embodiment, the holding time of the door accessory during the jackpot performance (position holding time after movement) is longer than the holding time of the door accessory during the fluctuating accessory presentation (position holding time after movement). Due to the difference in time, the respective operating times TD1 and TD2 are different times. In other words, when comparing the execution time TD1 of the fluctuating accessory production with the execution time TD2 of the jackpot accessory production, the closing direction in which the door accessory (left and right door members) moves from the initial position to the movable position in the closing direction. The movement time and the opening direction movement time in which the door accessories (left and right door members) move in the opening direction from the movable position to the initial position are equal, but when the door accessories (left and right door members) move in the opening direction, Due to the difference in the holding time held in the movable position (post-movement holding time), the operating time TD2 of the movable accessory during the jackpot performance is longer than the operating time TD1 of the movable accessory during the fluctuating accessory performance. It is configured so that it lasts a longer time. According to this configuration, when the fluctuating accessory performance is executed while the jackpot fluctuation display is being executed, and the jackpot accessory performance is performed during the execution of the jackpot game that is performed after the jackpot fluctuation display ends. In other words, even if the door accessory performance is performed multiple times from the start of the variable display of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot game, the operating time of the door accessory (left and right door members) is different, so the door accessory Even if the operating order of the left and right door members is the same, different impressions can be given to the player, and variations in the performance of the accessory can be further enriched. In addition, in this embodiment, the operation time TD1 of the door accessory in the fluctuating accessory performance that is performed while the jackpot fluctuation display is being executed, and the operation time TD1 of the door accessory during the jackpot game that is performed after the jackpot fluctuation display has stopped. Although the example shows that the operation time TD2 of the door role in the role play is different from that of the door role in the changing role played during execution of a certain jackpot change display, the present invention is not limited to this. The operation time TD1 of the object and the operation of the door accessory in the jackpot performance during the execution of a certain jackpot game (a jackpot game performed after the stop of a jackpot fluctuation display different from the particular jackpot fluctuation display) The time TD2 may be set to a different time. In other words, regardless of whether or not there is a relationship between the jackpot fluctuation display triggered by the same single jackpot and the jackpot game, the door in the fluctuating accessory performance that is performed during the execution of one jackpot fluctuation display. The operating time TD1 of the accessory may be different from the operating time TD2 of the door accessory in the jackpot performance during the execution of one jackpot game. According to this, similar to the above-mentioned effect, even if the door performance is performed using the same door performance (second character performance), different impressions can be given to the player, and the performance of the performance Variations can be made even richer. In addition, regarding the operation time TD1 of the door accessory in the fluctuating accessory production, the fluctuating accessory production suggests that the N reach will develop from the N reach to the SP reach before the SP reach develops (after the reach is established - before the SP reach development). A fluctuating auxiliary item that notifies you of a jackpot win based on the timing of the SP reach development, rather than the operating time. By configuring the performance so that the operation time is longer, variations in the accessory performance within one jackpot variation (within one jackpot variation display) can be made even richer. Here, as a modified example, the operation time TD1 of the door accessory in the fluctuating accessory performance may be configured to be longer than the operation time TD2 of the door accessory in the jackpot performance. With such a configuration, even during a jackpot game, which has a limited execution period (the execution period may end earlier depending on the situation of balls entering the big winning hole P54), the execution period will be limited. It is possible to complete the jackpot performance as much as possible, and the fluctuating accessory performance, which is executed during a predetermined variable time, has a long execution time to further arouse players' expectations. I can do it.

In addition, as a modified example, when a predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) or a specific movable accessory (movable accessory P24) is held at a predetermined movable position, the movable accessory changes into another form. It may be deformed or combined with other movable accessories to form a complete body. In addition, by making the closing direction moving time and opening direction moving time of the door accessory in the fluctuating accessory performance different from the closing direction moving time and opening direction moving time of the door accessory in the jackpot accessory performance, The operating time TD1 of the door accessory in the middle accessory presentation may be different from the operating time TD2 of the door accessory in the jackpot intermediate accessory presentation. Furthermore, as described above, the operating time TD2 of the door accessory during the jackpot performance may be configured to be shorter than the operating time TD1 of the door accessory during the fluctuating accessory performance. However, the operation time TD1 of the door accessory in the fluctuating accessory performance and the operation time TD2 of the door accessory in the jackpot performance may be configured to be the same time. In addition, when the fluctuating accessory effect is executed multiple times while the symbol is being displayed as a variable, as mentioned above, for example, the execution time of the fluctuating accessory effect performed before the SP reach development is longer than the execution time of the fluctuating accessory effect after the SP reach development. It may be configured so that the execution time of the fluctuating accessory performance (the fluctuating accessory performance that notifies the jackpot confirmation) performed at the winning/losing branch scene is longer, or conversely, SP reach development The execution time of the fluctuating accessory performance (the fluctuating accessory performance that notifies the jackpot confirmation) that is performed in the winning/losing scene after SP reach development is longer than the execution time of the fluctuating accessory performance that takes place before. It may be configured to take a short time. In addition, the movement pattern of the door accessory in the fluctuating accessory performance (operation distance, operation order, operation speed, etc.) and the operation pattern of the door accessory in the jackpot performance (operation distance, operation order, operation speed, etc.) may be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp during the fluctuating accessory performance and the lighting manner of the accessory lamp during the jackpot performance can be different. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(A), during the execution of a fluctuating accessory performance (for example, a fluctuating accessory performance before SP reach development), the accessory lamp emits light in a predetermined color (blue). It emits light. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112(B), during execution of the jackpot performance, the accessory lamp emits light in a specific color (rainbow color). In this way, by making the emitting color of the accessory lamp different between the fluctuating accessory display and the jackpot accessory display, the player's interest in the door accessory can be increased from the start of the fluctuating display to the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to attract not only the movement but also the emitted light color of the accessory lamp, making it possible to enhance the performance effect of the accessory. Note that the time chart shown in FIG. 112 may also be configured such that the accessory lamp of the door accessory is not in a non-emitting state but is emitting white light (in that case, the "non-emitting" state in this time chart is Please note that "light emission" is replaced with "white light emission").

In addition, in the fluctuating accessory performance at the time of winning or losing after SP reach development, the accessory lamp of the door accessory may be configured to emit light in a specific color (rainbow color). According to this, even if a fluctuating accessory effect is performed twice during one fluctuating display, the emitted light color of the accessory lamp is different, so even if the door accessory moves the same, the player It is possible to give different impressions to the characters, and it is possible to further enrich the variations of the role performance.

<<Execution Restrictions on Emphasis Performance and Over Winning Performance>> Next, execution restrictions when the execution conditions for the emphasis performance and over winning performance are satisfied will be described. FIG. 113(A) is a time chart when the execution of the emphasis effect is limited, and FIG. 113(B) is a time chart when the execution of the over winning effect is limited.

As mentioned above, the emphasis performance can be executed when the emphasis performance execution condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, and the over-win performance is the execution of an over-win performance during the execution of a jackpot game (one round game). It becomes possible to execute when the performance execution conditions are satisfied, but even if the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over winning performance execution condition are satisfied, if the special performance described below is being executed or scheduled to be executed, Execution of special effects and/or over winning effects is restricted. In other words, if the special performance is being executed when the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over winning performance execution condition are satisfied, or the special performance is executed when the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over winning performance execution condition is satisfied. If the execution of the special performance is scheduled (if it is decided that the special performance will be executed by lottery), even if the emphasis performance execution conditions and/or over winning performance execution conditions are satisfied, the emphasis performance and/or Execution of over-winning effects is restricted (cancelled). Note that the time chart in FIG. 113 shows the case where the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the special effect or the case where the over winning effect execution condition is satisfied, but it is shown that the case is satisfied before the execution of the special effect (without execution of the special effect). If the execution conditions for the special performance are satisfied during the middle) or the over-winning performance execution conditions are met, and the timing to start execution of the special performance comes while the emphasis performance or over-winning performance is being executed, The system is configured so that the emphasized presentation and over-winning presentation are canceled midway through. As a modified example, if the emphasis performance execution condition is satisfied before the execution of the special performance (while the special performance is not being executed) or the over-winning performance execution condition is satisfied, the emphasis performance or the over-winning performance is executed. If the execution start timing of the special effect arrives during the execution of the special effect, unlike the case where the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the special effect or the case where the over winning effect execution condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect that is being executed It may also be configured such that the over-winning effect is executed to the end without being interrupted midway. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity that an emphasis presentation or an over winning presentation ends midway through.

Here, the special performance in this embodiment is a predetermined performance that can be performed during the execution of a special game (big win game or small win game), and examples thereof include the following performances.

(1) Pending connection suggestion performance A pending connection suggestion performance (also referred to as a holding connection performance) is a performance that suggests that a holding connection is occurring, as described above. In addition, "on-hold consecutive shots" means that when a certain preceding action-holding ball is used up and the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, the special symbol related to this preceding action-holding ball is a jackpot. A jackpot is expected to occur in one or more subsequent operation pending balls that exist at a predetermined timing from when the symbol validity determination is permitted until the end of the jackpot game that is executed with the jackpot as a trigger. This means that a ball with active hold (also referred to as a ``jacket hold'') is included. Here, the reason for restricting the execution of the emphasizing performance and the over-winning performance when this suspended combination suggestion performance is being executed or scheduled to be executed is that if the emphasis performance or the over winning performance is executed overlappingly with the suspended combination suggestion performance, This is because the notification contents of both performances will be difficult for the player to recognize, and there is a risk that the performance effects of both performances will be reduced. In addition, for the player, it is more important for the player to know that the next jackpot is guaranteed (the occurrence of consecutive wins within the hold) than that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a certain value or that an over-win has occurred. This is more useful information, and since it can also be determined by checking the cumulative award pitch count display that the cumulative award pitch count has reached a certain value, it is better to execute a holding series suggestion display rather than an emphasizing display or an over-winning display. This is because the game becomes more interesting if priority is given to the above.

(2) Promotion performance Promotion performance refers to the profit form related to the jackpot before or at the start of the jackpot game when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of special symbols (for convenience, this will be referred to as the "temporary profit form") This is a production that suggests or informs that the actual profit form related to the jackpot is higher in profit degree than the hypothetical profit form during execution of the jackpot game after suggesting or announcing. In other words, it suggests whether the profit pattern of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (correct profit pattern) or false (high profit pattern), and through that series of processes, the jackpot profit pattern is confirmed. This is a performance that shows whether or not the profit aspect of the game will be promoted. The types of promotion performances include fixed promotion performances and round promotion performances. It should be noted that the contents of the variable promotion performance and the round promotion performance have been described above, so a redundant explanation will be omitted. Here, the reason for restricting the execution of the emphasis performance and the over winning performance when this promotion performance is being executed or scheduled to be executed is that if the emphasis performance or the over winning performance is executed in duplicate with the promotion performance, the notification of both performances will be This is because the content becomes difficult for the player to recognize, and there is a risk that the performance effects of both performances may be reduced. In addition, for the player, rather than the fact that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a certain number or the occurrence of an over-win, it is important for the player that the profit status of the jackpot is promoted (promotion to a fixed-variable jackpot or a round-up of a jackpot game) ) is more useful information, and since you can also know when the cumulative award pitch count reaches a certain value by checking the cumulative award pitch count display, it is better to use promotion production rather than emphasizing or over-winning production. This is because the game becomes more interesting when priority is given to execution.

(3) Low-profit jackpot performance If the jackpot performance performed during a jackpot game is a so-called low-profit jackpot performance, the emphasis performance execution condition and/or Even if the winning presentation execution conditions are satisfied, this emphasized presentation and/or over winning presentation will not be executed. In addition, "low profit jackpot" refers to, for example, a jackpot type in which the prescribed number of rounds is set to a relatively small number of rounds (low round jackpot), or a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is set to be relatively small (low round jackpot), or the opening time of the jackpot opening in each round (maximum opening time). Jackpot type set to a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds) (short open jackpot), after the end of the jackpot game, transition to normal gaming state (low probability low base state) or time saving gaming state (low probability high base state) This includes the type of jackpot (normal jackpot) that triggers this. The reason for restricting the execution of the emphasis performance and over winning performance when this low profit jackpot performance is being executed or scheduled to be executed is that if you win such a low profit jackpot, the emphasis performance and over winning performance in the jackpot game are restricted. Even if a winning presentation is executed (even if a celebratory presentation is executed due to the cumulative number of prize balls reaching a certain value or an over-winning event), it is necessary to arouse a sense of satisfaction and superiority in the player. This is because sufficient performance effects cannot be expected. In addition, if you win a short open jackpot, the cumulative prize ball number will not be displayed during the short round game, so if the cumulative prize ball number reaches a certain value or Even if (the value of the cumulative award pitch counter reaches a multiple of the predetermined number of award pitches) or an over-winning occurs, the highlighting effect or over-winning effect accompanying the display of the cumulative award pitch count will not be applied. It is no longer executed.

The types of jackpots are roughly divided into high-profit jackpots, which are set to have a relatively high advantage for the player, and low-profit jackpots, which are set to have a relatively low advantage for the player. If the emphasizing performance execution conditions are satisfied during the performance during the jackpot that is performed in the case of winning, the emphasizing performance will be executed, while the emphasizing performance will be executed during the performance during the jackpot that will be performed when the low profit jackpot is won. It may be configured such that the emphasizing effect is not performed when the conditions are satisfied.

(4) Jackpot end demonstration performance In this embodiment, the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over winning performance execution condition are not satisfied during the execution of the jackpot end demonstration performance, and the emphasis performance is executed during the execution of the jackpot end demonstration performance. The emphasis performance and/or the over winning performance will not be executed when the condition and/or the over winning performance execution condition is satisfied. Specifically, in this embodiment, as described above, the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole P54 is not effectively detected within the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration performance, and the execution of this jackpot end demonstration performance The emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over winning performance execution condition will not be satisfied within the time. That is, this embodiment is designed so that the game ball that enters the big winning hole P54 during the execution of the final round game will not be detected after the jackpot end demonstration has started beyond the interval period. (In other words, the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole P54 in the final round game is always detected during the execution of the final round game or within the interval period immediately thereafter.) structure), the emphasis performance execution conditions and/or over winning performance execution conditions are not satisfied during the execution of this jackpot end demonstration performance, and the emphasis performance and/or over winning performance are executed overlappingly. It never happens. In addition, in the unlikely event that for some reason (for example, if the game balls that exceed the specified count number stay in front of the winning detection sensor inside the jackpot P54), the jackpot ends before the start of the demonstration. The ball entered the big winning hole P54 (at this point, the ball did not pass the ball entering detection sensor in the big winning hole P54, so the ball was not detected), but it passed the ball entering detection sensor in the big winning hole P54 during the jackpot end demonstration. Even in this case, no prize ball is generated due to the passing, and the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over winning performance execution condition are not satisfied during the execution of the jackpot end demonstration performance.

In addition, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening P54 just before the end of the final round game (especially when the game ball enters in excess of the specified count), the game ball enters the grand prize opening P54. The entry of a game ball is designed to be effectively detected until the end of the final round game or the interval period, so the emphasis performance execution conditions and the If/or the over winning performance execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the emphasized performance and/or the over winning performance will be started with the establishment of the execution condition as a trigger. In that case, the emphasis performance may continue during the final round game and the jackpot end demonstration performance beyond the interval period, but as mentioned above, the execution time (3 seconds) of the emphasis performance is Since it is set to a shorter time than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration performance, the period until the jackpot end demonstration performance ends (until the variable display starts after the end of the jackpot game) The emphasis presentation is designed to be completed (the over-winning presentation may be configured in the same manner as the emphasis presentation). In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, for example, the game ball enters the big winning hole P54 just before the end of the final round game, so that the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over winning performance execution condition are satisfied, If the emphasis performance and/or over-winning performance that is triggered by the fulfillment of the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over-winning performance execution condition is not completed by the end of the interval period, the said emphasis performance and/or over-winning performance will not be completed by the end of the interval period. Force the winning performance to end when the jackpot end demo performance (jackpot end demo period) starts (even if the execution time of the emphasis performance and/or over winning performance remains at the start of the jackpot end demo performance) It may also be configured so that the process ends automatically. In addition, as a further modification, the execution time of the emphasis performance and/or over-winning performance may be set to be shorter than the interval time (interval period), and the emphasis performance may be started at least by the end of the final round game. It may be configured such that the presentation and/or over winning presentation is not executed beyond the interval period (in other words, it may be configured such that the emphasis presentation and/or over winning presentation and the jackpot end demonstration presentation are not executed overlappingly). ).

(5) First round performance in a small winning game As a modification of this embodiment, a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type gaming machine (generally When applying a small winning game (also known as small winning V), even if the emphasis performance execution conditions and/or over winning performance execution conditions are satisfied during the first round (first round performance) of the small winning game, the emphasis will not be applied. It may be configured such that the presentation and/or the over winning presentation are not executed.

Specifically, this type of gaming machine called Small Hit V has the first type of gameplay in which a jackpot game is executed by stopping and displaying the variable display result of the special symbol at the jackpot symbol, and the variable display result of the special symbol. A second type of game feature in which a jackpot game is executed when the game ball that enters the big winning hole P54, which is in an open state by stopping and displaying a small winning symbol, passes through a specific area (V area). Be equipped. Therefore, if a game ball that enters the big winning hole P54 passes through a specific area during the execution of a small winning game, the right to develop into a jackpot game after the small winning game ends is configured. There is. As a result, the first round of the small winning game is an important round game that urges the player to let the game ball enter the big winning hole P54 and pass through a specific area (referred to as "V winning"). Become. Therefore, in the first round of this small winning game, for example, rather than emphasizing that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a certain number and/or executing an over-winning presentation, the text "Aim for the V prize!" Priority is given to the execution of a V winning instruction effect that displays a message image indicating the above and instructs the entry of the game ball into a specific area. In other words, even if the emphasizing performance execution condition and/or the over-winning performance are satisfied in the ball entry in the first round of the small winning game, the emphasizing performance and/or the over-winning performance are not executed. However, from the second round onward, which is executed by passing a specific area (V area) in the first round and becoming a jackpot game, by fulfilling the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over winning performance, It is configured so that an emphasis effect and/or an over winning effect is executed.

In addition, if a V winning in which the game ball passes through a specific area occurs in the first round of this small winning game, the game ball enters the big winning opening P54 that occurs after the V winning in this first round. (For example, if a V winning occurs with the first ball entering the big winning hole P54, a special effect (round number suggestion effect) is performed for the second ball and subsequent balls entering the big winning hole P54) In this special performance, the display mode (display color) of a specific object image is changed every time the game ball enters the big winning hole P54, and the jackpot of the development destination is changed depending on the display mode (display color) after the change. It may also be configured to suggest the number of rounds of the game. More specifically, the special effect (round number suggestion effect) is that when a V winning occurs, the words "Congratulations!" are displayed, and each time the ball enters the big winning hole P54 thereafter (however, Until the specified count is reached), the color of the text "Congratulations!" can change, and it is likely that the number of rounds will be large as the color of the text changes in the order of white → blue → red → rainbow color. (Examples of the number of rounds include four types, such as 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, and 10 rounds. If the number of rounds is rainbow colored, the highest number of rounds is determined.) Even in that case, priority will be given to the execution of the special performance (round number suggestion performance) that will be performed after V winning, and even if the emphasis performance execution conditions and/or the over winning performance execution conditions are met, the emphasis performance and/or the over winning performance will be given priority. It is preferable to restrict the execution of prize-winning presentations.

In addition, in the above embodiment, if the emphasis performance execution condition and/or the over winning performance execution condition are satisfied while the special performance is being executed or scheduled to be executed, the execution of the emphasis performance and/or the over winning performance is restricted. However, in addition to this, if a special performance is performed during the execution of an emphasis performance and/or an over winning performance, the execution of the special performance will be triggered by the start of the execution of the special performance. It may be configured to forcibly end or temporarily suspend the execution of the emphasis effect and/or the over winning effect. If the execution of the emphasis performance and/or over winning performance is temporarily suspended due to the start of execution of the special performance, the execution of the emphasis performance and/or over winning performance will be resumed when the execution of the special performance is finished. It is preferable to do so.

≪Recovery from power failure while jackpot type display is in progress≫ Next, during the execution of the jackpot game, while the first specific performance (jackpot type display) indicating the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed is being performed. The following describes the case where a power outage occurs. FIG. 114 is a time chart when a power failure occurs during execution of jackpot type display.

In this embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot start demonstration, a jackpot type display (super longevity jackpot display, longevity jackpot display, joy jackpot display) indicating the type of jackpot that triggers the execution of the jackpot game is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70. (Display) is carried out to suggest or inform the player of the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed. Specifically, the "super longevity jackpot display" is a display with the words "super longevity jackpot!!!" and a rainbow-colored background during the execution of the jackpot start demo, and the "longevity jackpot display" is a display that indicates a jackpot. While the start demo is running, the words "Kototo Jackpot!" are displayed and the background is red. The background is blue. During the execution of a jackpot game (jackpot start demo), if super longevity jackpot is displayed as the jackpot type display, it is suggested or announced that the jackpot game currently being executed is a 16 round game (super longevity jackpot). (It is suggested or announced that a player has won a prize), and if a Kotobuki jackpot display or a joy jackpot display is performed as the jackpot type display, it is suggested or announced that the jackpot game currently being executed is a 4-round jackpot game. (It is suggested or announced that you have won the Kotobuki Jackpot or Ki Jackpot). If a power outage occurs during the execution of this jackpot game (jackpot start demo) and the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is restarted when the power outage is restored, the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) will be restarted due to the power outage. The jackpot type display that had been displayed will not be restored, and after the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is restarted, the power-off recovery image (power-off The return screen) will be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs during the execution of a jackpot game (jackpot start demo) and the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is restarted when the power outage is restored, the main control The display is configured so that the display by the effect display device P70 is returned at a timing earlier than the return of the display by the display device P27 (round display described later) (in other words, after the recovery from a power outage, the effect display is After the display of the device P70 is restored, the display of the main control display device P27 is restored, that is, after the display of the effect display device P70 is restored, the lighting display of the round indicator light P77 is restored). When the jackpot game (jackpot start demo) is restarted after the power outage is restored, the jackpot type display is not displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70 when the display by the effect display device P70 is restored, and the above-mentioned power supply A power failure recovery image (power failure recovery screen) is displayed. This power-off recovery image is continuously displayed until the end of the jackpot game (the end of the final round or the end of the jackpot end demonstration). In this way, when the jackpot game is resumed after the power outage is restored, notification of the power outage recovery is given priority over the execution of the jackpot type display that was interrupted due to the power outage, so that the player can It is possible to promptly notify that the jackpot game can be resumed after the power failure has been restored. Furthermore, after a power outage returns, priority is given to the notification of the power outage recovery over the execution of the round display that was interrupted due to the power outage, so that the player can play a jackpot game after the power outage is restored. It is possible to promptly notify that it is possible to resume operations. Note that the above-mentioned recovery from a power outage (power return) is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), and is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820). If it is a return, the game shifts to the normal game state (low probability, low base state), and returns with the decorative symbols in combination "331" being stopped and displayed.

In addition, as a modified example, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the jackpot start demo and a power outage recovery image is displayed as the power outage recovers, a predetermined period of time (for example, the power outage recovery image is displayed). 5 seconds have passed since it was displayed), or when the jackpot start demo ends, the normal jackpot performance (for example, the above-mentioned super longevity jackpot performance, long life jackpot performance, joy jackpot performance) will be resumed. (In other words, the normal round effect may be returned to after a predetermined time has elapsed or from the start of the first round). In addition, a round performance screen corresponding to the type of jackpot performance (super longevity jackpot performance, long life jackpot performance, joy jackpot performance) is displayed, that is, if the performance pattern during the jackpot is super longevity jackpot performance, super longevity Jackpot round screen (for example, a production screen in which character introductions for 5 people are displayed on a rainbow-colored background), and in the case of a Kotobuki jackpot production, a Kotobuki jackpot round screen (for example, a production screen for 2 characters on a red background) If it is a joy jackpot performance, a joy jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen where character introductions for one person are displayed on a blue background) is displayed. ing. In addition, as another modification, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the jackpot start demo, and a power outage recovery image is displayed as the power outage recovers, a predetermined period of time (for example, a power outage recovery image is displayed). 5 seconds have passed since the return image was displayed) or when the jackpot start demo ends, the game will return to the special jackpot screen after power-off recovery (round screen dedicated after power-off recovery). (In other words, the normal round effect may be returned to after a predetermined time has elapsed or from the start of the first round). Note that the above-mentioned recovery from a power outage (power return) is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), and is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820). If it is a return, the game shifts to the normal game state (low probability, low base state), and returns with the decorative symbols in combination "331" being stopped and displayed.

≪Recovery from power outage during round display≫ Next, during the execution of the jackpot game, if the power is turned off while the second specific effect (round display) indicating the number of rounds of the round game currently being executed is being performed. We will explain the case where this occurs. FIG. 115 is a time chart when a power failure occurs during round display.

In this embodiment, during the execution of the round game of the jackpot game, a round display is performed on the screen of the effect display device P70 to suggest or notify what round the round game is currently being executed, The number of rounds of the round game currently being executed is suggested or reported to the player. This round display corresponds to the display content of the round display area P730 described above, but even during the jackpot game, it is not displayed during the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo, but is displayed during the round game (note that , may also be displayed during the interval period, but in such a configuration, in the interval period after the completion of a certain round game, it is preferable to display a round corresponding to the certain round game). Further, while the jackpot game is being executed, a round indicator light P77 that notifies the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game that is currently being executed is lit on the main control display device P27. This lighting display of the round indicator light P77 is configured to be lit not only during the round game during the jackpot game, but also during the jackpot start demonstration, jackpot end demonstration, and during the interval period. At this time, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs during the execution of a jackpot game (round game) and the jackpot game (round game) is restarted when the power outage is restored, the main control display device It is configured so that the display on the effect display device P70 is restored earlier than the display on the effect display device P27. After the display on the control display device P27 is restored, that is, after the display on the effect display device P70 is restored, the lighting display of the round indicator light P77 is restored). When the power outage returns and the jackpot game (round game) is restarted, when the display by the effect display device P70 is restored, the round display is not displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70, and the above-mentioned power outage recovery An image (power-off recovery screen) is displayed. This power-off recovery image is continuously displayed until the end of the jackpot game (the end of the final round game or the end of the jackpot end demonstration). In other words, after the power is restored after a power outage, the notification of the power outage recovery is prioritized over the execution of the round display that was interrupted due to the power outage, allowing the player to resume the jackpot game after the power outage is restored. It is possible to promptly notify that this has occurred. Note that the above-mentioned recovery from a power outage (power return) is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), and is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820). In the case of a return, the game shifts to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and is returned with the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the combination of "331", and the round indicator light P77 is turned off. will be reinstated.

On the other hand, on the main control display device P27, after the power outage is restored, the round indicator light P77 is lit up and the specified number of rounds of the restarted jackpot game is displayed. Therefore, when the power is restored after a power outage, the player can first check the power outage recovery image on the performance display device P70, and then check the round indicator light P77 on the main control display device P27. . In this way, by first returning the display on the performance display device P70 and quickly notifying the player that the power is being restored from a power-off, the player can be reassured. Subsequently, by restoring the display on the main control display device P27 and lighting up the round indicator light P77, the type of jackpot game that was interrupted due to the power outage (the prescribed round that was lit and displayed on the round indicator light P77) It is possible to give the player a greater sense of security by notifying the player that he or she can earn several profits. Note that the above-mentioned recovery from a power outage (power return) is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), and is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820). In the case of a return, the game shifts to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and is returned with the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the combination of "331", and the round indicator light P77 is turned off. will be reinstated.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the jackpot game is restarted due to the recovery from a power outage, the cumulative prize ball number is not displayed during the restarted jackpot game, and the game ball enters the jackpot P54. Even if you hit a ball, the cumulative award pitch count display will not be updated, the count-up effect, or the emphasis effect (enlarged display) will not be executed. Moreover, even if a game ball exceeding the specified number enters the big winning hole P54 (over winning) during execution of the resumed jackpot game, the over winning effect is not executed. Similarly, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole P64 during execution of the resumed jackpot game, the cumulative prize ball number display, count-up performance, and bonus winning performance will not be executed. In this way, in this embodiment, the power failure recovery image is continuously displayed on the effect display device P70 from the time when the jackpot game is restarted due to the power failure recovery until the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot type The display, round display, cumulative award ball count display, grand prize opening winning presentation (over winning presentation), and general winning opening winning presentation (bonus winning presentation) are not executed. In addition, as a modified example, when the jackpot game is restarted after a power outage, the cumulative prize ball count will be displayed (updated display), but the emphasis performance will not be performed even if the emphasis performance execution conditions are met. It may be configured so that it does not occur. In addition, when the jackpot game is restarted after the power outage is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display (updated display) will be performed, but the over winning performance will not be performed even if the over winning performance execution conditions are met. It may be configured as follows. Note that the above-mentioned recovery from a power outage (power return) is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), and is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820). If it is a return, the game shifts to the normal game state (low probability, low base state), and returns with the decorative symbols in combination "331" being stopped and displayed.

As a modified example, if a power outage occurs during a certain round game and a power outage recovery image is displayed upon recovery from the power outage, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, the power outage recovery image 5 seconds have passed since the is displayed), or when the certain round game ends, the normal jackpot performance (for example, the above-mentioned super longevity jackpot performance, long life jackpot performance, joy jackpot performance) ) (In other words, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or, for example, if the power is cut off and then restored during the third round of play, at the start of the fourth round of play. (You may return to the normal round performance from the start). As mentioned above, the round performance screen corresponding to the type of jackpot performance (super longevity jackpot performance, long life jackpot performance, joy jackpot performance) is displayed, that is, when the jackpot performance pattern is super longevity jackpot performance. In the case of the Super Long Jackpot Round screen (for example, a production screen in which five character introductions are displayed on a rainbow-colored background), in the case of a Long Life Jackpot production, the Longevity Jackpot Round screen (for example, a production screen on which five character introductions are displayed on a red background). If it is a joy jackpot performance, a joy jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen where character introductions for one person are displayed on a blue background) is displayed. It is configured so that When configured in this way, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game after the restarted round game, but it starts from "0" instead of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed before the power is cut off. The cumulative award pitch counter will also be cleared to "0" and the game will start. However, even if you start from "0", when the game ball enters the big winning hole P54, the cumulative prize ball number display will be updated, the count-up effect, the emphasis effect (enlarged display), etc. will be executed, and the game will be restarted. During the execution of the jackpot game, if a game ball exceeding the specified number enters the jackpot P54 (over-win), the over-win effect is executed, and similarly, the restarted jackpot game is executed. During the game, when a game ball enters the general winning hole P64, the cumulative prize ball number display is updated, the count-up effect, and the bonus winning effect are executed. Note that the above-mentioned recovery from a power outage (power return) is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), and is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820). If it is a return, the game shifts to the normal game state (low probability, low base state), and returns with the decorative symbols in combination "331" being stopped and displayed.

In addition, as another modification, if a power outage occurs during execution of a round game and a power outage recovery image is displayed upon recovery from the power outage, after a predetermined period of time (for example, power outage recovery 5 seconds have passed since the image was displayed) or when the round game ends, the game will return to the dedicated jackpot screen after power-off recovery (round screen dedicated to power-off recovery). (In other words, if a predetermined time elapses or, for example, the power is cut off and the power is turned off during the third round of play, the normal round effect will be resumed from the start of the fourth round of play.) ), in such a configuration, the cumulative prize ball number will not be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game after the restarted round game, and the game ball will enter the jackpot P54. Even if it does, the cumulative prize ball count display, count-up effect, emphasis effect (enlarged display), etc. will not be executed, and furthermore, during the restarted jackpot game, the specified number of jackpot holes P54 will be exceeded. Even if a game ball enters the game ball (over-win), the over-win effect will not be executed, and similarly, even if the game ball enters the general winning hole P64 during the restarted jackpot game, the cumulative amount will not be increased. Updates to the prize pitch count display, count-up effects, and bonus prize-winning effects will not be performed. Note that the above-mentioned recovery from a power outage (power return) is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), and is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820). If it is a return, the game shifts to the normal game state (low probability, low base state), and returns with the decorative symbols in combination "331" being stopped and displayed.

The main effects achieved in the fourth embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the fourth embodiment, a special effect display is performed in which a predetermined special effect is applied at the time of appearance and/or deletion of the emphasis effect display that is displayed when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value. , it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of emphasis by this emphasizing effect display, which makes it possible to further impress upon the player that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a certain value, and also by emphasizing the effect display. By clarifying the start and end of the game (i.e., when the highlighted effect display during a jackpot game is considered as one break in a series of games, by clarifying the period before and after the break), it adds sharpness to the games in a series of games. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the fourth embodiment, the rarity of the highlighted effect display can be increased by preventing a plurality of display patterns of the highlighted effect display from being displayed overlappingly at the same time. Furthermore, by configuring the execution time of the highlighted effect display to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, the emphasis is displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the jackpot hole P54 just before the end of the final round game. Even if the performance execution conditions are met and the highlighted performance display is performed, the highlighted performance display will be completed within the jackpot end demo period, so the jackpot game will end if the highlighted performance display exceeds the jackpot end demo period. It does not cross over to the subsequent variable display (a clear break can be made between the end of the jackpot game and the start of the first rotation variable display), and the player misunderstands the current gaming situation. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, when performing a highly rare performance (special performance) or a performance important to the player (special performance) during the execution of a jackpot game, the cumulative prize ball count is set to a specific value. By restricting the execution of the highlighting effect display even if the highlighting effect execution condition is satisfied when the ``highlighting effect'' is reached, it is possible to reliably guarantee the execution of this high priority special effect, and it is possible to prevent the game from occurring in response to the occurrence of the special effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player's expectations and interest from decreasing, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, when performing a highly rare performance (special performance) or a performance important to the player (special performance) during the execution of a jackpot game, the regulations for the big prize opening P54 are Even if a game ball enters that exceeds the count, by restricting the execution of the over-winning effect, it is possible to reliably guarantee the execution of this high-priority special effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player's expectations and interest from decreasing, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, when a power outage occurs during execution of a jackpot game, priority is given to the return of the effect display device P70, which is the area that attracts the most attention of the player, when the power outage is restored. In addition to promptly notifying the player that the jackpot game that was interrupted due to a power outage can be resumed, when the display on the main control display device P27 is restored, information indicating the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed. By displaying this, it becomes possible for the player to clearly determine the type of jackpot game (number of rounds obtained) that is currently being executed, thereby complicating the various notifications and effect displays that are performed when the power is restored from a power outage. In addition, it becomes possible to smoothly proceed with the jackpot game that has been resumed after a power outage, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine and the interest of the game. .

[Fifth Embodiment] Next, a Pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment and/or the fourth embodiment described above, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly explained. That is, in the following description, it is possible to apply the same configuration as the second embodiment and/or the fourth embodiment, except in special cases.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be explained in order. The pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a setting function that allows setting the winning probability for determining whether a special symbol is correct or not, and a performance information display function that displays performance information of the game.

<Board Structure> First, the board structure of the gaming machine 20 of the fifth embodiment will be briefly described. In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 (same as the second embodiment), the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 is mainly connected to the first starting port P51 located below the center decoration P21, It is possible to enter the ball into any of the winning holes P61 to P63. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter any of the operating gate P53, general prize opening P64, second starting opening P52, and grand prize opening P54 located on the right side of the center decoration P21. It is. The game ball that has entered each winning hole is detected by each winning hole switch, and is discharged to the back side of the game board P20. Further, at the lower end of the game area PA, an out port P29 is provided for discharging game balls that have flown down without entering each winning hole to the back side of the game board P20. In this embodiment, the number of game balls launched into the game area PA and used for the game, that is, the number of game balls that entered each winning hole or out hole P29 of the game area PA and were ejected to the back side of the game board P20. The number of game balls (played balls) is counted by a played ball detection switch P891, which will be described later. In addition, among the gaming areas PA equipped with various winning openings, the hitting method in which the game balls are fired so as to flow down into the left area PA1 is called "left-handed hitting", and the hitting method in which the game balls flow down into the right area PA2 is called "left hitting". The method of hitting the game ball in such a way as to cause the player to hit the ball is called "right-handed hitting."

<Electrical configuration of gaming machine> Next, the electrical configuration of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 116 is a control block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. In this fifth embodiment, the main control board P100 is equipped with a setting key switch P810, a RAM clear switch P820, a performance display monitor P830, etc., which will be described in detail later. The main control board P100 also includes a played ball detection switch P891 that detects game balls ejected from the gaming area PA, and a frame release switch that detects whether or not the front frame P2 is opened to the outer frame 1. P892 etc. are electrically connected. These played ball detection switch P891 and frame release switch P892 output their respective detection signals to the main CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit P104. Also in this fifth embodiment, the main control display device P27 (see FIG. 106) includes a first special symbol display device P71, a second special symbol display device P72, a first special symbol holding lamp P73, and a second special symbol display device P71. Various display means such as a special symbol holding lamp P74, a normal symbol display device P75, a normal symbol holding lamp P76, a round indicator light P77, a status indicator light P78, a right-handed indicator light P79, and an error indicator light Er are provided. Note that the other configurations are basically the same as those in the second embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

<Main functional configuration of gaming machine> Next, various functions of the gaming machine (mainly main control board P100/performance control board P200) of the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 117 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine (mainly main control board P100/performance control board P200) of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 118 shows the power-on transition mode control means P175 and performance information management means P176 of FIG. It is a functional block diagram extracted and shown. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the main control board P100 of the fifth embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that it includes a power-on transition mode control means P175 and a performance information management means P176. ing.

The power-on transition mode control means P175 controls four modes (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, and gaming mode, which will be described later) to which the game machine changes in response to a selection operation performed when the gaming machine is powered on. As shown in FIG. 118, this power-on control means P175 includes a setting change processing means P175A, a setting confirmation processing means P175B, and a RAM clear processing means P175C. The setting change processing means P175A executes a setting change process when the setting change mode is selected when the gaming machine is powered on. The setting confirmation processing means P175B executes a setting confirmation process when the setting confirmation mode is selected when the gaming machine is powered on. The RAM clear processing means P175C executes RAM clear processing when the RAM clear mode is selected when the gaming machine is powered on. Note that these setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, and RAM clearing processing are executed in the main control side main processing (see FIG. 77) that is performed when the gaming machine is powered on. On the other hand, if the gaming mode (mode that enables gaming) is selected when the gaming machine is powered on, each means P110 to P190 provided on the main control board P100 performs processing related to the progress of the gaming (power off/off). (including time processing) is executed. That is, in this embodiment, each means P110 to P190 provided on the main control board P100 performs processing of the gaming mode (processing related to the progress of the game) when the gaming mode is selected when the gaming machine is powered on. It serves as a game mode processing means that executes (including processing during power outage)). In addition, the game mode in this embodiment is a state in which a series of games such as a special symbol/normal symbol judgment process, a variable display process, a special game execution process, etc. can be progressed (a state in which the game can be executed). ) means. Therefore, at least the processing performed after the main control side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 79) is started is included in the processing within the game mode. The contents of the transition modes (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode) when the power is turned on will be described later.

Performance information management means P176 executes processing related to measurement and display of gaming performance information as processing for managing gaming performance information. As shown in FIG. 118, this performance information management means P176 includes performance information measurement control means P176A and performance information display control means P176B. Performance information measurement control means P176A executes a process of measuring performance information of a game. Performance information display control means P176B executes processing to display performance information of the game. The process of measuring and displaying the game performance information is repeatedly executed at every predetermined interrupt cycle (4 ms) in the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79). However, a part of the process of measuring the performance information of the game and the process of displaying it may be executed in the main control side main process (see FIG. 77) that is performed when the gaming machine is powered on. Note that details regarding measurement and display of game performance information will be described later.

Next, the main control board unit P100U of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 119 is a front view showing the main control board unit P100U of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram showing the performance display monitor P830 mounted on the main control board P100.

As shown in FIG. 119, the main control board unit P100U includes a main control board P100 and a main control board case P100A that accommodates the main control board P100.

The main control board case P100A includes a bottom case P100B that covers the solder side of the main control board P100, and a top case P100C that covers the component mounting side of the main control board P100 such as electronic and electrical components. A so-called crimping mechanism P100D is provided at the end of the case that aligns the top case P100C front to back in the closed state where the top case P100C is attached to the bottom case P100B. Both the bottom case P100B and the top case P100C are formed by a molding method such as injection molding using a colorless and transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, etc.), so that the inside of the main control board case P100A (main control board P100) can be seen from the outside. It is configured to be visible.

The main control board P100 is configured using a rectangular printed wiring board as a board, and on the component mounting side thereof, a main control microcomputer P110 (see FIG. 116), a plurality of connectors PCN1 to PCN5, a setting key switch P810, a RAM clear A switch P820, a performance display monitor P830, and the like are provided. The main control board P100 is fixed to the inner surface of the main control board case P100A (top case P100B) using a plurality of screws.

The setting key switch P810 is a key switch mechanism that can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by rotating a setting change key (a dedicated key managed by a game store clerk, etc.) inserted into a keyhole.

The RAM clear switch P820 is an operation button that is operated to clear the RAM when the gaming machine is powered on, as described in the second embodiment and the like. This RAM clear switch P820 is an operation switch that can be pressed, and is in an ON state when operated, and is in an OFF state when not operated. This RAM clear switch P820 will be described in detail later, but in cooperation with the setting key switch, it is possible to set (change) the setting value of the probability of winning the jackpot (probability of winning the jackpot by determining whether the special symbol is correct or not). Also serves as a setting change switch. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch P820 is mounted on the main control board P100, but the RAM clear switch P820 may be mounted on the power supply board P500 as in the second embodiment described above.

Note that these setting key switch P810 and RAM clear switch P820 are covered by a small door P100E that is swingably provided in the top case P100C, and by swinging this small door P100E upward, the setting key switch P810 and RAM clear switch P820 are covered. P810 and RAM clear switch P820 can be exposed (that is, they can be operated).

The performance display monitor P830 is configured with four-digit display sections P831 to 834, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the performance display monitor P830 includes, in order from left to right, a first display section P831, a second display section P832, a third display section P833, and a fourth display section P834. Each digit display section P831 to P834 is composed of seven LED segments SG1 to SG7 arranged in a figure-eight shape and one LED segment SG8 formed in a dot point shape. In this way, each digit display section P831 to P834 is configured to have eight LED segments SG1 to SG8, respectively. Therefore, each digit display section P831 to P834 can display information such as numbers, letters, and symbols from 0 to 9 by selectively lighting up eight LED segments SG1 to SG8. . In addition, below, in order to distinguish each LED segment SG1 to SG8, the seven LED segments SG1 to SG7 that make up the so-called 7 segments are also referred to as "7 segments SG1 to SG7", and the one that makes up the dot point is also referred to as "7 segments SG1 to SG7". The LED segment SG8 is also referred to as a "dot segment SG8." In this embodiment, the four display sections P831 to P834 are controlled by dynamic lighting control so that every interrupt (every 4 ms), the first display section P831→the second display section P832→the third display section P833→the fourth display section P834→ First display section P831→..., the lighting targets are sequentially switched, and by utilizing the afterimage phenomenon, all four display areas P831 to P834 are illuminated (continuously lit) to the human eye. It can be made to look like this. Note that each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or simply a lamp.

Although the details will be described later, the upper two digit display sections P831 and P832 of the performance display monitor P830 are an identification display section (identification symbol) that displays an identifier (identification symbol) for identifying gaming performance information, error type, etc. identification segment) 830a. Further, the lower two digit display sections P833 and P834 of the performance display monitor P830 constitute a ratio display section (ratio segment) 830b that displays a numerical value (base value) indicating performance information of the game. Further, in this embodiment, the set value of the jackpot probability (set value in 6 stages from "1" to "6" in this embodiment) is displayed on the fourth display section P834. In this way, various types of information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 are visible even from the outside through the transparent main control board case P100A. In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, instead of displaying the set value of the jackpot probability on the performance information display monitor P830, a dedicated display device for displaying the set value may be provided.

Next, the basic gaming specifications of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the basic game specifications of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

<Setting Value> First, the setting value of the jackpot probability will be explained with reference to FIG. 121. In this embodiment, the winning probability (jackpot probability) that the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot is determined by six levels of set values. In this embodiment, six levels of setting values are provided: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Below, when the setting value is 1, "setting value 1", when the setting value is 2, "setting value 2", when the setting value is 3, "setting value 3", and when the setting value is 4. A certain case is also called "setting value 4," a case where the setting value is 5 is called "setting value 5," and a case where the setting value is 6 is also called "setting value 6." As a modification of this embodiment, only one setting value may be set that determines the winning probability (jackpot probability) that the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot (in other words, one setting value (setting value A gaming machine with a one-stage setting having only 1) may be adopted. As a result, in this one-stage setting gaming machine, only "1" is displayed as the current setting value in the setting confirmation mode, and processing that does not change the setting value from "1" in the setting change mode (for example, the setting value Even if you perform an operation to change the setting value, the setting value will not be changed from ``1'' to another value, such as ``1'' → ``1'' → ``1'' → ``1'' →...) By doing so, it becomes possible to design a gaming machine having a software configuration and hardware configuration that is substantially equivalent to a gaming machine equipped with a setting change function (gaming machine having multiple levels of setting values).

In this embodiment, the jackpot probability for each set value increases by one step in the order of set value 1 < set value 2 < set value 3 < set value 4 < set value 5 < set value 6. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state, the jackpot probability is "1/320" when the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability is "1/301" when the setting value is 2, and the jackpot probability is "1/301" when the setting value is 3. At a certain time, the jackpot probability is ``1/280'', when the setting value is 4, the jackpot probability is ``1/260'', when the setting value is 5, the jackpot probability is ``1/240'', and when the setting value is 6. The jackpot probability is "1/220". Also, when the gaming state is a high probability state, the jackpot probability is "1/102" when the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability is "1/95" when the setting value is 2, and the jackpot probability is "1/95" when the setting value is 3. The jackpot probability is "1/89", the jackpot probability when the setting value is 4 is "1/82", the jackpot probability when the setting value is 5 is "1/76", and the jackpot probability when the setting value is 6. The probability is "1/70". In addition, for each set value 1 to 6, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to be the same ratio (in this example, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state The denominator of the jackpot probability in the state and the denominator of the jackpot probability in the high probability state are rounded to the first decimal place). In other words, no matter which setting value 1 to 6 is selected, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (change rate of jackpot probability) is the same. Note that these six levels of set values are displayed on the fourth display section P834 of the performance display monitor P830, as described above.

<Determination of validity of special symbols> Next, determination of validity of special symbols according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram showing the special symbol validity lottery table of the fifth embodiment. In this embodiment, a special symbol lottery table corresponding to each setting value 1 to 6 is provided, and the special symbol lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting value is selected to perform the special symbol validity determination process. is designed to be executed. Here, FIG. 122(A) is a special symbol lottery table corresponding to setting value 1, FIG. 122(B) is a special symbol lottery table corresponding to setting value 2, and FIG. 122(C) is corresponding to setting value 3. 122 (D) is the special symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value 4, FIG. 122 (E) is the special symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value 5, and FIG. 122 (F) is the setting. This is a special symbol success/failure lottery table corresponding to the value 6.

As in the second embodiment, each special symbol winning/failure lottery table is a table that is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not activated, and a table that is referred to in a gaming state where the special symbol probability variation function is not activated. table that is referenced in the gaming state (high probability state). In addition, each special symbol success/failure lottery table is associated with the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the special symbol validity determination (big hit, miss). In addition, in FIG. 122, the jackpot probability is added as a reference value.

As shown in FIG. 122(A), when the setting value is 1, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204", and in the high probability state, the special symbol If the winning random number falls within the range of 0 to 643, it will be a jackpot. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/320" and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/102".

As shown in FIG. 122(B), when the setting value is 2, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 217", and in the high probability state, the special symbol If the winning random number falls within the range of 0 to 686, it will be a jackpot. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/301" and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/95".

As shown in FIG. 122(C), when the setting value is 3, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 233", and in the high probability state, the special symbol If the winning random number falls within the range of 0 to 735, it will be a jackpot. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/280" and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/89".

As shown in FIG. 122(D), when the setting value is 4, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 251", and in the high probability state, the special symbol If the winning random number falls within the range of 0 to 791, it will be a jackpot. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/260" and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/82".

As shown in FIG. 122(E), when the setting value is 5, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 272", and in the high probability state, the special symbol If the winning random number falls within the range of 0 to 857, it will be a jackpot. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/240" and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/76".

As shown in FIG. 122(F), when the setting value is 6, in the low probability state, a jackpot occurs when the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 297", and in the high probability state, the special symbol If the winning random number falls within the range of 0 to 935, it will be a jackpot. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/220" and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/7".

<Jackpot Type> Next, the jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of the fifth embodiment will be explained. In the fifth embodiment, when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is "jackpot", the jackpot type (jackpot symbol, symbol group) is determined with reference to the special symbol jackpot symbol table shown in FIG. 123. As mentioned above, "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, and "normal jackpot" means the special jackpot after the end of the jackpot game. It means a jackpot (non-certain variable jackpot) that does not trigger the probability variation function of the symbol. Details will be described later, but if you win a specific jackpot, the probability variation function of the special symbol will be activated after the end of the jackpot game, and the number of times the special symbol will change will be displayed the specified ST number of times starting from the end of the jackpot game. (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). In addition, even if you win either a "specific jackpot" or a "regular jackpot," the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and electric chew support function will operate from the end of the jackpot game, and will start counting from the end of the jackpot game. This continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches a predetermined number (100 times). In addition, in this example, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric support support function start operating at the same time and end their operation at the same time, so the "number of fluctuation time reduction times" and the "number of electric support support functions" are the same. (Therefore, in FIG. 123, the "number of times the fluctuation time is shortened" and the "number of times the electric support is activated" are written in the same column).

FIG. 123(A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. This first special symbol jackpot symbol table includes the symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electronic support frequency), and the prescribed round of the jackpot game for the symbol random number per special symbol. The opening time of the big prize opening P54 of each round is associated with each other. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are set: 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

If the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is The long opening time is set to ``29 seconds'', in which there is a sufficient possibility that the number of game balls entering the winning hole P54 will reach the specified number (specified count number: 10). In addition, if you win the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of probability fluctuations "100 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions "100 times", The number of supports is set to "100 times", and a variable probability gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability game state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within the specified ST number (100 times). If the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

If you win the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)", the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is The long opening time is set to ``29 seconds'', in which there is a sufficient possibility that the number of game balls entering the winning hole P54 will reach the specified number (specified count number: 10). In addition, if you win "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" in the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of probability fluctuations will be "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions will be "100", and the The number of support "100 times" is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable reaches a predetermined number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this predetermined number (100 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (100 times), a transition is made to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

FIG. 123(B) is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. This second special symbol jackpot symbol table includes the symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electronic support frequency), and the prescribed round of the jackpot game for the symbol random number per special symbol. The opening time of the big prize opening P54 of each round is associated with each other. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are set: 8R specific jackpot (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D).

If you win the second special symbol "8R specific jackpot (symbol group C)", the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is "8 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is The long opening time is set to ``29 seconds'' in which there is a sufficient possibility that the number of game balls entering the winning hole P54 will reach the specified number (specified count number: 10). In addition, if you win the second special symbol "8R specific jackpot (symbol group C)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of probability fluctuations "100 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions "100 times", The number of supports is set to ``100 times,'' and a variable probability game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). If the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

If you win the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)", the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is The long opening time is set to ``29 seconds'' in which there is a sufficient possibility that the number of game balls entering the winning hole P54 will reach the specified number (specified count number: 10). In addition, if you win "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" in the second special symbol, the number of probability fluctuations will be "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions will be "100", and The number of support "100 times" is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable reaches a predetermined number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this predetermined number of times (100 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (100 times), a transition is made to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

Here, whether the number of fluctuating displays of the special symbol has reached the prescribed ST number or the predetermined number is determined by the total number of fluctuating displays of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuating displays of the second special symbol. The determination is made based on whether or not a predetermined number of times has been reached. In addition, as a modified example, the judgment may be made based on whether the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol which is the main character of the game among the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the specified ST number or a predetermined number. It may be configured as follows.

As shown in FIG. 121, regarding the normal symbol game of the fifth embodiment (probability of winning the normal symbol, opening time of the normal electric accessory P522, etc.), the normal symbol game of the second embodiment (the winning probability of the normal symbol) (probability, opening time of the normal electric accessory P522, etc.), so the explanation will be omitted.

<Number of Prize Balls> Next, the number of prize balls in the fifth embodiment will be explained. In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121, the number of prize balls set for each winning hole (the unit prize ball number paid out based on winning of one game ball) is "4" for the first starting hole P51. The second starting opening P52 is set to ``1 piece'', the general winning openings P61 to P64 are set to ``3 pieces'', and the big winning opening P54 is set to ``15 pieces''. Note that the number of unit award balls is not limited to that illustrated in the fifth embodiment, and other number of unit award balls may be applied.

<Transition mode when power is turned on> Next, the transition mode when power is turned on of the gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation at power-on and the transition mode. In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124, there are four transition modes that can be transitioned to when the gaming machine is powered on (recovered from power off): setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, and gaming mode. is provided. In other words, in this embodiment, by performing the predetermined operation shown in FIG. 124 at the same time as the gaming machine is powered on, it is possible to select the transition mode to which the gaming machine is to be shifted when the power is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 124, the operations performed when the gaming machine is powered on include operation of the setting key switch P810, operation of the RAM clear switch P820, operation of opening/closing the front frame P2, and operation of the power switch. Note that whether or not the front frame P2 is opened to the outer frame 1 is determined based on the detection information of the frame opening switch P892 described above. This frame opening switch P892 is turned ON when the front frame P2 is opened to the outer frame 1, and turned OFF when the front frame P2 is closed to the outer frame 1. In this embodiment, when transitioning to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the front frame P2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame release switch P892 detects the open state of the front frame P2). However, when transitioning to RAM clear mode or game mode when the power is turned on, the front frame P2 must be in the open state with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame release switch P892 must be in the front frame P2 It is not a condition that the switch is in the ON state (when the open state of the switch is detected). In other words, when switching to RAM clear mode or game mode when the power is turned on, the front frame P2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame release switch P892 is in the ON state when it detects the open state of the front frame P2). Even if the front frame P2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 1 (in the OFF state when the frame open switch P892 detects the closed state of the front frame P2), the predetermined operation (described later) must be performed when the power is turned on. It is possible to migrate by doing this. As a modified example, even if the power is turned on and the mode changes to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the front frame P2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame release switch P892 is in the open state of the front frame P2). In other words, the condition is that the front frame P2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state when the frame release switch P892 detects the open state of the front frame P2). However, even if the front frame P2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame release switch P892 is in the OFF state when it detects the closed state of the front frame P2), the prescribed operation (described later) must be performed when the power is turned on. It may also be configured to allow migration. In addition, no matter which mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode) the game mode is shifted to, the effect display device P70 is configured to display a power-off recovery image.

In the setting change mode, when the front frame P2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (in the ON state when the frame release switch P892 detects the open state of the front frame P2), the setting key switch P810 is turned ON, and the RAM is This mode is entered when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the clear switch P820 turned on. When moving to this setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the fourth display section P834 of the performance display monitor P830 first displays the current settings that were set before the power was turned on (at the time of the most recent power cut). The value is displayed. That is, when transitioning to the setting change mode, the current setting value (the setting value that was already set before the transition to the setting change mode) can be checked first. As a modification, a predetermined setting value (for example, "1") may be always displayed regardless of the setting value that was already set before transition to the setting change mode. Further, while this setting change mode is being executed, the setting value can be changed by pressing down the RAM clear switch P820. Specifically, each time the RAM clear switch P820 is pressed, the setting value display changes from "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → It changes in this order. At this time, when the setting key switch P810 is turned OFF while the desired set value is displayed, the set value (desired set value) is determined and the setting change mode ends. When this setting change mode ends, the game mode shifts to a game mode in which games can be played, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 is switched from setting value information to performance information. Furthermore, when the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 switches from setting value information to performance information upon completion of the setting change mode, all display sections P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 blink for a predetermined period of time. An initial display (all blinking display) is performed (details will be described later). As a modification, when the front frame P2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state in which the frame release switch P892 detects the open state of the front frame P2), the setting key switch P810 is turned ON, and In addition to turning on the power with the RAM clear switch P820 turned ON (when the power switch is turned ON), you can also use the Even if the power is turned on (the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch P810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch P820 turned ON, the During the recovery of the display of the effect display device P70 (particularly for one second after the display has been recovered), specifically, while the power-off recovery image (power-off recovery screen) is being displayed (especially, Even if the setting key switch P810 is switched from OFF to ON during the first 1 second of 3 seconds during which the power-off recovery image is displayed, the configuration may be such that the setting change mode is entered. With such a configuration, even if you mistakenly enter the RAM clear mode when the power is turned on, you can change the state of the setting key after the power is turned on to switch to the setting change mode. . In addition, even in the case of this configuration, similarly to the above, it is possible to check that the front frame P2 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state when the frame release switch P892 detects the open state of the front frame P2). In other words, even if the front frame P2 is open with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame release switch P892 is ON when the open state of the front frame P2 is detected), the front frame with respect to the outer frame 1 is not set as a condition. Even when P2 is in the closed state (the OFF state when the frame opening switch P892 detects the closed state of the front frame P2), the configuration may be such that the transition can be made by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on.

In the setting confirmation mode, when the front frame P2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (in the ON state when the frame release switch P892 detects the open state of the front frame P2), the setting key switch P810 is turned ON, and the RAM is This mode is entered when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the clear switch P820 turned off. When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the current setting value that was set before the power was turned on (when the power was turned off) is displayed as a dot on the fourth display section P834 of the performance display monitor P830, as shown in FIG. 125(B). Displayed with Thereby, when the setting change mode is entered, the current setting values can be confirmed. Note that the reason why the setting values are displayed with dots in this setting confirmation mode is to distinguish them from the display of setting values (display without dots) in the case of transitioning to the above-mentioned setting change mode. Then, when the setting key switch P810 is turned OFF, the setting confirmation mode ends. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the mode shifts to a game mode in which games can be played, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 is switched from setting value information to performance information. Furthermore, when the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 switches from setting value information to performance information upon completion of the setting confirmation mode, all display sections P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 blink for a predetermined period of time. An initial display (all blinking display) is performed (details will be described later). As a modified example, when the front frame P2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state in which the frame release switch P892 detects the open state of the front frame P2), the setting key switch P810 is turned ON, and In addition to turning on the power with the RAM clear switch P820 turned OFF (turning the power switch ON), you can also use the Even if the power is turned on (the power switch is turned ON) with the setting key switch P810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch P820 turned OFF, the During the recovery of the display of the effect display device P70 (particularly for one second after the display returns), specifically, while the power-off recovery image (power-off recovery screen) is being displayed (especially, Even if the setting key switch P810 is switched from OFF to ON during the first 1 second of 3 seconds during which the power-off recovery image is displayed, the configuration may be such that the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. With such a configuration, even if the user mistakenly performs an operation to shift to the game mode when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode by changing the state of the setting key after the power is turned on. In addition, even in the case of this configuration, similarly to the above, it is possible to check that the front frame P2 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 1 (the ON state when the frame release switch P892 detects the open state of the front frame P2). In other words, even if the front frame P2 is open with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame release switch P892 is ON when the open state of the front frame P2 is detected), the front frame with respect to the outer frame 1 is not set as a condition. Even when P2 is in the closed state (the OFF state when the frame opening switch P892 detects the closed state of the front frame P2), the configuration may be such that the transition can be made by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on.

The RAM clear mode is a mode that enters when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch P810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch P820 pressed (turned ON). It is. When shifting to this RAM clear mode, a predetermined storage area of the RAMP 103 mounted on the main control microcomputer P110 is initialized (so-called RAM clear processing is performed). This RAM clear mode automatically ends after the RAM clear process is executed. When the RAM clear mode ends, the game mode shifts to a game mode in which games can be played, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 is switched from set value information to performance information. Furthermore, when the information displayed on the performance display monitor P830 switches from setting value information to performance information upon completion of the RAM clear mode, all display sections P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 blink for a predetermined period of time. An initial display (all blinking display) is performed (details will be described later).

The gaming mode is a mode that is entered when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch P810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch P820 turned OFF. This gaming mode is transferred after restoring the backup data saved in the RAMP 103 when the power was cut off immediately before. In addition, when transitioning to the gaming mode after the setting change mode, the transition is made after the setting change is completed and the backup data saved in the RAMP 103 is deleted, and when transitioning to the gaming mode after the setting confirmation mode, the setting The transition is made after confirmation is completed and the backup data stored in the RAMP 103 is restored, and when transitioning to the gaming mode after the RAM clear mode, the transition is made after the backup data stored in the RAMP 103 is erased. When shifting to this game mode, a game becomes possible, and an initial display (all blinking display) in which all display sections P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 blink for a predetermined time is performed (details will be described later).

<<Processing during setting change mode>> Next, processing during setting change mode when the power is turned on will be described.

(Notification content during setting change) First, when the transition mode at power-on is setting change mode, performance display monitor P830, main control display device P27, external information terminal board P600, speaker P11, frame lamp P10, effect display The content of the notification by the device P70 will be explained. FIG. 126(A) is a diagram showing the content of notification during the setting change mode.

When the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the set value of the jackpot probability is displayed on the fourth display section P834 of the performance display monitor P830. As mentioned above, while this setting change mode is being executed, each time the RAM clear switch P820 is pressed, the setting value display changes from "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5". → "6" → "1" →... The display switches in this order. In addition, in this setting change mode, a numerical value indicating the setting value (for example, the number "1" when the setting value is "1") is displayed by lighting in the 7 segments SG1 to SG7 of the fourth display section P834. , no dot is lit and displayed in the dot segment SG8 of this fourth display section P834 (the dot segment SG8 is turned off).

Furthermore, when the setting change mode is entered, the error indicator lamp Er of the main control display device P27 is displayed as being lit. This lighting display of the error indicator lamp Er continues from the start of the setting change mode until the end of the setting change mode. Note that the other indicator lights P71 to P79 of the main control display device P27 are turned off from the start of the setting change mode until the end of the setting change mode. As a modification thereof, all of the other indicator lights P71 to P79 or a part of the indicator lights may be displayed as being lit or blinking. In that case, it is preferable that the plurality of LED segments constituting each indicator light be displayed with all the lights on or all with the LED segments blinking. As another modification, all indicator lights of the main control display device P27, including the error indicator light Er of the main control display device P27, may be configured to be turned off.

Furthermore, when the setting change mode is entered, a security signal is output from the external information terminal board P600 to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine. Note that output of this security signal is started from the start of the setting change mode, and output is stopped after a predetermined time (128 ms) has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Further, when the setting change mode is entered, the speaker P11 outputs a voice saying "setting value is being changed". This voice "Setting value changing in progress" is repeatedly output from the start of the setting change mode until the end.

Further, when the setting change mode is entered, a setting change in progress image showing the text "Settings changing" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70. This setting changing image is displayed continuously from the time the setting change mode is started until it ends.

(Putting out prize balls while changing settings) Next, the paying out of prize balls when the transition mode when the power is turned on is the setting change mode will be described. First, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the payout of all prize balls is regulated until the setting change mode ends, and no prize balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit P34. That is, while the setting change mode is being executed, the payout of prize balls that is performed based on the game ball entering each winning hole including the big winning hole P54 and the general winning hole P64 is regulated. In this embodiment, payout of prize balls is permitted when the setting change mode ends and the game mode starts. Note that when the setting change mode ends, a RAM clear mode may be started instead of the gaming mode (the gaming mode may be started when the RAM clear mode ends).

Here, a process will be described in the case where a power outage occurs during the payout of prize balls and the setting change mode is entered upon recovery from the power outage. Specifically, if a power outage occurs while prize balls are being paid out in the prize ball payout unit P34, information on the remaining number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out is backed up in the storage area of the RAMP 103. The power is cut off while the Here, if a normal power-on operation (operation of turning on the power without turning on the RAM clear switch P820) is performed when the power is restored from a power failure, information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored in the storage area of the RAMP 103. Since this is stored, the unpaid number of prize balls will be paid out after the power is restored. On the other hand, when the power is restored from a power failure, if a transition operation to the setting change mode is performed (operation of turning on the power by turning on the setting key switch P810 and the RAM clear switch P820), the storage area of the RAMP 103 is Since the stored game information is deleted, the information on the number of unpaid prize balls that was backed up at the time of the power outage is also deleted, so that the unpaid prize balls will not be paid out when the power is restored after the power outage. Become. Note that the information on the number of unpaid prize balls that was backed up at the time of power cut-off is configured not to be erased when the setting change mode is started, but to be erased when the setting change mode is ended.

In addition, if the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, even if the game ball enters any of the winning holes (for example, the general winning hole P6 By letting a game ball enter the ball, forcibly opening the grand prize opening P54 to allow a game ball to enter, or forcibly turning on each winning opening switch, the I of the main control board P100 can be changed. Even if an input signal is input to the input port of the /O port circuit P104), if the setting change mode ends and the transition to the gaming mode does not occur (main control side timer interrupt processing starts and input processing (S53) , unless the winning monitoring process (S59), prize ball control process (S60), etc. are executed), the main CPU 101 will not access the input port of the I/O port circuit P104, so game balls will not enter the various winning slots. Information that the ball has entered the ball is not stored in the storage area of the RAMP 103, and the prize ball is not paid out while this setting change mode is being executed.

(Other processes during setting change) Next, other processes when the setting change mode is entered upon power-on will be described. Even if the firing handle P12 is touched and a rotational operation is performed during the setting change mode, the operation of the firing handle P12 is determined to be invalid, or the configuration is such that the touching of the firing handle P12 and the rotational operation are not detected. (configured to limit launch detection). In other words, even if the firing handle P12 is touched and rotated, the game ball cannot be fired. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent accidental firing of a game ball (use of a game ball) or accidental ball entry due to accidentally touching and rotating the firing handle P12 during the setting change mode. This can be prevented in advance. Further, even if the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or more during the setting change mode, the waiting demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) is not displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being mistakenly recognized as having ended even though the setting change mode is in progress. In addition, during the setting change mode, it is configured not to start the fluctuating display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation start conditions are not satisfied), and during the setting change mode, it does not start the fluctuating display of normal symbols (normal symbols The fluctuation start condition is not satisfied). With this configuration, even if an unexpected ball enters during the setting change mode (such as a game ball that has stayed in the game area PA entering the ball), an unintended correctness judgment and a fluctuation display based on the result can be performed. By not having such a setting, it is possible to prevent the user from misperceiving whether the currently set mode is the setting change mode or the game mode. Furthermore, while it is possible to detect specific errors (for example, door/frame opening errors and magnetic sensor errors) even in the setting change mode, the system is configured so that error notifications regarding the specific errors are not displayed. In addition, it is configured to be able to detect and notify predetermined errors (for example, a setting value abnormality error or a setting change abnormality error, which will be described later). With this configuration, unlike the gaming mode, during the setting change mode, error notifications for specific errors are restricted and priority is given to notifications for predetermined errors (errors related to settings), so that settings can be changed. It is possible to set the error notification mode to be suitable for the mode, and unlike specifications that limit firing detection, display of the standby demo screen, and variable display of special symbols and normal symbols during the setting change mode, it is possible to set the error notification mode to be suitable for the mode. Since there are no restrictions, the player himself/herself can appropriately grasp the current situation.

In addition, as a modification when the setting change mode is entered, during the setting change mode, the rotation operation by touching the firing handle P12 may be enabled (the game can be changed by touching the firing handle P12 and performing the rotation operation). (allowing the ball to be launched). Further, during the setting change mode, a waiting demonstration screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) may be displayed when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or more. Further, when an error is detected during the setting change mode, an error notification image may be displayed. In that case, the error notification image will be set in a layer above or below the layer of the above-mentioned image "Setting value changing".

(Processing when returning from setting change mode) Next, processing when returning from setting change mode to gaming mode will be described. Even if you continue to hold the firing handle P12 (touch it and then rotate it) from the setting change mode until the game mode that transitions after the setting change mode ends (a specific time has elapsed from the start of the game mode), (or even if you keep touching it with your hand), the touch effect will not be executed (the touch operation will be disabled). Note that touch performance refers to when a player touches the firing handle P12 and performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the firing handle P12) during a waiting demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance). This is a performance that is executed under certain conditions, and specifically, during a waiting demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance), the player touches the firing handle P12 and performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the firing handle P12). This is an effect in which a voice saying "Start the game!" is output and a specific character is displayed on the effect display device P70. In addition, when returning to the gaming mode from the setting change mode, if the state where no game is played (playing interruption state) continues for a predetermined period of time immediately after returning or after returning, the standby demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) will be activated. is configured to move to In other words, even if you continue to hold the firing handle P12 from the setting change mode to the game mode that shifts after the setting change mode ends (the standby demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) that is executed after the game mode starts) (Even if you continue to rotate after touching your hand, or even if you continue to touch your hand), the touch performance is configured so that it will not be executed during the standby demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance). There is. Also, even if you keep pressing the volume button (left key or right key) from the setting change mode to the game mode that transitions after the setting change mode ends, the volume level will not change during the game mode (the volume operation will not change). is configured to be invalid). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the volume level does not change (the volume operation becomes invalid). Note that since the volume adjustment can be performed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration does not assume that the standby demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) is in progress in the game mode. Also, when returning to gaming mode, the volume level will be set to the initial setting (for example, "1" to "5" regardless of the light intensity that was set before entering the setting change mode (before the power was turned off)) The light intensity level is always set to "3" among the light intensity levels. Also, even if you keep pressing the light level button (up key or down key) from the setting change mode to the game mode that transitions after the setting change mode ends, the light level will not change during the game mode (the light level will not change). is configured to be invalid). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the light amount level does not change (the light amount operation becomes invalid). Incidentally, since the light amount adjustment can be executed even during the variable display in the gaming mode, this configuration does not assume that the waiting demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) is in progress in the gaming mode. Also, when returning to gaming mode, the light intensity level will be set to the initial setting (for example, "1" to "5" regardless of the light intensity that was set before entering the setting change mode (before the power was cut off). The light intensity level is always set to "3" among the light intensity levels.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on and the setting change mode is entered, the configuration may be such that low-priority error notifications (abnormality notifications) are not executed, while high-priority error notifications (abnormality notifications) are executed. . In this way, when switching to settings change mode when the power is turned on, by ignoring low-priority errors, it is possible to avoid interfering with processing during the settings change mode, and to reduce the processing burden caused by the error notification. can be prevented from increasing. Here, the high-priority error is an error type (type 1 error) whose priority (importance) is set to a high level, which prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game. This type 1 error includes a magnetic sensor error, a radio wave sensor error, a disconnection/short circuit power supply error, an excessive prize winning error, a door/frame opening error, a setting value abnormality error, a setting change abnormality error, etc. A low priority error is an error type whose priority (importance) is set to a low level, making it prohibited or difficult to continue the game. This type 2 error includes, as a payout error (prize ball error), a ball tray full error, a ball catching/ball jamming error, a ball no error, and the like. Note that a setting value abnormality error is an error that occurs when a value that is not supposed to be set as a setting value (for example, a value that is not within the range of 1 to 6) is set, and a setting change error occurs. An error occurs when the power is cut off while the settings are being changed and an operation is performed to switch to a mode other than the settings change mode, in other words, the settings (desired settings) have not been finalized. This is an error that occurs when an operation is performed to move to a mode other than the settings change mode, and it is assumed that an abnormal operation has been performed. The contents of other errors have been explained in the second embodiment, so their explanation will be omitted here. In addition, when the power is turned on and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the firing of game balls is restricted (the firing handle P12 is disabled) regardless of whether a type 1 error or a type 2 error occurs. You may also do so.

<<Processing during setting confirmation mode>> Next, processing during the setting confirmation mode at power-on will be described.

(Notification content during setting confirmation) First, performance display monitor P830, main control display device P27, external information terminal board P600, speaker P11, frame lamp P10, effect display when the transition mode at power-on is setting confirmation mode. The content of the notification by the device P70 will be explained. FIG. 126(B) is a diagram showing the content of notification during the setting confirmation mode.

When the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, the fourth display section P834 of the performance display monitor P830 displays the current setting value that was set before the power was turned on (at the time of the most recent power-off). In addition, when moving to this setting confirmation mode, the number indicating the setting value (for example, if the setting value is "1", the number "1") lights up in the 7 segments SG1 to SG7 of the fourth display section P834. After being displayed, a dot is displayed by lighting on the dot segment SG8 of this fourth display section P834. In other words, the current setting value and the dot are displayed in pairs on the fourth display section P834. The reason why the current setting value is displayed with dots on the fourth display section P834 when the setting confirmation mode is entered is that the setting value is displayed when the setting change mode is entered (display without dots) as described above. This is to distinguish between In this way, when the device enters the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the current setting values can be confirmed.

Further, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the error indicator lamp Er of the main control display device P27 is displayed as being lit. This lighting display of the error indicator lamp Er continues from the start of the setting confirmation mode until the end of the setting confirmation mode. Note that the other indicator lights P71 to P79 of the main control display device P27 are turned off from the start of the setting confirmation mode until the end of the setting confirmation mode. As a modification thereof, all of the other indicator lights P71 to 79 or a part of the indicator lights may be displayed as being lit or blinking. In that case, it is preferable that the plurality of LED segments constituting each indicator light be displayed with all the lights on or all with the LED segments blinking. As another modification, all the indicator lights of the main control display device P27, including the error indicator light Er of the main control display device P27, may be configured to be turned off.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, a security signal is output from the external information terminal board P600 to an external device (such as a data display or a hall computer) installed outside the gaming machine. Note that output of this security signal is started from the start of the setting confirmation mode, and output is stopped after a predetermined time (128 ms) has elapsed from the end of the setting confirmation mode.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the speaker P11 outputs a voice saying "Setting value confirmation is in progress." This voice "Setting value confirmation in progress" is repeatedly output from the start of the setting confirmation mode until the end.

Further, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, a setting confirmation image indicating the words "Setting confirmation in progress" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70. This setting confirmation image is displayed continuously from the time the setting confirmation mode is started until it ends.

(Putting out prize balls during setting confirmation) Next, a description will be given of putting out prize balls when the transition mode when the power is turned on is the setting confirmation mode.

Here, a process will be described in the case where a power outage occurs during the payout of prize balls and the setting confirmation mode is entered upon recovery from the power outage. Specifically, if a power outage occurs while prize balls are being paid out in the prize ball payout unit P34, information on the remaining number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out is backed up in the storage area of the RAMP 103. The power is cut off while the When returning from a power failure, if you perform an operation to switch to the setting confirmation mode (turn on the power by turning on the setting key switch P810 while keeping the RAM clear switch P820 OFF), unused data will be saved in the storage area of the RAMP103. Although information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is stored, the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended until this setting confirmation mode is finished and the game mode is entered. The reason for temporarily suspending the payout of prize balls until the setting confirmation mode ends is that when transitioning to this setting confirmation mode, the game store clerk, etc. opens the front frame P2 and opens the front frame P2 from the back side of the front frame P2. It is necessary to operate the setting key switch P810, etc., and when the front frame P2 is in the open state, the supply of game balls from the game parlor's ball supply device to the game machine will not be performed normally, and there is a risk that the prize balls will not be paid out correctly. Because there is. Therefore, the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the payout of prize balls is resumed after shifting to the game mode.

In addition, if the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, even if the game ball enters any of the winning holes (for example, the general winning hole P64) after the power is turned on until the setting confirmation mode ends. By letting a game ball enter the ball, forcibly opening the grand prize opening P54 to allow a game ball to enter, or forcibly turning on each winning opening switch, the I of the main control board P100 can be changed. Even if an input signal is input to the input port of the /O port circuit P104), if the setting confirmation mode ends and the transition to the gaming mode does not occur (the main control side timer interrupt processing starts and the input processing (S53) , unless the winning monitoring process (S59), prize ball control process (S60), etc. are executed), the main CPU 101 does not access the input port of the I/O port circuit P104. Information that the ball has entered the ball is not stored in the storage area of the RAMP 103, and the prize ball is not paid out while this setting confirmation mode is being executed.

In addition, if the jackpot game that was interrupted due to a power outage is resumed after the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode is started, during the execution of the restarted jackpot game, The prize ball is not paid out based on the game ball entering the grand prize opening P54 during the setting confirmation mode mentioned above, and the game ball entering the grand prize opening P54 during the setting confirmation mode mentioned above. The display of the cumulative number of awarded pitches (including updated display) and count-up effects based on this will not be performed. On the other hand, if the game ball enters the big winning hole P54 during the restarted jackpot game (for example, during the round game immediately after the return), the game ball enters the big winning hole P54. Although the payout of prize balls is performed based on this, the display (updated display) of the cumulative number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the big winning hole P54 and the count-up effect are not performed. The reason for restricting the display of the cumulative prize ball count (updated display) and execution of the count-up effect after the jackpot game is restarted is when the power is restored after a power outage, or when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode is After it has started, by displaying a predetermined power-off recovery image (power-off recovery screen) and a special jackpot screen after power-off recovery (a special round screen after power-off recovery), you can check the winnings and the number of prize balls. This is to give priority to notification that the power has been restored after power outage rather than notification of information. In addition, as a modification example, if the jackpot game is restarted by returning from a power outage or by ending the setting confirmation mode and starting the gaming mode, the round game at the time of restarting will be restarted by a predetermined power outage. A return image (power-off recovery screen) is displayed, and the normal mode is displayed from the start of the next round game of the round game at the time of restart (for example, the 6th round game if restarted from the 5th round game). It may be configured to switch to the round performance (during jackpot performance) and display (update display) the cumulative number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the big winning hole P54 or perform a count-up performance.

In addition, as a further modification, when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts, a certain round of the jackpot game that was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power outage is restarted, and the certain round After the power-off recovery image is displayed due to the power-off recovery (or when the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming mode starts) during a game, the power-off recovery image will be 5 seconds have passed since the image was displayed), or when the certain round game ends, normal jackpot performances (for example, the above-mentioned super longevity jackpot performance, long life jackpot performance, joy jackpot performance) (In other words, after a predetermined time has elapsed, or, for example, during the third round of round play, the power is cut off and the power is turned off again (or the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode returns). (has been started), the normal round performance may be resumed from the start of the fourth round round game). As mentioned above, the round performance screen corresponding to the type of jackpot performance (super longevity jackpot performance, long life jackpot performance, joy jackpot performance) is displayed, that is, when the jackpot performance pattern is super longevity jackpot performance. In the case of the Super Long Jackpot Round screen (for example, a production screen in which five character introductions are displayed on a rainbow-colored background), in the case of a Long Life Jackpot production, the Longevity Jackpot Round screen (for example, a production screen on which five character introductions are displayed on a red background). If it is a joy jackpot performance, a joy jackpot round screen (for example, a performance screen where character introductions for one person are displayed on a blue background) is displayed. It is configured so that When configured in this way, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game after the restarted round game, but it starts from "0" instead of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed before the power is cut off. The cumulative award pitch counter will also be cleared to "0" and the game will start. However, even if you start from "0", when the game ball enters the big winning hole P54, the cumulative prize ball number display, count-up performance, emphasis performance (enlarged display), etc. will be executed, and furthermore, the game will be restarted. If a game ball exceeding the specified number enters the jackpot P54 (over-winning) during the execution of the jackpot game, the over-winning effect is executed, and similarly, the restarted jackpot game is executed. During the game, when a game ball enters the general winning hole P64, the cumulative prize ball number display is updated, the count-up effect, and the bonus winning effect are executed.

In yet another modification, when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts, a certain round of the jackpot game that was interrupted due to a power outage is resumed, and the corresponding round game is resumed. After a power-off recovery image is displayed due to the power-off recovery (or when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts) during execution of a certain round game, a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds have passed since the power-off recovery image was displayed) or when the round game ends, the game returns to the special jackpot screen after power-off recovery (the round screen dedicated to after power-off recovery). (In other words, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or when the power is turned off and restored during the third round of play, or when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts. ), it may be possible to return to the normal round performance from the start of the fourth round round game), and if so configured, during the execution of the jackpot game after the restarted round game. The cumulative prize ball number display is not performed, and even if the game ball enters the big winning hole P54, the cumulative prize ball number display, count-up performance, emphasis performance (enlarged display), etc. are not performed, and furthermore, the game is restarted. Even if a game ball that exceeds the specified number enters the jackpot P54 (over-win) during the execution of the jackpot game, the over-win performance will not be executed and the jackpot will be resumed in the same way. Even if a game ball enters the general winning hole P64 during the execution of the game, the cumulative prize ball number display, count-up performance, and bonus winning performance will not be executed.

(Other Processes During Setting Confirmation) Next, other processes when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on will be described. Even if the firing handle P12 is touched and a rotational operation is performed during the setting confirmation mode, the operation of the firing handle P12 is determined to be invalid, or the configuration is such that touching the firing handle P12 and the rotational operation are not detected. (configured to limit launch detection). In other words, even if the firing handle P12 is touched and rotated, the game ball cannot be fired. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent accidental firing of a game ball (use of a game ball) or accidental ball entry due to accidentally touching and rotating the firing handle P12 during the setting confirmation mode. This can be prevented in advance. Furthermore, even if the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or more during the setting confirmation mode, the standby demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) is configured not to be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation mode from being mistakenly recognized as having ended even though the setting confirmation mode is currently in progress. In addition, during the setting confirmation mode, it is configured not to start the fluctuating display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation start conditions are not satisfied), and during the setting confirmation mode, it does not start the fluctuating display of normal symbols (normal symbols The fluctuation start condition is not satisfied). With this configuration, even if an unexpected ball enters during the setting confirmation mode (such as a game ball that has stayed in the game area PA entering), an unintended correctness judgment and a fluctuation display based on the result can be performed. By not having this setting, it is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding whether the currently set mode is the setting confirmation mode or the game mode. Furthermore, while it is possible to detect specific errors (for example, door/frame opening errors and magnetic sensor errors) even in the settings confirmation mode, the system is configured so that error notifications regarding the specific errors are not displayed. In addition, it is configured to be able to detect and notify predetermined errors (for example, abnormal setting errors and abnormal setting change errors). With this configuration, unlike the gaming mode, during the settings confirmation mode, error notifications for specific errors are restricted and priority is given to notifications for predetermined errors (errors related to settings), so that settings can be confirmed. It is possible to set the error notification mode to be suitable for the mode, and unlike specifications that limit firing detection, display of the standby demo screen, and variable display of special symbols and normal symbols during the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to detect specific errors. Since there are no restrictions, the player himself/herself can appropriately grasp the current situation.

In addition, as a modification of the case where the transition to the setting confirmation mode is made, during the setting confirmation mode, the rotation operation by touching the firing handle P12 may be enabled (the game can be activated by touching the firing handle P12 and performing the rotation operation). (allowing the ball to be launched). Further, during the setting confirmation mode, a standby demonstration screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) may be displayed when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or more. Furthermore, when an error is detected during the setting confirmation mode, an error notification image may be displayed. In that case, the error notification image will be set in a layer above or below the layer of the above-mentioned image "Checking setting values".

(Processing when returning from setting confirmation mode) Next, processing when returning from setting confirmation mode to gaming mode will be described. Even if you continue to hold the firing handle P12 (touch it and then rotate it) from the setting confirmation mode until the game mode that transitions after the setting confirmation mode ends (a specific time has elapsed from the start of the game mode), (or even if you keep touching it with your hand), the touch effect will not be executed (the touch operation will be disabled). Note that touch performance refers to when a player touches the firing handle P12 and performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the firing handle P12) during a waiting demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance). This is a performance that is executed under certain conditions, and specifically, during a waiting demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance), the player touches the firing handle P12 and performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the firing handle P12). This is an effect in which a voice saying "Start the game!" is output and a specific character is displayed on the effect display device P70. In addition, when returning to the gaming mode from the settings confirmation mode, if the state where no game is played (playing interrupted state) continues for a predetermined period of time immediately after returning or after returning, the standby demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) will be activated. is configured to move to In other words, even if you continue to hold the firing handle P12 from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode that shifts after the setting confirmation mode ends (the standby demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) that is executed after the game mode starts) (Even if you continue to rotate after touching your hand, or even if you continue to touch your hand), the touch performance is configured so that it will not be executed during the standby demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance). There is. Also, even if you keep pressing the volume button (left key or right key) from the setting confirmation mode to the gaming mode that transitions after the setting confirmation mode ends, the volume level will not change during the gaming mode (the volume operation will not change). is configured to be invalid). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the volume level does not change (the volume operation becomes invalid). Note that since the volume adjustment can be performed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration does not assume that the standby demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) is in progress in the game mode. Also, when returning to gaming mode, the volume level will be set to the initial setting (for example, "1" to "5" regardless of the light intensity that was set before switching to setting confirmation mode (before power off)). is always set to "3" among the light intensity levels. Also, even if you keep pressing the light level button (up key or down key) from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode that transitions after the setting confirmation mode ends, the light level will not change during the game mode (the light level operation will not change). is configured to be invalid). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation is released during the game mode, the light amount level does not change (the light amount operation becomes invalid). Incidentally, since the light amount adjustment can be executed even during the variable display in the gaming mode, this configuration does not assume that the waiting demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) is in progress in the gaming mode. Also, when returning to gaming mode, the light intensity level will be set to the initial setting (for example, "1" to "5" regardless of the light intensity that was set before switching to setting confirmation mode (before power cut). is always set to "3" among the light intensity levels.

<Performance Information> Next, the base value, which is performance information of the game, will be explained. In a broad sense, the base value is the ratio of the number of prize balls won by the player to the number of game balls fired by the player (the number of game balls that reached the gaming area PA). However, the base value applied in this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, is the number of game balls fired by the player when the currently running game state is the normal game state (the number of game balls that have reached the game area PA). This means the ratio of the number of prize balls won by the player to the number of balls (the number of balls).

In the present embodiment, data related to performance information of the game (data such as base value, total number of outs, number of outs in normal times, number of prize balls in normal times, etc., which will be described later) is stored in the performance information storage of RAMP 103 provided in the main control board P100. It is stored in area P103C.

Here, FIG. 127(A) is a diagram schematically showing the storage area of the RAMP 103 of the main control board P100. The RAMP103 is provided with a game control information storage area P103A, a setting value information storage area P103B, a performance information storage area P103C, and the like. The game information storage area P103A stores information for controlling the progress of the game (information regarding the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, information regarding the jackpot game, information regarding the gaming state, information regarding the payout of prize balls, etc.). ing. The set value information storage area P103B stores set value information for specifying the probability of winning (jackpot probability) that the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot. The performance information storage area P103C stores information for specifying performance information (base value) of the game. Note that this performance information storage area P103C may store information used for processing for conducting a test specified by the game rules. In this embodiment, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the information stored in the setting value information storage area P103B and the performance information storage area P103C is not erased.

FIG. 127(B) is a diagram schematically showing the performance information storage area P103C of the RAMP103. The performance information storage area P103A includes a total out number counter P1030, a normal out number counter P1031, a normal award ball number counter P1032, a base information storage area P1033, a base information switching counter P1034, a base information output data area P1035, and an output display. A switching timer P1036, a new startup flag P1037, etc. are provided.

The total number of outs counter P1030 is a counter for counting the total number of outs. The "total number of outs" is the number (total number) of game balls ejected from the game area PA in all game states. All game states include a special game state in which a special game is being executed, and a non-special game state in which a special game is not being executed. Further, this non-special gaming state includes a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a variable probability gaming state. In addition, as in the third embodiment described above, in the case of a gaming machine that adopts the small hit rush mode, the non-special gaming states include a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state, and a potential gaming state. Includes state. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is not equipped with a probability fluctuation function (for example, a small hit V model equipped with a fluctuation time reduction function), the non-special gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. is included, and if the game machine is not equipped with either the probability fluctuation function or the fluctuation time reduction function (for example, a small hit V model that is not equipped with the fluctuation time reduction function), it will be in a non-special gaming state. includes only the normal gaming state.

The normal out number counter P1031 is a counter for counting the number of outs in normal times. The "normal number of outs" is the number (total number) of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

In addition, the total number of outs and the number of outs in normal times are determined by the number of played balls that are ejected from the back side of the game board P20 (played balls that enter each winning hole or the out hole P29 and finish the game). It is calculated based on the detection information from the ball detection sensor P891. In addition, as another method of counting the total number of outs and the number of outs in normal times, for example, based on the detection information of a launched ball detection sensor that detects the number of game balls fired toward the gaming area PA (number of fired balls). The total number of outs (total number of balls fired) and the number of outs in normal times (number of balls fired in normal times) may be calculated. In that case, it is preferable to use a value obtained by subtracting the number of game balls that cannot reach the game area PA and return (foul balls) from the number of game balls that were fired toward the game area PA. .

The normal prize ball number counter P1032 is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the normal time. The "normal number of prize balls" is the number (total number) of prize balls paid out to the player when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). In other words, the number of prize balls in normal time does not include the number of prize balls paid out in the gaming state (special gaming state) when a jackpot game is being executed among the low probability low base states, and the number of prize balls paid out in the low probability low base state. Only the number of prize balls paid out in a gaming state when a jackpot game is not being executed (normal gaming state) is included. Therefore, in the normal game state, the number of game balls entered into the first starting port P51, the game ball entered into the second starting port P52, and the number of game balls entered into the general winning ports P61 to P64 in the normal gaming state. This is the cumulative number of prize balls that are paid out according to the number of balls that enter the ball. In this embodiment, each time a game ball enters a winning hole (winning hole excluding the big winning hole P54) that is the target of prize ball payout in the normal gaming state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning hole into which the ball entered is determined. is cumulatively added to the normal prize ball number counter P1032 (the main CPU 101 performs the process of adding to the normal prize ball number counter P1032 of the RAMP 103). In addition, as another method of counting the number of prize balls in the normal time, the number of prize balls in the normal time is counted based on the detection information of the prize ball count sensor that counts the number of prize balls actually paid out from the prize ball payout unit P34. You may.

The base information storage area P1033 is an area for storing a base value indicating performance information of a game. The "base value" is the ratio of the number of pitches awarded in normal times to the number of outs in normal times. In other words, the base value is the payout to the player for the number (total number) of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA when the currently running gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (total number) that have been awarded, and is a value calculated by the formula: "Number of prize balls in normal time ÷ Number of outs in normal time x 100". Therefore, the base value in this example refers to the base value measured in the normal gaming state, the base value in the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), or the base value in the special gaming state. It's not something you do.

Although the details will be described later, this base value is calculated for each preset management interval (basically, for each interval until the value of the total number of outs counter P1030 reaches "60000"). The base values calculated in each management section are sequentially stored in the base information storage area P1033. This base information storage area P1033 includes a current base value storage area P1033a that stores a base value (current base value) calculated in real time in the currently executing section, and a current base value storage area P1033a that stores the base value calculated in real time in the currently executing section (currently executing section The previous base value storage area P1033b stores the base value (previous base value) calculated when the total number of outs reached 60,000 in the previous section), and the The 2nd previous base value storage area P1033c stores the base value (2nd previous base value) calculated when the total number of outs reached 60000 in the 2nd previous section of the middle section, and the 3rd previous base value storage area P1033c. 3rd previous base value storage area P1033d that stores the base value (3rd previous base value) calculated when the total number of outs reached 60000 in the section (3rd period before the currently running section) It consists of. Although the details will be described later, the base value calculation will not be performed in the section where the total number of outs is less than 299 (section A described later) starting from the time when the gaming machine is first powered on (new start-up). .

The base information switching counter P1034 is a counter for switching the base value displayed on the performance display monitor P830. When the value of the base information switching counter P1034 is "0", the base value of the current section is displayed on the performance display monitor P830, and when the value of the base information switching counter P1034 is "1", 1 is displayed on the performance display monitor P830. The base value of the previous section is displayed, and if the value of the base information switching counter is "2", the base value of the section two times before is displayed on the performance display monitor P830, and the base information switching counter P1034 is displayed. If the value is "3", the base value of the interval three times before is displayed on the performance display monitor P830.

The base information output data area P1035 is an area for storing display data of the four display sections P831 to P834 in the performance display monitor P830. Although not shown, the base information output data area P1035 includes a first output data area that stores the display data of the first display section P831, and a second output data area that stores the display data of the second display section P832. It has a third output data area that stores the display data of the third display section P833, and a fourth output data area that stores the display data of the fourth display section P834.

The output display switching timer P1036 is a timer for switching the display data stored in the base information output data area P1035. In this embodiment, the display data stored in the base information output data area P1035 is switched at a predetermined cycle based on the clocked value of the output display switching timer P1036.

The new start-up flag P1037 is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming machine is powered on for the first time (new start-up). That is, if the new start-up flag P1037 is ON, it indicates that the gaming machine is powered on for the first time, and when the new startup flag P1037 is OFF, it indicates that the gaming machine is not powered on for the first time. Note that this new start-up flag P1037 turns OFF immediately after the first power-on of the gaming machine (immediately after a new start-up) (it is preferable that it turns OFF at least during the first power-on). As a modification, the new start-up flag P1037 may be turned off when the total number of outs counter P1030 starts counting when the gaming machine is powered on for the first time.

<Display of Base Value> Next, display of the base value will be explained. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120 above, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor P830. As described above, this performance display monitor P830 includes an identification display section (identification segment) P830a consisting of a first display section P831 and a second display section P832 for the upper two digits, a third display section P833 for the lower two digits, and a third display section P833 for the lower two digits. It has a ratio display section (ratio segment) P830b consisting of four display sections P834. In this specification, "lighting" is used as a concept that includes both continuous lighting and flashing lighting, but if necessary, to distinguish between these, continuous lighting may be simply referred to as "lighting" or "lighting". In some cases, blinking lighting is simply called "blinking" or "blinking display."

The identification segment P830a displays an identifier for identifying the type of base value (the section in which the base value is managed). That is, the identification segment P830a includes "bL." indicating that it is the base value of the current section, "b1." indicating that it is the base value of the previous section, and "b1." indicating that it is the base value of the section two times before. It is possible to display "b2." indicating that there is a certain value, and "bL3." indicating that it is the base value of the third interval (base value from three times ago) (details will be described later).

The calculation result of the base value corresponding to the identifier (measurement section) displayed in the identification segment P830a is displayed in the ratio segment P830b. That is, the ratio segment P830b contains the base value of the current section (real-time value), the base value of the previous section (final result value), the base value of the second previous section (final result value), and the third previous section. The base value (final result value) of the interval can be displayed (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, "displaying the base value" means displaying the identification segment P830a and the ratio segment P830b together, except in special cases.

Here, FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of the base value of each section. As described above, the base value is measured for each predetermined management section (each section A, section B, section C, section D, etc., which will be described later). The performance display monitor P830 displays the base value of the current section (Fig. 128 (B)), the display of the base value of the previous section (Fig. 128 (C)), and the display of the base value of the second previous section. The display of the value (FIG. 128(D)) and the display of the base value of the three previous section (FIG. 128(E)) are switched and displayed at specific times (predetermined display switching time). In this embodiment, "4.8 seconds" is set as the base value display switching time. Note that the base value display switching process is performed based on the value of the base information switching counter P1034 described above.

First, when displaying the base value of the current section, as shown in FIG. The base value (the base value currently stored in the base value storage area P1033a) is lit and displayed. In addition, when displaying the base value of the previous section, as shown in FIG. The base value at the end of the section (the base value stored in the previous base value storage area P1033b) is illuminated and displayed. In addition, when displaying the base value of the interval two times ago, as shown in FIG. The base value at the end of the section (the base value stored in the 2nd previous base value storage area P1033c) is illuminated and displayed. In addition, when displaying the base value of the interval three times ago, as shown in FIG. The base value at the end of the section (the base value stored in the 3rd previous base value storage area P1033d) is illuminated and displayed.

In the ratio segment P830b, the first decimal place of the measurement result of the base value is rounded off, and the integer part (integer value) after the rounding is displayed. For example, if the base value measurement result is 35.49, "35" is displayed in the ratio segment P830b, and if the base value measurement result is 35.50, "36" is displayed in the ratio segment P830b. Note that if the numerical value after rounding off the measurement result of the base value is less than 10, "0" is displayed in the tens place of the ratio segment P830b (for example, "00" to "09"). Further, if the numerical value after rounding off the measurement result of the base value is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio segment P830b. In other words, if the rounded value is 99, "99" is displayed in the ratio segment P830b, and if the rounded value is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio segment P830b. (Show dots). This is because the ratio segment P830b of the performance display monitor P830 can only display the base value as a two-digit number, so it displays "99." (displays a dot after 99) and the base value is 100%. This is to notify that the amount is exceeded. As a modified example, the first decimal place of the measurement result of the base value may be rounded down and only the integer part (integer value) may be displayed. If the number after rounding is 99, "99" is displayed in the ratio segment P830b, and if the number after rounding is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio segment P830b (dots are displayed). do).

Note that when the gaming machine is powered on (recovered from power outage), all the displays P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 are fully displayed for a predetermined period of time (4.8 seconds), as shown in FIG. 128(A). An all-blinking display (also referred to as an "initial display") in which a lit state and a completely off state are repeated at predetermined intervals (predetermined cycles) is performed. This predetermined interval (predetermined period) is 0.6 seconds in this embodiment, and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets. In other words, the initial display (all blinking display) of this performance display monitor P830 is the display of all LED segments SG1 to SG8 (32 LEDs in total) of the four display sections P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 when the gaming machine is powered on. segment) is displayed blinking. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 128(A) to 128(E), after the initial display (all blinking display) of the performance display monitor P830 is finished, the base value is displayed (the base value display is switched). will be held. In addition, during the initial display period of this performance display monitor P830 (during the full flashing display period), the main control side timer interrupt processing is activated, and the special electric accessory control processing (opening of the grand prize opening P54 before the power is cut off) is activated. (processing to return to the current state, etc.), prize ball control processing (processing for paying out unpaid prize balls before power cut, etc.), LED output processing (processing to control lighting of the main control display device P27, etc.), special symbol control processing, etc. Mode processing is being executed.

Here, in this embodiment, the start timing of displaying the base value can vary depending on the transition mode when the power is turned on. For example, if the gaming machine enters the gaming mode when the power is turned on, the initial display of 830 (all flashing) is displayed on the performance display monitor for a predetermined period of time (4.8 seconds), and then the base value is displayed. Begins. On the other hand, if the gaming machine enters RAM clear mode, setting change mode, or setting confirmation mode when the gaming machine is powered on, RAM clear mode, setting change mode, or setting confirmation mode ends and the initial display (all After the flashing display) is executed for a predetermined period of time (4.8 seconds), the display of the base value is started. Note that the predetermined time (initial display time, total blinking display time) is not limited to the aforementioned 4.8 seconds, but for example, the time from 4.5 seconds to 5.5 seconds (5 seconds ± 10%). It is desirable to set it to

<<Flow of base value measurement>> Next, the flow of base value measurement from the time when the gaming machine is powered on for the first time will be described. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing display contents displayed in the identification segment P830a and the ratio segment P830b for each management section (measurement section). Note that "when the gaming machine is first powered on" refers to the time when the gaming machine is newly started up, when the gaming machine is powered on for the first time. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is powered on for the first time based on the state of the new start-up flag P1037 provided in the performance information storage area P103C. That is, if the new start-up flag is ON, it indicates that the gaming machine is powered on for the first time, and when the new startup flag is OFF, it indicates that the gaming machine is not powered on for the first time. In this embodiment, when the new start-up flag P1037 is ON, a period A (a period in which an identifier is flashed in the identification segment P830b and a "--" is displayed in the ratio segment P830b), which will be described later, is triggered. Counting starts at . When this gaming machine is powered on for the first time, all values such as the total out number counter P1030, the normal out number counter P1031, the normal prize ball number counter P1032, and the base information storage area P1033 are set to the initial value "0". has been done. Further, when the currently executed section ends, the total out number counter P1030, the normal out number counter P1031, and the normal award ball number counter P1032 are cleared. In addition, when the currently executed section (excluding section A described below) ends and moves to the next section, the base value stored in the first previous base value storage area P1033b and the second previous base value storage area P1033c is The base values of past intervals are shifted to the base value storage area of the previous interval (2nd previous base value storage area P1033c and 3rd previous base value storage area P1033d), and are also shifted to the current base value storage area P1033a. The final value of the stored base value of the current section (the base value when the total number of outs reaches 60,000) is shifted to the previous base value storage area P1033b, and this current base value storage area P1033a is clear. Note that the base value stored in the third previous base value storage area P1033d is erased by being shifted and overwritten by the base value stored in the second previous base value storage area P1033c.

First, in the section where the value of the total number of outs counter P1030 is less than 299 starting from the time the power is turned on for the first time (referred to as "section A"), the This is the section (test section) where game balls are fired and prizes are won, and as accurate base values cannot be obtained, this section is excluded from the base value calculation. That is, this section A is set as a section in which the normal out number counter P1031 and the normal prize ball counter P1032 do not count (a section in which the base value is not calculated). However, even during execution of this section A, the total out number counter P1030 is counted in order to determine switching of the section (to determine switching to the next section).

When displaying the base value of the section A that is currently being executed, "bL." is displayed blinking in the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed lit in the ratio segment P830b. That is, the flashing display of "bL." in the identification segment P830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the section A currently being executed cannot be displayed. Also, since the previous section (the section from 1st to 3rd time ago) does not exist, when displaying the base value of the previous section (the section from 1st time to 3rd time ago), use the ratio segment P830b. ``--'' will be displayed. Specifically, when displaying the base value of the previous section, "b1." is displayed blinking on the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed on the ratio segment P830b. The flashing display of "b1." in the identification segment P830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the previous section cannot be displayed yet. Further, when displaying the base value of the interval two times before, "b2." is displayed blinking on the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed on the ratio segment P830b. The flashing display of "b2." in the identification segment P830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the interval two times ago cannot be displayed yet. Further, when displaying the base value of the interval three times before, "b3." is displayed blinking on the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed on the ratio segment P830b. The flashing display of "b3." in the identification segment P830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b indicate that the base value of the interval three times ago cannot be displayed yet. In this embodiment, these blinking displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second period), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

Then, when the currently running section A ends when the value of the total number of outs counter P1030 since the initial power-on reaches 299, a new section (referred to as "section B") is started. . When the currently executed section A ends, as described above, the total out number counter P1030, the normal out number counter P1031, and the normal award pitch number P counter P1032 are reset (cleared to zero). Furthermore, the values stored in each of the base value storage areas P1033a to P1033d are shifted to the previous storage area.

Section B ends when the value of the total out number counter P1030 reaches 60,000 starting from the end of the previous section A. In section B, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area P1033a of the RAMP 103. When displaying the base value of section B currently being executed, if the value of the normal out number counter P1031 is less than 6000 (0 to 5999), "bL." is displayed blinking on the identification segment P830a, and The base value (real time value) of the current section B, that is, the base value (real time value) stored in the current base value storage area P1033a is displayed in the ratio segment P830b by lighting. Here, the reason why the identification segment P830a blinks when the value of the normal out number counter P1031 is less than 6000 is that with the measurement results of less than 6000, the number of samples required to calculate the base value of the current section is This is to notify that the base value is not stable because there are few. On the other hand, when the value of the normal out number counter P1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." is displayed in the identification segment P830a, and the base value (real time value) of the current section B is displayed in the ratio segment P830b, that is, The base value currently stored in the base value storage area P1033a is displayed by lighting. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second period), and "lighting on for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

In this section B, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section A), "b1." is displayed blinking in the identification segment P830a, and "--" is lit in the ratio segment P830b. indicate. This is because the base value has not been calculated in the previous section (section A), so the blinking display of "b1." in this identification segment P830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b cause the base value to be calculated once. It is indicated that the base value of the previous interval cannot be displayed. Further, when displaying the base value of the interval two times before, "b2." is displayed blinking on the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed on the ratio segment P830b. This is because the two previous sections do not exist, so the base value of the two previous sections is still displayed by the blinking display of "b2." in this identification segment P830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b. shown to be impossible. Further, when displaying the base value of the interval three times before, "b3." is displayed blinking on the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed on the ratio segment P830b. This is because the interval three times before does not exist, so the base value of the interval three times ago is still displayed by the blinking display of "b3." of this identification segment P830a and the lighting display of "--" of the ratio segment P830b. shown to be impossible. In this embodiment, these blinking displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second period), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

Then, when the currently executed section B ends when the value of the total out number counter P1030 reaches 60,000, a new section (referred to as "section C") is started. When the currently executed section B ends, as described above, the total out number counter P1030, the normal out number counter P1031, and the normal award ball number counter P1032 are cleared. Furthermore, the values stored in each of the base value storage areas P1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage area.

Section C ends when the value of the total number of outs counter P1030 reaches 60,000 starting from the end of the previous section B. In section C, as in the previous section B, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area P1033a of the RAMP 103. When displaying the base value of the section C currently being executed, if the value of the normal out number counter P1031 is less than 6000 (0 to 5999), "bL." is displayed blinking in the identification segment P830a. At the same time, the base value (real time value) of the current section C, that is, the base value (real time value) stored in the current base value storage area P1033a is displayed in the ratio segment P830b by lighting. On the other hand, if the value of the normal out number counter P1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." is displayed in the identification segment P830a, and the base value (real time value) of the current section C is displayed in the ratio segment P830b, that is, The base value currently stored in the base value storage area P1033a is displayed by lighting. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second period), and "lighting on for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

In this section C, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section B), "b1." is displayed on the identification segment P830a, and the previous section (section B) is displayed on the ratio segment P830b. The final value of the base value of section B), that is, the base value stored in the previous base value storage area P1033b is displayed by lighting. Further, when displaying the base value of the interval two times before, "b2." is displayed blinking on the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed on the ratio segment P830b. This is because the base value has not been calculated in the previous section (section A), so the blinking display of "b2." in this identification segment P830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b cause the base value to be calculated twice. It is indicated that the base value of the previous interval cannot be displayed. Further, when displaying the base value of the interval three times before, "b3." is displayed blinking on the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed on the ratio segment P830b. This is because the interval three times before does not exist, so the base value of the interval three times ago is still displayed by the blinking display of "b3." of this identification segment P830a and the lighting display of "--" of the ratio segment P830b. shown to be impossible. In this embodiment, these blinking displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second period), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

Then, when the currently executed section C ends when the value of the total out number counter P1030 reaches 60,000, a new section (referred to as "section D") is started. When the currently executed section C ends, as described above, the total out number counter P1030, the normal out number counter P1031, and the normal award ball number counter P1032 are cleared. Furthermore, the values stored in each of the base value storage areas P1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage area.

Section D ends when the value of the total number of outs counter reaches 60,000 starting from the end of the previous section C. In section D, as in the previous section C, the current base value is calculated in real time, and this real time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area P1033a of the RAMP 103. When displaying the base value of the section D currently being executed, if the value of the normal out number counter P1031 is less than 6000 (0 to 5999), "bL." is displayed blinking in the identification segment P830a. At the same time, the base value (real-time value) of the current section D, that is, the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value storage area P1033a, is displayed by lighting in the ratio segment P830b. On the other hand, when the value of the normal out number counter P1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." is displayed in the identification segment P830a, and the base value (real time value) of the current section D is displayed in the ratio segment P830b, that is, The base value currently stored in the base value storage area P1033a is displayed by lighting. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting on for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

In this section D, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section C), "b1." is displayed on the identification segment P830a, and the previous section (section C) is displayed on the ratio segment P830b. The final value of the base value of section C), that is, the base value stored in the previous base value storage area P1033b is displayed by lighting. In addition, when displaying the base value of the second previous section (section B), "b2." is displayed on the identification segment P830a, and the base value of the second previous section (section B) is displayed on the ratio segment P830b. The final value of the value, that is, the base value stored in the second previous base value storage area P1033c is displayed by lighting. Furthermore, when displaying the base value of the interval three times before (section A), "b3." is displayed blinking in the identification segment P830a, and "--" is displayed in a lighting manner in the ratio segment P830b. This is because the base value has not been calculated in the section three times before (section A), so the blinking display of "b3." in this identification segment P830a and the lighting display of "--" in the ratio segment P830b cause the base value to be calculated three times. It is indicated that the base value of the previous interval cannot be displayed. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second period), and "lighting on for 0.3 seconds → blinking for 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

Then, when the currently executed section D ends when the value of the total out number counter P1030 reaches 60000, a new section (referred to as "section E") is started. When the currently executed section D ends, as described above, the total out number counter P1030, the normal out number counter P1031, and the normal award ball number counter P1032 are cleared. Furthermore, the values stored in each of the base value storage areas P1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage area.

Thereafter, each time the total out number counter reaches 60,000 from the start of each section, that section ends and a new section starts. In other words, in FIG. 129, sections A to D are shown due to space limitations, but when section D ends, a new section E starts, and when section E ends, a new section F starts, and then Similarly, each section starts and ends when the total number of outs counter reaches 60,000, such as sections G, H, and so on.

<<Relationship between performance display and expected value of prize ball acquisition>> Next, the relationship between performance display and expected value of prize ball acquisition will be explained. FIG. 130 is a time chart when the first hit occurs during the execution of section A. In this embodiment, the identification segment P830a (identifier) of the performance display monitor P830 is displayed blinking until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the gaming machine was powered on. Specifically, as described above, when the currently running measurement section is section A, that is, when the total number of outs is less than the predetermined number X1 (299) starting from the time when the gaming machine is first powered on. In this case, the identification segment P830a of the performance display monitor P830 is displayed blinking. In addition, in the next section B after this section A ends, that is, the section B from the end of section A until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, the period B will be counted from the start of the section B. When the normal number of outs is less than the predetermined number X2 (6000), the identification segment P830a of the performance display monitor P830 is displayed blinking. As a modified example, in the next section B after the end of this section A, that is, in the section B starting from the end of section A and until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, the number of outs will be counted from the time the power is turned on for the first time. The identification segment P830a of the performance display monitor P830 may be configured to flash when the number of normal outs is less than a predetermined number X2 (6000). In addition, if the identifier flashingly displayed in this identification segment P830a is an identifier (bL) indicating the current section, the real-time value of the base value measured in the current section is displayed on the ratio segment P830b. . In this embodiment, these blinking displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second period), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for eight sets.

On the other hand, the expected prize ball acquisition value (theoretical prize ball number) that is paid out during the execution of a jackpot game that is performed when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot in the normal game state is the predetermined value described above. is set to be greater than or equal to the number X1 (299). In other words, the expected value of winning prize balls at the first hit (theoretical prize ball number) is set to be greater than or equal to the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) that triggers the end of section A. Specifically, the jackpot types of the first special symbol include "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" and "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)," but both jackpot types are limited to the specified round of the jackpot game. The number is set to 4 rounds, and all of the round games are long open round games (long open round games), so the expected value of winning the prize ball at the first hit in any jackpot type is 600. (4 rounds x 10 counts x 15 prize balls = 600 balls). In this way, in this embodiment, the expected value of winning prize balls at the time of the first hit (600 balls) is set as the reached value of the total number of outs, which is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of balls X1 (299 balls) that triggers the end of section A. It is set as follows. In other words, if you draw the first hit while staying in section A, you will be able to get a larger number of prize balls (up to 600 balls) than the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) that triggers the end of this section A. . Therefore, if you are able to draw your first hit while staying in this section A, while you are hitting the prize balls (maximum 600) that you acquired in the first hit as your own balls toward the gaming area PA, The possibility that the game balls ejected from this gaming area PA, that is, the total number of outs, will reach the predetermined number It is expected that there will be a transition from section A to section B. As a result, while staying in section A, the base value is not displayed ("--" is displayed in identification segment P830b), but when moving to section B, the base value is displayed in real time. As a result, in this embodiment, if the first hit is drawn at an early stage after the gaming machine is powered on for the first time, the number of prize balls (600 balls) obtained in the jackpot game triggered by the first hit is used up. By now, it was possible to complete section A (test section) and move on to the next section B to make the performance display function (the base value of the current section could be displayed in real time), and to prevent fraudulent activity (test section). This makes it possible to detect any abnormalities in ball performance at an early stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expected value of winning prize balls during consecutive games including the first hit (that is, the expected value of winning prize balls paid out in the jackpot game played from the first hit until the end of the consecutive winnings state) is , is set to a predetermined number X2 (6000 pieces) or less. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability variable entry rate (65%), ST continuation rate (set value 1 = 63% to set value 6 = 76%), the theoretical prize ball number for each jackpot game (4R jackpot = 600 balls, 8R jackpot = 1200 balls), etc. According to such a configuration, it is difficult to acquire the number of pitches required to cancel the blinking of the performance display monitor P830 (the number of pitches required for the number of outs to reach 6000 in normal conditions) in one first hit. By doing so (in other words, by requiring multiple initial hits), if the first hit occurs immediately and the game ball acquired is continued to fire normally (the game continues until the ball runs out). Even if the performance display monitor P830 is not released without firing any more game balls, the base value can be managed more accurately. In addition, the expected value of winning prize balls during this consecutive game is the expected value of winning prize balls that can be obtained before returning to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), taking into account the type of jackpot at the time of the first hit and its selection rate. Preferably, it is a value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the shortest digestion time required to digest the jackpot game at the time of the first hit and the shortest digestion time required to digest the electric support state that transitions after the jackpot game is It is set in relation to the expected value (theoretical number of pitches). Here, the firing speed of game balls is set at a maximum of 100 balls per minute, and it takes 6 minutes to hit all the prize balls paid out at the first hit (expected value of winning prize balls: 600 balls). Is required. Therefore, in this embodiment, the shortest playback time of the jackpot game played at the time of the first hit (the playback time when the game ball is constantly hit during the execution of the jackpot game) and the electric support that will be transferred after the jackpot game ends. It is configured such that the total time including the shortest completion time of the state (the completion time when the game ball is constantly hit and the hold is not interrupted during execution of the electric support state 100 times) is 6 minutes or more. As a result, all the prize balls (theoretical prize ball number) obtained at the first hit will be fired until the game exits the electric support state, provided that the game ball continues to be fired. There is.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to satisfy the emphasis effect execution condition for executing the above-mentioned emphasis effect (enlarged display), the cumulative number of award balls must reach a specific value (a multiple value of the predetermined number of award balls). The condition is that the predetermined number of prize balls (the minimum value of the specific value) corresponds to a value that is greater than or equal to the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) and less than or equal to the predetermined number X2 (6000 balls). That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, an emphasis effect (enlarged display) is performed every time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (2500). At least one highlighting effect (enlarged display) is now executed from when the cumulative number of award balls reaches a predetermined number of balls (X1) (299 balls) until it reaches a predetermined number of balls (X2) (6000 balls). (in this example,
Between the time the cumulative number of award balls reaches the predetermined number X1 (299 balls) and the time it reaches the predetermined number (It is now emphasized twice when In this way, by making the emphasizing effect execution condition lighter than the condition for canceling the flashing display of the identification segment P830a, the emphasizing effect execution condition can be satisfied even in a game start situation where the blinking display has not been canceled. It is possible to increase the player's desire to play by increasing the player's motivation to play by increasing the player's ability to play the game and by generating an emphasizing performance from an early stage.

<<Base value update during initial display period at power-on>> Next, a base value update process during the initial display period will be described. FIG. 131(A) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the gaming state at the time of power-off recovery is the special gaming state, and FIG. 131(B) is a time chart showing the initial display period when the gaming state at the time of power-off recovery is the normal gaming state. It is a time chart showing an initial display period.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the gaming machine is powered on (recovered from power off), all the display sections P831 to P834 of the performance display monitor P830 are turned on for a predetermined period of time (4.8 seconds). A full blinking display (initial display) in which the display state and the light-off state are repeated every 0.3 seconds is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 131(A), if the gaming state at the time of power-off recovery is a low base state (special gaming state) during a jackpot game, the initial state of the performance display monitor P830 when the power is turned on is During the display period, the total out number counter P1030 is counted, and the determination process for switching to the next section (section switching process) is executed, but the normal out number counter P1031 and the normal prize ball are counted. Counting by the number counter P1032 is not performed, and arithmetic processing for updating the base value (base value update processing) is not performed. In other words, if a ball entering the first starting port P51 or general winning ports P61 to P64 and out detection related to the entering ball are performed during the initial display period of the performance display monitor P830 when the power is turned on, the initial During the display period, the determination process for switching to the next section (section switching process) is executed, but the calculation process for updating the base value (base value update process) is not executed, so the initial display After the period ends, the base value before the power outage may be changed to a different section from the one before the power outage, but the base value before the power outage will not be changed (if it has not been switched to a different section from the one before the power outage) If the base value in the current section "bL." is not updated and the section has been switched to a different section from the section before the power cut, the base value in the section "bL." before the power cut is changed. After switching to the base value, the base value in "b1.", which is the section after the power-off recovery and after the end of the initial display period, is not updated and becomes the same). Note that this base value update process is started after the initial display period ends. As a modified example, if the special gaming state continues even after the initial display period ends, this base value updating process is performed at least until the special gaming state ends and the transition to the normal gaming state (furthermore, The base value update process may be configured not to be executed until the high base state (which is transitioned to after the special gaming state ends) ends and the game transitions to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131(B), if the gaming state at the time of power-off recovery is a low base state (normal gaming state) during non-jackpot gaming, the initial state of the performance display monitor P830 when the power is turned on is During the display period, the total out number counter P1030, the normal out number counter P1031, and the normal award ball counter P1032 are counted, and a judgment process for switching to the next section (section switching process) and a base Arithmetic processing for updating values (base value updating processing) is executed. In other words, if a ball entering the first starting port P51 or general winning ports P61 to P64 and out detection related to the entering ball are performed during the initial display period of the performance display monitor P830 when the power is turned on, the initial During the display period, the determination process for switching to the next section (section switching process) and the calculation process for updating the base value (base value update process) are executed, so the initial display period After the power is turned off, there is a possibility that the area has been switched to a different area than the one before the power outage, and the base value before the power outage may have been changed. If not, the base value in the current section "bL." is updated, and if it has been switched to a section different from the section before the power outage, the base value in the section "bL." before the power outage is updated. The base value in "bL." and the base value in "b1.", which is the section after the power-off recovery and after the end of the initial display period after switching, may be updated and may differ). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the gaming state at the time of power-off recovery (power-on) is the same low base state, it is the low base state (special gaming state) during a jackpot game or the low base state during a non-jackpot game. Depending on whether the machine is in the base state (normal gaming state), it is possible to switch whether or not to calculate the base value during the initial display period when the power is restored from the power outage (when the power is turned on), so as to optimize the performance of the gaming machine. can be evaluated. Furthermore, whether in the low base state during a jackpot game or the low base state during a non-jackpot game, the total number of outs counter P1030 is counted during the initial display upon power-off recovery (power-on). In this way, each section (sections A, B, C, D, etc.) can be appropriately switched. Note that the above-mentioned recovery from a power outage (power return) is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), and is a recovery from a power outage that does not involve clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820). If it is a return, it shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

When this initial display period ends, the base information switching counter P1034 starts counting from "0". Therefore, after the initial display period ends, the performance display monitor P830 first starts displaying the base value of the current section. Then, when the base value of the current section is displayed for 4.8 seconds, as mentioned above, the base value of the previous section is displayed, the base value of the second previous section is displayed, and the base value of the second section is displayed three times. The previous base value is displayed in sequence for 4.8 seconds, and the base value of the current section is displayed again.

As a modified example, the count value of the base information switching counter P1034 is started at the start of the initial display period, and the count value of the base information switching counter P1034 is switched every 4.8 seconds even during the initial display period (internal Specifically, each section may be switched every 4.8 seconds), and at the end of the initial display period, the base value of the section corresponding to the end timing may be displayed.

<<Update of base value when prize ball error occurs>> Next, updating of the base value when an error related to payout of prize balls (prize ball error) occurs during execution of a jackpot game will be described. FIG. 132 is a time chart when a prize ball error occurs during execution of a jackpot game. Note that this prize ball error means the same error as the payout error described in the second embodiment.

In this example, if a prize ball error (payout error) occurs during the execution of a jackpot game, the payout of prize balls will be temporarily suspended from the time the prize ball error occurs until the prize ball error is canceled. will be stopped. Therefore, if a prize ball error occurs while the prize ball is being paid out after the game ball enters the big winning hole P54 during the execution of the jackpot game, the prize ball error will be canceled. Until then, out of the prize balls that are paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole P54, the payout of the prize balls that are not paid out before the prize ball error occurs is stopped. . In addition, even if the jackpot game is in progress, if the game ball enters the jackpot P54 after the jackpot error occurs, the jackpot will not be played until the jackpot error is cleared. The payout of prize balls based on the game balls entering the mouth P54 is stopped. Here, after the end of the jackpot game, transition to the variable probability game state (high probability high base state) or the time saving game state (low probability high base state), and in this high base state, the number of times the special symbol fluctuation is displayed reaches 100 times. If you do so (that is, if you do not get a jackpot during 100 rotations), you will fall to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state) after the 100 rotations, but this normal gaming state (low probability low base state) If the prize ball error is canceled in the low probability base state), the payout of prize balls will be restarted in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). In other words, the prize balls that should normally have been paid out during the execution of the jackpot game (prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of a prize ball error) will be in a high base state after the jackpot game ends. The payout will be made in the normal gaming state that has been entered through the process. Here, the normal prize ball number counter P1032 counts the number of prize balls paid out in the normal gaming state, but this is because the game ball falls into any winning slot (big winning slot) during the normal gaming state. The target of counting is the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state when a ball enters a ball (excluding P54). Therefore, if the prize balls that would normally be paid out during the execution of the jackpot game (prize balls based on the game ball entering the jackpot hole P54) are to be paid out in the subsequent normal game state. , it is excluded from the counting by the prize ball counter P1032 during normal times. In other words, if the prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of a prize ball error are to be paid out in the subsequent normal game state based on the cancellation of the prize ball error. In this case, the number of prize balls is not counted by the normal number of prize balls counter P1032, and is excluded from the calculation of the base value, so that the base value can be properly managed.

As mentioned above, if a prize ball error occurs during the execution of a jackpot game, the prize ball based on the game ball entering the jackpot P54 that was not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game will be Although it is not counted by the normal prize ball number counter P1032 and is not subject to update of the base value, the number of game balls that entered the big winning hole P54 (number of winnings) is the number of balls used in the game. It is counted as a valid game ball (game ball ejected from the game area PA) by the total out number counter P1030, and is treated as a valid count value for switching the base value section.

In addition, if the prize ball is not paid out due to the occurrence of a prize ball error during the execution of a jackpot game, not only the prize ball based on the game ball entering the big winning hole P54 but also other prizes such as bonus prizes etc. The prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the winning holes (first starting hole P51, second starting hole P52, general winning holes P61 to P64) are not counted by the normal prize ball number counter P1032, It is not subject to base value updates. Also, regarding the number of game balls (number of winnings) that entered other winning holes (first starting hole P51, second starting hole P52, general winning holes P61 to P64) during the execution of the jackpot game, the gaming area PA Since it should be counted as the valid number of outs (number of shots fired) used in the game, it is subject to updating of the total number of outs counter P1030.

In addition, if a prize ball error occurs during the execution of a jackpot game, that is, as described above, the payout of the prize ball is triggered by the game ball entering the jackpot hole P54 during the execution of the jackpot game. A prize ball error occurs during the winning game, and after the jackpot game ends, the prize ball error continues until the normal game state is entered through the variable probability game state, and then the prize ball error is resolved in the normal game state. In this case, during the execution of the jackpot game and after the prize ball error occurs, even if there are prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error. (Even if the payout of prize balls is restricted), the entry of game balls into the big winning hole P54 (the trigger for the generation of prize balls that are not paid out until the prize ball error is resolved) (Triggered by the addition of the value of the cumulative prize ball counter), the cumulative prize ball number display is updated and a count-up effect is performed. is executed. In addition, even after the occurrence of the prize ball error, if the game ball enters the big winning hole P54 (the trigger for the occurrence of prize balls that are not paid out until the prize ball error is resolved) (When the game ball enters the big winning hole P54), the emphasizing performance execution conditions are satisfied (when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls) ), an emphasis effect (enlarged display) is executed, and the over winning effect is executed when the over winning effect execution condition is satisfied.

<<Updating cycle of base value display>> Next, the update cycle when updating the base value display will be described. In this embodiment, in each section (measurement section) except the first section A, until the normal out number counter P1031 reaches 6000, the identification segment P830a is used to display the base value of the section currently being executed. ``bL.'' is displayed blinking, and the real-time value of the base value is displayed lit in the ratio segment P830b. At this time, the blinking display of the identification segment P830a (flashing display of "bL.") is performed in such a manner that lighting for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds are repeated alternately. That is, in this embodiment, the blinking cycle of the identification segment P830a is set to 0.6 seconds (0.3 seconds on + 0.3 seconds off). Switching between lighting and turning off in the blinking display of the identification segment P830a is performed based on the time value of the output display switching timer P1036 of the RAMP 103. In this embodiment, the clock value of the output display switching timer P1036 is added by "1" for each interrupt (every 4 ms) of the main control side timer interrupt processing, so that the clock value of the output display switching timer P1036 becomes "75". When the multiple value of , that is, when 0.3 seconds (4 ms x 75 = 300 ms) has elapsed, the identification segment P830a is switched between lighting and extinguishing. In other words, each time the measured value of the output display switching timer P1036 reaches a multiple of "75", the lighting data of the identifier is set in the first output data area and the second output data area of the base information output data area P1035. The process and the process of setting lights-off data are alternately switched.

On the other hand, when displaying the base value of the section currently being executed in the ratio segment P830a, the base value corresponding to the current section is displayed in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area P1035. Set display data. Here, in the section currently being executed, a base value (real-time value) is calculated for each interrupt of the timer interrupt process, and this real-time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area P1033a of the RAMP 103. At this time, display data corresponding to the base value currently stored in the base value storage area P1033a is set in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area P1035. However, the update cycle of this display data is the same cycle as the blinking cycle of the ratio segment P830a described above. That is, the display data is updated not every base value calculation cycle (4 ms corresponding to one interrupt) but every 0.6 seconds (600 ms) corresponding to the blinking cycle of the ratio segment P830a. Therefore, each time the clocked value of the output display switching timer P1036 reaches a multiple of "150", the display data of the ratio segment P830b is displayed in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area P1035. The setting process is performed. Therefore, if the ratio segment turns on for 0.3 seconds and then turns off for 0.3 seconds as one blinking display (unit display), at the start of this one unit display (0. .3 seconds when the lighting display starts), the display data of the ratio segment P830a is updated. As a result, when the display data of the ratio segment P830b is updated at the start of one blinking display of the identification segment P830a, the base value currently stored in the base value storage area P1033a within the period of the one blinking display. Even if (the current base value) is updated, the display data of ratio segment P830b is not updated (the base value lit and displayed in ratio segment P830b is not switched), and the display data of ratio segment P830b is not changed until the one flashing display ends. , the base value corresponding to the display data updated at the start of the one blinking display is continuously lit and displayed. Then, when the one blinking display ends and the next blinking display starts, the display data of the ratio segment P830b is changed to the current base value (the current base value stored in the current base value storage area P1033a). ) is updated to new display data according to the new display data, and the base value displayed in the ratio segment P830b is also switched to the current base value (real-time value) according to the new display data. By synchronizing the flashing cycle of the identifier displayed in the identifier segment P830a with the update cycle of the base value (real-time value) displayed in the ratio segment P830b in this way, it is possible to improve the visibility of the base value. This makes it possible to accurately and easily check the performance of the game.

In this embodiment, when all or some of the displays on the performance display monitor P830 are displayed blinking, all display sections P831 to P834 are displayed in the initial display of the performance display monitor P830 when the power is turned on. The identification segment P830a (first display section P831 and second display section P832) will blink when the display is blinking and until the value of the normal out number counter reaches 6000 in each section (excluding section A). There are cases where it is done. At this time, the blinking cycle (0.6 seconds mentioned above) of each display section P831 to P834 is the blinking cycle of the initial display performed when the power is turned on, and the blinking cycle of the normal out number counter in each section (excluding section A). The cycle is set to be the same as the blinking cycle of the identification segment P830a until the value reaches 6000. And, this flashing cycle (0.6 seconds) is the count-up display time (execution time of count-up effect) of 15 prize balls paid out based on one game ball entering the big winning hole P54. is set for a longer time than In this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the count-up display time for one prize ball (the time required to display the count-up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds". , and the count-up display time (count-up display from "N" to "N + 15") for the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) given when one game ball enters the big prize opening P54 The blinking cycle of each display section P831 to P834 (0 .6 seconds) is longer. The reason why the flashing cycle of each display section P831 to P834 is set longer than the count-up display time of the cumulative award ball count is that general players can The display time is set on the assumption that the count-up display time can be recognized, and if this count-up display time is considered as a guideline for switching the display, the blinking cycle is set to be longer than the count-up display time. This means that it is possible to reliably recognize that each of the display sections P831 to P834 is blinking.

Note that in the above embodiment, the update cycle of the display data (lighting data, light-off data) of the identification segment P830a is every 0.3 seconds, and the update cycle of the display data of the ratio segment P830b is every 0.6 seconds. This update cycle can be set as appropriate, and the update cycle of the display data of the ratio segment P830b may be made the same as the update cycle of the display data of the identification segment P830a.

<<Relationship between base value display switching time and game ball firing time>> In addition, in this embodiment, in the performance display monitor P830, the base value is displayed in the following order: display of the base value of the current section → display of the previous section The display switches every predetermined display switching time (4.8 seconds), such as displaying the base value of the previous interval → displaying the base value of the interval two times before → displaying the base value of the third time ago. This base value display switching time (4.8 seconds) is set to be shorter than the time required to fire game balls for a specified number of counts (10 counts) in one round game. Specifically, the firing speed of game balls is set at a maximum of 100 shots per minute, and the firing time of game balls for the specified number of counts (10 counts) is 6 seconds (10 counts x 60 seconds ÷ 100 shots). As a result, the base value display switching time (4.8 seconds) is shorter than the firing time (6 seconds) of game balls corresponding to the prescribed count number. According to this configuration, while a jackpot game is being executed, the display of the base value can be switched until one round game ends. Even if the value of the number counter reaches 60,000 (even if the current measurement period ends and the next measurement period begins), the switching situation can be recognized during the execution of one round game. I can do it.

The production button P15 in this embodiment is configured such that the production button itself can vibrate or the movable object inside the production button P15 can rotate due to the internal mechanism of the production button. In this way, the performance button P15 not only changes the performance content displayed on the performance display device P70 by the player's operation, but also indicates or indicates to the player the level of expectation for a jackpot by the operation of the performance button P15 itself. It is configured to be able to notify. Such an operation of the performance button P15 is referred to as a performance button operation.

This performance button operation can be executed during a fluctuating display or during a jackpot game, and during a fluctuating display, it is executed to suggest or notify that the expectation of a jackpot is very high (for example, the performance display device P70 (It may be executed in conjunction with the execution of a specific preview performance that is executed in It is executed in association with the execution of the Uchirenso performance.

More specifically, if the fluctuating display is in progress, the performance button operation will trigger the next preview performance (suggesting future performance development), which is a specific preview performance that is executed in the middle of the fluctuating display (before the reach is established in the middle stage). Or, when a preview performance with high expectations for a jackpot is executed), the above-mentioned winning/losing branching scene (the final result of SP reach is a content that indicates a jackpot) is executed in the middle of the variable display (after the reach is established in the final stage) This is executed at the same time as the fluctuating accessory performance that announces the winning of the jackpot at the branching scene where the contents indicate a win or a loss (a performance button operation that is associated with the preview performance). In addition, in one fluctuation (jackpot fluctuation), it is configured so that both this next preview performance and the fluctuating accessory performance that announces the winning of the jackpot can be executed, but the fluctuating accessory performance that announces the winning of the jackpot. The configuration is such that the execution time of the effect button operation is longer when the effect is executed. Note that predetermined preview performances other than specific preview performances (for example, comment preview performances, etc.) are configured so that they are not executed because they are associated with performance button actions. The execution timing overlaps with that, and they may be executed at the same time. In addition, as a pre-reading notice performance, the action related to a high expectation fluctuation that can be executed with the operation pending ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice performance (for example, the above-mentioned next notice performance or a fluctuating role-playing effect that announces a jackpot win) Immediately after the start of the fluctuation display related to the held ball), the performance button action is suddenly executed as a preview notice (the performance button action at the start of the fluctuation as a look-ahead) is executed. In this case, even at the start of the fluctuation display related to the pending ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect that has been reached via the look-ahead notice effect, the effect button operation is not a look-ahead notice, but indicates or indicates the expectation of a jackpot for the change. It is executed as a notice effect to notify (effect button operation at the start of fluctuation via pre-reading). Note that the performance button operation at the start of variation as a look-ahead and the performance button operation at the start of variation via pre-reading are configured to take a shorter execution time than the performance button operation associated with the above-mentioned preview performance. Note that the effect button operation is completed during one fluctuating display, and is not continued across two or more fluctuating displays (for example, from the end of a certain fluctuating display to the (It is not configured so that the vibration of the production button P15 continues until the beginning of the next variable display.) Also, if you are playing a jackpot game, it will be executed in association with the execution of the promotion effect or the execution of the holding consecutive game effect, and it will be executed in association with the execution of the above-mentioned jackpot effect effect ( Performance button operation during jackpot). In addition, the performance button operation during the jackpot is configured to be able to be executed across multiple round games (for example, from the end of a certain round game to the next round game of the certain round game). (The vibration of the performance button P15 is configured to continue until the beginning of the round game).

Here, the effect button operations are roughly divided into those that are executed based on the player's operation of the effect button P15 and those that are not executed based on the player's operation of the effect button P15. In other words, there are two types: those that are immediately executed when the player operates the performance button P15, and those that do not require the player to operate the performance button P15. The above-mentioned performance button operation during the jackpot and the performance button operation associated with the fluctuating accessory performance that notifies the winning of the jackpot are immediately executed when the player operates the performance button P15 (in other words, , When the player operates the performance button P15, a promotion performance, a holding consecutive game performance, and a fluctuating accessory performance that notifies a jackpot win are executed), and the above-mentioned fluctuation start performance button operation as a look-ahead. Regarding the performance button operation at the start of fluctuation via pre-reading, and the performance button operation associated with the next preview performance, the operation of the performance button P15 by the player is not necessary in the first place (in other words, the performance by the player is Without the need to operate the button P15, the effect button operation at the start of variation, the effect button operation at the start of variation via pre-reading, and the next preview effect are executed. Here, as a modified example, even though the jackpot fluctuation display is displayed, even if the player operates the performance button P15, the fluctuating accessory performance that notifies the jackpot winning is not executed and is not associated with it. There may be a case where the effect button operation is not executed (a case where it indicates a loss in a win/loss situation). It may be configured such that the words "Resurrection!" are displayed at a later timing than the timing at which something is suggested to suggest or notify that a jackpot has been won. If configured in this way, the performance button operation will be executed even during the performance in which the characters "Resurrection!" are displayed (also referred to as a resurrection performance or a reversal performance), and this performance button operation will not be controlled by the player's performance. The configuration is such that the operation of the button P15 is executed without any need in the first place.

Further, when the performance button operation is executed, the frame lamp P10 and the above-mentioned accessory lamp are configured to emit light in a specific manner. Note that the lighting mode (lighting color) is configured to vary depending on the performance situation when the performance button operation is executed. Specifically, when a promotion performance, a holding series performance, a fluctuating role performance that announces a jackpot win, or a resurrection performance is executed, it will emit a rainbow color, and the performance button will be activated at the start of the fluctuation, or the fluctuation will occur via pre-reading. It is configured to emit blue light when the start effect button is activated and the next preview effect is to be executed. However, in any case, if an error occurs while the rainbow or blue light is being emitted by the effect button operation, the system is configured to always switch to red light.

Further, when a selection operation to shift to a RAM clear mode or a game mode is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, the effect button operation is executed after the power is turned on as an operation confirmation rather than as an effect after the power is turned on. In this case, the effect button operation is executed in a relatively short time (it is executed in a shorter time than the effect button operation associated with the fluctuating accessory effect that informs the winning), and the frame lamp P10 and the above-mentioned The accessory lamp also emits red light. Note that if the variable display starts during the production button operation, a button image may be displayed to prompt the player to operate the button, but even during the production button operation, the button operation is not possible. By doing so, it is possible to change the effect display on the effect display device P70 (for example, when a button is operated, the button image is erased and a comment preview effect is displayed). Note that if a selection operation to shift to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, the effect button operation as an operation confirmation will not be performed after the power is turned on. This makes it possible to omit the effect button operation as an operation confirmation. In addition, as a modified example, by ending the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it may be possible to perform a production button operation as an operation confirmation.

The main effects achieved in the fifth embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the fifth embodiment, when the first hit occurs at an early stage (section A where the total number of outs is less than 299) from the time when the gaming machine is powered on for the first time, a predetermined hit occurs during the execution of the jackpot game. (299) or more, the player can move to the next section (section B) while hitting the acquired game balls (until the game balls on hand are exhausted). Since the base value display (real-time display) can be activated by using the system, it is possible to detect fraud at an early stage (whether there is any abnormality in the ball output performance), and to realize an appropriate evaluation of gaming performance. becomes possible.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, even if the gaming state is the same low base state, the necessity of measurement is appropriately determined depending on whether the gaming state is a gaming state in which a special game is provided. By making it possible to perform calculations to update the base value from the initial display period (full flashing display period) after power-on, the base value can be properly managed from an early stage after power-on. This makes it possible to appropriately evaluate gaming performance.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, the prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error will be returned to the normal game state after the prize ball error has been canceled. In the event that the number of prize balls is paid out, by excluding the number of prize balls from the base value update, it is possible to properly manage the base value, thereby realizing an appropriate evaluation of gaming performance. It becomes possible to do so.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, the payout of prize balls is restricted in the event of an unexpected win during the setting confirmation mode, and the payout of the prize balls is restricted for the player to receive a prize in a jackpot game restarted after the end of the setting confirmation mode. While giving priority to the acquisition of actual profits, the payout of prize balls is executed, and by restricting the display of effects triggered by the payout of the prize balls, the game can be played without putting players at a disadvantage. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the machine.

Furthermore, according to the fifth embodiment, if a power outage occurs while the prize balls are being paid out in a jackpot game, the settings are checked to see if the transition mode when the power is restored is the setting change mode. Depending on the current mode, appropriate measures to restrict the payout of prize balls will be taken in accordance with the transition mode, and if the mode has transitioned to setting confirmation mode, the relevant prize balls will be paid out when the jackpot game is restarted afterwards. By lifting the restrictive measures and continuing to restrict the performance display triggered by the payout of the prize ball, the processing burden on the gaming machine can be reduced while avoiding any disadvantage to the player. becomes possible.

[Sixth Embodiment] Next, a Pachinko gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine of the above-described second embodiment and/or fourth embodiment and/or fifth embodiment, and the following is explained below. , parts having similar configurations are given the same reference numerals and explanations are omitted, and different parts will be mainly explained. That is, in the following description, it is possible to apply the same configuration as the above-described second embodiment, fourth embodiment, and/or fifth embodiment, except in special cases.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment will be explained in order.

First, the board configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 133 is a front view of the game board P20 of the sixth embodiment. An outer rail P41, an inner rail P42, and a rail decoration P43 are attached to this game board P20, and a substantially circular game area is surrounded by the outer rail P41, the inner rail P42, and the rail decoration P43. PA is compartmentalized. The game area PA is divided into a left area PA1, which is an area to the left of the center decoration P21, and a right area PA2, which is an area to the right of the center decoration P21, with the center decoration P21 located approximately in the center as a reference.

In the sixth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment described above, the game balls flowing down the left side area PA1 mainly include the first starting opening P51 located below the center decoration P21, the general winning opening P61 to It is possible to enter either P63. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can mainly enter any one of the operating gate P53, the second starting opening P52, and the big prize opening P54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration P21. On the other hand, at the lower end of the game area PA, an out port P29 is provided for discharging game balls that have flown down without entering each winning hole to the back side of the game board P20. In addition, among the game areas PA equipped with various winning openings, the hitting method in which the game balls are fired so as to flow down to the left area PA1 is called "left-handed hitting", and the game ball is flown down to the right area PA2. The method of hitting the game ball in such a way as to cause the player to hit the ball is called "right-handed hitting."

Furthermore, a plurality of movable accessories P651 and 652 are attached to the game board P20, which perform performance actions depending on the development situation of the game. In addition, FIG. 133 shows a state in which each movable accessory P651, P652 has returned to its initial position (a state in which it is located at its initial position).

The first movable accessory P651 is attached to straddle both left and right ends of the center decoration P21 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. Moreover, a drive mechanism (consisting of a stepping motor, a gear mechanism, etc.) for driving the first movable accessory P651 is attached to the center ornament P21. The first movable accessory P651 is a logo accessory that has a logo-shaped decorative part that is stylized with letters, patterns, designs, etc. such as the title name of the gaming machine PM, and the first movable accessory lamp is disposed inside. (LED board) P651a allows light emitting display. The first accessory lamp P651a has a plurality of light emitters. As this light-emitting body, a full-color LED having a light-emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is suitably used. This first movable accessory P651 has an initial position located on the upper end side of the center decoration P21 (also referred to as a "first initial position" to distinguish it from other initial positions) and a lower end side of the center decoration P21. It is configured to be able to slide vertically (reciprocate) between a movable position (also referred to as a "second movable position" to distinguish it from other movable positions).

The second movable accessory P652 is attached to be swingable in the left-right direction using the lower right corner of the center decoration P21 as a fulcrum. Moreover, a drive mechanism (consisting of a stepping motor, a gear mechanism, etc.) for driving the second movable object P652 is attached to the center decoration P21. The second movable accessory P652 is formed in a shape resembling a handgun, and is configured to be able to emit light using a second accessory lamp (LED board) P652a disposed inside. The second accessory lamp 652a has a plurality of light emitters. As this light-emitting body, a full-color LED having a light-emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is suitably used. The second movable accessory P652 has an initial position (also referred to as a "second initial position" to distinguish it from other initial positions) in which it swings to the right around the fulcrum and retreats behind the center decoration 80. It is possible to swing between the movable position (also referred to as the "second movable position" to distinguish it from other movable positions) that swings leftward about the above-mentioned fulcrum and appears in front of the screen of the effect display device P70. It is composed of

Furthermore, an effect display device (liquid crystal display device) 70 for displaying an effect image is attached approximately at the center of the game board P20. The effect display device P70 is a liquid crystal display device provided with an image display section (display area) on the front side, and the image display section (display area) is visible from the front side of the gaming machine PM through the opening of the center decoration P21. It is possible.

The display area of the effect display device P70 includes a decorative pattern display area P700, a pending image display area P710, a changing image display area P720, a small pattern display area P730, a pending number display area P740, and the like.

As described above, the decorative pattern display area P700 is a display area for variable display and stop display (determined stop display, temporary stop display) of the decorative patterns. The decorative pattern display area P700 is provided with three rows of display areas (left pattern display area Z1, middle pattern display area Z2, right pattern display area Z3) that serve as variable display areas for decorative patterns. The left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the middle symbol display area Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the right symbol display area Z3. There is. The decorative pattern of this embodiment is composed of, for example, a pattern (numeral pattern) having identification elements made of numbers. As identification elements of this decorative pattern, for example, a total of nine types of numbers from "1" to "9" are set (that is, a total of nine types of decorative patterns exist). Each decorative pattern is arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the pattern rows, and on the effect display device P70, the order of "1" to "9" (or the order of "9" to "1") It is cycled or scrolled in each display area Z1, Z2, and Z3, and after "9" it returns to "1" (or after "1" it returns to "9" again). .

In this embodiment, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot (also referred to as a "jackpot symbol combination" or "jackpot number") is a combination of stop patterns in which three decorative symbols with the same number (identification element) are aligned "*・＊・＊” (*: Decorative pattern of arbitrary numbers). In other words, this jackpot symbol combination (jackpot number) is "1.1.1", "2.2.2", "3.3.3", "4.4.4", "5.5.5". ”, “6, 6, 6”, “7, 7, 7”, “8, 8, 8”, “9, 9, 9”, etc., all the decorative patterns of the same number (identification element) are aligned. It is a combination of aspects.

A combination of decorative patterns that indicate a miss (also referred to as a "miss pattern combination" or "miss mark") is a combination of stop modes in which at least one of the three decorative patterns is a decorative pattern with a number different from the other numbers ( For example, "1.3.8", "5.6.7"). Here, among the missed symbol combinations, there are combinations of stop patterns in which the left and right decorative symbols match, but only the middle symbols are different (for example, shifted several frames back and forth) (for example, "2/4").・2'', ``7, 8, 7'') are also referred to as ``unreachable combinations'' or ``unreachable combinations''.

In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, the combination of decorative symbols when the left and right symbols among the three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a matching state, and the remaining middle symbols are scrolled and displayed. (In other words, the combination of decorative symbols when a reach is established) is also called a "reach".

The pending image display area P710 is a display area for displaying a pending image (holding icon) corresponding to the activated pending ball of the special symbol. In this pending image display area P710, when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is in the gaming state (normal gaming state) where the main character of the game is, the pending image (pending icon) corresponding to the activated pending ball of the first special symbol is displayed. ) is displayed, and if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main game state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), the pending image (pending icon) corresponding to the action pending ball of the second special symbol is displayed. ) is displayed. In this pending image display area P710, a maximum of 4 (4 pieces corresponding to the maximum number of stored operation pending balls of each special symbol) can be displayed as the pending image of the first special symbol or the pending image of the second special symbol. It is possible. Then, the suspended images of the first special symbol are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (input order) of the activated suspended balls of the first special symbol, and the suspended images of the second special symbol are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (input order) of activated suspended balls of the first special symbol. are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (order of arrival). Note that details of the pending image will be described later.

The changing image display area P720 is a display area for displaying a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the currently executing changing display. In this fluctuating image display area P720, when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is the main game state (normal gaming state), the fluctuating image (fluctuation) corresponding to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is displayed. (medium icon) is displayed, and if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main game state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), the fluctuating image ( (Fluctuating icon) is displayed. Note that details of the changing image will be described later. In addition, since the pending image and the image in progress are display contents that suggest that the change is scheduled to change or that the change is in progress, both may be collectively referred to as "change suggestion display," and for the held image, "change has started." It may also be referred to as "fluctuation suggestion display before condition is satisfied", and the image during fluctuation may be referred to as "fluctuation suggestion display after fluctuation start condition is satisfied".

The small symbol display area P730 is a display area for variable display and stop display (fixed stop display) of small symbols (also referred to as "simple symbols"). The small design is the fourth design following the special design, normal design, and decorative design. That is, in the present embodiment, as a variable display of performance symbols that visually express the variable display of special symbols, a variable display of small symbols is displayed in a small size on the screen, in addition to the variable display of decorative symbols. This small pattern is composed of three patterns that correspond to the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern of the decorative pattern, and, like the decorative pattern, it is made up of a total of nine types of numbers from "1" to "9", for example. It is composed of identification elements. In addition, a decorative pattern may be called a "main decorative pattern" or a "first decorative pattern," and a small pattern may be called a "sub-decorative pattern" or a "second decorative pattern."

This small pattern display area P730 is formed in a relatively smaller display area than the decorative pattern display area P700. This small symbol display area P730 has three rows of display areas (left small symbol display area, medium and small symbol display area, and right small symbol display area) that are the variable display area of small symbols, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The left small design (referred to as the "left small design") corresponds to the left small design display area, and the medium design of the small design (referred to as "medium and small design") corresponds to the small and medium design display area. ), the right symbols of the small symbols are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the right small symbol display area. Of the three patterns forming this small pattern, the left small pattern corresponds to the left pattern of the decorative pattern, the medium and small patterns correspond to the middle pattern of the decorative pattern, and the right small pattern corresponds to the middle pattern of the decorative pattern. The variable display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the stop display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol. be exposed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop display and a temporary stop display, whereas the small pattern is displayed as a fixed stop display but not a temporary stop display. That is, even if a decorative pattern (at least one of a left pattern, a pattern, and a right pattern) is temporarily stopped, the small pattern continues to be displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped.

Further, the variable display of the small design may be a display mode in which the numbers "1" to "9" are scrolled (for example, vertically scrolled or horizontally scrolled) in the same way as the variable display of the decorative design. Unlike the display, a display mode in which a predetermined combination of specific numbers is switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals is preferable. For example, "1, 3, 5", "4, 6, 8", "7, 9, 2" are used as combinations of three symbols (specific combinations of numbers) that make up the small design. Then, "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → It is possible to apply a configuration in which specific numbers are repeatedly displayed, such as... According to such a configuration, control regarding the variable display of small symbols can be simplified.

It should be noted that small symbols only need to allow the player to recognize that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and that it is in a fixed stop display, and it is not necessarily necessary for the small symbol to be displayed in a variable display and fixed stop display in a combination of three symbols, just like decorative symbols. There is no need to display it, and a combination of two symbols or a variable display and fixed stop display using only one symbol may be used (other identification elements such as simplified symbols and colors may also be used).

Furthermore, during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative pattern may be configured to be displayed in a small size (alternative pattern may be displayed) for at least part of the period, or the decorative pattern may be hidden (alternative pattern may also be displayed). However, in such a situation, the small symbols are always displayed in a variable manner. This small symbol displays a variable display while the special symbol is changing, and displays a stop display while the special symbol is stopped.Same as the decorative symbol, the three symbols display a variable display and It is a stop display. By providing this small pattern, situations where you want to make the decorative pattern smaller or hide it (for example, when performing a super reach effect, you can perform the effect using the first movable accessory P651 and the second movable accessory P652) Even if the center of the effect display device P70 is hidden), it is possible to notify that the change is in progress (in other words, that the win/fail result has not been determined). In other words, this small pattern can be said to be a pattern for display guarantee (for compensating the display state of the decorative pattern).

As mentioned above, when this small pattern is displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to always continue the variable display from the start of the special pattern's movement until it is stopped, that is, the decorative pattern temporarily stops in the middle. Even if a special decorative pattern displaying characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when performing a pseudo-continuous performance, the small pattern is configured so that it will not be temporarily stopped in the middle. (Therefore, for small symbols, there is no special symbol that displays characters such as "NEXT", and small symbols only make a fixed stop), and furthermore, if it is a losing fluctuation, it is a jackpot. In order to prevent players from misperceiving that it is a jackpot variation, whether it is a losing variation or a jackpot variation, the symbol combination that indicates a loss is shown to the player so that the player does not realize that it is a jackpot in advance. Change display while maintaining the same state (for example, as mentioned above, if the type of small design is "1" to "9", "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9")・2"→"1.3.5"→"4.6.8"→"7.9.2"→...) is preferable. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols and small symbols start to fluctuate from a fixed stop state, the symbol combination that is the starting point (the symbol combination that is switched from the symbol combination immediately before the fluctuation starts, and the symbol combination of each symbol row immediately before the fluctuation starts) The symbol combination that changes first immediately after the start of fluctuation) is a symbol combination that has progressed one step from the symbol combination at the time of the fixed stop, but if the fluctuation starts from a situation where the small symbol is fixed and stopped, it will be the starting point. The symbol combination will be a predetermined symbol combination regardless of the combination at the time of fixed stop. For example, if the decorative designs and small designs start to fluctuate in a situation where the number combinations related to the decorative designs and small designs are all fixed and stopped at "2, 4, 3", the pattern combination that is the starting point of the decorative designs is "3, 5, 4", but the symbol combination that is the starting point of the small symbol is fixed at "1, 3, 5", and the number combinations related to the decorative symbol and the small symbol are both "3, 3, 3". If the decorative symbols and small symbols start to fluctuate in a situation where they are fixed and stopped at "," the symbol combination that becomes the starting point of the decorative symbol will be "4, 4, 4," but the symbol combination that becomes the starting point of the small symbol. is fixed at "1, 3, 5".

Further, the decorative pattern display area P700 that is easy for the player to recognize is larger than the small pattern display area P730 for display guarantee (for compensating the display state of the decorative pattern). This is a situation in which the decorative symbols and small symbols are fixed and stopped, the decorative symbols are in a reach state immediately after forming a reach state (reach state without developing into a super reach effect), and the small symbols are in a fluctuating display. This configuration is suitable not only in situations but also in situations where the decorative pattern is a small pattern such as during a super reach performance, and even in a situation where the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

Is the display position of the decorative pattern in the first production mode (for example, normal production mode or stage A in normal production mode) or in the second production mode (for example, variable probability production mode or stage B in normal production mode)? By setting the display position to be different depending on the display mode, it is possible to realize a variety of presentations with decorative patterns depending on the presentation mode. On the other hand, since the small pattern only has to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, there is no need for unnecessary development and design as the display position is the same regardless of whether it is in the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. It is preferable not to do this. Note that the details of the production mode will be described later.

Is the display mode of the decorative pattern in the first production mode (for example, normal production mode or stage A in normal production mode) or in the second production mode (for example, variable probability production mode or stage B in normal production mode)? By using different display modes depending on the display mode, it is possible to realize a variety of presentations with decorative patterns depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the first production mode, the decorative pattern is composed only of numerical decorative patterns (decorative patterns such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second production mode, the decorative pattern is composed of numerical decorative patterns and allies. Decorative patterns are constructed by combining the decorative patterns of the characters (decorative patterns such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", . . . , "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since the small pattern only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, regardless of whether it is in the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, it is necessary to use the same display mode, for example, decoration of numbers. It is preferable to construct a small pattern using only the pattern and to avoid unnecessary development and design.

The decorative pattern display area P700 can be changed (moved, made into a small pattern) depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, whether or not the normal reach is in progress, whether the super reach effect is in progress, etc.). It is possible to add diversity to the production. On the other hand, since the small pattern only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, the small pattern display area P730 can be kept unchanged (not moved, not made into a small pattern) without unnecessary development and design. It is preferable to complete the process.

Decorative patterns can vary in speed, such as slow, medium, high, or ultra-high, depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, whether they are at the start of the fluctuation, in the middle of the fluctuation, or just before the end of the fluctuation, etc.). It is possible to give diversity to the production of decorative designs. On the other hand, since the small pattern only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, the variation speed of the small pattern should not be made variable, or the number of steps in which it is variable should be reduced (for example, only low speed and high speed). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design. In addition, regarding the direction of movement, decorative patterns can be moved not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (allowing for movement in multiple directions), while small patterns can be moved from top to bottom. It is preferable to make only a change to .

The decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (temporary stop during the movement of the special pattern, with slight fluctuations) before it is fixedly stopped (stopped at the timing when the special pattern stops). , At that time, by temporarily stopping a specific pattern that is a decorative pattern other than numbers (for example, a decorative pattern with the word "Super" written on it, which foretells the development to a super reach effect), the production of decorative patterns and other It can be related to the performance. On the other hand, since the small pattern only needs to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, unnecessary development and design can be avoided by not temporarily stopping the small pattern or temporarily stopping the specific pattern. It is preferable to do so.

The decorative pattern overlaps with the display area of other preview effects (for example, comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, etc.), that is, is displayed in a superimposed manner. In order to use as much of the area on the performance display device P70 as possible to create a powerful performance, such superimposed display is allowed. It is desirable that the symbol display area P730 is designed so as not to overlap (not be displayed in a superimposed manner) with the display area of the other preview performance. However, regarding the relationship with special preview effects that inevitably overlap (for example, group preview effects, background preview effects, etc. displayed on the entire effect display device P70), the display priority of small symbols may be changed to It is preferable to set the display priority higher than the display priority of the preview performance (set so that the small pattern is displayed in front of the special preview performance). In addition, a right-handed hitting notification image (a right-handed hitting notification image exclusively for the high base state that is displayed during the high base state, unlike the image displayed during the special game; however, it may be an image that is common to the image during the special game) ) is also desirably visible to the player, so it is desirable to design so that the small symbol display area P730 and the display area of the right-hand hit notification image do not overlap (do not display in an overlapping manner). However, if the decorative pattern display area P700 is moved or expanded, the decorative pattern display area P700 and the display area of the right-hand hit notification image may be overlapped (displayed in a superimposed manner), and in that case, It is preferable to set the display priority of the decorative pattern to be lower than the display priority of the right-handed hitting notification image (the decorative pattern is set to be displayed on the back side of the right-handed hitting notification image).

During the special game, only one decorative pattern may be displayed instead of being displayed in combination. For example, if a special game is executed after "7, 7, 7" is fixed and stopped, "7" is displayed during the special game, and "2, 2, 2" is fixed and stopped, and then the special game is executed. When a game is executed, "2" is displayed during the special game. Thereby, it is possible to recognize which decorative pattern has won the jackpot during the special game. As a modified example, a decorative pattern corresponding to a jackpot with a high advantage (for example, "3.3.3", "5.5.5", "7.7" indicating a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R)・7" etc.) may be displayed during the special game. In this way, the display area that displays one decorative symbol displayed during the special game is the other display area during the special game, such as the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative number of prize balls. It is desirable that the display area is configured not to overlap with the display area, that is, not to be displayed in an overlapping manner (however, the highlighted display may be displayed in a superimposed manner, and in that case, the highlighted display has a higher display priority). Furthermore, although it is preferable to hide the small symbols during the special game (because the variable display is not performed during the special game), they may be displayed during the special game, and may be configured in this way. In this case, it is desirable to configure the display area so that it does not overlap with the other display areas during the special game, such as the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball count display area, that is, so that they are not displayed in an overlapping manner. It is preferable not to display the highlighted display in an overlapping manner.

In addition to performing fluctuations (for example, scrolling from top to bottom), decorative symbols can also be displayed with predetermined actions at the start of fluctuation, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is established, during a temporary stop, etc. (The actions in each situation may be referred to as a fluctuation start action, a temporary stop action, a reach action, and a swinging action). For example, if it becomes a non-reach (when the decorative symbol and small symbol are displayed as "624" at the time of fixed stop), all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in the decorative symbol will be enlarged when the fluctuation starts. After performing the above action, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing action, and after the "6" stops temporarily, it continues the swinging action, and then, When the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "4" temporarily stops, it continues its shaking motion, and then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion. After that, "2" temporarily stops and makes a slight swinging motion, and then, at the final stop timing, all the motions of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are completed. In this case, the small pattern does not perform any of the movements.

In addition, in the case of normal reach (when the decorative symbol and small symbol are displayed as "212" at the time of fixed stop), all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in the decorative symbol will be enlarged at the start of fluctuation. Then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "2" temporarily stops, it continues the swinging motion, and then the right symbol When the symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "2" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then the left and right symbols rotate to notify that it is a reach. After performing the motion, continue the shaking motion again, then when the middle symbol temporarily stops, perform a bouncing motion, then “1” temporarily stops and performs a slight shaking motion, then confirm. At the stop timing, all operations of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are completed (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the small pattern does not perform any of the movements.

In addition, when developing into a super reach effect (when the decorative symbol and small symbol are displayed as "232" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of fluctuation, all the left, middle, and right symbols of the decorative symbol are displayed. After performing an expanding action, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing action, and after "2" temporarily stops, it continues the swinging action, After that, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after "2" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then the left symbol and the right symbol to notify that it is a reach. After the symbol performs a rotating motion, it continues the shaking motion again, and then, while the left and right symbols are performing the shaking motion, the middle symbol changes (at this time, the middle symbol is enlarged). (It is changing from top to bottom, and the left and right symbols that did not overlap or had a low overlap rate until now are overlapping or the overlap rate is high), then the Super Reach effect is applied. In order to execute it, it moves from the normal background to the reach background, and when it is notified by the super reach effect that the result is a miss, it moves from the reach background to the normal background, and after the transition, the left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol. The symbol continues its swinging motion for a predetermined period of time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the motions of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are completed (the middle symbol does not perform bouncing motion or rotating motion). In this case, the small pattern does not perform any of the movements. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide diversity in the production of decorative patterns, while the small patterns only need to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative patterns, so the small patterns are particularly important for movement. It is preferable to configure the system so that it does not occur, thereby eliminating the need for unnecessary development and design.

Furthermore, even after the fluctuation has stopped and before the standby demonstration effect is displayed, the decorative pattern may perform a shaking motion after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation has stopped. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the small symbols do not move at all. With this configuration, it is possible to stimulate the player's desire to play even when the player is waiting to play (the symbols are stopped), and the small symbols do not shake, thereby notifying the player that the player is waiting to play. It can be guaranteed. In addition, "game standby" is a fluctuating standby state (non-fluctuating state) in which neither the action-holding ball of the first special symbol nor the action-holding ball of the second special symbol exists. In addition, when the standby demonstration effect is displayed, the decorative patterns are hidden, but it is preferable that the small patterns continue to be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize the display of the standby demonstration effect screen while ensuring that what kind of symbol is stopped is displayed. However, if the standby demonstration performance is in progress, no game is being played, so the small symbols may also be hidden. Further, a specific pattern among the decorative patterns (for example, the middle pattern "7") may be configured such that a predetermined action is not performed or the probability of performing it is low compared to other symbols. This predetermined motion may be, for example, the above-mentioned temporary stop motion (bouncing motion) (particularly regarding the medium symbol "7" after the reach is established). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the rarity of the motion in a specific symbol. In addition, a decorative pattern is constructed by combining the numerical decorative pattern and the decorative pattern of an ally character ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + " In the case of a decorative pattern such as "Character G"), both the number decorative pattern and the ally character's decorative pattern perform a swaying motion, but the swaying width (swinging distance, e.g. If the object is to sway up and down, a dynamic swaying motion can be achieved by varying the distance width between the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed at the top and the state in which it is displayed at the bottom during the swaying motion. If configured in this way, the swinging width of the number decorative pattern should be smaller than the swinging width of the ally character's decorative pattern, or the number decorative pattern does not swing and the swinging width of the ally character's It may be configured such that only the decorative pattern performs the shaking motion.

The reserved number display area P740 is a display area for displaying the number of activated reserved balls of the special symbol. This reservation number display area P740 includes a first reservation number display area P741 that displays the number of activated reservation balls of the first special symbol, and a second reservation number display area P742 that displays the number of activation reservation balls of the second special symbol. including.

Moreover, the game board P20 is provided with a main control display device P27 controlled by the main control board P100 side and a sub-control display device P28 controlled by the production control board P200 side. Note that the main control display device P27 has been described in detail in the fourth embodiment, so its description will be omitted here.

FIG. 134 is a schematic diagram showing the sub-control display device P28. The sub-control display device P28 is an LED display device whose lighting is controlled by the production control board P200, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board P20. This sub-control display device P28 auxiliary displays some of the various information displayed by the above-mentioned main control display device P27.

As shown in FIG. 134, the sub-control display device P28 includes a first variable state auxiliary display section P801, a second variable state auxiliary display section P802, a first pending number auxiliary display section P803, and a second pending number auxiliary display section P804. Various display means such as the following are provided.

The first variable state auxiliary display section P801 is composed of one LED lamp (LED segment). In this first variable state auxiliary display section P801, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED lamp, and when the blinking of the LED lamp stops and is switched to a lit display or an unlit display, the first special symbol is displayed. The design is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the first special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner, the blinking display is repeated, and when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot, it is displayed lit, and the first special symbol is displayed to indicate a miss. When the display is stopped in the manner shown, the display is turned off.

The second variable state auxiliary display section P802 is composed of one LED lamp (LED segment). In the second variable state auxiliary display section P802, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED lamp, and when the blinking of the LED lamp stops and the display switches to on display or off display, the second special symbol is displayed in accordance with the blinking pattern of the LED lamp. The design is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the second special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner, the blinking display is repeated, and when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot, it is displayed lit, and the second special symbol is displayed to indicate a miss. When the display is stopped in the manner shown, the display is turned off.

The first reservation number auxiliary display section P803 is composed of two LED lamps (LED segments). This first reserved number auxiliary display section displays the number of activated reserved balls (maximum 4) of the first special symbol by lighting, blinking, and extinguishing the two LED lamps. Specifically, when the two LED lamps of the first reserved number auxiliary display section P803 are displayed as off, it indicates that the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol is "0", and the two LED lamps are displayed as OFF. If one of the LED lamps is blinking and the other LED lamp is off, it indicates that the number of pending balls for the first special symbol is "1", and the two LED lamps are If it is blinking, it means that the number of pending balls for the first special symbol is 2, and one of the two LED lamps will be lit and the other will be blinking. If it is, it means that the number of pending balls for the first special symbol is "3", and if two LED lamps are lit, it means that the number of pending balls for the first special symbol is "4". ”.

The second pending number auxiliary display section P804 is composed of two LED lamps (LED segments). The second reserved number auxiliary display section P804 displays the number of activated reserved balls (maximum 4) of the second special symbol by lighting, blinking, and extinguishing the two LED lamps. Specifically, when the two LED lamps of the second reserved number auxiliary display section P804 are displayed as off, it indicates that the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol is "0", and the two If one of the LED lamps is blinking and the other LED lamp is off, it indicates that the number of balls pending operation of the second special symbol is "1", and the two LED lamps are If it is blinking, it indicates that the number of balls pending activation of the second special symbol is "2", and one of the two LED lamps will be lit and the other LED lamp will be blinking. If it is, it means that the number of pending balls for the second special symbol is "3", and if two LED lamps are lit, it means that the number of pending balls for the second special symbol is "4". ”.

Further, like the gaming machine of the above embodiment, the gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with a production button P15 and a cross key P16 as input devices that can be operated by the player. Here, FIG. 135 is a perspective view showing the production button P15 and the cross key P16. Note that the performance button P15 is also referred to as "operation means".

The production button P15 has a built-in production button lamp (LED board) 15a that can emit light. This production button lamp 15a is equipped with a plurality of surface-mounted LEDs as light emitters for emitting light from the production button P15. As this light emitting body (LED), a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is suitably used. Further, the production button P15 is equipped with a production button detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the production button P15 has been operated. The detection signal of this operation detection sensor is input to the production control board P200. Further, the production button P15 has a built-in vibration motor (not shown) that can generate vibrations. This vibration motor is configured to be able to impart (transmit) vibration to the production button P15 under the control of the production control board P200.

The cross key P16 is composed of four keys P16a to 16d (up, down, left and right) arranged in a cross shape. The cross key P16 is equipped with a cross key detection sensor (not shown) that detects whether the cross key P16 is operated (in which direction the keys P16a to 16d are operated). The detection signal of this cross key sensor is input to the production control board P200. These four keys P16a to 16d are independent keys, and a detection sensor is provided for each.

[Various effects] As described above, in the game machine of the sixth embodiment, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board P200 and the image control board P300 depending on the progress of the game, etc. It is composed of In the sixth embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the "normal performance mode" is set as the multiple types of performance modes when the game state is the normal game state, and when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "normal performance mode" is set. When the "time saving performance mode" is set and the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, the "variable probability production mode" is set, and the gaming state (or variable pattern selection state) managed on the main control board P100 side and the special Depending on the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, one of a plurality of performance modes is alternatively set, and a variable performance is executed in accordance with the set performance mode. When any production mode is set, a background image dedicated to that production mode (a background image that is displayed behind the decorative pattern ) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the production mode is output from the speaker P11. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each production mode, so it is possible for the player to recognize which production mode the player is currently in based on the type of background image or BGM. ing.

More specifically, the "normal production mode" has four stages: "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", and the progress of 20 fluctuations or more or SP reach is off. Taking this as an opportunity, we will move from "Stage A" to "Stage B", from "Stage B" to "Stage C", from "Stage C" to "Stage A", and based on the pre-read preview performance judgment, we will move from "Stage A" to "Stage B", and from "Stage C" to "Stage A". If you win the execution (transition) of ", you will move from the stage you are currently staying at to the "pre-reading stage" (the execution of SP reach will be confirmed when you move to the "pre-reading stage", and if you hit the jackpot, you will be able to move to the "pre-reading stage"). Stage" will display a double number, and if it misses, a number other than double number will be displayed on the "Look-ahead stage", and the next change will return to the stage before moving to the "Look-ahead stage"). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage" (different from the stage BGM of "Time-saving production mode" and the stage BGM of "Definitely variable production mode") ), but in "Stage A", the stage BGM is interrupted (ends) when the non-reach fluctuation stops (determined stop), and the stage BGM starts from the beginning when the next fluctuation starts, and in "Stage B" , "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", even if the fluctuation stops (determined stop) due to non-reach, the stage BGM will not be interrupted (will not end), and the stage BGM will continue to the next fluctuation. is output (the "time-saving production mode" and the "probability variation production mode" are also configured to be output continuously).

Here, although it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous performance in any of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", in any stage, when temporarily stopping in a pseudo continuous performance, (When a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol with the letters "NEXT") as a middle symbol is fluctuated and displayed in the vicinity of a predetermined temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped), the stage BGM is not output. (interruption), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the re-variation display, or it is switched to a specific BGM different from before the re-variation display. After that, when developing to SP Reach in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Pre-Read Stage", the background image of each stage (the stage you were staying at) will be changed to the background image of SP Reach production. The stage BGM will not be output while SP Reach is being executed, and an effect will be displayed to indicate that SP Reach is out of order. The background image of each stage will be switched again (the background image of the stage that was displayed before SP reach development), but in that situation, the background image of the stage will be displayed until the next variable display starts. Also, the stage BGM is not output, and the SP reach-only BGM is not output either (it is silent, or a specific BGM that is different from the stage BGM and the SP reach-only BGM is output). Therefore, even if the fluctuation stops (determined stop) due to non-reach, the stage BGM will not be interrupted (will not end), and the stage BGM will continue to be output after the next fluctuation. C", "Look-ahead stage" (even if it is not "Stage A"), if you are out via SP reach, the stage BGM will be played before the fluctuation stop (determined stop). will be interrupted, and the stage BGM will start from the beginning with the start of the next variation.

It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous performance is not performed in the "time-saving performance mode" and the "probable variable performance mode". Here, special effects that suggest that a pseudo continuous effect will be executed (for example, a continuation dialogue notice, ``Continue!'', which confirms the execution of the subsequent pseudo continuous effect, By executing unconfirmed performances such as "Maybe it will continue?", it is suggested that a pseudo-continuation performance (re-fluctuation display) will be performed afterwards, but this special performance is limited to "Stage A" and " It is displayed only in "Stage C" and not in "Stage B" and "Look-Ahead Stage". In other words, by preparing in advance both stages where the possibility of a pseudo-continuous performance can be detected and stages where the possibility cannot be detected, and by repeating stage transitions between these stages, a performance that does not make the player bored is realized. are doing. Note that in "Stage A", a special performance using character A as a motif is performed, while in "Stage B", a special performance using character B as a motif is performed. In addition, this is a different effect from a special effect, and it is a pseudo continuous effect that confirms that the pseudo continuous effect will be executed afterward just by occurring (for example, when character C appears, the line "Continuation confirmed!" In addition, there is also a special performance and a pseudo-continuation confirmation production, which is different from a special production and a pseudo-continuation confirmation production. For example, an effect in which the line "Development confirmed!" is always displayed whenever character D appears is also provided. This pseudo-determined performance and advanced definitive performance can be executed in any of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage". In this way, when a pseudo continuous effect is performed or when a pseudo continuous effect is not performed, by displaying a combination of one or more of the special effect, the pseudo continuous effect, and the advanced confirmed effect, the expectation of execution of the pseudo continuous effect, It is possible to diversify the degree of development expectations for SP reach. In addition, during one fluctuation display, all of the special effects, pseudo consecutive confirmation effects, and development confirmation effects may be executed, and in that case, during a certain re-variation display (for example, pseudo 2 variation display or pseudo (variable display) may include a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo-continuation confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmation effect is executed. In a pattern in which a special effect is executed during a pseudo 2-variation display or a pseudo 3-variation display, after a special effect is executed during a certain re-variation display, a pseudo continuous confirmation effect is further executed during the re-variation display. It's okay.

Next, among various game performances, there are "button operation performances (button performances)," "button vibe performances," "left-handed notification performances," "holding change performances," "holding change suggestion performances (action performances)," etc. I will explain the contents.

[Button Operation Effect] The button operation effect (hereinafter referred to as "button effect") of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of button production. The button performance is a preview performance that suggests or informs the expectation level of a jackpot based on the operation of the performance button P15 by the player.

As shown in FIG. 136, the button presentation includes operation promotion selection and operation opportunity presentation (also referred to as "operation result presentation"). Further, the button effect is also referred to as an "operation effect."

The operation promotion performance is a performance executed during the operation validity period of the performance button P15, and is a performance that urges the player to operate the performance button P15. The operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the production button P15 is effectively accepted when the production button P15 is operated (operation acceptance period during which the operation of the production button P15 is effectively accepted on the production control board P200). This operation promotion performance can also be said to be a performance that notifies the player that the operation validity period has expired. The operation promotion effect is also referred to as "operation means promotion effect" or "operation means promotion image."

While the operation promotion performance is being executed (during the operation validity period), a button image imitating the performance button P15 (also referred to as "performance button image" or "operation means image") and the remaining period of the operation validity period are displayed on the screen. An indicator image (also referred to as a "meter image" or "operation validity period suggestion image") that visually indicates that the operation of the production button P15 is valid or a notification to prompt the operation of the production button P15 is displayed. It will be done.

Further, while the operation promotion performance is being performed (during the operation validity period), the button image and the indicator image are displayed, and the performance button lamp 15a emits light in a specific notification mode (a mode in which it lights up continuously in red light emission color). In this embodiment, during the non-operation effective period (excluding the initialization operation of the production button P15), the production button lamp 15a is emitted in a predetermined notification mode (for example, continuously lit with white light emission color), while During the valid operation period, the effect button lamp 15a emits light in a specific notification mode (for example, a mode in which it lights up continuously in red). That is, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the production button lamp 15a changes from a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit with white light emitting color) to a specific notification mode when the operation validity period of the production button P15 starts. Control is performed to switch to the mode (continuously lit with red light emitting color), and when the operation validity period of the production button P15 ends, or when the production button P15 is operated within the operation validity period. , control is performed to switch the notification mode of the production button lamp 15a from a specific notification mode (continuously lit with red light emitting color) to a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit with white light emitting color), Control is performed to switch the notification mode of the button lamp 15a from a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit with red light emitting color) to a special notification mode (continuously lit with rainbow colored light). Although details will be described later, during the initialization operation of the performance button P15, the performance button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (a mode in which it flashes in red light color).

Here, in this embodiment, the "notification mode of the production button lamp 15a" includes a notification mode in which the production button lamp 15a lights up, and a notification mode in which the production button lamp 15a lights up, and a notification mode in which the production button lamp 15a lights up includes a notification mode in which the production button lamp 15a lights up. , is used to include a notification mode in which the production button lamp 15a is lit continuously (also simply referred to as "lighting up") and a notification mode in which the production button lamp 15a is lit blinking (also simply referred to as "blinking"). Then, as necessary, a notification mode in which the production button lamp 15a is continuously lit (lit), a notification mode in which the production button lamp 15a is blinking (flashing), and a notification mode in which the production button lamp 15a is turned off (non-lit). It is used to distinguish between In the following explanation, "the notification mode of the production button lamp 15a", "the lighting mode of the production button lamp 15a", "the lighting mode of the production button lamp 15a", "the notification mode of the production button P15", and "the lighting mode of the production button P15" It may be appropriately paraphrased as "mode", "lighting mode of production button P15", etc.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, during the non-operation valid period (excluding the initialization operation of the production button P15), the production button lamp 15a is in a notification state in which it is not lit or extinguished, while during the operation validity period. The production button lamp 15a may be configured to have a predetermined notification mode (notification mode that lights up continuously in white) or a specific notification mode (notification mode that lights up continuously in red).

The operation-triggered performance is a performance that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button P15. This operation trigger performance is a performance mode (accessory object movement, image display, audio output, lamp light emission, button vibration, etc.) corresponding to the type of button performance. In addition, in this embodiment, "executed in response to the operation of the production button P15" means (1) that it is executed only when the production button P15 is operated within the operation validity period, and (2) It includes the meaning of being executed when the production button P15 is operated within the operation validity period or when the production button P15 is not operated within the operation validity period and the operation validity period ends. Therefore, the execution conditions for the operation-triggered performance are (a) satisfied only when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation validity period, and (b) when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation validity period. In addition, it may be established even when the production button P15 is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid operation period ends. That is, under the above execution condition (a), if the performance button P15 is operated while the operation promotion performance is being performed (during the operation validity period), the operation promotion performance is executed after the operation promotion performance ends due to the operation of the performance button P15. , the operation trigger effect will be started, but if the effect button P15 is not operated while the operation promotion effect is being executed (during the effective operation period), the operation promotion effect will not be executed and the operation effect period will end. The button performance (operation promotion performance) ends in response to the trigger. On the other hand, under the above execution condition (b), if the performance button P15 is operated while the operation promotion performance is being executed (during the operation validity period), after the operation promotion performance ends due to the operation of the performance button P15, , the operation trigger effect will be started, and if the effect button P15 is not operated while the operation promotion effect is being executed (during the operation validity period), the operation promotion effect will be started as the operation validity period passes. After the end, the operation trigger effect will start. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation level is set higher when button effect B based on the above execution condition (b) is executed than when the button effect based on the above execution condition (a) is executed. There is. Note that the execution conditions for the operation-triggered effects (which one belongs to, a or b) in each of the button effects A to D, which will be described later, will be explained in specific examples of each of the button effects A to D. Further, although the details will be described later, the button vibe production of this embodiment is "executed in response to the operation of the production button P15" and "executed without being triggered by the operation of the production button P15". There are cases. This "is executed without being triggered by the operation of the production button P15" means that it is executed regardless of the operation of the production button P15 or the operation validity period, that is, it is executed regardless of the button production (in the first place, the button image is This means that it is not displayed and is actively executed without requiring any operation of the production button P15. The button vibe effect is also referred to as "effect button operation" or "effect button operation effect."

FIG. 137 is a schematic diagram showing the types of button effects of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 137, the button effects of this embodiment include button effects A, button effects B, button effects C, and button effects D.

Button performance A is a button performance executed at the start of the variable display. In this button performance A, if the performance button P15 is operated within the operation validity period, or when the performance button P15 is not operated within the operation validity period and the operation validity period ends, the operation trigger performance execution condition is set. A holds true. When this execution condition A is satisfied, as the operation trigger effect of button effect A, an effect effect in which the first movable accessory object P651 falls in front of the screen (moves to a movable position) is executed.

Button effect B is a button effect executed at the start of the variable display or during execution of the variable display (before the reach is established). In this button performance B, when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation validity period, the execution condition B of the operation trigger performance is satisfied. When this execution condition B is satisfied, a line preview performance (also referred to as a "comment preview performance") in which a predetermined character image utters a line is executed as an operation trigger performance of button performance B.

Button performance C is a button performance that is executed during the execution of the variable display (after the reach is established and before the SP reach is developed). In this button performance C, if the performance button P15 is operated within the operation valid period, or if the performance button P15 is not operated within the operation valid period and the operation valid period ends, the execution condition of the operation trigger effect is set. C holds true. If this execution condition C is satisfied, the SP reach development effect that suggests the development to SP reach is displayed as the operation trigger effect of button effect C (for example, display of a dedicated background image that confirms the development to SP reach) ), and a button vibe effect (first button vibe effect β) to be described later is executed. Note that the button performance C may be a button performance that is executed during the execution of the variable display (after SP reach development to before winning/losing branch).

Button vibe effect D is a button effect executed during execution of SP reach (at the time of winning or losing). In this button performance D, if the performance button P15 is operated within the valid operation period, or if the performance button P15 is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid operation period ends, the execution condition of the operation trigger effect is set. D holds true. When this execution condition D is satisfied, the operation trigger effects of button effect D include an effect effect in which the first movable accessory P651 falls in front of the screen, and a button vibe effect (second button vibe effect) to be described later. is executed.

As mentioned above, button effects C and D are effects performed in conjunction with button vibe effects described later (button vibe effects are used as part of these button effects C and D (operation trigger effects). are executed), these two button effects C and D will be explained again in the button vibe effect below.

[Button vibe effect] Next, the button vibe effect (vibration effect of the effect button P15) will be explained. The gaming machine of this embodiment is configured to be able to perform a button vibe effect while performing a variable display. This button vibe performance is a preview performance that suggests or informs the expectation level of a jackpot by vibrating the performance button P15. In addition to the button vibe performance, a button rotation performance may be provided which is a preview performance that suggests or informs of the expectation of a jackpot by rotating a movable object inside the performance button P15 using the internal mechanism of the performance button. The button vibe effect, button rotation effect, and the like may be collectively referred to as "effect button operation" or "effect button operation effect." Regarding the explanation regarding button vibe effects, please note that "button vibe effects" can be read as ``button rotation effects'' (or can be read as ``effect button movements'' or ``effect button movement effects''). Let me add some information.

The button vibe effect can be executed at a predetermined timing between the start and stop of the variable display of decorative patterns. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is a variable display of SP reach, in order to suggest or notify the expected jackpot of the variable display, the variable display is a variable display that will result in a jackpot or a loss. It is possible to perform a button vibe effect regardless of whether it is present or not. In addition, even if it is not a variable display of SP reach, even if it is a variable display of N reach, if it is a variable display that will result in a jackpot, it is possible to perform a button vibe effect to suggest or notify the jackpot expectation level of the variable display. It becomes. In other words, in a fluctuating display that is neither a reach nor a jackpot, a button vibe effect is not performed to suggest or notify the expected jackpot of the fluctuating display. However, when performing a button vibe effect as a look-ahead effect, in order to suggest or inform the expected jackpot of the subsequent variable display rather than the relevant variable display, the variable display that does not reach the reach and will not result in a jackpot. It also makes it possible to perform a button vibe effect. The button vibe effect at that time has the same effect mode as the first button vibe effect α described later, and is a type of button vibe effect that is executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button P15.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, as described above, even if the variable display of the decorative pattern is a non-reach variable display or an N reach variable display, the button vibe effect may be configured to be executable. Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, the button vibe effect may be configured to be executed only in the variable display of a specific SP reach among a plurality of types of SP reach. For example, if you have SP reach A, SP reach C, and SP reach C as multiple types of SP reach (assuming that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of SP reach A < SP reach B < SP reach C), at least SP reach To enable a button vibe effect to be executed in a variable display where C is executed. At this time, SP reach A and SP reach B are SP reaches that develop from normal reach, SP reach C is N reach or SP reach that develops from SP reaches A and B, and a variation pattern X that develops from N reach to SP reach C. and a variation pattern Y that develops into SP reach C via SP reach A or SP reach B may be provided. If the former variation pattern It may be configured to suggest that In addition, in the case of the latter variation pattern Y, a button vibe effect is executed during the execution of SP reach A or SP reach B (before it develops into SP reach), and by executing this button vibe effect, SP It may be configured to suggest that reach C will develop. In addition, in the case of a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot, a button vibe effect may be performed even if the fluctuating display develops into SP reach A and SP reach B (does not develop into SP reach C). Also, if the button vibe effect is executed in a variable display that develops into SP reach A and SP reach B (does not develop into SP reach C), a jackpot will be confirmed (the button vibe effect will be executed in a variable display that develops into SP reach C). It may also be configured such that the jackpot is not confirmed even if it is executed.

FIG. 138 is a schematic diagram for explaining the execution timing of the button vibe effect of this embodiment. In the figure, the basic flow of SP reach fluctuation display is shown chronologically from left to right on the page. Note that FIG. 138 conceptually shows the execution timing of the button vibe effect, and the actual execution timing may be slightly different from the illustrated timing without departing from the description of this embodiment. good. In addition, regarding the first button vibe effect α and the first button vibe effect β, there are cases where they are executed and cases where they are not executed, regardless of the variable display that results in a jackpot or the variable display that results in a loss. Regarding the performance and the third button vibe performance, it is executed in the variable display that results in a jackpot, but not in the variable display that results in a loss, and when executed in the variable display that results in a jackpot, either the second button vibe effect or the third button vibration effect is executed. Only one of the button vibe effects is executed.

The SP reach of this embodiment is configured, for example, as a battle performance (battle reach performance) in which an ally character fights against an enemy character. SP Reach A is a battle performance where you play against enemy character A (10% jackpot expectation), SP Reach B is a battle performance where you play against enemy character B (jackpot expectation 20%), and SP Reach C is a battle performance where you play against enemy character B (jackpot expectation 20%). It is a battle performance where you play against C (expectation of jackpot is 60%). In this embodiment, multiple types of performance routes 1 to 3 are set as the performance routes for the SP reach fluctuation display, and the results of the fluctuation display (battle performance win/loss) is derived. To explain this simply, production route 1 is a "jackpot" route where the result of SP reach (battle production) is a victory, and production route 2 is a "miss" route where the result of SP reach (battle production) is a loss. , and production route 3 is a "jackpot" route where the result of SP reach (battle production) is once made to look like a defeat, and then a come-from-behind victory is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 138, the button vibe effects of this embodiment include a first button vibe effect that is executed from the start of the variable display until it develops into a specific effect (SP reach), and a specific effect (SP reach). There is a second button vibe effect that is executed during the execution of SP reach, and a third button vibe effect that is executed after the specific effect (SP reach) ends.

The first button vibe performance is executed as a high expectation performance that suggests or informs that there is a high expectation that the result of the currently executed variable display will be a jackpot. This first button vibe effect is a highly anticipated effect (extremely hot effect), but it is not a guaranteed jackpot effect, so even if the first button vibe effect is executed, the result of the fluctuating display may be a "miss". be. The types of this first button vibe effect include the first button vibe effect α that is performed at the start of the variable display, and the first button vibe effect that is performed during the execution of the N reach of the variable display (after reaching is established and before SP reach is developed). There is a one-button vibe effect β. Examples of the first button vibe effect α and the first button vibe effect β will be described later.

The second button vibe effect is executed as a jackpot confirmation effect that suggests or informs that the variable display currently being executed is a jackpot. This second button vibe effect is performed immediately after the winning/losing branch at the end of the SP reach in the variable display. In other words, this second button vibe performance is a performance (jackpot confirmation performance) that is executed when notifying a jackpot win immediately after a win/loss branch. An example of this second button vibe effect will be described later.

The third button vibe performance is executed as a revival performance that once makes the result of the currently executed variable display appear to be a loss, and then suggests or informs that the true result is a jackpot. An example of this third button vibe effect will be described later.

Note that while each button vibe effect is being executed, a light emission effect is performed in which the effect button lamp 15a emits light. During execution of the first button vibe effect α, the effect button lamp 15a emits light in a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which it lights up continuously with white light emission color). In addition, while the first button vibe effect β is being executed, the effect button lamp 15a is displayed in a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which it lights up continuously with a white luminescent color) or in a specific notification mode (a mode in which it lights up continuously in a red luminescent color). ) to emit light. Further, while the second button vibe effect is being performed, the effect button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (a mode in which it lights up continuously in rainbow colors). Further, while the third button vibe effect is being performed, the effect button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (a mode in which it lights up continuously in rainbow colors). The notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a during this button vibe performance is related to the jackpot expectation level, and a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit with white light emitting color) < a specific notification mode (red light emission) The jackpot expectation level is set to increase one step at a time in the following order: <Special notification mode (continuous lighting mode in rainbow colors). Note that the special notification mode (rainbow light emission) is a notification mode for confirming the winning of the jackpot, so it is selected only when the second button vibe effect or the third button vibe effect is executed. Furthermore, when performing each button vibe effect, the vibration level of the effect button P15, the operating time of the effect button P15 (the time during which the effect button P15 vibrates), etc. may be performed in different manners. For example, the higher the vibration level of the production button P15, the higher the jackpot expectation level, or the longer the operation time of the production button P15 (the time the production button P15 vibrates), the higher the jackpot expectation level. You may. In addition, while the first button vibe effect α is being executed, the effect button lamp 15a is displayed in a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which it lights up continuously with a white emitting color) or in a specific notification mode (a mode in which it lights up continuously in a red light emitting color). ), and during execution of the first button vibe effect β, the effect button lamp 15a may be configured to emit light in a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit with white light emission color). Furthermore, in either or both of the first button vibe effect α and the first button vibe effect β, the effect button lamp 15a may be emitted in a special notification mode (a mode in which it lights up continuously in a rainbow color). In that case, the configuration is such that the probability that the performance button lamp 15a is emitted in a special notification mode (continuously lit in rainbow colors) is lower than in the second button vibe effect or the third button vibe effect. It is preferable to do so.

In addition, various button vibe effects include a type of button vibe effect that is triggered by the operation of the effect button P15 (that is, a type of button vibe effect that is executed as an operation triggered effect), and a type of button vibe effect that is triggered by the operation of the effect button P15. It is classified into a type of button vibe effect that is executed without any button effect (that is, a type of button vibe effect that is executed independently of the button effect). Specifically, the first button vibe production includes a type of button vibe production (first button vibe production β) that is executed in response to the operation of the production button P15, and a type of button vibe production that is not triggered by the operation of the production button P15. The type of button vibe effect to be executed (first button vibe effect α) is included. On the other hand, the second button vibe effect belongs to a type of button vibe effect that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button P15. Further, the third button vibe effect belongs to a type of button vibe effect that is executed without being triggered by the operation of the effect button P15. Note that the meaning of ``executed in response to the operation of the performance button P15'' here is the same as the meaning of ``executed in response to the operation of the performance button P15'' in the button performance described above. In addition, the first button vibe effect β and the second button vibe effect are activated when the operation promotion effect is executed first and the effect button P15 is operated within the operation validity period during the execution of the operation promotion effect or within the operation validity period. This is a performance that is executed when the performance button P15 is not operated and the valid operation period ends. As a modification of this embodiment, a button vibe effect (referred to as "button vibe effect γ" for convenience) may be performed as an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button P15 (operation It may include a button vibe effect that is executed in a situation where the promotion effect is being executed and the effect button P15 is not operated). That is, when executing a predetermined button effect, an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image is displayed on the screen as the operation promotion effect, and the effect button P15 is vibrated while the operation promotion image is displayed. It may be configured to perform a presentation (button vibe presentation γ). In that case, when the production button P15 is operated within the operation validity period, or when the production button P15 is not operated within the operation validity period and the operation validity period ends, the operation promotion is performed. It is preferable to hide the image and terminate the execution of the button vibe effect γ. Further, when the button vibe effect γ is configured as an operation promotion effect, a button vibe effect may be further executed as an operation trigger effect corresponding to the operation promotion effect. Further, when the button vibe effect γ is configured as an operation promotion effect, the button vibe effect may not be performed again as an operation trigger effect corresponding to the operation promotion effect. In addition, when the button vibe effect γ is configured as an operation promotion effect, the button effect accompanied by the button vibe effect γ is executed more easily than the button effect performed without this button vibe effect γ. It may be configured such that the expectation level of the jackpot is relatively high when the player is given a jackpot. Specifically, if the button vibe effect is being executed (button vibe effect γ is being executed) while the operation promotion image corresponding to the button operation that can trigger the execution of the second button vibe effect is being displayed, the second button vibe effect is always executed. The two-button vibe effect is being executed, or the button vibe effect is not being executed while an operation promotion image corresponding to a button operation that can trigger the execution of the second button vibe effect is being displayed (button vibe effect γ is not being executed). It may be configured such that the probability that the second button vibe effect is executed is higher than in the case where the second button vibe effect is not executed. In addition, the button vibe effect is being executed during the display of the operation promotion image that is displayed after the reach is established that corresponds to the button operation that can trigger the execution of the first button vibe effect β (button vibe effect γ is being executed). In this case, the first button vibe effect β is always executed, or the button vibe effect is executed during the display of the operation promotion image that is displayed after the reach is established corresponding to the button operation that can trigger the execution of the first button vibe effect β. It may be configured such that the probability that the first button vibe effect β is executed is higher than the case where the first button vibe effect β is not executed (the button vibe effect β is not executed). In addition to the first button vibe effect β, as an operation trigger effect when a button operation is performed while the operation promotion image that is displayed after reaching the reach corresponding to the button operation is established, there is a possibility of a jackpot than the first button vibe effect β. (This is based on the premise that there may be cases where a low-level preview effect that is not a button vibe effect is performed).

Next, an example of the first button vibe effect α will be explained. FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the first button vibe effect α. First, as shown in (A) in the figure, the previous fluctuating display has ended and the decorative pattern is displayed in a fixed and stationary manner. Subsequently, as shown in (B) in the figure, the start condition for the current variable display (variation start condition) is satisfied, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the start of this variable display, the first button vibe effect α in which the effect button P15 vibrates is executed, and it is suggested that the expectation level of winning the jackpot is high in the variable display. Then, as shown in (C) in the figure, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the current variable display, the first button vibe effect ends.

Next, an example of the effect of the first button effect β will be explained. FIG. 140 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the first button vibe effect β. First, as shown in (A) in the figure, variable display of decorative patterns is started. Subsequently, as shown in (B) in the figure, among the three rows of decorative symbols, "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and "6" is temporarily displayed on the right symbol, so that the fluctuation is Reach is established in display. Next, as shown in (C) in the figure, a button performance (operation promotion performance as button performance C) is started while N reach is being executed, and operation promotion images such as button images and indicator images are displayed on the screen. Is displayed. Then, as shown in (D) in the figure, when the production button P15 is operated within the valid operation period, a special background image that confirms that SP reach will develop is displayed on the screen as the operation trigger production. At the same time as being displayed, a button vibe effect β in which the effect button P15 vibrates is executed. The occurrence of this operation-triggered performance suggests to the player that the SP will develop into a reach (high expectation of a jackpot). Although not shown in the drawings, when the SP reaches reach, for example, a battle performance in which an ally character battles an enemy character is started. In addition to the first button vibe effect β, the operation trigger effect in this case may be a preview effect that is not a button vibe effect and has a lower jackpot expectation than the first button vibe effect β.

Next, an example of the second button vibe effect will be explained. 141 and 142 are schematic diagrams showing examples of second button vibe effects. First, as shown in (A) in the figure, variable display of decorative patterns is started. Subsequently, as shown in (B) in the figure, among the three rows of decorative symbols, "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and "6" is temporarily displayed on the right symbol, so that the fluctuation is Reach is established in display. Next, although not shown, a button performance (operation promotion performance as button performance C) is started during execution of N reach, similar to FIG. 140(D), and a button image and an indicator image are displayed on the screen. After the operation promotion image is displayed, as shown in (D) in the figure, by operating the production button P15 within the operation validity period, the screen will develop SP reach as the operation trigger production. A dedicated background image that confirms that the game will be played is displayed, and the button vibe effect β in which the effect button P15 vibrates is executed, and by the occurrence of this operation trigger effect, it is possible to develop SP reach for the player. (This suggests that there is a high degree of expectation that it will be a jackpot). Subsequently, as shown in (D) in the figure, a battle performance is started as a performance during SP reach. Subsequently, as shown in (E) in the figure, the final stage of the SP reach is reached, and a button effect (operation promotion effect as button effect D) occurs at the time of winning or losing. Next, as shown in FIG. As well as the moving (moving) accessory effect is performed, the second button vibe effect in which the effect button P15 vibrates is executed, thereby suggesting that a jackpot has been won in the fluctuating display. In addition, in this button performance D, as described above, even if the performance button P15 is not operated within the valid operation period, when the valid operation period ends, the same operation trigger performance (accessory effect) as described above is performed. , second button vibe effect) will be executed. Subsequently, as shown in (G) in the figure, the ally character wins against the enemy character, and the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of "6, 6, 6" (jackpot number) indicating a jackpot. Note that even during the temporary stop of this decorative pattern, the second button vibe effect continues. As a modification, the second button vibe effect may be temporarily interrupted for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) between (F) and (G) in the figure, and then resumed. Subsequently, as shown in Figure (H), the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols is completed, and the decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in a combination of "6, 6, 6" (jackpot number) indicating a jackpot. Note that the second button vibe effect ends before this decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Then, as shown in (I) in the figure, the game shifts to a jackpot game. During execution of this jackpot game, decorative symbols, small symbols, pending images, and fluctuating images are not displayed, but the number of pending balls activated by the special symbol (the number of pending balls displayed in the pending number display area P740) information) is continuously displayed (in the illustrated example, "2" is displayed as the number of balls pending operation for the first special symbol, and "0" is displayed as the number of balls pending operation for the second special symbol). As a modification, small symbols (for example, "6, 6, 6") may also be displayed continuously during execution of the jackpot game.

Next, an example of the third button vibe effect will be described. 143 and 144 are schematic diagrams showing examples of the third button vibe effect. First, as shown in (A) in the figure, variable display of decorative patterns is started. Subsequently, as shown in (B) in the figure, among the three rows of decorative symbols, "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and "6" is temporarily displayed on the right symbol, so that the fluctuation is Reach is achieved in display. Subsequently, although not shown, a button effect (operation promotion effect as button effect C) is started during the execution of N reach, similar to FIG. 140(D), and button images, indicator images, etc. are displayed on the screen. After the operation promotion image is displayed, as shown in (D) in the figure, if the production button P15 is operated within the operation validity period, the screen will display the SP reach as the operation trigger production. At the same time, a special background image is displayed to confirm the button vibe effect β, in which the effect button P15 vibrates, and this operation trigger effect occurs, leading to SP reach for the player (big hit). This suggests that there is a high expectation that Next, as shown in (C) in the figure, the N reach develops into the SP reach. Subsequently, as shown in (D) in the figure, a battle performance is started as a performance during SP reach. Next, as shown in (E) in the figure, an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed at the winning/losing branch in the final stage of the SP reach. At this time, as a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, the left pattern and the right pattern of the decorative pattern are temporarily stopped at "6", and the middle pattern of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at "7". The symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination of "6, 7, 6" (reach is off). Next, as shown in Figure (F), while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and the reach is out of reach, a text image (resurrection suggestion or Revival provocation performance) will be displayed. Next, as shown in (G) in the figure, as a revival effect, an accessory effect in which the first movable accessory P651 falls in front of the screen (moves to a movable position) is executed, and the effect button P15 is pressed. A vibrating third button vibe effect is executed. In addition, as a modified example, as a revival performance, the first movable accessory P651 falls in front of the screen (moves to the movable position), but instead, the second movable accessory P652 A role-playing effect that slides forward on the screen (moves to a movable position) is executed, and a third button vibe effect that causes the effect button P15 to vibrate is executed, and a third button that causes the effect button P15 to vibrate. A vibe effect may be performed. In addition, as a further modification, as a resurrection effect, neither the first movable accessory P651 nor the second movable accessory is moved (not moved to the movable position), and the ally character is displayed in a rainbow color on the screen. A third button vibe effect in which the effect button P15 vibrates may be executed at the same time as an effect wrapped in an aura is executed. Next, as shown in (H) in the figure, immediately after a production in which an ally character wins a come-from-behind victory over an enemy character (resurrection production) is displayed on the screen, a combination of "6, 6, 6" with decorative symbols indicating a jackpot is displayed. It will be temporarily stopped and displayed at (big hit). Note that even during the temporary stop of this decorative pattern, the second button vibe effect continues. As a modification, the second button vibe effect may be temporarily interrupted for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) between (G) and (H) in the figure, and then resumed. Then, as shown in Figure (I), the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols is completed, and the decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in the combination of "6, 6, 6" (jackpot number) indicating a jackpot. The third button vibe effect ends before this decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Then, as shown in (J) in the figure, the game shifts to a jackpot game. During execution of this jackpot game, decorative symbols, small symbols, pending images, and fluctuating images are not displayed, but the number of pending balls activated by the special symbol (the number of pending balls displayed in the pending number display area P740) information) is continuously displayed (in the illustrated example, "2" is displayed as the number of balls pending operation for the first special symbol, and "0" is displayed as the number of balls pending operation for the second special symbol). As a modification, small symbols (for example, "6, 6, 6") may also be displayed continuously during execution of the jackpot game.

Next, execution patterns when various button vibe effects are executed will be explained. FIG. 145 is a schematic diagram showing an execution pattern table for button vibe production. In this embodiment, when the variable performance pattern of the decorative pattern is a variable performance pattern with a specific performance (SP reach), the execution pattern of the button vibe performance is selected by lottery with reference to this execution pattern table. Specifically, as an execution pattern of button vibe effect, execution pattern PB0 is an execution pattern in which no button vibe effect is performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB1 is an execution pattern in which only the first button vibe effect α is performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB2 is an execution pattern in which only the first button vibe effect β is performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB3 is an execution pattern in which only the second button vibe effect is performed during the variable display. The execution pattern PB4 is an execution pattern in which only the third button vibe effect is performed during the variable display. In other words, the execution patterns PB1 to P4 are execution patterns in which one button vibe effect is performed during the variable display. Furthermore, the execution pattern PB5 is an execution pattern in which a first button vibe effect α and a second button vibe effect are performed (an execution pattern in which a second button vibe effect is performed after the first button vibe effect α is performed). . The execution pattern PB6 is an execution pattern in which a first button vibe effect α and a third button vibe effect are performed (an execution pattern in which a third button vibe effect is performed after the first button vibe effect α is performed). The execution pattern PB7 is an execution pattern in which a first button vibe effect β and a second button vibe effect are performed (an execution pattern in which a second button vibe effect is performed after the first button vibe effect β is performed). The execution pattern PB8 is an execution pattern in which the first button vibe effect β and the third button vibe effect are performed (an execution pattern in which the third button vibe effect is performed after the first button vibe effect β is performed). In this way, in this embodiment, there are cases where the button vibe effect is not performed even once during the execution of one variable display, and cases where the button vibration effect is performed only once during the execution of one variable display. There are cases where the button vibe effect is performed multiple times during execution of one fluctuating display. Also, although not shown, an execution pattern PB9 is an execution pattern in which the first button vibe effect α and the first button vibe effect β are performed, the first button vibe effect α and the first button vibe effect β, and the second button It also has an execution pattern PB10 that is an execution pattern in which a vibe effect is performed, an execution pattern PB11 that is an execution pattern in which a first button vibe effect α, a first button vibe effect β, and a third button vibe effect are performed. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot is expected to be higher when the button vibe effect is performed only once during the execution of the variable display than when the button vibe effect is performed only once during the execution of the variable display. The degree of jackpot expectation is relatively high when the button vibe effect is performed multiple times during the execution of the relevant fluctuating display than when the button vibe effect is performed only once during the execution of the fluctuating display. Become. In addition, the second button vibe effect is better if either the first button vibe effect α or the first button vibe effect β is executed than if neither the first button vibe effect α nor the first button vibe effect β is executed. Alternatively, the third button vibe effect is likely to be executed. Furthermore, the second button vibe effect is better when both the first button vibe effect α and the first button vibe effect β are executed than when either the first button vibe effect α or the first button vibe effect β is executed. The effect or the third button vibe effect is likely to be executed. However, regardless of the execution pattern, the third button vibe effect is more difficult to execute than the second button vibe effect (for example, execution pattern 6 is less likely to be selected than execution pattern 5).

<<Initialization operation of movable body>> Next, the initialization operation of the movable body when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of the initialization operation process for the movable body. The initialization operation of the movable body is a confirmation operation executed when the gaming machine PM is powered on (when the power is restored), and is performed for the purpose of confirming whether the movable body operates normally. In addition, in this embodiment, the first movable accessory P651, the second movable accessory P652, and the production button P15 are also collectively referred to as a "movable body." In addition, in the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, "power-on" or "power-off recovery" refers to power-on or power-on without the above-mentioned setting change operation and setting confirmation operation (operation of setting key switch P810). (In other words, it is assumed to be a recovery from a power-on or power-off when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is not entered at the time of power-on or recovery from a power-off).

In the initialization operation process of this movable body, as shown in FIG. Initialization operation processing (S943) for the object P652 is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, the initialization operation processing of the first movable accessory P651 (S941) → initialization operation processing of the production button P15 (S942) → initialization operation processing of the second movable accessory P652 (S943) is performed in this order. Processing is performed, but is not limited to this. For example, the process is performed in the order of initialization operation processing of the first movable accessory P651 → initialization operation processing of the second movable accessory P652 → initialization operation processing of the production button P15 (initialization operation processing of the movable accessory P651, 652 You may perform the processing that takes priority), or perform the processing in the order of initialization operation processing of the production button P15 → initialization operation processing of the first movable accessory P651 → initialization operation processing of the second movable accessory P652 (processing that takes priority) A process that gives priority to the initialization process of P15) may also be executed. Further, the initialization operation process for the first movable accessory P651 and the initialization operation process for the performance button P15 may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel. Alternatively, the initialization operation process for the second movable accessory P652 and the initialization operation process for the production button P15 may be configured to be executed in parallel. Alternatively, the initialization process for the first movable accessory P651, the initialization process for the second movable accessory P652, and the initialization process for the production button P15 are configured to be executed in parallel. Good too.

In the initialization operation process (S941) of the first movable accessory P651, control to return the first movable accessory P651 to the initial position and control to confirm the operation of the first movable accessory P651 are performed. Specifically, although not shown, (1-1) returning the first movable accessory P651 to the initial position, (1-2) confirming the detection signal (ON signal) of the first initial position sensor, ( 1-3) Move the first movable accessory P651 downward, (1-4) Check the detection signal (ON signal) of the first movable position sensor, (1-5) Move the first movable accessory P651 upward. (1-6) confirming the detection signal (ON signal) of the first initial position sensor, and the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651 is completed. Note that when the first movable accessory P651 is present at the initial position at the start of the initialization operation, the process of (1-1) is skipped and the process of (1-2) is performed. In other words, in this initialization operation, different actions are performed depending on the position of the first movable accessory P651 at the start of the initialization operation (depending on whether the first movable accessory P651 is present at the initial position or not). can be executed. Here, the first initial position sensor is a detection means that detects whether the first movable accessory P651 is located at the initial position (first initial position), and the first movable position sensor is a It is a detection means for detecting whether or not the movable accessory P651 is located at a movable position (first movable position). Note that during the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651, the light emission control of the first accessory lamp P651a is also performed at the same time. In this embodiment, in the initialization operation process of the first movable accessory P651, the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651 is started after the first accessory lamp P651a starts emitting light. Further, after the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651 is completed, the first movable accessory lamp P651a stops emitting light (at this time, the first movable accessory P651 is not in the performance operation). Furthermore, the notification mode of the first accessory lamp P651a of the first movable accessory P651 is the notification mode during the initialization operation (for example, the notification mode that blinks with white light emitting color) and the notification mode during the production operation (for example, It is different depending on the mode in which the light is lit continuously with a red light emitting color). Note that the first movable accessory lamp P651a does not have to stop emitting light after the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651 is completed, and in the case of such a configuration, the first movable accessory lamp P651 The notification mode of the accessory lamp P651a may be a different notification mode before and after the end of the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651 (for example, before the initialization operation is completed, the notification mode is a notification mode in which the lamp blinks in white light emitting color, , after the initialization operation is completed, the light may be continuously lit in white light).

In the initialization operation of the production button P15 (S942), in order to confirm the vibration operation of the production button P15, control is performed to drive the vibration motor to vibrate the production button P15 for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). Note that during the initialization operation of the performance button P15, the light emission control of the performance button lamp 15a is also performed at the same time. In this embodiment, in the initialization operation process of the production button P15, the initialization operation of the production button P15 is started after the production button lamp 15a starts emitting light. In this embodiment, during the initialization operation of the performance button P15, the performance button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (a notification mode in which the light flashes in red light color). Then, after the initialization operation of the production button P15 is completed, the notification mode of the production button lamp 15a is switched to a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit with white light emission color). Here, as the initialization operation of the production button P15, first the production button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (notification mode in which the flashing light is lit in red color) for a specific time (for example, 5 seconds), and then Even if the vibration motor is driven to vibrate the performance button P15 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 seconds) while continuing to emit light in the notification mode (notification mode in which the light flashes in red light emission color), and then the vibration ends. The initialization operation of the performance button P15 is completed by continuing the light emission in the special notification mode (the notification mode in which the light is flashed in red light color) for a specified time (for example, 5 seconds). Here, the light emission start timing according to the notification mode during the initialization operation of the production button lamp 15a may be approximately the same as the light emission start timing according to the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first accessory lamp P651a, The light emission end timing according to the notification mode during the initialization operation of the production button lamp 15a may be substantially the same as the light emission end timing according to the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first accessory lamp P651a. In addition, if the internal mechanism of the performance button is equipped with a button rotation performance, which is a preview performance that suggests or announces the expectation of a jackpot by rotating a movable object inside the performance button P15, the performance button P15 may be initialized. As for the operation, in order to confirm the rotation of the movable object inside the production button P15, a control is performed to drive the rotary motor to rotate the movable object inside the production button P15 for a predetermined period of time, and the initial stage of the production button P15 is During the operation, the light emission control of the production button lamp 15a is also performed at the same time, and in the initialization operation process of the production button P15, after the production button lamp 15a starts emitting light, the initialization operation of the production button P15 is started. At the same time, during the initialization operation of the production button P15, the production button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (indication mode that flashes and lights up in red light emitting color), and after the initialization operation of the production button P15 is completed, the production button lamp 15a The notification mode of the button lamp 15a switches to a predetermined notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a lights up continuously with white light emission color).

In the initialization operation (S943) of the second movable accessory P652, control to return the second movable accessory P652 to the initial position and control to confirm the operation of the second movable accessory P652 are performed. Specifically, although not shown, (2-1) returning the second movable accessory P652 to the initial position, (2-2) confirming the detection signal (on signal) of the second initial position sensor, ( 2-3) Swing the second movable accessory P652 to the left in front view, (2-4) Check the detection signal (on signal) of the second movable position sensor, (2-5) Second movable accessory Each operation is performed in the order of swinging the object P652 to the right in front view, (2-6) checking the detection signal (ON signal) of the second initial position sensor, and initializing the second movable accessory P652. The operation is complete. Note that if the second movable accessory P652 is present at the initial position at the start of the initialization operation, the process of (2-1) is skipped and the process of (2-2) is performed. In other words, in this initialization operation, different actions are performed depending on the position of the second movable accessory P652 at the start of the initialization operation (depending on whether or not the second movable accessory P652 exists at the initial position). can be executed. Here, the second initial position sensor is a detection means that detects whether the second movable accessory P652 is located at the initial position (first initial position), and the second movable position sensor is a detection means that detects whether the second movable accessory P652 is located at the initial position (first initial position). It is a detection means for detecting whether or not the movable accessory P652 is located at a movable position (first movable position). Note that during the initialization operation of the second movable accessory P652, the light emission control of the second accessory lamp P652a is also performed at the same time. In this embodiment, in the initialization operation process for the second movable accessory P652, after the second accessory lamp P652a starts emitting light, the initialization operation for the second movable accessory P651 is started. Further, after the initialization operation of the second movable accessory P652 is completed, the second movable accessory lamp P652a ends to emit light (at this time, the second movable accessory P652 is not in the performance operation). Here, the light emission start timing according to the notification mode during the initialization operation of the second accessory lamp P652a may be substantially the same as the light emission start timing according to the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first accessory lamp P651a. Often, the timing at which light emission ends according to the notification mode during the initialization operation of the second accessory lamp P652a may be approximately the same as the timing at which light emission ends according to the notification mode during the initialization operation of the first accessory lamp P651a. . In addition, the notification mode of the second accessory lamp P652a of the second movable accessory P652 is the notification mode during the initialization operation (for example, the notification mode in which the light flashes in white) and the notification mode during the production operation (for example, It is different depending on the mode in which the light is lit continuously with a red light emitting color). Note that the second movable accessory lamp P652a does not have to stop emitting light after the initialization operation of the second movable accessory P652 is completed, and in the case of such a configuration, the second movable accessory lamp P652a The notification mode of the accessory lamp P652a may be a different notification mode before and after the end of the initialization operation of the second movable accessory P652 (for example, before the end of the initialization operation, the notification mode is a notification mode in which the lamp blinks in white light emitting color, , after the initialization operation is completed, the light may be continuously lit in white light).

Here, the execution timing of the initialization operation process for the movable body will be explained. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the display screen displayed on the effect display device P70 after the gaming machine is powered on. In this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on (recovered from a power outage), the initialization process of the movable body is performed at the same time or substantially at the same time as the display screen of the effect display device P70 returns to the normal screen described below. Configured to start.

First, as shown in FIG. 147(A), nothing is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70 when the gaming machine is powered off. As shown in FIG. 147(B), when the gaming machine is powered on and recovered from a power-off, nothing is displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second), but after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, In this case, the effect display device P70 displays a recovery screen (in the fourth embodiment, etc. described above) that includes a character image “Recovering” (an image indicating that the gaming machine or the effect display device is in a state of recovery). , which are referred to as a power recovery notification image, a power failure recovery image, or a power failure recovery screen) are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 147(C), after the returning screen is displayed on the effect display device P70 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds), it is switched to the normal screen (standby screen). On this normal screen, an initial combination of decorative patterns and a predetermined background image are displayed as a predetermined default display, regardless of the presentation state before the power is turned off. In the illustrated example, a combination of "3, 3, and 1" indicating a predetermined off-line is displayed as an initial combination of decorative patterns. In the illustrated example, a background image corresponding to a predetermined default production mode (production stage) (for example, a background image of stage A in the normal production mode) is displayed as the predetermined background image. In this embodiment, the initialization process for the movable body is started almost simultaneously with the start of displaying this initial screen. Note that after this initial screen is displayed, the effect display device P70 becomes in a state where the decorative symbols can be displayed variably (the effect display by the effect display device P70 is completely restored). In other words, after returning to the initial screen, when a production control command is transmitted from the main control board P100 to the production control board P200, the production display device P70 can display a production corresponding to the production control command. (For example, when a variation start command is transmitted from the main control board P100 to the production control board P200, the variation display of the decorative symbols is started on the production display device P70). For example, when the power is restored from a power failure, if the fluctuation display is not being performed and there are neither the operation pending ball of the first special symbol nor the operation pending ball of the second special symbol (non-fluctuation state), (variation standby (before the power is turned off), the initial screen is displayed and even while the movable body initialization process is being executed, if the game ball enters the first starting port P51, the initial screen will be displayed. , it is possible to start the variable display of the first special symbol, and at the same time, it is possible to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device P70. Note that, as a modification of the present embodiment, the initialization operation of the movable body may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the normal screen was displayed. Further, the initialization operation of the movable body may be started when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the returning screen was displayed (before the normal screen was displayed). Furthermore, the initialization operation of the movable body may be started upon reception of a predetermined performance control command from the main control board P100. In addition, hereinafter, the "initialization operation of the movable body" refers to the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651, the initialization operation of the production button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable accessory P652. Rather, all of the initialization operations of the first movable accessory P651, the initialization operation of the production button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable accessory P652 (all of these multiple initialization operations are started and all are completed) until).

<<Button vibe effect during initialization operation>> Next, the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button vibe effect will be described. FIG. 148 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the button vibe effect. Here, regarding the time chart of the button vibe performance at the bottom, the vibration for a predetermined time in the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is not treated as "execution". In addition, in FIG. 148, a simple screen display (a screen display in which some displays such as small symbols and pending images are omitted) is shown due to space limitations.

First, at time t1, a power outage occurs in the gaming machine in a variable standby state (non-variable state). At time t2, the gaming machine is powered on and recovered from the power-off. At time t3, a returning screen is displayed on the effect display device P70 at a predetermined timing after the gaming machine is powered on. At time t4, the display screen of the effect display device P70 is switched from the returning screen to the normal screen (standby screen). Moreover, at this time point t4, the initialization operation process of the movable body is started, and the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651, the initialization operation of the production button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable accessory P652 are performed in order. It will be done.

At time t5, during execution of the initialization operation of the movable body, the game ball enters the first starting port P51, thereby starting the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, by transmitting a variation start command from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variable display of the small symbols are started. Also, at this time t5, a production lottery is held at the start of the variable display, and execution pattern PB5 is executed as the execution pattern of the button vibe production (execution of the first button vibe production α and execution of the second button vibe production). shall be determined. Therefore, originally, the first button vibe effect α should be executed at the start of the fluctuating display (that is, at time t5), but since the initialization operation of the movable body is being executed, this movable body In order to give priority to the body initialization operation, execution of the first button vibe effect α is prohibited. Here, in this embodiment, as the initialization operation of the movable body, (1) even if the initialization operation of the movable accessory P651, 652 is being executed and the initialization operation of the production button P15 is not being executed; , (2) Even if the initialization operation of the movable accessories P651, 652 is not being executed and the initialization operation of the production button P15 is being executed, the first button is not being executed while the initialization operation of the movable object is being executed. Execution of vibe production α is now restricted. In other words, if the execution timing of the first button vibe effect α overlaps with the execution period of the initialization operation of the movable body, even if it is the initialization operation of the movable accessory P651, 652, the initial stage of the button effect 15 Even if it is an action, the execution of the first button vibe effect α is restricted (the execution of the first button vibe effect α is canceled). In addition, if the timing to execute the first button vibe effect α comes just before the end of the initialization operation of the movable body, the execution of the first button vibe effect α is prohibited until the initialization operation of the movable body is completed. In addition, after the initialization operation of the movable body is completed, the remaining part of the first button vibe effect α (the execution period of the first button vibe effect α, which overlaps with the execution period of the initialization operation of the movable body) The first button vibe effect for the execution period that does not exist) will not be executed. In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, even if the initialization operation of the movable accessories P651, 652 is being executed at the timing of starting the execution of the first button vibe effect α, the predetermined initialization operation of the effect button P15 is performed. If the vibration for the time period has been completed (or if it is not in progress), the initialization operation (vibration operation for operation confirmation) of the production button P15 conflicts with the production operation (vibration operation for production) Therefore, the first button vibe effect α may be made executable.

At time t6, the initialization operation of the performance button P15 among the initialization operations of the movable body is started. When the initialization operation of the production button P15 is started, the production button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (flashing red light color) (switches from an off state to a red blinking state). ). Further, at time t7, the initialization operation of the production button P15 ends. When the initialization operation of the production button P15 is completed, the notification mode of the production button lamp 15a changes from a special notification mode (flashing light with red light emission color) to a predetermined notification mode (white light emission color). (continuous lighting mode). Note that, at the same time, the vibration for a predetermined period also ends.

Subsequently, at time t8, the initialization operations of the movable bodies are completed, that is, the initialization operations of the first movable accessory P651, the initialization operations of the production button P15, and the initialization operations of the second movable accessory P652. is all finished. Note that at this time point t8, the fluctuating display continues.

Subsequently, at time t9, button performance D (operation promotion performance) is started as a winning/losing performance, and an operation promotion image such as a button image appears on the screen. When this operation promotion performance is started, the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a changes from a predetermined notification mode (continuously lit with white light emitting color) to a specific notification mode (continuously lit with red light emitting color). Switch.

At time t10, the first movable accessory P651 falls (to the movable position) when the production button P15 is operated (or when the effective operation period elapses without the production button P15 being operated). A moving) accessory effect and a second button vibe effect in which the effect button P15 vibrates are respectively executed, suggesting that the fluctuating display is a jackpot. While the performance button P15 is vibrating, the performance button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (a mode in which it lights up continuously in rainbow colors).

At time t11, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (jackpot). Then, at time t12, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are fixedly stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (jackpot).

In this way, in this embodiment, the execution of the first button vibe effect α and the execution of the second button vibe effect are scheduled in the variable display that is performed by starting and winning a prize during the initialization operation of the movable body. (If the execution of both button vibe effects is won in the effect lottery), the first button vibe effect α scheduled to be executed at the start of the relevant variable display is executed in order to give priority to the initialization operation of the movable body. On the other hand, the second button vibe effect scheduled to be executed at the end of the variable display is allowed to be executed because there is no risk that it will be executed overlappingly with the initialization operation of the movable body.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, as a performance that can be executed simultaneously with the first button vibe performance α (performed in conjunction), a predetermined performance image may be displayed before or during the execution of the first button vibe performance α. (For example, a line image of ``This is your chance!'') may be configured to execute a button vibe simultaneous display effect (button vibe cooperative display effect). In that case, in applying FIG. 148 above, priority is given to the initialization operation of the movable body, so execution of the first button vibe effect α is restricted, while button vibe simultaneous display effect (button vibe linked display Preferably, execution of display of a predetermined effect image (effect) is permitted. According to this, even if the execution of the first button vibe effect α is restricted, by executing the button vibe simultaneous display effect (button vibe cooperative display effect), the first button vibe effect α is normally performed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the situation is as expected (high expectation of jackpot).

<<Button Effect A During Initialization Operation>> Next, the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and button effect A will be explained. FIG. 149 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the first button effect. Here, regarding the time chart of the button vibe performance at the bottom, the vibration for a predetermined time in the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is not treated as "execution". Note that FIG. 149 shows a simple screen display (a screen display in which some displays such as small symbols and reserved images are omitted) due to space constraints.

First, time points t21 to t24 are the same as the above-described time points t1 to t4, so repeated explanation will be omitted. At time t25, the initialization operation of the performance button P15 among the initialization operations of the movable body is started. When the initialization operation of the production button P15 is started, the production button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (flashing red light color) (switches from an off state to a red blinking state). ).

Subsequently, at time t26, the game ball enters the first starting port P51 during the initialization operation of the movable body, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Further, by transmitting a variation start command from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variable display of the small symbols are started. Further, at this time point t26, a performance lottery is held at the start of the variable display, and execution of button performance A and execution of the second button vibe performance are determined. Therefore, at this time point t26 (when the variable display starts), execution of button effect A (operation promotion effect) is started, and an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image appears on the screen.

Subsequently, at time t27, the effect button P15 is operated within the valid operation period. However, even if the production button P15 is operated within this operational validity period, the production button lamp 15a will be lit in a special light emitting mode (a mode in which it flashes in red light emission color) while the initialization operation of the movable body is being executed. While the lamp is emitting light, the special notification mode continues without changing the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a triggered by the operation of the performance button P15. In addition, at this point in time 27, if the production button P15 is operated within the valid operation period, the first movable accessory P651 would fall (move to the movable position) as a production triggered by the operation. However, since the initialization operation of the movable object is being executed, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited in order to give priority to the initialization operation of the movable object. Here, in this embodiment, as the initialization operation of the movable body, (1) even if the initialization operation of the movable accessory P651, 652 is being executed and the initialization operation of the production button P15 is not being executed; , (2) Even if the initialization operation of the movable accessories P651, 652 is not being executed and the initialization operation of the production button P15 is being executed, the accessory production will not be performed while the initialization operation of the movable object is being executed. Execution is restricted. In other words, if the execution timing of the button vibe production overlaps with the execution period of the initialization operation of the movable body, even if it is the initialization operation of the movable accessory P651, 652, the initialization operation of the production button P15 Even if there is, the execution of the accessory production is restricted (the execution of the accessory production is canceled). In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, even if the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is in progress at the timing when the execution of the accessory performance by button performance A is started, the initialization operation of the movable accessory objects P651 and 652 is not completed. (or if it is in a state of non-execution), the initialization operation (accessory object movement for operation confirmation) of the movable accessory P651, 652 and the production action (accessory action for production) may conflict. Therefore, it may be possible to perform the role performance.

At time t28, the initialization operation of the performance button P15 among the initialization operations of the movable body is completed. When the initialization operation of the production button P15 is completed, the notification mode of the production button lamp 15a changes from a special notification mode (flashing light with red light emission color) to a predetermined notification mode (white light emission color). (continuous lighting mode). Note that, at the same time, the vibration for a predetermined period also ends.

At time t29, the initialization operation of the movable body is completed, that is, the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651, the initialization operation of the production button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable accessory P652 are all completed. do. Note that at this time point t29, the fluctuating display continues.

At time t30, button performance D (operation promotion performance) is started as a winning/losing performance, and an operation promotion image such as a button image appears on the screen. At time t31, the first movable accessory P651 falls (to the movable position) when the production button P15 is operated (or when the effective operation period elapses without the production button P15 being operated). A moving) accessory effect and a second button vibe effect in which the effect button P15 vibrates are respectively executed, suggesting that the fluctuating display is a jackpot.

At time t32, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (jackpot). Then, at time t33, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are fixedly stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (jackpot).

In this way, in this embodiment, when the execution of button effect A and the execution of the second button vibe effect are scheduled in the variable display that is performed by starting and winning during the initialization operation of the movable body. (If the execution of button effect A and second button vibe effect is won in the effect lottery), the effect button during the initialization operation of the movable body and within the operational validity period of button effect A executed at the start of the relevant variable display The notification mode of the lamp 15a is a special notification mode (flashing and lighting with red light emitting color), whereas the effect button within the operational validity period of the second button vibe effect executed at the end of the fluctuating display. The two notification modes are different in that the notification mode of the lamp 15a is a specific mode of notification (a mode of continuous lighting in red light emission color).

As a modification of this embodiment, a special effect effect (effect group effect) can be created using the time before the button effect is executed, that is, the time before the button image (operation promotion image) appears on the screen. ) may be executed. This special effect production (effect collection production) suggests that a button production will occur, that is, a production in which a button image appears on the screen (sometimes referred to as a "button appearance production") will be executed. It is configured as a button appearance suggestion effect (a button appearance suggestion effect that incites whether or not the effect button will appear).

Here, FIG. 150 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a special effect performance (effect collection performance). In this special effect production, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a special effect image representing the four production buttons P15 in a translucent manner is displayed, and these special effect images are gathered in one place and combined. , the effect is such that one complete button image (non-transparent button image) is formed, as shown in FIG. 150(B). In addition, in this embodiment, the relationship between the special effect performance and the operation validity period is such that the special effect performance is performed until the operation validity period starts, and the button operation validity period starts when the button image is completed. It is possible to define

Here, a case will be described in which this special effect performance (effect collection performance) is applied to the button appearance suggestion performance (button appearance inciting performance) of the button performance A described above. FIG. 151 is a time chart showing a modification of FIG. 149. Note that this FIG. 151 differs from the above-described FIG. 149 only in the screen example at time t30, and therefore, explanation of other portions will be omitted except in special cases.

In the present embodiment, the button appearance presentation patterns include a first button appearance presentation pattern in which a button image is displayed with a special effect presentation (button appearance suggestion presentation or button appearance stimulation presentation), and a special effect presentation (button appearance suggestion presentation). There is a second button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed without any effect (or effect or button appearance promotion effect). Among the button effects of this embodiment, in button effect A performed at the start of variation, a second button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed without any special effect effect is executed. On the other hand, in the button effect D performed at the time of winning or losing, a first button appearance effect pattern is executed in which a button image is displayed with a special effect effect. Therefore, when starting the execution of button effect A at time t26 in FIG. 151, the second button appearance effect pattern is executed, so that the button image is displayed without performing the special effect effect. Become. On the other hand, when starting the execution of button effect D at time t30 in FIG. 151, the first button appearance effect pattern is executed, so that the special effect effect is performed first and then the button image appears. become.

In this way, in this modification, when the execution of button effect A and the execution of the second button vibe effect are scheduled in the variable display that is performed by starting and winning during the initialization operation of the movable body. (If the execution of button effect A and second button vibe effect is won in the effect lottery), a special effect will be applied when the button image appears in button effect A, which is executed during the initialization of the movable body and at the start of the variable display. While no effect is executed, a special effect effect is executed when the button image appears in button effect D, which is executed at the end of the fluctuating display, and button effect A during the initialization of the movable body is performed during the initial stage. By prioritizing the initialization action, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming complicated, and in the button performance D after the initialization action of the movable body, a special effect performance is generated, which increases the player's expectations. It becomes possible to perform appropriate game progress processing according to the situation.

As a modification of this embodiment, the button effect A performed at the start of the variation may also be configured so that a first button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed with a special effect effect is executed. In that case, the probability that the first button appearance effect pattern of displaying the button image with special effect effects will be executed is higher when button effect A is executed than when button effect D is executed. It is preferable that the first button appearance effect pattern is relatively low (that is, the first button appearance effect pattern is less likely to be executed in button effect A than in button effect D). Further, the button effect B performed at the start of the variation may also be configured such that a second button appearance effect pattern in which a button image is displayed without any special effect effect is executed. In that case, the second button appearance effect pattern that displays the button image without special effect effects is executed more when button effect D is executed than when button effect A is executed. It is preferable that the probability is relatively low (that is, the second button appearance effect pattern is less likely to be executed in button effect D than in button effect A).

This special effect performance may have multiple types of display formats, and when configured in this way, for example, a special effect performance with a red effect has a higher jackpot expectation than a special effect performance with a blue effect. Alternatively, multiple types of button images may be provided (such as a blue button image and a red button image), and a red button image is more likely to perform a high-expectation preview effect than a blue button image. , a red comment preview effect is more likely to be executed than a blue comment preview effect), and a special effect effect with a red effect is more likely to be executed than a special effect effect with a blue effect (for example, a red button image) It may be configured so that

Furthermore, a special effect performance that lasts for a long time (for example, 4 seconds) may be configured so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than a special effect performance that lasts for a short time (for example, 2 seconds). , 2 seconds) may be configured so that a special effect effect that lasts for a long time (for example, 4 seconds) has a specific button image (for example, a red button image). In addition, when configuring to provide multiple types of display modes for special effect productions, the latter half of the variable display (which is a predetermined timing before reaching, for example, the execution timing of button production B) is more effective than the first half of the variable display (which is the predetermined timing before reaching, for example, the execution timing of button effect B). It may be configured such that a highly anticipated special effect is more likely to be executed at a specific timing after the reach (for example, the execution timing of button effect D), or the first half of the fluctuating display (before the reach) It may be configured such that the special effect performance is not performed at a predetermined timing), and the special effect performance can be performed only in the latter half of the fluctuating display (a specific timing after reach).

In addition, whether or not the special effect performance can be executed is determined by lottery, and the expectation of a jackpot in the variable display is relatively higher when the special effect performance is executed than when the special effect performance is not performed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, the longer the execution time of the special effect (the display time of the special effect image), the higher the expectation of a jackpot in the variable display, or the higher the probability of a jackpot being triggered by a button operation. It may be configured so that high performance occurs. At that time, if the special effect production is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch (the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the fluctuating display described above, for example, the execution timing of button production D), the special effect production It is preferable that the effect time (display time of the special effect image) is set to be longer than the operational validity period of the effect button P15. Note that, contrary to this configuration, the production time of the special effect production (the display time of the special effect image) may be set to be shorter than the operational validity period of the production button P15. In addition, as another modification, multiple types of display modes (for example, a blue button image, a red button image, a rainbow button image, a large button image, a small button image, etc.) may be prepared as the display mode of the button image. good. In that case, whether or not the special effect performance can be performed and the performance time when it is performed may be varied depending on the display mode of the button image scheduled to be performed thereafter.

In addition, as a further modification, it is possible to execute the comment preview performance even during one or more fluctuation displays (pre-read fluctuation display which is a fluctuation before the target) before the pre-read target action pending ball is exhausted. (button image can be displayed), and the special effect performance is better when the look-ahead fluctuation display is being executed than during the execution of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display) when the action pending ball that is the target of this look-ahead is exhausted. The possibility of execution may be lowered, and the execution of this pre-reading variation display is better than the execution of the variation display when the action pending ball targeted for pre-reading (the said variation display) is being executed. The possibility of execution of a highly anticipated special effect performance (such as a special effect performance with a red effect as described above or a long-time (for example, 4 seconds) special effect performance) may be reduced.

As another modification example, the special effect performance is not executed (or the highly anticipated special effect performance is not executed) in the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before reach, for example, the execution timing of button performance B). execute a special effect production with a low expectation level), and execute a special effect production in the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after reaching, for example, the execution timing of button production D) (or execute a special effect production with a low expectation level). When performing a highly anticipated special effect production instead of an effect production, the period between the predetermined timing before reach, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display, is long. It may be configured such that the expectation of a jackpot is higher as the time goes by (for example, 90 seconds rather than 60 seconds), or the button image at a specific timing after reach, which is the latter part of the fluctuating display, has a high expectation. It may be configured such that the image is more likely to be an image (for example, it is more likely to be an image of a red button instead of an image of a blue button).

<<Button Effect B During Initialization Operation>> Next, the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and button effect B will be explained. FIG. 152 is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable body and the second button effect. Here, regarding the time chart of the button vibe performance at the bottom, the vibration for a predetermined time in the initialization operation of the performance button P15 is not treated as "execution". Note that FIG. 149 shows a simple screen display (a screen display in which some displays such as small symbols and pending images are omitted) due to space constraints.

First, time points t41 to t44 are the same as the above-described time points t1 to t4, so repeated explanation will be omitted. At time 55, the initialization operation of the performance button P15 among the initialization operations of the movable body is started. When the initialization operation of the production button P15 is started, the production button lamp 15a emits light in a special notification mode (flashing red light color) (switches from an off state to a red blinking state). ).

Subsequently, at time t46, the game ball enters the first starting hole P51 during the execution of the initialization operation of the movable body, and thereby the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Further, by transmitting a variation start command from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variable display of the small symbols are started. Furthermore, at this time point t46, a performance lottery is held at the start of the variable display, and execution of button performance B and execution of the second button vibe performance are determined. Therefore, at this time t46 (the start of the variable display), button effect B (operation promotion effect) is started, and an operation promotion image such as a button image or an indicator image appears on the screen.

Subsequently, at time t47, the effect button P15 is operated within the valid operation period. However, even if the production button P15 is operated within this operational validity period, the production button lamp 15a will be lit in a special light emitting mode (a mode in which it blinks in red light emission color) while the movable body is being initialized. While the lamp is emitting light, even if the performance button P15 is operated, the notification mode of the performance button lamp 15a does not change and the special notification mode continues. Furthermore, at this time point t47, when the production button P15 is operated within the valid operation period, the dialogue production ("comment preview production") in which a dialogue image "Chance!!" is displayed on the screen as the operation trigger production ("comment preview production" ) is executed. However, as mentioned above, the operation trigger performance (dialogue preview performance) of button performance B is executed when the performance button P15 is operated within the valid operation period. If the valid operation period ends without being operated, button performance B ends without this operation trigger performance (line performance) being executed.

At time t48, the initialization operation of the performance button P15 among the initialization operations of the movable body is completed. When the initialization operation of the production button P15 is completed, the notification mode of the production button lamp 15a changes from a special notification mode (flashing light with red light emission color) to a predetermined notification mode (white light emission color). (continuous lighting mode). Note that, at the same time, the vibration for a predetermined period also ends.

At time t49, the initialization operation of the movable body is completed, that is, the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651, the initialization operation of the production button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable accessory P652 are all completed. do. Note that at this time point t49, the fluctuating display continues.

At time t50, button performance D (operation promotion performance) is started as a winning/losing performance, and an operation promotion image such as a button image appears on the screen. At time t51, triggered by the operation of the performance button P15 (operation-triggered performance), the first movable accessory P651 falls (moves to a movable position), and the first movable accessory P651 vibrates. A two-button vibe effect is executed, and it is suggested that the fluctuating display is a jackpot. Note that this button performance D is different from the previously executed button performance B, and even if the performance button P15 is not operated within the operation validity period, the operation trigger will be triggered when the operation validity period ends. Performances (actor performance, second button vibe performance) will be executed.

At time t52, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (jackpot). Then, at time t53, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are fixedly stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (jackpot).

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the variable display starts during the initialization operation of the effect button that is performed immediately after the power is turned on, button effect B (initialization operation and For button effects that have a relatively high possibility of being executed repeatedly, there are button effects that are executed only when the effect button P15 is actually operated within the valid operation period (execution of an operation trigger effect). By setting the condition to a type of button effect that requires only a button operation, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the initialization operation of the movable body and button effect B are executed redundantly. As a modification, button performance B that can be performed at the beginning or in the first half of the fluctuating display can also be performed in the middle (such as after the creation of a pseudo group or reach) or the second half (such as after the development of SP reach) of the fluctuating display. Similar to button performance D (a button performance with a relatively low possibility of being executed repeatedly), the performance button P15 is operated within the operation validity period, not only when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation validity period. The configuration may be such that the operation trigger effect can be executed even if the operation validity period ends without being executed. However, in that case, the operation trigger effect will be executed when the effect button is not operated within the operation validity period when button effect B is executed than when button effect D is executed. It is preferable that the probability of the operation triggering effect is relatively low (that is, it is more difficult for button effect B to perform the operation trigger effect than button effect D when the effect button P15 is not operated within the operation validity period). It is.

≪Other effects of the button vibe effect≫ In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the button vibe effect (for example, the first button vibe effect) spans multiple fluctuating displays (for example, between the current fluctuating display and the next fluctuating display). (effect α, first button vibe effect β, second button vibe effect, third button vibe effect, etc.) are configured not to be executed. In other words, the button vibe effect of this embodiment is not executed when the symbol is displayed at a fixed stop (it is not executed before and after the fixed stop display), and is always executed during one variable display ( The variable display is configured to be completed before the variable display is fixed and stopped.

On the other hand, when a button vibe effect (for example, the fourth button vibe effect, which is a button vibe effect executed in conjunction with the execution of a promotion effect or a holding consecutive game effect) is executed during the execution of a jackpot game, , this button vibe performance is configured to be executable over multiple round games (for example, between the current round game and the next round game). In other words, the condition for ending one round game is when the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening P54 has elapsed, or when the entry of a specified number of game balls is detected before the maximum opening time elapses. Therefore, the execution time of one round game is not always a fixed time value, and the round game is changed depending on the progress of the round game (the state of the game ball entering the big winning hole P54). This is because if the button vibe performance ends at an early stage before reaching the maximum opening time, the button vibe performance may be performed across multiple round games. However, this button vibe performance is not performed continuously from the first round game (first round) to the final round game (last round) of the jackpot game. Moreover, this button vibe performance is executed in a time shorter than the maximum opening time of the big prize opening P54.

Also, while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, be careful of the display mode (reach mode) of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols while the above-mentioned temporary stop motion and reach motion are being executed (at least at the start of execution). Although the configuration is such that the button vibe effect is not executed in order to make the movement more exciting, the first button vibe effect α is executed during the execution of the movement at the start of variation (at least at the start of execution) in order to further excite the movement at the start of variation. During the execution of the shaking motion (at least at the start of execution), in order to prevent the shaking motion from becoming monotonous, the first button vibe effect β, the second button vibe effect β, and the third button vibe effect are activated. It is configured so that a button vibe effect can be executed. However, the button vibe effect is not executed while the shaking motion is being executed, which may be executed between the time when the fluctuation stops and the time when the standby demonstration effect is displayed.

In addition, even if the light intensity is adjusted while the button vibe effect is being executed, the effect button lamp 15a may have a specific notification mode (continuously lit in red light) or a special notification mode (rainbow) due to the execution of the button vibe effect. The amount of light in the light emitting mode (continuously lit in different colors) does not change (is not adjusted), but the board lamp P25 installed on the game board P20 (center decoration P21) during the execution of the button vibe effect is red or rainbow. The amount of light is changed (adjusted) when the light is continuously lit in different colors. In addition, as a modified example, if the light amount is adjusted while the button vibe effect is being executed, a specific notification mode (a mode in which the button lamp 15a lights up continuously with red light emitting color) or a special notification mode of the effect button lamp 15a accompanying the execution of the button vibe effect may be changed. The amount of light in the light emitting mode (a mode in which the light is continuously lit in a rainbow color) is also the same as when the board lamp P25 provided on the game board P20 (center decoration P21) during the execution of the button vibe effect has a red or rainbow color light emission color. It may also be configured such that the amount of light in the continuously lit light emission is also changed (adjusted). However, when adjusting the light intensity while the production button P15 is being initialized (vibrating), the production button lamp 15a will be lit in a special notification mode (flashing red light color) in conjunction with the initialization (vibration) of the production button P15. The amount of light in the light emission of the embodiment) does not change (is not adjusted).

In addition, if the button image when executing button effect D in the jackpot variation is the blue button image described above, the second button vibe effect may be executed, or the third button vibe effect may be executed. On the other hand, in the case of a red button image or a rainbow-colored button image, which have higher jackpot expectations than a blue button image, only the second button vibe effect is executed (or, rather than a blue button image, The second button vibe effect is easily executed, and the third button vibe effect is difficult to execute.

<<Initialization operation according to the transition mode when the power is turned on>> Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment performs the initialization operation of the movable objects (movable accessories and performance buttons) according to the transition mode when the power is turned on. The timing is configured so that the timing can be different.

First, if the transition mode when the gaming machine is powered on is the gaming mode (see the fifth embodiment), that is, with the setting key switch P810 turned OFF and the RAM clear switch P820 turned OFF, When the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on), the initialization operation of the movable body is executed at approximately the same time as the display of the effect display device P70 is switched from the recovery screen to the normal screen.

When the transition mode when the game machine is powered on is the setting change mode (see the fifth embodiment), that is, when the setting key switch P810 is turned on and the RAM clear switch P820 is turned on, the power is turned on. When the power switch is turned on (when the power switch is turned on), the initialization operation of the movable body is not performed during execution of this setting change mode. That is, while the settings change mode is being executed, a settings change screen is displayed on the effect display device P70 to remind you that settings are being changed, and in order not to obstruct the visibility of this settings change screen, the movable Body initialization operations are no longer executed. Then, after the setting key switch P810 is turned OFF and the setting change mode ends, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed.

If the transition mode when the gaming machine is powered on is the setting confirmation mode (see the fifth embodiment), that is, with the setting key switch P810 turned ON and the RAM clear switch P820 turned OFF, the power is turned on. When the power switch is turned on (when the power switch is turned on), the initialization operation of the movable body is not executed during execution of this setting confirmation mode. That is, while the settings confirmation mode is being executed, a settings confirmation screen is displayed on the effect display device P70 to remind you that settings are being confirmed. Body initialization operations are no longer executed. Then, after the setting key switch P810 is turned OFF and the setting confirmation mode ends, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed.

When the transition mode when the gaming machine is powered on is the RAM clear mode (see the fifth embodiment), that is, when the setting key switch P810 is turned OFF and the RAM clear switch P820 is pressed down (when it is turned ON). state), when the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned ON), RAM clearing processing (processing in which a predetermined storage area of RAMP103 mounted on the main control microcomputer P110 is initialized) is executed. The initialization operation of the movable body is performed at substantially the same time as the display on the effect display device is switched from the recovery screen to the normal screen. In this embodiment, even if the operation to shift to the RAM clear mode is performed, the setting key switch P810 is reset within a predetermined grace period (for example, within 1 second) from the time of power-on or the time of shifting to the RAM clear mode. When turned ON, the mode shifts to setting change mode. While this setting confirmation mode is being executed, as mentioned above, the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the production display device P70 to remind you that the settings are being confirmed, and the setting confirmation screen is displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of the setting confirmation screen. Therefore, the initialization operation of the movable body is not executed. Then, after the setting key switch P810 is turned OFF and the setting change mode ends, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed. The "predetermined grace period" is the time from when the power is turned on to the gaming machine until the process for confirming the operating state (ON/OFF) of the setting change switch P810 is performed. For example, by setting the period during which the recovery screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on to be within a predetermined grace period, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode by turning on the setting key switch P810 while the recovery screen is being displayed. It's okay. In that case, it is preferable not to shift to the setting change mode even if the setting key switch P810 is turned on after the predetermined grace period expires upon switching from the returning screen to the normal screen. In addition, it is preferable to set the end of the predetermined grace time before the start of the initialization operation of the movable body, which causes the problem of transitioning to the setting change mode after the initialization operation has started ( This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the movable body is initialized during execution of the setting change mode.

[Left-handed player notification performance] Next, the left-handed player notification performance will be explained. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, depending on the game state currently being executed, a left-handed game in which the player advances the game aiming at the left area PA1, and a right-handed game in which the player advances the game aiming at the right area PA2. It is configured so that it can be executed. At this time, if the game state currently being executed is a low base state (excluding special game states), that is, a game state where the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game (a game state where left-handed hitting is advantageous). In this case, it is possible to execute the left-handed hitting notification effect. This left-handed hitting notification performance is a performance that displays a left-handed hitting notification image that urges the game ball to be fired toward the left side area PA1. In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state currently being executed is a high base state, that is, when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game (a game state in which right-handed hitting is advantageous) It is possible to perform a right-handed hitting notification effect. Further, even during execution of the special game state, the right-handed hitting notification effect can be executed. This right-handed hitting notification performance is a performance that displays a right-handed hitting notification image that urges the game ball to be fired toward the right area PA2.

FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a left-handed hitting notification image. In the illustrated example, (A) Immediately before the end of the high base state (fluctuation display of the final round of the high base state) → (B) Start of the low base state (while the symbol is stopped after the end of the fluctuating display of the final round of the high base state) This shows a case where the display screen changes in the order of (before starting the variable display of the first rotation in the low base state) → (C) the variable display of the first rotation in the low base state. As shown in (C) in this figure, the left-handed hitting notification image (left-handed hitting notification display) includes, for example, a text image (text display) that says "Please hit left-handed" and an arrow image pointing left (arrow display). It is composed of combined images. While this left-handed hitting notification effect is being executed, in addition to displaying the left-handed hitting notification image, a left-handed hitting notification sound (for example, a voice saying "Please hit left") urging the player to hit left-handed is output from the speaker. good.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is a low base state (low base state during non-jackpot), while the left-handed hit notification effect is being executed, the left-handed hit notification image is displayed and the decorative pattern is displayed (variable display (the decorative pattern inside, the decorative pattern during temporary stop display, and the decorative pattern during fixed stop display) can be displayed overlappingly. When the display of the left-handed hitting notification image and the display of the decorative pattern overlap, in order to increase the effectiveness of the left-handed hitting notification to the player (to ensure the visibility of the left-handed hitting notification image), the decoration The display priority (layer priority) of the left-handed hitting notification image is set to a higher priority (higher priority) than the symbol display priority (layer priority). Note that "overlapping display" means displaying one image and the other image overlappingly, and the display of the other image has a higher display priority than the display of one image. is high, at least a portion of the representation of one image is invisible or has reduced visibility due to the presence of the representation of the other image, and the representation of one image is more visible than the representation of the other image. If the priority is low, at least a portion of the display of the other image will be invisible or have reduced visibility due to the presence of the display of one image. In addition, in order to ensure the visibility of the decorative pattern, the left-handed hitting notification image may be formed as a semi-transparent image.

On the other hand, during the execution of this left-handed hitting notification effect, the left-handed hitting notification image, the small symbol, the pending image and the fluctuating image, and the number of activated pending balls for each special symbol are displayed. It is configured to prevent duplicate display. Furthermore, even if the visibility of the decorative symbols is obstructed by the left-handed hit notification image, the visibility of the small symbols, pending images, changing images, and display of the number of pending balls for each special symbol is ensured. Therefore, the player can appropriately recognize the current game situation (fluctuating display, stopped display, number of pending balls, etc.).

Note that when this gaming machine is viewed from the front, the display area of the left-handed hitting notification image overlaps at least in part with the operation area (operation range) of the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651. While the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651 is being performed, the execution of the left-handed hitting notification effect (display of the left-handed hitting notification image) is regulated (priority is given to the initialization operation of the movable body). For example, when the final round of fluctuation display in the high base state ends and the remaining operation pending balls of the first special symbol are exhausted, the fluctuation display of the first rotation in the low base state starts, and the left-handed hit is notified. If a power outage occurs immediately after the execution of the left-handed hit notification image (display of the left-handed hit notification image), and the initialization operation of the movable body is executed after the power is restored, the execution of the left-handed hit notification effect (display of the left-handed hit notification image) display of the notification image) is interrupted. Alternatively, the game ball enters the first starting port P51 during a fluctuation standby state (non-fluctuation state) in which no fluctuation display is performed and neither the first special symbol's action pending ball nor the second special symbol's action pending ball exists. When the ball enters, the variable display of the first special symbol starts, and while the left-handed hitting notification effect is being executed (displaying the left-handed hitting notification image), a power outage occurs, and the power is restored. When the initialization operation of the movable body is executed, the execution of the left-handed hitting notification effect (display of the left-handed hitting notification image) is interrupted. However, if the execution timing of the left-handed hit notification effect (execution timing of the first rotation fluctuation display in the low base state) comes while the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651 is being executed, the left-handed hit notification effect is executed. (Display of left-handed hitting notification image) may be configured to be executed. For example, if a power outage occurs while the final fluctuation display in the high base state is being displayed, and the power is restored and the movable object is being initialized, the final fluctuation display in the high base state ends. However, when the remaining operation pending ball of the first special symbol is exhausted and the first rotation fluctuation display in the low base state starts, the execution of the left-handed hit notification effect (display of the left-handed hit notification image) is movable. It may be executed concurrently with the initialization operation of the body.

Next, the execution timing of the left-handed hitting notification effect will be explained. FIG. 154 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the left-handed hitting notification effect. In addition, in the following explanation, the case where the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state is the case where the gaming state shifts from the time saving gaming state (low probability high base state) to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). , including the case of transitioning from a variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state) to a normal gaming state (low probability low base state). In addition, the transition from the time-saving gaming state (low probability high base state) or the variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state) to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state) means the time-saving gaming state (low probability high base state). ) or the number of variable displays (the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in the variable probability game state (high probability high base state) is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). ) is reached. That is, in the time-saving gaming state (low probability, high base state) or the variable probability gaming state (high probability, high base state), the total number of times the first special symbol is displayed as a variable and the number of times that the second special symbol is displayed as a variable is predetermined. When a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is reached, these gaming states end and a transition is made to a normal gaming state (low probability, low base state).

In addition, in this embodiment, a high base state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state) will be explained as an example of a gaming state that is a right-handed game, but a high base state ( In addition to the time-saving game state and variable probability game state, there is a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) is being executed. Even when the special gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, the configuration regarding the left-handed hitting notification effect of this embodiment can be applied. However, this special gaming state belongs to the low base state, so when transitioning from the special gaming state to the normal gaming state, the transition will be from the low base state during jackpot to the low base state during non-jackpot. It should be noted that this is different from a transition from a high base state to a low base state in this point (a point at which the transition occurs between low base states).

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, from a game state (high base state) in which the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game, to a game state in which the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game. When shifting to the low base state (low base state), the left-handed hit notification effect can be executed from the start of the first rotation variation display in this low base state. This fluctuating display in the first rotation of the low base state is as follows: (a) If only the operation pending ball of the first special symbol remains at the end of the high base state before transition, this first special symbol The ``fluctuating display of the 1st special symbol'' is performed when the operation-retained ball (the activation-retained ball of the first 1st special symbol) is extinguished, and (b) the 2nd special is displayed at the end of the high base state before the transition. If only the operation reservation ball of the symbol remains, the operation reservation ball of this second special symbol (the operation reservation ball of the earliest second special symbol) is extinguished, and the "second special symbol" is executed. (c) At the end of the high base state before the transition, if both the operation pending ball of the first special symbol and the operation pending ball of the second special symbol remain, the above-mentioned special symbol will be displayed. Under the 2-priority digestion, the ``fluctuating display of the 2nd special symbol'' is performed by extinguishing the operation pending ball of the 2nd special symbol (the activation pending ball of the 2nd special symbol that is the first). In addition, in the illustrated example of FIG. 154, a case is illustrated in which only the operation hold ball of the first special symbol remains at the end of the high base state. On the other hand, if neither the active pending ball of the first special symbol nor the active pending ball of the second special symbol remains at the end of the high base state before the transition (when the number of active pending balls for both is 0) , the left-handed hit notification effect will be executed for a predetermined period of time from the start of the high base state (in other words, in the fluctuation standby state (non-fluctuation state) where the number of pending balls for each special symbol is 0) (The left-handed hit notification effect will begin.)

This left-handed hitting notification effect ends when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first rotational variation display (or the start of the low base state). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 seconds, which is set to be relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the non-reach type (variation time of shortened fluctuation described below = 7 seconds, fluctuation time of normal fluctuation = 12 seconds). . Here, when the gaming state is the low base state, in the lottery process of the special symbol variation pattern, the variation time of the special symbol is longer than the variation pattern (N reach variation pattern, SP reach variation pattern). , it is set that a variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is relatively short (variation pattern of shortening variation, variation pattern of normal variation) is more likely to be selected (for example, similar to the second embodiment described above, shortening variation pattern, variation pattern of normal variation) is set. The selection rate of the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation and normal fluctuation is set to a high probability of 80%), and the left-handed hit notification effect is configured to be able to be executed over multiple fluctuation displays (the left-handed hit notification effect is displayed multiple times). (It is extremely likely that this will be carried out over a variable period of time).

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the fluctuation display of the first rotation in the low base state is a specific fluctuation display, if the fluctuation display of the first rotation is a specific fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the second rotation and subsequent rotations will be changed to the left. Notification performance is not executed. In other words, if the fluctuation display of the first rotation in the low base state is a specific fluctuation display, the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the time when the above-mentioned predetermined time is reached. ), the left-handed hitting notification effect is executed, but it is not executed over multiple fluctuating displays. This specific fluctuating display is a fluctuating display in which the fluctuating time of the special symbol is set to a relatively long time, that is, a fluctuating display in which the fluctuating time of the special symbol is set to be longer than the predetermined time. This applies to ultra-long fluctuation displays, SP reach fluctuation displays, etc. Note that this specific variation display may also include a jackpot variation display. In other words, if the fluctuation display of the first rotation in the low base state is a jackpot fluctuation display, the transition to the jackpot game will occur after the fluctuation display of the first rotation ends, and the low base state currently being executed will change to the jackpot game. This is because the variable display does not occur after the second rotation following the first rotation. In addition, after the jackpot fluctuating display ends, the game shifts to a jackpot game centered on right-handed hitting, and furthermore, after the jackpot game ends, it shifts to a high base state, and after the jackpot game ends. This is because the fluctuating display of the first rotation may also be a situation in which a right-handed hit is required (this is because there is little need to perform a left-handed hit notification effect in the first place).

Next, a case will be described in which a power failure occurs during execution of the left-handed hitting notification effect. FIG. 155 is a time chart when a power outage occurs during execution of the left-handed hitting notification effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 155, when the gaming state is the low base state, the left-handed hitting notification image can be displayed from the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. If a power outage occurs during execution of a fluctuation display, the system is configured so that the left-handed hitting notification effect will not be restarted (the left-handed hitting notification image will be hidden) in the fluctuation display performed after the power outage is restored. There is. In other words, even if the first rotation fluctuation display (the first rotation fluctuation display that was interrupted due to the power outage) is restarted after the power is restored, the left-handed driver will The notification performance is not restarted, and even if the variable display is performed after the second rotation, the left-handed hitting notification performance is not executed. The reason for this is that after the power has been restored after a power outage, there will be no indication that the high base state has transitioned to the low base state (such as a display that says "starting normal mode"), and the low base state will be maintained from the beginning. (For example, if the hall management side shuts off the power at the time of closing and then restores the power when the hall reopens the next business day, it is necessary to consider the gaming state immediately before the power shut off.) ).

On the other hand, a power outage occurs in the middle of the fluctuation display for the final round of the high base state, and the fluctuation display for the final round, which was restarted after the power outage is restored, ends, causing the high base state to change to the low base state. state, the left-handed hitting notification effect is configured to be executable from the start of the variable display of the first rotation in this low base state (the left-handed hitting notification effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays). ). This is because if a power outage occurs during the final fluctuation display of the high base state and the power outage is restored, there is no doubt that the high base state is still continuing. , In the final variation display of the restarted high base state, the display of the right-hand hit notification image is restarted to provide the player with information regarding the appropriate firing position, and after that, the high base state ends, so that the right shot notification image is displayed properly. This is because by notifying the player that the firing position has changed, even if an event such as a power outage occurs, the progress of the game (change in situation) can be appropriately notified.

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, a power outage occurs while the final fluctuation display in the high base state is being executed, and the final fluctuation display resumed after the power outage is restored. , when transitioning from the high base state to the low base state, the left-handed hitting notification effect is not executed during the execution of the fluctuation display for the first rotation in this low base state, but the fluctuation display for the predetermined rotation in this low base state The left-handed hitting notification effect may be configured to be executed at the start of the second rotation (for example, the variable display of the second rotation) or when a specific time has elapsed after transitioning to this low base state. Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during execution of the final fluctuation display in the high base state, the remaining time of the final fluctuation display (of the final fluctuation display time, at the time of the power outage) Depending on the remaining variable display time that has not yet been executed, whether or not the left-handed hit notification can be executed or the execution timing may be changed depending on the remaining variable display time in the low base state. (For example, 0.5 seconds) or more, the left-handed hit notification effect can be executed from the first rotation fluctuation display in the low base state, and if the remaining time of the final fluctuation display is less than the specified time In this case, the left-handed hit notification performance is not executed from the first rotation fluctuation display in the low base state, but the left-handed hit notification performance is executed from the predetermined rotation fluctuation display (for example, the second rotation fluctuation display). You may. Further, for example, if the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the final round is longer than a specified time (for example, 0.5 seconds), it is possible to perform a left-handed hitting notification effect from the fluctuation display of the first rotation in the low base state, If the remaining time of the final fluctuating display is less than the specified time, the left-handed hitting notification effect may not be executed while staying in the low base state. In addition, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the final fluctuation display in the high base state, even if the high base state shifts to the low base state, the left-handed hit notification display will remain in the low base state. It may be configured so that it is not executed.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, when the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state, the operation pending ball of the second special symbol that was stored at the end of the high base state remains. In this case, the left-handed hitting notification effect may be executed on the condition that all the operation pending balls of the second special symbol are consumed after shifting to this low base state.

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, when transitioning from a high base state to a low base state, each fluctuating display is The left-handed hitting notification effect may be configured to be executed for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start. In other words, the left-handed hit notification performance may be performed only for the first few revolutions in the low base state and only for a few seconds from the start of the fluctuation display. According to this configuration, the left-handed hit notification performance can be performed over time. This can be done not in units but in units of variable display times, making it possible to provide more effective notification effects to players.

<<Pre-read effect after power support is removed>> Next, the pre-read effect after transition from the high base state to the low base state will be described. FIG. 156 is a time chart for explaining the look-ahead effect after transitioning to the low base state. In addition, in the following explanation, the action-holding ball that triggers the execution of the look-ahead effect is also referred to as the "target action-holding ball", and the action-holding ball that is extinguished before the target's action-holding ball is referred to as the "action-holding ball before the target". Also called "holding ball". In addition, the suspended image corresponding to the target's operation-suspended sphere is also referred to as the "target's suspended image", and the suspended image corresponding to the operation-suspended sphere in front of the target is also referred to as "the suspended image in front of the target". In addition, the fluctuating image that is displayed when the target's action-holding ball is consumed is also called the "target's fluctuating image," and the fluctuating image that is displayed when the action-holding ball in front of the target is consumed. It is also referred to as a "fluctuation image before the target." In addition, the variable display that is executed when the target's pending ball is used up is also called the ``target variable display,'' and the variable display that is executed when the pending ball in front of the target is used up is called ``before the target.'' It is also called "fluctuation display".

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming state in the currently executed variable display is the low base state (when the variable display of the first special symbol is the gaming state in which the main part of the game is played), the first special symbol is Although it is possible to perform a look-ahead performance during a variable display with the action pending ball as a target, the look-ahead performance is not performed during a fluctuate display with the action pending ball of the second special symbol as a target. On the other hand, if the game state in the currently running fluctuating display is a high base state (if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main game state of the game), the operation pending ball of the second special symbol will be targeted. Although it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect during the variable display, the pre-reading effect is not executed during the variable display for the operation pending ball of the first special symbol.

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 156, when the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state, at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation in this low base state (that is, left-handed If the operation pending balls of the first special symbol are stored at the start of the notification performance), the period until all the operation pending balls of the first special symbol are extinguished (referred to as the "specific period") ) is configured so that at least a specific look-ahead effect, ie, a pending change effect, is not executed. When the first special symbol's operation pending ball is memorized at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation in this low base state (at the start of the left-handed hit notification effect), typically, the high This is when the operation pending ball of the first special symbol remains at the end of the base state. Even after the transition to the low base state, a specific look-ahead effect will be applied during the period (specific period) until all the operation pending balls of the first special symbol remaining from the high base state are consumed. Not executed. In addition, in FIG. 156, a case is illustrated in which "3" operation pending balls of the first special symbol remain at the start of the low base state (at the start of the left-handed hit notification effect), and these three A specific pre-read performance will not be executed until all the operation pending balls of one special symbol are consumed (specific period). Furthermore, at the end of the high base state before the transition, if the action pending ball of the first special symbol and the action pending ball of the second special symbol are both stored, under the above-mentioned special symbol 2 priority digestion. The period from when all the action pending balls of the second special symbol are consumed to when all the action pending balls of the first special symbol are consumed corresponds to the specific period. Furthermore, for the specific period, even after transitioning to the low base state, all the operation pending balls of the 1st special symbol remaining from the high base state are consumed, and it is executed after being consumed. The period may be set until all variable displays are finished (stop display).

On the other hand, after the specific period of the low base state has ended (after all the operation pending balls of the first special symbol remaining at the start of the left-handed hitting notification effect have been exhausted), the operation pending ball of the first special symbol ( In other words, it is possible to perform a specific look-ahead performance using the operation pending ball of the first special symbol that has newly occurred during the execution of the current low base state as the target operation pending ball. As described above, the pre-reading judgment for determining whether or not to execute this particular pre-reading effect is performed on the effect control board P200 side based on the preliminary judgment result from the main control board P100 side.

The reason why a specific prefetch effect is not executed during the specific period of the low base state is as follows. First of all, when the first special symbol is stored at the start of the variable display of the first rotation in the low base state, for example, (A) the ball that was on hold before the transition to the low base state is (B) If the operation pending ball of the first special symbol that occurred during the execution of the high base state is not consumed by the end of this high base state; (B) Even before the transition to this high base state, the low base state (previous low base state), and the operation pending ball of the first special symbol that occurred during the execution of this low base state (previous low base state) is subsequently changed to the high base state without being digested. There may be cases where the amount of water is transferred and not digested until the end of this high base state.

In the former case (A), during the execution of the high base state (the game state where the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game), even if the operation pending ball of the first special symbol is generated, The operation pending ball of the first special symbol is not subject to preliminary determination, and a preliminary determination command corresponding to the operation pending ball of the first special symbol may be sent from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200. This is because there is no prior judgment result for the action pending ball of the first special symbol, and it is not possible to perform a pre-read performance using the action pending ball of the first special symbol as the target action pending ball. Also, when this high base state ends and the low base state starts, after this low base state has started, the operation pending ball of the first special symbol obtained during the execution of the high base state will be targeted. This is because no prior judgment is performed (to prevent an increase in processing load).

In the latter case (B), even if you obtain the first special symbol's operation hold ball in the previous low base state, when you transition from the previous low base state to the high base state, the previous low base state Since all the preliminary judgment results for the operation pending ball of the first special symbol remaining from the start are cleared, even if the current low base state is subsequently transferred, the preliminary judgment result for the operation pending ball of the first special symbol still exists. This is because the pre-read effect cannot be executed by using the first special symbol as the target ball.

In addition, in this embodiment, during a specific period immediately after transitioning to the low base state, when a new operation pending ball of the first special symbol is generated by the game ball entering the first starting hole P51, , the preliminary judgment result will be obtained for the operation pending ball of this new first special symbol, but during the specified period, this preliminary judgment result (the preliminary judgment of the operation pending ball of the new first special symbol) will be obtained. Execution of a specific look-ahead effect based on results) is also restricted. The reason for this is that in both the former (A) case and the latter (B) case, the first special symbol that remains when the high base state ends and the low base state starts (remains at the end of the high base state) Since there is no prior judgment for the operation holding ball (also referred to as "first special symbol remaining hold"), the fluctuation display that is executed when the first special symbol remaining hold is exhausted will be the jackpot fluctuation. Even if it is a fluctuation that develops into SP reach, it is not possible to notify it in advance as a specific look-ahead effect, so if the first special symbol remaining hold is exhausted, the fluctuation display will be executed. is a jackpot fluctuation or a fluctuation that develops into SP reach, a new first jump occurs when the game ball enters the first starting hole P51 during a specific period immediately after transitioning to a low base state. Even if a specific pre-reading performance targeting the special symbol's operation pending ball is executed, a fluctuation display before the activation of the new first special symbol's operation pending ball is extinguished (the first special symbol's remaining pending is extinguished) Since a jackpot or SP reach occurs in the variable display executed by the above, it is not possible to perform an appropriate look-ahead effect (it is unclear which ball is the target ball) It's for a reason. In addition, the lottery to determine whether or not to execute the action performance (retention change suggestion performance), which will be described later, is based on the condition that the preliminary judgment results of the action reservation ball in front of the target are all non-reach type fluctuation patterns (shortening fluctuation or normal fluctuation). However, if the first special symbol remaining suspension is an activation suspension ball in front of the target, there is no preliminary judgment result for those activation suspension balls, so the execution conditions for the suspension change suggestion performance are not satisfied (target It is unclear whether all the preliminary determination results of the previous action-holding balls are non-reach type fluctuation patterns (shortening fluctuations or normal fluctuations), and it is not possible to perform an action performance (a performance suggesting a holding change).

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, even during a specific period immediately after transitioning to the low base state, if a new first special symbol operation hold ball is generated during this specific period, this It may be configured to perform a specific look-ahead effect during a specific period by using the new first special symbol's operation-holding ball as the target's operation-holding ball. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the execution of a specific pre-reading effect (suspended change effect) among the plurality of types of pre-reading effects is prohibited, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the execution of all pre-reading effects is prohibited. It's okay.

Next, the contents of the above-mentioned specific look-ahead effect will be explained. This specific look-ahead effect includes a hold change effect (hold change look-ahead effect) that changes the display mode of the held image or the image in progress, and a hold change effect that suggests that this hold change effect (hold change look-ahead effect) will be executed. Including suggestive performance.

[Holding Change Effect] First, the hold change effect of this embodiment will be explained. This hold change effect changes the display mode of the hold image or fluctuating image corresponding to the active hold ball that was the target of the pre-read lottery (the target's active hold ball) to a different display form, so that the target's active hold is This is a look-ahead performance that suggests or informs you of the possibility of a jackpot with a fluctuating display (fluctuating display of a target) when the ball is consumed. In the present embodiment, the pending change effect includes a pending image change effect that changes the pending image displayed in the pending image display area P710, and a changing image change effect that changes the changing image displayed in the changing image display area P720. including. In the following, we will simply refer to it as a pending change effect without distinguishing between the two, but a pending change effect that changes a pending image may also be referred to as a pending image change effect as described above, or a change effect that changes the image during variation. The pending change performance may be referred to as a changing image change performance as described above. Pending images and images in progress are display contents that suggest that a change is scheduled or in progress, so they may be collectively referred to as a "change-suggestion display," and a pending image can be referred to as a "change-suggesting display." It may also be referred to as "the previous variation suggestion display", and the image during variation may be referred to as "the variation suggestion display after the variation start condition is satisfied". Furthermore, both the pending image change effect and the changing image change effect may be collectively referred to as the "change suggestion effect."

FIG. 157 is a schematic diagram for explaining the pending image display area P710 and the changing image display area P720 of this embodiment. As described above, the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device P70 is provided with the reserved image display area P710 for displaying the reserved image corresponding to the operation reserved ball of the special symbol. In the suspended image display area P710, there is a suspended image corresponding to the activated suspended ball of the special symbol that is the main character of the game in the currently executed game state among the activated suspended balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is displayed. In other words, when the currently running game state is the low base state (normal game state), the fluctuating display of the first special symbol becomes the main part of the game, so the suspended image corresponding to the action pending ball of the first special symbol is displayed (the pending image corresponding to the operation pending ball of the second special symbol is not displayed). On the other hand, if the current gaming state is a high base state (time-saving gaming state or variable probability gaming state), the fluctuating display of the second special symbol becomes the main part of the game, so the action pending ball of the second special symbol The corresponding pending image is displayed (the pending image corresponding to the operation pending ball of the first special symbol is not displayed). However, regardless of whether it is a low base state or a high base state, both the number of active pending balls of the first special symbol and the number of active pending balls of the second special symbol are displayed in the pending number display area P740. can be displayed simultaneously. In addition, each pending image is displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (order of arrival of balls) of the operation pending balls of the special symbol.

The reserved image display area P710 is provided with four individual reserved image display areas P711 to P714 corresponding to the upper limit number of activated reserved balls of each special symbol. The individual pending image display area P711 corresponds to the pending image of pending 1 (first pending image), the individual pending image display area P712 corresponds to the pending image of pending 2 (second pending image), and the individual pending image display area P713 corresponds to the pending image of pending 2 (second pending image). corresponds to the pending image of pending 3 (third pending), and the individual pending image display area P714 corresponds to the pending image of pending 4 (fourth pending). The individual reserved image display areas P711 to P714 are each configured as a display area of the same size, and can each display one reserved image.

On the left side of the pending image display area P710, a variable image display area P720 is provided for displaying a variable image corresponding to the operation pending ball of the special symbol consumed in the variable display. In the fluctuating image display area P720, there is a fluctuating image corresponding to the fluctuating display of the special symbol that is the main character of the game in the currently running game state among the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is displayed. That is, when the currently running gaming state is the low base state (normal gaming state), since the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is the main character of the game, the fluctuating image corresponding to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is displayed. On the other hand, if the game state currently being executed is a low base state (time-saving game state or variable probability game state), the fluctuating display of the second special symbol becomes the main part of the game, so it corresponds to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. A changing image is displayed. This changing image display area P720 is configured as a display area larger than the individual pending image display areas P711 to P714. In other words, the display size of the changing image is larger than that of the pending image.

In the pending image display area P710, each time a special symbol operation pending ball is stored, one additional pending image is displayed in order from the left individual pending image display area P711. In addition, each time the special symbol's operation hold ball is consumed, the fluctuating image displayed in the fluctuating image display area P720 disappears, and the hold images displayed in the individual hold image display areas P711 to 714 are reduced to 1. Move each item one by one to the image display area on the left. Here, the held images displayed in the individual held image display areas P711 to P714 are digested in order from the left, and the earliest held image (held image of held 1) displayed in the individual held image display area P711 is digested. Then, the pending image moves to the changing image display area P720, is displayed as a changing image corresponding to the changing display, and continues to be displayed until the changing display ends. However, after a specific effect such as SP Reach develops during the execution of the fluctuating display, the pending image and the changing image may be hidden, and in that case, when the specific effect ends, ( The background effect (background image) before it develops into SP Reach, for example, if you are staying in normal mode, it will be triggered by returning to the background effect (background image) corresponding to the normal mode), pending images and The fluctuating image is displayed again, and the display of the fluctuating image is ended when the fluctuating display ends, while the pending image continues to be displayed (shifted to the left) even after the fluctuating display ends. It may be configured as follows. In addition, as a modified example, the pending image and the fluctuating image may be continuously displayed even under a situation where a specific effect is occurring, such as after the SP reach has developed, and in that case, the relevant fluctuating display The display of the fluctuating image may be terminated when the fluctuation display ends, while the pending image may be continuously displayed (shifted to the left) even after the fluctuating display ends. In addition, as another modification, if a specific effect is occurring, such as after SP reach has developed, the pending image may be hidden, while the changing image may continue to be displayed. In this case, the completion of the specific effect (background effect (background image) before it develops into SP reach), for example, if you are staying in normal mode, the background effect (background image) corresponding to the normal mode The suspended image is displayed again, and the display of the fluctuating image is terminated when the fluctuating display ends, while the suspended image continues to be displayed even after the fluctuating display ends. (display shifted to the left).

<<Holding Image/Fluctuating Image>> FIG. 158(A) is a schematic diagram for explaining the held image and the fluctuating image. The pending image and the changing image of this embodiment are composed of sphere icons that imitate the shape of a planet such as the earth or a sphere such as a ball for a ball game, for example. In addition, "normal display mode" and "special display mode" are set as display modes for the pending image and the changing image.

(Normal Display Mode) The normal display mode is a display mode in which the display color of the ball icon is white.

(Special Display Mode) Special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the display color of the sphere icon is blue. Special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the display color of the sphere icon is green. Special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the display color of the sphere icon is red. Special display mode 4 is a display mode in which the display color of the sphere icon is a rainbow color.

In this embodiment, five types of display modes are set as display modes for the pending image and the changing image: normal display mode, special display mode 1, special display mode 2, special display mode 3, and special display mode 4. There is. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the normal display mode is "white icon", the special display mode 1 is "blue icon", the special display mode 2 is "green icon", the special display mode 3 is "red icon", and the special display mode is Aspect 4 is also referred to as a "rainbow icon." On the drawing, five types of display modes, ``white,'' ``blue,'' ``green,'' ``red,'' and ``rainbow,'' can be displayed by adding color names within the pending image or within the changing image. express. In other words, on the drawing, the text "white" is added to represent the pending image and the image in progress of the white icon, and the text "blue" is added to represent the pending image and the image in progress of the blue icon. Add the text "green" to represent pending images and images with a green icon, and add the text "red" to represent pending images and images with a red icon, and add the text "rainbow" to represent pending images and images with a red icon. A rainbow-colored icon is attached to represent the pending image and the changing image.

Here, the display mode of the pending image and the changing image is related to the expectation level that the result of the judgment of the special symbol will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation level), and "white icon" < "blue icon" < "green icon" The jackpot expectation level is set to increase one level at a time in the order of ``icon'' < ``red icon'' < ``rainbow icon.'' In other words, a pending image or a changing image in a display mode with a high expectation of a jackpot is more likely to be displayed when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a "miss" than when the result is a "jackpot". Note that the "rainbow icon" means a premium display mode that makes it certain that you will win the jackpot. Therefore, if a "rainbow icon" pending image appears or changes to a "rainbow colored" pending image, it is guaranteed that you will win the jackpot with the variable display corresponding to the pending image. Note that the display mode of the pending image and the changing image may be expressed by, for example, shape, size, pattern, motion (animation), etc., instead of display color.

In addition, the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform an animation effect in which a pending image or a changing image is displayed as a dynamic image (also referred to as "action display," "animation display," or "loop display"). Note that the animation performance of the held image and the fluctuating image does not require that the held image and the fluctuating image consist only of dynamic images, and a part of this animation performance may include static images (still images). May be included.

The image control board P300 stores moving image data for displaying the pending image and the changing image in motion (animation display). The playback time of this moving image data is, for example, 0.5 seconds, and is composed of video data in which continuous motion is recorded from the first image to the last image. By repeatedly playing back (loop playing) this 0.5 second video data, an animation effect is performed in which the pending image or the fluctuating image repeats a predetermined movement display (animation display). That is, the period of motion display (animation display) of the pending image and the changing image is set to "0.5 seconds" corresponding to the playback time of the video data. In addition, in this embodiment, the movement of the held image between each image display area as the held image is consumed is called "shift display", and the held image or the changing image moves (including deformation) within each image display area. ) is called "action display," "animation display," or "loop display." However, the held image or the changing image may be displayed in action beyond each image display area, and the held image or the changing image may be superimposed one after the other at least in part. The operation may be displayed in a display mode.

FIG. 158(B) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the motion display (animation display) of the pending image and the changing image. This animation display is based on the period from when the pending image and the changing image start to the end of the predetermined operation (until the series of operations from the beginning to the end of the predetermined operation is completed). This is a performance in which the target is displayed repeatedly. In this embodiment, the animation display of the pending image and the changing image is configured as a rotating display in which the pending image and the changing image rotate around the vertical axis. As mentioned above, "0.5 seconds" is set as the motion display cycle (i.e., the playback time of video data), and rotation display (360 degree rotation display) with this "0.5 second" as one cycle. is executed repeatedly.

A reference motion posture (first image of video data) that is a starting point for starting motion display (animation display) is set for each of the pending image and the changing image. When the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, the movement display starts from this standard movement posture, and the movement display is repeated from the standard movement posture every time a predetermined cycle (0.5 seconds) is reached (loop playback). ). On the other hand, when the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern ends, the motion display of the pending image and the fluctuating image is forcibly ended. Then, when the next fluctuating display of the decorative pattern starts, the pending image and the fluctuating image are switched to the standard motion posture, and the motion display starts from this standard motion posture (loop playback). . Note that when a new pending image is displayed, the motion display starts from the reference motion posture, regardless of the motion display of the existing pending image and the changing image. In other words, unless the existing held image and the changing image are in the standard movement posture, the movement display of the new held image and the movement display of the existing held image and the changing image are not synchronized with each other. A deviation occurs in the operating posture of the However, the motion display of the new pending image and the motion display of the existing pending image and the changing image are synchronized with each other when the next variable display is started. In addition, in this modification, the motion display is "synchronized" means that the reference motion posture is reached at the same timing in the motion display of each pending image and the changing image. In other words, on the premise that each pending image and changing image have the same motion cycle, each held image and changing image can assume the same motion posture at any timing during motion display. In addition, in this embodiment, the operation display of the pending image and the changing image is started when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the operation display of the pending image and the changing image is triggered when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished. Although the configuration is such that the motion display of the image is terminated (forced stop), the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It may also be configured to be executed continuously. In other words, when the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is finished, the motion display of the pending image and the fluctuating image is continued without ending (forced stop), and the motion display is interrupted between each fluctuating display of the decorative symbol. It may also be configured so that they are connected continuously (seamlessly). In that case, when a new pending image is displayed due to a starting prize, it is preferable that the motion display of this new pending image is started in synchronization with the motion display of the existing pending image and the changing image. It is. In addition, if the action display of the held image and the image being fluctuated is to be continued regardless of the start and end of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, the action display of the held image will be It is preferable to continue. However, it may be configured such that the motion display of the held image is stopped only while the held image is shifted to the left side as the held image is exhausted, and the motion display is restarted after the held image is shifted.

<<Pending change suggestion performance>> Next, the pending change suggestion performance (also referred to as "change suggestion performance") will be explained. In this embodiment, before execution of the pending change effect is started, a pending change suggestion effect that suggests that the pending change effect is to be executed may be executed. This pending change suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that the pending change performance will be executed, that is, the display mode of the pending image will change. The holding change suggestion effect of this embodiment is such that a predetermined character throws a ball image imitating a ball (pseudo holding image) toward the holding image of the target, and this ball image hits the holding image of the target. , is configured as an action effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the target's pending image.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are two cases in which a pending change suggestion presentation (action presentation) is performed and then a pending change presentation (when the display mode of the target pending image changes), and a case in which a pending change suggestion presentation (action presentation) is executed. ) may be performed (the display mode of the target pending image changes) when the pending change effect is executed. Note that, hereinafter, this pending change suggestion performance will also be referred to as an "action performance." In addition, in this embodiment, the pending change suggesting performance (action performance) is more effective than the case where the pending change suggesting performance (action performance) is executed (the display mode of the target pending image changes). If the pending change effect is executed after the target's pending image (the display mode of the target's pending image changes), it is better to perform the variable display (the target's The system is structured so that the expectation level of hitting the jackpot is relatively high.

Next, examples of the pending change performance and the pending change suggestion performance will be described. Here, FIG. 159 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a pending change suggestion performance and a pending change performance.

First, as shown in FIG. 159(A), the variable display is started. In the illustrated example, the changing icon is a white icon, and the two pending icons are also white icons.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 159(B), at a predetermined timing during execution of the variable display, a character holding a round ball (a ball imitating a red icon) appears, and this ball (a ball imitating a red icon) appears. An action performance (retention change suggestion performance) of throwing a ball) toward the first reservation image (first reservation image) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 159(C), the ball thrown by the character (a ball imitating a red icon) hits the first pending image (the earliest pending image), so that the first pending image is displayed. A pending change effect in which the appearance changes from a white icon to a red icon is executed. In other words, in the action production (retention change suggestion production) of this embodiment, when the ball (red icon) held by the character is displayed, the display mode of one of the pending images changes from the white icon (normal display mode) to the red icon. (Special display mode 3) is now suggested.

By the way, in this embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment described above, when the currently executed gaming state is the low base state, the variation time of the first special symbol (the variation time when the result of the judgment is a loss) ) is configured to be able to vary depending on the number of pending balls of the first special symbol stored at the time of lottery of the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol. Here, in this embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment described above, the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is selected with reference to the variation pattern table 1 of FIG. 49. However, in this embodiment, the variation time of the shortening variation (variation pattern PH1-1) is "7 seconds", and the variation time of the normal variation (variation pattern PH1-2) is "12 seconds". At this time, in this embodiment, if the number of pending balls of the first special symbol stored at the time of lottery of the first special symbol's variation time (variation pattern) is three, the variation pattern of shortening variation PH1- 1 (7 seconds) is relatively high and the number of pending balls of the first special symbol stored at the time of lottery of the first special symbol's variation time (variation pattern) is two, normally The selection rate of the variation pattern PH1-2 (12 seconds) is relatively high. Therefore, in the following, when the number of activated pending balls of the first special symbol stored at the time of lottery of the first special symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is 3, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (fluctuation pattern) ), a fluctuating display of "7 seconds" (this fluctuating display is referred to as "fluctuating display A") is executed, and the first special symbol stored at the time of lottery of the fluctuating time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol. When the number of active pending balls is 2, a variable display of "12 seconds" (this variable display is referred to as "variable display B") is executed as the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol. It will be explained as follows. In addition, if the number of balls on hold for the first special symbol stored at the time of drawing the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is 3, the variation pattern PH1-2 (12 seconds) of the normal variation is If it is not selected and the number of pending balls of the first special symbol stored at the time of lottery of the first special symbol's variation time (variation pattern) is 2, then the shortening variation variation pattern PH1-1 (7 seconds ) may be configured so that it is not selected.

Here, FIG. 160 is a time chart when the above-described variable displays A and B are executed as variable displays of the first special symbol. In addition, in the following explanation, for convenience, the pending change suggestion performance (action performance) and the pending change performance may be collectively referred to as "suspension related performance." That is, a series of performances from the start of the pending change suggestion performance (action performance) until the end of the pending change performance is also referred to as a "suspension related performance." Furthermore, in the following description, the motion display for one cycle of the pending image and the changing image (motion display per cycle) is also referred to as a "unit motion display."

As shown in FIG. 160, when variable display A is executed as a variable display of the first special symbol, from the start to the end of the variable display A (when the next variable display starts) ), the unit motion display of the pending image and the changing image is repeated 14 times (1 cycle x 14 times). In other words, the number of times (the number of loops) that the unit operation display of the pending image and the image in progress is performed during the execution of the variable display A is 14 times. On the other hand, when variable display B is executed as a variable display of the first special symbol, from the start to the end of the variable display B (before the next variable display starts) , unit operation display of the pending image and the changing image is repeated 24 times (1 cycle x 24 times). In other words, the number of times (the number of loops) that the unit operation display of the pending image and the image in progress is performed during the execution of the variable display B is 24 times. In this way, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state, no matter which of the variable displays A and B is the variable display of the first special symbol, the pending image and It is possible to display the unit motion of the changing image multiple times (1 cycle x multiple times). In other words, even if "7 seconds", which is the shortest variation time (the variation time of variation display A), is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, the pending image will not be displayed during execution of the variation display. The unit motion display of the changing image is executed multiple times.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when performing a pending change effect during execution of a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is variable display A or variable display B. , is configured to be able to execute predetermined hold-related performances (hold change suggestion performance and hold change performance) in the variable display. Here, the execution time of the predetermined hold-related performance (the execution time from the start of the predetermined hold change suggestion performance until the end of the hold change performance) depends on the fluctuating time when these performances are executed. The execution time is always set to a constant execution time TB (TB=4 seconds). Here, a specific hold-related performance different from the predetermined hold-related performance can also be executed, but the execution time may be 8 seconds, and the specific hold-related performance is 7 seconds, which is the variable time of variable display A. It should be noted that although it is not executed in 12 seconds (because it cannot be executed completely within one variation), it is executed in 12 seconds, which is the variation time of variation display B. In addition, in this embodiment, the execution time of the pending change effect overlaps with a part of the execution time of the pending change suggestion effect, and the start time of the pending change suggestion effect is earlier than the start of the pending change effect. , and the end of the pending change suggestion performance and the end of the pending change production are set at approximately the same time (the end of the pending change production is later than the end of the pending change suggestion production). (You may also set the timing accordingly.) In addition, the execution start timing and execution end timing of a predetermined hold-related performance (hold change performance and hold change performance) do not depend on the variable time during which this predetermined hold-related performance is executed, and the execution timing always stops the relevant variable display. The execution end timing of the predetermined hold-related performance is a predetermined time TC (TC = 1 second) before the end of the relevant variable display, and the execution of the predetermined hold-related performance is set based on the current time. The start timing is set to a timing earlier than the end time of the variable display by the total time (TB+TC=5 seconds) of the execution time TB and the predetermined time TC. Therefore, regardless of the length of the fluctuation time of the fluctuating display, the time from the end of the predetermined hold-related performance to the end of the fluctuating display is always constant; The time until the start of the performance may vary depending on the length of the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display. In other words, the shorter the fluctuation time of the variable display, the earlier the execution timing of the predetermined hold-related effect becomes, and the longer the change time of the variable display, the slower the execution timing of the predetermined hold-related effect. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special symbol is variable display A, a predetermined hold-related performance is executed after a first time TA1 (TA1 = 2 seconds) from the start of the variable display A, When the variable display of the first special symbol is variable display B, a predetermined hold-related performance is executed after a second time TA2 (TA2=7 seconds) from the start of the variable display B. At this time, while both the fluctuation display A and the fluctuation display B are being executed, unit motion displays (animation display (1 cycle) is executed multiple times (1 cycle x multiple times). Specifically, regarding the fluctuating display A, within a first time TA1 (2 seconds) from the start of the fluctuating display A until the start of a predetermined hold-related effect, the suspended image and the fluctuating The unit motion display of the image is performed four times (0.5 seconds x 4 times), and within a predetermined time TC (1 second) that is the time from the end of the predetermined hold-related effect to the end of the variable display A. , unit operation display of the pending image and the changing image is performed twice (0.5 seconds x 2 times). In addition, regarding the variable display B, the unit of the pending image and the image in progress within the second time TA2 (7 seconds), which is the time from the start of the variable display B until the start of the predetermined hold-related effect. The action display is performed 14 times (0.5 seconds x 14 times), and within a predetermined time TC (1 second), which is the time from when the predetermined hold-related effect ends and the variable display B ends, the hold image and The unit motion display of the changing image is performed twice (0.5 seconds x 2 times).

In this way, in this embodiment, no matter which of the variable displays A and B, which have different variable times depending on the number of activated pending balls of the first special symbol, are executed, the pending change suggestion is made within the variable time. In addition to being able to reliably complete the performance and the pending change performance, by displaying the action (animation display) of the pending image and the changing image for at least one cycle before and after the holding related performance, the player can It is possible to easily recognize the motion display of the image, and it becomes possible to further enhance the performance effects of these pre-read performances (pending change performance, pending change suggestion performance, animation performance).

In addition, in this embodiment, the pending change suggestion performance performed for the pending image of the target may be executed when the variable display in front of the target is started, but the operation pending sphere of this target is generated. It will not be executed as a result of this. In other words, if the target's action pending sphere is already memorized at the start of the variable display, the pending change suggestion effect will be executed for the target's pending image during the execution of the variable display (the variable display before the target). can be done. On the other hand, if a new action pending sphere (target action pending sphere) is generated while the variable display is being executed, that new pending image (target's pending image) will be held as a target while the variable display is being executed. The change suggestion performance is not executed. Therefore, for example, when variable display B is being executed as a variable display of the first special symbol, and the remaining time of variable display B that is currently being executed is 7 seconds or more (that is, when a predetermined hold-related effect is executed Even if a new 1st special symbol operation pending ball (target operation pending ball) is generated at the same time as the remaining time of the possible variable display A (when there is a remaining time equal to the variable display time of possible variable display A), the corresponding Although it is possible to perform a predetermined suspension-related effect on the target's pending image until the variation display B ends, it is not possible to perform a pending change-suggestion effect on this newly generated target's pending image. It is no longer executed. In other words, when a new action-holding sphere (target's action-holding ball) is generated during execution of variable display B, this new action-holding ball (target's action-holding ball) is generated during execution of fluctuation display B. When it is scheduled to carry out the targeted holding change performance (so-called holding change performance at the time of winning), the remaining time (remaining fluctuation display Even if there is a special display mode (e.g., blue icon, green icon, red Only the pending change performance (pending change performance when winning a prize) that is displayed using a winning icon, rainbow-colored icon, etc.) is executable. In that case, when the variable display B ends and the next variable display starts, the pending change suggestion effect (and It is preferable that a pending change performance) can be executed.

≪Relationship between hold change suggestion performance and button play≫ In addition, in this embodiment, in the lottery to decide whether or not to execute the action performance (hold change suggestion performance), all preliminary judgment results of the action hold ball in front of the target are non-reach types. This is executed on the condition that the variation pattern is (shortened variation or normal variation). In addition, in the lottery to decide whether or not to execute this action performance (holding change suggestion performance), if the preliminary determination result of the target's action holding ball is a fluctuation pattern of SP reach than if it is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach type, that is, The higher the expectation of a jackpot for the target's pending ball (fluctuating display of the target), the easier it is to decide to execute the action performance. In addition, when the target variation display is a SP reach variation display than when it is a non-reach type variation display, it is better to use a button effect (for example, a button that is performed as a preview effect at the time of a win or loss branch) during the target variation display. performance) has become easier to execute. Therefore, in this embodiment, when comparing the fluctuating display before the target and the fluctuating display of the target, the fluctuating display (before the target Fluctuation display of target = Fluctuation display of SP reach (Fluctuation display of target = Fluctuation display of SP reach) that is performed when action performance (pending change suggestion performance) is not executed for the held image of this target ) is configured such that the probability that the button effect will be executed during the variable display is relatively higher.

(Modified Example 1 of Hold-Related Performance) In this embodiment, the time required for one cycle of operation display of the hold image and the fluctuating image (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set to the special symbol hold provided on the main control display device P27. It may be set to a longer time than the time required for one cycle (blinking cycle) of the blinking display of the lamps P73, 74 (for example, 0.2 seconds = 0.1 seconds on + 0.1 seconds off). Similarly, the time required for one cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the operation display of the pending image and the changing image is determined by the blinking display of the pending number auxiliary display sections 803 and 804 provided in the sub-control display device P28. It may be set to a longer time than the time required for the cycle (flashing cycle) (for example, 0.2 seconds = 0.1 seconds on + 0.1 seconds off).

(Modified example 2 of hold-related effects) In this embodiment, the hold image in the normal display mode is displayed by shifting the display time from when the changing image starts to being hidden. It may be configured such that the display time of the fluctuating image displayed by shifting and displaying the reserved image in the special display mode is longer than the display time of the fluctuating image.

(Modified example 3 of hold-related performance) In this embodiment, a look-ahead stage (a look-ahead-only stage background) is provided that is displayed over a plurality of fluctuating displays in a situation where the target action hold ball is stored. When a look-ahead stage (look-ahead-only stage background) is displayed, the performance that suggests a pending change (action performance) is more effective than when a non-lookahead stage (normal stage background) such as stage A or stage B is displayed. It may be configured to be easy to execute. In addition, when the game state is a high probability, high base state, the variable probability stage background is displayed, compared to when the game state is a low probability, low base state, the normal stage background is displayed. It may be configured such that the pending change suggestion performance (action performance) is easily executed.

(Variation 4 of Hold-related Performance) In this embodiment, the held image in the special display mode is shifted more than the variable display in which the changing image displayed by shifting the held image in the normal display mode is displayed. The variable display in which the image being displayed is displayed is better than button vibe effects (for example, 1st button vibe effect α, 1st button vibe effect β, 2nd button vibe effect, 3rd button vibe effect). The configuration may be such that it is easier to perform vibrator effects, etc.). In addition, the held image in the special display mode is shifted and displayed more than when the button vibe effect is executed in the fluctuating display where the displayed fluctuating image is displayed by shifting the held image in the normal display mode. It may be configured such that when the button vibe effect is executed in a variable display in which the displayed changing image is displayed, it is easier to execute a plurality of types of button vibe effects.

<<Volume Adjustment During Initialization Operation>> Next, the volume adjustment of the speaker P11 during the initialization operation will be described. In this embodiment, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (after the power is restored from a power outage), the display of the recovery screen is finished, and the normal screen (standby screen) that displays decorative patterns, background images, etc. is displayed. After the start of the process, the volume of the speaker P11 can be adjusted. Note that after returning to the normal screen, the volume can be adjusted in both the variable standby state and the variable display state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 described above, when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, when the left and right keys of the cross key P16 are operated at the same time), multiple images are displayed in the volume adjustment image display area P736 on the screen. Volume adjustment images showing different volume levels are displayed side by side. The volume adjustment image shows the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the volume level is adjusted to the third level corresponding to the current volume level. Then, by operating the left key or the right key by the player, it becomes possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of sounds such as BGM and sound effects output from the speaker P11. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is displayed, operating the right key will increase the volume level, and operating the left key will decrease the volume level. Then, when the production button P15 is operated to confirm the volume, or when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the volume adjustment image was displayed without any volume adjustment operation, the volume The display of the adjusted image ends.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, the initialization operation of the movable body is started at the timing when the returning screen is switched to the normal screen after the gaming machine is powered on. Therefore, when the volume adjustment image is displayed after returning to the normal screen, the display of the volume adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body may be executed at the same time. In the following, a case will be described in which the display of the audio adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body are executed in duplicate after the power is restored from a power outage.

FIG. 161 is a time chart in the case where the display of the audio adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body are executed in duplicate after the power is restored from a power outage. Note that FIG. 161 shows a simple screen display (a screen display in which some displays such as small symbols and pending images are omitted) due to space constraints.

First, at time t61, a power outage occurs in the gaming machine in a variable standby state (non-variable state). At time t62, the gaming machine is powered on and recovered from the power-off. At time t63, a returning screen is displayed on the effect display device P70 at a predetermined timing after the gaming machine is powered on. At time t64, the display screen of the effect display device P70 is switched from the returning screen to the normal screen (standby screen). At this time point t64, the initialization process of the movable object is started, and the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651, the initialization operation of the production button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable accessory P652 are performed in order. .

Subsequently, at time t65, when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, by operating the left key or right key of the cross key P16), the display of the audio adjustment image is started. Thereby, the display of the volume adjustment image and the initialization operation of the movable body are executed in parallel.

At time t66, during the initialization operation of the movable body, the game ball enters the first starting port P51, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Further, by transmitting a fluctuation start command from the main control board P100 to the performance control board P200, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols and small symbols is started. At this time point t66, even if the variable display of special symbols, decorative symbols, and small symbols is started, the volume adjustment image is continuously displayed before and after the start of the variable display.

Subsequently, at time t67, a predetermined period of time (a predetermined period of time without any volume adjustment operation) has elapsed since the volume adjustment image was displayed, and the display of the volume adjustment image ends.

Then, at time t68, the initialization operation of the movable body is completed, that is, the initialization operation of the first movable accessory P651, the initialization operation of the production button P15, and the initialization operation of the second movable accessory P652 are completed. All ends.

(Modification 1 regarding volume adjustment) In the present embodiment, in a situation where a volume adjustment image is displayed on the screen of the performance display device P70, when a role effect is executed as an operation trigger performance of a button performance, The volume adjustment image may be configured to be able to be continuously displayed before and after the execution of the accessory effect without interrupting the display of the volume adjustment image due to the execution of the accessory effect.

(Modification 2 regarding volume adjustment) In the present embodiment, even if the volume adjustment image is displayed during the initialization operation of the movable body when the power is turned on, and the volume adjustment operation is performed, the movable body An initialization notification sound (for example, "Initialized" or "Initialization is in progress" indicating that the '') may be configured so that the volume does not change (it is always output at a constant volume (predetermined constant volume)).

<<Movable accessory and display device>> Next, the relationship between the predetermined operations (initialization operation, performance operation) of the movable accessory P651, 652 and the display contents of the performance display device P70 will be explained. In FIGS. 162 and 163 below, in the "Decorative pattern display" column, the state in which decorative patterns are displayed (fluctuating display, temporary stop display, fixed stop display) on the screen of the effect display device P70 is "displayed". ”, and a state in which decorative symbols are not displayed (fluctuating display, temporary stop display, fixed stop display) on the screen of the effect display device P70 is defined as “non-display”. Similarly, the state in which small symbols are displayed (fluctuating display, fixed stop display) on the screen of the effect display device P70 is referred to as "display", and the state in which small symbols are displayed (fluctuating display, fixed stop display) on the screen of the effect display device P70 is defined as "display". The state in which the display (stop display) is not performed is defined as "hidden". In addition, in the column of "Hold image display/Fluctuating image display", the state in which at least one of the pending image and the fluctuating image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70 is set to "Display", A state in which both the pending image and the changing image are not displayed is defined as "hidden." In addition, in the "Number of Pending Balls Display" column, the state in which the number of activated pending balls (including 0) for each special symbol is displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70 (pending number display area P750) is displayed as "Display". ”, a state in which the number of actuated pending balls (including 0) of each special symbol is not displayed on the screen (pending number display area P750) of the effect display device P70 is defined as “non-display”.

FIG. 162 is a time chart showing the relationship between the initialization operation of the movable accessory after power-off recovery and the display content of the effect display device P70.

First, at time t71, a power failure occurs in the gaming machine in the variable standby state (non-variable state). As mentioned above, the "fluctuating standby state" is a non-fluctuating state in which none of the first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol, and small symbol are performing a fluctuating display, and This is a state in which neither the number of pending balls for the first special symbol nor the number of pending balls for the second special symbol exists. At this time point t71, it is assumed that each movable accessory is not moving and is waiting at the initial position.

At time t72, the gaming machine is powered on and recovered from the power-off. Subsequently, at time t73, the display screen of the effect display device P70 is switched from the returning screen to the normal screen, and display of the normal screen is started. This normal screen includes the initial combination of decorative symbols (3, 3, 1), the initial combination of small symbols (3, 3, 1), and the pending activation of the first and second special symbols. The number of pitches (all are 0) is displayed. Also, substantially simultaneously with the return of the normal screen, initialization operations of the movable accessories (first movable accessory P651, second movable accessory P652) are started as an operation check of the movable objects.

Subsequently, at time 74, a plurality of game balls (three in the illustrated example) successively enter the first starting port P51, and the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and synchronized with this. Then, the variable display of decorative symbols and the variable display of small symbols are started. In addition, on the screen, a pending image (two pending images) corresponding to the activated pending ball of the first special symbol is displayed, and a variable display corresponding to the variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) is displayed. The image is displayed. Further, on the screen, "2" is displayed as the number of balls on hold for the first special symbol, and "0" is displayed as the number of balls on hold for the second special symbol. That is, in the illustrated example, even during the initialization operation of the movable accessories P651, 652, the display of decorative patterns (variable display ), the display of small symbols (fluctuating display), the display of the pending image and the fluctuating image, and the display of the number of pending balls for each special symbol are in progress.

Next, FIG. 163 is a time chart showing the relationship between the performance operation (accessory performance) of the first movable accessory P651 and the display content of the performance display device P70. In FIG. 163, a case is illustrated in which the gaming state is a low base state (normal gaming state) and the fluctuation display is a fluctuation display of SP reach (a fluctuation display of jackpot).

First, at time t81, variable display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, in synchronization with this, variable display of decorative symbols and variable display of small symbols are started. In addition, on the screen, a pending image (two pending images) corresponding to the activated pending ball of the first special symbol is displayed, and a variable display corresponding to the variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) is displayed. Image is displayed. Further, on the screen, "2" is displayed as the current number of balls on hold for the first special symbol, and "0" is displayed as the number of balls on hold for the current second special symbol. In addition, even from the end of the previous variable display to the start of the current variable display, there will be a stop display of decorative symbols (determined stop display), a stop display of small symbols (determined stop display), a pending image display, Since the number of reserved balls in the special symbol is displayed, the "Decorative symbol display" column, "Small symbol display" column, "Pending image display/Fluctuating image display" column, and "Pending The fields ``Number of pitches displayed'' are each labeled ``Display''.

At time t82, after the reach is established in the variable display, it develops into the SP reach. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols are retracted and displayed (temporarily stopped) at both ends of the screen, forming a so-called ready-to-reach pattern. Further, at this time point t82, the pending image and the image in progress are hidden from display as the variable display develops into SP reach. On the other hand, even after it develops into SP reach, the display of the number of active pending balls of the first special symbol and the display of the active pending ball number of the second special symbol are continuously performed.

At time t83, button effect D is executed as a win/lose branch effect (effect at the time of win/lose branch), and when the effect button P15 is operated, the first movable accessory P651 falls in front of the screen ( (moving to a movable position) is performed. Although not shown, the second button vibe effect is also executed at this time as an operation trigger effect. Furthermore, at this point in time 53, with the start of the accessory performance, the variable display of the decorative symbols (temporary stop display of the left symbol and the right symbol that are retracted and displayed at both ends of the screen) is hidden.

At time t84, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is resumed with the completion of the accessory presentation, and the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot ("7, 7, 7" in the illustrated example). Ru. Then, at time t85, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (in the illustrated example, "7, 7, 7").

In this way, in this embodiment, while the auxiliary displays (such as small symbols and the number of pending images) continue to be displayed regardless of the gaming situation, the main displays (such as decorative symbols and pending images) are movable. By providing time-series changes in the display mode (including non-display) according to the operation mode (initialization operation, performance operation) of the accessory P651, 652, appropriate game information (related to the game) is provided to the player. information).

≪Relationship between button vibe production and decorative pattern display/small pattern display≫ In addition, in this embodiment, as the display of the decorative pattern, a variable display of the decorative pattern, a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, and a fixed stop display of the decorative pattern are used. It is doable. On the other hand, as for the display of small symbols, variable display of small symbols and fixed stop display of small symbols can be executed, but temporary stop display of small symbols cannot be executed.

Here, in a state where the three decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner (scroll display), the combination of these decorative patterns (the combination of three decorative patterns or the combination of two of the three decorative patterns) is The player is in a state where it is difficult to recognize the situation. On the other hand, states in which the player can easily recognize the combination of decorative symbols include a state in which the combination of three decorative symbols is fixed and displayed, and a state in which the combination of three decorative symbols or the combination of three decorative symbols is displayed. There is also a state in which a combination of two decorative patterns is displayed temporarily. In addition, the state in which the combination of two decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed is, for example, the state where the combination of two decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed in a reach state where the left symbol and the right symbol among the three decorative symbols match (reach eye). Examples include the state. At this time, if the combination of three decorative patterns is fixed and displayed in a state where the combination of decorative patterns is easy to recognize, the button vibe effect will not be executed, but the combination of three decorative patterns or the combination of three decorative patterns will not be executed. When a combination of two decorative patterns among the decorative patterns is temporarily stopped and displayed, a button vibe effect can be performed.

On the other hand, when three small symbols are displayed in a variable manner (scroll display), the player can select a combination of these small symbols (a combination of three small symbols or a combination of two of the three small symbols). It becomes difficult to recognize. On the other hand, as mentioned above, small symbols are not displayed in a temporary halt, so the only state in which a combination of small symbols can be easily recognized by the player is a state in which a combination of three small symbols is displayed in a fixed halt. . Therefore, in a state where the combination of small symbols is easy for the player to recognize, that is, in a state where the combination of three small symbols is fixed and displayed, the button vibe effect is not executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display of decorative patterns and the display of small patterns have a certain correspondence relationship, but in a state where the combination of decorative patterns is easily recognized (in a recognizable state), the button vibe effect is However, in a state where the combination of small symbols is easy to recognize (recognizable state), the button vibe effect is not performed.

<<Freeze effect>> Next, a modification of the button effect of the sixth embodiment will be described. In this modification, when it is decided to execute a button effect during a specific variable display, an operation promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to operate the effect button P15 along with the start of the button effect. Ru. In this operation promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 164(a), a button image P671a imitating the effect button P15 is displayed on the effect display device P70. In this modification, when the operation promotion performance is performed, a performance pattern is selected, and the choices here include a first performance and a second performance.

(Example of First Effect) When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 164(a), a button image P671a is displayed and the operation promotion effect is started. In the first effect, when the player performs an operation input on the effect button P15, the button image P671a is erased and the operation promotion effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 164(b), and the image of the boy character is An example is shown in which a balloon image P673 is added to P672, and a line preview (also called a "comment preview effect") that foretells the reach, etc. is executed to suggest or inform the expectation of a jackpot (button effect B is executed).

That is, in the first performance, when the performance button P15 is operated during the operation promotion performance, the button image 671 disappears from the screen, and the display content of the performance display device P70 is switched to one without the button image P671a. Here, in this modification, this first performance is the basic normal switching performance.

Although not shown, the display mode of the decorative patterns during the first performance includes a mode in which the changing images of all the decorative patterns are displayed as semi-transparent images superimposed on the background, A mode is set in which at least one of the images is displayed as a changing translucent image, or a mode in which none of the images is visible by being superimposed on the background as a transparent image, for example.

(An example of a second performance) In contrast to such a first performance, the second performance is a special switching performance. A period, a second period which is an execution period of a performance mode unique to the second performance, and a third period following the second period are set. Below, various presentation modes of the second presentation will be explained by giving examples.

In the second performance, with the start of the operation promotion performance, a button image P671a is displayed as shown in FIG. 165(a). In this modification, the button image P671a displayed here is the same as the image used in the first effect. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first special effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 165(b), the button image P671b for the second effect is displayed. During this first special performance, operation of the performance button P15 is not permitted on the performance control board P200, and even if the player operates the performance button P15, the operation is not reflected in the performance. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 165(b), even if the production button P15 is pressed during the first production, the production, such as a dialogue preview, is not executed, and the same character settings or the same scene are displayed. The same type of performance, such as settings, which is merely an extension of the previous performance, continues, and the button image 671 continues to be displayed.

That is, even though the button image P671b is displayed, the operation of the production button P15 becomes ineffective, and the display of the button image P671b is maintained at the center of the screen. Such a first special effect may be referred to as a freeze effect hereinafter. In order to distinguish the button image P671b from the operation button image P671a during the first performance, the button image P671b is drawn in a manner that applies expressions such as freeze, solidification, freezing, or freezing. An image of brilliance expressing this is added. This bright image may be a moving image.

The probability of occurrence of such a second performance is set lower than the probability of occurrence of the first performance. Furthermore, in this modified example, there is a correlation between the degree of expectation of winning (for example, degree of expectation of jackpot) between the first performance and the second performance, and the relationship between the partial structure of the second performance (for example, the period of the freeze performance) and the expectation of winning. There are various settings such as the correlation between the degree of winning and the expected degree of winning. The details will be described later, but to give an example, the expectation level of the jackpot is set higher for the second performance than for the first performance. Furthermore, the longer the period of the freeze effect in the second effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Although not shown, in this modification, for example, while changing from the normal button image P671a shown in FIG. 164(a) to the button image P671b during freeze effect shown in FIG. 165(b), A button image indicating a transition state is displayed using a technique such as a watermark or a watermark. The transition state referred to here is for creating an effect such as when the button image P671b freezes instantly when the button is operated and the freeze effect is started, and the degree of freezing is, for example, 0. This refers to a presentation mode that gradually increases over a period of about .5 seconds. Furthermore, in this modification, after the start of the freeze effect, the display mode of the button image P671b, which shows that the degree of freezing has reached a steady state, does not change before and after the operation of the effect button P15. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may be such that when the production button P15 is operated, a part of the button image P671b is changed while continuing to be displayed.

Furthermore, the display mode of the decorative patterns during the freeze effect may be a mode in which all the decorative patterns or some of the decorative patterns are displayed as fluctuating semi-transparent images, as in the first effect, or a mode in which both of the decorative patterns are displayed as semi-transparent images. The mode in which it is not possible is set. As an example, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which only an image such as a person or a design drawing that forms a part of the decorative pattern changes along with the numbers and letters.

Moreover, as a display mode of the background image, which is an image excluding decorative patterns, during the freeze effect, a display mode in which the background image is in a static frozen state is adopted. Furthermore, in addition to this, it is conceivable to adopt a limited animation display mode in which only a part of the background image changes. Examples of limited animation display modes include those in which only a part of the scenery or only image constituent elements such as people, vehicles, etc. are changed. Furthermore, during the second period, the production button P15 may be emitted, for example, or text or audio guidance may be output to prompt the operation of the production button P15.

Furthermore, during the freeze effect, the fact that the freeze effect is in progress may be notified by outputting a text or audio message to that effect, or by effect effects such as light decorations and sound effects. Note that in this modification, the button image P671b is different from the button image P671b in the normal case before the freeze effect, but a common image may be used as the button image.

This kind of freeze effect is controlled based on time, and when a predetermined period (second period) described below has elapsed, the freeze effect is released as the effect button P15 is enabled. state. Here, the same button image P671a (see, for example, FIG. 166(a)) as in the first effect is used as an unfrozen button image. Furthermore, if the player operates the performance button P15 while this button image P671a is displayed, the button image P671a disappears from the screen as in the case of the first performance, and the display of subsequent performance patterns is disabled. (See, for example, FIG. 166(b)).

FIG. 167 shows various periods and various states set for the second performance in comparison with the first performance. In FIG. 167, (a) shows the first effect, and (b) shows the second effect. First, in the first performance, as described above, the operation promotion performance is started during the variable period ((timing) T1), and as shown by arrow A, the operation to the performance button P15 is performed during the operation promotion performance. If so (T2), then the effect pattern after the button operation is executed.

On the other hand, in the second performance, with the start of the operation promotion performance (T1), a first period timed by a first period timer (not shown) begins (see (b1) in the figure). This first period is defined as a control execution period from when the button image P671a is displayed on the screen until it is erased. In this modification, when the freeze effect is started (T3) and the button image P671b is displayed, a second period is defined in which this display is continued and no operation of the effect button P15 is accepted. This second period is shorter than the first period (see (b2) in the figure), and is timed by a second period timer (not shown).

While the second period continues, the first special effect (see (b3) in the figure), which is a freeze effect, is being performed, but when the freeze effect ends, the third period following the second period (see (b3) in the figure) is performed. (see (b2)) begins. This third period is timed by a third period timer (not shown), and during the third period, the button image P671a is displayed and the operation of the production button P15 is enabled. The performance performed during the third period is a second special performance (see (b3) in the figure), and the second special performance is performed following the first special performance.

In other words, the first special effect (freeze effect) occurs at any timing between the start and end of the first period, and during the first period, the operation promotion effect does not change the button image. or at the start of the second period or the third period. Then, from the start of the second period (T3) to the start of the third period (T4), even if the button is operated as shown by arrow B, the operation button image P671b remains displayed, and the button image P671a If the button is operated as shown by arrow C after the start of the third period in which the switch is made, the button image P671a is erased and the effect after the button operation is executed.

Note that the time from the start of the first period to the start of the second period (herein referred to as "delay time") can take various values, such as 3 seconds, 5 seconds, and 10 seconds. If this delay time is made relatively short, it becomes possible to realize a gameplay that requires the player to operate the production button P15 as soon as possible.On the other hand, if the delay time is made relatively long, it is possible to realize a gameplay that requires the player to operate the production button P15 as soon as possible. It becomes possible to realize a game that allows you to operate the game.

In addition, in determining the start time of the second period, for example, a plurality of operation promotion performance patterns Ma to Mz that comprehensively define a series of performance patterns from the start to the end of the first period (end of the third period) are set. Then, the promotion performance may be performed by appropriately selecting and executing the operation promotion performance patterns Ma to Mz. In addition, there are operation promotion performance patterns such as operation promotion performance patterns M1a to M1z related to the first period, operation promotion performance patterns M2a to M2z related to the second period, and operation promotion performance patterns M3a to M3z related to the third period. It is also possible to set these subdivided and to perform a promotional effect by appropriately combining them, for example, M1a+M2b+M3c or M1e+M2a+M3y. Furthermore, it is also possible to determine the delay time of the start of the second period with respect to the first period by lottery.

In addition, in this modification, when the first special performance changes to the second special performance, the normal button image P671a is displayed to notify the player that the freeze has been lifted as a freeze release performance. However, a dedicated image during the second special effect (freeze release effect) may be used. Alternatively, the display mode of the second special effect may be the same as the first special effect, so that the display mode of the two may not be distinguishable. In this case, it is possible to realize a game in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the start of the third period. Also, the first
The start of the period and the second period may be made to match, and the freeze effect may be executed from the beginning of the promotion effect. In this case, it is possible to realize a game in which the operation promotion effect immediately becomes a freeze effect.

Next, the performance pattern associated with reach in the second performance will be explained. In an example of a performance pattern in the second performance, after the freeze performance occurs (see FIG. 165(b)), the left and right decorative symbols stop at a combination of reach (including temporary stop display modes such as swinging). , when the central decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the freeze effect ends and the unfrozen button image P671a is displayed as shown in FIG. 168(a). At this time, the third period is started and the effect button P15 is enabled, and when the effect button P15 is operated, this operation is reflected in the display mode, and as shown in FIG. 168(b), the image of the button image P671a is You can switch to a production with the . Then, on the production display device P70, an image with content corresponding to the subsequent production story is displayed. Although there are cases in which it is not a reach, in many cases a moving image is progressing in the background of the button image P671a. Therefore, it is extremely unlikely that the background image when the button image P671a disappears will always be the same, and the background image usually varies from time to time. Then, by operating the production button P15, a new situation different from the previous one will be developed by various production patterns. An example of a performance pattern that represents a new situation is a performance pattern in which a character, from a state of no dialogue, utters a line as shown in FIG. 166(b) to suggest or notify the expectation of a jackpot.

FIGS. 169 and 170 show other examples of performance patterns associated with reach. In this performance example, the freeze is not released just because a reach occurs during the freeze performance, but the freeze is released when the performance pattern develops into a super reach. That is, as shown in FIG. 169(a), a freeze effect occurs along with the reach, and further, as shown in FIG. 169(b), when the player reaches a super reach, the player's feeling of elation is accompanied by an image 676 of lightning. When an inciting effect (inciting effect) is executed, the freeze is released and the effect button P15 becomes valid. Then, when the production button P15 is operated, the promotion production ends and the button image P671b disappears, and the button image P671a after the freeze is released is displayed as shown in FIG. ), images with content corresponding to the subsequent production story are displayed. In addition, in FIGS. 168(a) and 169(b), in order to simplify the illustration, a state with no background is shown in which the background images of the decorative patterns and button images P671a and 671b are not displayed. In many cases, behind the decorative patterns or button images P671a, 671b, an effect is executed to display some kind of background image.

Furthermore, regarding the second performance, the correlation between the first or second period and the expectation level of each type of win is determined, and it is set such that the longer the first or second period is, the higher the expectation level of each type of win is. has been done. That is, FIG. 171 schematically shows an operation promotion effect pattern table related to operation promotion effect, and FIG. 171(a) shows a variation pattern used when the result of the judgment is negative. Further, Fig. 171(b) is used when the judgment result is a jackpot (15R jackpot), and Fig. 171(c) is used when the judgment result is a jackpot (2R jackpot) or a small hit. It is something that can be done.

In addition, in each figure, as operation promotion effects, promotion effects L1 and L2 indicate operation promotion effects patterns that require a longer time to execute compared to promotion effects M and promotion effects S, and are further promotion effects. L2 is an operation promotion effect pattern that takes a longer time than the promotion effect L1. Further, regarding the promotion effect M and the promotion effect S, the promotion effect M requires a longer time to execute than the promotion effect S. Note that the types of lengths of the operation promotion effects are not limited to those exemplified here, and may be larger or smaller.

In FIG. 171(a), the pattern lottery values 0 to 10 are associated with a promotion effect L1, and the pattern lottery values 11 to 40 are associated with a promotion effect M. Promotion effects S are associated with pattern lottery values 41 to 255. In FIG. 171(b), the promotion effect L1 is for pattern lottery values 0 to 10, the promotion effect L1 is for pattern lottery values 11 to 230, the promotion effect M is for pattern lottery values 231 to 250, and the promotion effect is M for pattern lottery values 251 to 255. is associated with promotion effect S. Furthermore, in FIG. 171(c), the pattern lottery values 0 to 160 are associated with the promotion effect L1, and the pattern lottery values 161 to 255 are associated with the promotion effect M.

In addition, here we have explained the relationship between the overall operation promotion performance and the reliability of each type of winning, but we have also established the relationship between the freeze performance (first special performance), the freeze release performance (second special performance), and the various winning expectations. For example, it may be set such that the longer (or shorter) the freeze effect or freeze release effect, the higher the expectation level for each type of win. Further, regarding the second performance, the longer the time from the end of displaying the button image P671a to the start of the operation validity period related to the button image P671b, the higher the expectation level of a jackpot. In addition, it is also possible to allocate pattern lottery values so that a relationship is established such that if the freeze effect starts relatively soon after the start of the operation promotion effect, the reliability of each type of win increases. .

Furthermore, in response to a plurality of starting winnings, a continuous preview performance or a look-ahead performance, which is a preview performance pattern carried out over a plurality of symbol change displays, may be associated with the operation promotion performance. For example, if the pending lottery results include a lottery result that results in a 15R jackpot (target activation pending ball), the variable display (target variable display) that precedes the variable display (target variable display) corresponding to the lottery result The promotion effect is started during the previous variation display), and then the freeze effect is continuously executed across multiple symbol variation displays, and when the variation display (target variation display) that results in a 15R jackpot starts, It is conceivable to start a freeze release effect during this time. By doing so, it becomes possible to further diversify the operation promotion effects. Further, in this case, the first period timer and the second period timer will perform time measurement over multiple variable displays.

In addition, in this modification, as described above, as the performance pattern of the predetermined button performance, the performance pattern A (the button image P671a is created when the performance button P15 is operated while the normal button image P671a is displayed). Effect pattern A) in which the special button image P671b is not displayed after being erased, and effect pattern B (after the button image P671a is erased when the effect button P15 is operated while the normal button image P671a is displayed) It has a production pattern B) for displaying a special button image P671b. Here, during execution of the variable display in front of the target where a specific look-ahead effect is executed, effect pattern B is not executed, but effect pattern A is executed. On the other hand, while the variable display of the target is being executed, the effect pattern B can be executed, and the effect pattern A can also be executed. In other words, during execution of the variable display of the target, which is performed by the activation of the suspended ball in front of the target, is better than during the execution of the fluctuation display of the target, which is performed by the activation of the suspended sphere in front of the target, than during the execution of the fluctuation display in front of the target, which is performed by the activation of the suspended sphere in front of the target. , effect pattern B is configured to be easily executed. Note that even while the variable display in front of the target is being executed, the effect pattern B may be configured to be executed with a relatively low probability. Further, it is preferable that the probability that the effect pattern B is executed is higher than the probability that the effect pattern A is executed while the variable display of the target is being executed. Note that the special button image P671b may be a red button image as described above, and the normal button image P671a may be a blue button image as described above.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, the case where the effect pattern B is executed during the execution of the variable display is better than the case where the effect pattern A is executed during the execution of the variable display. The button vibe effect may be easily executed during execution. In addition, if performance pattern A is executed while the fluctuating display is being executed, the second button vibe performance (jackpot confirmation performance) will not be executed in the fluctuating display, but performance pattern B will be executed while the fluctuating display is being executed. When executed, the second button vibe effect (big hit confirmation effect) may be configured to be executable while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, the second button vibe effect is better when effect pattern B is executed during execution of the variable display than when effect pattern A is executed during execution of the variable display. (Jackpot confirmation performance) may be configured to be easily executed.

The main effects achieved in the sixth embodiment (including modified examples) can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the sixth embodiment, in addition to visual effects such as image effects and lamp effects, expectations of winning or losing can be indicated by tactile effects caused by vibration of the effect button (button vibe effect). At the same time, by performing the tactile effects of winning and losing results (regardless of whether the fluctuating display is a jackpot fluctuation or a losing fluctuation) at various times during the fluctuating display, the player can feel bored. It is possible to realize a game performance that does not make the user feel uneasy, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the tactile effect (button vibe effect) is considered to be an important effect for the player because the fluctuating display suggests or informs that the level of expectation is high (extremely hot). By making it possible to confirm in advance whether or not the operation can be performed normally, and by preventing the confirmation operation and the tactile presentation from being repeated, the confirmation operation and the production operation can be clearly separated and displayed appropriately. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, when a button effect is to be performed while the movable body is being initialized after the power is restored from a power outage, the initialization of the movable body is prioritized. However, by making it possible to execute the button effect in a manner that does not hinder the progress of this initialization operation (a simple manner that does not suggest or agitate the appearance of the button image), the expectations of the player are not exceeded. It is possible to proceed with the performance without stirring things up, and it is also possible to prevent the processing of the game proceeding from becoming complicated immediately after the power is turned off, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, when a button effect is to be performed while the movable body is being initialized after the power is restored from a power outage, the initialization of the movable body is prioritized. By making it possible to execute the button effect in a manner that does not hinder the progress of the initialization operation (a simple manner that does not generate the operation result effect when the button operation is not performed), the player It is possible to make the performance proceed without unnecessarily stirring up the expectations of players, and it is also possible to simplify the processing of the performance progress when there is no button operation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

According to the sixth embodiment, even when the actual firing position in the gaming area is switched due to a transition of the gaming state, excessive notification of the actual firing position to the player can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent players from feeling distrustful or uncomfortable, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to execute a pending change suggestion performance that suggests the possibility of a pending change even during any variable display, regardless of the length of the variable display time of the symbol. In this way, it is possible to further increase the interest and attention level of the players in the pending changes, and it is also possible to eliminate the monotony of the performance related to the pending changes, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Furthermore, according to the sixth embodiment, the auxiliary displays (such as small symbols and the number of reservations) whose role is to ensure the display continue to be displayed regardless of the gaming situation, while their role is to display the production effect. For the main displays (decorative symbols, pending images, etc.), the display mode changes over time (including non-display) depending on the gaming situation, so that the player can It becomes possible to narrow down to a certain extent the contents of the performance that should be noted, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, by making the notification mode of the effect button during the initialization operation different from the notification mode of the effect button during the vibration operation, the player is informed of the correct game progress status. (It is possible to prevent the player from proceeding with the game based on a mistaken understanding), and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, even if pending information is stored at the start of the gaming state after the transition when the gaming state shifts, a pre-reading effect targeting this pending information is not executed. By configuring this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of performance control, and it is also possible to prevent a situation where the performance loses its sharpness due to the occurrence of a look-ahead performance immediately after the transition of the game state, and as a result, the interest of the game is increased. It becomes possible to improve the

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, when a specific look-ahead effect is executed for the target's pending information, the target's pending information is By making the button effect easier to execute while the target's fluctuating display, which is performed by being digested, is in progress, the effect can be livened up over multiple fluctuating displays from the fluctuating display in front of the target to the target's fluctuating display. In addition, it is possible to make the presentation more vivid, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, when the actual firing position in the game area is switched when the gaming state shifts, when the actual firing position is displayed to the player, this actual firing position is changed. Even if the position notification display and the decorative pattern display are displayed overlappingly, the actual firing position notification display, the display of the small pattern, the display of the pending image, and the display of the pending number are configured so as not to be displayed overlappingly. By doing so, even if the visibility of the decorative symbols is obstructed by the notification display of the actual firing position, the visibility of the small symbols, pending images, etc., and the display of the pending number is ensured, so the player can It is possible to appropriately recognize the game status (fluctuating display, static display, number of pending balls, etc.), and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Seventh Embodiment] Next, a Pachinko gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to one or a combination of two or more of the above-mentioned second to sixth embodiments. (including those that have been partially deleted or converted using well-known/commonly used technology, etc.), and hereinafter, parts with similar configurations will be given the same reference numerals and explanations will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be explained. explain. That is, in the following description, the same configuration as the second to sixth embodiments described above can be applied, except in special cases.

Below, the basic configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment will be explained in order.

<Board Structure> First, the board structure of the Pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In this seventh embodiment, similarly to the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 133), the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 mainly enters the first starting port P51 arranged below the center decoration P21. , you can enter any of the general winning holes P61 to P63. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can mainly enter any one of the operating gate P53, the second starting opening P52, and the big prize opening P54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration P21. On the other hand, at the lower end of the game area PA, an out port P29 is provided for discharging game balls that have flown down without entering each winning hole to the back side of the game board P20. In addition, among the game areas PA equipped with various winning openings, the hitting method in which the game balls are fired so as to flow down to the left area PA1 is called "left-handed hitting", and the game ball is flown down to the right area PA2. The method of hitting the game ball in such a way as to cause the player to hit the ball is called "right-handed hitting."

<Various display devices> As shown in FIG. 133 described above, the display area of the effect display device P70 includes a decorative pattern display area P700, a pending image display area P710, a changing image display area P720, a small pattern display area P730, and a pending image display area P720. A number display area P740 and the like are provided.

As described above, the decorative pattern display area P700 is a display area for variable display and stop display (determined stop display, temporary stop display) of the decorative patterns. The decorative pattern display area P700 is provided with three rows of display areas (left pattern display area Z1, middle pattern display area Z2, right pattern display area Z3) that serve as variable display areas for decorative patterns. The left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the middle symbol display area Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the right symbol display area Z3. There is. The decorative pattern of this embodiment is composed of a performance pattern having a plurality of identification information (numbers, characters). Numerical information from "1" to "9" is set in this decorative pattern as one of a plurality of pieces of identification information (that is, there are a total of nine types of decorative patterns). Each decorative pattern is arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the pattern rows, and on the effect display device P70, the order of "1" to "9" (or the order of "9" to "1") It is cycled or scrolled in each display area Z1, Z2, and Z3, and after "9" it returns to "1" (or after "1" it returns to "9" again). . Note that the structure of the decorative pattern will be described later.

The pending image display area P710 is a display area for displaying a pending image (holding icon) corresponding to the activated pending ball of the special symbol. In this pending image display area P710, when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is in the gaming state (normal gaming state) where the main character of the game is, the pending image (pending icon) corresponding to the activated pending ball of the first special symbol is displayed. ) is displayed, and if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main game state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), the pending image (pending icon) corresponding to the action pending ball of the second special symbol is displayed. ) is displayed. In this pending image display area P710, a maximum of 4 (4 pieces corresponding to the maximum number of stored operation pending balls of each special symbol) can be displayed as the pending image of the first special symbol or the pending image of the second special symbol. It is possible. Then, the suspended images of the first special symbol are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (input order) of the activated suspended balls of the first special symbol, and the suspended images of the second special symbol are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (input order) of activated suspended balls of the first special symbol. are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (order of arrival).

The changing image display area P720 is a display area for displaying a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the currently executing changing display. In this fluctuating image display area P720, when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is the main game state (normal gaming state), the fluctuating image (fluctuation) corresponding to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is displayed. (medium icon) is displayed, and if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main game state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), the fluctuating image ( (Fluctuating icon) is displayed.

The small symbol display area P730 is a display area for variable display and stop display (fixed stop display) of small symbols (also referred to as "simple symbols"). The small design is the fourth design following the special design, normal design, and decorative design. That is, in the present embodiment, as a variable display of performance symbols that visually express the variable display of special symbols, a variable display of small symbols is displayed in a small size on the screen, in addition to the variable display of decorative symbols. This small pattern is composed of three patterns that correspond to the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern of the decorative pattern, and, like the decorative pattern, it is made up of a total of nine types of numbers from "1" to "9", for example. It is composed of identification elements. In addition, a decorative pattern may be called a "main decorative pattern" or a "first decorative pattern," and a small pattern may be called a "sub-decorative pattern" or a "second decorative pattern."

This small pattern display area P730 is formed in a relatively smaller display area than the decorative pattern display area P700. This small symbol display area P730 has three rows of display areas (left small symbol display area, medium and small symbol display area, and right small symbol display area) that are the variable display area of small symbols, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The left small design (referred to as the "left small design") corresponds to the left small design display area, and the medium design of the small design (referred to as "medium and small design") corresponds to the small and medium design display area. ), the right symbols of the small symbols are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the right small symbol display area. Of the three patterns forming this small pattern, the left small pattern corresponds to the left pattern of the decorative pattern, the medium and small patterns correspond to the middle pattern of the decorative pattern, and the right small pattern corresponds to the middle pattern of the decorative pattern. The variable display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the stop display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol. be exposed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed as a fixed stop display and a temporary stop display, whereas the small pattern is displayed as a fixed stop display but not a temporary stop display. That is, even if a decorative pattern (at least one of a left pattern, a pattern, and a right pattern) is temporarily stopped, the small pattern continues to be displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped.

Further, the variable display of the small design may be a display mode in which the numbers "1" to "9" are scrolled (for example, vertically scrolled or horizontally scrolled) in the same way as the variable display of the decorative design. Unlike the display, a display mode in which a predetermined combination of specific numbers is switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals is preferable. For example, "1, 3, 5", "4, 6, 8", "7, 9, 2" are used as combinations of three symbols (specific combinations of numbers) that make up the small design. Then, "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → "1, 3, 5" → "4, 6, 8" → "7, 9, 2" → It is possible to apply a configuration in which specific numbers are repeatedly displayed, such as... According to such a configuration, control regarding the variable display of small symbols can be simplified.

It should be noted that small symbols only need to allow the player to recognize that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and that it is in a fixed stop display, and it is not necessarily necessary for the small symbol to be displayed in a variable display and fixed stop display in a combination of three symbols, just like decorative symbols. It is not necessary to display it, and a combination of two symbols or a variable display and a fixed stop display using only one symbol may be used (other identification elements such as simplified symbols and colors may also be used).

The reserved number display area P740 is a display area for displaying the number of activated reserved balls of the special symbol. This reservation number display area P740 includes a first reservation number display area P741 that displays the number of activated reservation balls of the first special symbol, and a second reservation number display area P742 that displays the number of activation reservation balls of the second special symbol. including. In addition, below, the number of operation reservation balls of the first special symbol may be referred to as the "first special symbol reservation number", and the number of operation reservation balls of the second special symbol may be referred to as the "second special symbol reservation number". .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 133 described above, the game board P20 is provided with a main control display device P27 that is controlled by the main control board P100 side and a sub-control display device P28 that is controlled by the performance control board P200 side. It is being Note that the main control display device P27 will be described in detail in the fourth embodiment, and the sub-control display device P28 will be described in detail in the sixth embodiment, so the description will be omitted here.

<Movable accessories> Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 133 described above, a plurality of movable accessories P651 and 652 are attached to the game board P20, which perform performance operations depending on the development situation of the game. The first movable accessory P651 has an initial position located on the upper end side of the center decoration P21 (also referred to as a "first initial position" to distinguish it from other initial positions) and a movable accessory located on the lower end side of the center decoration P21. (also referred to as a "first movable position" to distinguish it from other movable positions) is configured to be able to slide vertically (reciprocatingly). The second movable accessory P652 has an initial position (also referred to as a "second initial position" to distinguish it from other initial positions) in which it swings to the right around the fulcrum and retreats behind the center ornament 80. It is possible to swing between the movable position (also referred to as the "second movable position" to distinguish it from other movable positions) that swings leftward about the above-mentioned fulcrum and appears in front of the screen of the effect display device P70. It is composed of Note that FIG. 133 shows a state in which each movable accessory P651, 652 has returned to its initial position (a state in which it is located at its initial position).

<Production Button> Also, like the gaming machine of the above embodiment (see FIG. 135, etc.), the gaming machine of this embodiment has a production button P15, a cross key P16, and a cross key P16 as input devices that can be operated by the player. is provided. This performance button P15 has a built-in performance button lamp (LED board) 15a. This performance button lamp 15a is equipped with a plurality of surface-mounted LEDs as light emitters for emitting light from the performance button P15. As this light emitting body (LED), a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is suitably used. Further, the performance button P15 is equipped with a performance button detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the performance button P15 has been operated. The detection signal of this operation detection sensor is input to the production control board P200. Further, the production button P15 has a built-in vibration motor (not shown) that can generate vibrations. This vibration motor is configured to be able to impart (transfer) vibration to the production button P15 under the control of the production control board P200. Note that the production button P15 may be referred to as "operation means".

<Decorative Design> Next, the decorative design of the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a decorative pattern according to the seventh embodiment.

The decorative pattern is made up of a combination of multiple types of identification information (numerical information, character information, etc.). The decorative pattern of this embodiment includes a number pattern (number image) and a character pattern (character image). The numeric symbols are composed of symbols representing nine types of numbers from "1" to "9". The character pattern is composed of patterns representing nine types of characters (characters A to I). These nine types of characters are different from each other, and examples include the main character, companion characters, and enemy characters. Regarding the numerical symbols, "1", "5", and "9" may be colored green, "3" and "7" may be colored red, and other numbers may be colored blue. In such a configuration, "3" and "5" correspond to the 4R jackpot in which the shift to a high probability state or/or a high base state is confirmed by becoming a zero, and "7" corresponds to a zero. This corresponds to a 10R jackpot where the transition to the high probability state and/or high base state is confirmed by becoming the number, and the other numbers correspond to the transition to the high probability state and/or high base state by becoming a zero. It is desirable to deal with an unconfirmed 4R jackpot (a 4R jackpot in which a transition to a high probability state and/or a high base state is confirmed if the promotion effect is successful). In addition, the small design consists of only number designs (does not include character designs), and the color of the numbers is the same as the decorative design, but as a modified example, the small design consists of both numbers. It may be white. Further, the shape of the numbers may also be different between the decorative pattern and the small pattern (for example, the decorative pattern may be in Mincho font, and the small pattern may be in Gothic font). Furthermore, regarding the character designs, it is desirable that the display area of "Character G" be relatively larger than that of other characters. The same applies to numeric symbols, and it is desirable that the display area of "7" be relatively large compared to other digits.

As shown in FIG. 172, the number design and the character design are associated in a one-to-one relationship, and the character design of "Character A" is associated with the number design of "1", and the character design of "Character A" is associated with the number design of "1", The character design of "Character B" is associated with the number design of "3", the character design of "Character C" is associated with the number design of "4", and the character design of "Character The character design of "D" is associated, the character design of "Character E" is associated with the number design of "5", and the character design of "Character F" is associated with the number design of "6". The character pattern of "Character G" is associated with the numerical pattern of "7", the character pattern of "Character H" is associated with the numerical pattern of "8", and the character pattern of "Character H" is associated with the numerical pattern of "8", and the character pattern of "Character H" is associated with the numerical pattern of "8". The character design of "Character I" is associated with. Here, for stages A, B, and C, the character designs associated with each number design may be different. For example, in stage B, "character a" is used for each of the numbers "1" to "9". - "Character i" (a character different from "Character A" - "Character I") may be associated with each other. Similarly, in the time-saving production mode and the variable probability production mode, the character design associated with each number pattern may be different from stages A, B, and C, but in the time-saving production mode and the variable probability production mode, the character design is not attached. The decorative pattern may be composed only of numerical patterns. In this way, the display mode (character pattern) of decorative symbols may be different depending on each stage, but it is desirable that the display mode (color of numbers) for small symbols be the same regardless of the stage. .

In this example, as a layer for displaying decorative patterns, the layer for displaying character designs is placed lower than the layer for displaying numerical designs, and the layer for displaying character designs is placed in the layer on the near side (layer with high priority). The character image is displayed on the layer on the back side (layer with low priority) (the number pattern and the character pattern are displayed superimposed in this order from the front side toward the depth side). As a result, when the number pattern and the character pattern are displayed in a superimposed manner, the positional relationship is such that the character pattern is displayed behind the number pattern. In addition, in FIGS. 183 to 184, which will be described later, for convenience, a layer displaying numeric symbols and a layer displaying character symbols are collectively shown as one decorative symbol layer LA2. As a modified example, the layer displaying the numerical symbols and the layer displaying the character symbols may be the same layer, and the design may be such that the numerical symbols are placed in front of the character symbols.

Here, as mentioned above, the correspondence between the number symbols and the character symbols does not have to be one-to-one; for example, depending on the gaming state (production mode/production stage) during the stay, The correspondence relationship may change. In addition to numerical and character designs, decorative design elements include character name designs that indicate the character's name, and background designs (number and character designs) that are the background of the number and/or character designs. To make it look luxurious, a background pattern attached to the back may be added.

Further, as the decorative patterns of this embodiment, in addition to the normal decorative patterns consisting of number patterns and character patterns, special decorative patterns (special patterns) that are different from the normal decorative patterns are set. These special symbols include pseudo-continuation symbols such as "NEXT" which is a temporary stop symbol that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-continuation, and development symbols such as "SP" which is a temporary stop symbol which suggests the occurrence of SP reach. This special pattern is not included in the normal pattern arrangement of decorative patterns, and can be temporarily displayed in the variation performance of a specific variation pattern (pseudo-connection variation pattern). Therefore, although the details will be described later, the decorative symbols that can be displayed in the variable standby state (variable standby period) are only normal decorative symbols (number symbols and character symbols), and special symbols are displayed in the variable standby state (variable standby period). It will not be displayed in .

Furthermore, as described above, the design attribute of each decorative pattern is determined by the type of color applied to the numerical pattern. That is, although the plurality of decorative patterns are composed of mutually different identification information (numbers, characters), by giving the numerical patterns a common color, they are grouped into the same pattern attribute. In this embodiment, three types of colors are set for the decorative pattern (number pattern): "blue," "green," and "red." Specifically, the decorative patterns “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are classified as blue pattern attributes (blue attribute), and the decorative patterns “1”, “5”, and “9” are classified as green It is classified as a symbol attribute (green attribute), and decorative symbols “3” and “7” are classified as a red symbol attribute (red attribute). In this embodiment, as a symbol attribute of a decorative symbol, the expectation level of getting a ball and the expectation level of probability change increase one step at a time in the order of "blue" < "green" < "red". Hereinafter, for convenience, a decorative pattern with a blue attribute is also referred to as a "blue pattern", a decorative pattern with a green attribute is also referred to as a "green pattern", and a decorative pattern with a red attribute is also referred to as a "red pattern". In addition, on the drawings, the display colors of "blue," "green," and "red" are all expressed as "white" to make the numerical patterns clearer.

In addition, as a modification, the color of the numerical symbols may be changed depending on the gaming state (performance mode/performance stage) currently being played. For example, if the current playing state is the low base state, the decorative symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols, and the decorative symbols "1", "5", and "8" are blue symbols; 9" is a green symbol, decorative symbols "3" and "7" are red symbols, and if the current playing state is a high base state, the decorative symbols "2", "4", and "6" are formed. ” and “8” may be blue patterns, decorative patterns “1”, “5”, and “9” may be green patterns, decorative pattern “3” may be a red pattern, and decorative pattern “7” may be formed as a gold pattern. Furthermore, as described above, the character of the character design may be made different depending on the game state (performance mode/performance stage) currently in play. If the game state you are currently staying in is a low base state, nine types of characters will be composed of characters A to I, and if the game state you are currently staying in is a high base state, nine types of characters will be made up of characters A to I. It may be composed of characters a to i.

In this embodiment, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot (also referred to as a "jackpot symbol combination" or "jackpot number") is a combination of stop patterns in which three decorative symbols with the same identification information (numbers and characters) are aligned. Consists of "＊・＊・＊" (*: Decorative pattern of arbitrary numbers). In other words, these jackpot symbol combinations (also called jackpots or doubles) are "1, 1, 1," "2, 2, 2," "3, 3, 3," "4, 4, 4," " 5.5.5'', ``6.6.6'', ``7.7.7'', ``8.8.8'', ``9.9.9'', etc. with the same identification information (numbers and characters). This is a combination of stop modes with all decorative patterns.

A combination of decorative patterns that indicate a misalignment (also referred to as a "missing pattern combination" or "mismatched pattern") is a combination of stopping patterns in which at least one of the three decorative patterns is different from the other decorative patterns (e.g. "1.3.8", "5.6.7"). Here, among the missed symbol combinations, there are combinations of stop patterns in which the left and right decorative symbols match and only the middle symbol is different (for example, shifted several frames forward or backward) (for example, "2/4").・2'', ``7, 8, 7'') are also referred to as ``unreachable combinations'' or ``unreachable combinations''.

In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, the combination of decorative symbols when the left and right symbols among the three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a matching state, and the remaining middle symbols are scrolled and displayed. (In other words, the combination of decorative symbols when a reach is established) is also called a "reach state eye". In addition, in this embodiment, a combination of decorative patterns called a so-called chance (same color pattern combination) is used as a combination of decorative patterns (a combination indicating a miss) that is stopped and displayed in a predetermined look-ahead effect (same-color pattern stop look-ahead effect). is set (details will be explained later).

<Background Image> The background image is an image that is displayed in a superimposed manner as a background display of a decorative pattern, small pattern, pending image, changing image, preview effect image, etc. This background image is composed of moving images or still images related to anime, games, TV dramas, etc. that are the subject matter of this gaming machine. The background images in this embodiment include a stage background image and a reach background image. Note that the contents of each background image will be described later.

<BGM: Background Music> In this embodiment, multiple types of BGM are set as BGM (background music, background music) output from the speaker. BGM in this embodiment includes stage BGM and reach BGM. Various BGMs are stored in the ROMP 302 (audio ROM, etc.) of the image control board P300, and can be read by the sub-sub CPU 301 or the audio IC. Note that the content of each BGM will be described later.

Next, among the game effects that are characteristic of the game machine of the seventh embodiment, contents such as "mode effect (stage effect)," "image operation effect," "image transformation effect," and "button effect" will be explained. In addition, in the following explanation, for convenience, the action pending ball that triggers the execution of a look-ahead performance or look-ahead lottery is also referred to as the "target action pending ball", and the action pending ball that is extinguished before the target action pending ball is referred to as the "action pending ball". It is also called the "active hold ball in front of the target". In addition, the suspended image corresponding to the target's operation-suspended sphere is also referred to as the "target's suspended image", and the suspended image corresponding to the operation-suspended sphere in front of the target is also referred to as "the suspended image in front of the target". In addition, the fluctuating image that is displayed when the target's action-holding ball is consumed is also called the "target's fluctuating image," and the fluctuating image that is displayed when the action-holding ball in front of the target is consumed. It is also referred to as a "fluctuation image in front of the target." In addition, the variable display that is executed when the target's pending ball is used up is also called the ``target variable display,'' and the variable display that is executed when the pending ball in front of the target is used up is called ``before the target.'' It is also called "fluctuation display".

[Mode Production] First, the mode production (stage production) of the seventh embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram for explaining the mode performance (stage performance) of the seventh embodiment. The mode performance (stage performance) of this embodiment is a performance that is dependent on the performance mode (performance stage) in which a background image and BGM are set according to the performance mode (performance stage) in which the user is currently staying.

In the seventh embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), the "normal performance mode" is set, and the gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state (low probability low base state). When the gaming state is in a low base state), the "time saving production mode" is set, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state), the "probable variable production mode" is set. Depending on the gaming state (or variable pattern selection state) managed on the main control board P100 side, the number of variable display of special symbols, etc., one of the multiple production modes is alternatively set, and the corresponding A variable performance is executed according to the set performance mode. When a production mode is set, a background image exclusively for the production mode (referred to as a "stage background image") is set as a production (variable production) that suggests that the stage is staying in the production mode, and BGM exclusively for the production mode (referred to as "stage BGM") is set. In this way, the stage background image and stage BGM are set to be different for each production mode, so the player can recognize which production mode he is currently in from the type of stage background image or stage BGM. It is now possible to do so.

<Normal performance mode> When the performance mode is the normal performance mode (when the gaming state is the low probability low base state), the stage background image (referred to as the "normal background image") corresponding to the normal performance mode is At the same time as being displayed on the screen, stage BGM corresponding to the normal performance mode (referred to as "normal BGM") is output from the speaker P11.

In the normal production mode, four types of production stages are set: stage A, stage B, stage C, and pre-reading stage. '', the stage will be moved from stage A to stage B, stage B to stage C, or stage C to stage A, and the pre-read stage will be executed (transition ), you will move from the production stage you are currently staying in to the "pre-reading stage" (the execution of SP reach will be confirmed when you move to the "pre-reading stage", and if you win the jackpot, you will be able to move to the "pre-reading stage"). If a number is displayed and misses, a number other than the number 0 will be displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and the next change will return to the stage before moving to the "look-ahead stage", or, within the said change, after the SP reach misses, the "read-ahead stage" will be displayed. ” to return to the previous stage). Note that, as described above, the SP reach is configured as a battle performance (battle reach performance) in which an ally character competes against an enemy character, for example. SP Reach A is a battle performance where you play against enemy character A (10% jackpot expectation), SP Reach B is a battle performance where you play against enemy character B (jackpot expectation 20%), and SP Reach C is a battle performance where you play against enemy character B (jackpot expectation 20%). It is a battle production where you compete against C (jackpot expectation rate 60%), and multiple production routes 1 to 3 are set as production routes for this SP reach fluctuation display, and each production route has a different production. The result of the variable display (win or loss of battle performance) is derived through the process, and production route 1 is a "jackpot" route where the result of SP reach (battle production) is a victory, and production route 2 is SP reach (battle production). (battle production) is a "miss" route where the result is a defeat, and production route 3 is a "jackpot" route where the result of SP reach (battle production) is once made to look like a defeat and then comes back and wins. be. These SP Reach A to C are executed on the normal production stage, but in the time-saving production mode, SP Reach D (Jackpot expectation 15%) and SP Reach E (Jackpot expectation 50%) have the same production mode (enemy It is a battle production in which you compete against a character, and is executed in a production mode in which production routes 1 to 3 are set.In the variable production mode, SP reach F (jackpot expectation 40%), SP reach G (jackpot expectation 70%) ) is executed in a similar presentation mode (a battle presentation in which you fight against an enemy character, and a presentation mode in which presentation routes 1 to 3 are set).

In this normal production mode, multiple types of stage background images (normal background images) that differ depending on the type of production stage are set, and a stage background image ("normal background image A") that is displayed corresponding to stage A is set. ), a stage background image displayed corresponding to stage B (referred to as "normal background image B"), and a stage background image displayed corresponding to stage C (referred to as "normal background image C"). There is a stage background image (referred to as "normal background image D") that is displayed corresponding to the prefetch stage.

In addition, in the normal production mode, multiple types of stage BGM (normal BGM) that differ depending on the type of production stage are set, and the stage BGM output corresponding to stage A (referred to as "normal BGM-A") ), stage BGM output corresponding to stage B (usually BGM-B), stage BGM output corresponding to stage C (usually BGM-C), and stage BGM output corresponding to the look-ahead stage. There is a stage BGM (usually BGM-D). The normal BGM-A to D are output in synchronization or harmony with the normal background images A to D during the normal presentation mode.

Stage A of the normal production mode is the default production that is initially set (initial display) when the power is restored from the power outage if a power outage occurs during the stay in the normal production mode (any production stage). It is structured as a stage. Therefore, the normal background image A set corresponding to stage A is the default background image A in the normal production mode (low base state) that is set first when the power is restored in the normal production mode (any production stage). This becomes the stage background image (normal background image). Further, this normal background image A is also a stage background image that is played first when the production mode shifts to the normal production mode (when the gaming state shifts to the low base state). Similarly, the normal BGM-A set corresponding to stage A is the default in normal production mode (low base state) that is set first when the power is restored in normal production mode (any production stage). This is the stage BGM (normal BGM). Further, this normal BGM-A is also the stage BGM that is played first when the production mode shifts to the normal production mode (when the gaming state shifts to the low base state). In addition, in any gaming state (low base state/high base state), if the power is restored in RAM clear mode, the normal background image A is set first (displayed) as the stage background image when the power is restored. ), and stage BGM-A is first set (output) as the BGM when the power is restored. In this embodiment, the normal background image A, which is the default stage background image in the normal production mode (low base state), is the "first stage background image" and the default stage BGM in the normal production mode (low base state). The normal BGM-A is sometimes referred to as "first stage BGM." As a modified example, in a low base state that transitions when the high base state ends (including a low base state that transitions after the end of a special game executed during the high base state), the low base state that transitions to immediately after the low base transition (for example, 10 variations) may shift to stage C instead of stage A, or may shift to a special stage such as stage D, which is a new stage (a special stage where stage BGM-D is output).

In addition, in this normal production mode, no matter which production stage you are staying in, if the fluctuating display being executed is normal variation (non-reach variation), from the start to the end of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols ( Until the final stop), a normal background image of a type corresponding to the performance stage is continuously displayed, and normal BGM of a type corresponding to the performance stage is continuously output.

Here, when the production stage currently being stayed is stage A, the relevant fluctuation display is a normal fluctuation that is off (non-reach is off), and the next fluctuation display is also a normal fluctuation that is off (non-reach is off). In some cases, at the end of the relevant fluctuating display (determined stop), the normal background image A being displayed and the normal BGM-A being output are seamlessly (without being interrupted) and spanned over the next fluctuating display. displayed or output continuously. In other words, if there are multiple out-of-reach normal fluctuations (non-reach out-of-reach), the normal background image A is continuously displayed without interruption across the multiple normal fluctuations, and the normal BGM- A will be output continuously without interruption.

If the production stage you are currently staying at is stage B, stage C, or a look-ahead stage, the relevant variation display is a normal variation that is off (non-reach), and the next variation display is also a normal variation that is off (non-reach). Even if the variable display ends (determined stop), the normal background images B to D being displayed and the normal BGM-B to D being output are interrupted (completed), When the next variable display starts, the normal background images B to D will be displayed again from the beginning (the beginning of the video), and the normal stage BGM-B to D will be displayed again from the beginning (the beginning of the song). It will be output.

In addition, in the normal production mode, even if the production stage you are currently staying at is stage A, stage B, stage C, or pre-reading stage, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous production while the variable display is being executed. Even if you are staying on the stage, at the time of a temporary stop in a pseudo-continuous performance (a predetermined pseudo-continuous pattern (for example, a symbol with the letters "NEXT") as a medium pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner near the predetermined temporary stop position, When a temporary stop is displayed), the stage BGM is not output (interrupted), and the stage BGM starts from the beginning when the re-variation is displayed, or it switches to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-variation is displayed. It looks like this.

<Time-saving production mode> When the production mode is the time-saving production mode (when the gaming state is a low probability high base state), the stage background image corresponding to the time-saving production mode (referred to as the "time-saving background image") is At the same time as being displayed on the screen, stage BGM corresponding to the time-saving production mode (referred to as "time-saving BGM") is output from the speaker. The time-saving background image becomes a default stage background image set corresponding to the time-saving production mode, that is, a background image (stage background image) that is set first when the power is restored in the time-saving production mode. Further, this time-saving background image is also a stage background image that is first displayed when the production mode shifts to the time-saving production mode (when the gaming state shifts to the low probability high base state). Similarly, the time-saving BGM is stage BGM that is set corresponding to the time-saving production mode, that is, the BGM that is first set when the power is restored in the time-saving production mode (stage BGM). In addition, this time-saving BGM is the music that is played first when the production mode shifts to the time-saving production mode (when the gaming state shifts to the low probability high base state), or the music that is played first when the production mode shifts to the time-saving production mode. This is also the BGM that is automatically played when the stage BGM has not been set by the player's operation before (before the gaming state shifts to the low probability high base state). This time-saving BGM is output in synchronization with or in harmony with the time-saving background image during the time-saving production mode.

In this time-saving production mode, if the variable display being executed is normal variation (non-reach variation), the time-saving background image continues from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end (determined stop). is displayed, and the time-saving BGM is continuously output. In addition, in this time-saving production mode, additional stage BGM is set that will be released depending on the progress of the game, as will be described in detail later, and the stage BGM currently being output (time-saving BGM) can be changed to another stage BGM. It is possible. That is, the time-saving production mode is a production mode in which stage BGM can be selected. In addition, in the time-saving effect mode, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed while the variable display is being executed.

In addition, when the current production mode is the time-saving production mode, if the relevant variation display is a normal variation with an error (non-reaching error), and the next variation display is also a normal variation with an error (non-reaching error). When the variable display ends (determined stop), the time-saving background image being displayed and the time-saving BGM being output are continuously displayed across the next variable display without interruption (without being interrupted). or output. In other words, if multiple out-of-reach normal fluctuations (non-reach out-of-reach) occur consecutively, the time-saving background image will continue to be displayed without interruption across these multiple normal fluctuations, and the time-saving BGM will be interrupted. It will continue to be output without interruption. <Definitely variable production mode>

When the production mode is a variable probability production mode (when the gaming state is a high probability high base state), a stage background image (referred to as a "probability variation background image") corresponding to the probability variation production mode is displayed on the screen. At the same time, stage BGM (referred to as "probability variation BGM") corresponding to the probability variation production mode is output from the speaker. The variable probability background image becomes a default stage background image set corresponding to the variable probability production mode, that is, the background image (stage background image) that is set first when the power is restored in the variable probability production mode. Further, this probability variable background image is also a stage background image that is first displayed when the production mode shifts to the probability variation production mode (when the gaming state shifts to the high probability high base state). Similarly, the variable probability BGM is the stage BGM set corresponding to the variable probability production mode, that is, the BGM (stage BGM) that is set first when the power is restored in the variable probability production mode. In addition, this variable BGM is the music that is played first when the production mode shifts to the variable production mode (when the gaming state shifts to the high probability high base state), or when the production mode shifts to the variable production mode. This is also the BGM that is automatically played when the stage BGM has not been set by the player's operation before (before the gaming state shifts to the high-probability, high-base skill state). This variable BGM is output in synchronization with or in harmony with the variable background image during the variable performance mode.

In this fixed variable production mode, if the variable display being executed is normal variation (non-reach variation), the fixed variable background image will continue from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end (determined stop). is displayed, and the probability-variable BGM is continuously output. In addition, in this variable performance mode, as will be described in detail later, additional stage BGM is set that will be released depending on the progress of the game, and the stage BGM currently being output (probable variable BGM) can be changed to another stage BGM. It is possible. In other words, the variable performance mode is a performance mode in which stage BGM can be selected. In addition, in the probability variable effect mode, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed while the variable display is being executed.

In addition, when the current production mode is the variable probability production mode, if the fluctuation display is a normal fluctuation with a miss (non-reach is a miss), and the next fluctuation display is also a normal fluctuation with a miss (a non-reach is a miss). When the variable display ends (determined stop), the variable background image being displayed and the variable BGM being output are continuously displayed over the next variable display without interruption (without being interrupted). or output. In other words, if there are multiple out-of-reach normal fluctuations (non-reaching out-of-reach), the probability-variable background image will continue to be displayed without interruption, and the probability-variable BGM will be interrupted. It will continue to be output without interruption.

In addition, in this embodiment, the default stage background image displayed in the high base state is the default stage background image (time saving background image) displayed in the low probability high base state (time saving production mode), and the high probability high The default stage background image (probable variable background image) that is displayed in the base state (probable variable production mode) is set, but below, if there is no need to distinguish between the two (time-saving background image and variable variable background image), The default stage background image displayed in this high base state is also collectively referred to as a "second stage background image." Similarly, in this embodiment, the default stage BGM output in the high base state is the default stage BGM (time saving BGM) output in the low probability high base state (time saving production mode), and the default stage BGM output in the high probability high base state (time saving BGM). The default stage BGM (probable variable BGM) output in (probable variable production mode) is set, but below, if there is no need to distinguish between the two (probable variable BGM and time-saving BGM), this high base state The default stage BGM outputted in is also collectively referred to as "second stage BGM."

<Reach background image/Reach BGM> In this embodiment, in each production mode (production stage), if the variable display being executed is SP reach variation, it develops into SP reach from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. (until reach is established and develops to SP reach), the stage background image corresponding to the current production mode (production stage) will be continuously displayed, and the stage background image will continue to be displayed depending on the current production mode (production stage). The stage BGM that has been played is continuously output. If SP reach develops during execution of this variable display, the background image being displayed will switch from the stage background image to a background image dedicated to SP reach (referred to as the "reach background image"), and the The BGM switches from the stage BGM to the SP Reach exclusive BGM (referred to as "Reach BGM"). This reach background image and reach BGM are set according to the type of SP reach performance in each production mode (performance stage), and if the type of SP reach performance is different, the reach background image and reach BGM will also be different. . If the SP reach effect ends in the variable display, the displayed background image changes from the reach background image to the original stage background image (displayed before it develops into SP reach) at the end of this SP reach effect or immediately after the end. The previous stage background image) will be restored. In addition, if the reach background image returns to the original stage background image in the fluctuating display, even if the stage background image is displayed until the next fluctuating display starts, the corresponding stage BGM is not output, nor is reach BGM. That is, until the next variable display starts, a silent state or a specific BGM different from the stage BGM and reach BGM is output. In addition, if the SP reach variation ends with a "miss", at the start of the next variation display, the stage background image corresponding to the current production mode (production stage) will be displayed from the beginning (the beginning of the video), and , the stage BGM corresponding to the current production mode (production stage) will be output from the beginning (the beginning of the song). In other words, if the current production mode (production stage) is stage A of the normal production mode, time-saving production mode, or fixed variable production mode, as described above, the non-reach variable display ends with "miss" (determined stop). However, even in these production modes and production stages, the stage BGM will continue to be output without interruption (without ending) for the next variable display, but even in these production modes and production stages, if the SP reach is If the result is "off", the stage BGM will be interrupted before the relevant variable display ends (determined stop), and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next variable display starts. be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation display is SP reach fluctuation, it is configured to return to the original stage background image at or after the end of SP reach, but the fluctuation display is In the case of a reach variation, the reach background image may be continuously displayed until the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and the arrangement may be such that the reach background image does not return to the original stage background image. However, if the fluctuation display is a missed SP reach fluctuation, the original stage background image will be restored before the decorative pattern is fixed and displayed. It is preferable that the original stage background image is restored from the ready-to-reach background image during the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern or immediately before the temporary stop display.

In addition, as a modified example, if the variable display being executed is SP reach variation, the stage background image according to the current production mode (production stage) is displayed from the start of the variation display of decorative symbols until the reach is established. At the same time, the stage BGM corresponding to the current production mode (production stage) is output. This is a reach effect in which the reach state continues for a predetermined period of time, and it is a reach effect that has the possibility of developing into SP reach after that. (As mentioned above, it is also referred to as normal reach) A dedicated reach background image is displayed, and a dedicated reach background image is displayed. Reach BGM will be output, and from the time SP Reach develops (until it returns to the original stage background image), the Reach background image dedicated to SP Reach will be displayed, and the Reach BGM dedicated to SP Reach will be output. It may be configured as follows. In addition, during N reach and SP reach, all small symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) continue to fluctuate (that is, do not form a reach state).

<BGM selection performance> Next, the BGM selection performance performed in the high base state (advantageous gaming state) will be explained. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram showing a display screen for BGM selection effect.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a BGM selection performance that allows the player to select the stage BGM that is output during execution of the high base state by operation by the player (operation of the performance button P15 and cross key P16). Therefore, while the high base state is being executed, the default stage BGM (second stage BGM) output in the high base state can be changed to another stage BGM (third stage BGM).

The BGM selection effect is executed during a predetermined period (referred to as "BGM selectable period") while staying in the high base state. This BGM selectable period includes the period (including the pattern fixed period) during normal fluctuations (non-reach fluctuations whose fluctuation time is longer than a predetermined time) during the stay in the high base state, and fluctuations in reach fluctuations. This includes the predetermined period from the start to the establishment of reach. In addition, shortened fluctuations whose fluctuation time is shorter than normal fluctuations (non-reach fluctuations whose fluctuation time is less than a predetermined time) are excluded from the BGM selectable period because the time range for selecting BGM cannot be secured. Even if it is a shortened variation, it can be used as a BGM selectable period. This is because the BGM can be selected over the new fluctuations that occur, so even if it is a shortened fluctuation, if subsequent fluctuations are included, a sufficient BGM selectable period is ensured). In addition, in the period after the reach is established, when the reach develops into an SP reach, BGM set exclusively for the SP reach (reach BGM synchronized or harmonized with the reach background image, also referred to as SP reach BGM) is output. It turns out. During this period, BGM cannot be selected as described above. In addition, as a modification, the BGM selection effect may be executed using execution of a specific variable display in the high base state as a trigger. The specific variable display may be at the start of the variable display when a predetermined look-ahead effect is started, or in the middle of the variable display, or a transition to the low base state at the end of the 100 revolutions variable display in the high base state, for example. An example of this is when the fluctuating display starts at the 91st spin (provided that no jackpot is won during the 100 spins). As a further modification, it may be possible to perform the BGM selection performance other than such a specific variable display in the high base state (to be precise, other than during SP reach development in a variable display other than the specific variable display). The symbol fixation period (design fixation time) is also called the fixed stop period (fixed stop time), and is the period after the variable display of the special or decorative pattern ends and the next one after the special or decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. This is the period during which the status of the confirmed suspension is maintained until the fluctuation starts. By having this symbol fixing period (design fixing time), the player can recognize that the special symbol or decorative symbol is fixed and stopped (in other words, it is not changing), and The boundaries between can be clearly understood. In addition, the symbol fixation period (symbol fixation time) is 0.5 in any variable display (both non-reach variation and reach variation of the first special symbol, and non-reach variation and reach variation of the second special symbol variable display). Seconds. As a modified example, the symbol fixing period (symbol fixing time) of the first special symbol in the low base state is 0.5 seconds, and the symbol fixing period (symbol fixing time) of the second special symbol in the high base state is 0. .3 seconds may be sufficient. In the following, when the term "design fixing time (design fixing period)" is used, unless otherwise specified, the term "design fixing time (design fixing period)" refers to the symbol fixing time (design fixing period) for special designs and the symbol fixing time (design fixing period) for decorative designs. period).

In this BGM selection performance, stage BGM (songs) that can be selected by the player are additionally released. In other words, when a BGM selection effect occurs in a high base state, a different type of stage BGM (third stage BGM) from the default stage BGM (second stage BGM) is added as a stage BGM that the player can select. . Therefore, while the BGM selection performance is being performed, the type of BGM being output can be changed from the second stage BGM to the third stage BGM by a selection operation by the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of types of third stage BGM that are additionally released increases each time a predetermined condition is satisfied in the high base state. For example, the number of types of 3rd stage BGM that can be selected by the player is increased according to the number of consecutive games, so that the range of third stage BGM selections increases each time the player plays consecutive games. It's okay. "Successive games" means that when a predetermined jackpot is won in a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state continues again as a gaming state after the end of the special game. Here, the specific game state is a state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than the normal game state, and the special symbol probability variation function, special symbol variation time shortening function, and electric chew support function are used. A state in which at least one function is activated. Further, as another example, when a predetermined jackpot is won in a high base state, the types of third stage BGM that can be selected by the player may be increased. The "predetermined jackpot" includes, for example, the most advantageous jackpot that is the most advantageous for the player among the plurality of jackpot types set in this gaming machine, and the jackpot (specific Jackpot) etc. will be applied. Note that this third stage BGM may be already selectable before playing consecutive games. In other words, if you hit the jackpot in the low probability low base state and then move to the low probability high base state or the high probability low base state, at that point you will not only have the second stage BGM but also the third stage BGM of multiple types (for example, Two types of music 2 and 3, which will be described later, may be selectable. In addition to this, all types of third stage BGM may be already selectable before playing consecutive games.

In the BGM selection effect, as shown in FIG. 174, an image showing the song names of multiple types of third stage BGM as BGM options is displayed on the screen, and a cross key switch 16 (up and down key P16a for selecting BGM) is displayed on the screen. , 16b) and an image of the effect button P15 for determining the selected BGM are displayed (these are also referred to as images related to the BGM selection effect). In the illustrated example, 3rd stage BGM-A (song 2), 3rd stage BGM-B (song 3), and 3rd stage BGM-C (song 4) are set as multiple types of 3rd stage BGM. has been done. That is, in FIG. 173, from the top, the default second stage BGM song name "Song 1" that has been output until now, and three types of third stage BGM song names indicating candidates as new options ( The song name "Song 2" of the third stage BGM-A, the song name "Song 3" of the third stage BGM-B, and the song name "Song 4" of the third stage BGM-C are displayed. These additionally opened third stage BGM-A to C are each composed of different songs. Then, in this way, the desired stage BGM can be selected in accordance with the operation of the up and down keys, and the selected stage BGM can be confirmed by the operation of the production button P15. In addition, as a modification, the operation of the production button P15 may not be required, and the determination may be made only by operation of the above-mentioned keys. In other words, the process may be completed by simply aligning the desired song name with the cursor location marked with the right arrow by operating the up and down keys. The illustrated example shows a state in which the third stage BGM-A is selected from among a plurality of types of stage BGM. This third stage BGM-A is a song with a slower tempo than the first stage BGM-A. Furthermore, the second stage BGM is a song with a faster tempo than the first stage BGM-A. As a modified example, the third stage BGM-A may be a song with a tempo faster than the first stage BGM-A and slower than the second stage BGM, or may be a song with a faster tempo than the second stage BGM. It's good to be there. In addition, as a modification, the third stage BGM-B to C may similarly be songs with a slower tempo than the first stage BGM-A, or faster and faster than the first stage BGM-A. The music may have a slower tempo than the second stage BGM or a faster tempo than the second stage BGM. Although not shown, decorative symbols and small symbols can be displayed in a variable manner even during execution of the BGM selection performance, and are displayed simultaneously with images related to the BGM selection performance. Note that the image related to the BGM selection effect and the decorative pattern are displayed superimposed, but the image related to the BGM selection effect is displayed in the front (it is a higher layer), while the image related to the BGM selection effect and the small It is not displayed superimposed on the design.

<Comparison of stage BGM music tempos> Next, the stage BGM music tempos (hereinafter simply referred to as "tempo") will be described. Note that the tempo of BGM is the speed (performance speed) of audio output as BGM (it also specifies the speed of one beat of the music).

In this embodiment, the first stage BGM (usually BGM-A), which is the default stage BGM in the low bass state, is output at a relatively slow tempo, but the second stage BGM, which is the default stage BGM in the high bass state, is output at a relatively slow tempo. Stage BGM (time-saving BGM and/or variable BGM) is output at a relatively fast tempo. That is, the tempo of the normal BGM-A is set to a slower tempo than the tempo of the time-saving BGM and/or the variable BGM. As an example, the normal BGM-A is set to a tempo that is slower than a predetermined standard tempo (low-speed tempo), and the time-saving BGM and/or variable BGM is set to a tempo that is faster than the standard tempo (high-speed tempo). On the other hand, the tempo of the normal BGM-B, BGM-C, and BGM-D is set to a faster tempo (ultra-high-speed tempo) than the tempo of the time-saving BGM and/or the variable BGM. In other words, the default BGM in the high base state (time-saving BGM and/or variable BGM) has a relatively faster tempo (up tempo) than the tempo of the default stage BGM (normal BGM-A) in the low base state. This can further enhance the player's sense of exhilaration when the game shifts from a low base state (non-advantageous gaming state) to a high base state (advantageous gaming state). In addition, the other stage BGMs (normal BGM-B to D) have a relatively faster tempo than the default stage BGM (normal BGM-A, time-saving BGM, variable BGM), so the low base state ( Even if the player is staying in a non-advantageous gaming state, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of switching production stages, and prevent the stage production from becoming stale in this low base state (non-advantageous gaming state). It becomes possible to do so.

As a modification, the tempo (low tempo) of normal BGM-A, BGM-B, BGM-C, and BGM-D is set to a slower tempo than the tempo (high tempo) of time-saving BGM and/or variable BGM. Good too. In other words, by setting the overall first stage BGM output in the low base state to a slower tempo than the second stage BGM output in the high base state, the fluctuation efficiency of each game state (in the low base state It is possible to develop BGM that is adapted to the situation in which the fluctuation efficiency is relatively low and the fluctuation efficiency is relatively high in the high base state.

In addition, as a modified example, the tempo (low tempo) of the normal stage BGM-A, BGM-B, and BGM-C is set to a slower tempo than the tempo (high tempo) of the second stage BGM, and the tempo of the normal BGM-D is set to a slower tempo than the tempo (high tempo) of the second stage BGM. (Ultra high-speed tempo) may be set to a faster tempo than the tempo (high-speed tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or the variable BGM. That is, the normal BGM-D output at the pre-reading stage has the fastest tempo, so that the pre-reading stage develops the BGM with the most sense of speed, making it possible to enhance the performance effect of the pre-reading performance. In addition, if the configuration is such that the re-change display switches to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-change display, the specific BGM will also be changed to normal stage BGM-A, BGM-B, BGM- The tempo may be faster than the tempo of C (slow tempo). Furthermore, the specific BGM may have a faster tempo (or a slower tempo as a further modification) than the tempo (high-speed tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or the variable-rate BGM. Regarding SP Reach BGM, the tempo may be changed between the first half period, middle period, and second half period of SP Reach. If configured in such a way, the SP Reach BGM for the first half period of SP Reach will be the normal stage BGM- The tempo is slower than the tempo (slow tempo) of A, BGM-B, and BGM-C, and the SP reach BGM during the middle period of SP reach is the tempo (slow tempo) of normal stage BGM-A, BGM-B, and BGM-C. The tempo may be faster than that of the SP reach BGM in the latter half of the SP reach period, and the tempo may be slower than the tempo (low speed tempo) of the normal stage BGM-A, BGM-B, and BGM-C. Furthermore, the SP Reach BGM in the first half of the SP Reach period is the tempo of the time-saving BGM and/or the variable BGM (
The SP reach BGM in the middle period of the SP reach has a tempo that is faster than the tempo (fast tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or variable BGM (as a further variation, the tempo is slower), The SP reach BGM in the latter half of the reach period may have a slower tempo than the tempo (high-speed tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or the variable probability BGM.

Furthermore, as a modified example, the tempo (low tempo) of normal stage BGM-A and BGM-B is set to a slower tempo than the tempo (fast tempo) of time-saving BGM and/or variable BGM, and normal stage BGM-C, BGM- The tempo of D (super high-speed tempo) may be set to a faster tempo than the tempo (high-speed tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or the variable BGM.

In addition, as a modified example, the tempo (low tempo) of normal stage BGM-A and BGM-D is set to a slower tempo than the tempo (fast tempo) of time-saving BGM and/or variable BGM, and normal stage BGM-B and BGM- The tempo of C (ultra high-speed tempo) may be set to a faster tempo than the tempo (high-speed tempo) of the time-saving BGM and/or the variable BGM.

[Image action effect] Next, the image action effect of the seventh embodiment will be described. The image action effects include a standby action effect (also referred to as the "first effect") that is executed while the variable display is not being executed (fluctuation standby), and a fluctuating motion effect (also called the "first effect") that is executed while the variable display is being executed. (also referred to as the second performance). The standby action performance (first performance) is configured as a performance in which a second image placed behind the first image is caused to perform a first action while the first image is in a still state. The fluctuating motion performance (second performance) is configured as a performance that causes a second image placed behind the first image to perform a second movement while the first image is in motion. In this embodiment, as the two images (first image, second image) that are the targets of motion display in image motion production, a decorative pattern is applied to the first image, and a background image (stage background) is applied to the second image. image). As will be described in detail later, as the two images (first image, second image) that are the targets of action display in image action production, a number pattern (number image) as a decorative pattern is applied to the first image, and a number pattern (number image) as a decorative pattern is applied to the first image. A character pattern (character image) as a decorative pattern may be applied to the two images.

[Waiting Action Performance] First, the waiting action performance (first performance) of this embodiment will be explained. The standby action performance is a performance that causes the stage background image to make a first action (first action display) while the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (still display). This standby action performance is executed during a period in which special symbols, decorative symbols, etc. are stopped and displayed, that is, during a variable standby period (a period during which the player stays in the above-mentioned variable standby state). As mentioned above, the "fluctuating standby state" is a state in which none of the first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol, and small symbol are being fluctuated and displayed, and Neither the operation pending ball of the first special symbol nor the operation pending ball of the second special symbol is stored.

Here, FIG. 175 is a schematic diagram for explaining the variable standby period. This variable waiting period includes a first waiting period and a second waiting period. The end condition of the variable standby period (referred to as the "standby end condition") is that the game ball enters the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52 and the variable display of the special symbol starts. It is. In other words, the end condition (standby end condition) of this fluctuation standby period is that the special symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied. When the variable standby period is entered, the variable standby period continues until the standby end condition is satisfied, and the variable standby period ends when the standby end condition is satisfied. In addition, the variable standby period does not end even if a game ball enters the operating gate P53 or the general winning holes P61 to P64. Further, as a standby end condition, it may be added that the player has touched the firing handle P12 (that the firing handle P12 has been operated), that is, that the player's contact with the firing handle P12 has been detected by the touch sensor.

The first standby period starts when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a fixed stop time (fixed stop period) has elapsed. That is, when the fixed stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first standby period (variable standby period) is started when the number of balls on hold for the special symbol is not stored. In addition, below, the determined stop time (determined stop period) of a special symbol or decorative symbol may be referred to as "design fixed time (design fixed period)." While staying in the first standby period, the above-described standby action effect (first effect) is executed. In this embodiment, the first standby period is set to, for example, "60 seconds" (a timer counts 60 seconds after the start of the first standby period and ends when 60 seconds have elapsed). It is possible to perform standby motion effects using the time scale. This standby motion performance will be described in detail later, but is executed in such a manner that the performance display that was displayed immediately before the start of the variable standby period, that is, when the fixed stop time (symbol fixation time) has elapsed, is continued. In other words, in this first standby period, the stop display of decorative symbols and the stop display of small symbols that were displayed at the immediately preceding fixed stop time (symbol fixed time) are maintained, and the stopped display of the small symbols that were displayed at the immediately preceding fixed stop time (symbol The playback display (loop display) of the stage background image that was displayed for a fixed time is maintained. Then, if the next variable display is not started during the first waiting period (the standby end condition is not satisfied during the first waiting period) and the first waiting period ends, the execution The standby action performance is interrupted (ended), and a second standby period (standby demonstration performance) is started. Therefore, it can be said that this first waiting period is a waiting period until the standby demonstration effect is executed. In addition, as a modification, the first standby period may start at the same time when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the fixed stop time (determined stop period) starts. That is, the first standby period (fluctuating standby period) may be started when the special symbol's operation pending ball count is not stored at the start of the special symbol's fixed stop time.

The second standby period is a period from the end of the first standby period until a specific time has elapsed. While staying in this second waiting period, the decorative patterns and stage background image that were displayed in the immediately preceding first waiting period are not displayed, and a waiting demonstration performance (standby demonstration screen) is performed as a customer waiting performance. In this embodiment, the second waiting period is set to, for example, "30 seconds" (a timer counts 30 seconds from the start of the second waiting period and ends when 60 seconds have elapsed). A standby demonstration performance can be performed using the time scale. In this standby demonstration performance, for example, a demonstration movie for explaining and introducing the gaming machine is played as a performance that can identify the variable standby state. Incidentally, while staying in this second standby period, that is, while the standby demonstration performance is being executed, the stop display of the small symbols is continuously executed. Then, if the next variable display is not started during the stay in the second standby period (the standby end condition is not satisfied during the stay in the second standby period) and the second standby period ends, the first variable display will be displayed again. Shifting to the standby period, the standby action effect is executed again. That is, in the present embodiment, when the transition to the fluctuation standby period (fluctuation standby state) occurs, the first waiting period → the second waiting period continues until the waiting end condition is satisfied (until the next fluctuation starts). →First standby period→Second standby period→... are repeatedly executed in this order. Note that volume adjustment is possible during both the first standby period and the second standby period, but even if the volume adjustment operation is performed during either the first standby period or the second standby period, the first standby period The timer timing of the standby performance and the second standby performance is not interrupted. In other words, the volume adjustment operation does not become a standby termination condition. Therefore, when the volume adjustment operation is performed, the volume adjustment image is displayed in front of the first standby effect and the second standby effect (in the upper layer).

As described above, the standby action effect is executed during the first standby period of the variable standby period. More specifically, this standby action effect is executed every time the first standby period arrives in the variable standby state. Here, the decorative pattern displayed in the standby motion performance remains the same as the decorative pattern that was fixed and stopped in the most recent variable display. In other words, the same decorative pattern that was fixed and displayed at the end of the most recent variable display will continue to be displayed in a stationary state during the standby motion performance. Therefore, even if the first standby period (standby action performance) is executed multiple times between the start and end of the variable standby period, the display will be displayed in these multiple standby action performances. The decorative pattern that is displayed (stopped) is the same as the decorative pattern that was fixed and displayed at the end of the most recent variable display.

In this standby motion production, as shown in FIG. 175, there are a first display mode and a second display mode as display modes during the stop display of the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the display mode in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state becomes the first display mode until a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the first standby period has started, and the first standby period has started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the display mode of the decorative pattern while it is being displayed changes from the first display mode to the second display mode (after the elapse of the predetermined time, the display mode of the decorative pattern being displayed while it is being stopped changes from the first display mode to the second display mode). mode becomes the second display mode). In addition, if the first standby period occurs multiple times within one variable standby period, the decorative pattern will stop only during the first first standby period (the first standby period that comes after the fixed stop period has elapsed). The display mode switches from the first display mode to the second display mode when the predetermined time elapses, and in the second and subsequent first standby periods (first standby periods that arrive after the second standby period has elapsed) The stop display mode of the symbols is the second display mode from the beginning to the end (the first display mode is not displayed). In addition, during the first standby period, the period during which the display mode of the decorative pattern is in the first display mode is the "first standby period A", and the period in which the display mode of the decorative pattern while the stationary display is the second display mode is the "first standby period A". This period may be referred to as the "first waiting period B." Therefore, when the first waiting period occurs multiple times within one variable waiting period, the first first waiting period consists of the first waiting period A and the second waiting period B, and the second waiting period It can be said that the subsequent first standby period consists of only the first standby period B. Therefore, the standby action performance performed during the stay in the first standby period A is called the "standby action performance A", and the standby action performance performed during the stay in the first standby period B is referred to as the "standby action performance B". It can also be differentiated.

The first display mode is the same display mode as the stationary display mode of the decorative pattern when the final decorative pattern is fixedly displayed in the latest variable display. In other words, as described above, this first display mode maintains the display mode of the decorative symbols that were fixed and stopped displayed at the end of the most recent variable display. Specifically, this first display mode is a display mode in which the display color of the number pattern becomes the basic display color when the number pattern is stopped (stationary) and the character pattern is stopped (stationary). be. That is, in this first display mode, the entire decorative pattern is stopped (static), and the numerical patterns "2", "4", "6", and "8" are displayed in blue, and the numbers "1" and "8" are displayed in blue. The numeric symbols "3", "5", and "9" are displayed in green, and the numeric symbol "7" is displayed in red.

The second display mode is a display mode that differs from the first display mode only in the display color of the numerical symbols. In other words, in the pattern change production, when changing the stop display mode of the decorative pattern from the first display mode to the second display mode, among the constituent elements of the decorative pattern, without changing the display mode of the character pattern, the number pattern is Only the display color changes (the numbers themselves in the number pattern do not change). Specifically, similar to the first display mode, in this second display mode, the display color of the number symbol is changed while the number symbol is stopped (still) and the character symbol is stopped (still). This is a display mode in which the display color is different from the basic display color (the display color of the first display mode). That is, in this second display mode, when the decorative pattern is stopped (stationary), a striped pattern (striped pattern) combining two or more different colors is displayed for any number pattern from "1" to "9". This is the display mode. Therefore, in the numeric symbols in the second display mode, the color of at least a part of the area (or all the areas) of the numeric symbols in the first display mode is changed to another color. In addition, in FIG. 175, in order to make the numeric symbols clear, the numeric symbols in the second display mode are shown filled in with black.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, the second display mode of the decorative pattern during stop display may be a display mode in which the character pattern constituting the decorative pattern swings (for example, the vertical swing is changed to 2). (may be executed every second). Even in that case, if the entire decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, that is, if the positional coordinates of the entire decorative pattern (positional coordinates relative to the entire screen) do not move, this decorative pattern (character pattern) remains stationary. It can be said that it is continuing. As other variations, the second display mode of the decorative pattern during stop display may be to erase the number pattern and display only the character pattern, or the character pattern may change its expression every two seconds, such as laughing or getting angry. Alternatively, the character may be made to light up every 2 seconds.

In addition, in the standby motion performance, the first motion of the stage background image is executed in conjunction with the stop display of the decorative pattern in the first display mode or the second display mode. The first motion of the stage background image is configured as a motion display in which the stage background image is looped (loop playback). The stage background image displayed in this standby action performance is a stage background image that is set corresponding to the performance mode (performance stage) in which the player is currently staying. In other words, the stage background image displayed during this standby action performance is the one that maintains the background image (stage background image) that was displayed during the fixed stop period immediately before transitioning to the variable standby state, and is the most recent one. The stage background image that was displayed at the end of the variable display of decorative symbols continues to be displayed in motion (loop motion) even in the standby motion performance. Therefore, this standby action performance continues the performance mode (stop display of decorative symbols and loop display of background image) that was displayed immediately before the first standby period started (the most recent decorative symbol fixed stop period). It can be said that this is a well-crafted performance.

The stage background images (normal background image, time-saving background image, variable probability background image) of this embodiment are composed of moving images (moving image data) in which continuous motion is recorded from the first image to the final image. Then, by repeatedly reproducing the moving image as the stage background image, an action effect is performed in which the stage background image repeats a predetermined action display (loop display). Therefore, this stage background image becomes a background image in which the same image is repeatedly displayed at fixed time intervals, although it changes with the passage of time. Note that this loop display of the stage background image does not need to be composed entirely of dynamic images, and a portion of this loop display may include a static image (still image).

In addition, in this embodiment, during the stay in the first standby period (during the execution of the standby action effect), the standby end condition or the special symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied (a new special symbol operation pending ball is generated). ), when starting the variable display of a new special symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol will continue while the loop display of the stage background image that was being displayed during the first standby period continues (without interruption). Start displaying. In other words, if a new fluctuating display is started while the standby motion performance is being executed, the fluctuating display of decorative symbols will start without interrupting the loop display of the stage background image at the end of the standby motion performance. A loop display of the stage background image is continuously performed before and after (straddling the end of the first standby period and the start of a new variable display). Thereby, the stage background images can be seamlessly connected before and after the start of a new variable display, and a new game can be started without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this embodiment, the standby motion performance is configured to be executed from the start of the first standby period (after the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern has elapsed), but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Instead, as described above, the standby motion performance may be configured to be executed from the start of the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern (at the fixed stop immediately after the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern ends). That is, as mentioned above, the display mode of the decorative symbols during the fixed stop display and the display mode of the decorative symbols at the start of the first standby period are substantially the same display mode, so at the start of this standby motion performance. Even if it is set at the start of the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern (at the time of the fixed stop immediately after the end of the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern), no contradiction will occur.

[Fluctuating motion performance] Next, the fluctuating motion performance (second performance) of the present embodiment will be described. The fluctuating motion performance is a performance in which the stage background image is caused to perform a second motion (second motion display) while the decorative pattern is being fluctuated (motion display). In this embodiment, the stage background image that is the target of the second operation is the same background image as the stage background image that is the target of the first operation described above. That is, the movement performance during fluctuation is performed by causing the stage background image that has been displayed before or since the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to perform a second movement during the fluctuation display. This movement performance during fluctuation is executed during at least a part of the period during which the stage background image is displayed, from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation. Therefore, the second operation of this stage background image is the period during which the stage background image is displayed during the fluctuating display, from the start of the fluctuating display until it develops into SP reach (when the reach background image (the period until the changeover), or the period from the end of SP Reach until the end of the relevant variable display (the period during which the stage background image that returned after the end of SP Reach is displayed). There is.

In this embodiment, the second operation of the background image is configured as an operation in which the stage background image is vibrated up and down (vibration display). That is, in the fluctuating motion performance, a motion performance in which the stage background image being displayed in a loop is vibrated up and down (a motion performance in which the stage background image is vibrated up and down while being looped) is performed. In addition, as a modification, the second operation of the background image may be configured as an operation of changing the stage background image being displayed to another background image (changing operation). That is, the changing motion performance may be configured as a background change performance that changes the stage background image to another background image (changing motion). The other background images are background images other than the stage background image, and include, for example, a reach background image, a look-ahead background image, a blackout image, and the like. In addition, when transferring the production stage you are currently staying on to another production stage, the stage background image displayed corresponding to the production stage you are currently staying on will be changed to the stage background image displayed corresponding to the next production stage. You may also apply an action that switches to .

Next, an explanation will be given of an example of the image action effect (the standby action effect and the fluctuating standby effect) of this embodiment. FIGS. 176 and 177 are schematic diagrams showing examples of standby action effects and fluctuating standby effects. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, it is assumed that each variation display is a normal variation (non-reach variation display).

First, as shown in (A) in the figure, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the start of the variable display of the special symbols. A stage background image set corresponding to the production mode (production stage) in which the user is currently staying is loop-displayed in the background of the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner. This loop display of the stage background image is performed in such a manner that the stage background image is scrolled in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, in synchronization with the loop display of the stage background image, stage BGM set corresponding to the production mode (production stage) currently being visited is output from the speaker P11. Furthermore, at the start of the fluctuating display of a decorative pattern, a special operation may be performed in which the decorative pattern moves upwards and then moves downwards (scrolling display); No such special action is performed at the start.

Subsequently, as shown in (B) in the figure, the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this illustrated example, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of "2, 1, 4" (miss) indicating a miss.

Subsequently, as shown in (C) in the figure, the fluctuating display ends, and the decorative pattern is fixedly displayed in a combination of "2, 1, 4" (miss) indicating a miss.

Subsequently, as shown in (D) in the figure, when the fixed stop time (design fixing time) of the decorative symbol elapses in a state where the operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not stored, A transition is made to a variable standby state (variable standby period), and a first standby period is started. With the start of this first standby period, the standby action performance is started, and the combination (missing stitches) of the stop symbols of the decorative designs is displayed in the first display, continuing from the end of the fixed stop period of the decorative symbols. At the same time, the stage background image is continuously displayed in a loop behind the decorative pattern. Further, while this standby motion performance (first standby period) is being executed, the same stage BGM is continuously output from the end of the decorative pattern fixed stop period. That is, in this first standby period, the stage background image and the stage BGM immediately before the start of the first standby period (the most recent decorative pattern fixed stop period) are continuously output. In addition, as a modification, the output of the stage BGM may be stopped when the standby motion performance (first standby period) is started (when the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern ends).

Subsequently, as shown in (E) in the figure, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable standby period (first standby period), the display mode of the decorative pattern that is being stopped is changed. is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode. Note that even at the time when the decorative pattern stop display mode changes to the second display mode, the stage background image continues to be displayed in a loop, and the stage BGM continues to be output. However, in this embodiment, when a prescribed period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the display mode of the decorative pattern during stop display changed to the second display mode, the output of the stage BGM is stopped and a silent state is created. (mute state). Note that, regarding stopping the output of the stage BGM, the loop playback of the stage BGM may continue, but the volume may be set to 0 (muted state). When transitioning to a silent state (mute state) or a mute state, it may be suddenly silent, but it is preferable to gradually reduce the volume (fade out). In addition, BGM output before and after the start of the first standby period (a predetermined period before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the first display mode, or a predetermined period before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the first display mode) The BGM that is output for a predetermined period after being displayed in this mode is different from the BGM that is output from when the decorative symbol in the stopped display changes to the second display mode until it becomes silent or muted. It may be configured as follows. As another modification, when the first standby period is executed multiple times during one variable standby period, the decorative pattern changes from the first display mode to the second display mode during the first first standby period. The BGM that is output to , and the BGM that is output when the second and subsequent first standby periods start (that is, when the decorative symbols appear in the second display mode in the second and subsequent first standby periods) may be configured to be different.

Subsequently, as shown in (F) in the figure, the first standby period ends and the second standby period begins. When the second standby period begins, the standby action effect is interrupted and the standby demonstration effect is started. That is, when the second standby period starts, the decorative patterns that have been stopped and displayed until then are hidden, and the background image is switched from the normal background image to the background image dedicated to the standby demonstration (demonstration). Further, even during execution of this standby demonstration performance (second standby period), the output of the stage BGM is stopped, resulting in a silent state (mute state). In addition, as a modified example, although loop playback of the stage BGM continues, its volume may be set to 0 (muted state). Furthermore, during this second standby period, the decorative symbols are not displayed, but the small symbols (the small symbols that are being stopped and displayed) continue to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in (G) in the figure, when the second standby period ends, the first standby period starts again. Also in this second first standby period, the stop display of the decorative pattern and the loop display of the stage background image are executed as standby motion effects. Note that the stop display mode of the decorative symbols in the current standby motion performance is the same as the stop display mode (second display mode) of the decorative symbols that were stopped and displayed at the end of the previous standby motion performance. That is, in the second standby motion performance, the stop display mode of the decorative symbols becomes the second display mode from beginning to end (it never becomes the first display mode). In addition, during the current first standby period, the output of the stage BGM is stopped, continuing from the end of the most recent standby demonstration performance, resulting in a silent state (mute state). In addition, as a modified example, although loop reproduction of the stage BGM continues, the volume may be set to 0 (muted state).

Subsequently, as shown in (H) in the figure, when the standby end condition is satisfied during the first standby period, the variable standby period ends, the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, and the immediately preceding The stage background image is continuously displayed in a loop from the end of one standby period. In other words, with the end of the fluctuation standby period as a trigger, the decorative pattern switches from a stationary display (static display) to a fluctuation display (motion display), and the stage background image straddles before and after the end of the fluctuation standby period (at the start of fluctuation). Continues loop display (crossing back and forth). Furthermore, the output of the stage BGM is started or restarted when a new variable display is started. At the start of this new variable display, the stage BGM may be output from the beginning (the beginning of the song), but as mentioned above, even in a silent state (mute state) such as during the execution of a standby demo production, the stage BGM loop If a silent state is created by setting the volume to 0 (mute state) while continuing playback, the stage BGM during loop playback will be changed from the point at which this new variable display starts. By restoring the volume to the normal volume, the stage BGM may be output from the middle (in the middle of the song) at the start of the change.

Subsequently, as shown in (I) in the figure, a button effect occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and an operation promotion image such as a button image is displayed on the screen. Note that details of the button effects will be described later.

Subsequently, as shown in (J) in the figure, when the effect button P15 is operated, a fluctuating motion effect is executed in which the stage background image being displayed is vibrated up and down. That is, in the fluctuating motion performance in the illustrated example, the loop display of the stage background image is temporarily stopped and the screen is swayed up and down due to the momentum (reaction) when the performance button P15 is operated. In addition, as a modified example, the fluctuating motion performance may be configured to be performed immediately after the dialogue preview performance in which a predetermined character image appears and utters the line "It's shaking!" is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in (K) in the figure, when the fluctuating motion performance is completed, the loop display of the stage background image is restarted. Note that this fluctuating motion performance may be such that a vibration motion (second motion) is added while the loop display of the stage background image (first motion) is continued.

Subsequently, as shown in (L) in the figure, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of "3, 3, 5" (miss) indicating a miss.

Subsequently, as shown in (M) in the figure, the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern ends, and the decorative pattern is permanently stopped and displayed in a combination of "3, 3, 5" (miss) indicating a miss. In addition, in the illustrated example, at the end of the variable display (when the fixed stop time is displayed), the special symbol's operation pending ball is stored, so after the variable display ends (after the fixed stop time has elapsed) There will be no transition to the variable waiting period.

Subsequently, as shown in (N) in the figure, the next variable display of special symbols is started, and in synchronization with the start of the variable display of this special symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. In this way, the loop display of the stage background image continues from (A) in the figure to just before (F) in the figure, and the loop display of the stage background image continues from (G) in the figure to (N) in the figure. (As mentioned above, the loop display may be temporarily interrupted when the fluctuating motion performance is executed, but the loop display may be continued even when the fluctuating motion performance is executed).

<Production content of standby motion performance depending on gaming state> In this embodiment, the performance content of the standby motion performance differs depending on the current gaming state (low base state/high base state). ing. In other words, if the current gaming state is the low base state (normal gaming state), the stage background image (normal background image) corresponding to the low base state is displayed in a loop while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a stopped state. It will be a performance mode. In addition, if the gaming state you are currently in is a high base state (time-saving gaming state or probability-changing gaming state), the stage background image (time-saving background image or probability-variable playing state) corresponding to the high base state (time-saving background image or The background image) is displayed in a loop. In this way, the stage background image differs depending on the gaming state you are currently staying in (low base state/high base state), so the production content of the standby action production is based on the gaming state you are currently staying in (low base state/high base state). It differs depending on the state/high base state). As mentioned above, the decorative symbols (such as character symbols) that fluctuate and are displayed statically in the low base state are different from the decorative symbols (character symbols, etc.) that fluctuate and are statically displayed in the high base state. By forming the patterns (by making the stop display modes of the decorative patterns different), the standby action performance performed in the low base state and the standby action performance performed in the high base state are configured to have different performance contents. Good too.

<Production content of fluctuating motion performance according to gaming state> In addition, in this embodiment, the performance content of the fluctuating motion performance varies depending on the current gaming state (low base state/high base state). It has become. That is, when the current gaming state is the low base state, the stage background image (normal background image) corresponding to the low base state vibrates during the variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, if the current gaming state is a high base state, the stage background image (time-saving background image or variable probability background image) corresponding to the high base state will vibrate while the decorative symbols are being displayed. Become. In this way, the stage background image differs depending on the current gaming state (low base state/high base state), so the production content of the fluctuating action production will vary depending on the current gaming state (low base state/high base state). It differs depending on the state/high base state). As mentioned above, the decorative symbols (such as character symbols) that fluctuate and are displayed statically in the low base state are different from the decorative symbols (character symbols, etc.) that fluctuate and are statically displayed in the high base state. By forming the symbols (by making the variation display modes of the decorative symbols different), the fluctuating motion performance performed in the low base state and the fluctuating motion performance performed in the high base state can be configured to have different performance contents. Good too.

<Standby demonstration performance common to gaming states> In this embodiment, the standby demonstration performance performed during the fluctuation standby period (second standby period) of the low base state is performed during the fluctuation standby period (second standby period) of the high base state. The content is the same as the standby demo production. In other words, as described above, different production contents are displayed between the standby action performance performed during the first standby period in the low base state and the standby action performance performed during the first standby period in the high base state. However, the same performance content is displayed in the standby demonstration performance performed during the second standby period in the low base state and the standby demonstration performance performed during the second standby period in the high base state. In other words, regarding the standby action performance performed during the first standby period, the performance content depends on the performance mode (performance stage) during the stay, so the game state during the stay (low base state, high base state) The content of the production will differ depending on the duration of the stay, but the standby demonstration production that will be held during the second standby period will be fixed production content that does not depend on the production mode (production stage) during the stay. The presentation content is the same regardless of the game state (low base state, high base state).

<Special drawing winning during standby demonstration performance> In this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52 during the execution of the standby demonstration performance, the predetermined performance ( (Winning performance while waiting) will occur. This predetermined performance (winning performance during standby) is executed when the game ball enters the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52 during the variable standby period (first standby period or second standby period). This is an effect that suggests or informs that the fluctuation waiting period has ended and the game will be resumed. This predetermined performance (waiting prize performance) is a performance in which a specific sound (specific fluctuation start sound) is output from the speaker. In this embodiment, audio pattern 1 (sound effect A), audio pattern 2 (sound effect B), and audio pattern 3 (sound effect C) are set as the audio patterns of the specific audio. The voice pattern of the specific voice is related to the jackpot expectation level, and in the order of voice pattern 1 (sound effect A) < voice pattern 2 (sound effect B) < voice pattern 3 (sound effect C), the jackpot expectation level is 1. It is set to increase in stages. Note that the predetermined performance performed in the low base state (waiting prize winning performance) and the predetermined performance performed in the high base state (waiting prize winning performance) may be configured as different performance contents. Further, a specific character may be displayed on the effect display device P70 along with a specific voice, and in such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the system so that a character corresponding to the voice pattern is displayed. In addition, in the low base state, if a game ball enters the first starting port P51, a predetermined effect can be executed, but if a game ball enters the second starting port P52, the predetermined effect can be executed. Do not execute the predetermined production (or in the low base state, if there is a game ball to the first starting port P51, all kinds of predetermined productions can be executed, while the game to the second starting port P52 It may be configured such that only a part of the predetermined effects can be executed when a ball enters the ball. Furthermore, in the high base state, if a game ball enters the second starting port P52, a predetermined effect can be executed, while if a game ball enters the first starting port P51, the game ball enters the first starting port P51. Do not execute the predetermined production (or in the high base state, if there is a game ball to the second starting port P52, all kinds of predetermined productions can be executed, while the game to the first starting port P51 It may be configured such that only a part of the predetermined effects can be executed when a ball enters the ball.

In addition, if the special drawing prize (entering the game ball into the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52) during the variable waiting period is a jackpot winning, the predetermined performance (winning performance during waiting) will be executed. Separately, a special winning performance will be performed. This special winning performance is a jackpot confirmation performance (premier performance) that definitively announces a jackpot win, and is a performance that outputs a special sound (jackpot confirmation sound) from the speaker P11. This special winning performance is performed immediately after the predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) is executed (immediately after the predetermined sound is output), or during the execution of the variable display that is triggered by this jackpot winning. This is done by outputting a final sound. Note that the special sound performed in the low base state and the special sound performed in the high base state may be configured as different production contents. Further, a specific character may be displayed on the effect display device P70 along with the special sound, and in such a configuration, it is preferable to configure so that the character corresponding to the special sound is displayed. In addition, in the low base state, when a game ball enters the first starting port P51, a special sound can be executed, but when a game ball enters the second starting port P52, a special sound can be executed. Do not execute special sounds (or in the low base state, if there is a game ball to the first starting port P51, all kinds of special sounds can be executed, while the game to the second starting port P52 It may be configured such that only some special sounds can be executed when a ball enters the ball. Furthermore, in the high base state, when a game ball enters the second starting port P52, a special sound can be executed, while when a game ball enters the first starting port P51, Do not execute the special voice (or in the high base state, if there is a game ball to the second starting port P52, all kinds of special voices can be executed, while the game to the first starting port P51 It may be configured such that only some special sounds can be executed when a ball enters the ball.

≪Special drawing winning during fluctuating motion production≫ Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52 during the fluctuating motion production, The winning effect (output of specific audio) is not executed while on standby. In other words, as mentioned above, the waiting prize presentation is a presentation that suggests or informs that the fluctuating standby state is over and the game will be resumed, so during this fluctuating display (during the execution of the fluctuating motion performance), Even if a special drawing prize (entering of the game ball into the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52) occurs, the winning effect is not executed during the waiting period. However, if a special drawing prize is generated during the fluctuation display (during execution of the movement effect during fluctuation), a predetermined sound different from the specific sound (a predetermined winning sound or a predetermined fluctuation start sound in correspondence with a specific fluctuation start sound) (referred to as a fluctuation start sound) may be output. In addition, if the game ball enters the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52 during the confirmed stop time (determined stop period) in a state where the operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not stored. Even if there is, the winning presentation (output of specific audio) will not be executed while on standby. Also in this case, a predetermined sound different from the specific sound may be output. As the sound patterns of the predetermined sounds, sound pattern 4 (sound effect D), sound pattern 5 (sound effect E), and sound pattern 6 (sound effect F) are set. The sound pattern of the predetermined sound is related to the jackpot expectation level, and in the order of sound pattern 4 (sound effect D) < sound pattern 5 (sound effect E) < sound pattern 6 (sound effect F), the jackpot expectation level is 1. It is set to increase in stages. Note that the predetermined sound performed in the low base state and the predetermined sound performed in the high base state may be configured as different performance contents. Also, if the game ball enters the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52 during the confirmed stop time (determined stop period) in the state where the operation pending ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stored. Even if there is, the winning presentation (output of specific audio) will not be executed while on standby. Also in this case, a predetermined sound different from the specific sound may be output. In addition, in the low base state, when a game ball enters the first starting port P51, a predetermined voice can be executed, but when a game ball enters the second starting port P52, the predetermined voice can be executed. Do not execute the predetermined sound (or in the low base state, if there is a game ball to the first starting port P51, all types of predetermined sounds can be executed, but the game to the second starting port P52 It may be configured such that only some predetermined sounds can be executed when a ball enters the ball. Furthermore, in the high base state, when a game ball enters the second starting port P52, a predetermined voice can be executed, but when a game ball enters the first starting port P51, the predetermined sound can be executed. Do not execute the predetermined voice (or in the high base state, if there is a game ball to the second starting port P52, all types of predetermined voices can be executed, while the game to the first starting port P51 It may be configured such that only some predetermined sounds can be executed when a ball enters the ball.

Here, when a game ball enters the first starting port P51 during execution of the fluctuating motion performance, an operation pending ball of the first special symbol is generated, and the game ball enters the second starting port P52. When a ball enters the ball, a second special symbol, the action pending ball, is generated. At this time, if the current gaming state is a gaming state (low base state) in which the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game, triggered by the occurrence of the operation pending ball of the first special symbol, Pre-read lottery processing is executed. In this pre-reading lottery process, it is determined whether or not a specific performance (specific pre-reading performance) can be executed using the pending action ball of the first special symbol as the target pending action ball. In addition, when the current gaming state is a gaming state (high base state) in which the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game, the pre-reading is triggered by the occurrence of the operation pending ball of the second special symbol. A lottery process is executed. In this pre-reading lottery process, it is determined whether or not a specific performance (specific pre-reading performance) can be executed by using the pending action ball of the second special symbol as the target pending action ball.

In this embodiment, the specific performance (specific pre-reading performance) is constituted by a same-color pattern stop pre-reading performance performed when a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. This same-color symbol stop look-ahead performance refers to one or more times from the fluctuating display when the target's action-holding ball is generated to the fluctuating display when the action-holding ball one before the target's action-holding ball is extinguished. In the fluctuation display, by displaying a predetermined combination of symbols of the same color (a specific missed symbol called a chance eye) as a combination of decorative symbols stopping, the fluctuation when the target's operation hold ball is extinguished. This is a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the expectation level of winning a jackpot on the display. In this embodiment, this same-color symbol stop pre-reading effect is executed from the start of the temporary stop display period of the chance eye as the stop symbol of the decorative pattern until the end of the fixed stop display period (symbol fixing time). shall be taken as a thing. Here, the chance eye (same color chance eye) refers to an eye where decorative patterns of the same pattern attribute (same color) are aligned as the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern. However, in this embodiment, even if three decorative symbols of the same attribute (same color) are aligned, a ready-to-reach mode (so-called ready-to-reach state) is not formed. This is to prevent the look-ahead preview effect from becoming diluted due to the mix of chance moves and ready-to-reach moves. That is, the same color chance refers to a non-reachable roll in which three decorative patterns have the same attribute (same color). In this example, in correspondence with the above-mentioned symbol attributes, a chance number with a blue attribute (e.g. "2, 6, 4"), a chance number with a green attribute (e.g. "1, 5, 9"), a chance number with a red attribute The numbers (for example, "3, 3, 7") are set. In addition, if the chance number is to be stopped and displayed in the fluctuating display when the target's action pending ball is generated, in the pre-read lottery process that is performed when the target's action pending ball occurs, at the start of the relevant fluctuating display. By replacing the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative patterns determined by lottery with the chance eye, it becomes possible to stop display the chance eye at the end of the variable display.

In addition, as the above-mentioned specific performance (specific look-ahead performance), a look-ahead performance other than the same color symbol stop look-ahead performance may be applied. As this specific effect, for example, a countdown effect, a change effect on hold when winning a prize, etc. can be adopted. The countdown effect is triggered by the occurrence of a new pending action ball (target's pending ball) until the variable display (target's variable display) that is executed when this target's pending ball is consumed. This is a look-ahead effect that counts down the number of times it will be executed. In this countdown effect, for example, "2" is displayed in the fluctuating display two times before the target fluctuating display, "1" is displayed in the fluctuating display one time before the target fluctuating display, and "1" is displayed in the fluctuating display one time before the target fluctuating display. Display “0”. In addition, the pending change pre-reading performance when winning a prize is triggered by the generation of a new pending ball (target's pending ball), and suddenly displays the target's pending image in a special display mode (for example, a blue icon, a green icon, This is a pending change performance (pre-reading performance) that is displayed with a red icon, rainbow-colored icon, etc.

<Regarding the predetermined performance in the low base state>> Next, whether or not the predetermined performance (waiting prize winning performance) can be executed in the low base state will be explained. FIG. 178(A) is a time chart when a game ball enters the first starting port P51 during execution of a standby demonstration performance in a low base state, and FIG. It is a time chart when a game ball enters the second starting port P52 during execution of the standby demonstration performance.

First, as shown in FIG. 178(A), when the current gaming state is the low base state, the predetermined performance is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port P51 during the execution of the standby demonstration performance. (Winning performance while waiting) is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 178(B), when the current gaming state is the low base state, a predetermined The performance (waiting prize-winning performance) is executed. That is, when the current gaming state is the low base state, regardless of the type of starting port into which the game ball entered during the execution of the standby demonstration performance, the game ball enters the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52. The same predetermined performance (winning performance while waiting) can be executed using the entry of the game ball as an opportunity. In addition, as described above, when a game ball enters the second starting port P52 as a trigger, some types of predetermined performances (winning performance during standby) may be configured not to be executed.

(Regarding the specific performance in the low base state) Next, whether or not the specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) can be executed in the low base state will be explained. FIG. 179(A) is a time chart when a game ball enters the first starting port P51 during the execution of the fluctuating motion effect in the low base state, and FIG. 179(B) is a time chart showing the low base state. It is a time chart when a game ball enters the second starting port P52 during execution of the action performance during state fluctuation.

First, as shown in FIG. 179(A), when the current gaming state is the low base state, the game ball enters the first starting port P51 during the execution of the fluctuating motion performance, and as a result, A specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) can be executed in the variable display. In addition, instead of executing a specific effect (same color pattern stop lookahead effect) in the fluctuation display, a specific effect (same color pattern stop look ahead effect) may be executed from the next variation, and if configured in such a way, the next Preferably, the variation is not a variation display of the target (a variation display before the target). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 179(B), if the current gaming state is the low base state, even if the game ball enters the second starting port P52 during the execution of the fluctuating motion performance, the fluctuation A specific effect (same color pattern stop look ahead effect) is not executed in the display. That is, in the current gaming state (low base state) in which the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game, a specific performance (same color symbol However, a specific performance (same color symbol stop look ahead performance) is not executed using the second special symbol's operation pending ball as the target's operation pending ball.

(Regarding the predetermined performance in the high base state) Next, whether or not the predetermined performance (waiting prize winning performance) can be executed in the high base state will be explained. FIG. 180(A) is a time chart when a game ball enters the first starting port P51 during execution of the standby demonstration performance in the high base state, and FIG. 180(B) is a time chart in the high base state. It is a time chart when a game ball enters the second starting port P52 during execution of the standby demonstration performance.

First, as shown in FIG. 180(A), when the current gaming state is a high base state, the predetermined performance is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port P51 during the execution of the standby demonstration performance. (Waiting prize presentation) is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 180(B), when the current gaming state is a high base state, the game ball enters the second starting port P52 during execution of the standby demonstration performance, and a predetermined The performance (waiting prize-winning performance) is executed. That is, when the current gaming state is the high base state, regardless of the type of starting port into which the game ball entered during the execution of the standby demonstration performance, the game ball enters the first starting port P51 or the second starting port P52. The same predetermined performance (winning performance while waiting) can be executed using the entry of the game ball as an opportunity. As described above, when the game ball enters the second starting port P52 as a trigger, some types of predetermined performances (waiting winning performance) may be configured not to be executed.

(Regarding the specific performance in the high base state) Next, whether or not the specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) can be executed in the low base state will be explained. FIG. 181(A) is a time chart when a game ball enters the first starting port P51 during the execution of the fluctuating motion effect in the high base state, and FIG. 181(B) is a time chart showing the high base state. It is a time chart when a game ball enters the second starting port P52 during execution of the action performance during state fluctuation.

First, as shown in FIG. 181(B), when the current gaming state is the high base state, the game ball enters the second starting port P52 during the execution of the fluctuating motion performance. A specific performance (same color pattern stop pre-reading performance) can be executed in the variable display. In addition, instead of executing a specific effect (same color pattern stop lookahead effect) in the fluctuation display, a specific effect (same color pattern stop look ahead effect) may be executed from the next variation, and if configured in such a way, the next Preferably, the variation is not a variation display of the target (a variation display before the target). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181(A), if the current gaming state is the high base state, even if the game ball enters the first starting port P51 during the execution of the fluctuating motion production, the fluctuation A specific effect (same color pattern stop look ahead effect) is not executed in the display. That is, in the current gaming state (high base state) in which the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game, a specific performance (same color symbol However, a specific performance (same color symbol stop look ahead performance) is not executed using the first special symbol's operation pending ball as the target's operation pending ball.

<Comparison of Dynamic Display of Stage Background Image> Next, the dynamic display speed (loop display speed) of the stage background image will be described as the first operation speed of the second image. In this embodiment, both the stage background image (normal background image) displayed in the low base state and the stage background image (time-saving background image and/or variable probability background image) displayed in the high base state are displayed at fixed time intervals. Dynamic display (loop display) is performed in which the same image is repeatedly displayed in Dynamic display (loop display) of a background image is relatively fast display. In other words, the normal background image displayed in the low base state operates in a loop at a relatively slow speed (moving speed, scroll speed), but the time-saving background image and/or variable background image displayed in the high base state operates in a loop at a relatively slow speed (moving speed, scrolling speed). Operates in a loop at a relatively fast speed (moving speed, scrolling speed). For example, while it takes 6 seconds for a cloud image displayed as a normal background image to move from the right edge of the screen to the left edge of the screen, a character image displayed as a time-saving background image and/or variable background image takes 6 seconds to move from the right edge of the screen to the left edge of the screen. It may also be configured such that it takes only 1 second to move from to the left end. In addition, there are five background images a to e that are normally displayed as background images, each of which displays dynamically and switches every 5 seconds (background images a → b → c → d → e On the other hand, there are seven background images f to l that are displayed as time-saving background images and/or fixed-variable background images, each of which is dynamically displayed and switched every second. (The background images are switched in the order of f→g→h→i→j→k→l).

Note that one cycle of the loop operation of the time-saving background image and/or variable background image displayed in the high base state is relatively longer than one cycle of the loop operation of the normal background image displayed in the low base state. It may be configured to have a short cycle. In other words, the normal background image displayed in the high base state is longer than the time from when the start image (first image) of the normal background image displayed in the low base state is displayed until the next start image (first image) is displayed. It may be configured such that the time from when the start image (top image) of the normal background image is displayed until the next start image (top image) is displayed is shorter.

<Variable Display Speed of Decorative Design> Next, the variable display speed (low speed fluctuation, high speed fluctuation) of the decorative pattern will be explained as the operating speed of the decorative pattern (first pattern). In this embodiment, when a normal variation (non-reaching out-of-reach variation) is executed as the variation display, in the scroll display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols in three rows accelerate immediately after starting the variation display, and each The decorative patterns in the column shift to a high-speed fluctuation state. During this high-speed fluctuation, the decorative patterns in each row are displayed in an indistinguishable or difficult-to-discern state, and the transmittance of the decorative patterns becomes higher than during stationary display. Therefore, the image that is displayed behind the decorative pattern (image that is superimposed behind the decorative pattern) that is transmitted through the decorative pattern that is changing at high speed, that is, the stage background image that corresponds to the current production mode, etc. The display becomes visible or easily visible (transparent display state). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the decorative symbols in each row transitioned to the high-speed fluctuation state, each decorative symbol in the high-speed fluctuation mode decelerated and transitioned to the low-speed fluctuation state. During this low-speed fluctuation, the decorative patterns in each row are displayed in a distinguishable or easy-to-identify display state, and the transmittance of the decorative patterns in each row is lower than that during high-speed fluctuation. Therefore, during low-speed fluctuation, the image displayed behind the decorative pattern (the image superimposed behind the decorative pattern) becomes invisible or difficult to see (non-transparent display state). Then, the decorative symbols in each row that are fluctuating at low speed are gradually decelerated, and when the fluctuating speed of the decorative symbols in each row reaches "0", the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped). (will be displayed after confirmed stop).

In this embodiment, in the normal variation (non-reach variation) that is performed when the gaming state is the low base state, the decoration pattern starts to fluctuate until it reaches the high-speed fluctuation state (transparent display state). The time required for this is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds). On the other hand, in the normal variation (non-reaching out-of-reach variation) that occurs when the gaming state is in the high base state, the time required for the decorative symbols to reach the high-speed variation state (transparent display state) after starting the variation display is The time is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal variation (non-reach variation) performed when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative symbols shift to the slow variation state (non-transparent display state) and then stop displaying. The time required to display (temporary stop display or confirmed stop display) is set to a relatively long time (for example, 2 seconds). On the other hand, in the normal fluctuation (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation) that occurs when the gaming state is in the high base state, the decorative symbols shift to a slow fluctuation state (non-transparent display state) and then stop display (temporary stop display or The time required to display the fixed stop display is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.3 seconds).

[Image Transformation Effect] Next, the image transformation effect of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 182 is a schematic diagram for explaining image transformation effect.

The image transformation effect of this embodiment performs transformations such as enlargement, reduction, rotation, parallel movement, distortion, and tilt on an image in a predetermined area included in the currently displayed screen (referred to as a "transformation target image"). This is a special performance added. As an example, FIG. 182(B) shows a state in which the image to be deformed has been reduced and deformed, and FIG. 182(C) shows a state in which the image to be deformed has been obliquely deformed.

Here, in this embodiment, the image displayed on the effect display device P70 is divided and drawn into a plurality of layers in which predetermined priorities are set. "Layer" means each layer of a hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image forming the entire image (frame image). For each layer, the higher the display priority, the higher the layer (front as seen from the player), and the lower the display priority, the lower the layer (back as seen from the player). be done.

FIG. 183 is a schematic diagram conceptually showing the layer structure of a frame image in a variable effect (while image motion effect is not being executed). This frame image consists of layer LA1 that displays the stage background image, layer LA2 that displays decorative patterns, layer LA3 that displays pending images and changing images, and layer LA3 that displays the number of special figure pending balls in order from the lowest display priority. It is configured to include a layer LA4 for displaying, a layer LA5 for displaying small symbols, a layer LA6 for displaying a volume/light amount setting image (referred to as a volume adjustment image or a light amount adjustment image), a layer LA7 for displaying an error notification image, and the like. The images of these multiple layers LA1 to LA7 are drawn on a frame buffer without performing the transformation process described later, and the image drawn on this frame buffer is output as a frame image for one frame to the effect display device and displayed. . Note that the frame buffer is a buffer memory (VRAM) that temporarily stores frames of image data to be output to the effect display device P70.

FIG. 184 is a schematic diagram conceptually showing the layer structure of a frame image during a variation effect (while an image transformation effect is being executed). This frame image consists of layer LB1 that displays the special background image, layer LB2 that displays the image to be transformed, layer LA3 that displays the pending image and changing image, and the number of special figure pending pitches in order from the lowest display priority. , a layer LA4 that displays a small pattern, a layer LA5 that displays a small pattern, a layer LA6 that displays a volume/light amount setting image, a layer LA7 that displays an error notification image, and the like. Note that the special background image is a background image exclusively used for image transformation effects, and is configured as a special background image that does not appear except for image transformation effects. That is, during execution of the image transformation effect, the special background image is used as the background image displayed behind the transformation target image, instead of the stage background image.

Layer LB2 of the transformation target image includes a decorative pattern, a stage background image, and a frame image. The frame image included in this layer LB is a frame-shaped image forming the outer edge of the transformation target image, and inside the frame image, images within the frame such as a decorative pattern or a stage background image are displayed. The entire image included in this layer LB2 becomes the target of image transformation effect (transformation target image). Note that a predetermined decorative object image such as an effect image or a character image may be added to this transformation target image.

Here, as shown in FIG. 184(B), the layer LB2 of the image to be transformed is a combination of the layer LA1 that displays the stage background image, the layer LA2 that displays the decorative pattern, and the layer LB3 that displays the frame image. By (integrating), a new layer (combined layer) is generated. Layer LB2 of this transformation target image is rendered in the frame buffer after performing a predetermined transformation process to transform the transformation target image into an unusual shape. On the other hand, layers of other images that are not subject to change are directly drawn on the frame buffer without being subjected to transformation processing. Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output as a frame image for one frame to the effect display device P70 and displayed.

Next, an example of the image transformation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 182. Although FIG. 182 illustrates a case where the image transformation effect is executed during execution of normal variation (non-reach variation), the image transformation effect may also be executed during execution of reach variation (SP reach variation). In that case, the image transformation effect may be executed before the reach effect is executed (before the reach effect is established), or the image transformation effect may be executed during the execution of the reach effect (while the SP reach effect is being executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the image deformation effect to have a higher probability when a reach variation (SP reach variation) is executed than when a non-reach variation is executed. , Even if it is a non-reach variation, if there is a target's pending ball that is a ball that triggers the execution of a look-ahead effect or a look-ahead lottery (if it is a fluctuating display before the target), the target's action is pending. It is preferable to configure the system so that the probability that the image transformation effect is executed is higher than when there is no sphere (when there is no variable display in front of the target).

First, as shown in FIG. 182(A), the fluctuating display is started, and on the screen of the effect display device P70, the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, the fluctuating display of small symbols, the display of pending images, and the fluctuating image are displayed. , the number of pending pitches, and a stage background image. Note that the decorative pattern and stage background image displayed here are part of the image ( (image inside the frame image). At this time, the frame image is formed as an image larger than the display area of the effect display device P70 (an image that protrudes from the display area of the effect display device P70), and is not displayed on the screen. Note that in the state of FIG. 182(A), the images included in the stage background image LA1 layer and the decorative pattern layer LA2 may be displayed as they are without generating the layer LB2 of the transformation target image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 182(B), the image transformation effect is started, and the transformation target image including the decorative pattern, the stage background image, and the frame image is gradually reduced and displayed. In other words, as the transformation target image is gradually reduced and transformed with respect to the entire screen, the frame image that was not displayed in FIG. 182(A) above is gradually displayed, and the image is transformed around this frame image. A special background image exclusively for the performance will appear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(C), the deformation target image reduced and deformed in FIG. 182(B) described above is gradually deformed in a tilted manner toward the left side when viewed from the front, thereby giving the deformation target image a three-dimensional effect. Granted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 182(D), the image to be transformed is gradually enlarged and displayed facing forward again, and the image is restored to its original size, thereby completing the image transformation effect. do. When this transformation target image is restored to the original size image (normal size image), the frame image that was displayed during the execution of the image transformation effect is no longer displayed.

Here, in this embodiment, the image deformation effect can be executed while the changing motion effect is being executed. When performing an image transformation effect while a fluctuating motion performance is being executed, the object image of the fluctuating motion performance that has been displayed up to that point (the decorative pattern being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the first motion and/or the second motion) This is done by displaying the stage background image) as the transformation target image. In other words, a transformation target image is formed by fitting the object image of the fluctuating motion performance (the decorative pattern being fluctuated, the stage background image of the first motion and/or the second motion) inside a frame image, By causing the stage background image (second image) included in this transformation target image to perform a first action (loop action) and/or a second action (vibration action), a fluctuating action effect is executed. In other words, while performing the first action (loop action) and/or the second action (vibration action) as the fluctuating action effect, it is possible to simultaneously perform the image deformation effect. Note that a performance in which an image transformation performance is simultaneously executed while performing a first action (loop action) and/or a second action (vibration action) as a fluctuating action performance may be referred to as a special transformation performance. On the other hand, while the standby motion effect is being executed, the image transformation effect is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner due to the object images such as decorative symbols being transformed into a special mode during the fluctuation standby period.

In the above embodiment, a decorative pattern, a stage background image, and a frame image are used as transformation target images, but the configuration is not limited to this. Object images may also be included. However, it is preferable that the error notification image, the volume/light intensity setting image, the small pattern display, and the special pattern reservation number display not be included in the transformation target image. Thereby, even if an error occurs in the gaming machine during the execution of the image transformation effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the error notification image from being obstructed. Furthermore, by excluding the volume/light intensity setting image from the images to be transformed to ensure its visibility, it is possible to prevent the player from interfering with the volume and/or light intensity adjustment operations even while the image transformation effect is in progress. It can be done. In addition, by excluding the small symbol display and special symbol pending number display from the image to be transformed to ensure their visibility, the player can easily see the current gaming situation (fluctuation display) even while the image transformation effect is in progress. This makes it possible to appropriately recognize the number of pitches currently in use, the number of balls on hold, the number of pitches pending, etc.). In addition, the visibility of various images of jackpot effects displayed during the execution of jackpot games (such as the above-mentioned big winning opening count-up effect, emphasized effect, excessive winning effect, bonus winning effect, etc.) will be ensured. Therefore, it is preferable not to include it in the transformation target image. Here, it is possible to perform an image transformation effect (special transformation effect) while displaying the error notification image, display the error notification image while executing the image transformation effect (special transformation effect), and further change the volume and light intensity. An image transformation effect (special transformation effect) can be executed while the setting image is displayed, and a volume/light amount setting image can be displayed while the image transformation effect (special transformation effect) is being executed. In addition, when the image transformation performance (special transformation performance) is executed, a special sound can be output almost at the same time as the transformation starts, and the special sound can be output before the execution of the image transformation performance (special transformation performance) ends. is configured to end at In addition, images to be transformed include general preview effects including button images, indicator images, button appearance preview effects, etc., which will be described later.

Next, a modification of the image motion performance (standby motion performance, fluctuating motion performance) of this embodiment will be described. That is, in the above embodiment, a case is exemplified in which a decorative pattern is applied as the first image and a background image (stage background image) is applied as the second image in the image action performance (standby action performance, fluctuating action performance). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the number pattern of the decorative pattern may be applied as the first image, and the character pattern of the decorative pattern (the character pattern displayed behind the number pattern) may be applied as the second image. It's okay. The image motion production of this modification includes a standby motion production in which the character symbol (second image) makes the first motion while the number symbol (first image) remains stationary during the stop display of the special symbol, and It consists of a fluctuating motion effect in which the character design (second image) is made to make a second motion during fluctuating display. In other words, the image motion performance according to this modification is a performance in which a predetermined motion is performed on a part of the image forming the decorative pattern.

In the standby action production, while a decorative pattern is being displayed in a stopped state, only the character pattern (second image) is displayed in the first image while the number pattern (first image) is completely stopped among the images that make up the decorative pattern. It is a performance that makes it work. The first motion of the character pattern is, for example, a motion in which the character image corresponding to the character pattern (second image) shakes its head vertically. Note that this first action is performed without changing the display position (position coordinates with respect to the entire screen) of the character design (second image). That is, the first action is an action performed with the positional coordinates of the character design (second image) fixed. Similar to the above embodiment, this standby action performance is performed during the first standby period of the variable standby state, and is terminated (interrupted) when the standby end condition is satisfied or the transition to the second standby period occurs. In addition, also in this standby action production, the number pattern (first image) is stopped and displayed in the first display mode in the first standby period A, and the number pattern (first image) is displayed in the first display mode in the first standby period B. image) may be configured to be stopped and displayed in the second display mode.

The fluctuating motion performance is a performance in which a character design (second image) among the images constituting the decorative design is made to perform a second action during the fluctuating display of the decorative design. The second motion of the character design (second image) is, for example, a motion in which the character image corresponding to the character design (second image) shakes its body sideways. This standby motion performance during fluctuation can recognize the display mode of decorative patterns, such as immediately after the start of fluctuating display of decorative patterns, temporary stop display during pseudo-sequential display of decorative patterns, and deceleration before displaying stop display of decorative patterns. Or, it is performed at an easily recognized execution timing.

[Button operation effect] Next, the button effect of the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram for explaining an overview of button effects according to the seventh embodiment. As described above, the button performance is a preview performance that suggests or informs the expectation level of a jackpot based on the operation of the performance button P15 by the player.

As shown in FIG. 185, the button performance includes an operation promotion performance performed during the operation validity period of the performance button P15, and an operation trigger performance performed after the operation validity period of the performance button P15 ends. In addition, "end of valid operation period" refers to cases where the valid operation period passes (expires) without any operation of the operation button, and the period ends when the operation button is operated within the valid operation period. This includes both cases where the relevant period ends midway even before the relevant period has elapsed (expired).

The operation promotion performance is a performance executed during the operation validity period of the performance button P15, and is a performance that urges the player to operate the performance button P15. The operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the production button P15 is effectively accepted when the production button P15 is operated (operation acceptance period during which the operation of the production button P15 is effectively accepted on the production control board P200). Therefore, this operation promotion performance can be said to be a performance that notifies the player that the operation validity period has expired. The operation promotion performance is also referred to as "operation means promotion performance."

While the operation promotion performance is being executed (during the operation validity period), a button image imitating the performance button P15 (also referred to as "performance button image" or "operation means image") and the remaining period of the operation validity period are displayed on the screen. A visually indicated indicator image (also referred to as a "meter image" or "operation validity period suggestion image") is displayed to inform that the operation of the production button P15 is valid and to prompt the operation of the production button P15. An announcement will be made. In addition, text images such as "Press!!" and "Hit Hit!!!" are attached to the vicinity of the button image to encourage the player to perform a single hit, and "Make a continuous hit!!" to encourage the player to hit repeatedly. It is also preferable to add text images such as "Strike hard!" or "Strike hard!". In addition, "One hit!!!" has a higher chance of hitting the jackpot than "Press!!", and "Hit it hard!!!" appears at the same time as the special button image described later than "Hit it repeatedly!" It is easy to appear through the second appearance preview effect, which will be described later. Also, the expectation of hitting the jackpot is higher when you say ``Press!!!'' than when you say ``Press!!'', and when you say ``Hit hard!!!'' than ``Make multiple hits!!!'', it appears at the same time as the special button image described later. It is easy to appear through the second appearance preview effect, which will be described later.

The types of operation validity periods include a first validity period and a second validity period. When the operation validity period is set as the first validity period, the operation-triggered performance can be executed only when the performance button is operated within the first validity period. If the operation validity period is set as the second validity period, if the production button is operated within this second validity period, or if the production button P15 is not operated within the second validity period, the second validity period When the operation is completed, the operation trigger effect becomes executable. The first valid period and the second valid period may have the same time value or different time values. In addition, in the following description, if there is no need to particularly distinguish between the first valid period and the second valid period, they will simply be referred to as "operation valid period."

Here, FIG. 186 is a schematic diagram showing the notification mode of the production button P15. In this embodiment, the notification mode of the production button P15 is defined by the combination of the operation mode of the production button lamp 15a (light emission notification mode) and the operation mode of the vibration motor (vibration notification mode). The light emission notification modes include a notification mode in which the production button P15 is turned off, a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up in white, a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up in red, and a notification mode in which the production button P15 flashes in red. This includes a notification mode and a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up in rainbow colors. The vibration notification mode includes a notification mode in which the production button P15 does not vibrate, and a notification mode in which the production button P15 vibrates. Note that the operation mode is not limited to vibration, and as described above, the internal mechanism of the production button P15 may rotate the movable object inside the production button P15 (rotation notification mode). Therefore, the vibration notification mode may simply be referred to as the motion notification mode (notification mode other than light emission), and the vibration notification mode (presence or absence of vibration) may be referred to as the motion notification mode (presence or absence of motion) or rotational notification mode (rotational notification mode). It should be noted that the button vibe effect may also be referred to as a button action effect (button operation effect) or a button rotation effect (button rotation effect).

The notification mode of the production button is a first notification mode, a second notification mode, a third notification mode, a fourth notification mode, and a fifth notification mode depending on the combination of these light emission notification mode and vibration notification mode. It is broadly divided into The first notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up in white and the production button P15 does not vibrate. The second notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up in red and this production button P15 does not vibrate. The third notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up in red and the production button P15 vibrates. The fourth notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up in a rainbow color and this production button P15 vibrates. The fifth notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 flashes in red and the production button P15 does not vibrate. Therefore, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are notification modes in a state where the above-mentioned button vibe effect is not being executed, and the third notification mode and the fourth notification mode are notification modes in a state where the above-mentioned button vibe effect is being executed. It can be said that this is the notification mode for the state in which the

In this embodiment, the notification mode during the valid operation period of the production button P15 is the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration). Further, the notification mode during the effective period of non-operation of the production button P15 (excluding the operation triggered production and the initialization operation) is the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration). Further, the notification mode during the non-operation valid period of the production button P15 and during the operation trigger production is the third notification mode (red lighting and vibration) or the fourth notification mode (rainbow color lighting and vibration). Further, the notification mode during the non-operation valid period of the production button P15 and during the initialization operation is the fifth notification mode (red blinking and non-vibration). Note that the fifth notification mode may be blinking in red and vibration. Here, in the present embodiment, when executing the button performance, regardless of whether the operation validity period of the performance button P15 is set to either the first validity period or the second validity period, the operation validity period of the performance button P15 ( With the start of the operation promotion performance), control is performed to switch the notification mode of the performance button P15 from the first notification mode to the second mode. On the other hand, when the operation validity period of the production button P15 ends, the type of this operation validity period (first validity period/second validity period) and the type of operation-triggered performance scheduled to be executed after this operation validity period ends. (details will be described later), control is performed to switch the notification mode of the production button P15 from the second notification mode to any one of the first notification mode, the third notification mode, and the fourth notification mode.

In addition, as a modification, the first notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 is not lit (lights out) and does not vibrate, the second notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 is lit in white and does not vibrate, and the third notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 is lit in white and does not vibrate. The notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up in red and vibrates, the fourth notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up in a rainbow color and vibrates, and the fifth notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up in red and vibrates. It is also possible to use a notification mode that blinks and does not vibrate. Note that the fifth notification mode may be a notification mode in which the production button P15 blinks in red and vibrates. In addition, as another modification, the first notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 is not lit (lights out) and does not vibrate, the second notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 is lit and does not vibrate, and the third notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 is not lit and does not vibrate. The notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up and vibrates, the fourth notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 lights up in rainbow colors and vibrates, and the fifth notification mode is a notification mode in which the production button P15 flashes and vibrates. It is also possible to use a notification mode that does not. Note that the fifth notification mode may be a notification mode in which the production button P15 blinks in red and vibrates.

The operation-triggered performance is a performance that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button P15. This operation trigger performance is a performance mode (accessory object movement, image display, audio output, lamp emission, button vibration, etc.) corresponding to the type of button performance. In this embodiment, "executed in response to the operation of the production button P15" means (1) that it is executed only when the production button P15 is operated within the operation validity period, and (2) the operation is valid. It includes the meaning of being executed when the production button P15 is operated within the period or when the production button P15 is not operated within the operation validity period and the operation validity period has passed. Therefore, the conditions for executing the operation-triggered effect differ depending on the type of operation validity period of the effect button described above. In other words, when the operation valid period is set as the first valid period, the execution condition for the operation-triggered performance is satisfied only when the performance button P15 is operated within this operation valid period (operation valid period If the performance button is not operated within the time period, the execution condition for the operation-triggered performance is not satisfied). Furthermore, if the operation validity period is set to the second validity period, even if the production button P15 is operated within this operation validity period, the production button P15 will not be operated within this operation validity period. Even if the operation validity period has elapsed without any delay, the execution condition for the operation trigger effect is satisfied. Note that the operation trigger performance is also referred to as "operation corresponding performance" or "operation result performance."

The types of operation-triggered effects include operation-triggered effects of the type in which it is uncertain whether or not the variable display currently being executed is a jackpot (referred to as "operation-triggered effects of a predetermined type"); There is a type of operation-triggered performance (“specific type of operation-triggered performance”) that definitely informs you that the fluctuating display is a jackpot. In addition, as the predetermined type of operation trigger performance, there are a plurality of types of operation trigger performances with different performance modes (display contents) and jackpot expectation levels. Furthermore, the predetermined types of operation-triggered performances include weak operation-triggered performances that suggest that the jackpot expectation level is relatively low, and strong operation-triggered performances that suggest that the jackpot expectation level is relatively high. In addition, as a weak operation trigger performance, there are multiple types of operation trigger performances with different performance formats (display contents) and jackpot expectation levels (1% to 10%), and as strong operation trigger performances, there are multiple types of operation trigger performances that differ in performance format (display content) and jackpot expectation level (1% to 10%). ) and jackpot expectations (40% to 80%). The weak operation trigger performance may include an operation trigger performance in which the jackpot expectation level is set to 0% (an operation trigger performance in which only a loss is derived). Further, the strong operation trigger performance does not include an operation trigger performance in which the jackpot expectation level is set to 100% (operation trigger performance from which only a jackpot is derived). On the other hand, the specific type of operation trigger presentation is a jackpot confirmation presentation (premier presentation) that suggests that a jackpot is guaranteed (the jackpot expectation level is 100%). That is, the specific type of operation-triggered performances includes only operation-triggered performances whose jackpot expectation level is set to 100% (operation-triggered performances from which only a jackpot is derived). Further, as the specific type of operation trigger performance, there are multiple types of operation trigger performances with different performance modes (display contents). This specific type of operation-triggered performance is not only an operation-triggered performance (big win confirmation performance) in which the operation validity period of the performance button P15 is set to the winning/losing branch period described later, but also an operation-triggered performance (big win confirmation performance) in which the operation validity period of the performance button P15 is set to the reach-to-reach period described later. It may include an operation trigger performance (big hit confirmation performance) set in the pre-notification period and/or the post-reach notification period.

<Production Examples of Button Productions> Next, production examples when various button productions are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 192. Note that in FIGS. 187 to 192, illustration of the background display (background image) is omitted for convenience.

<<Predetermined type of operation trigger performance: dialogue preview performance>> An example of button performance when a predetermined type of operation trigger performance is executed as a weak operation trigger performance (dialogue preview performance) will be described. FIG. 187 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a button performance including a weak operation trigger performance (line preview performance).

First, as shown in (A) in the figure, variable display of decorative patterns is started. Although not shown, a stage background image corresponding to the current production mode (production stage) is displayed on the screen. At this time, the notification mode of the production button P15 is the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration).

Subsequently, as shown in (B) in the figure, the operation promotion effect of the button effect is started, and operation promotion images such as button images and indicator images are displayed on the screen. At the same time as this operation promotion performance is started, the operation validity period of the performance button P15 is set. Moreover, at the start of this operational validity period, the notification mode of the production button P15 is switched from the first notification mode (white lighting and vibration) to the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration).

Here, if the operation valid period is controlled to be the first valid period, the execution condition of the operation triggered effect is satisfied on the condition that the effect button P15 is operated within this operation valid period, and as shown in the figure. The state shifts to state (C). On the other hand, when the effective period of operation has elapsed without the performance button P15 being operated, the execution condition for the operation-triggered performance is not satisfied, and the state shifts to the state (D2) in the figure.

On the other hand, when the operation valid period is set to the second valid period, when the effect button is operated within this operation valid period, or when the operation valid period has passed without operating the effect button P15. Occasionally, the conditions for executing the operation trigger effect are satisfied and the state shifts to state (C) in the figure.

Here, as shown in (C) in the figure, if the execution conditions for the operation-triggered effect are met, the operation-triggered effect (weak operation (opportunity effect) is executed. This operation trigger performance is a dialogue preview performance in which a dialogue image (dialogue image) of a predetermined character string is displayed. In this preview of the dialogue, there are multiple types of dialogue depending on the level of jackpot expectation, such as "Not good enough" (Jackpot expectation level: 1%), "Ganbare" (Jackpot expectation level: 5%), and "Chance" (Jackpot expectation level: 20%). One of the dialogue images will be displayed on the screen. Further, with the expiration of the valid operation period, the notification mode of the production button P15 is switched from the second notification mode (lit in red and non-vibration) to the first notification mode (lit in white and non-vibration). Note that the dialogue preview performance may include a case where a specific type of operation trigger performance is executed, for example, a dialogue image such as "Congratulations!" whose jackpot expectation level is 100%, and the dialogue image is displayed and the valid operation period has ended, the notification mode of the production button P15 switches from the second notification mode (lit in red and non-vibrating) to the first notification mode (lit in white and non-vibration), but the notification mode of the production button P15 The notification mode may be switched from the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration) to the third notification mode (red lighting and vibration).

Then, as shown in (D1) in the figure, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the dialogue image was displayed, the dialogue image is erased and the button performance (operation trigger performance) ends. Thereafter, the relevant change indication will continue to be made.

On the other hand, as shown in (D2) in the figure, if the execution conditions for the operation trigger performance are not satisfied, the button performance will not be executed after the operation validity period has elapsed. ends. Further, as the operation validity period passes, the notification mode of the production button P15 is switched from the second notification mode (lit in red and non-vibration) to the first notification mode (lit in white and non-vibration). Then, similar to (D1) in the figure, the fluctuation display is continued.

In this way, in a button performance that includes a weak operation trigger performance (a weak operation trigger performance without a resurrection performance described later) as a predetermined type of operation trigger performance, the operation validity period of the performance button P15 is set to the first validity period. and may be set to the second validity period. Regardless of whether this operation validity period is set to either the first validity period or the second validity period, the notification mode of the production button P15 changes from the first notification mode when the operation validity period starts. The notification mode of the production button P15 is switched from the second notification mode to the first notification mode when the operation valid period ends. In addition, when the effective operation period is set to the first effective period, if the effect button P15 is not operated within the effective operation period, the dialogue preview effect corresponding to the weak operation trigger effect will not be executed. ing. On the other hand, when the operation validity period is set to the second validity period, the dialogue preview performance corresponding to the weak operation trigger performance will be executed even if the performance button P15 is not operated within the operation validity period. It has become. It should be noted that the dialogue preview performance, which is a weak operation trigger performance, may be configured such that only the first validity period is set and the second validity period is not set. Also, when a specific type of operation trigger performance is executed as a dialogue preview performance, only the first valid period may be set.

<<Operation trigger performance of predetermined type: strong operation trigger performance>> Next, an example of a button performance when a predetermined type of operation trigger performance is executed as a strong operation trigger performance (cuton preview performance) will be described. FIG. 188 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a button performance including a strong operation trigger performance (cut-in notice performance). Note that, below, explanations of parts common to the production example shown in FIG. 187 above may be omitted.

As shown in (A) in the figure, variable display of decorative patterns is started. Although not shown, a stage background image corresponding to the current production mode (production stage) is displayed on the screen. At this time, the notification mode of the production button P15 is the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration). In this embodiment, although not shown, it is assumed that a reach is established during the execution of the variable display and then developed into an SP reach.

As shown in (B) in the figure, the SP reach effect is being executed in the variable display. This SP reach effect is configured as a battle effect (battle reach effect) in which an ally character fights against an enemy character. During execution of this SP ready-to-reach effect, a ready-to-reach background image corresponding to the SP ready-to-reach effect is displayed. In addition, on the drawing, by adding the characters "SP reach", it is expressed that the SP reach effect is being executed or the reach background image is being displayed. Therefore, unless the words "SP Reach" are added, it is assumed that a stage background image or another type of background image is being displayed, unless otherwise specified. In addition, in the SP reach effect, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed only as numerical symbols (less decorative display), and are moved to the left and right edges of the screen (fluctuating display). .

Subsequently, as shown in (C) in the figure, during the execution of this SP reach effect, the operation promotion effect of the button effect is started, and operation promotion images such as button images and indicator images are displayed on the screen. At the same time as this operation promotion performance is started, the operation validity period of the performance button P15 is set. Moreover, at the start of this operational validity period, the notification mode of the production button P15 is switched from the first notification mode (white lighting and vibration) to the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration).

Here, if the operation valid period is controlled to be the first valid period, the execution condition of the operation triggered effect is satisfied on the condition that the effect button P15 is operated within this operation valid period, and as shown in the figure (D). On the other hand, when the effective period of operation has elapsed without the effect button P15 being operated, the execution condition for the operation-triggered effect is not satisfied, and the state shifts to the state (E2) in the figure.

On the other hand, if the operation validity period is set to the second validity period, when the production button P15 is operated within this operation validity period, or the operation validity period elapses without the production button P15 being operated. When this occurs, the execution condition for the operation trigger performance is satisfied, and the state shifts to state (D) in the figure.

Here, as shown in (D) in the figure, if the execution conditions for the operation-triggered performance are met, the operation-triggered performance (strong (opportunity effect) is executed. This operation trigger effect is a cut-on preview effect in which a cut-in image of the main character of this model is displayed. In this cut-in preview performance, depending on the jackpot expectation level etc., a blue cut-in image (jackpot expectation level 5%), a green cut-in image (jackpot expectation level 15%), a red cut-in image (jackpot expectation level) 40%), or a golden cut-in image (with a jackpot expectation of 75%), one of several types of cut-in images is displayed on the screen. In addition, with the start of this operation-triggered performance (triggered by the end of the valid operation period), the notification mode of the performance button P15 changes from the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration) to the third notification mode. (Lights red and vibrates).

Then, as shown in (E1) in the figure, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the cut-in image was displayed, the cut-in image is erased and the button effect (operation trigger effect) ends. . Furthermore, upon completion of the button performance (operation trigger performance), the notification mode of the performance button P15 is switched from the third notification mode (red lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration). After that, the game returns to the battle performance between the ally character and the enemy character, and the SP reach performance continues. As a modification, the notification mode of the performance button P15 may be configured to return to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration) while the operation trigger performance is being performed (in the middle).

On the other hand, as shown in (E2) in the figure, if the execution condition for the operation trigger effect is not satisfied, the operation trigger effect (cut-in notice effect) is not executed after the operation validity period has elapsed, and the button is pressed. The performance ends. Further, as the operation validity period passes, the notification mode of the production button P15 switches from the second notification mode (lit in red and non-vibration) to the first notification mode (lit in white and non-vibration). Then, similarly to (E1) in the figure, the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is returned to, and the SP reach effect is continued.

In this way, in a button performance that includes a strong operation trigger performance as a predetermined type of operation trigger performance, the operation validity period of the performance button P15 may be set to the first validity period or may be set to the second validity period. . Regardless of whether this operation validity period is set to either the first validity period or the second validity period, the notification mode of the production button P15 changes from the first notification mode when the operation validity period starts. The notification mode of the production button P15 is switched from the second notification mode to the first notification mode when the operation valid period ends. Additionally, when the operation validity period is set to the first validity period, if the production button P15 is not operated within the operation validity period, the cut-in preview performance corresponding to the strong operation trigger performance will not be executed. It has become. On the other hand, when the operation validity period is set to the second validity period, the cut-in notice performance corresponding to the strong operation trigger performance is executed even if the performance button P15 is not operated within the operation validity period. It has become. Note that the cut-in preview performance, which is a strong operation trigger performance, may be configured such that only the second validity period is set and the first validity period is not set. Further, only when the gold cut-in image is displayed among the blue cut-in image, green cut-in image, red cut-in image, and gold cut-in image, the notification mode of the production button P15 is It may be configured to switch from the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration) to the third notification mode (red lighting and vibration). In addition, a specific type of operation trigger effect may be executed as a cut-in preview effect, for example, a rainbow-colored cut-in image with a jackpot expectation of 100% may be provided, and the cut-in image may be Even if it is displayed and the operation validity period ends, the notification mode of the production button P15 switches from the second notification mode (lit in red and non-vibration) to the third notification mode (lit in red and vibration), but the notification mode of the production button P15 is The mode may be switched from the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration) to the fourth notification mode (rainbow color lighting and vibration) (also in this case, only the second validity period may be set). Also, a similar or similar cut-in preview effect may be executed during N reach, and in that case, the configuration may be such that only the golden cut-in image or the rainbow-colored cut-in image is displayed (the effect button P15 It is preferable that the switching pattern of the notification mode is configured in the same manner as the cut-in preview effect executed during the execution of the SP ready-to-reach effect).

<<Specific type of operation trigger performance: jackpot confirmation performance>> Next, an example of the button performance when a specific type of operation trigger performance is executed will be described. FIGS. 189 to 190 are schematic diagrams showing examples of button effects including specific types of operation trigger effects. Note that, below, descriptions of parts common to the production examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 188 may be omitted.

First, as shown in (A) in the figure, variable display of decorative patterns is started. Further, as shown in (B) in the figure, an SP reach effect is being executed in the variable display.

Next, as shown in (C) in the figure, in the final phase of the SP reach effect (win/lose branch scene), the operation promotion effect of the button effect is started, and operation promotion images such as button images and indicator images are displayed on the screen. is displayed. At the same time as this operation promotion performance is started, the operation validity period of the performance button P15 is set. Furthermore, at the start of this operational validity period, the notification mode of the production button P15 is switched from the first notification mode (white lighting and vibration) to the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration). Note that this button operation performance is referred to as a determined performance.

Here, if the operation valid period is controlled to be the first valid period, the execution condition of the operation triggered effect is satisfied on the condition that the effect button P15 is operated within this operation valid period, and as shown in the figure. (D). On the other hand, when the effective period of operation has elapsed without the performance button P15 being operated, the execution condition for the operation-triggered performance is not satisfied, and the state shifts to the state (E2) in the figure.

On the other hand, if the operation validity period is set to the second validity period, when the production button P15 is operated within this operation validity period, or the operation validity period elapses without the production button P15 being operated. When this occurs, the execution condition for the operation trigger performance is satisfied, and the state shifts to state (D) in the figure.

Here, as shown in (D) in the figure, if the execution conditions for the operation-triggered effect are met, the operation-triggered effect (jackpot confirmation performance) is executed. Note that this operation trigger performance (jackpot confirmation performance) is also called a successful decision performance (details will be described later). In this operation trigger effect, an effect effect is performed in which the first movable accessory P651 falls in front of the screen, and a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed around this first movable accessory P651, so that you can win the jackpot. The winner will be definitely notified. In addition, with the start of this operation-triggered performance (triggered by the end of the valid operation period), the notification mode of the performance button P15 changes from the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration) to the fourth notification mode ( Lights up in rainbow colors and vibrates). In addition, as a modified example, when the execution condition of the operation-triggered performance is satisfied during the first validity period, and when the execution condition of the operation-triggered performance is satisfied during the second validity period, the time when the operation-triggered performance starts (the operation The notification mode of the effect button P15 that appears at the end of the valid period) may be varied. That is, when the execution conditions for the operation-triggered performance are satisfied during the second validity period, the notification mode of the performance button P15 changes to the first one, triggered by the start of this operation-triggered performance (the end of the operation-triggered performance). Switches to 4 modes (rainbow lighting and vibration). On the other hand, when the execution conditions for the operation-triggered performance are satisfied during the first valid period, the notification mode of the performance button P15 is changed to the Even if the notification mode of the production button P15 is switched to the third notification mode (red lighting and vibration) or a specific notification mode (rainbow lighting and non-vibration) without switching to the fourth mode (rainbow lighting and vibration). good. In addition, the mode of the operation-triggered performance (for example, when the execution condition of the operation-triggered performance is satisfied during the first validity period and when the execution condition of the operation-triggered performance is satisfied during the second validity period) (operation mode, effect image display mode, etc.) may be made different. That is, the operation trigger performance corresponding to the first validity period and the operation trigger performance corresponding to the second validity period may be configured as mutually different performances (modes). In that case, at the start of the operation triggered effect corresponding to the first valid period (at the end of the valid operation period), the notification mode of the effect button P15 is set to the third notification mode (red lighting and vibration) or the specific notification mode ( The mode may be switched to a fourth mode (rainbow lighting and non-vibration) at the start of the operation trigger presentation corresponding to the second valid period (at the end of the operation valid period). .

Subsequently, as shown in (E1) in the figure, when the button performance (operation trigger performance) is completed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of "3, 3, 3" (big hit) indicating a jackpot. At this time, the state is just before the end of the SP ready-to-win effect (the background image is the ready-to-win background image), and the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as only numerical symbols. In addition, both (D) and (E1) in the figure may be combined as a decision success performance which is an operation trigger performance (big hit confirmation performance).

Subsequently, as shown in (F1) in the figure, when the SP reach effect ends, the background image returns to the original stage background image (the stage background image before switching to the reach background image). Further, thereby, the decorative pattern which is being temporarily stopped and displayed returns to a display mode in which a number pattern and a character pattern are combined. Note that during the transition from (E1) to (F1) in the figure, that is, while the background image is returning to the original stage background image (the stage background image before switching to the reach background image), the notification mode of the production button P15 may be a special notification mode of rainbow color lighting and non-vibration. In addition, as a modified example, the background image may not return to the original stage background image (the stage background image before switching to the reach background image), and the decorative pattern may be fixed and stopped at only the number pattern on the reach background image. .

Then, as shown in (G1) in the figure, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols is completed, and the decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed in a combination of "3, 3, 3" (jackpot) indicating a jackpot. Note that before this decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the notification mode of the production button P15 is switched from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration). As a modified example, the notification mode of the production button P15 does not switch from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration), but the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration). may be maintained.

On the other hand, as shown in (E2) in the figure, if the execution conditions for the operation-triggered performance are not satisfied, the operation-triggered performance (jackpot confirmation performance) will not be executed after the operation validity period has elapsed, and the button performance will not be executed. is completed, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination of "3, 3, 3" (jackpot number) indicating a jackpot. Further, as the operation validity period passes, the notification mode of the production button P15 is switched from the second notification mode (lit in red and non-vibration) to the first notification mode (lit in white and non-vibration). Also, in (E2) to (F2) in the figure, similar to (E1) to (F1) in the figure above, the background image changes from the reach background image to the original stage background image while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. At the same time, the decorative patterns during the temporary stop display return from a display mode of only numeric symbols to a display mode consisting of numeric symbols and character symbols. Then, in (G2) in the figure, similar to (G1) in the above-mentioned figure, the decorative symbols are fixed and displayed in a combination of "3, 3, 3" (jackpot number) indicating a jackpot. In addition, as a modified example, the background image may not return to the original stage background image (the stage background image before switching to the reach background image), and the decorative pattern may be fixed and stopped at only the number pattern on the reach background image. . In addition, as a modified example, the notification mode of the production button P15 does not switch from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration), but instead changes to the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and non-vibration). vibration) may be maintained.

In this way, in a button performance including a jackpot confirmation performance as a special type of operation trigger performance, the operational validity period of the performance button P15 may be set to the first validity period or may be set to the second validity period. Regardless of whether this operation validity period is set to either the first validity period or the second validity period, the notification mode of the production button P15 changes from the first notification mode when the operation validity period starts. Switching to the second notification mode. In addition, regardless of whether the operation validity period is set to the first validity period or the second validity period, when the execution conditions for the operation trigger effect are satisfied, the operation validity period ends ( When the jackpot confirmation performance is executed), the notification mode of the performance button P15 is switched from the second notification mode to the fourth notification mode. On the other hand, when the operation valid period is set to the first valid period and the execution conditions of the operation triggered effect are not satisfied, the notification mode of the effect button P15 is changed to The second notification mode is switched to the first notification mode. In addition, when the operation validity period is set to the first validity period, if the performance button P15 is not operated within the operation validity period, the jackpot confirmation performance corresponding to the specific type of operation trigger performance will not be executed. It has become. On the other hand, when the operation validity period is set to the second validity period, even if the performance button P15 is not operated within the operation validity period, the jackpot confirmation performance corresponding to the operation trigger performance of the specific type is executed. It looks like this. Note that this fixed performance may be configured such that only the second valid period is set and the first valid period is not set. Therefore, both the decision success performance and the decision failure performance described later may be performances executed by setting the second valid period in the decision performance.

<<Predetermined type of operation trigger performance: decision failure performance>> Next, an example of the button performance when the predetermined type of operation trigger performance is executed as a weak operation trigger performance (decision failure performance) will be described. FIGS. 191 and 192 are schematic diagrams showing examples of button effects including a weak operation trigger effect (decision failure effect). It should be noted that the failed decision performance is a failure performance in the win/loss branch performance (a performance that suggests a loss), and the successful decision performance is a successful performance in the win/loss branch performance (a performance that suggests a jackpot win). 191 and 192 show an example of a performance in which a so-called revival performance is executed after the execution of the decision failure performance. In the present embodiment, when a revival performance is executed after the execution of a decision failure performance (that is, when a weak operation trigger performance accompanied by a revival performance is performed), the second validity period is set as the operation validity period of the performance button P15. only is set (the first validity period is not applicable). When applying the first validity period as a modified example, when the production button P15 is operated during the first validity period, (D) in the figure is not executed and the process shifts from (C) to (E) in the figure. (In other words, it is preferable that the effect shown in (D) in the figure corresponds to the operation trigger effect). Note that, below, descriptions of parts common to the production examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 190 may be omitted.

First, as shown in (A) in the figure, variable display of decorative patterns is started. Further, as shown in (B) in the figure, an SP reach effect is being executed in the variable display.

Subsequently, as shown in (C) in the figure, in the final phase of the SP reach performance (win/lose branch scene), the operation promotion performance of the button performance is started. Furthermore, at the same time as this operation promotion performance is started, the operation validity period of the performance button P15 is set.

Here, as mentioned above, in this button performance (button performance with revival performance), the operation valid period is set to the second valid period, and when the performance button P15 is operated within this operation valid period. Alternatively, when the effective period of operation has elapsed without the effect button P15 being operated, the execution condition for the operation triggered effect is satisfied and the state shifts to state (D) in the figure. In other words, in this button performance (button performance accompanied by a resurrection performance), the execution condition of the operation trigger performance will not fail (simply put, regardless of whether or not the performance button P15 is operated within the operation validity period, A decision failure effect is always executed).

Here, as shown in (D) in the figure, when the execution condition of the operation trigger effect is satisfied, the operation trigger effect (decision failure effect) is executed after the operation valid period ends. In this operation trigger performance (decision failure performance), a performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character is displayed. Further, at approximately the same time as the execution of this operation trigger effect (decision failure effect), the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of "3, 4, 3" indicating a miss (reach is a miss). At this time, the state is just before the end of the SP ready-to-reach effect (the background image is the ready-to-reach background image), and the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed only as numerical symbols. In addition, when this operation-triggered effect is executed (triggered by the expiration of the effective operation period), the notification mode of the effect button P15 changes from the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration) to the first notification mode ( (white lighting and non-vibration).

Subsequently, as shown in (E) in the figure, when the SP reach effect ends, the background image returns to the original stage background image (the stage background image before switching to the reach background image). Further, thereby, the decorative pattern which is being temporarily stopped and displayed returns to the display mode in which a number pattern and a character pattern are combined. In addition, if the fluctuation display is a failure (if the result of the judgment regarding the fluctuation display is a failure), the decorative pattern will be fixed and stopped in this state, that is, the decorative pattern will be changed to "3" indicating a failure.・The combination of 4 and 3 (the reach is off) will result in a definite stop. If it is a jackpot fluctuation (if the result of the judgment regarding the fluctuation display is a jackpot), a revival performance to be described later will be executed.

Subsequently, as shown in (F) in the figure, a revival effect is performed. In this revival production, for example, a production in which an ally character is covered in a rainbow-colored aura is displayed on the screen. Further, in response to the execution of the revival performance, the notification mode of the performance button P15 is switched from the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration) to the fourth notification mode (rainbow color lighting and vibration). Further, while this revival performance is being executed, a background image dedicated to the revival performance is temporarily displayed. It should be noted that the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped and displayed only as a numerical pattern ("3.3.3.") on the background image dedicated to the revival effect.

Next, as shown in (G) in the figure, the background image switches from the background image dedicated to the revival performance to the original stage background image, and the decorative pattern is a combination of "3, 3, 3" indicating a jackpot (jackpot). A temporary stop will be displayed. The decorative pattern during this temporary stop display is a display mode that is a combination of a number pattern and a character pattern. Note that during the transition from (F) to (G) in the figure, that is, while the background image is switching from the background image dedicated to revival performance to the original stage background image, the notification mode of the production button P15 is set to the special notification mode. It may be lit in rainbow colors and non-vibrating. In addition, as a modification, the background image may not return from the background image dedicated to revival performance to the original stage background image, and the decorative patterns may be fixed and stopped at only numeric symbols on the background image dedicated to revival performance.

Then, as shown in (H) in the figure, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols is completed, and the decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed in a combination of "3, 3, 3" (jackpot number) indicating a jackpot. Note that before this decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the notification mode of the production button P15 is switched from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration). As a modified example, the notification mode of the production button P15 does not switch from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration), but the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration). may be maintained.

In the above embodiment, after the operation trigger effect (decision failure effect) ends, the notification mode of the effect button P15 is changed without any further button effect being executed (without setting a new operation validity period). Although the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration) has changed to the fourth notification mode (rainbow color lighting and vibration), it is not limited to this configuration, and after the operation trigger performance (decision failure performance) ends, By executing a further button effect (setting a new operation validity period), the notification mode of the effect button P15 changes from the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration) to the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration). ), and at the end of the valid operation period (provided that the execution conditions for the operation trigger effect are met), the notification mode of the production button P15 is changed from the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration) to the second notification mode (red lighting and non-vibration). It may be configured to change to four notification modes (rainbow lighting and vibration). Alternatively, after the operation trigger effect (decision failure effect) is completed, a further button effect is executed (a new operation valid period is set), thereby changing the notification mode of the effect button P15 to the first notification mode (white lighting and (non-vibration) to the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) or special notification mode (rainbow lighting and non-vibration), and at the end of the valid operation period (when the execution conditions of the operation trigger effect are met) (condition), the notification mode of the production button P15 is changed from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) or the special notification mode (rainbow lighting and non-vibration) to the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration). (or continue). In addition, regarding the new operation validity period in the case of these configurations, it may be configured such that only the second validity period is set and the first validity period is not set.

<Occurrence of multiple operation valid periods during one fluctuating display> Next, a case where multiple operation valid periods are set during one fluctuating display will be described. FIG. 193 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of the effect button executed multiple times during one variable display. In this embodiment, a plurality of valid operation periods are set from the start to the end of the variable display, and a plurality of button performances corresponding to the plurality of operation valid periods are executed. There are cases.

In the present embodiment, the operational validity period of the production button P15 is set as a part of the period (referred to as a "pre-reach notice period") until a reach is achieved during one fluctuation display, and when it is set as a period of one time until a reach is achieved during one fluctuating display. When a win or loss is established during a fluctuating display (excluding when a win or loss branch effect is set) as part of the period (referred to as the "post-reach notice period"), or when a win or loss is achieved during a single fluctuating display. It may be set as a part of the period during the branch performance (referred to as the "win/loss branch period"). In FIG. 193, button effect E occurs corresponding to the pre-reach notice period (first operation valid period), button effect F occurs corresponding to the post-reach notice period (second operation valid period), A case will be exemplified in which the button effect G occurs corresponding to the winning/losing branch period (third operation valid period). Furthermore, even if the player does not operate the performance button P15, it is equipped with an automatic operation function that assumes that the performance button P15 has been operated. and automatic operation function cancellation state. By satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, pressing and holding the production button P15 for 1 second outside the valid operation period) in the automatic operation function cancellation state, the automatic operation function setting state is switched to the automatic operation function setting state. By satisfying a specific condition (for example, single-shot operation of the production button P15 regardless of whether or not the operation is valid), the state is switched to the automatic operation function cancellation state. When the valid operation period is reached in the automatic operation function setting state, it is assumed that the performance button P15 has been operated even if the player does not operate the performance button P15, and the operation is performed at a predetermined timing within the valid operation period. The promotion effect ends, and the operation trigger effect is executed (note that if the player operates the effect button P15 before the predetermined timing is reached, that operation will be prioritized and the operation promotion effect will end due to the operation) (The operation trigger effect is executed.) In this case, the switching of the notification mode of the performance button P15 is the same as when the performance button P15 is operated by the player, that is, the content is as described above. Just to be sure, if the automatic operation function is disabled, as mentioned above, during the first validity period, the operation promotion effect ends when the player operates the effect button P15, and the operation trigger effect is activated. is executed, and if it is the second valid period, the operation promotion performance ends when the player operates the performance button P15 or the operation validity period expires, and the operation trigger performance is executed (About the switching of the notification mode of the performance button P15 (as mentioned above).

Button performance E is a button performance that is executed before the reach is established during variable display. In this button performance E, the operational validity period of the performance button P15 is controlled to be the pre-reach advance notice period and the first validity period. That is, in button performance E, if the performance button P15 is operated during the valid operation period, the operation valid period ends with the operation of the performance button P15 as a trigger, and the operation triggered performance is started. However, if the effect button P15 is not operated during the valid operation period, the button effect ends with the end of the valid operation period without the operation triggered effect being executed. The operation trigger effect of this button effect E is a line preview effect (comment preview effect) in which a predetermined character image utters a line. Note that this button performance E is the button performance shown in FIG. This is a presentation that is the same or similar to the button presentation when , the flow of the performance corresponds to the first validity period). In addition, in the automatic operation function setting state, the operation promotion effect ends and the operation trigger effect is executed at the timing when half (50%) of the operation validity period related to the button effect E has elapsed.

Button performance F is a button performance that is executed after the reach is established during the variable display (excluding when winning or losing). In this button performance F, the operational validity period of the performance button P15 is controlled to be the post-reach notice period and the second validity period. That is, in the button performance F, if the performance button P15 is operated during the valid operation period (while the operation promotion performance is being performed), the operation valid period (operation promotion performance) ends with the operation of the performance button P15 as a trigger. Then, an operation trigger effect (cut-in preview effect) is executed. In addition, if the performance button P15 is not operated during the operation valid period (while the operation promotion performance is being performed), the operation trigger performance (cut-in Preview performance) is executed. The operation trigger effect of this button effect F is a cut-in preview effect in which images of the main characters of this model are cut-in and displayed. Note that this button effect F is the button effect shown in FIG. This is the same or similar effect as (button effect when executed as button effect), and please refer to FIG. 188 for details of the effect (however, in this button effect F, the operation valid period is set to the second valid period. Therefore, the flow of performance corresponds to the second validity period). In addition, in the automatic operation function setting state, the operation promotion effect ends and the operation trigger effect is executed at the timing when half (50%) of the operation validity period related to the button effect F has elapsed.

The button effect G is a button effect executed at the time of winning or losing during the variable display. In this button performance G, the operational validity period of the performance button P15 is controlled to be a win/loss branch period and a second validity period. That is, in button performance G, if the performance button P15 is operated during the valid operation period (while the operation promotion performance is being performed), the operation valid period (operation promotion performance) ends with the operation of the performance button P15 as a trigger. Then, the operation trigger performance (accessory performance) is executed. In addition, if the performance button P15 is not operated during the valid operation period (during execution of the operation promotion performance), the operation trigger performance (accessories performance) is executed. The operation trigger effect of this button effect G is an effect effect in which a movable accessory (first movable accessory P651) falls in front of the screen. Note that this button performance G is a button performance shown in FIGS. 189 to 192 described above (a button performance when a specific type of operation trigger performance is determined to be successful, or a button performance when a predetermined type of operation trigger performance is determined to be unsuccessful). This is a performance that is the same as or similar to the button performance when executed as a performance, and please refer to Figures 189 to 192 for details of the performance (However, in this button performance G, the operation valid period is the second valid period. (Since it is set to , the flow of the performance corresponds to the second valid period). In addition, in the case of the automatic operation function setting state, the operation promotion effect ends and the operation trigger effect is executed at the timing when 80% of the operation validity period related to the button effect G has elapsed. As a modified example, the button effect G may be excluded from the automatic operation function (even if the automatic operation function is set, the operation promotion effect may be activated by the player's operation of the effect button P15 or by the expiration of the operation validity period). (It may be configured such that the operation trigger effect is executed after the process ends). In addition, a special period that is a part of the period after the execution period of the button effect F and before the execution period of the button effect G may be set as the special effective period, and during the special effective period, the operation promotion effect is not executed, but the effect is It may also be possible to execute a special operation effect in which a flame-shaped effect image is displayed around the screen and its color changes each time the button P15 is operated (by repeatedly pressing the button P15). By repeatedly hitting the player during this special validity period, the color of the flame-shaped effect image can change from blue → green → red → rainbow (the rainbow can only be displayed when a jackpot is won), but the color change is The further you advance, the higher your expectation of winning the jackpot. Here, as mentioned above, since the operation promotion effect is not executed in the special operation effect, the notification mode of the effect button P15 during the special effective period is the first notification mode regardless of the color of the flame-shaped effect image. (White lighting and non-vibration). However, as a modification, only when the color of the flame-shaped effect image becomes rainbow-colored, the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration) to the fourth notification mode (rainbow-colored lighting and vibration) or special notification It may be configured to switch between modes (rainbow lighting and non-vibration).

Here, when the operational validity period of the production button P15 is the pre-reach notice period, the stage BGM corresponding to the current production mode (production stage) is continuously output during this operation validity period. The volume of the stage BGM that is output during the operational validity period (before the execution of the operation trigger effect) during this pre-reach notice period is relatively high (especially compared to the case where the operational validity period is the winning/losing branch period). do). Note that the volume of the stage BGM when the operation trigger performance is executed is the same or reduced compared to before execution, but it is not output (muted). In addition, when the operation valid period is the post-reach notice period, the reach BGM corresponding to the currently executed reach effect is continuously output during this operation valid period. The volume of the reach BGM when it is output during the operation validity period (before the execution of the operation trigger effect) during this post-reach notice period is relatively high (especially when the operation validity period is the winning/losing branch period). ). Note that the volume of the reach BGM when the operation trigger performance is executed is the same or reduced compared to before execution, but it is not outputted (muted) (desirably reduced). However, as mentioned above, when a cut-in notice effect is executed during the post-reach notice period during N reach, the volume of the reach BGM output during the valid operation period (before execution of the operation trigger effect) is relative. However, the volume of the reach BGM when the operation trigger effect is executed is different from before execution, and is not output (especially when compared to the case where the operation valid period is the winning/losing branch period). It is preferable that the

On the other hand, if the valid operation period is the winning/losing period, no BGM is output (muted), or the reach BGM corresponding to the currently running reach effect is output during this valid operation period. However, the volume of the reach BGM when it is output during the operation validity period (before the execution of the operation trigger effect) during this winning/losing notification period is relatively low (especially when the operation validity period is before the reach (compared to cases where it is a notice period or a post-reach notice period). Note that even if the reach BGM is muted during the operational validity period in this winning/losing branch period, the sound accompanying the button performance (operation promotion performance), such as the button appearance sound, is output as usual. In addition, after the operation trigger effect is executed, the reach BGM will be output at a relatively loud volume if the success effect is executed (especially compared to the operational validity period during the win/loss branch period), and if the effect is a success effect If this is executed, the reach BGM will be output at a relatively low volume (especially compared to after the successful performance is executed as an operation trigger performance), but it is louder than the operation validity period which is the winning/losing branch period. Output at volume.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a situation where the operation validity period is controlled to be the first validity period or the second validity period, when the button performance is a repeated-press operation performance, rather than when the button performance is a single-shot operation performance. In this case, the BGM is more likely to be output during the valid operation period, or the volume of the BGM being output is set to be relatively louder. Note that a single operation effect is a button effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button P15 only once, and a repeated press operation effect is a button effect that encourages the user to operate the effect button P15 multiple times (operates continuously). It is. Here, when executing a button effect at the time of winning or losing at the end of SP reach, as mentioned above, the BGM is likely to be muted or reduced during the valid period of the operation, but the button effect is one-shot. When the button effect is set as a continuous press operation effect than when it is set as an operation effect, BGM is more likely to be output during the valid period of the operation (or the volume of the BGM being output is lowered). is preferably configured such that

<Relationship between Button Performance and Number of Special Figures on Hold> Next, the relationship between button performance and number of special figures on hold will be explained. In this embodiment, in button performance E (hereinafter also referred to as "first button performance" for convenience) in which the operational validity period of the performance button P15 is executed as the pre-reach notice period and the first validity period, the start of the variable display The appearance rate (execution probability) of the first button performance is different depending on the number of special symbol operation pending balls stored at the time. In other words, this first button performance (button performance E) is more effective than the variable display that is executed when the number of action-reserved balls of the special symbol is relatively large (the number of action-reserved balls is greater than a predetermined number). The probability of occurrence (appearance rate) of a variable display executed when the number of active pending balls is relatively small (the number of active pending balls is less than a predetermined number) during that variable display is set higher. ing.

On the other hand, button effects F and G (hereinafter, for convenience, "second button effect") in which the operation validity period of the effect button P15 is executed as a post-reach notice period and a second validity period, or as a winning/losing branch period and a second validity period In this case, the appearance rate (execution probability) of the second button effect does not differ depending on the number of special symbol operation pending balls stored at the start of the variable display. That is, this second button production (button production F, G) is executed when the number of special symbol operation pending balls is relatively large (the number of operation pending balls is greater than a predetermined number). The probability of occurrence (occurrence) during the fluctuating display is the difference between a fluctuating display and a fluctuating display that is executed when the number of balls on hold is relatively small (the number of balls on hold is less than a predetermined number). rate) are set to be the same. As a modified example, the second button performance (button performance F, G) is a variable display that is executed when the number of action pending balls of the special symbol is relatively large (the number of action pending balls is greater than a predetermined number). , the probability of occurrence (appearance rate) during the fluctuation display is higher when the number of pending balls is relatively small (the number of balls pending is less than a predetermined number). Although it may be set high, the difference in probability is the first in the variable display that is executed when the number of activated reserved balls of the special symbol is relatively large (the number of activated reserved balls is greater than a predetermined number). The probability that the button effect (button effect E) will occur and the first button effect (button effect It is preferable that the difference be smaller than the difference with the probability that effect E) will occur.

In addition, the number of special symbol activation reserved balls here means that if the current gaming state is a low base state (a gaming state where the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game), the first special symbol is activated. If the current gaming state is a high base state (a gaming state in which the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game), it is the number of balls that are pending for activation of the second special symbol. Become. In addition, the number of action-retaining balls with this special symbol is the number of action-retaining balls that exist at the start of the relevant variable display (when the action-retaining balls are extinguished) (the action-retaining balls that have been extinguished by the relevant fluctuation display are not included). do not have). As a modification thereof, the total value of the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of operation-retention balls of the second special symbol may be used.

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, a button effect may be displayed in a variable display that is executed when the number of balls with special symbols on hold is relatively large (the number of balls on hold is larger than a predetermined number). The probability of occurrence (appearance rate) and the button effect occur in the variable display that is executed when the number of activated balls of the special symbol is relatively small (the number of activated balls is less than a predetermined number). When considering the range of variation with the probability (occurrence rate) of .

<Button Image> In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194, the type of button image displayed during the operational validity period of the performance button P15 can vary depending on the type of button performance. FIG. 194 is a schematic diagram showing multiple types of button images.

As shown in FIG. 194, the button images include a normal button image (first button image) that shows the production button P15 in a normal mode, and a special button image (second button image) that shows the production button P15 in a special mode. be. Both the normal button image and the special button image are button images that imitate the form of the production button P15, but the special button image is a button image that is an enlarged display of the normal button image (enlarged button image). . In addition, in this embodiment, no matter which button image (normal button image or special button image) is displayed, in addition to displaying this button image, an indicator image (" An operation promotion image such as a "operation validity period suggestion image" is also displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, when there is no particular need to distinguish between a normal button image (first button image) and a special button image (second button image), they are simply referred to as "button images."

During the operation validity period of the first button effect (button effect E), the special button image is never displayed, and the normal button image is always displayed. That is, when the effective period of operation of the production button P15 is set as the pre-reach notice period and the first effective period, the button image displayed within the effective period of operation is always the normal button image.

During the operational validity period of the second button effects (button effects F, G), there are cases where a normal button image is displayed and cases where a special button image is displayed. In other words, when the operation validity period of the production button P15 is set as the after-reach notice period and the second validity period, or the winning/losing branch period and the second validity period, the normal button image and the special button cannot be used within the operation period. Any of the images can be selectively displayed. As a modified example, the expectation of a jackpot is higher if the special button image is displayed with button performance G than when the special button image is displayed with button performance F (or, if the special button image is displayed with button performance F) Although the jackpot is not guaranteed, the jackpot is confirmed when the special button image is displayed in the button effect G). In such a configuration, if a special button image is displayed in button effect F, the resurrection effect may not be executed. As a further modification, for button effect G of the second button effect, only the special button image can be displayed, or special button image A (enlarged display) and special button image B (enlarged display) can be displayed as the special button images. and gold display), and special button image B has a higher jackpot expectation than special button image A (or special button image A is not guaranteed to be a jackpot, but special button image B is not guaranteed to be a jackpot. (Yes), and furthermore, it may be configured such that the resurrection effect is not executed when the special button image B is displayed.

<Button Appearance Sound> In the present embodiment, the type of button appearance sound output from the speaker P11 when the button image appears (at the start of the operation validity period) can vary depending on the type of button effect to be executed. It is composed of This button appearance sound is a sound that not only notifies you that a button image has appeared on the screen, but also encourages (instructs) the operation of the production button, and is output immediately before the button image. This may be referred to as an "operation promotion sound," "operation instruction sound," or "pre-appearance sound." The types of button appearance sounds include appearance sound A and appearance sound B. The appearing sound A is a sound effect such as "Pon" or "Pico" that has a relatively low jackpot expectation. The appearing sound B is a sound effect with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, such as "pippoppa" or "shakin", for example. Note that the volume of the appearing sound A and the volume of the appearing sound B may be output at the same volume level, but the volume of the appearing sound B is set to be higher than the volume of the appearing sound A, and the appearing sound It is preferable that the output period of appearance sound B is longer than that of sound A. As a modification, the volume of the appearing sound A may be set to a higher level than the volume of the appearing sound B, or the output period of the appearing sound A may be longer than that of the appearing sound B.

In the first button effect (button effect E), when a button image appears, appearance sound B is never output, and appearance sound A is always output. That is, when the operational validity period of the production button P15 is controlled as the pre-reach notice period and the first validity period, the button appearance sound output when the button image appears is always the appearance sound A.

In the second button effects (button effects F and G), when a button image appears, there are cases in which button appearance sound A is output, and cases in which button appearance sound B is output. In other words, when the operation validity period of the production button P15 is executed as the post-reach notice period and the second validity period, or the winning/losing branch period and the second validity period, the button appearance sound output when the button image appears Either the appearing sound A or the appearing sound B can be selectively output. Note that the appearance sound B may be output in the button effect G, but may be configured not to be output in the button effect F.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the button appearance sound is louder when the button image appears in the second button effects (button effects F, G) than when the button image appears in the first button effect (button effect E). Immediately before the BGM is output, the volume of the BGM that has been output up to that point is likely to be lowered or muted. That is, in the first button performance (button performance E), the probability that the volume of the BGM being output (stage BGM) will be reduced or muted immediately before the button appearance sound is output due to the start of the operation validity period is relative. (particularly compared to the sound immediately before the button appearance sound in the second button effects (button effects F and G) is output), or the sound is not lowered or muted. On the other hand, in the second button effects (button effects F and G), there is a probability that the volume of the BGM being output (reach BGM) will be lowered or muted immediately before the button appearance sound is output due to the start of the operation validity period. is relatively high (especially compared to immediately before the button appearance sound in the first button presentation (button presentation E) is output), or is always lowered or muted. In particular, regarding the button effect G at the time of winning or losing, it is preferable that the volume of the BGM (reach BGM) being output is reduced or muted when the button image appears (when the button appearance sound is output) or immediately before that. That is, immediately before or at the start of the winning/losing branch, it is desirable to limit or suppress the output of the BGM (reach BGM) that is being output in some way (for example, stop playing the BGM, interrupt the playing of the BGM) , set the volume to zero (mute), reduce the volume). In this button performance G, when a successful decision performance (win/loss branch success) is executed in response to the operation of the performance button P15, a BGM dedicated to a jackpot (reach BGM, but only output when a jackpot is achieved) is executed. If the winning BGM is switched to the jackpot exclusive reach BGM) and the winning/losing branch failure effect is executed, the winning BGM (although it is reach BGM, it will be output only when the winning or jackpot occurs and when the revival effect is selected). It is preferable that the BGM can be switched to a dedicated reach BGM) or a BGM stopped state (silenced state).

<Button appearance preview effect> In this embodiment, the button appearance preview effect is executed using the time before the button effect is executed, that is, the time before the button image (operation promotion image) appears on the screen. may be done. This button appearance preview performance is configured as a button appearance suggestion performance (a button appearance promotion performance that incites whether or not a button image will appear) that foretells that a button performance will occur, that is, that a button image will appear on the screen. has been done. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the occurrence of the button effect is determined by the execution of the button appearance suggestion effect (button appearance promotion effect), that is, the appearance of the button image is confirmed.

FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a button appearance preview effect. In this embodiment, the types of button appearance preview performances include a first appearance preview performance and a second appearance preview performance. The button images displayed after this button appearance preview effect include a normal button image (first button image) and a special button image (second button image). Note that although FIG. 195 shows a case where a normal button image is displayed as the button image displayed after the execution of the button appearance preview effect, this is a representative example of a normal button image as an example of a button image. It is also possible to apply a special button image instead of this normal button image. Here, since there is no need to particularly distinguish between normal button images and special button images, they will be simply referred to as "button images" for explanation.

The first appearance preview performance is a normal effect performance that displays an effect image (normal effect image) that imitates an aura of light, as shown in FIG. 195(A). If the button image appears after this normal effect image is displayed, it is a successful effect. On the other hand, even if this normal effect image is displayed, if the button image does not appear and the normal effect image disappears, it will be a failed performance. This first appearance preview performance can be executed regardless of whether the type of button performance is the first button performance or the second button performance.

As shown in FIG. 195(B), the second appearance preview effect is a special effect effect in which effect images (special effect images) representing a plurality of effect buttons P15 in semitransparent form are gathered in one place. A successful performance is achieved when one complete button image (non-transparent button image) is formed by gathering these special effect images in one place and composing them. On the other hand, even if these special effect images are gathered in one place, a button image is not formed and the effect image disappears, resulting in a failed performance. This second appearance preview performance is not executed when the type of button performance is the first button performance, but can be executed when the type of button performance is the second button performance. Here, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the second appearance preview performance is executed than when the first appearance preview performance is executed. In addition, in the case of the second button effect, the second appearance preview effect may be configured to be executed more easily when the button effect G is executed than when the button effect F is executed. In addition, as a modified example, there is a third appearance preview performance that has a higher jackpot expectation and a different performance mode than the first appearance preview performance and the second appearance preview performance, and in button performance E, which is the first button performance, the first appearance If either the preview performance or the second appearance preview performance is executed (the third appearance preview performance is not executed), and the execution probability of the second appearance preview performance is relatively low, in button performance F, which is the second button performance. A button that executes either the first appearance notice performance or the second appearance notice performance (does not execute the third appearance notice performance), has a relatively high execution probability of the second appearance notice performance, and is the second button performance. The performance G may be configured to execute the third appearance preview performance (without executing the first appearance preview performance and the second appearance preview performance).

Here, in the present embodiment, a button effect (referred to as "button effect 1") in which the operational validity period of the effect button P15 is set to a first time which is relatively short, and a button effect (referred to as "button effect 1") of the effect button P15 It may also include a button effect (referred to as "button effect 2") in which the operation valid period is set to a second time which is relatively long. It is assumed that button presentation 1 and button presentation 2 have the same button image displayed during the operational validity period of presentation button P15. At this time, when button effect 1 is executed, there are cases where the operation validity period is set to the first validity period and the first time, and cases where the operation validity period is set to the second validity period and the first time. There is. In addition, when button effect 2 is executed, there are two cases: the operation valid period is set to the first valid period and the second time, and the operation valid period is set to the second valid period and the second time. There is. In addition, as a modification, the above-mentioned button effect 1 is created by focusing on the decreasing speed of the indicator image indicating the remaining time of the operational validity period of the effect button P15 (the speed at which the image representing the length of the remaining time gradually decreases or disappears). may be configured as a button effect in which the rate of decrease of the indicator image is set to be relatively fast, and button effect 2 may be configured as a button effect in which the rate of decrease in the indicator image is set to be relatively slow. In that case, it is preferable to configure both button effects 1 and 2 as single operation effects. Note that when executed not only as a single-shot operation performance but also as a repeated-press operation performance, the speed at which the indicator image decreases is set to be relatively slower for the button performance related to the repeated-press operation performance than for the button performance related to the single-shot operation performance. It is preferable that

In this embodiment, when a first time and a second time are provided as the time values for the operation validity period of the production button P15, the probability that the first time is set as the operation validity period for the winning/losing branch period is Also, the probability that the second time is set as the valid operation period is set relatively high (especially compared to the valid operation period for the pre-reach notice period and the valid operation period for the post-reach notice period). .

In addition, if a first time and a second time are set as the time values of the operation validity period of the production button P15, and if a jackpot is won in the fluctuation display, the time value of the operation validity period is set to the first time. It is configured such that the probability that the button effect 2 whose operation validity period is the second time is higher than the probability that the button effect 1 that is executed is higher than the probability that the button effect 1 that is ).

In addition, if a first time and a second time are set as the time values of the effective period of operation of the effect button, if button effect 2 whose time value of the effective period of operation is the second time is executed during the fluctuating display. Although the probability that a further button effect will be executed after the execution of this button effect 2 is relatively low, if button effect 1 whose operation valid period time value is the first time is executed during the variable display. Moreover, the probability that a further button effect will be executed after the execution of this button effect 2 is configured to be relatively high. As a modified example, if a first time and a second time are provided as the time values of the effective period of operation of the effect button, button effect 1 whose time value of the effective period of operation is the first time is executed during the variable display. , the probability that a further button effect will be executed after the execution of button effect 1 is relatively low, but button effect 2 whose operation valid period time value is the second time is executed during the fluctuation display. In this case, the probability that a further button effect will be executed after the execution of button effect 2 may be configured to be relatively high.

(Information performance accompanying the button performance at the time of winning/losing branch) Next, the notification performance accompanying the button performance at the time of winning/losing branch will be explained. FIG. 196 is a time chart when the button effect is executed at the time of the winning/losing branch of the variable jackpot display.

First, at time t91, a variable display of a jackpot is started as the variable display. At time t92, during the execution of the variable display, the SP reaches reach. At time t93, a button effect occurs at the time of winning or losing at the end of SP reach, and a second valid period is set as the operation valid period of this button effect. That is, the button effect executed at this time point t93 is a button effect (second button effect) in which the operation valid period is the second valid period and the win/loss branch period.

Subsequently, at time t94, when the performance button P15 is operated within the operation validity period, the operation validity period ends and an operation trigger performance (decision success performance) that suggests a jackpot win is started. In this operation trigger effect, a successful decision image (for example, a rainbow-colored effect image) is displayed on the screen, and an effect effect in which the first movable accessory P651 falls in front of this screen is performed. At this time point t94, at the same time as the start of the operation trigger effect, a first notification effect in which a jackpot confirmation sound (one-shot notification sound) is output from the speaker P11 as a notification effect to notify the jackpot, and a effect lamp LP are activated. A second notification effect in which the light is lit in a specific light emission pattern (rainbow light emission pattern) and a third notification effect in which the notification mode of the effect button P15 is set to the fourth mode (rainbow light and vibration) are started.

Subsequently, at time t95, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation trigger performance, the output of the jackpot confirmation sound is stopped, and the first notification performance ends. Furthermore, at time t96, the first movable accessory P651 returns to the initial position, thereby ending the operation trigger performance. Further, at this time point t96, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (jackpot). At time t97, during the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, the notification mode of the production button P15 is switched from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration), The announcement performance ends. Furthermore, at time t98, the lighting of the production lamp LP is stopped, thereby ending the second notification production. Then, at time t99, the fluctuating display ends, and the decorative symbols are fixed and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (jackpot). In this way, in the present embodiment, by gradually ending the first notification effect (audio notification), the second notification effect (lighting notification), and the third notification effect (vibration notification), the operation trigger effect ( The player can fully experience the aftereffects of the result (win/lose branch performance) that is advantageous for the player (jackpot). It should be noted that the second notification performance may be configured not to end during the fluctuation, but to continue to be executed after the fluctuation ends (after the start of the jackpot game).

In the above embodiment, at time t97 during the jackpot fluctuation display, the notification mode of the production button P15 returns from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration). However, after the notification mode of this performance button P15 returns from the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration), a predetermined promotion performance is executed. As a trigger, the notification mode of this button effect may be configured to change again to the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration). In this predetermined promotion performance, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a predetermined jackpot type (for example, a combination indicating a normal jackpot such as "2, 2, 2" or "4, 4, 4") is temporarily stopped and then displayed again. By performing a variable display, a combination of decorative patterns indicating a specific jackpot type that is more advantageous than this predetermined jackpot type (for example, a combination indicating a specific jackpot such as "3.3.3" or "7.7.7") ) will be displayed as a confirmed stop or not. If the combination of decorative symbols indicating a specific jackpot type is fixed and stopped after the re-variation is displayed, it will be a promotion success effect, and after the re-variation is displayed, the combination of decorative symbols indicating the specific jackpot type is not fixed and displayed. If the combination of decorative symbols indicating the predetermined jackpot type is fixed and stopped again, it becomes a promotion failure performance. If this promotion performance (re-lottery performance) becomes a successful promotion performance, the execution of the successful promotion performance will trigger the notification mode of the performance button P15 to change from the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration) to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration). It changes again to the 4 notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration). On the other hand, if this promotion performance (re-lottery performance) becomes a promotion failure performance, even if the promotion failure performance is executed, the notification mode of the performance button P15 changes to the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration). The first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration) continues without changing again. Here, if the notification mode of the performance button P15 changes again to the fourth notification mode (rainbow lighting and vibration) with the execution of the successful promotion performance, from the timing when the second notification performance ends. It is preferable that the notification mode of the production button P15 returns to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration) at a timing earlier than that (before the production lamp LP goes out). Here, the notification mode of the production button P15 returns to the first notification mode (white lighting and non-vibration) at a timing before the timing when the second notification performance ends (before the production lamp LP goes out). (1) When the notification mode of the production button P15 first becomes the fourth notification mode (time t94), the first notification effect and the second notification effect are started at the same time, and then these After all of the first to third notification effects have finished (the second notification effect has ended last), when the notification mode of the production button P15 changes again to the fourth mode due to the successful promotion effect, the first notification effect and (2) The case where the notification mode of the production button P15 returns to the first notification mode at a timing before the timing when the second notification production starts at the same time and the second notification production ends, and (2) the case where the production button P15 is first returned to the first notification mode. When the notification mode of P15 becomes the fourth notification mode (time t94), the first notification effect and the second notification effect are started at the same time, and then the first notification effect and the third notification effect are ended (time t94). 2 notification effect does not end), when the notification mode of the performance button P15 changes again to the fourth mode due to the promotion success effect executed while the second notification effect continues, the first notification effect are started at the same time (the second notification effect continues here as well), and then the notification mode of the effect button P15 returns to the first notification mode at a timing before the timing at which the second notification effect ends. Either.

The main effects achieved in the seventh embodiment (including modified examples) can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the seventh embodiment, the decorative pattern (first image) and the background image (second image) displayed behind the decorative pattern are operated in different ways during fluctuation standby and during fluctuation display. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding and confusing the state in which the fluctuation is on standby and the state in which the fluctuation is being displayed, and to realize a game performance that does not make the player feel bored. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the seventh embodiment, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the standby action performance, the display mode of the decorative symbols in the standby action performance is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the burden of control processing during the variable standby period, attract players' interest in the gaming machine even during the variable standby period, and ultimately improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. can.

Further, according to the seventh embodiment, when a starting prize (special map prize) occurs during the execution of the standby motion performance, the current gaming state (low base state, high base state) and the winning state Regardless of the type of starting opening, if a starting winning (special drawing winning) occurs while a predetermined performance (waiting winning performance) is executed using the starting winning as an opportunity, while the fluctuating movement performance is being executed, Depending on the current gaming state (low base state, high base state) and the type of winning start opening, the possibility of executing a specific performance (same color symbol stop pre-reading performance) that can be executed in response to the winning start is made different. By doing so, it is possible to further increase the interest and attention of the players in the performance that is performed in response to the starting prize winning, and it is also possible to eliminate the monotony of the prescribed performance and specific performance, and as a result, the interest of the game can be increased. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

Further, according to the seventh embodiment, the display mode of the decorative pattern (first pattern) and the background pattern (second pattern) in the standby motion performance is changed to the decorative pattern (first pattern) in the immediately preceding fixed stop period. By continuously displaying the background pattern and the background pattern (second pattern), it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player when performing this standby action effect, and also to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. It is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the player is in a variable standby state (it is possible to clearly notify that the player is in a variable standby state), and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the seventh embodiment, by repeatedly executing the image deformation effect during the execution of the fluctuating movement effect, the fluctuating movement (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern, the second movement of the background image, and the deformation It is possible to realize a novel and unique game effect by combining the deformation operation of the target image, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the seventh embodiment, the dynamic display speed (loop display speed) of the stage background image displayed in the low base state is relatively slow, and the tempo of the stage BGM output in the low base state is set relatively low. While relatively slowing down, the dynamic display speed (loop display speed) of the stage background image displayed in the high base state is relatively fast, and the tempo of the stage BGM output in the high base state is made relatively fast. By making the speed relatively faster, it is possible to create harmony and a sense of unity between the stage background image and the stage BGM in each game state, thereby further enhancing the production effect in mode production (stage production), and as a result. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the seventh embodiment, when the button effect is executed during the variable display, the type of operation valid period of the effect button P15 (first valid period, second valid period) and the operation of the effect button P15 are determined. By making the notification mode of the performance button P15 different after the operation validity period ends depending on the type of the operation trigger performance performed as a trigger, the current gaming situation can be informed to the player according to the notification mode of the performance button P15. In addition to being able to provide accurate notifications (preventing players from proceeding with the game based on erroneous understanding), it is possible to diversify player-participatory button presentations, and As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the seventh embodiment, even when a button effect is executed multiple times in one variable display, the type of operation validity period is determined according to the execution timing of the button effect (before reaching, after reaching, winning/losing branch). (1st validity period, 2nd validity period), the appearance rate of button effects according to the number of reserved special drawings, the type of button images, the appearance notice pattern of button images, etc. It is possible to diversify button presentations and to realize button presentations that will not make the player feel bored, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the seventh embodiment, regarding various notification performances performed in synchronization with the operation trigger performance (win/lose branch performance) of the button performance, the first notification performance (audio notification) and the second notification performance (lighting notification) By gradually ending the third notification performance (vibration notification), it is possible to allow the player to fully experience the aftereffects of the operation-triggered performance (win/loss branch performance) resulting in an advantageous result for the player (jackpot). As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Eighth Embodiment] Next, a Pachinko gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine according to one or a combination of two or more of the second to seventh embodiments described above. (including those that have been partially deleted or converted using well-known/commonly used technology, etc.), and hereinafter, parts with similar configurations will be given the same reference numerals and explanations will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be explained. explain. That is, in the following description, the same configuration as the second to seventh embodiments described above can be applied, except in special cases.

Below, the basic configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be explained in order. The pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment is a game machine equipped with a suppression function that stops and notifies the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Note that the predetermined condition corresponds to a suppression function activation condition described later.

<Board Structure> First, the board structure of the Pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be briefly described. In this eighth embodiment, similarly to the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 133), the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 mainly enters the first starting port P51 arranged below the center decoration P21. , you can enter any of the general winning holes P61 to P63. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can mainly enter any one of the operating gate P53, the second starting opening P52, and the big prize opening P54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration P21. On the other hand, at the lower end of the game area PA, an out port P29 is provided for discharging game balls that have flown down without entering each winning hole to the back side of the game board P20. In this example, similarly to the fifth embodiment described above, the number of game balls that are launched into the game area PA and used for the game, that is, the number of game balls that enter each winning hole or out hole P29 of the game area PA. The number of game balls (played balls) discharged to the back side of the game board P20 is counted by a played ball detection switch P891, which will be described later. In addition, among the game areas PA equipped with various winning openings, the hitting method in which the game balls are fired so as to flow down to the left area PA1 is called "left-handed hitting", and the game ball is flown down to the right area PA2. The method of hitting the game ball in such a way as to cause the player to hit the ball is called "right-handed hitting."

<Electrical configuration of gaming machine> Next, the electrical configuration of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the main control board P100 is equipped with a setting key switch P810, a RAM clear switch P820, a performance display monitor P830, etc., as in the fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 116). . In addition, the main control board P100 includes a played ball detection switch P891 for detecting a game ball ejected from the game area PA, and a played ball detection switch P891 for detecting a game ball ejected from the game area PA, as in the fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 116). A frame opening switch P892 and the like for detecting whether or not the front frame P2 is opened is electrically connected. These played ball detection switch P891 and frame release switch P892 output their respective detection signals to the main CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit P104. Also in this eighth embodiment, the main control display device P27 (see FIG. 106) includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device P72, a first special symbol holding lamp P73, a second Various display means such as a special symbol holding lamp P74, a normal symbol display device P75, a normal symbol holding lamp P76, a round indicator light P77, a status indicator light P78, a right-handed indicator light P79, and an error indicator light Er are provided. Also in this eighth embodiment, the sub control display device P28 (see FIG. 134) includes a first fluctuation state auxiliary display section P801, a second fluctuation state auxiliary display section P802, and a first pending number auxiliary display section P803. , a second reservation number auxiliary display section P804, and other various display means are provided. As described above, this sub-control display device P28 auxiliary displays some of the various information displayed by the main control display device P27. Note that the other configurations are basically the same as those in the second embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

<Main functional configuration of gaming machine> Next, various functions of the gaming machine (mainly main control board P100/performance control board P200) of the eighth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 197 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine (mainly main control board P100/performance control board P200) of the eighth embodiment. The main control board P100 of the eighth embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment and the like in that it is equipped with a suppression function control means P177. The inhibitory function control means P177 executes control to activate the inhibitory function when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Note that the main control board P100 of the eighth embodiment includes a power-on transition mode control means P175 similarly to the fifth embodiment described above. As described above, this power-on transition mode control means P175 operates in four modes (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode). The contents of the transition mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode) when the power is turned on are explained in detail in the fifth embodiment, so their explanation will be omitted here. (See Embodiment 5).

<Game Specifications> Next, the basic game specifications of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the basic game specifications of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. The game specifications of the eighth embodiment (FIG. 198) are basically the same as the game specifications of the fifth embodiment (FIG. 121) described above, and the differences from the game specifications of the fifth embodiment will be explained below. (Jackpot type) will be explained.

The jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of this eighth embodiment will be explained. In the eighth embodiment, when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is "jackpot", the jackpot type (jackpot symbol, symbol group) is determined with reference to the special symbol jackpot symbol table shown in FIG. 199. As mentioned above, "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, and "normal jackpot" means the special jackpot after the end of the jackpot game. It means a jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) that does not trigger the probability variation function of the symbol. Details will be described later, but if you win a specific jackpot, the special symbol probability fluctuation function will be activated after the end of the jackpot game, and the number of times the special symbol will change will be displayed the specified ST number of times starting from the end of the jackpot game. (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). In addition, even if you win either a "specific jackpot" or a "regular jackpot", the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and electric chew support function will be activated after the jackpot game ends, and the calculation will start from after the jackpot game ends. The display continues until the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (100 times). In addition, in this example, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric support support function start operating at the same time and end their operation at the same time, so the "number of fluctuation time reduction times" and the "number of electric support support functions" are the same. (Therefore, in FIG. 199, the "number of times the fluctuation time is shortened" and the "number of times the electric support is activated" are written in the same column).

FIG. 199(A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. This first special symbol jackpot symbol table includes the symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electronic support frequency), and the prescribed round of the jackpot game for the symbol random number per special symbol. The opening time of the big prize opening P54 of each round is associated with each other. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are set: 5R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 5R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

If the first special symbol "5R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is "5 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is The long opening time is set to ``29 seconds'' in which there is a sufficient possibility that the number of game balls entering the winning hole P54 will reach the specified number (specified count number: 10). In addition, if you win the first special symbol "5R specific jackpot (symbol group A)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of probability fluctuations "100 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions "100 times", The number of supports is set to ``100 times,'' and a variable probability game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability game state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within the specified ST number (100 times). If the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

If you win the first special symbol "5R normal jackpot (symbol group B)", the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is "5 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is The long opening time is set to ``29 seconds'' in which there is a sufficient possibility that the number of game balls entering the winning hole P54 will reach the specified number (specified count number: 10). In addition, if you win the first special symbol "5R normal jackpot (symbol group B)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of probability fluctuations will be "0 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions will be "100 times", and the number of fluctuation time reductions will be "100 times". The number of support "100 times" is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable reaches a predetermined number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this predetermined number of times (100 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (100 times), a transition is made to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

FIG. 199(B) is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. This second special symbol jackpot symbol table includes the symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electron support frequency), and the prescribed round of the jackpot game for the symbol random number per special symbol. The opening time of the big prize opening P54 of each round is associated with each other. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, two types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are set: 10R specific jackpot (symbol group C) and 5R normal jackpot (symbol group D).

If you win the second special symbol "10R specific jackpot (symbol group C)", the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is "10 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is The long opening time is set to ``29 seconds'' in which there is a sufficient possibility that the number of game balls entering the winning hole P54 will reach the specified number (specified count number: 10). In addition, if you win the second special symbol "10R specific jackpot (symbol group C)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of probability fluctuations "100 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions "100 times", The number of supports is set to ``100 times,'' and a variable probability game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this specified ST number (100 times). If the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the prescribed ST number (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

If you win the second special symbol "5R normal jackpot (symbol group D)", the specified number of rounds for the jackpot game is "5 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot P54 in one round game is The long opening time is set to ``29 seconds'' in which there is a sufficient possibility that the number of game balls entering the winning hole P54 will reach the specified number (specified count number: 10). In addition, if you win the second special symbol "5R normal jackpot (symbol group D)", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of probability fluctuations will be "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions will be "100", and the The number of support "100 times" is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a variable reaches a predetermined number (100 times) or until the next jackpot occurs within this predetermined number of times (100 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (100 times), a transition is made to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

The expected value of winning prize balls for each jackpot type is as follows. The "expected prize ball acquisition value" is the number of prize balls (theoretical number of prize balls) that a player can expect to obtain in one jackpot game. The expected prize ball acquisition value for the first special symbol "5R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is set to 750 (5 rounds x 10 counts x 15 award balls = 750 balls). Furthermore, the expected prize ball acquisition value for the first special symbol "5R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is set to 750 (5 rounds x 10 counts x 15 award balls = 750 balls). Furthermore, the expected prize ball acquisition value for the second special symbol "10R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is set to 1500 (10 rounds x 10 counts x 15 prize balls = 1500). Furthermore, the expected value of winning prize balls for the second special symbol "5R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is set to 750 (5 rounds x 10 counts x 15 prize balls = 750 balls).

<Suppression Function> Next, the suppression function of the gaming machine will be explained. The suppression function, which will be described in detail later, is a function that stops the game and provides notification when a predetermined count value "MY" reaches a predetermined value.

In this embodiment, data regarding the suppression function is stored in the suppression function information storage area P103D of the RAMP 103 provided in the main control board P100.

Here, FIG. 200(A) is a diagram schematically showing the storage area of the RAMP 103 of the main control board P100. The RAMP103 is provided with a game control information storage area P103A, a setting value information storage area P103B, a performance information storage area P103C, a suppression function information storage area P103D, and the like. The game information storage area P103A stores information for controlling the progress of the game (information regarding the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, information regarding the jackpot game, information regarding the gaming state, information regarding the payout of prize balls, etc.). ing. The set value information storage area P103B stores set value information for specifying the probability of winning (jackpot probability) that the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot. The performance information storage area P103C stores information for specifying performance information (base value) of the game. Note that this performance information storage area P103C may store information used for processing for conducting a test specified by the game rules. The suppression function information storage area P103D stores information for controlling the suppression function.

FIG. 200(B) is a diagram schematically showing the suppression function information storage area P103D of the RAMP103. The suppression function information storage area P103D is provided with a MY counter P1038, a suppression function activation flag P1039, and the like.

MY counter P1038 is a counter for counting MY. “MY” is a count value based on the difference in the number of pitches between the number of safes and the number of outs, as shown in formula (A) below, and is the number of gaming values given to the player (the number of balls the player owns or This is an indicator that shows the number of balls a machine puts out. MY = Number of safes (planned number of prize balls) - Number of outs (number of balls played)... (A)

The suppression function activation flag P1039 is a flag indicating that the count value of the MY counter P1038 has reached a predetermined threshold value (definition value = "95000" described later), that is, that the suppression function activation condition described below is satisfied. The suppression function activation flag P1039 turns ON when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied. Furthermore, the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned OFF when the power is turned on accompanied by RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820).

Here, FIG. 201 is a diagram for explaining the number of additions and the number of subtractions of the MY counter P1038. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters each winning hole or out hole P29, the MY counter P1038 is updated (added/subtracted).

In this embodiment, the safe number is added to the count value of the MY counter P1038. The "safe number" is the number of game balls (safe balls) that are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls from the payout device (prize ball payout unit P34) based on the entry of game balls into each winning hole, that is, This means the planned number of prize balls. That is, the safe number in this embodiment is not the actual number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout device, but the planned number of prize balls that the main CPU 101 has decided to have the payout device pay out. MY counter P1038 indicates that when one game ball enters the first starting port P51 (when the first starting port switch P511 detects the entering of a game ball), one game ball enters the first starting port P51. Add "4" as the safe number (planned number of prize balls) to be paid out when the ball enters the ball. Furthermore, when one game ball enters the second starting port P52 (when the second starting port switch P521 detects the entry of a game ball), the MY counter P1038 indicates that a game ball enters the second starting port P52. "1" is added as the safe number (planned number of prize balls) to be paid out when the ball enters the ball. In addition, when one game ball enters the general winning holes P61 to P64 (when the general winning hole switches P611 and 641 detect the ball entering the game ball), the MY counter P1038 enters the general winning holes P61 to P64. "3" is added as the safe number (planned number of prize balls) that is scheduled to be paid out when the game ball enters the ball. In addition, MY counter P1038 indicates that when one game ball enters the big winning hole P54 (when the big winning hole switch P541 detects the entering of a game ball), a game ball enters the big winning hole P54. ``15'' is added as the safe number (planned number of prize balls) that is scheduled to be paid out.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of outs is subtracted from the count value of the MY counter P1038. "Number of outs" refers to the number of game balls (out balls) launched into the gaming area PA and used for the game, that is, each winning opening (first starting opening P51, second starting opening P52, This is the number of game balls (out balls) that entered the general winning holes P61 to P64, the big winning hole P54) or the out hole P29 and were discharged to the back side of the game board P20. Incidentally, an out ball is detected by the above-mentioned played ball detection switch P891. The MY counter P1038 subtracts "1" from the number of outs every time the played ball detection switch P891 makes one out ball. However, when the MY counter P1038 is "0", even if an out ball (played ball) is detected by the played ball detection switch P891, the MY counter P1038 is not subtracted. In other words, the count value of MY counter P1038 does not become a value less than "0" (negative value), and even if an out ball (played ball) occurs in a situation where the count value of MY counter P1038 is "0", However, the value corresponding to the number of outs is not subtracted, and the count value of the MY counter P1038 remains "0".

In addition, each time the main CPU 101 updates the MY counter P1038, it generates a production control command (referred to as a "difference ball number signal") for specifying the count value of the MY counter P1038, and sends this to the production control board. Output to P200. The performance control board P200 executes a suppression function related performance (advance notification performance, suppression notification performance), which will be described later, based on this differential pitch count signal.

Next, a specific example of how to update the MY counter P1038 will be described. FIG. 202(A) is a diagram conceptually showing the count value of the MY counter P1038. The horizontal axis shows the time axis, and the vertical axis shows the count value of the MY counter P1038. FIG. 202(B) is a diagram conceptually showing the actual cumulative value of the number of differential pitches. The horizontal axis shows the time axis, and the vertical axis shows the actual cumulative value of the number of differential pitches. Here, the "count value of MY counter P1038" indicates the cumulative value (processed value) of the number of difference balls when the number of outs is not subtracted when the number of balls difference between the number of safes and the number of outs is "0" or less. However, the "actual cumulative value of the number of differential pitches" is the cumulative value of the number of differential pitches when subtracting the number of outs even when the number of differential pitches between the number of safes and the number of outs is "0" or less ). Note that (A) and (B) in the figure show the same event, and each time point t101 to t107 correspond to each other. Further, it is assumed that no power-off or power-return occurs between time points t101 and t107.

First, it is assumed that the count value of the MY counter P1038 is "0" at the start of the game at time t101. Since the number of outs exceeds the number of safes from time t101 to time t102, the actual cumulative value of the number of differential pitches tends to decrease (downward to the right). Note that if the count value of MY counter P1038 is "0", even if the number of outs is counted (even if the game ball is fired), the count value of MY counter P1038 will not be subtracted (the count value of MY counter P1038 cannot be a negative value).

At time t102, for example, the first jackpot occurs and the jackpot game is started. As a result, from time t102 to time t103, the number of safes exceeds the number of outs, and the actual cumulative value of the number of differential pitches turns to an increasing trend (upwards to the right). Therefore, the count value of the MY counter P1038 continues to increase by the difference in the number of pitches between the number of safes and the number of outs from time t102 to t103, with time t102 as a reference (bottom value=0). Then, at time t103, the first jackpot game ends. Assume that at this time point 103, the count value of the MY counter P1038 is "700".

Subsequently, from time t103 to time t105, the next jackpot does not occur and the number of outs falls below the safe number, so that the actual accumulated value of the number of differential balls again tends to decrease (downward to the right). Here, from time t103 to time t104, the count value of the MY counter P1038 is greater than "1", so it continues to decrease by the difference in the number of pitches between the number of safes and the number of outs. That is, during the period from time t103 to t104, the count value of the MY counter P1038 is subtracted, unlike the period from time t101 to t102. At time t104, the actual cumulative value of the number of differential pitches at time t104 decreases to the same value as the actual cumulative value of the number of differential pitches at time t102, so that the count value of MY counter P1038 becomes "0" again. ”. As a result, even if the number of outs is counted (even if a game ball is fired) from time t104 to time t105, the count value of MY counter P1038 will not be subtracted (the count value of MY counter P1038 will not be a negative value). ).

Subsequently, at time t105, for example, a second jackpot occurs, and the jackpot game is started. As a result, from time t105 to time t106, the number of safes exceeds the number of outs, and the actual cumulative value of the number of differential pitches starts to increase again (upwardly to the right). Therefore, the count value of the MY counter P1038 continues to increase by the difference in the number of pitches between the number of safes and the number of outs from time t105 to t106, with time t105 as a reference (bottom value=0). Then, at time t106, the second jackpot game ends. Assume that at this time point 106, the count value of the MY counter P1038 is "1400". Thereafter, after a plurality of jackpot games, the cumulative value of the number of differential pitches repeatedly decreases and increases, but the overall trend continues to increase. Then, at time t107, the suppression function is activated when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a specified value "95000", which will be described later. In addition, if the time point t107 is when a jackpot game is being executed, that is, if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a specified value "95000" described later while the jackpot game is being executed, the suppression is performed after the jackpot game ends. The function will be activated.

<<Operation of suppression function>> In the present embodiment, the suppression function is activated when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined threshold value (referred to as a "specified value"). That is, the activation condition for the suppression function (referred to as "suppression function activation condition") is that the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a specified value. In this embodiment, "95000" is set as the specified value, and the suppression function activation condition is established when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000." As described above, when the inhibitory function activation conditions are satisfied, the inhibitory function activation flag P1039 provided in the RAMP103 (inhibitory function information storage area P103D) is turned ON. In addition, when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" and satisfies the suppression function activation condition, the suppression function is activated until the suppression function is canceled (until the suppression function activation flag P1039 turns OFF). Even if a safe ball or an out ball occurs during this period), the count value of the MY counter P1038 is not updated (added or subtracted), and the count value of the MY counter P1038 maintains the specified value "95000". In other words, the upper limit value of the MY counter P1038 is "95000", and even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter P1038 will not be updated from "95000". As a supplement, even if MY falls below "95000" after MY reaches or exceeds "95000", the value of MY counter P1038 will not be updated from "95000". In other words, before MY reaches "95000", the MY counter P1038 is updated in conjunction with the update of MY. In addition, as a modified example, even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of MY counter P1038 may also be updated in conjunction, that is, it may be updated to exceed "95000", and MY becomes "95000". Even if MY falls below "95000" after reaching or exceeding , the value of the MY counter P1038 may also be updated accordingly, that is, it may be updated below "95000." Even in such a configuration, since the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON when the MY counter P1038 reaches "95000," the suppression function can be reliably activated. As another modification, when MY exceeds "95000", the value of MY counter P1038 is set to "95000" and then switched to "0" (initialized (cleared)), and the value of MY counter P1038 is changed to "0" (initialized (cleared)). It may also be configured such that it is not updated (fixed at "0"). Even in such a configuration, since the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON when the MY counter P1038 reaches "95000," the suppression function can be reliably activated.

In this embodiment, when the suppression function is activated, the game enters a game stop state and the progress of the game is stopped. At this time, the main CPU 101 disables the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79) as a game stop process when the suppression function is activated, and prohibits the execution of each control process S51 to S77 executed in the timer interrupt process. Stop. As an example, when the suppression function is activated, special symbol validity determination, symbol determination, fluctuation pattern determination, etc. are not executed, and the high base state and special games are also not executed. Further, when the suppressing function is activated, the operation of the firing device is restricted, and the firing of the game ball is stopped regardless of the operation of the firing handle P12. However, even if the suppression function is activated, if there are game balls to be paid out (prize balls based on winnings before the suppression function is activated), the payout device (payout control board P400 and prize ball payout unit) P34, etc.) is allowed, and the game ball is paid out without delay. In other words, since the addition of the MY counter P1038 is not based on the actual number of prize balls that have actually been paid out, but on the scheduled number of prize balls that are scheduled to be paid out from now on, the amount of prize balls that corresponds to the scheduled number of prize balls is Even in a situation where all the balls have not been paid out, if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" by adding the planned number of prize balls, (of course, the suppression function activation condition is satisfied) However, even in that case, the remaining portion of the scheduled number of prize balls (the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out when the suppression function starts operating) will not be paid out until the end. It is being done properly. Therefore, in this embodiment, although the details will be described later, even when the suppression function is in operation, a prize ball error (payout error) occurs in the gaming machine due to the payout of game balls while the suppression function is in operation. In some cases, an error notification corresponding to the prize ball error will be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the jackpot game is not being executed, the prize ball that triggered the count value of MY counter P1038 to reach the specified value "95000" (for example, the count value of MY counter P1038 is "94999") ”, when the number of prize balls of “3” is paid out by entering the game balls into the general winning holes P61 to P64), MY counter P1
The payout of the prize balls for which the count value of 038 exceeds the specified value "95000" (in the above example, the remaining one prize ball) is also made sure to be paid out until the end (However, of course, after that Prize balls will not be paid out based on winnings).

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the suppression function is activated, the game stops state and the firing stop state is entered, but the configuration is not limited to this, and when the suppression function is activated, the game stop state is entered. However, it may be configured such that the firing state does not shift to the firing stop state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" while the jackpot game is not being executed (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), and when the MY counter P1038 is The activation timing of the suppression function differs depending on when the count value of P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied).

First, when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while the jackpot game is not being executed, the suppression function is activated at the same time or substantially at the same time as the suppression function activation condition is satisfied. In other words, when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while the jackpot game is not being executed, the time when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied and the time when the suppression function is activated are substantially the same timing. In this embodiment, as a situation in which a jackpot game is not being executed, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while a symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, whether the fluctuating display is a losing fluctuating display or a jackpot fluctuating display is determined. Regardless, the suppression function is activated when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000"). Therefore, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the suppression function is activated without waiting for the fluctuating display to stop displaying (even before the fluctuating display is stopped). The suppression function is activated when the activation conditions are satisfied, and the fluctuation display is forcibly terminated at an intermediate stage. Therefore, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation display, you will not be able to enjoy the jackpot game that was originally scheduled to be played after the fluctuation display ends, and the profits (prizes) obtained in the jackpot game will not be able to be enjoyed. ball). The reason for this is that even if the game is forcibly stopped in the middle of the fluctuating display of the jackpot, the player cannot know the result of the game (that he has won the jackpot) at this point. This is because even if the game suddenly stops, there is little risk that the player will feel dissatisfied or distrustful. In addition, in this embodiment, while the second starting port P52 (normal electric accessory P522) is long open in the high base state, the second starting port P52 (normal electric accessory P522) in the open state is opened. Even if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" due to the prize ball based on the game ball entering the game ball, the MY counter is Even if the count value of P1038 reaches the specified value "95000", the second starting port P52 (normal electric accessory P522) is forcibly closed when the specified value is reached (it is closed even if the opening time remains) It is preferable that

On the other hand, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a jackpot game, the suppression function will not operate until the jackpot game (jackpot end demo) ends, and will be suppressed after the jackpot game (jackpot end demo) ends. The function will work. In other words, if the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, it becomes possible to continue playing from the time when the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied until the end of the jackpot game, and the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied. The timings when the condition is satisfied and when the suppression function is activated are substantially different. The reason for this is that if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a jackpot game, even if the jackpot game is not immediately stopped and the game is continued, the player will be limited to a limited number of pieces in the remaining round games. The player will not receive excessive profits (there will be no sense of unfairness with other players); This is because if the suppression function is activated and the game is stopped, there is a risk that the player will feel distrustful or dissatisfied.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, the suppression function will not operate until the end of the final round of the jackpot game, and after the end of the final round. It may be configured such that a suppressing function is activated. In addition, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a jackpot game, the suppression function will not operate until the start of the jackpot end demonstration of the jackpot game, and the suppression function will be activated after the start of the jackpot end demonstration. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, even if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during execution of the jackpot game (even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the jackpot game ends. If a safe pitch or an out pitch occurs during this period (until the suppression function is activated), the count value of the MY counter P1038 may be configured to be updateable. In that case, even if the count value of MY counter P1038 falls below the specified value "95000" after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (even if it returns to the state before the suppression function activation condition was satisfied) ), it is possible to apply a configuration in which the suppression function operates after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, once the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, even if the count value of MY counter P1038 increases or decreases from the specified value "95000" until the jackpot game ends, the jackpot will not be activated. It may also be configured such that the suppression function is guaranteed to operate when the game ends. In addition, even in this modification, after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, until the jackpot game ends, prize balls will not be paid out based on the entry of game balls into the jackpot P54. It is possible.

<<Cancellation of Suppression Function>> Next, a method for canceling the suppression function will be described. In this embodiment, when the suppression function is activated, the activation of the suppression function can be canceled by RAM clear processing when the power is turned on. That is, when the suppression function is activated, the suppression function activation flag P1039 is switched from ON to OFF by powering off the gaming machine and then returning the power with RAM clear (operation of RAM clear switch P820). , the suppression function can be deactivated. Here, power restoration accompanied by RAM clear (operation of RAM clear switch P820) means transition to "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode" as a transition mode when the gaming machine is powered on (power restored). This is when the power is restored. Further, power restoration without RAM clearing refers to power restoration in the case of transitioning to "setting confirmation mode" or "gaming mode" as a transition mode when the gaming machine is powered on (power restored). The transition mode at the time of power-on (power recovery) is described in detail in the fifth embodiment, so the explanation is omitted here (please refer to the fifth embodiment for details).

In addition, when the suppression function is activated, if the power is restored without RAM clear (operation of RAM clear switch P820) after the gaming machine is powered off, the suppression function activation flag P1039 is switched from ON to OFF. The suppression function will not be canceled. In that case, even after the power is restored, the suppression function will operate, and the game stop state and firing stop state will continue.

In addition, if the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game (when the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON), the power is turned off before the jackpot game ends, and the RAM is cleared (RAM clear switch If the power is restored with a power return (operation on P820), the suppression function activation flag P1039 switches from ON to OFF at the time of the power return, so that even if the jackpot game restarted after the power return ends, the suppression will be disabled. Function does not work.

On the other hand, if the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game (when the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON), the power is turned off before the jackpot game ends, and the RAM is cleared (RAM clear switch If the power is restored without the power being restored (operation on P820), the suppression function activation flag P1039 will not switch from ON to OFF when the power is restored, so the suppression will be disabled when the jackpot game restarted after the power is restored ends. The function works.

<<Initialization of MY counter>> Next, a method for initializing the MY counter P1038 will be described. FIG. 203 is a diagram for explaining a method of initializing the MY counter P1038.

In the present embodiment, if the gaming machine is powered off and then restored before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag P1039 is OFF), the power recovery will cause RAM clearing (RAM clear switch P820). MY counter P1038 is cleared when the power is restored (MY counter P1038 is set to "0"), even if the power is restored with a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820) or without RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch P820). become). In other words, as long as the suppression function activation conditions are not satisfied, the MY counter P1038 will be cleared when the gaming machine is powered on, regardless of whether the RAM clear switch P820 is operated at power-on (before the power is turned off). count value is cleared). Therefore, before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the transition mode when the gaming machine returns to power (when the power is turned on) is any of the above-mentioned RAM clear mode, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or gaming mode. Also, the MY counter P1038 will be cleared when the power is restored.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine is powered off and then restored after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag P1039 is ON), the power restoration will clear the RAM (by operating the RAM clear switch P820). If the power is restored without any interruption, the MY counter P1038 is not cleared at the time of the power restoration and takes over the count value (95000) before the power outage. Additionally, if the gaming machine is powered off and then restored after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag P1039 is ON), the power recovery will clear the RAM (by operating the RAM clear switch P820). If the power supply is restored along with the power supply, the MY counter P1038 is cleared at the time of the power supply restoration (the count value before the power cut is erased).

As a modification of this embodiment, the MY counter P1038 is initialized (cleared) when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000", that is, when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied. It may be configured so that

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, an operating means (referred to as a "count continuation switch") for inhibiting initialization of the MY counter P1038 may be mounted on the main control board P100. For example, even if the power is turned off before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of the advance notification effect described later and the power is restored without clearing the RAM, the power is restored (RAM) while operating the count continuation switch. If the power is returned without clearing), the MY counter P1038 is not initialized (cleared) at the time of the power return, and continues to have the count value before the power was turned off.

<<External information signal related to suppression function>> Next, an external information signal related to the suppression function will be described. In this embodiment, among the external information signals output by the external information terminal board P600, external information signals related to the suppression function include a suppression function pre-activation signal and a suppression function activation signal. FIG. 204 is a time chart of the inhibitory function pre-activation signal and the inhibitory function activation signal.

(Signal before suppression function activation) The signal before suppression function activation is an external information signal indicating that the suppression function is scheduled to operate soon. The pre-inhibition function activation signal is continuously output for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) at a predetermined timing before the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000". The predetermined trigger is when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a specific value (for example, any numerical value greater than or equal to 90,000 and less than 95,000 is applicable). In this embodiment, for example, "94500", which is a value 500 values before the specified value "95000", is adopted as the specific value. Therefore, the output start timing of the suppression function pre-activation signal is not the same or substantially the same timing as the execution start timing of the advance notification effect (described later) (not substantially the same timing).

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value "90000", a pre-inhibition function activation signal is output, and the output timing of the inhibition function pre-activation signal and the below-described It may be configured such that the execution timing of the advance notification effect is the same or substantially the same timing (or may be substantially the same timing).

(Suppression function activation signal) The suppression function activation signal is an external information signal indicating that the suppression function is activated. The suppression function activation signal is continuously outputted from the activation of the suppression function until the activation of the suppression function is cancelled. That is, this suppression function activation signal starts outputting when the suppression function is activated, and stops outputting when power is restored accompanied by RAM clear (operation of RAM clear switch P820). Therefore, the output start timing of the suppression function activation signal is the same or substantially the same timing as the activation start timing of the suppression function (substantially the same timing).

[Various Effects] As described above, in the game machine of the eighth embodiment, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board P200 and the image control board P300 depending on the progress of the game, etc. It is composed of Below, of the game effects that are characteristic of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the contents of the "suppression function related effects" will be explained.

[Suppression Function Related Performance] The suppression function related performance includes a pre-notification performance (notification performance before the suppression function is activated) and a suppression notification performance (notification performance when the suppression function is activated).

<Advance notification performance> The advance notification performance is a performance that is executed before the suppression function is activated to suggest or notify that the suppression function is scheduled to operate soon. The advance notification effect is executed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value. That is, the execution condition for the advance notification effect (referred to as "advance notification condition") is satisfied when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value. In this embodiment, "90000" is set as the predetermined value. The specified value which is the count value of MY counter P1038 ("95000") which is the execution condition for suppression notification is called the first specified value, and is the count value (herein "90000") of MY counter P1038 which is the advance notification condition. A certain predetermined value may be referred to as a second specified value.

Note that the predetermined value is not limited to "90000" and can be set arbitrarily by the administrator (however, the predetermined value is preferably "90000" or less). That is, the execution conditions (advance notification conditions) for the advance notification performance are set as variable conditions (fluid conditions) that can be set arbitrarily by the administrator. On the other hand, the default value is limited to "95000" and cannot be set arbitrarily by the administrator. That is, the activation conditions for the suppression function (suppression function activation conditions) are set as fixed conditions that cannot be set arbitrarily by the player. Note that the "administrator" is a person who manages a gaming machine, and typically corresponds to a clerk at a gaming parlor or an employee of a gaming machine manufacturer.

Here, FIG. 205 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the advance notification effect. The pre-notification performance includes a pre-notification display performance and a pre-notification sound output performance. FIG. 205 is an example of a performance when the count value of the MY counter P1038 is between "90000" and "90499" (an example of a performance when there are approximately 5000 shots remaining until the suppression function is activated). It should be noted that hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the term "advance notification performance" refers to "advance notification display performance only" or "advance notification performance and advance notification sound output performance."

The advance notification display effect is an image displayed on the effect display device P70 that says, ``When the number of balls rolled out today reaches 95,000 balls, the suppression function will be activated. After activation, the game will end and the firing will stop.'' It includes a first text display and a second text display that reads "approximately ***** departure remaining until operation". Note that "*****" indicates the remaining MY value until the suppression function is activated. This numerical value of "*****" is updated based on the differential pitch count signal output from the main control board P100.

The first word display and the second word display are continuously displayed from the time when the pre-notification condition is satisfied until the suppression function is activated (provided that the count value of MY counter P1038 is a predetermined lower limit value described later). (Except when it drops to 89000). The first word display is always a fixed word display (the first word display does not change) during the execution of this advance notification effect (advance notification display effect), without depending on the increase or decrease of the MY counter P1038. On the other hand, the second text display indicates that the count value of MY counter P1038 increases by "500" starting from when the advance notification condition is satisfied (when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "90000"). The display is updated every time. That is, the second text display is a text display that depends on the count value of the MY counter P1038, and the "*****" portion is updated and displayed every time "500" is added from the predetermined value "90000". Specifically, first, when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value "90000", a second message display saying "approximately 5000 rounds remaining until activation" is displayed, and the count value of MY counter P1038 is When the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "90,500", the second text display changes to "approximately 4,500 rounds remaining until activation", and when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "91,000", the second text display changes to "approximately 4,000 rounds remaining until activation". When the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "91500", the second message display changes to "approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation", and in the same way every time the count value of MY counter P1038 is added "500". The second text display changes to "approximately 500 shots remaining until operation" when the count value of the MY counter P1038 finally reaches "94500". In addition, in this embodiment, the second word display is updated and displayed in units of 500 items, but it is not limited to this configuration, and may be displayed in units of different numbers (for example, units of 1 item, units of 10 items, The display may be updated in units of 100, 1000, etc.).

In addition, the advance notification display effect does not have a dedicated background image, and the background of the first message display and second message display is a background image (stage background image, reach background image, reach background image, During the jackpot, the background image) will be displayed. The display priority (layer priority) of this advance notification display effect is higher than the display priority of the background image and decorative pattern, and is higher than the display priority of the background image and decorative pattern. It is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the number of pending pitches in action, the pending image, and the changing image. In addition, when a player performs a volume adjustment operation or a light intensity adjustment operation, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is determined by the display priority (layer priority) of the volume adjustment image and light intensity adjustment image. degree). Additionally, when a predetermined error occurs in a gaming machine, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the error notification image. There is. Furthermore, when the image transformation effect (see FIG. 182) is executed, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the image to be transformed. It is set high. In addition, when the image transformation effect (see FIG. 182) is executed, the effect image (first word display, second word display) of the advance notification display effect is not included in the image to be transformed (framed image). It is preferable. Although the decorative pattern can be displayed in a superimposed manner with the advance notice display performance, it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) is set higher for the advance notice display performance. Therefore, if the advance notification display effect is executed while the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, temporarily stops, reach is achieved, or shakes, the display of each movement and the advance notice display effect will be changed. While the display is superimposed, the advance notice display effect has a higher display priority (layer priority), so the advance notice display effect is displayed in front. However, it is preferable that the small design not be displayed superimposed on the advance notification display performance. Further, although the image transformation effect can be displayed in a superimposed manner with the advance notice display effect, it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) is set higher for the advance notice display effect. Furthermore, although the standby demonstration performance can be displayed in a superimposed manner with the advance notification display performance, it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) is set higher for the advance notification display performance. Note that it is preferable that the volume adjustment image, the light amount adjustment image, and the right-handed image not be displayed in a superimposed manner with the advance notification display effect.

The advance notification sound output performance is a performance in which a predetermined advance notification sound is output from the speaker P11. The advance notification sound is, for example, a sound such as "The suppression function will be activated with the remaining *** emissions." Note that "****" is the remaining value of MY (different pitch count) until the suppression function is activated, and is a value that matches "****" in the second word display. This advance notification sound indicates that the count value of MY counter is "90000", "90500", "91000", "91500", "92000", "92500", "93000", "93500", "94000", "94500". ”, that is, when the second word display is updated and displayed, the speaker P11 outputs it once or multiple times. While the advance notification sound is being output, that is, while the first text display and the second text display are being displayed and the advance notification sound is being output, other performance sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) are silent. After the advance notification sound is output, that is, while the first message display and the second message display are being displayed and the advance notification sound is not being output, the original effect sound (BGM, sound effects, etc.) is restored. As a modified example, while the first wording display and the second wording display are being displayed and the advance notification sound is being output, other production sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) may be simultaneously executed. If configured, while the first wording display and the second wording display are being displayed and the advance warning sound is being output, the volume of other performance sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) is reduced and outputted to output the advance warning sound. It may be made easier to hear (after the advance notification sound is output, that is, while the first message display and the second message display are being displayed, and while the advance notification sound is not being output, the volume returns to the original volume).

This advance notification performance ends when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied). That is, in this embodiment, when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the advance notification performance is switched to the suppression notification performance. However, if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of the jackpot game (if the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied), the advance notification effect will continue to be executed until the end of the jackpot game. When the jackpot game ends, the advance notification performance ends and the suppression notification performance starts. In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during execution of a jackpot game (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the count value of MY counter P1038 When the value reaches the specified value "95,000", a special advance notification display will be displayed that says, "As today's balls have reached 95,000 balls, the game will end after the jackpot game ends and the firing will stop." The special wording may be changed to a special wording, and this special wording may be continuously displayed until the end of the jackpot game. This special wording is also a type of advance notification effect, and may be referred to as a special advance notice effect (special advance notice display effect). Further, as a further modification, it may be configured such that the advance notification effect is not executed while the jackpot game is being executed. In other words, if a jackpot game is started while the advance notification effect is being executed, the advance notification effect that is being executed is interrupted when the jackpot game is started, and the interrupted advance notification effect is stopped when the jackpot game ends. The notification performance may be restarted. In such a configuration, it is preferable to restart the advance notification performance in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter P1038 after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, if the pre-notification conditions are met during the execution of a jackpot game, the pre-notification performance will not be started during the execution of the jackpot game (the execution of the pre-notification performance will be waited until the end of the jackpot game). , the prior notification effect may be started after the end of the jackpot game. In such a configuration, it is preferable to start the advance notification performance in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter P1038 after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, the advance notification effect ends even when the count value of the MY counter P1038 decreases to a predetermined lower limit value (for example, "89000"). In other words, even if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" and the advance notification effect is started, the count value of MY counter P1038 does not reach the predetermined value "95000" and reaches the predetermined lower limit value. If the number is less than "89000", the advance notification performance ends without progressing to the suppression notification performance. Here, in the present embodiment, when the advance notification effect is started, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 does not reach the specified value "95000" but falls below the predetermined value "90000", The advance notification effect continues to be executed until the value falls below the predetermined lower limit value "89000". In addition, when the count value of MY counter P1038 decreases to the predetermined lower limit value "89000", the advance notification effect will not be performed again even if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" again. It looks like this. However, if the special condition is satisfied after the count value of MY counter P1038 falls to the predetermined lower limit value "89000" and before the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" again, , the pre-notification effect may be executed again when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" again. For example, when the count value of MY counter P1038 decreases to a predetermined lower limit value "89000", the count value of MY counter P1038 decreases to "80000" which is an even smaller value than the predetermined lower limit value "89000". Taking this as an opportunity, special conditions may be satisfied, and when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" again, the advance notification effect may be executed again. As another modification, when the count value of MY counter P1038 decreases to the predetermined lower limit value "89000", the count value of MY counter P1038 subsequently decreases to the initial value "0" (out ball When the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" again, the special condition is satisfied (when the special condition is reached (or when it is cleared), and the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" again. The advance notification effect may be executed again. In addition, if the count value of MY counter P1038 falls below the predetermined value "90000" and before it drops to the predetermined lower limit value "89000", there is a so-called consecutive winning streak (when the consecutive winning state ends). , the execution of the advance notification effect may be canceled even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 has not decreased to the predetermined lower limit value "89000". In addition, as a further modification example, without requiring special conditions, when the count value of MY counter P1038 decreases to a predetermined lower limit value "89000", the count value of MY counter P1038 returns to the predetermined value "90000". When the target point is reached, the pre-notification performance may be executed again.

Regarding the second word display, as mentioned above, the count value of MY counter P1038 is the threshold value (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000) that triggers the update of the advance notification effect. , 94500) is updated and displayed (the difference between the thresholds is added and displayed by "500"), but as an opposite event, each time the count value of MY counter P1038 triggers the update of the advance notification effect. Even when the value falls below the threshold value (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), the updated display is performed (display is subtracted by "500" which is the difference between the threshold values). For example, when the MY counter is subtracted from "91000" to "90999", the second text display is updated (subtracted) from "approximately 3500 rounds remaining until activation" to "approximately 4000 rounds remaining until activation". Ru. However, even when the count value of MY counter P1038 falls below the specified value "90,000," the second wording will not be updated until it falls to the predetermined lower limit value "89,000." " will continue to be displayed. In other words, even if the count value of MY counter P1038 is subtracted from "90,000" to "89,999", the second text display continues to display "approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation" (below the predetermined lower limit "89,000"). ). In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, the count value of the MY counter P1038 is set to each threshold value (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers the update of the advance notification effect. When the value falls below, the second word display may not be updated and the current display (original display) may be continued.

In addition, in the following explanation, for convenience, the count value of MY counter P1038 is "90000" to "90499" in a series of advance notification effects, with MY500 pieces as one unit, which is the update cycle of the second wording display. The advance notification effect that is sometimes performed (the advance notification effect when "approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) is sometimes referred to as the "first unit notification effect". In addition, the advance notification effect performed when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between "90500" and "90999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) is changed to "second unit notification effect". Sometimes referred to as "direction." In addition, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between “91000” and “91499” (the advance notification effect when “approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation” is displayed) is changed to “3rd unit notification effect”. Sometimes referred to as "direction." In addition, the advance notification effect performed when the count value of MY counter P1038 is "91500" to "91999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) is changed to "4th unit notification effect". Sometimes referred to as "direction." In addition, the advance notification effect performed when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between "92000" and "92499" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 3000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) is changed to "5th unit notification effect". Sometimes referred to as "direction." In addition, the advance notification effect performed when the count value of MY counter P1038 is "92500" to "92999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 2500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) is changed to "6th unit notification effect". Sometimes referred to as "direction." In addition, the advance notification performance performed when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between "93000" and "93499" (the advance notification performance when "approximately 2000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) is changed to "7th unit notification performance". Sometimes referred to as "direction." In addition, the advance notification performance performed when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between "93500" and "93999" (the advance notification performance when "approximately 1500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) is changed to "8th unit notification performance". Sometimes referred to as "direction." In addition, the advance notification performance performed when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between "94000" and "94499" (the advance notification performance when "approximately 1000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) is changed to "9th unit notification performance". Sometimes referred to as "direction." In addition, the advance notification effect performed when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between "94500" and "94999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) is changed to "10th unit notification effect". Sometimes referred to as "direction."

<Suppression notification performance> The suppression notification performance is a performance that suggests or notifies that the count value of MY counter P1038 has reached the specified value "95000", that is, the suppression function has been activated and the game has entered the stopped state. . This suppression notification effect is executed when the suppression function is activated. Specifically, if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" while the jackpot game is not being executed, the control is performed when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000". When the notification performance is executed and the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of the jackpot game, the suppression notification performance is executed after the jackpot game ends.

Here, FIG. 206 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the suppression notification effect. The suppression notification performance includes a suppression notification image display performance and a suppression notification sound output performance. Although not shown in the figure, while the suppression notification effect is being executed, all the lamps (top lamp, side lamp, ball plate lamp, etc.) that make up the frame lamp P10 are displayed as being fully lit (or fully blinking) in red. At the same time, all the lamps constituting the board lamp P25 are turned off.

The suppression notification display performance is a performance that displays a dedicated screen (suppression screen) that notifies that the suppression function has been activated. This suppression screen includes a special word display and a special background image. The special message display includes the message "95,000 balls have been rolled out today, the suppression function has been activated, today's game is over, please be careful not to forget to take out the cards." The special background image is a special background image displayed behind the special word display, and is composed of, for example, a darkened image (blackout image). The display priority of this suppression screen is set higher than the display priority of any other effect images (that is, it is set as the highest priority layer), and when this suppression screen is displayed, Any other effect image (normal game screen) becomes invisible or difficult to see. Note that when a predetermined error (for example, an error with high priority or importance) occurs, an error notification image corresponding to the predetermined error may be displayed in front of the suppression screen.

The suppression notification sound output performance is a performance in which a suppression notification sound is output from the speaker P11. The suppression notification sound is, for example, a sound saying "The suppression function has been activated." This suppression notification sound output performance repeatedly outputs a suppression notification sound while the suppression function is in operation. Note that the suppression notification sound output performance may be configured such that a specific error sound is output for a short period of time, and then the suppression notification sound is repeatedly output.

The suppression notification effect ends when the suppression function is released. That is, in this embodiment, when the RAM clear operation is performed when the power is turned on, the suppression function is canceled and the suppression notification effect is ended. Note that the suppression notification display performance continues until the suppression function is canceled, while the suppression notification sound output performance continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the suppression function is activated. Good too. In addition, in that case, if the power is cut off before a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the suppression notification effect is executed, and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820). In this case, after the power is restored, it is preferable that the suppression notification display performance continues to be performed, while the suppression notification sound output performance is not performed (it is not performed even if there is a remaining time of the above-mentioned predetermined time). It is.

Next, a specific example of the suppression function-related performance of this embodiment will be explained.

<<Production Example 1 of Suppression Function Related Production>> First, a production example in the case where the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" while the jackpot game is not being executed will be described. FIGS. 207 and 208 are schematic diagrams showing an example of a performance when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" while the jackpot game is not being executed.

First, Figure 20
As shown in 7(A), when the count value of MY counter P1038 is less than the predetermined value "90000", notification regarding the suppression function is not performed. It is assumed that the value has not reached "90000"). Note that (A) in the figure assumes that the gaming state in which the player is currently staying is the normal gaming state (low probability, low base state).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207(B), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "90000", the advance notification effect is started. This advance notification effect (first unit notification effect) suggests or informs the player that there are approximately 5,000 shots remaining until the suppression function is activated. Note that (B) in the figure is the first round of the N-th jackpot game after the power is turned on (however, N is a natural number).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207(C), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "90500", the advance notification effect is updated and displayed from the first unit notification effect to the second unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (second unit notification effect) suggests or informs the player that there are approximately 4,500 shots left until the suppression function is activated. Note that (C) in the figure is the fifth round of the N-th jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207(D), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "91000", the advance notification effect is updated and displayed from the second unit notification effect to the third unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (third unit notification effect) suggests or informs the player that approximately 4000 shots remain until the suppression function is activated. In addition, (D) in the figure is after the end of the Nth jackpot game after the power is turned on, and the game state currently being executed is the variable probability game state (high probability high base state) or the time saving game state (low probability high base state). state). In addition, in (D) in the figure, it is assumed that the consecutive winning state has continued since FIG. 207 (C).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207(E), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "91500", the advance notification performance is updated and displayed from the third unit notification performance to the fourth unit notification performance. This advance notification effect (fourth unit notification effect) suggests or informs the player that there are approximately 3,500 shots left until the suppression function is activated. Note that (E) in the figure is the third round of the N+1 jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207(F), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "92000", the advance notification effect is updated and displayed from the fourth unit notification effect to the fifth unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (fifth unit notification effect) suggests or informs the player that approximately 3000 shots remain until the suppression function is activated. In addition, in (F) in the figure, the emphasis effect is executed because the value of the cumulative prize ball count has reached the specific value "97500". That is, in this embodiment, even during the execution of the advance notification effect, the emphasis effect is executed when the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple value of the predetermined number of prize balls). Note that (F) in the figure is the 8th round of the N+1 jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207(G), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "92500", the advance notification effect is updated and displayed from the fifth unit notification effect to the sixth unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (sixth unit notification effect) suggests or informs the player that there are about 2,500 shots remaining until the suppression function is activated. Note that (G) in the figure is the first round of the N+2 jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207(H), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "93000", the advance notification effect is updated and displayed from the 6th unit notification effect to the 7th unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (seventh unit notification effect) suggests or informs the player that approximately 2000 shots remain until the suppression function is activated. Note that (H) in the figure is the fifth round of the N+2 jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 208(I), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "93500", the advance notification effect is updated and displayed from the seventh unit notification effect to the eighth unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (eighth unit notification effect) suggests or informs the player that there are approximately 1,500 shots remaining until the suppression function is activated. Note that (I) in the figure is the first round of the N+3 jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 208(J), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "94000", the advance notification effect is updated and displayed from the 8th unit notification effect to the 9th unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (ninth unit notification effect) suggests or informs the player that there are about 1000 shots remaining until the suppression function is activated. In addition, in (J) in the figure, the cumulative prize ball count display has already reached the upper limit value "99999", so even if a game ball enters the big prize opening P54, the cumulative The number of prize pitches displayed will not change. The upper limit value (display limit value) of the cumulative prize pitch count display will be described later. Note that (J) in the figure is the fourth round of the N+3 jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 208(K), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches "94500", the advance notification effect is updated and displayed from the 9th unit notification effect to the 10th unit notification effect. This advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect) suggests or informs the player that there are approximately 500 shots left until the suppression function is activated. In addition, in (K) in the figure, the cumulative prize ball count display has already reached the upper limit value "99999", so even if a game ball enters the big prize opening P54, the cumulative The number of prize pitches displayed will not change. The upper limit value (display limit value) of the cumulative prize pitch count display will be described later. Note that (K) in the figure is the 8th round of the N+3 jackpot game after the power is turned on.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 208(L), the count value of the MY counter P1038 becomes "94999" one more time before reaching the specified value "95000". In addition, (L) in the figure is after the end of the N+3 jackpot game after the power is turned on, and the game state currently being executed is the variable probability game state (high probability high base state) or the time saving game state (low probability high base state). state). In addition, in the figure (L), it is assumed that the consecutive winning state continues from FIG. 207(C).

Then, as shown in FIG. 208(M), while the jackpot game is not being executed (while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner), the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" (for example, when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000"). When the predetermined value "95000" is reached upon winning a prize), the suppression notification effect is executed, and the player is suggested or notified that the suppression function has been activated. The gaming state immediately before this suppression function operates is a high base state (variable probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state), and the activation of the suppression function triggers the high base state (variable probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state). ) ends. Therefore, when the suppression function is activated, the flag indicating the high base state is turned OFF, and if the second starting port P52 (ordinary electric accessory P522) is open, it is forcibly closed midway through, and the high base state is reached. Forcibly terminate the fluctuation display (currently running fluctuation display).

<<Example 2 of Suppression Function-Related Performance>> Next, an example of a performance in a case where the advance notification performance is canceled after the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" will be described. FIG. 209 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a performance when the advance notification performance is canceled after the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000".

First, as shown in FIGS. 209(A) to 209(D), when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value "90000", advance notification effect is started, and the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value. The advance notification effect is updated and displayed every time the value increases by 500 from the value "90000". Note that since FIGS. 209(A) to 209(D) have the same contents as the above-described FIGS. 207(A) to 207(D), individual explanations of FIGS. 209(A) to 209(D) will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 209(A), the gaming state currently in progress is the normal gaming state (low probability, low base state), and in FIG. 209(D), the gaming state currently being executed is in the variable probability gaming state (high probability, high base state). state) or time-saving gaming state (low probability high base state). Further, in FIG. 209(D), it is assumed that the consecutive winning state continues from FIG. 209(C).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 209(E), when the count value of MY counter P1038 decreases to "90999" (below "91000"), the advance notification effect changes to the previous unit notification effect. Return to (second unit notification performance). It is assumed that FIG. 209(E) is the state after exiting the consecutive shot state of FIG. 209(D) (after falling to the low base state). That is, in FIG. 209(E), it is assumed that the gaming state currently being executed is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). Additionally, in this case, since MY (balls owned by the player) has decreased, the advance notification sound output performance should not be performed again even if the advance notification display performance (second word display) is switched. (not outputting advance notification sound) is preferable.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 209(F), as the count value of MY counter P1038 decreases to "90499" (below "90500"), the advance notification effect is changed to the previous unit notification. Return to the performance (first unit notification performance). In addition, FIG. 209(F) shows that the gaming state currently being executed is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), that is, the normal gaming state (low probability low base state) continues from FIG. 209(E). It is assumed that Additionally, in this case, since MY (balls owned by the player) has decreased, the advance notification sound output performance should not be performed again even if the advance notification display performance (second word display) is switched. (not outputting advance notification sound) is preferable.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 209(G), the count value of the MY counter P1038 decreases to "89999", which is less than the predetermined value. In this embodiment, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 falls below the predetermined value "90000", as long as it exceeds the predetermined lower limit "89000", the advance notification effect continues as it is (the first unit notification effect (continued). In addition, FIG. 209(G) shows that the currently running gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), that is, the normal gaming state (low probability low base state) continues from FIG. 209(E). It is assumed that

Then, as shown in FIG. 209(H), when the count value of the MY counter P1038 decreases to a predetermined lower limit value "89000", the execution of the advance notification effect is canceled. In addition, in FIG. 209(H), the gaming state currently being executed is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), that is, the normal gaming state (low probability low base state) continues from FIG. 209(E). It is assumed that

<<Production Example 3 of Suppression Function Related Production>> Next, a production example in the case where the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during execution of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 210 is a schematic diagram showing an example of performance when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during execution of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the value immediately before "94500" before reaching (A) in the figure.

First, as shown in FIG. 210(A), in the first round of the M-th jackpot game after power-on today, the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "94500", and the advance notification effect is activated. The 9th unit notification effect is updated and displayed to the 10th unit notification effect (M is a natural number). This advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect) suggests or informs the player that there are approximately 500 shots left until the suppression function is activated.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 210(B), in the fifth round of the M-th jackpot game, the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000". However, if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during execution of a jackpot game, the suppression function will not operate until the jackpot game (jackpot end demo) ends, and the suppression function will not operate until the jackpot game ends. The advance notification performance (10th unit notification performance) is continuously executed until the end of the (big hit end demonstration). In addition, in this embodiment, if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of a jackpot game, safe balls (planned number of prize balls) will be released until the jackpot game ends. Even if an out ball (played ball) occurs, the count value of MY counter P1038 is not updated (the count value of MY counter P1038 maintains the specified value "95000"). In addition, in this embodiment, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game (when the count value of 1038 of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000"), until the end of the jackpot game, The most recent preliminary notification effect (10th unit notification effect: approximately 500 shots remaining until activation) is continuously displayed, but is not limited to this configuration; for example, the message ``The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends'' is displayed. Alternatively, as mentioned above, the advance notification display will change to a special message that says, ``As today's balls have reached 95,000 balls, the game will end after the jackpot game ends and the firing will stop.'' It may be configured such that the special wording changes and continues to be displayed until the end of the jackpot game.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 210(C), the advance notification performance (10th unit notification performance) is continuously executed in the 10th round (final round) of the M-th jackpot game. Similarly, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect) is continuously executed; for example, a message such as ``The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends'' may be displayed, or as described above. , the advance notification display changes to a special wording that says, ``As today's balls have reached 95,000 balls, the game will end and the firing will stop after the end of the jackpot game.'' It may be configured so that it continues to be displayed until the end.

Then, as shown in FIG. 210(D), upon completion of the M-th jackpot game, a suppression notification performance is executed, and the player is suggested or notified that the suppression function has been activated.

[Other features of the eighth embodiment] Next, other features of the eighth embodiment will be described. Below, we will mainly outline other features of the suppression function-related production and the relationships between the suppression function-related production and other productions.

<Relationship between the specified value of the MY counter and the upper limit value of the cumulative prize pitch count display> In this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned second embodiment, the cumulative prize pitch count display area P733 of the screen (see FIG. 59) Displays the cumulative value of the number of prize balls (cumulative number of prize balls) obtained up to the present time based on the game balls entering the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64 in the jackpot game during the consecutive games. be exposed. The value of the cumulative prize ball number (cumulative prize ball number display) is updated and displayed by executing the prize ball count-up effect. Here, the prize ball count-up effect is displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 when a game ball enters the big prize hole P54 or the general prize hole P64 during the execution of a special game during a consecutive game. This is an effect that adds and displays the value of the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64 to the value of the cumulative prize ball number. That is, the prize ball count-up performance includes the large winning hole count-up performance and the general winning hole count-up performance in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the specification is that "15" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the big winning hole P54 (the unit prize ball number of the big winning hole P54 is 15), so the game When a ball enters the big winning hole P54, the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is counted up and displayed in units of "15" (the value of the cumulative prize ball number A prize ball count-up effect is performed in which "15" is added and displayed.) In addition, since the specification is such that "3" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole P64 (the unit prize ball number of the general winning hole P64 is 3), the game ball is a general prize ball. When a ball enters the winning hole P64, the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is counted up and displayed in units of "3" ("3" is displayed in the cumulative prize ball number value). (A prize ball count-up effect that is displayed in addition is performed).

Here, the cumulative award pitch count display area P733 can display a 5-digit numerical value, and more specifically, can display 100,000 different numerical values from "0" to "99999" as the cumulative award pitch count display. It is. Therefore, the upper limit value of the cumulative prize pitch count display is "99999". At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number display has reached the upper limit "99999", the cumulative prize ball number display will not change even if the game ball enters the grand prize opening P54 or the general prize winning hole P64. First, the upper limit value "99999" is maintained.

In this embodiment, the upper limit value "99999" for displaying the cumulative award pitch count is set as a larger value than the specified value "95000" which is the upper limit value of MY. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 208 (J) and (K), the cumulative number of prize balls when the upper limit value "99999" is reached than the specified value "95000" of MY that is announced in advance in the advance notice performance. By allowing the display to take on a larger value, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the number of prize balls they have acquired has exceeded the MY standard value of "95,000", giving the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment. becomes possible. Furthermore, since the cumulative prize pitch count display is a numerical value that does not take out-balls into account, and can take a numerical value that exceeds the specified value of MY, "95,000," it is preferable to configure the display to be able to display up to the upper limit value, "99,999."

As a modification of this embodiment, even if the cumulative prize ball number display reaches the upper limit "99999", if the game ball enters the grand prize opening P54 or the general prize opening P64, a pseudo A prize ball count-up effect (variable display of cumulative prize ball number display) may be performed. As a pseudo prize ball count-up effect, for example, the first value (99999) and the last value (99999) are the same, such as 99999 → 91111 → 92222 → 93333 → ... → 98888 → 99999. However, by randomly and variably displaying the numerical values between them, it may be possible to make it appear as if the cumulative number of prize balls is being counted up and displayed.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, when the cumulative prize ball number display reaches the upper limit value "99999" and a new prize ball payout occurs (the game ball is placed in the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64). (when the ball enters the field), "FFFFF" is displayed as the cumulative award pitch count display to suggest or notify that the cumulative award pitch count display exceeds the display limit (overflow state). It's okay. As a further modification, when the cumulative prize ball number display reaches the upper limit value "99999", or when a new prize ball payout occurs after the cumulative prize ball number display reaches the upper limit value "99999" is configured so that the display switches to "FFFFF" (from now on, "99999" is not displayed), and the display of "FFFFF" is always maintained regardless of whether there is a new prize ball payout after that. Also good.

In addition, as a modified example of this embodiment, the upper limit value of the cumulative award pitch count display is set to "94999", which is one value before the MY standard value "95000", and when that value is exceeded, " It may be configured such that the character image "Limit achieved" is displayed, and thereafter the cumulative award pitch count display is not updated and the character image "Limit exceeded" is continuously displayed. As a modified example, if the number exceeds that value, the cumulative prize pitch count display is hidden and instead, a text image of "Limit Breaking" is displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize pitch count display was displayed. It may be configured as follows. Similarly, the upper limit of cumulative award pitch count display is set to "95,000", which is the same number as the MY standard value "95,000", and when that number is exceeded, a text image of "Limit achieved" is displayed. The display may be configured so that the cumulative prize pitch count display is not updated and the text image of ``Breaking the Limit'' continues to be displayed after that. If it exceeds the limit, the cumulative award pitch count display may be hidden, and instead, a text image of "limit exceeded" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative award pitch count display was displayed.

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, in order to prevent players from becoming overly gambling, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to a value sufficiently smaller than the specified value "95,000" (for example, "50,000"). ), and if that value is exceeded, the text image "Limit achieved" will be displayed, and after that, the cumulative award pitch count display will not be updated and the text image "Limit exceeded" will continue to be displayed. It may be configured to display the information. Even with such a configuration, if the number exceeds that value, the cumulative award pitch count display will be hidden and instead, a text image of "Limit Breaking" will be displayed in the display area where the cumulative award pitch count display was displayed. It may be configured to display. In this way, the display conditions for "Breaking the Limit" can be set as appropriate, but while "Breaking the Limit" is being displayed, even if the value of the cumulative number of balls awarded is a specific value, it will be highlighted. It is preferable not to do so.

<Relationship between the specified value of the MY counter and the specific value of the emphasis performance> As mentioned above, the emphasis performance is triggered when a game ball enters the big winning hole P54 or the general winning hole P64 during the execution of a jackpot game. This is an effect to notify that the value of the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a predetermined specific value. The specific value is a numerical value corresponding to a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (2500), such as "2500", "5000", "7500", "10000", "12500", etc. It is set individually.

In this embodiment, the value "2500" of the predetermined number of prize balls is set to a value smaller than the difference value "5000" obtained by subtracting the predetermined value "90000" from the specified value "95000" of MY. As a result, the period from when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the scheduled value "90000" until it reaches the specified value "95000", that is, from the start of the advance notification effect until the suppression function is activated. In addition, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (multiple value of the predetermined number of prize balls) at least once, and the emphasis effect is always executed at least once. Thereby, even in a situation immediately before the suppression function is activated, it is possible to ensure that at least one emphasis performance is executed, and it is also possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment.

<Relationship between prize ball count-up performance and suppression function activation conditions> FIG. 211 is a time chart when the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during execution of the prize ball count-up performance. Although FIG. 211 shows an example of a prize ball count-up effect based on a game ball entering the grand prize opening P54, a prize ball count-up effect based on a game ball entering the general winning hole P64 is also shown. It is also possible to apply

In this embodiment, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" and satisfies the suppression function activation condition during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect during the execution of the jackpot game, the execution To continue the prize ball count-up performance being executed without interrupting the prize ball count-up performance. That is, in this embodiment, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (when the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON), the suppression function is activated until the end of the jackpot game. In order to continue the jackpot game as it is without displaying the suppression screen, the prize ball count-up performance that is currently being executed is not terminated in the middle, but is completed (until the end). Execute). Although the details will be described later, during the execution of the previous prize ball count-up effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole P54 in the figure, the second big winning hole P54 in the figure When a subsequent prize ball count-up effect is executed based on the entry of a game ball into P54 (a win that triggers the count value of MY counter P1038 to reach the specified value "95000"), the previous prize ball The count-up performance and the subsequent prize ball count-up performance are seamlessly connected, and since these subsequent prize ball count-up performances are configured as a continuous and integrated count-up performance, the prize ball count-up performance is executed. Even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the prize ball count-up performance in progress can be continued without interrupting the prize ball count-up performance in progress. As a result, the prize ball count-up performance can be shown to the player until the end without interrupting it, so even after the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000", the player's desire to play is maintained. can be done. In other words, if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during execution of a jackpot game, the game will not be stopped immediately (the suppression function will not be activated immediately), but the jackpot game will continue as it is. Therefore, even if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is allowed, no particular harm will occur; on the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is obstructed, the player's desire to play will be diminished. This is because there is a risk. In addition, in this embodiment, the winning that triggers the count value of the MY counter P1038 to reach the specified value "95000" is "the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening P54", but this configuration is limited. Instead, the winning that triggers the count value of the MY counter P1038 to reach the specified value "95000" may be "the entry of a game ball into the general winning hole P64".

<Relationship between prize ball count-up effect and advance notification conditions> FIG. 212 is a time chart when the advance notification condition is satisfied during execution of the prize ball count-up effect. Although FIG. 212 shows an example of a prize ball count-up effect based on a game ball entering the grand prize opening P54, a prize ball count-up effect based on a game ball entering the general winning hole P64 is also shown. It is also possible to apply

In this embodiment, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" and satisfies the advance notification condition during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect during the execution of the jackpot game, the prize It is configured to continue the prize ball count-up performance in progress without interrupting the ball count-up performance. That is, in this embodiment, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up performance (when the execution of the advance notification performance is started), the suppression function is not activated until the end of the jackpot game. In order to continue the jackpot game (without displaying the suppression screen), the prize ball count-up performance that is currently being executed is not terminated in the middle, but is completed (runs to the end) ). Although the details will be described later, during the execution of the previous prize ball count-up effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole P54 in the figure, the second big winning hole P54 in the figure When a subsequent prize ball count-up effect is executed based on the entry of a game ball into P54 (a win that triggers the count value of MY counter P1038 to reach the predetermined value "90000"), the previous prize ball The count-up performance and the subsequent prize ball count-up performance are seamlessly connected, and since these subsequent prize ball count-up performances are configured as a continuous and integrated count-up performance, the prize ball count-up performance is executed. Even if the advance notification condition is satisfied, the prize ball count-up performance in progress can be continued without interrupting the prize ball count-up performance in progress. As a result, the prize ball count-up performance can be shown to the player until the end without interrupting it, so even after the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000", the player's desire to play is maintained. can be done. In other words, even if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" during execution of a jackpot game, the jackpot game will continue until the suppression function is activated, so the prize ball count This is because even if the execution of the up effect is allowed, no particular harm will occur; on the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count up effect is inhibited, the player's desire to play may be diminished. In addition, when the prize ball count-up performance and the advance notification performance are displayed in a superimposed manner, the display priority of the advance notification performance (layer priority) is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the prize ball count-up performance (layer priority). Priority) is higher, and the advance notification performance is displayed on the front side rather than the prize ball count-up performance. In addition, in this embodiment, the winning that triggers the count value of the MY counter P1038 to reach the predetermined value "90000" is "the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening P54", but this configuration is limited. Instead, the winning that triggers the count value of the MY counter P1038 to reach the predetermined value "90000" may be "the entry of a game ball into the general winning hole P64".

<Relationship between emphasis performance and suppression function activation condition> FIG. 213 is a time chart when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during execution of emphasis performance. In addition, although FIG. 213 illustrates a case where the emphasis effect is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole P54, the emphasis effect is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole P64. It is also applicable when

In this embodiment, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" and satisfies the suppression function activation condition during the execution of the emphasis performance during the execution of the jackpot game, the emphasis performance that is being executed is The currently executed emphasis performance is continued without interruption. That is, in this embodiment, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the emphasis performance (the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON), the suppression function is not activated until the end of the jackpot game ( In order to continue the jackpot game without displaying a suppression screen), the emphasis performance in progress is not terminated midway, but is completed (executed to the end). As a result, it is possible to show the player to the end without interrupting the emphasis, making it possible to maintain the player's desire to play even after the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000". can. In other words, if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" during execution of a jackpot game, the game will not be stopped immediately (the suppression function will not be activated immediately), but the jackpot game will continue as it is. This is because even if the execution of the emphasizing effect is allowed to continue, no actual harm will occur; on the contrary, if the execution of the emphasizing effect is obstructed, there is a risk that the player's desire to play may be diminished. .

<Relationship between emphasis performance and advance notification condition> FIG. 214 is a time chart when the advance notification condition is satisfied during execution of emphasis performance. In addition, although FIG. 214 illustrates a case where the emphasis effect is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole P54, the emphasis effect is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole P64. It is also applicable when

In this embodiment, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" and satisfies the advance notification condition during the execution of the emphasis performance during the execution of the jackpot game, the emphasis performance in progress is interrupted. The emphasizing effect that is currently being executed is continued without the need for That is, in the present embodiment, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the emphasis performance (when the execution of the advance notification performance is started), the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not activated) until the end of the jackpot game. ), and in order to continue the jackpot game, the emphasis performance in progress is not terminated in the middle, but is completed (executed to the end). As a result, it is possible to show the player to the end without interrupting the emphasized presentation, so it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play even after the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000". can. In other words, even if the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" during execution of a jackpot game, the jackpot game will continue as it is until the suppression function is activated, so the emphasis effect is This is because even if the execution is allowed, no particular harm will occur, and on the contrary, if the execution of the emphasis effect is inhibited, the player's desire to play may be diminished. In addition, when the emphasis effect and advance notification effect are displayed in a superimposed manner, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the emphasis effect. The advance notification effect is displayed on the front side rather than the emphasis effect.

<Relationship between prize ball count-up performance time and emphasis performance time> FIG. 215 is a time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the prize ball count-up performance and the execution time of the emphasis performance. In this embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the time required to display the count-up for one prize ball (the time required to display the count-up from "N" to "N+1") is "0.03 seconds". ” is set. That is, the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area P733 is displayed in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the prize ball count-up performance that is performed when one game ball enters the big winning hole P54 is the time value required for counting up one prize ball, and the execution time of the game ball entering the big winning hole P54. It is derived by multiplying the value of the number of award balls (unit award number of balls) given when one ball enters the ball. In other words, the execution time of this prize ball count-up performance (the time value from the start of one prize ball count-up performance to the end) is 15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds.

On the other hand, the execution time of the emphasizing effect is the time value from when the display of the emphasizing display image (enlarged display image) of the cumulative number of prize balls is started until it ends. In this embodiment, the execution time of the emphasis effect is set to "3 seconds" no matter which specific value (2500, 5000, 7500, 10000, etc.) the value of the cumulative prize ball count reaches. In this embodiment, the execution time (3 seconds) of this emphasis effect is longer than the execution time (0.45 seconds) of the prize ball count-up effect corresponding to the entry of one game ball into the big winning hole P54. The time is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 215, when the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value triggered by one game ball entering the grand prize opening P54, the prize ball count-up effect and the emphasis effect are activated. Although they will be executed at the same time or almost simultaneously, the execution time of the emphasizing effect is made longer than the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect that is carried out in response to the entry of one game ball into the big winning hole P54. By setting this, even if the emphasis performance and prize ball count-up performance are executed at the same time or almost simultaneously, it is possible to make the highly rare emphasis performance stand out, and increase the player's satisfaction when the emphasis performance occurs. This can further improve your sense of accomplishment. In addition, when the emphasis effect and the prize ball count-up effect are displayed superimposed, the display priority (layer priority) of the emphasis effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the award ball count-up effect. ) is higher, and the emphasis presentation is displayed on the front side rather than the prize ball count-up presentation.

<Relationship between advance notification performance time and emphasis performance time> Next, the relationship between the execution time of advance notification performance and the execution time of emphasis performance will be explained. The execution time of a pre-notification performance is a time value from when one pre-notification performance is started until it ends. In other words, the execution time of the advance notification effect is the time value from when the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" until it reaches the predetermined value "95000". However, during the execution time of this advance notification effect, if the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" but falls below the predetermined lower limit value "89000" without reaching the predetermined value "95000", Execution time of advance notification performance is not included. In other words, the execution time of the advance notification effect here is the execution time when the advance notification effect is completed when the predetermined value is reached.

Here, the execution time of this advance notification performance is the time value until the count value of MY counter P1038 increases by "5000 (95000-90000 = 5000)" from the predetermined value "90000", and the execution time for this 5000 The increase includes the number of prize balls obtained from multiple jackpot games (
For example, in the case of a 10R jackpot, approximately 1,500 pieces x 3 or more times) are required, so basically it takes the execution time of multiple jackpot games from the start of one advance notification performance to the end. It will require. Therefore, the execution time of the advance notification effect is significantly longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds in this embodiment). Therefore, even if the advance notification performance and the emphasis performance are executed overlappingly, the advance notification performance, which is a continuous display, will be highlighted more preferentially than the temporary display, and the emphasis performance will attract players to the advance performance. Since it is possible to improve the attention level of the player, it is possible to ensure that the player understands the current gaming situation (that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon). Although the advance notification performance described here is a preliminary notification display performance, a similar relationship is obtained when compared with the execution time of the advance notification sound output performance (for example, audio output for 5 seconds).

In addition, as mentioned above, the advance notification effect is updated and displayed every time the count value of the MY counter P1038 is added by ``500'' from the predetermined value ``90000'', and the first unit notification effect → the second unit notification effect → the first unit notification effect. The process progresses in the order of 3 unit notification performance → ... → 10th unit notification performance, but regarding the execution time of any unit notification performance from the 1st unit notification performance to the 10th unit notification performance that make up this advance notification performance. Also, the execution time of the emphasizing effect is longer than the execution time (3 seconds in this embodiment). In other words, the execution time of each unit notification performance is the time value until the count value of MY counter P1038 increases by "500", and this increase by 500 requires the award obtained in multiple round games. Since the number of balls (for example, about 150 balls x 3 rounds or more) is required, basically it takes the execution time of multiple round games from the start of one unit notification performance to the end. become. Therefore, the execution time of the unit notification effect is longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds in this embodiment). Therefore, even if the unit notification performance and the emphasis performance are executed overlappingly, the unit notification performance that is a continuous display is prioritized to stand out more than the emphasis performance that is a temporary display, and the game for the unit notification performance is Since the degree of attention of the player can be improved, it becomes possible for the player to surely grasp how many shots are left for the suppression function to operate each time the unit notification performance (second word display) is switched.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the emphasis effect is executed in units of the number of prize balls to be acquired, "2500 balls", during execution of one jackpot game (for example, 10R jackpot game: number of prize balls that can be obtained = approximately 1500 balls), Although the highlighting effect is performed only once at most (at most, only one type of highlighting effect is displayed in one jackpot game), the unit notification effect is executed in units of MY "500 pieces", so During execution of one jackpot game (for example, 10R jackpot game: number of prize balls that can be obtained = approximately 1500), unit notification effects may be performed multiple times (multiple types of unit notification effects may be displayed in one jackpot game) obtain). Thereby, the player can see a plurality of types of unit notification performances during execution of one jackpot game, and it is possible to further improve the player's attention to the advance notification performance.

<Prize ball count-up performance when winning consecutive prizes> Next, let us consider the case where a plurality of game balls (two game balls in this example) consecutively enter the grand prize opening P54 during execution of a special game. explain. FIG. 216 is a time chart when a plurality of game balls enter the big winning hole P54 consecutively.

First, when the first game ball enters the big winning hole P54 and the big winning hole switch P541 detects the entering of the first game ball, the prize ball count is based on this first ball. The up effect (referred to as "previous prize ball count up effect") is started. During the execution of the previous prize ball count-up performance, the second game ball (new game ball) enters the big winning hole P54, and the big winning hole switch P541 activates the second game ball entering the ball. When detected, the previous prize ball count-up performance is interrupted, and a prize ball count-up performance based on the second ball entering (referred to as "later prize ball count-up performance") is started. Specifically, in the previous prize ball count-up performance, if the count-up display from "1000" to "1015" was originally scheduled, a large number of times during the execution of the previous prize ball count-up performance. When a new game ball enters the winning hole P54 and is detected by the big winning hole switch P541, the previous prize ball count-up performance that is currently being executed is aborted (for example, the count-up The display is interrupted at "1010"), and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect is started. In the later prize ball count-up performance, the remaining part of the previous prize ball count-up performance (the count-up display from "1011" to "1015") is omitted, and the final value "1015" is A continuation of the count-up display from "1016" to "1030" will be performed. In addition, part of the count-up display (count-up display from "1011" to "1015") of the previous prize ball count-up performance will be omitted, but at the end of the previous prize ball count-up performance (when interrupted) and the start of the subsequent prize ball count-up performance are seamlessly connected, and these subsequent prize ball count-up performances are configured as a continuous and integrated count-up display.

In this way, in the present embodiment, of the next two prize ball count-up performances, the priority of the latter prize ball count-up performance is set higher than the priority of the first prize ball count-up performance. However, if the end of the previous prize ball count-up performance and the start of a subsequent prize ball count-up performance overlap in time, the execution of the previous prize ball count-up performance is interrupted, and the execution of the subsequent prize ball count-up performance is interrupted. The system is configured to start executing the prize ball count-up performance with priority. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if game balls enter the big winning hole P54 continuously and the previous and subsequent two prize ball count-up effects are executed continuously, the previous and subsequent prize ball count-up Since the performance can proceed smoothly without any delay, there is a possibility that a timing lag may occur between the time when the game ball enters the big winning hole P54 and the time when the prize ball count-up performance is executed (this may cause the player to feel uncomfortable). In addition, it is possible to appropriately complete the prize ball count-up performance during the execution of a jackpot game (round game).

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, when the execution of the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted, the count-up display is forcibly switched to the final value "1015" (that is, if the execution was interrupted at "1010") If so, switch from "1010" to the final value "1015" at once), and from this final value, count up display for later prize ball count up performance (count up display from "1016" to "1030") It may be configured to start.

<Relationship between music selection performance and emphasis performance> Next, a case where emphasis performance is performed while the music selection performance is being performed will be described. FIG. 217 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a performance when a music selection performance and an emphasis performance are executed in duplicate.

In this embodiment, it is possible to perform a music selection performance that allows the player to select a music piece to be output during execution of the jackpot game in accordance with an operation by the player (operation of the performance button P15 and cross key P16). Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to change the music currently being output to another music by the player's selection operation.

While the song selection effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 217, an image showing the names of multiple types of songs as BGM options and a cross key switch 16 (for selecting BGM) are displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70. Images of the upper and lower keys P16a, 16b) and an image of a production button P15 for determining the selected music are displayed (these are also referred to as images related to music selection performance). In the illustrated example, "Song 1," "Song 2," "Song 3," and "Song 4" are displayed as names of multiple types of songs. That is, in FIG. 217, in order from the top, the name of the currently output song "Song 1", and the names of three types of songs indicating candidates as new options, "Song 2", "Song 3", and "Song 4" is displayed. In this embodiment, a desired song can be selected by operating the up and down keys P16a and 16b, and the selected song can be confirmed by operating the production button P15. The illustrated example shows a state in which "song 2" is selected from among a plurality of types of songs. In addition, as a modification, the operation of the production button P15 may not be required, and the determination may be made only by operation of the above-mentioned keys. In other words, the process may be completed by simply aligning the desired song name with the cursor location marked with a right arrow by operating the up and down keys P16a and 16b.

In this embodiment, even while the song selection effect is being executed, if the value of the cumulative number of award pitches reaches a specific value, the emphasis effect (emphasis display effect, emphasis sound output effect) is executed. There is. In addition, in FIG. 217, as an emphasizing effect, an emphasizing display that displays an emphasizing image (in the illustrated example, "97,500 pt achieved") indicating that the value of the cumulative award pitch count has reached a specific value on the screen of the effect display device P70 is shown. It shows a state in which a presentation and an emphasized sound output presentation in which a special sound (in the illustrated example, a sound saying "in great condition") is output from the speaker P11 are being performed. Even when this emphasis performance (emphasis display performance, emphasis sound output performance) is being executed, the music can be changed by the player's selection operation (if the player's music selection operation is enabled). ).

Here, FIG. 218 is a time chart when the music is changed in the music selection performance. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 218(A), even if the song is changed from "song 1" to "song 2" while the special sound for emphasis effect is being output, before and after the change of this song, The special sound is configured to be output continuously. In other words, in this illustrated example, before the change from "music 1" to "music 2", the sound with the special sound superimposed on "music 1" is output from the speaker P11, and from "music 1" to "music 2" After the change to , the sound in which the special sound is superimposed on music 2 is output from the speaker P11. In addition, before and after changing from "Song 1" to "Song 2", if there is a cross-fade part between "Song 1" and "Song 2", a special sound is superimposed on this cross-fade part. Sound is output from speaker P11.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 218(B), even if the music is changed from "song 1" to "song 2" immediately before the output of the special sound for the emphasis effect, the changed music The special sound is configured to be output during the reproduction of 2. That is, in this illustrated example, after changing from "song 1" to "song 2," the speaker P11 outputs a sound in which a special sound is superimposed on the changed music 2. In addition, after changing from "Song 1" to "Song 2", if there is a cross-fade part between "Song 1" and "Song 2", the audio with the emphasis sound superimposed on this cross-fade part is output from speaker P11.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the currently output music is changed by the player's selection operation while the emphasis performance is being executed, the special sound of the emphasis performance will continue to be output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's sense of accomplishment and satisfaction regarding the occurrence of the emphasis effect (the fact that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific value) is impaired.

<Power cutoff before suppression function activation conditions are satisfied> Next, a case will be described in which a power cutoff occurs immediately before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied. FIG. 219 is a time chart when power is cut off immediately before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, during execution of the jackpot game, if one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54, the value of the cumulative prize ball number will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general winning hole P64 before one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54, the value of the cumulative prize ball number will not reach a specific value. There is a situation (referred to as a "specific situation") in which the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000". Specifically, as a specific situation, the value of the cumulative prize ball count is "97485" during the execution of the jackpot game, and MY
In a situation where the count value of the counter P1038 is "94998", if one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54 (when 15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls is While the value reaches the specific value "97500" and the emphasis effect is executed, one game ball enters the general prize hole P64 before one more game ball enters the big prize hole P54. If the ball is hit (in the case where 3 prize balls are paid out), the value of the cumulative number of prize balls does not reach the specific value "97500" and the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000". (Number of safes = 3, Number of outs = 1, Number of differential pitches = 3-1 = 2, MY = 94998 + 2 = 95000), the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (Suppression function activation flag P1039 turns ON) .

In this specific situation, when the power is restored after a power outage occurs to the gaming machine, if this power restoration does not involve clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), after this power restoration, The jackpot game that was being executed when the power was turned off will be restarted. When the jackpot game is restarted, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot P54, the emphasis effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power cut (the cumulative number of prize balls is "97,500") '') will not be executed. In other words, when the power is restored, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Even if the jackpot game (jackpot performance) is resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the emphasis performance (conditions until reaching a specific value) will be displayed again. ) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage reaches the specific value with one more game ball entering the jackpot hole P54, the jackpot game restarted after the power is restored. , the cumulative prize ball count display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the big prize hole P54, it will be executed before the power is turned off. The emphasis performance that was scheduled to occur (the emphasis performance that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of award pitches reaches "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative prize ball number returns to the initial value "0", by continuing to play after the power is restored, the value of the cumulative prize ball number will return to a specific value (a multiple of "2500"). In the case where the value of the cumulative prize pitch count reaches a specific value (multiple value of "2500"), an emphasizing effect will be executed.

In addition, if the power is turned off and the power is restored (power is restored without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, the MY counter P1038 is initialized at the time of the power restoration (power is turned on). After the power is restored, the MY counter P1038 starts counting again from the initial value "0". Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 at the time of power failure reaches the specified value "95000" when one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54, the count value will be restarted after the power is restored. In the jackpot game, the MY counter P1038 will restart from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the jackpot P54, the count value of the MY counter P1038 will be The specified value "95000" is not reached and the suppression function activation condition is not satisfied (the suppression function activation flag P1039 is not turned on). However, even if the MY counter P1038 returns to the initial value "0", if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000" by continuing to play after the power is restored, the suppression function will be activated. The activation condition is satisfied (the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON).

<Power cutoff before advance notification condition is satisfied> Next, a case where power cutoff occurs immediately before the advance notification condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 220 is a time chart when a power outage occurs immediately before the advance notification condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, during execution of the jackpot game, if one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54, the value of the cumulative prize ball number will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general winning hole P64 before one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54, the value of the cumulative prize ball number will not reach a specific value. There is a situation (referred to as a "predetermined situation") in which the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches a predetermined value "90000". Specifically, as a predetermined situation, in a situation where the value of the cumulative prize ball number is "97485" and the count value of MY counter P1038 is "89998" during the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot When one more game ball enters P54 (when 15 prize balls are paid out), the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value "97500" and an emphasis effect is executed. On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general winning hole P64 before one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54 (in the case where three prize balls are paid out), If the value of the cumulative number of award balls does not reach the specific value "97500" and the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "90000" (number of safes = 3, number of outs = 1, number of differential balls = 3- 1=2, MY=89998+2=90000), which satisfies the advance notification condition.

In this predetermined situation, if the power is restored after a power outage to the gaming machine, if this power restoration does not involve clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), after this power restoration, The jackpot game that was being executed when the power was turned off will be restarted. When the jackpot game is restarted, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot P54, the emphasis effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power cut (the cumulative number of prize balls is "97,500") '') will not be executed. In other words, when the power is restored, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Even if the jackpot game (mid-jackpot effect) is restarted after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the emphasis effect (conditions until a specific value is reached) will be displayed again. ) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage reaches the specific value with one more game ball entering the jackpot hole P54, the jackpot game restarted after the power is restored. In this case, the cumulative prize ball count display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the big prize hole P54, it will be executed before the power is turned off. The emphasis performance that was scheduled to occur (the emphasis performance that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of award pitches reaches "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative prize ball number returns to the initial value "0", by continuing to play after the power is restored, the value of the cumulative prize ball number will return to a specific value (a multiple of "2500"). In the case where the value of the cumulative prize pitch count reaches a specific value (multiple value of "2500"), an emphasizing effect will be executed.

In addition, if the power is turned off and the power is restored (power is restored without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, the MY counter P1038 is initialized at the time of the power restoration (power is turned on). After the power is restored, the MY counter P1038 starts counting again from the initial value "0". Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter P1038 when the power is turned off reaches the predetermined value "90000" when one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54, the count value of the MY counter P1038 will be restarted after the power is restored. In the jackpot game, the MY counter P1038 will restart from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the jackpot P54, the count value of the MY counter P1038 will be The predetermined value "90000" is not reached and the advance notification condition is not satisfied. However, even if the MY counter P1038 returns to the initial value "0", if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" by continuing the game after the power is restored, advance notification will be issued. This will satisfy the conditions. In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, when the above-mentioned "count continuation switch" is installed, the power is cut off before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, and the power is restored (with RAM clearing) while operating the count continuation switch. If the power is restored (without returning the power), the MY counter P1038 is not initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but it may be configured such that the advance notification effect is not restarted immediately after the power is restored. For example, while the second unit notification effect (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) is being executed, the power is cut off (the power is cut off when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between "90500" and "90999"), and the count continuation switch is turned off. When the power is restored by operation (power is restored without clearing the RAM), MY counter P1038 is not initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but immediately after the power is restored, the second unit notification effect (until activation) (approximately 4,500 shots remaining) may not be restarted, and then, when the count value of MY counter P1038 reaches "91,000", the advance notification effect may be restarted from the third unit notification effect (approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation). . As a further modification, when the above-mentioned "count continuation switch" is installed, the power is turned off before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, and the power is restored while operating the count continuation switch (the power is turned off without clearing the RAM). MY counter P1038 is not initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but the configuration is such that the advance notification effect is not restarted immediately after the power is restored. (approximately 4,500 rounds remaining), turn off the power (turn off when the count value of MY counter P1038 is between "90500" and "90999"), operate the count continuation switch to restore the power (clear RAM). If the power is returned without accompanying power return), MY counter P1038 will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is returned, and the second unit notification effect (approximately 4500 rounds remaining until activation) will be restarted immediately after the power return. Also good.

<Power cutoff after suppression function activation conditions are satisfied> Next, a case in which a power cutoff occurs after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied will be described. FIG. 221 is a time chart when power is cut off after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied.

In this embodiment, during execution of the jackpot game, after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (after the suppression function activation flag P1039 is turned ON), one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54. There is a situation (referred to as "situation A") in which the value of the cumulative number of awarded pitches reaches a specific value (a multiple of 2500). Specifically, as situation A, during the execution of the jackpot game, the count value of MY counter P1038 has already reached the specified value "95000", and the value of the cumulative prize ball count has reached the predetermined specific value "97500". In the situation where "97485" is 15 fewer than "97485", the cumulative number of prize balls will be increased by one more game ball entering the big winning hole P54 (by paying out 15 prize balls). When the value reaches the specific value "97500", the emphasis effect is executed.

In this situation A, if a power failure occurs in the gaming machine and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch P820), the jackpot game that was being executed before the power failure will be restarted. However, after this jackpot game is restarted, even if one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54, the value of the cumulative prize ball number will be the predetermined specific value "97500". is not reached, and the emphasis performance that was scheduled before the power was cut off (the emphasis performance that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of awarded pitches reaches "97,500") is not executed. In other words, when the power is restored, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Even if the jackpot game (mid-jackpot effect) is restarted after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the emphasis effect (conditions until a specific value is reached) will be displayed again. ) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage reaches the specific value with one more game ball entering the jackpot hole P54, the jackpot game restarted after the power is restored. In this case, the cumulative prize ball count display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the big prize hole P54, it will be executed before the power is turned off. The emphasis performance that was scheduled to occur (the emphasis performance that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of award pitches reaches "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative prize ball number returns to the initial value "0", by continuing the game after the power is restored, the value of the cumulative prize ball number will return to a specific value (a multiple of "2500"). If the value of the cumulative prize pitch count reaches a specific value (multiple value of "2500"), an emphasizing effect will be executed.

In addition, in this situation A, if the power is restored without clearing the RAM (if the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied), the MY counter P1038 is initialized when the power is restored. (The count value "95000" of the MY counter P1038 is not cleared), and the suppression function activation flag P1039 remains ON. Therefore, when the jackpot game (jackpot end demonstration) resumed after the power is restored, the suppression function is activated, and the suppression notification performance is executed at the same time or substantially at the same time.

<Power cutoff after advance notification condition is satisfied> Next, a case where power cutoff occurs after the advance notification condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 222 is a time chart when the power is cut off after the pre-notification condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot game, after the pre-notification conditions are satisfied, that is, after the pre-notification performance is started, one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54, and the cumulative prize is earned. There is a situation (referred to as "situation B") in which the value of the number of pitches reaches a specific value (a multiple of 2500). Specifically, as situation B, the count value of MY counter P1038 has already reached the predetermined value "90000" during the execution of the jackpot game (however, if the count value of MY counter P1038 is "90000" or "90500") ''), and in a situation where the value of the cumulative prize ball count is ``97485'' which is 15 fewer than the predetermined specific value ``97500'', When one more game ball enters the big prize opening P54 (by paying out 15 prize balls), the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value "97500" and an emphasis effect is executed. It will be done.

In this situation B, if a power failure occurs in the gaming machine and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the jackpot game that was being executed before the power failure will be restarted. However, after this jackpot game is restarted, even if one more game ball enters the big winning hole P54, the value of the cumulative prize ball number will be the predetermined specific value "97500". is not reached, and the emphasis performance that was scheduled before the power was cut off (the emphasis performance that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of awarded pitches reaches "97,500") is not executed. In other words, when the power is restored, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Even if the jackpot game (mid-jackpot effect) is restarted after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the emphasis effect (conditions until a specific value is reached) will be displayed again. ) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage reaches the specific value with one more game ball entering the jackpot hole P54, the jackpot game restarted after the power is restored. In this case, the cumulative prize ball count display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the big prize hole P54, it will be executed before the power is turned off. The emphasis performance that was scheduled to occur (the emphasis performance that was scheduled to be performed when the cumulative number of award pitches reaches "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative prize ball number returns to the initial value "0", by continuing the game after the power is restored, the value of the cumulative prize ball number will return to a specific value (a multiple of "2500"). If the value of the cumulative prize pitch count reaches a specific value (multiple value of "2500"), an emphasizing effect will be executed.

In addition, if the power is turned off and the power is restored (power is restored without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied even after the advance notification conditions are satisfied, when the power is restored (power is turned on) Since the MY counter P1038 is initialized, when the jackpot game is restarted after the power is restored, the MY counter P1038 will start counting again from the initial value "0". Therefore, after the power is restored, the state returns to a state where the advance notification conditions are not satisfied, and after the power is restored (the jackpot game restarted after the power is restored), the advance notification performance that was executed at the time of the most recent power outage is It will not be restarted (advance notification effect will not be executed). However, even if the MY counter P1038 returns to the initial value "0", if the count value of the MY counter P1038 reaches the predetermined value "90000" by continuing the game after the power is restored (the advance notification condition is not met) (if the conditions are satisfied), advance notification effect will be executed.

<Adjustment of volume and light amount while the suppression function is in operation> In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment are disabled while the suppression function is in operation (while the suppression notification effect is being executed). That is, when the suppression function is activated and the game is stopped, the volume level does not change even if the volume button (left key P16c or right key P16d) is operated (volume operation becomes invalid). It has become. Therefore, even if the volume button (left key P16c or right key P16d) is operated while the suppression notification effect is being executed, the volume level of the suppression notification sound (in this example, the sound that says "The suppression function has been activated") does not change, and the suppression notification sound is always output at a constant volume (predetermined constant volume). As a modification, the suppression notification sound may be configured to be output in an output mode according to the set volume level. Similarly, when the suppression function is activated and the game is stopped, the light level does not change even if the light level button (upper key P16a or lower key P16b) is operated (the light level operation becomes invalid). ). Therefore, even if the light amount button (up key P16a or down key P16b) is operated during execution of the suppression notification effect, the light amount when the frame lamp P10 related to the suppression notification is fully lit does not change. However, even if the suppression function activation conditions are met, if a jackpot game is in progress, the suppression function will not be activated (because the suppression notification effect is not being executed), so the volume will change during the execution of the jackpot game. Adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible. In addition, if the advance notification effect is being executed, the volume level can be changed by operating the volume button (left key P16c or right key P16d) even if it is changing or during a jackpot game (volume operation). is enabled), and the light level is changed by operating the light level button (up key P16a or down key P16b) (light level operation is disabled). Here, regarding the advance notification sound output performance, it may be configured so that it is always output at a constant volume (predetermined constant volume) instead of the output mode according to the set volume level, The configuration may be such that the output mode corresponds to the volume level.

<Performance display while the suppression function is in operation> In this embodiment, while the suppression function is in operation (while the suppression notification effect is being executed), the display of the base value indicating the performance information of the game (including switching the display of the base value) is It is configured not to be updated. In other words, if the suppression function is activated and the game is stopped, even if game balls enter each winning slot while the suppression function is activated, the prize balls will not be paid out and will not be used in the game. Since no out balls (played balls) are detected either, the base value is not measured and the display of the base value on the performance display monitor P830 is not updated. However, even if the suppression function activation conditions are met, if the jackpot game is in progress, the suppression function is not activated (because the suppression notification effect is not being executed), so the base Value display can be updated. In addition, as long as the advance notification performance is being executed, the display of the base value can be updated even if it is changing or during the jackpot game.

<Error notification when the suppression function is in operation> In this embodiment, the types of errors that occur in the gaming machine are "type 1 error" and "type 2 error" depending on the priority (importance) of the error. , and "Type 3 errors". The first type error is an error type whose priority level (importance level) is set to a low level so that it is prohibited or difficult to continue playing the game. Type 1 errors include, for example, prize ball errors (payout errors). The second type error is an error type set at a high level of priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game. Type 2 errors include, for example, magnetic sensor errors, radio wave sensor errors, and the like. The third type error is an error type set at the highest level of priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game. Type 3 errors include, for example, fraudulent prize winning errors.

A magnetic sensor error is an error that occurs when a magnetic sensor detects magnetism, or when a disconnection, short circuit, or failure of the magnetic sensor occurs. A radio wave sensor error is an error that occurs when a radio wave sensor detects a radio wave, or when a disconnection, short circuit, or failure of the radio wave sensor occurs. For example, an illegal winning error occurs when the big winning opening switch detects the entry of a game ball when the big winning opening P54 is not opened (during a non-jackpot game), or when the big winning opening switch detects the entry of a game ball during a jackpot game. This is an error that occurs when an abnormal number of game balls are detected per hour (for example, 100 balls per 0.1 second). A prize ball error (payout error) is an error that occurs when there is a problem in paying out a prize ball. This prize ball error (payout error) includes a full tank error in which the lower ball tray P9 is full of game balls (the full tank switch is turned on), a ball jamming/ball jamming error in the prize ball payout unit P34, and a game board error. This includes out-of-ball errors, which occur when game balls cannot be replenished. Note that the above error is an example of an error highly related to this embodiment, but other errors may also be applied. In other words, the type 1 to type 3 errors are not limited to the above-mentioned errors, and other errors may also be applied. For example, a CR unconnected error may be applied as the second type error. This CR non-connection error is an error that occurs when the gaming machine and the CR (rental device) are not connected.

When the above-mentioned error occurs in the gaming machine, various error notifications are performed such as image display effects, audio output effects, lamp lighting effects, etc. Specifically, an error notification image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70. (Error notification content) is displayed, an error notification sound is output from the speaker P11 at the error volume, and the production lamp LP is lit or blinked at the error brightness.

First, if a type 1 error (prize ball error) is detected while the suppression function is in operation, the corresponding type 1 error will be handled even if the suppression function is in operation (while the suppression notification effect is being executed). It is possible to perform error notification. In addition, even if a type 1 error is detected after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, it is possible to execute an error notification corresponding to the type 1 error (even after the jackpot ends) error notification can be continued). In other words, if a Type 1 error is detected during a jackpot game and then the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the jackpot game, or if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the jackpot game and then the first error occurs during the jackpot game. If a type 1 error is detected, an error notification corresponding to the type 1 error can be executed during the jackpot game, and if the type 1 error is not canceled during the jackpot game, the jackpot game Error notification corresponding to the type 1 error can be executed while the suppression function is in operation after the termination (while the suppression notification effect is being executed).

In addition, if a type 2 error (magnetic/radio wave sensor error) is detected while the suppression function is in operation, the type 2 error will be Do not execute the corresponding error notification (restrict error notification). In addition, during execution of a jackpot game, if a type 2 error is detected after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, an error notification corresponding to the type 2 error will be sent until the jackpot game ends. It is doable. Then, when the jackpot game ends, that is, when the suppression function is activated, the error notification corresponding to the second type error is ended.

Here, if a type 2 error is detected after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during execution of a jackpot game and just before the jackpot game ends, the second type error will not be activated until the jackpot game ends. The error notification corresponding to the type 2 error is performed (the error notification corresponding to the type 2 error ends when the jackpot game ends), but after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the jackpot game. If a type 1 error is detected just before the jackpot game ends, an error notification corresponding to the type 1 error will be sent not only before the jackpot game ends but also after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to continue. In other words, even if the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, the prize balls can be paid out until the jackpot game ends, so a Type 1 error (prize A ball error) may occur, and in that case, the error notification corresponding to the first type error can be continued even after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, if a type 3 error (unauthorized prize winning error) is detected while the suppression function is in operation, an error corresponding to the type 3 error will be detected while the suppression function is in operation (while the suppression notification effect is being executed). Do not perform notification (restrict error notification). Additionally, even if a type 3 error is detected after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during a jackpot game, the error notification corresponding to the type 3 error will not be executed (error notification will be limited). . As a modified example, when a type 3 error is detected after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, an error notification corresponding to the type 3 error may be sent only by some notification means. It may be configured to run. Specifically, during execution of a jackpot game, if a type 1 error or a type 2 error is detected after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, a message on the screen of the effect display device P70 will be displayed. An error notification image (error notification content) is displayed, an error notification sound is output from the speaker P11 at the error volume, and the production lamp LP lights up or flashes at the error brightness, but it is not a jackpot. During execution of a game, if a type 3 error is detected after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, an error notification image (error notification content) is displayed on the screen of the effect display device P70, but the error It may be configured such that the error notification sound is not outputted from the speaker P11 at the volume specified for the error, or the performance lamp LP is not lit or blinked at the brightness specified for the error. In any case, if a type 3 error (unauthorized prize winning error) is detected while the suppression function is in operation, the type 3 error will be detected while the suppression function is in operation (while the suppression notification effect is being executed). It is preferable not to perform error notification corresponding to (limit error notification).

In addition, in this embodiment, the reason why error notification (excluding error notification of type 1 error) is not performed while the suppression function is in operation is that while the suppression function is in operation, the game is stopped and the firing is stopped, and the game cannot be continued. Even if an error occurs in the gaming machine, there is no risk that the player will suffer any unexpected disadvantages, and the staff at the gaming parlor will not be able to troubleshoot the error that occurs in the gaming machine. This is because it is in a state where inspection and investigation can be performed without any problems, so there is little need to purposely notify both the suppression function and the error notification at the same time. However, even when the suppression function is in operation, if there is a game ball to be paid out, the game ball will be paid out, so a type 1 error (prize ball error) will occur while the game ball is being paid out. In this case, an error notification corresponding to the first type error (prize ball error) is executed so that no disadvantage is caused to the player. As a modified example, if a type 2 error is detected during a jackpot game and then the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the jackpot game, or when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the jackpot game and then the jackpot game is executed. If a type 2 error is detected during the jackpot game, an error notification corresponding to the type 2 error can be executed during the jackpot game, and if the type 2 error is not canceled during the jackpot game, , it may be configured such that the error notification corresponding to the second type error can be executed during the operation of the suppression function after the end of the jackpot game (while the suppression notification effect is being executed).

<Various notification effects in the first situation> In this embodiment, when a type 1 error or type 2 error occurs in the gaming machine while the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, A situation in which an error notification corresponding to the type of error that has occurred and a grand prize opening presentation based on the entry of a game ball into the grand prize opening P54 (emphasis presentation and/or grand prize opening count-up presentation) are executed overlappingly. (referred to as the "first situation"). In addition, overlapping execution of the error notification and the big winning opening prize presentation means that the execution period (or execution timing) of the error notification and the execution period (or execution timing) of the big winning opening prize presentation overlap, and both This includes cases where the execution periods of both performances overlap in their entirety and cases where part of the execution periods of both performances overlap.

In this first situation, the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (the count value of MY counter P1038 has reached the specified value "95000"), but since a jackpot game is being executed, this first situation In this situation, the suppression notification performance is not executed (the suppression function is not activated), and the advance notification performance (10th unit notification performance) is continuously executed. In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, in this first situation, neither the advance notification effect nor the suppression notification effect may be executed.

Here, in this embodiment, when the player performs a predetermined operation during execution of the jackpot game (for example, when the left and right keys P16c and 16d of the cross key P16 are operated at the same time), multiple levels of volume are displayed on the screen. Volume adjustment images (see FIG. 72) indicating the levels are displayed side by side, and the player adjusts the output level (volume level) of the audio being output from the speaker P11 by operating the left or right key. becomes possible. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is being displayed, the player operates the right key to increase the volume level, and operates the left key to decrease the volume level.

In this embodiment, in the first situation, when the volume adjustment image and the image of the grand prize opening prize presentation (highlight display, prize ball count up display) are displayed at the same time, the volume adjustment image is adjusted more than the image of the grand prize opening prize presentation. The image has a higher display priority, and even if the image of the grand prize opening prize presentation (highlighted display, prize ball count-up display) and the volume adjustment image are displayed superimposed, the image of the grand prize opening prize presentation will be displayed in front of the image. A volume adjustment image will be displayed on the side (part or all of the image of the grand winning opening prize effect will be displayed hidden by the volume adjustment image).

In addition, if the volume is adjusted in the first situation, the error notification sound corresponding to the type 1 error or type 2 error that is occurring will be set according to the predetermined standard regardless of the volume adjustment. output at the volume (fixed volume). That is, in this first situation, even if the left key P16c or right key P16d is pressed while the volume adjustment image is displayed, the error notification sound is always kept at a constant volume (a predetermined fixed volume (for example, the maximum (volume)), and the volume of the error notification sound does not change. On the other hand, while the error notification sound is being output, the output of other sounds such as jackpot BGM is stopped. However, while the output of the jackpot BGM is stopped, the jackpot BGM continues to be reproduced internally in a muted state (mute or silent state). If a volume adjustment operation is performed during muted playback of BGM during this jackpot, the mute playback will continue, but the volume level setting value will be changed to a value corresponding to the volume adjustment operation in terms of internal processing. Set. For example, in this first situation, if the volume level is changed from "2" to "4" in response to the player's volume adjustment operation, the error notification sound will always have a constant volume regardless of the volume level. (fixed volume), and the BGM output is stopped (muted) during a jackpot, but the volume level setting value is variably set to "4" in terms of internal processing (internal processing (The volume adjustment operation is effectively accepted.)

<Various notification effects in the second situation> In this embodiment, if a type 3 error occurs in the gaming machine while the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, the type 3 error will be displayed. A situation in which the corresponding error notification is not executed and the grand prize opening presentation (emphasis presentation and/or prize ball count-up presentation) is not executed even if a game ball enters the grand prize opening P54 (“Second (referred to as "situation"). Note that in this second situation, some execution modes (for example, outputting an error notification sound) among the execution modes of error notification corresponding to type 3 errors are not executed, and other execution modes (for example, error notification sound output) are not executed. Image display) may also be executed.

This second situation satisfies the suppression function activation condition (the count value of MY counter P1038 has reached the specified value "95000"), but since a jackpot game is being executed, this second situation In this situation, the suppression notification effect will not be executed (the suppression function will not operate). Also, in this second situation, unlike the first situation above, the advance notification performance (10th unit notification performance) is also executed until the suppression function is activated (until the jackpot game ends). Not done. That is, at the time when the second situation occurs (when the third type error is detected), the advance notification performance (the tenth unit notification performance) that has been executed up to that point is forcibly terminated.

The reason why the advance notification effect is not executed in this second situation is that a type 3 error (unauthorized prize winning error) with the highest priority has occurred when MY counter P1038 has reached the specified value "95000". There is a high probability that a large-scale fraudulent act (unauthorized prize winning) has been carried out to the extent that the MY counter P1038 reaches the specified value "95000". ), it is possible to detect fraud at an early stage. In addition, if the error notification and pre-notification performance are performed while the above-mentioned fraudulent activity is being carried out, the fraudster will foresee that the suppression function will soon be activated and the game will be stopped (cancelled). There is a risk that the perpetrator may hide the fraudulent activity or run away from the game parlor, but by sending and receiving the external information signals mentioned above, the gaming parlor can secretly monitor the perpetrator, thereby allowing legitimate players in the vicinity to It is possible to detect fraudulent activity without causing a sense of distrust or discomfort. In addition, in the second situation, when the gaming machine is powered off and then restored, if the power restoration involves clearing the RAM (operation of the RAM clear switch P820), the type 3 error is canceled. After the jackpot game ends, the suppression function is activated (the suppression notification effect is executed).

The relationship between various error notifications and the suppression function is as described above, but the relationship between various effects (standby demonstration effect, button vibe effect, predetermined movement of decorative patterns, image transformation effect) and the suppression function is as follows. It is as follows. The standby demonstration performance can be executed (started) even while the advance notification performance is being executed, but the standby demonstration performance is not executed (started) while the suppression notification performance is being executed. Note that the advance notification performance can be performed (started) even while the standby demonstration performance is in progress, and can be executed in parallel, but the suppression notification performance can be performed even while the standby demonstration performance is in progress. (can be started), but the standby demonstration performance is forcibly terminated. Further, the button vibe effect can be executed (started) even while the advance notification effect is being executed, but the button vibe effect is not executed (started) while the suppression alert effect is being executed. Note that the advance notification effect can be executed (started) even while the button vibe effect is in progress, and can be executed in parallel, but the suppression notification effect can be executed even while the button vibe effect is in progress. (can be started), but the button vibe effect is forcibly ended. In addition, even if the advance notification effect is in progress, the predetermined actions of the decorative pattern (action at the start of fluctuation, action at temporary stop, action at reach completion, swinging action) can be performed (startable), but the suppression notification The predetermined movement of the decorative pattern is not executed (started) while the performance is being performed. Note that the pre-notification performance can be performed (started) even while the predetermined action of the decorative pattern is being performed, and can be performed in parallel. While the suppression notification effect can be executed (started), the predetermined movement of the decorative pattern is forcibly terminated. Furthermore, the image transformation performance can be executed (started) even while the advance notification performance is being executed, but the image transformation performance is not executed (started) while the suppression notification performance is being executed. Note that the advance notification effect can be executed (started) even while the image transformation effect is being executed, and can be executed in parallel, but the suppression notification effect can be executed even while the image transformation effect is being executed. (can be started), but the image transformation effect is forcibly terminated.

The main effects achieved in the eighth embodiment (including modified examples) can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the eighth embodiment, the upper limit value "99999" of the accumulated award pitch count display is set as a larger value than the specified value "95000" which is the upper limit value of MY, and the Even if there is, it is possible to display a cumulative prize ball count that exceeds the specified value of MY "95000" which is the execution condition, so it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment, and as a result, It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, the reference unit "2500" of the specific value that is the execution condition for the emphasis effect is a numerical value smaller than the difference value "5000" between the specified value "95000" of MY and the predetermined value "90000". is set, and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls) at least once between the start of the advance notification effect and the activation of the suppression function, and the emphasis is Since the effect is always executed at least once, it is possible to guarantee the execution of the enhanced effect even in the situation immediately before the suppression function is activated, and it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, even if MY reaches the specified value "95000" and satisfies the suppression function activation condition while the prize ball count-up performance is being executed, the prize ball count-up performance that is being executed is By continuing the prize ball count-up performance that is currently being executed without interruption, it is possible to realize a performance that does not feel strange to the player. It is possible to maintain the player's desire to play even in situations where the system is activated, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, even if MY reaches the specified value "95000" and satisfies the suppression function activation condition during execution of the emphasis performance, the relevant By continuing the emphasis effect that is being executed, it is possible to realize an effect that does not feel strange to the player, and even after MY reaches the specified value "95000" (in a situation where the suppression function will be activated soon), the player It is possible to maintain the player's desire to play, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, even if MY reaches the predetermined value "90000" and satisfies the advance notification condition (when the advance notification effect is started) during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect, the execution By continuing the prize ball count-up performance in progress without interrupting the prize ball count-up performance in progress, it is possible to realize a performance that does not feel strange to the player, and the advance notification performance has started. It is possible to maintain the player's desire to play even after the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, even if MY reaches the predetermined value "90000" and satisfies the advance notification condition (when the advance notification effect is started) during the execution of the emphasis effect, the emphasis By continuing the current emphasis performance without interrupting the performance, it is possible to realize a performance that does not feel strange to the player, and also to increase the player's desire to play even after the advance notification performance has started. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, even if the emphasis performance is about to be executed during the execution of a jackpot game, the emphasis performance will not be executed and will be suppressed due to irregular winnings in areas other than the jackpot. By having a situation where the function activation conditions can be satisfied, it is possible to realize an appropriate performance progression according to the situation, and even in such irregular events, the suppression function is activated to ensure fair and equal gaming. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In such a situation, by turning off the power and then turning it on again, it is possible to reset the content of the performance and the operating conditions of the suppression function, so to speak, starting over from scratch.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, even if the situation is just before the emphasis performance is executed during the execution of the jackpot game, the emphasis performance will not be executed and the emphasis effect will not be executed due to irregular winnings in areas other than the big winning opening. By having a situation where the notification conditions can be satisfied, it is possible to realize an appropriate production progress according to the situation, and even in such irregular events, advance notification regarding the suppression function can be promptly executed to ensure a fair and impartial situation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In such a situation, by turning off the power and then turning it on again, it is possible to reset the content of the performance and the advance notice, so to speak, to start over from scratch.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, the execution time of the emphasis performance is set to be longer than the execution time of the prize ball count-up performance performed in response to the entry of one game ball into the big winning hole P54. By doing this, even if the emphasis performance and the prize ball count-up performance are executed at the same time or almost simultaneously, it is possible to make the highly rare emphasis performance stand out, thereby increasing the player's sense of satisfaction when the emphasis performance occurs. It is possible to further improve the sense of accomplishment, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, by setting the execution time of the advance notification performance to be longer than the execution time of the emphasis performance, even if the advance notification performance and the emphasis performance are executed overlapped, the temporary It is possible to prioritize advance notification effects, which are continuous displays, to make them more noticeable than emphasis effects, which are displays, and improve the player's attention to the advance notification effects. This makes it possible for the player to reliably know that the game is scheduled to start operating soon, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, even if the game balls enter the big winning hole P54 continuously and the previous and subsequent two prize ball count-up performances are performed continuously, the previous and subsequent prizes are Since the ball count-up performance can proceed smoothly without any delay, there is a possibility that a timing lag may occur between the time the game ball enters the big winning hole P54 and the execution of the prize ball count-up performance (thereby, the game In addition, it is possible to appropriately complete the prize ball count-up performance during the execution of a jackpot game (round game), and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, even if the music being output is changed by the player's selection operation while the emphasis performance is being executed, the special sound of the emphasis performance continues to be output. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's sense of accomplishment and satisfaction regarding the occurrence of an emphasis effect (that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a certain value) is impaired, and it is also possible to prevent a situation in which the player's sense of accomplishment and satisfaction is impaired due to the occurrence of an emphasis effect (the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a certain value), as well as to provide a variety of effects in the effect during a jackpot. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the eighth embodiment, if the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, after the power is restored, an emphasis effect (before the power is turned off) While not executing the emphasis performance (which was scheduled to be executed), the suppression notification performance is executed after the end of the jackpot game restarted after the power is restored, giving priority to the notification of the power-off recovery over the execution of the emphasis performance. , it is possible to promptly notify the player that the power has been restored and the game can be resumed, and after the power has been restored, the suppression function is reliably notified and activated, thereby providing a fair and impartial system. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the eighth embodiment, if the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of a jackpot game, after the power is restored, an emphasis effect (executed before the power is turned off) In addition to not executing the scheduled emphasis performance), and also not restarting the advance notification performance (the preliminary performance that was being executed at the time of the power outage) after the power is restored, it is possible to recover from a power outage rather than executing the emphasis performance and advance notification performance. By prioritizing the notification of (It is possible to dispel the misunderstanding and anxiety among players that the suppression function will be activated immediately after the power is restored), and as a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

[Modifications] Next, modifications of the first to eighth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machines of the first to eighth embodiments, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. The explanation will be omitted and the different parts will be mainly explained.

<Modification 1> In the above embodiment, when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, a normal probability-variable gaming machine is adopted in which it is determined whether or not there is a probability-variable transition based on the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) of the special symbol. However, it is not limited to this configuration, and if the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, the probability change transition may be made depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game. A V probability variable gaming machine that determines the presence or absence may be adopted. In addition, as a modification of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, a variable probability gaming state is provided when the first special symbol or the second special symbol hits the jackpot up to a preset limit number of times (upper limit number of times). Alternatively, a gaming machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive potential gaming states may be adopted. In addition, in the second embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a probability variable gaming machine that continues from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot occurs, but the probability variation function of the special symbol is specified. It may be configured as a fixed-rate gaming machine (number-of-time variable fixed-rate machine, ST machine) that operates continuously for ST number of times (for example, 100 times). On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a variable probability game machine (number cut probability variation machine, ST machine) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol operates continuously for a specified ST number of times, but the probability variation function of the special symbol is It may be constructed as a variable probability gaming machine that continues from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot occurs.

<Modification 2> In the above embodiment, a model in which only one big prize opening is installed in the gaming area is illustrated and explained, but the model is not limited to this, and a plurality of big winning openings can be installed in the gaming area. It is also possible to apply the same model. In addition, when adopting a model equipped with multiple big winning openings, the above-mentioned V probability variable gaming machine is equipped with a specific area (probability variation function activation area, V area) that is the trigger for the activation of the probability variation function of the special symbol. It may be equipped with two or more big winning holes, a first big winning hole and a second big winning hole that does not have this specific area (probability fluctuation function operating area, V area). As an example of the layout of the board, the first big winning hole and the second big winning hole may be arranged side by side substantially vertically or horizontally in the right side area of the gaming area, or the first big winning hole may be placed side by side. The board area where the second big prize opening is placed may be different from the board area where the second big winning hole is placed. In that case, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the first big winning hole (unit prize ball number) and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second big winning hole. The number of award pitches (unit award pitch number) may be the same or different. Also, of the two big winning holes, the first big winning hole (or second big winning hole) is for small winning games, and the second big winning hole (or first big winning hole) is for big winning games. It may also be configured as a big winning opening. In that case, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) of the big winning hole for small winning games is 10, and the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) of the big winning hole for jackpot games is 15, etc. good.

<Variation 3> In the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of types of game states, in the latent probability variable game state, the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol variation time shortening function are activated, and the electric chew support function is not activated. However, it is not limited to this, and is defined as a gaming state where only the special symbol's probability fluctuation function is activated, and the special symbol's fluctuation time shortening function and electric chew support function are not activated. It may also be defined as a gaming state. In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is divided into the first special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and the second special symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and the latent probability variable gaming state is changed to the special symbol probability fluctuation function and the second special symbol fluctuation time shortening function. 2. It may be defined as a game state in which the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, the electric chew support function may operate in synchronization with the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function), or the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function). It may also be one that operates independently of the shortening function).

Next, in order to make it easier to more clearly understand the technical significance of the embodiments and modifications described above, problems corresponding to the embodiments and modifications described above will be outlined.

Conventional pachinko gaming machines are known to execute a winning effect (for example, displaying the number of prize balls and outputting sound effects) when a game ball enters the winning hole during a special game. (For example, see “Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-123602”).

However, since there are already a large number of conventional pachinko gaming machines that adopt this configuration, in order to differentiate them from the conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in conventional pachinko gaming machines, while a special game is being executed, it notifies the number of round games to be played in the currently executing special game and the number of rounds in the currently executing round game. is known (for example, see "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-125303").

However, since there are already a large number of conventional pachinko gaming machines that adopt this configuration, in order to differentiate them from the conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, conventional pachinko gaming machines are equipped with a performance display device that displays game performance information obtained by measuring the number of game balls discharged from the playing area and the number of prize balls given to players. is known (for example, see "Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-186936").

However, there are already a large number of conventional pachinko gaming machines that employ this configuration, and there is still room for further improvement in order to achieve appropriate gaming performance evaluation.

In addition, some conventional pachinko gaming machines are equipped with a function (so-called setting function) for setting the winning probability at which the result of the judgment is a jackpot. reference).

However, there are already a large number of conventional pachinko gaming machines that adopt this configuration, and there is still room for further improvement from the perspective of reducing the processing load of the gaming machine.

Therefore, in the Pachinko game machines according to the above embodiments and modifications, the above configurations are adopted for the purpose of further improvement, and the above effects are achieved.

[Ninth Embodiment] Next, a Pachinko gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment will be described. Here, in the above-mentioned second to eighth embodiments, a normal pachinko game machine of the type that pays out game balls (prize balls) to a ball tray has been described, but in this ninth embodiment, the inside of the game machine A Pachinko game machine called a managed game machine, an ECO game machine, or an enclosed game machine that recycles game balls enclosed in a pachinko game machine will be explained. Hereinafter, the Pachinko gaming machine of the ninth embodiment will be referred to as a "managed gaming machine".

The pachinko gaming machine (managed gaming machine) of the ninth embodiment is basically the same as the pachinko gaming machine according to one or a combination of two or more of the second to eighth embodiments described above. (including those in which some of the constituent elements have been deleted or converted using well-known/commonly used techniques, etc.), and hereinafter, parts with the same structure will be given the same reference numerals and explained. We will omit this and mainly explain the different parts. In other words, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the same configuration as the above-mentioned second to eighth embodiments, and the same structure as the above-mentioned second to eighth embodiments can be applied. It is possible to perform similar games (including game effects). Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, a slot machine was explained as an example of a gaming machine equipped with a board, but the configuration of this board (board structure) may also be applied to a board mounted on a managed gaming machine. .

First, we will explain the main terms used below.

A "managed gaming machine" is a gaming machine that has the function of outputting various information about the gaming machine to a gaming machine information center (sometimes referred to as a "gaming machine" or a "pachinko gaming machine").

The "main control CPU" is a CPU mounted on the main control board of the managed gaming machine (sometimes referred to as "main CPU").

The "frame control CPU" is a CPU mounted on the frame control board of the managed gaming machine.

The "dedicated unit" is a unit (rental device for game balls, etc.) dedicated to a gaming machine.

The "dedicated unit main board" is the main board of the dedicated unit.

The "control microcomputer" is a dedicated unit control CPU (hereinafter referred to as "CU").

The "dedicated PIF" is an interface for defining communication specifications between the managed game machine and the dedicated unit.

The "gaming machine information center" is a center that collects various information output from managed gaming machines.

A "card company data center" is a center of a card unit organization or a card company that is connected to the gaming machine information center.

A "management computer" is a computer connected to a dedicated unit.

The "hall computer" is a computer that collects various information output from the hall controller output box (hereinafter abbreviated as "hall controller").

The "Hall Controller Output Box" is a serial/pulse conversion device that connects to a dedicated unit and outputs various information to the Hall Controller.

The "main control chip ID number" is the ID number of the main control CPU.

The "frame control chip ID number" is the ID number of the frame control CPU.

The "number of game balls" is the number of game balls that can be fired by the managed gaming machine (the number of game balls recorded on the game ball number display device).

The “counted number of balls” is the number of counted balls transmitted by the managed gaming machine.

The "number of rental balls" is the number of rental balls transmitted by the dedicated unit.

The "number of pitches held" is the counted number of pitches received by the dedicated unit and the number of pitches managed by the card company.

"Game machine information" is a general term for game machine installation information, game machine performance information, hole control/fraud monitoring information.

"Game machine installation information" is information transmitted to the game machine information center, including the game machine type, the manufacturer code of the main control CPU/frame control CPU, the product code, and the chip ID number.

"Game machine performance information" is information transmitted to the gaming machine information center, such as MY, number of game balls acquired per minute (base), role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, etc.

"Hole con information" is information such as jackpots, probability fluctuations, fluctuation time reduction, and the number of winning balls in each winning hole.

“Fraud monitoring information” is information indicating fraud detection state 1 among fraud detection states 1 to 3. Fraud detection state 1 indicates a fraud detection state on the main control board side. Incidentally, fraud detection states 2 and 3 indicate fraud detection states on the frame control board side.

"Error information" is information indicating an error state of a gaming machine.

[Overall Configuration of Managed Gaming Machine] Next, the overall configuration of the managed gaming machine PC of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224. Hereinafter, the directions shown by the arrows in FIG. 223 will be referred to as the up-down direction, the front-back direction, and the left-right direction, respectively.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the managed gaming machine PC will be explained. As shown in FIG. 223, the managed gaming machine PC has an outer frame P1 that is a vertically oriented fixed holding frame configured to have an outer rectangular frame size, and an open/close mounting frame that is configured to have a rectangular frame size that matches this. It is mainly composed of the front frame P2. The front frame P2 is attached to the front opening of the outer frame P1 so that it can be laterally opened and closed, and can be attached and detached by upper and lower hinge mechanisms P3a and P3b arranged on the left side edges of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2. . Further, the front frame P2 is always held in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected to the outer frame P1 using a locking device P4 called a double lock provided on the right side edge.

A rectangular glass frame P5 matching the upper front area of the front frame P2 is attached to the front side of the front frame P2 so as to be horizontally openable and detachable using upper and lower hinge mechanisms P3a and P3b. The glass frame P5 is always kept in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame P2 using the above-mentioned locking device P4. A game board P20 is removably set and held in the front frame 2, and the game area PA provided in front of the game board P20 is visible through the double-glazed glass of the glass frame P5, which is normally kept closed. It has become.

On the front side of the glass frame P5, there are provided a frame lamp (LED lamp) P10 that emits light depending on the progress of the game, and a speaker P7 that generates sound effects depending on the progress of the game. At the lower right portion of the front frame P2, a firing handle P12 for performing a firing operation of the game ball is provided. A decorative member P19 that protrudes and swells forward is provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5. A performance button P11 such as a button, switch, or dial for performing a predetermined performance operation is attached to the center of this decorative member P19. A cross key P16 is attached to the left side of the upper surface of the decorative portion P19 for performing setting operations related to presentation. On the right side of the upper surface of the decorative member P19, there is a game ball number display device P851 that displays the number of game balls that can be used for the game, etc., and a counter that performs a counting process that subtracts the number of game balls and adds it to the number of balls held. A button P852 is attached. Note that, due to the structure, no ball trays (upper ball tray, lower ball tray) are provided on the front side of the managed gaming machine PC, so that the player does not directly touch the game balls. Although not shown, the management gaming machine PC is equipped with a gaming ball circulation device for circulating a predetermined number of gaming balls inside the gaming machine. This game ball circulation device collects the game balls (out balls) fired from the firing device into the gaming area PA, and supplies the collected game balls to the firing device again, thereby allowing the balls to be sealed inside the gaming machine. A predetermined number of game balls are used in circulation.

Next, the basic structure of the rear side of the managed gaming machine PC will be explained. As shown in FIG. 224, a back mechanism panel P30 is attached to the rear side of the front frame P2 and is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame that is somewhat smaller than the front frame P2 and has a window in the center that communicates with the front and back. There is.
A game board cover (not shown) that covers the entire rear side of the game board 20 is attached to the rear side of the back mechanism board P30. On the rear side of the back mechanism panel P30, there is a frame control board (frame control board case unit) P800 that manages and stores game balls (number of game balls), and various control devices and electric/electronic parts that receive power from the gaming facility side. A power supply board (power supply board case unit) P500 and the like are attached to supply power to the. In addition, on the rear side of the game board P20, there is a main control board (main control board case unit) P100 that centrally controls the operation of the management game machine PC, image display, lighting effects, sound effects, etc. according to the game development. A performance control board (performance control board case unit) 200 and the like are attached to control the overall performance. These control devices and the electric/electronic parts of each part of the managed game machine PC are connected by a harness (connector cable), so that the managed game machine PC is configured to be operable.

The configuration of the boards installed in the slot machine of the first embodiment is as follows: main control board P100, production control board P200, power supply board P500, frame control board P800, which are mounted on the management gaming machine PC of this embodiment. The present invention can be applied to other applications, and the same effects as those of the first embodiment described above can be achieved.

[Interface Specifications between Main Control Board and Frame Control Board] Next, the interface specifications between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 of the managed gaming machine PC will be explained.

[1. System Configuration] Next, the system configuration of the managed gaming machine PC will be explained. FIG. 225 is a block diagram showing the system configuration of the managed gaming machine PC. In the figure, the hard interface is shown by a double line, and the soft interface is shown by a single line (single arrow) as the interface of this system.

The management gaming machine PC includes a main control board P100, a frame control board P800, an effect control board P200, a power supply board P500, a game ball number display device P851, a counting button P852, a dedicated PIF circuit P860, and the like. The main control board P100 and the effect control board P200 are connected so that they can communicate only in a single direction from the main control board P100 to the effect control board P200, and various effects are transmitted from the main control board P100 to the effect control board P200. A control command is sent. The main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 are connected to enable bidirectional communication. From the main control board P100 to the frame control board P800, gaming machine installation information, a telegram for notifying gaming machine information, etc. are transmitted. A response message, etc. for responding to the main control board P100 with the result of receiving the message is transmitted from the frame control board P800 to the main control board P100.

The frame control board P800 manages the addition and subtraction of the number of game balls, controls the circulation of game balls, controls the firing of game balls, calculates performance information, and the like. A game ball number display device P851, a counting button P852, a dedicated PIF circuit P853, etc. are connected to this frame control board P800. The frame control board P800 controls the display of the game ball number display device P851. The game ball number display device P851 is a display device having, for example, a 6-digit, 7-segment LED, and displays the number of game balls that can be fired by the managed gaming machine PC. This game ball number display device P851 can display the number of game balls in units of one ball. The counting button P852 is operated between the management gaming machine PC and the dedicated unit P900 to perform a counting process of converting the number of game balls to the number of balls. The operation signal of this counting button P852 is input to the frame control board P800. When this counting button P852 is pressed, a predetermined counting process is performed, and the counted number of balls (250 balls) is subtracted from the number of game balls, and this subtracted number of counted balls (250 balls) is the number of balls held. will be added to. In other words, when one counting process is performed, the preset number of counted balls (250 balls) is transferred from the number of game balls to the number of balls held (the number of game balls managed by the frame control board P800). is transferred to the number of balls managed by the dedicated unit P900). Although not shown, a performance display monitor (see performance display monitor 830 in FIG. 120, etc.) is connected to the frame control board P800. In this management gaming machine PC, performance information is calculated by the frame control board P800, and the calculation result is displayed on the performance display monitor. Further, the frame control board P800 is connected to the dedicated unit P900 by a dedicated PIF cable P860.

A power switch for starting/stopping the management gaming machine PC is connected to the power supply board P500, and power is supplied to each control board etc. by turning on the power switch. The power of the power supply board P500 is supplied from the power supply board P500 to the main control board P100 through the power line provided between the power supply board P500, the main control board P100, the effect control board P200, and the frame control board P800. It is supplied to the production control board P200 and the frame control board P800 via the control board P100. In addition, the power of the power supply board P500 may be supplied from the power supply board P500 to the frame control board P800, and may be supplied to the main control board P100 and the production control board P200 via this frame control board P800.

[2. Communication between the main control board and the frame control board] Communication between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 is performed using a telegram method using an asynchronous serial port. Information (telegrams) sent and received between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 includes "gaming machine installation information notification", "gaming machine installation information response", "gaming machine information notification", and "gaming machine information". "Response" is included. The main control board P100 transmits a gaming machine installation information notification in one message when the power is turned on. The frame control board P800 transmits a gaming machine installation information response within 10 ms as a response message to the gaming machine installation information notification. Further, the main control board P100 transmits game information notification in one telegram at regular intervals. The frame control board P800 transmits a gaming machine installation information response within 10 ms as a response message to the gaming machine information notification.

[3. Communication Conditions] Next, communication conditions between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 will be described. The communication speed (baud rate) between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 is "31250 bps". The bit configuration is set to ``1 bit'' for the start bit, ``8 bits'' for the data bit, ``1 bit'' for the stop bit, and no parity bit. The communication method is asynchronous serial communication. Communication control is full-duplex communication, and the communication cycle is "108ms".

[4. Data structure of message] Next, the data structure of the message will be explained. The data structure of this message will be described in detail later, but it is applicable to the data structure of a gaming machine installation information notification, a gaming machine installation information response, a gaming machine information notification, and a gaming machine information response. Note that the "telegram" can be translated as a command, a signal (control signal), or information (control information).

The message includes data (information) such as "message length", "command", "serial number", "data section", and "checksum" in order from the beginning. In other words, the data from the first "telegram length" to the last "checksum" is the message range. The data format of each data forming the message is HEX (hexadecimal). The main control board P100 always completes the message in one frame and does not send it in parts. In addition, if the frame control board P800 cannot receive up to the "checksum" within 20ms after receiving the "telegram length", it cancels the received data up to that point and receives the "telegram length" again. do.

The “telegram length” is the length of the message from this “telegram length” to the “checksum”. The data length of this "telegram length" is 1 byte.

"Command" is the command code of the message. In this embodiment, the command codes of the message are "0x01 (gaming machine installation information notification)", "0x11 (gaming machine installation information response)", "0x02 (gaming machine information notification)", and "0x12 (gaming machine information response)". )", and the command code is set according to the type of message. The data length of this "command" is 1 byte.

The "serial number" is a communication serial number (sequence number of the serial number) given to the message. "Serial number" stores values from "0" to "255" ("0x00" to "0xFF" in hexadecimal notation) as communication serial numbers. The data length of this "serial number" is 1 byte.

The "data part" is the data of the message. The data length of this "data section" is 1 byte.

The "checksum" is the result of adding up the "telegram length" to the "data part." The data length of this "checksum" is 1 byte.

[5. Message Type] Next, the message type (telegram name) will be explained. There are four types of messages: (A) gaming machine installation information notification, (B) gaming machine installation information response, (C) gaming machine information notification, and (D) gaming machine information response. The details of each message will be explained in order below.

[A. Gaming Machine Installation Information Notification] First, the “gaming machine installation information notification” will be explained. The "gaming machine installation information notification" is a message for notifying gaming machine installation information from the main control board P100 to the frame control board P800.

The "gaming machine installation information notification" consists of a total of 25 bytes of data (information) including, in order from the beginning, "telegram length", "command", "communication serial number", "gaming machine installation information", and "checksum". Consists of data length. In addition, in the "gaming machine installation information notification", the "gaming machine installation information" corresponds to the "data part" of the message.

<A1. Message length> The data length of “Message length” is 1 byte. This "telegram length" is set to "0x19", which is a value indicating the length of the message (25 bytes).

<A2. Command> The data length of “command” is 1 byte. This "command" is set to "0x01", which is a value indicating the command code of the message (gaming machine installation information notification).

<A3. Communication Serial Number> The data length of the “Communication Serial Number” is 1 byte. This "communication serial number" is set to "0x00" as a fixed value.

<A4~A7. Game machine installation information> The data length of “gaming machine installation information” is 21 bytes. This "gaming machine installation information" includes "gaming machine type", "main control chip ID number", "main control chip manufacturer code", and "main control chip product code".

<A4. Game machine type> "Game machine type" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 Bits), Bit 7 indicates the management medium (0 = game ball, 1 = game medal), and Bits 6 to 4 indicate the group classification ( 0=Group A, 1=Group B, 2 to 7=not used), and Bit3 to Bit0 indicate the gaming machine (1=Pachinko gaming machine, 2=Reeling drum gaming machine, 3=Arranged ball gaming machine, 4 = Jiyan ball game machine, 0 = unused, 5 to 15 = unused). When the "gaming machine type" is "0x00", it indicates that the management medium is a game ball, the group classification is group A, and the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. When the "gaming machine type" is "0x82", it indicates that the management medium is a gaming medal, the group classification is group A, and the gaming machine is a reel-type gaming machine. When the "gaming machine type" is "0x83", it indicates that the management medium is a gaming medal, the group classification is group A, and the gaming machine is an arranged ball gaming machine. When the "game machine type" is "0x84", it indicates that the management medium is a game medal, the group classification is group A, and the game machine is a baseball game machine. When the "gaming machine type" is "0x92", it indicates that the management medium is a gaming medal, the group classification is group B, and the gaming machine is a drum-type gaming machine.

<A5. Main control chip ID number> The data length of the "main control chip ID number" is 1 byte. The "main control chip ID number" is set to the ID number given to the main control chip (chip individual number or chip individual code displayed on the ID reader). Note that the "main control chip ID number" includes an identification code for identifying the CPU manufacturer and CPU type.

<A6. Main control chip maker code> The data length of the “main control chip maker code” is 3 bytes. This "main control chip maker code" is set to the maker code written in the management area of the main control chip.

<A7.
Main control chip product code> The data length of the “main control chip product code” is 8 bytes. The product code written in the management area of the main control chip is set in this "main control chip product code".

<A8. Checksum> The data length of the “checksum” is 1 byte. This "checksum" is set to the value that is the result of adding up the "telegram length" to the "gaming machine installation information".

The main control board P100 transmits a "gaming machine installation information notification" to the frame control board P800 (notifies the gaming machine installation information) when the power is turned on. Note that the main control board P100 disables normal games (launching game balls) until it receives a "gaming machine installation information response" from the frame control board P800.

[B. Gaming Machine Installation Information Response] Next, the “gaming machine installation information response” will be explained. The "gaming machine installation information response" is a message for responding from the frame control board P800 to the main control board P100 with the result of receiving the notification of gaming machine installation information.

The "gaming machine installation information response" has a total data length of 5 bytes, including, in order from the beginning, "telegram length", "command", "communication serial number", "gaming machine installation information reception result", and "checksum". configured. In addition, in the "gaming machine installation information response", the "gaming machine installation information reception result" corresponds to the "data part" of the message.

<B1. Message length> The data length of “Message length” is 1 byte. This "telegram length" is set to "0x05", which is a value indicating the length (5 bytes) of the message.

<B2. Command> The data length of “command” is 1 byte. This "command" is set to "0x11", which is a value indicating the command code of the message (gaming machine installation information response).

<B3. Communication Serial Number> The data length of the “Communication Serial Number” is 1 byte. This "communication serial number" is set to "0x00" as a fixed value.

<B4. Gaming machine installation information reception result> The data length of the “gaming machine installation information reception result” is 1 byte. This "gaming machine installation information reception result" is set to "0x00", which is information indicating that the "gaming machine installation information notification" has been received from the main control board P100. However, if the managed gaming machine PC is in the ball removal state (a state in which the gaming balls sealed in the managed gaming machine PC can be ejected from the machine) when the power is turned on, the "gaming machine installation information reception result" will include: "0x01", which is information indicating that the ball is out, is set.

<B5. Checksum> The data length of the “checksum” is 1 byte. This "checksum" is set to a value that is the result of adding up the "telegram length" to the "gaming machine installation information reception result."

When transmitting the "gaming machine installation information receipt confirmation", the frame control board P800 responds with the communication serial number received in the "gaming machine installation information notification" as is. Furthermore, if the communication serial number of the received "gaming machine installation information notification" is other than 0, the frame control board P800 does not respond.

[C. Gaming Machine Information Notification] Next, “gaming machine information notification” will be explained. "Game machine information notification" is a message for notifying gaming machine information (hole control information, fraud monitoring information) from the main control board P100 to the frame control board P800. In addition, as terms used below, the terms "conditional device" and "accessory continuous operation device" mean conceptual control devices, and "conditional device" is the term used when a jackpot occurs in a special symbol game. The "accessory continuous actuation device" is a device that can operate the special electric accessory P542 multiple times in succession.

"Game machine information notification" includes, in order from the beginning, "message length", "command", "communication serial number", "main control status 1", "main control status 2", "gaming machine error status", and "fraud detection". 11 to 21 in total, including data (information) of ``Status 1'', ``Number of bonus balls activated by accessory'', ``Number of consecutive bonus balls activated by accessory'', ``Number of game information'', ``Game information'', and ``Checksum''. Consists of data length in bytes. In addition, in "gaming machine information notification", "main control state 1", "main control state 2", "gaming machine error state", "fraud detection state", "accessory object activation prize ball number", "continuous ``Number of active prize balls'', ``Number of game information'', and ``Game information'' correspond to the ``data section'' of the message.

<C1. Message length> The data length of “Message length” is 1 byte. This "telegram length" is set to "0x05" to "0x15", which are values indicating the length of the message (11 to 21 bytes).

<C2. Command> The data length of “command” is 1 byte. This "command" is set to "0x02", which is a value indicating the command code of the message (gaming machine information notification).

<C3. Communication Serial Number> The data length of the “Communication Serial Number” is 1 byte. This "communication serial number" is set to a numerical value from "0 to 255 (0x00 to 0xFF)". The main control board P100 adds 1 to the "communication serial number" when transmitting the "gaming machine information notification" (adds 1 to the previous "communication serial number"). Note that if the result of this addition exceeds the maximum value "255", it will return to the minimum value "0".

<C4. Main control state 1> "Main control state 1" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 Bits), Bit 0 indicates "Jackpot 1", Bit 1 indicates "Jackpot 2", and Bit 2 indicates "Jackpot". Bit 3 indicates "gaming machine status signal 1", Bit 4 indicates "gaming machine status signal 2", Bit 5 indicates "gaming machine status signal 3", and Bit 6 indicates "gaming machine status signal 3". "Status signal 4" and Bit 7 is unused.

“Jackpot 1” is jackpot 1 information, and “1” is set during a jackpot to be notified. “Jackpot 2” is jackpot 2 information, and “1” is set in all jackpots. "Jackpot 3" is jackpot 3 information, and is set to "1" during any state such as play time, small win RUSH, C time saving, etc. In addition, play time is a time-saving game that is triggered by a specified number of successive failures in the judgment of the validity of special symbols in the normal game state (low probability low base state) (a specified number of consecutive failure fluctuation displays). state (low probability, high base state). Small hit RUSH is a potential game state (high probability low base state). C time saving refers to a time saving gaming state (low probability high base state) that shifts when a special symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific missed symbol (time saving symbol).

“Game machine status signal 1,” “gaming machine status signal 2,” “gaming machine status signal 3,” and “gaming machine status signal 4” are sent from the extended external terminal board of the dedicated unit P900 to the outside of the hall console HC, etc. This corresponds to the "external terminal board status output signals 1 to 4" output from the extended external terminal board of the dedicated unit P900. The "gaming machine status signal 1" is set to "1" while the gaming machine status signal 1 is ON. "Game machine status signal 2" is set to "1" while gaming machine status signal 2 is ON. The "gaming machine status signal 3" is set to "1" while the gaming machine status signal 3 is ON. The "gaming machine status signal 4" is set to "1" while the gaming machine status signal 4 is ON.

<C5. Main control state 2> "Main control state 2" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 Bits), Bit 0 indicates "in the jackpot + time saving (fluctuating time shortening) or in an advantageous state", and Bit 1 is, Bit 2 indicates "high probability", Bit 2 indicates "time reduction (variation time reduction) or advantageous state", and Bits 3 to 7 are unused. "During jackpot + time saving (variable time shortening) or advantageous game" includes during jackpot and after the jackpot is in the process of time saving (variable time shortening), or during jackpot and after the jackpot is in an advantageous state. "1" is set when the status is in progress (such as when the status is fixed or on hold). ``High probability medium'' is set to ``1'' when the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state where the probability is relatively high. ``During time saving (variable time reduction) or advantageous state'' is set to ``1'' when time saving (variable time reduction) or an advantageous game is in progress. Note that in the case of a gaming machine that does not notify that the probability variation function is operating, the information of "medium high probability" is not output.

<C6. Game machine error state> "Game machine error state" consists of a data length of 1 byte (8 Bits), Bit0 to Bit5 indicate the error code occurring in the management game machine PC, and Bit6 is "0". If it is "1", it is an error on the frame control board P800 side, and if it is "1", it is an error on the main control board P100 side. ” indicates an alarm (error alarm) and hole control output. Note that when Bit0 to Bit7 are "0", it indicates that no error has occurred.

<C7. Fraud Detection State 1> "Fraud Detection State 1" consists of a data length of 1 byte (8 Bits), Bit0 indicates "Settings changing signal", Bit1 indicates "Settings confirmation signal", and Bit2 indicates "RAM clear signal", Bit 3 indicates "fraud detection signal 1", Bit 4 indicates "fraud detection signal 2", Bit 5 indicates "fraud detection signal 3", and Bit 6 indicates "fraud detection signal 3". Bit 7 is unused. Note that the frame control board P800 stores the "settings changing signal" and "settings checking signal" and turns off the signals after 180 seconds or more.

The "settings changing signal" is information indicating that the settings are being changed, and is set to "0" when the setting is normal (other than when changing the settings), and is set to "1" when the settings are being changed.

The "setting confirmation signal" is information indicating that the settings are being checked, and is set to "0" when the settings are normal (other than when the settings are being checked), and is set to "1" when the settings are being checked.

The "RAM clear signal" is information indicating that the RAM of the main control board 100 has been cleared, and is set to "0" when it is normal (other than when a RAM clear occurs), and "1" when a RAM clear occurs. " is set.

"Fraud detection signal 1" is information indicating that there is a risk of fraud (urgency level: weak) in addition to the above (settings being changed, settings being checked, RAM cleared), and "0" if normal. If an abnormality has occurred, "1" is set.

"Fraud detection signal 2" is information indicating that there is a risk of fraud (urgency level: medium) in addition to the above (settings being changed, settings being checked, RAM cleared), and "0" if normal. If an abnormality has occurred, "1" is set.

"Fraud detection signal 3" is information indicating that there is a risk of fraud (urgency: strong) in addition to the above (settings being changed, settings being checked, RAM cleared), and "0" if normal. If an abnormality has occurred, "1" is set.

The "complete signal" is information indicating that the complete function has been activated, and is set to "0" if it is normal, and is set to "1" if the complete function is activated. Note that this complete function corresponds to the "suppression function" described in the eighth embodiment.

The urgency of "Fraud Detection Signal 1" to "Fraud Detection Signal 3" is the level notified by the aircraft history server, so the level of urgency for "Fraud Detection Signal 1" to "Fraud Detection Signal 3" is the level reported by the aircraft history server, so the level of urgency is "Weak", "Medium", and "Strong" in descending order of fraud. Output as .

<C8. Number of prize balls activated by accessory > "Number of prize balls activated by accessory" consists of a data length of 1 byte (8 Bits), and is the sum of the number of prize balls (0 to 255) due to the activation of accessory from the previous gaming machine information notification. ) is information for notifying the frame control board P800.

<C9. Continuous role object activation prize ball number> "Continuous role object operation prize ball number" is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 Bits), and is a number of prize balls due to the role object continuous operation device operation from the previous gaming machine information notification. This is information for notifying the frame control board P800 of the total (0 to 255).

<C10. Number of Game Information> The “Number of Game Information” is information that is composed of a data length of 1 byte (8 Bits) and indicates the number of “Game Information” (n=0 to 5). For example, if the "number of gaming information" is 1, "gaming information 1" is included as one "gaming information", and if the "number of gaming information" is 2, two "gaming information" are included. '' includes "gaming information 1" and "gaming information 2", and if the "number of gaming information" is 3, the three "gaming information" include "gaming information 1", "gaming information 2", and ""Game information 3" and "Number of game information" is 4, the four "Game information" are "Game information 1", "Game information 2", "Game information 3", "Game information 4". ", and if the "number of game information" is 5, the four "game information" are "game information 1", "game information 2", "game information 3", "game information 4", " Game information 5" is included. Note that when the "number of game information" is 0, "game information" is not included.

<C11-C20. Game information> "Game information" is information that notifies the frame control board P800 of starting opening winnings, big winning opening winnings, number of symbols confirmed, etc. that occur on the main control board P100. The "gaming information" is composed of "type information (upper 1 byte)" and "count information (lower 1 byte)" with a total data length of 2 bytes.

<Type information> "Type information" is composed of a data type and a data number, and a data number is set for each data type. Specifically, of the 1-byte "type information", the data type is assigned to the upper 4 Bits (Bits 4 to 7), and the data number is assigned to the lower 4 Bits (Bits 0 to 3). The content of the "type information" is specified by the combination of the value of the data type (Bit 4 to 7) and the value of the data number (Bit 0 to 3). Note that for the data type (Bits 4 to 7), "0", "5 to 8", and "11" are unused.

When the data type is "1", it is information that notifies a starting prize winning (winning a starting prize). The data number is information indicating the starting port number; "1" indicates starting port 1, "2" indicates starting port 2, and "3" indicates starting port 3. Note that data numbers "0" and "4 to 15" are unused. For example, if there are two starting ports, a first starting port P51 and a second starting port P52, as in the above embodiment, "starting port 1" is assigned to the first starting port P51, and "starting port 1" is assigned to the second starting port P52. "Starting port 2" can be assigned. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the information on the starting port 3 is not output to the hall controller HC, if output to the hall controller HC is required, a command is output as the information on the starting port 1 or the starting port 2.

If the data type is "2", it is information that notifies you of winning the grand prize opening (winning the grand prize opening) due to the operation of the special electric accessory. The data number becomes information indicating the big winning hole number, and if it is "1", it shows the big winning hole 1, and if it is "2", it shows the big winning hole 2. Note that data numbers "0" and "3 to 15" are unused.

If the data type is "3", it is information that notifies you of a winning slot (winning a winning slot). The data number is the information indicating the winning hole number, "1" means winning hole 1, "2" means winning hole 2, "3" means winning hole 3, and "4" means winning hole. 4, . . ., “15” indicates the winning opening 15. Note that the data number "0" is unused. This information on winnings in the winning openings also includes winnings in the winning openings due to normal electric accessory operation.

When the data type is "4", it is information that notifies all starting opening winnings (winning at the starting opening or general figure operating opening related to the main game, passing through the gate). The data number is information indicating that the player has won a prize at the starting opening or normal pattern operating opening related to the main game, or has passed through the gate, and if it is "1", it indicates winning or passing. Note that data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

When the data type is "9", it is information that notifies the number of symbol confirmations (the number of variations in symbols related to the main game). The data number is information indicating the number of times the symbols related to the main game (special symbols, normal symbols, special symbols 1, special symbols 2, etc.) are confirmed, and if it is ``1'', it indicates the number of times the symbols related to the main game are confirmed. Note that data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

When the data type is "10", it is information that notifies the number of jackpot hits (that the accessory continuous actuation device has been activated). The data number indicates the number of jackpots, and if it is "1", it indicates that the accessory continuous operating device has operated (jackpot). Note that data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

If the data type is "12", the number of accessory items (the number of openings for the big winning opening: Mainly in old type 2 gaming machines, if you want to set the number of opening openings for the opening of the opening at the time of a small hit as the starting number), This is information that notifies the number of times the big prize opening is opened when the actuating device is not activated. The data number becomes information indicating the accessory number, and if it is "1", it indicates accessory 1. Note that data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

When the data type is "13", it is information that notifies passage of a specific area (that the game ball has passed through a specific area). The data number becomes information indicating a specific area, and if it is "1", it indicates specific area 1. Note that data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

When the data type is "14", it is information indicating external terminal board pulse output (external terminal board pulse output signal terminal of dedicated unit P900). This external terminal board pulse output is used to instruct pulse output from the extended external terminal board of the dedicated unit P900, and specifies the output signal terminal of the dedicated unit P900 with the data number. The data number is information that specifies the output signal terminal (external terminal board pulse output signal terminal) of the dedicated unit P900, and if it is "1", it is the external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1, and if it is "2", it is the external terminal board pulse output signal terminal. Pulse output signal terminal 2, "3" indicates external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3, and "4" indicates external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 4. Note that data numbers "5 to 15" are unused.

If the data type is "15", it is information that notifies a performance information status notification (a status required for the frame control board to calculate performance information). The data number is fixed at "1". Note that data numbers "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

In addition, when calculating the performance display monitor on the frame control board P800, in order to calculate the performance display monitor correctly, prize notifications for "1 to 3" and performance information status notifications for "15" among data types are required. are transmitted to the frame control board P800 in the chronological order of occurrence on the main control board P100.

<Count information> In the "count information", different number of times information is set for each data type. The contents of count information and data storage examples for each data type will be explained below.

(a) In the case of data types 1 to 3 If the data type is 1 = winning in the starting hole, 2 = winning in the big winning hole by special electric accessory activation, 3 = winning in the winning hole, "count information" is the number of prize balls ( (upper 4 Bits) and the number of winnings (lower 4 Bits). The number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) is set to “1 to 15 (pieces)”. The number of winning prizes (Bits 0 to 3) is set to "1 (piece)", and "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

(Example 1) When 2 balls are won in starting hole 1 of 3 prize balls. In the "type information," the data type is 1 = starting hole winning, and the data number is 1 = starting hole 1. The "count information" indicates that the number of prize balls is 3 = 3 prize balls, and the number of prize balls is 1 = 1 prize ball. As a result, two pieces of data of "0x1131" are generated as "gaming information".

(Example 2) When 3 balls are won in the grand prize opening 2 of 15 prize balls, the "type information" shows that the data type is 2 = a grand prize won by special electric accessory operation, and the data number is 2 = a grand prize. Mouth 2. The "count information" indicates that the number of prize balls is 15 = 15 prize balls, and the number of prize balls is 1 = 1 prize ball. As a result, three pieces of data of "0x22F1" are generated as "gaming information".

(Example 3) When 1 ball is won in winning hole 2 of 1 prize ball In the "type information", the data type is 3 = winning hole, and the data number is 2 = winning hole 2. The "count information" indicates that the number of prize balls is 1 = 1 prize ball, and the number of winning balls is 1 = 1 prize ball. As a result, one piece of data "0x3211" is generated as "gaming information".

(b) In the case of data type 4 When the data type is 4 = all starting slots won, the "count information" is composed of unused (upper 4 Bits) and all starting slots won (lower 4 Bits). Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". “1 (times)” is set for all starting opening winnings (Bits 0 to 3), and “0” and “2 to 15” are unused.

(Example 4) If you win one prize in the starting opening or normal figure operating opening related to the main game, or pass through the gate, the "type information" is that the data type is 4 = all starting openings won, and the data number is 1. = A starting port related to the main game. The "count information" is fixed to 0 if unused, and all starting openings won is 1 = 1 won or passed. As a result, one piece of data "0x4101" is generated as "gaming information".

(c) In the case of data type 9 When the data type is 9 = number of confirmed symbols, "count information" is composed of unused (upper 4 Bits) and number of confirmed symbols (lower 4 Bits). Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". “1 (times)” is set for the symbol confirmation number (Bit 0 to 3), and “0” and “2 to 15” are unused.

(Example 5) When a symbol related to the main game stops once In the "type information", the data type is 9 = the number of confirmed symbols, and the data number is 1 = the symbol related to the main game. The "count information" is fixed at 0 if unused, and the number of symbols confirmed is 1=1 stop. As a result, one piece of data "0x9101" is generated as "gaming information".

(d) In the case of data type 10 When the data type is 10 = number of jackpots, the "count information" is composed of unused (upper 4 Bits) and number of hits (lower 4 Bits). Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". The number of hits (Bits 0 to 3) is set to "1 (times)", and "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

(Example 6) When the accessory continuous operation device operates once (jackpot) In the "type information", the data type is 10 = number of jackpots, and the data number is 1 = jackpot. The "count information" is fixed to 0 if unused, and the number of hits is 1 = 1 occurrence. As a result, one piece of data "0xA101" is generated as "gaming information".

(e) In the case of data type 12 If the data type is 12 = number of accessory items (number of times the big winning hole is opened), "count information" consists of unused (upper 4 Bits) and number of accessory items (lower 4 Bits). be done. Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". “1 (times)” is set for the number of times (Bits 0 to 3) the accessory is played, and “0” and “2 to 15” are unused.

(Example 7) When accessory 1 is released once In the "type information", the data type is 12 = number of accessory objects, and the data number is 1 = accessory object 1. The "count information" is fixed to 0 if it is not used, and the number of times the accessory is opened is 1 = 1 time. As a result, one piece of data "0xC101" is generated as "gaming information".

(f) In the case of data type 13 When the data type is 13 = passing through a specific area, the "count information" is composed of unused (upper 4 Bits) and the number of passing through the specific area (lower 4 Bits). Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". The number of passes through the specific area (Bits 0 to 3) is set to "1 (times)", and "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

(Example 8) When the game ball passes through specific area 1 once In the "type information", the data type is 13 = specific area passed, and the data number is 1 = specific area 1. The "count information" is fixed to 0 if it is unused, and the number of passes through the specific area is 1=one pass. As a result, one piece of data "0xD101" is generated as "gaming information".

(g) In the case of data type 14 When the data type is 14 = external terminal board pulse output, "count information" is composed of unused (upper 4 Bits) and the number of pulse outputs (lower 4 Bits). Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". The number of pulse outputs (Bits 0 to 3) is set to "1 (times)", and "0" and "2 to 15" are unused.

(Example 9) When outputting a pulse once from external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1 of dedicated unit P900 "Type information" is
The data type is 14=external terminal board pulse output, and the data number is 1=external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1. The "count information" is fixed to 0 if unused, and the number of pulse outputs is 1 = one pulse output. As a result, one piece of data "0xE101" is generated as "gaming information".

(h) In the case of data type 15 When the data type is 15 = performance information status notification, "count information" is composed of unused (upper 4 bits) and a status flag (lower 4 bits). Unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at "0". The status flags (Bit 0 to 3) are: Bit 0 is the base (“0” = medium low base, “1” = medium high base), and Bit 1 is the jackpot (“0” = normal, “1” = jackpot) ), Bit 2 is high probability (“0” = low probability, “1” = high probability), and Bit 3 is unused. Note that this notification is given when the game status changes during a game, such as when the power is turned on and when changing or confirming settings and transitioning to a game-enabled state.

(Example 10) When the state changes to high base medium In "type information", the data type is 15 = performance information state notification, and the data number is fixed at 1. In the "count information", unused bits (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed at 0, and in the status flag (Bit 0 to 3), Bit 0 (base) is 1 = high base, and Bit 1 (big hit) is 0 = normal. , Bit 2 (medium high probability) is 0 = low probability, and Bit 3 is fixed at 0. As a result, one piece of data "0xF101" is generated as "gaming information".

<C21. Checksum> The data length of the “checksum” is 1 byte. This "checksum" is set to the value that is the result of adding up the "telegram length" to the "gaming information".

[D. Gaming Machine Information Response] Next, the “gaming machine information response” will be explained. The "gaming machine information response" is a message for responding from the frame control board P800 to the main control board P100 with the result of receiving the notification of gaming machine information.

The "gaming machine information response" consists of a total of 5 bytes of data, including, in order from the beginning, "telegram length," "command," "communication serial number," "gaming machine information reception result," and "checksum." Ru. In addition, in the "gaming machine information response", the "gaming machine information reception result" corresponds to the "data part" of the message.

<D1. Message length> The data length of “Message length” is 1 byte. This "telegram length" is set to "0x05", which is a value indicating the length (5 bytes) of the message.

<D2. Command> The data length of “command” is 1 byte. This "command" is set to "0x12", which is a value indicating the command code of the message (gaming machine information response).

<D3. Communication Serial Number> The data length of the “Communication Serial Number” is 1 byte. This "communication serial number" is set to a numerical value from "0 to 255 (0x00 to 0xFF)". Note that the communication serial number received in the "gaming machine information notification" is used as is for this "communication serial number".

<D4. Gaming machine information reception result> The data length of the “gaming machine information reception result” is 1 byte. This "gaming machine information reception result" is set to "0x00", which is information indicating that the "gaming machine information notification" has been received from the main control board P100.

<D5. Checksum> The data length of the “checksum” is 1 byte. This "checksum" is set to the value of the result of adding up the "telegram length" to the "gaming machine information reception result".

In addition, when transmitting the "gaming machine information receipt confirmation", the frame control board P800 responds with the communication serial number received in the "gaming machine information notification" as is. In other words, if the communication serial number of the gaming machine information notification received from the main control board P100 is 1, the frame control board P800 returns a gaming machine information response with the communication serial number 1 to the main control board P100. If the communication serial number of the gaming machine information notification received from is 2, a gaming machine information response with the communication serial number 2 is sent back to the main control board P100.

[6. Communication procedure between main control board and frame control board] Next, a communication procedure between main control board P100 and frame control board P800 will be described. FIG. 226 is a diagram showing a communication procedure between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 from power-on.

First, after power is turned on, the main control board P100 transmits a gaming machine installation information notification (communication serial number=0) to the frame control board P800.

The frame control board P800 transmits a gaming machine installation information response (communication serial number = 0) to the main control board P100 within 10 ms after receiving the gaming machine installation information notification (communication serial number = 0).

After normally receiving the gaming machine installation information response (the response from the frame control board P800 is within 10 ms), the main control board P100 enters the playable state, permits the firing of gaming balls, and sends gaming machine information notifications at a certain period ( The communication period is 108ms).

Specifically, the main control board P100 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 1) to the frame control board P800 108ms after transmitting the previous gaming machine installation information notification (communication serial number = 0). . Note that in this gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 1), since the frame control board P800 calculates performance information, gaming information related to the performance information status notification (data type = 15) is transmitted at the beginning.

The frame control board P800 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication serial number = 1) to the main control board P100 within 10 ms after receiving the gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 1).

Subsequently, the main control board P100 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 2) to the frame control board P800 108 ms after transmitting the previous gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 1).

The frame control board P800 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication serial number = 2) to the main control board P100 within 10 ms after receiving the gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 2).

Subsequently, the main control board P100 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 3) to the frame control board P800 108 ms after transmitting the previous gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 2).

The frame control board P800 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication serial number = 3) to the main control board P100 within 10 ms after receiving the gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 3).

From then on, the main control board P100 counts up the communication serial number at regular intervals (communication cycle 108ms) and sends gaming machine information notifications (communication serial number = 4, 5, 6, ...) to the frame control board P800. Send. On the other hand, the frame control board P800, within 10 ms after receiving the gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 4, 5, 6, . . . ), uses the same communication serial number as the received communication serial number, A gaming machine information response (communication serial number = 4, 5, 6, . . . ) is transmitted to the main control board P100.

Note that the startup time of the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 is 3 minutes at maximum. If the frame control board P800 cannot receive the gaming machine installation information notification within 3 minutes from activation, it notifies an error as a disconnection of the communication line. When the frame control board P800 receives the game machine installation information notification after the communication line is disconnected, it cancels the error notification.

In addition, if a setting change or setting confirmation operation is performed when the power is turned on, the main control board P100 will enter the setting change state after successfully receiving the gaming machine installation information response (the response from the frame control board P800 is within 10ms). (setting change mode) or setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), and transmits gaming machine information notifications at a communication cycle of 108 ms. In this gaming machine information notification, main control information 1, main control information 2, and gaming machine error state are set to "0", and only a flag corresponding to fraud detection state 1 is set and transmitted. When the main control board P100 enters the game ready state after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed, the main control board P100 allows the firing of game balls and transmits a game machine information notification. Note that the gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = n+1) that is sent first after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed is a performance information status notification (data type = 15) because the frame control board P800 calculates performance information. ) is transmitted first (notified before the buffered gaming information when the power is restored from power failure).

In addition, the main control board P100 does not receive a response message (gaming machine installation information response or gaming machine information response) from the frame control board P800 after notifying the message (gaming machine installation information notification or gaming machine information notification). If so, the message is retransmitted to the frame control board P800 (however, the communication serial number is counted up). If the main control board P100 fails to receive a response message from the frame control board P800 ten times in a row, it determines that the communication line is disconnected and issues an error notification. Note that after this communication line is disconnected, the power is turned on/off to recover from the communication line disconnection.

Furthermore, if the frame control board P800 cannot receive the next telegram for 1000ms after receiving the telegram (gaming machine installation information notification or gaming machine information notification) from the main control board P100, the communication line is disconnected. It is determined that this is the case and an error notification is executed. Note that after this communication line is disconnected, if the message from the main control board P100 is normally received, the error notification is canceled.

In addition, if the managed game machine PC is in the ball removal state (a state in which the game balls sealed in the managed game machine PC can be ejected outside the machine) when the power is turned on, the game machine installation information response (communication serial number = 0) In the data section (gaming machine installation information reception result), information (0x01) indicating that the ball is out is set. In that case, after receiving this gaming machine installation information response (communication serial number = 0), the main control board P100 allows firing and executes infinite loop processing (for example, when the normal game progresses) Prevent necessary processing (main control side timer interrupt processing, etc.) from being performed. Note that the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800 do not communicate after performing transmission and reception in the ball-extracted state. Further, in the "bulb removed state", the operation continues from the time the power is turned on until the power is turned off.

In the ninth embodiment, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board P100 includes a 4ms timer interrupt processing and a 108ms timer interrupt processing. The 4ms timer interrupt process is similar to the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 79) described in the second embodiment and the like. In the 108ms timer interrupt processing, processing such as generation and transmission of a communication message (gaming machine information communication) to the frame control board P800 is executed. Note that the 4ms timer interrupt processing is preferably set to have a higher interrupt priority than the 108ms timer interrupt processing. However, the interrupt priority may be set higher for the 108 ms timer interrupt process than for the 4 ms timer interrupt process. In addition, if an interrupt request for one of the 4ms timer interrupt processing and 108ms timer interrupt processing occurs while the other timer interrupt processing is being executed, wait until the execution of one of the timer interrupt processing is completed. The other interrupt processing may be executed.

As described above, according to the managed game machine PC of the ninth embodiment, it is possible to send and receive appropriate information between the main control board P100 and the frame control board P800, and the number of game balls and holdings can be changed without increasing the control burden. This has the effect that the number of pitches can be appropriately managed and that the game process can proceed smoothly.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and can be modified as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, the components described in the above embodiments and modifications may be combined as appropriate, or some of the components described in the above embodiments and modifications may be deleted or converted using well-known or commonly used techniques. These are also included within the scope of the present invention.

1 Slot machine 2 Front door 3a, 3b, 3c Reel 5 Housing 5a Left side plate 5b Right side plate 5c Top plate 5d Bottom plate 5e Back plate 55 Power supply device 60 Reel unit 111 Main control board 502 Sub control board 550 Power supply board 650 Back lamp unit 711 Reel tape 721 Reel wheel 731 Reel frame PM Pachinko game machine PC Management game machine PA Game area P
1 Outer frame P2 Front frame P5 Glass frame P15 Production button P20 Game board P51 1st starting opening P52 2nd starting opening P54 Big prize opening P70 Production display device P71 1st special symbol display device P72 2nd special symbol display device P100 Main control Board P200 Production control board P300 Image control board P400 Payout control board P500 Power supply board P800 Frame control board P851 Game ball number display device P852 Counting button P900 Dedicated unit

Claims (1)

Reels with multiple symbols on them,
Equipped with a back lamp unit,
The reel includes a reel frame and a band-shaped reel tape attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel frame,
The reel tape has a plurality of rectangular symbol display areas divided in the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the reel frame, and one symbol is drawn in each symbol display area,
The back lamp unit includes a back lamp house and a light source mounting board,
In the light source mounting board, a light source that irradiates light onto a pattern is mounted on a component mounting surface of the light source mounting board, and the component mounting surface faces the inner peripheral surface of the reel tape and is mounted on the back side of the back lamp house. It is installed in
The back lamp house is
an opening facing the inner peripheral surface of the reel tape that exposes the predetermined light source mounted on the component mounting surface of the light source mounting board; and at least a portion of the component mounting surface by an area other than the opening. a predetermined light source exposed surface portion provided with a concealing portion ;
at least a predetermined shade portion that collects light emitted from the light source onto the pattern display area ;
A predetermined partition portion is formed by the predetermined shade portion and a specific shade portion different from the predetermined shade portion,
At least one of the plurality of patterns is provided with a light-transmitting pattern in which a predetermined light-transmitting area that easily transmits the light from the light source is provided. A pattern in which a predetermined light transmission area is provided that easily transmits light is called a light transmission pattern) ,
It is possible to recognize that the color of the predetermined light source exposed surface portion visually recognized through the predetermined light transmitting area of the light transmitting pattern is different from the color of the predetermined light source exposed surface portion,
It is possible to recognize that the color of the predetermined light source exposed surface portion visually recognized through the predetermined light-transmitting area of the light-transmitting pattern is different from the color of the area where no pattern is drawn on the reel tape. can be,
A gaming machine characterized in that the thickness of the predetermined partition portion is narrower than the narrowest symbol interval among the symbol intervals of the plurality of symbols drawn on the reel tape.

Images